s *WfUNIVER% ^lOSANCflfj^ 
 
 12? C? "^ 
 
 I 
 
 ^OFCAIIFO^ ^OFCAUFOfc^ 
 '1 I- 1 
 
 
 
 <&UIBRARY0yr ^UIBRARYQr 
 
 u? 1 I/—' $ § 1 If"' S 
 =: I* 2- & I* 2 
 
 5 
 
 a 
 
 ^WttUNIVtltt/^ ^lUS-ANLtUju 
 
 u. 
 
 ^OFCAUFOftto ^OFCA11FO% ^EUNIVER% ^lOSANGEUj^ 
 
 i I 
 
 ^A«vaan# hwwwih^ 
 
 -n O 
 
 ^eimver% 
 
 %HDNVS0V^ 
 
 ^\\NN!VER% 
 
 ee 
 
 ^clOSANCnfJ^ 
 
 5 
 
 v, ^jlOSANCEU^ 
 
 ^/flUAINiHtf^ 
 
 ^M-UBRARYQr, 
 
 ^QFCAlIFOfy^ ^OFCAllFOfy^ 
 
 ^AavHan-^ 
 
 ^Aavaai># 
 
 ^•UBRARYQr 
 
 ^UIBRARYtf^ 
 
 
 S \WHMVER% 
 
 
 ^AOSMfj^ 
 
 %a3AINn3UV N 
 
 ^OKAIIFO/?^ 
 
 i 
 
 & 
 
 Y vf7.iHV)ifln.a^v 
 
 ^OFCAtlFO^ 
 
 & ■ 
 
 S \#«NIVER% 
 I" 
 
 ea 
 
 %713'WV.Wil^ 
 
 ^clOSMfj^ 
 
 s 

 
 ^lOSANGfltt> 
 
 / O u. 
 
 mm 
 
 ^WEINIVEW^ 
 
 <Til33NVSO# 
 
 
 ^UNIVtRi/A 
 
 v^lOSANC«% 
 
 ^OFCMIF<% 
 
 .^f-WJMMfc. 
 
 # ^Aavaani^ <ttwsm^ 
 
 
 
 %baimj^ 
 
 ^UIBRARYfc. 
 § 1 li- 
 
 ,o^ ^ojiivjjo^ %udnvso# ^KBAiNn-avR?" %miiv>jo^ 
 
 ^OFCAUFO^ 
 
 *&A«vaan-# 
 
 / £ 
 
 # %BAINfl4V\^ 
 % avIOSANCEUa> 
 
 ^•UBRARYO^ 
 
 ^M-UBRARY^ 
 
 %oJnvDjo^ 
 
 ^OF-CAllFOfy* ^Of CALIF(% 
 
 
 9 
 
 %»$0l^ 
 
 ^EUN!\e% 
 
 <toYS0V^ 
 
 ^ «#UBRARY<> 
 
 i, 
 
 < 
 
 m 
 so 
 .S3 
 
 I 5 
 .id? 
 
 ^OFCAUFOJ?^ 
 
 
 JO^ ^OJIIWJO^ *%1»S0V^ 
 
 ^V\EUN1VH% 
 
 jftiuwuan.i&r 
 
 ■^Pjiinuw.cmJ^v 
 
 ^mmm^ 
 
 %KamHiF 
 
 i-- 
 
 
 , ^■UBRARYa?. 
 
 3 1 ir" £ 
 
 ^OfCALIFOJ!^ 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 v jfo.iiwii<iiil&'
 
 AN 
 
 ESSAY 
 
 ON THE 
 
 DIFFERENT NATURE 
 
 op 
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY,
 
 AN 
 
 ESSAY 
 
 ON THE DIFFERENT NATURE 
 
 OF 
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY, 
 
 WITH THEIR USE AND APPLICATION 
 
 IN THE 
 
 ENGLISH, LATIN, AND GREEK LANGUAGES: 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 Remarks on the Metre of the English ; on the Origin and holism of the Roman ; on the 
 
 General History of the Greek; with an Account of its Ancient Tones, and a 
 
 Defence of their present Accentual Marks. 
 
 WITH SOME ADDITIONS FROM THE PAPERS OF 
 DR. TAYLOR AND MR. MARKLAND. 
 
 TO WHICH IS SUBJOINED, 
 
 THE GREEK ELEGIAC POEM OF M. MUSURUS, 
 
 ADDRESSED TO LEO X. 
 WITH A LATIN VERSION AND NOTES. 
 
 By JOHN FOSTER, M. A. 
 
 JLat-e Fellow of King's College, Cambridge. 
 
 THE THIRD EDITION, CORRECTED AND MUCH ENLARGED, 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 Wx* 6r/g fttoo Mmttetiom 
 
 Against pronouncing the Greek Language according to Accents. 
 
 WITH A REPLY TO Dr. G.'s SECOND DISSERTATION 
 IN ANSWER TO THE ESSAY. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 PRINTED BY J. F. DOVE, ST. JOHN'S SQUARE, 
 Fi)R RICHARD PKIESTLEY, 143, HIGH HOLBORN. 
 
 1820.
 
 TO 
 THE RIGHT HONOURABLE 
 
 JAMES GRENVILLE, 
 
 one of bis majesty's most honourable 
 privy-council, 
 
 WHOSE KNOWLEDGE, AND REGARD FOR 
 ANCIENT LITERATURE, 
 INDUCE HIM TO FAVOUR EVERY ATTEMPT 
 TO ILLUSTRATE ANY PART OF IT; 
 
 THIS ESSAY, 
 
 UNDERTAKEN WITH HIS ENCOURAGEMENT, 
 
 IS, WITH THE UTMOST RESPECT, 
 
 INSCRIBED BY 
 
 HIS MUCH OBLIGED, 
 
 AND MOST OBEDIENT SERVANT, 
 
 J. FOSTER.
 
 PREFACE 
 
 139 
 
 TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 IN order to illustrate in a clearer manner some incidental 
 points, which are connected with my main question, a few 
 corrections and many additions have, since the first pub- 
 lication of this Essay, appeared necessary. Of this kind 
 the reader will find, in the following pages, some farther 
 observations on the harmony and verse of our own lan- 
 guage ; on certain peculiarities in the origination of the 
 Roman; and on the long continued purity of the Greek. 
 Particularly the ratio of the falling times in the doctrine 
 of accents, as they differ in the Roman and Greek lan- 
 guages, and the distinction between the accentual and 
 metrical arsis, the confusion of which hath frequently 
 perplexed this subject, and which I did not sufficiently 
 point out, are here more accurately stated. Many posi- 
 tive proofs of the authenticity of our present Greek ac- 
 centuation, from the ancient grammarians, are likewise 
 now added : which, although more easily produced than 
 those general proofs of presumption and inference before 
 alleged, and in themselves, and their own nature, less 
 cogent (because they are often confined to single words, 
 whereas the general proofs of induction extend to the 
 system of a whole language), are yet to some readers 
 more persuasive, and are therefore not here omitted. 
 My particular acknowledgments are on this occasion
 
 Vlll PREFACE. 
 
 due to Dr. Taylor and Mr. Markland, for what they have 
 kindly communicated to me for my use in this edition : 
 to the former, for directing me to some passages in an- 
 cient authors relating to my question, which had not 
 occurred to me in the course of my own reading ; to the 
 latter, for confirming my opinion by the authority of his 
 own general sentiments on the same subject, and for his 
 correction and illustration of several passages in the 
 Elegy of Musurus : to both, for their favourable conde- 
 scension in shewing an attention to my imperfect endea- 
 vours towards explaining a part of those languages of 
 which they are the great and perfect masters.
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 ON THE 
 
 HISTORY AND STATE OF THE CONTROVERSY CON- 
 CERNING THE GREEK ACCENTUAL MARKS. 
 
 I AM not able to discover that the faithfulness and pro- 
 priety of the Greek accentual marks was ever much 
 doubted before the time of Isaac Vossius. The dispute 
 between Mr. Cheke, the famous Greek professor of Cam- 
 bridge, and his opponents, about the middle of the six- 
 teenth century, turned upon examining and determining 
 the sound of the Greek letters, taken singly ; not on the 
 sound of syllables, considered relatively* to each other 
 in their combined modulation, which is the subject be- 
 fore us at present, and very distinct therefore from that 
 which was then discussed with so much spirit, genius, 
 and learning, by Bishop Gardiner and Mr. Cheke. Ac- 
 cents had no share in this dispute. That laborious and 
 ingenious reformer of the Greek pronunciation left the 
 marks as he found them, looking on them as the genuine 
 signs of the ancient tones, and as authentic remains of 
 antiquity. But about ninety years ago an opinion was 
 
 * Thus Lipsius distinguishes be- frustra elementa mihi recte efferas, nisi 
 
 tween pronuntiatio elementaris and ac- ex iis cfficere possis junctim voces. At 
 
 ctntualis (de rect. pronunt. ling. lect. has non potes, sine justo legitimoque ac- 
 
 c. 4.) Elementaris ilia qui sitffiriat? — csntu. c. 17.
 
 X INTRODUCTION. 
 
 started by the younger # Vossius, among others equally 
 whimsical, in his book de cantu Poematum et viribus 
 Rhythmi, concerning the impropriety and barbarism of 
 the marks. This hypothesis, though hastily and incon- 
 siderately formed, yet coming from a man of genius, 
 and falling in with the prejudices of many northern ears, 
 was favourably received by several of the learned, par- 
 ticularly in Holland andf Germany. And being further 
 explained, and enforced in a particular treatise, a few 
 years after, by £ Henr. Christianus Henninius, it hath 
 since that time much prevailed in other parts of Eu- 
 rope : and produced lately two other treatises, writ- 
 ten with the same view, the one by Mirtisbus Sarpedo- 
 nius, published at Rome in 1750, the other a few years 
 
 * He was not a man from -whom any 
 thing accurate was to be expected, 
 novelty being his great object, as truth 
 was liis father Gerard's. His cliarac- 
 is well drawn by Dr. Thirlby in Dedi- 
 cat. ad Just. Martyr : Erant in Vossio 
 mullte liter e , in genium excellens, judi- 
 cium etium, si non maximum, at tantum 
 quantum ei satis superquefuit : qui, nisi 
 omnia me fallunt, quid in quavis re ve- 
 rum essel, leviter curavit perspicere. Sa- 
 tis habuit nova, devia, mirabilia, in cri- 
 tica,in phihsophia, in theologia quusrere 
 et excogilare: vera anne falsa essent, id 
 vero aliis exquirendum reliquit, qui sua 
 islhuc interesse existimarenl. 
 
 t " Id quoque Henninius el Major 
 efFecerunt, ut mulli eruditorum, ma- 
 xime in Saxonia inferiore, accentus in 
 scriplis suis omiltant.'' Joh. Simon in 
 Introduct. Grammatico-Critica in Ling. 
 Grircam, sect. ii. 22. 
 
 + He published it under the title of 
 'EXXukd-joccc 'Op&a)Ssj. Traject. ad Rhen. 
 Ann. 1684. A treatise on the same 
 subject was written in support of Hen- 
 ninius' doctrine by Job. Dan. Major, 
 Professor Kilouiensis, in Ephtola de 
 riummis Grace inscriptis, &c. An- 
 
 other defence of Henninius was drawn 
 up by C G. Hoffmannus in Comment. 
 de lingua Graca modulatione sine ac- 
 centibus. But the arguments of these 
 two authorsbeing drawn from the omis- 
 sion of accentual marks on coins, and 
 other inscribed monuments of anti- 
 quity, amount to nothing. It is well 
 known that, for several centuries, 
 none but capital letters were used in 
 public monuments and records, and 
 MSS.in general: and with capitals these 
 marks could not well be joined. But 
 even if they could, those who dispute 
 the existence of old accents from the 
 non-appearance of their marks, may, 
 with as good reason, question the exis- 
 tence of ancient quanlity ; for the 
 marks of that do not appear either in 
 old or modern writings. Some other 
 authors of inferior note and conse- 
 quence have written against our ac- 
 cents : Drusius, de recta lectione lin- 
 gua S. c. 4. Job. Heyliusiu Dissert, de 
 Accentibus Gritc. Herm. Hardtius in 
 Studioso Graco. p. 146, seq. Hedericus 
 in Manuduct. ad scient. Pliilolog. p. 
 129.
 
 INTRODUCTION. XI 
 
 after by Dr. G. at London ; who seems to think he hath 
 put the finishing stroke to the project of Vossius, and 
 completed the judicious work of subverting the Greek 
 marks of accentuation. 
 
 This opinion appears to spread daily, and to have 
 already operated so far, as to induce the present edi- 
 tors of Greek in a great University to join openly in 
 this declaration against the marks, by discarding them 
 entirely from some of their printed copies. This inno- 
 vation in the manner of printing Greek, lately seen in 
 some Oxford * editions, and expected in others, led 
 me to consider with myself the reasons of this alter- 
 ation. The novelty of the thing, though agreeable to 
 my own sentiments at that time, yet engaged my par- 
 ticular notice, and drew me insensibly to examine 
 with more care, than I had ever done before, the na- 
 ture and use of these marks, and the motives for this 
 suppression of them; not without some hopes, that 
 such an inquiry, if conducted with caution and diligence, 
 might perhaps in the end repay the trouble of it, by 
 affording me the satisfaction of finding out those rea- 
 sons, which determined the University editors to this new 
 method ; and of confirming likewise my own pre-con- 
 ceived opinion concerning them, as well by my own 
 rational conviction, as by the authority of an academical 
 press. With this view, I began to consider with all the 
 accuracy and attention of which I was capable, the sub- 
 ject of accent and quantity ; examining first their general 
 nature, and then their particular use in the pronunciation 
 of those languages with which I was most acquainted. 
 This I did, with many old prejudices, on my first en- 
 
 * It has been said that these edi- And in that book the marks of accent 
 
 tions are to be considered as coming are omitted. Whether, therefore, there 
 
 from private persons, not from the Uni- was any intention, or not, of recom- 
 
 versity. However this may be, it is mending such an omission, it does 
 
 certain that a book of verses, pub- and will appear to every indifferent 
 
 lished and presented to his Majesty by stranger, that it is at least counte- 
 
 the University as a body, must be un- nanced by this mode of printing used 
 
 derstood as theirs in a peculiar sense. by them on so public an occasion.
 
 Xti INTRODUCTION, 
 
 gaging in the inquiry against accent and its marks, as 
 inconsistent with genuine quantity, which undoubtedly 
 is to be duly observed ;* and which many persons have 
 been taught to consider as the only thing to be regarded 
 in the pronunciation of Greek and Latin. But notwith- 
 standing these prepossessions, and some secret wishes 
 that I might upon examination find my old notions to be 
 right ; the result of my research was very different from 
 what I expected, and gave a determination to my opinion 
 contrary to my former sentiments, and even to my hopes; 
 leaving me to the disagreeable conviction of having been 
 for several years in a mistake, and having often too in- 
 considerately asserted, upon weak and treacherous au- 
 thority, what I now find to be erroneous. 
 
 It soon appeared to me, on reading what some others 
 had written on this subject, that it had been much 
 puzzled, as many other points have in like manner been, 
 by the use of undefined terms in an indeterminate vague 
 sense. The word accent I have found used by the same 
 writer in four very wide and different senses ; expressing 
 sometimes elevation, sometimes prolongation of sound, 
 sometimes a stress of voice compounded of the other 
 two, and sometimes the artificial accentual mark. In 
 this case, whether several distinct ideas are confounded 
 in the writer's mind, or whether he only uses the same 
 word as applicable to them all, though distinct; the 
 consequence is the same to the reader, who is often led 
 by this into great perplexity. This ambiguity of terms 
 I determined carefully to guard against, as well on ac- 
 count of convenience to myself in the course of my in- 
 quiry, as of perspicuity to the reader. 
 
 As the true nature of the acute accent (which by way 
 
 * Some writers, who liave occasion- elusive of accents : which are still con- 
 ally mentioned the Greek accents, as tinned in all the printed copies used in 
 Mr. Dawes, Mr, Gilbert West, and that school. The rules likewise for 
 others, have commended the Eton me- accenting are retained in the grammars, 
 thod of teaching Greek, for prescribing and the observation of them always re- 
 tlie strictest regard to quautity/ which commended, 
 is indeed true, but not in a manner ex-
 
 INTRODUCTION. Xlll 
 
 of eminence is often called the accent) had never, that I 
 could find, in this controversy been satisfactorily stated, 
 it seemed a proper and necessary part of this disquisi- 
 tion to explain its true power. Without such an expla- 
 nation, how its consistency or inconsistency with quan- 
 tity could ever be determined, I cannot see. For how 
 can the agreement or disagreement of any two things be 
 ascertained, while one of them is unknown ? And yet 
 in this dispute the nature and essence of the acute seems 
 to have been not only unknown, but entirely overlooked 
 and disregarded. The want of this explication makes 
 Mr. Wetstein's defence of the Greek accents so defec- 
 tive.* This person, who was professor of Greek at 
 Basil, published a small dissertation, in which, with 
 much learning and good reasoning, as far as his argu- 
 ment went, he answered Henninius. But it could not 
 be in general satisfactory, as it clears not any difficulty 
 with which the Greek accent to many northern readers 
 seems to be embarrassed. In the question he + argues 
 from books only ; he appeals not to sense, nor endea- 
 vours to reconcile the Greek acute, according to its 
 position in our modern copies, to the nature of human 
 sound, depending as it does on our organs of speech 
 and hearing. And till the way could be opened for the 
 admission of the acute on the general principles of 
 sound, the futile objections of Henninius were likely 
 to be more forcible with most of his readers, than 
 the severest reasoning of Mr. Wetstein, built on the 
 testimony of authors. Henninius had the advantage 
 
 * His, however, is far better than ten or promised by liiiu in answer to 
 
 that of Franc. Woergerus in Biblioth. Henninius : but of this I can gain no 
 
 Lubec. vol. vii. p. 414. seq. who wrote intelligence. 
 
 chiefly in answer to Major : or that of t Mr. Wetstein had not a clear idea 
 
 Wedelius in Exercit. Medico-Philolog. of accent, as distinct from quantity. In 
 
 Cent. II. Dec. 2. or of Stockius in many parts of his dissertation he con- 
 
 Literatore Gr&co, p. 21. The anony- founds lliem (p. 66, &c.) and puzzles, 
 
 mous author of a short piece on this himself exceedingly by referring ac- 
 
 sabject in " the present State of the cent to metre. This involves him in 
 
 Republicof Letters, Ann.1728." speaks great difficulties, p. 131, 132, Sfcj 
 of a treatise of Jos. Barnes, either writ-
 
 XIV INTRODUCTION. 
 
 of addressing his arguments to the gross sense and ver- 
 nacular practice of his followers ; who, by a partial 
 way of thinking (into which even scholars are too apt to 
 fall), judged of all possible pronunciation by their own, 
 and had no idea of the harmonious flexibility of a Gre- 
 cian voice, while they referred all vocal utterance to the 
 rigid and untuneable nature of their own. 
 
 Some others, who have written on this subject, give 
 us no opinion whatever of their own concerning the 
 acute. They argue often, as if they thought it partook 
 of the nature of a long quantity, and yet are ashamed to 
 own it. Dr. G. I must acknowledge, does speak out, 
 and by the account he gives of it, plainly shews that he 
 looks or* its real power as little differing from that of 
 a long time. To whom therefore an answer is more 
 readily and easily given. 
 
 Quinctilian very justly observes, " that mere litera- 
 ture without a knowledge of sounds will not enable a 
 man to treat properly of metre and rhythm."* And ac- 
 cordingly our present subject, which turns on the qua- 
 lity and measures of sounds, doth certainly as much fall 
 under the judgment of sense, as of mere erudition. 
 But although it is undoubtedly in its nature scientific 
 as well as literary, it has hitherto been little considered 
 as such. Many persons in discussing it, talk very 
 learnedly of the late introduction of accents (by which 
 can be meant only the accentual marks), settle the dates 
 of the oldest manuscripts, observe in some of them the 
 omission of these marks, and then call them the barba- 
 
 * "Turn nee citra Musiceu Gramma- or explication of those terms, which 
 
 tice potest esse perfecta, cum ei tie grammarians have borrowed from them 
 
 rhythmis raetrisque dicendum sit." lib. and used on this subject. And the ex- 
 
 i. c. 4. I wish 1 had that knowledge plauation of those terms I found there 
 
 of music, which Quinctilian seems here so distinct and clear, that I could have 
 
 to require. I have however without it no doubt of the true meaning of f8oy- 
 
 ilone every thing that was in my power, yog, to'wi, tuctij, yjo\og, tTnrao-i;, avE<ric, 
 
 towards securing myself from error in Ittiteivo^oi, avt»^i, l%i)Q, ofurifj, (Jajirrsj, 
 
 this question, by drawing from the SixJTn/xa., &.c. 
 ancient writers on music a definition
 
 INTRODUCTION. XV 
 
 rous characters of an ignorant and illiterate age ; by a 
 blunder of their own mistaking the power and true use 
 of these signs, and then in a decisive manner pronounc- 
 ing them repugnant to metre, rhythm, and all true har- 
 mony. And all this they conclude without attending in 
 the least to the deductions of sense and reason, or con- 
 sidering that, as vocal sounds are formed by organs of 
 speech which are essential and immutable parts of our 
 nature, they must have been in all ages substantially and 
 formally the same, though variously modified in their 
 application : and that if height and length are different 
 and distinct qualities of human sound at present, they 
 must have been so in the time of Homer or Aristotle. 
 I have therefore drawn an argument from the nature of 
 speech itself, in proof of the existence of ancient tones 
 distinct from quantity. 
 
 Such an argument, deduced from the nature and ne- 
 cessity of the human voice itself, is not likely (I am well 
 aware), to have much weight with many of my oppo- 
 nents, who, without a just discernment of ear, have 
 knowledge enough of Greek to understand its common 
 quantity and metre, and, under the influence of many 
 old prejudices, will listen to nothing in this case, but to 
 testimonies of antiquity, and learned authority. I have 
 therefore not only considered accent as founded in na- 
 ture, but proceeded to argue with them on their own 
 principles. The decision then of the question with them 
 turns merely on matter of fact ; first, " whether the an- 
 cients did, in their general pronunciation, regularly use 
 certain tones on certain syllables, very distinct from, 
 though consistent with, quantity" (for quantity we are 
 sure they did strictly observe), and then " whether the 
 accentual virgulce, as they are now settled in Greek books, 
 do faithfully mark those tones : whether the sounds, of 
 which they are the signs, were given to those syllables, 
 over which we now see the signs placed." 
 
 In regard to the former of these points, it being con- 
 sidered as a fact of antiquity, and the ancients them- 
 selves being therefore the proper evidence of it, I care-
 
 XVI INTRODUCTION. 
 
 fully consulted those authors, who are acknowledged to 
 be men of the greatest sagacity and accuracy in philo- 
 logical subjects ; I mean Dionysius of Halicarnassus 
 among the Greeks, and Quinctilian among the Romans. 
 From them I soon learned, that their countrymen indis- 
 putably used regular tones or accents in ordinary pro- 
 nunciation, notwithstanding it has often been affirmed, 
 they were only of a musical nature. In Dionysius there 
 occurred not only express accounts of high and low 
 tones regularly assigned to certain syllables ; but, what 
 is more, the very degree of elevation and depression, to 
 which tones were carried in ordinary and oratorical 
 speaking, most exactly ascertained. 
 
 As to the second point, concerning the virgula ; as 
 they are acknowledged not to have been known to the 
 ancients, till two hundred years before Christ, the only 
 lights that could in this case be expected from them, 
 were some inferences to be collected from their accounts 
 of tones in general, by which we might on presumption 
 judge of the conformity or disagreement of the present 
 marks with them. And here much could not be gathered 
 from Dionysius, though he lived after the introduction 
 of the marks, except the assurance, that some passages 
 frequently cited from him to disprove their propriety, 
 had been either misunderstood, or wilfully misrepre- 
 sented, and did in effect conclude nothing against the 
 ancient tones themselves, or the faithfulness of their 
 present signs and characters, but on the other hand 
 strongly asserted the former, and much favoured the lat- 
 ter. But from Quinctilian I received much greater in- 
 formation, and indeed the fullest satisfaction: who, by 
 his very explicit account of the Roman accents ; of the 
 conformity of his own language with a particular dia- 
 lect of the Greeks ; of the general difference which sub- 
 sisted between the Latin tones, and those of the other 
 Greeks, in point of regularity and uniformity ; easily 
 suggested to me such deductions, as tended greatly (so 
 far as presumptive proof can go) to vindicate our pre- 
 sent system of accentual marks, and convince me of the
 
 INTRODUCTION. XVII 
 
 errors of many, who have carelessly treated this subject, 
 not excepting * Vossius himself. It moreover appeared, 
 on farther inquiry, that what could be proved by in- 
 ference from Quinctilian, was confirmed in several in- 
 stances by the positive assertions of the oldest and best 
 Greek grammarians ; those very writers, to whose au- 
 thority in this point an appeal is frequently made by my 
 opponents themselves. 
 
 I am not ignorant, that to many persons this subject 
 will appear more trifling than curious, and rather to ad- 
 mit than deserve a dispute. But if the greatest philo- 
 sopher of Greece, and orator and statesman of Rome, 
 thought a nice examination of syllabic numbers not 
 unworthy their peculiar attention ; if Messala f could 
 condescend to write a whole book on the powers of sin- 
 gle letters ; if Juba % could write on metre, and even 
 J. Caesar publish a treatise de Analogia ; if the great 
 Bishop of Winchester, Stephen Gardiner, could, con- 
 sistently with his high character and dignity, engage in 
 a like controversy with an University professor ; a sub- 
 ject of this kind cannot certainly be considered as be- 
 neath the regard of any ordinary scholar, who ought 
 not to look upon any thing connected with literature as 
 foreign to his own studies; especially of one, whose 
 profession and situation in a place of public instruction 
 makes some degree of accuracy, in any point relating to 
 the purity of the learned languages, at least excusable, 
 if not requisite. " Sed haec quoque vereor ne modum 
 tarn parvae quaestionis excesserint. Non vero obstant 
 hne disciplinae per illas euntibus, sed circa illas haeren- 
 tibus." 
 
 * That part of his book, which re- f Quinct. lib. i. c. 7. 
 
 lates to the Greek accents, is from |>. J His eighth book is cited by Pris 
 
 15 to p. 31. A large extract from cian, p. 1322. and his fourth by Rufi- 
 
 thence is published by Henninius, at nus, p. 2711. In quoting, for the fu- 
 
 the end of his own 'EXA>wy/i*i? 'o^&. ture, the old Latin grammarians, I shall 
 
 And to the pages of it, as printed there, refer, as I do here, to that edition of 
 
 I shall refer, whenever I shall have them which Putschius gave, 
 occasion to cite Vossius. ,
 
 XVlii INTRODUCTION. 
 
 But whatever judgment the public may form of these 
 my humble labours, I cannot lose the secret satisfaction 
 of having honestly endeavoured, in opposition to a 
 spreading opinion, to vindicate from the imputation of 
 ignorance, absurdity, and barbarism, the characters of 
 those learned Greeks of the lower empire, to whom Eu- 
 rope is greatly indebted for much of that sound know- 
 ledge it now has : whose exile and misfortunes are to be 
 pitied, whose abilities and genius to be honoured, whose 
 industry to be respected, whose labours to be thankfully 
 received, and of whom every true lover of Greek learn- 
 ing should with pleasure and gratitude acknowledge 
 himself a follower, and admirer. 
 
 E tenebris tantis tarn clarum extollere lumen 
 Qui primi potuistis, et hide affulgere terra, 
 Ismario profugas ducentes More Musas, 
 Vos sequor, o Graia gentis decora, inque verendis 
 Fixa pedum pono pressis vestigia signis. 
 
 Modern scholars are certainly very glad to enjoy the 
 benefit of the labours of these great men, though at the 
 same time they depreciate and vilify their characters : 
 they themselves disturbing and corrupting the stream of 
 Greek literature, and then imputing this foulness to that 
 channel, through which it continued to flow with its ori- 
 ginal purity. 
 
 On this head I beg leave of that right honourable and 
 learned person, under the protection of whose name 
 this Essay hath ventured publicly to contradict many 
 received opinions, to transcribe a sensible and spirited 
 passage from a letter, with which he honoured me on the 
 subject : — " I am a great admirer of that contrivance of 
 accentuation ; and look upon it as a remarkable inven- 
 tion, framed by the most ingenious people that ever ap- 
 peared in the world, for adorning their language to the 
 utmost degree of refinement ; and for settling, as far as 
 human wit and wisdom can fix, a lasting standard of 
 tone for pronouncing every word, and almost every syl-
 
 INTRODUCTION. xix 
 
 lable in it. I am a friend to the cause, and think an 
 advocate wanting; since that, which calls itself the 
 learned world, is much inclined to blot out this ancient 
 character from the book of learning, and had rather lose 
 it entirely, than be at the pains of understanding it at 
 all. For my part, I am for preserving what we have 
 got ; and do not think the inventive talents are so re- 
 dundant at present, as to render the diminution of the 
 present stock of human knowledge a matter of indif- 
 ference." 
 
 The reader is indebted to my good friend Dr. Barnard 
 for a very judicious remark in the 101st page of this 
 treatise, concerning the improbability of Aristophanes' 
 marks referring to quantity ; which he with his usual 
 quickness of discernment readily suggested to me, when 
 I was opening to him my thoughts on the historical part 
 of this subject. 
 
 On the whole ; if I have detected a single error, have 
 unravelled a single perplexity, and thrown the least 
 light on a subject, that has been hitherto much obscured, 
 I cannot think my pains misemployed. For I have no 
 reason to set such a value on my labour, as not to think 
 it amply repaid, if it be so successful as to illustrate any 
 one truth. " Nee obsit, quod sit in tenui labor : neque 
 enim nisi ex minimis fiunt magna. Et ex judicii con- 
 suetudine in rebus minutis adhibita, pendet ssepissime 
 etiam in maximis vera atque accurata scientia." 
 
 Eton, Dec. 1761.
 
 CONTEN T S 
 
 OF THE 
 
 ESSAY ON ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 On accent and quantity in general, their difference 
 marked, their natural dependence on each other, their 
 necessary connexion and consistency. Emphasis, spirit, 
 or aspiration, distinguished from accent. Oratorical 
 accent different from syllabic ----- Page 1 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 On the quantity of the English language. The nature 
 of a long time. The long and short times of the Greeks 
 and Romans : the case of doubtful vowels. The coin- 
 cidence of the acute tone and long time on the same 
 syllables in our language. On what foundation and 
 authority quantity is established - - - - - p. 14 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 The metre of the English language. The kinds of it. 
 Why no hexameters. Mere metre not sufficient to 
 constitute good verse. In what the pronunciation of 
 the English, Scotch, Welch, and Irish, differs - p 29 
 
 CHAP. IV 
 
 On the accent of the Romans. The agreement of the 
 Latin accent and dialect with the JEolic. Some ac-
 
 Xxii I CONTENTS OF ESSAY. 
 
 count of the JEolism of the Roman language . Homers 
 JEolism. An argument drawn from thence in favour 
 of our present Greek accentuation. The difference 
 between the Roman apex and accentual mark. On 
 the JEolic letter in the ancient Greek and Roman al- 
 phabets ------ ^ ------- p. 41 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 On the accent of the old Greeks. Some passages of Dio- 
 nysius of Halicarnassus and Plutarch considered. The 
 tones as well as times regarded by the ancients in their 
 compositions. Importance of accent to harmony. A 
 brief account of those ancient Greek grammarians who 
 have left remarks on accent - -----p. 79 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 On the introduction, use, and accidental abuse of the 
 Greek accentual marks. Vindication of the charac- 
 ter of Aristophanes Byzantinus. Accentual metre of 
 Tzetzes. Character of the learned Greeks of the lower 
 empire : and of some of their scholars. A review of 
 the history of the Greek language to the taking of 
 Constantinople ----------p. 97 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 The popular objection considered against the present ac- 
 centual marks, on account of their inconsistency with 
 true quantity. Some errors of Dr. G. noted. The true 
 nature of the acute tone stated and explained - p. 139 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 The hypothesis of Isaac Vossius, Henninius, Sarpedonius, 
 and others, erroneous. The Greek accent different in 
 its position from the Roman. Dr. Bentleys and Scali- 
 gers remarks on the Lathi accent , Difference between 
 lite, accent iw I and mcivieaT arsis - - - p.. 140
 
 CONTENTS OF ESSAY. XX111 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Objections to the irregularity of the present Greek accents 
 considered, and answered. An argument drawn from 
 it in their favour. The doctrine of enclitics and atonies 
 vindicated. The position of the present marks con- 
 formable to the ancient accounts of the tones themselves. 
 The variation of accent in some ivords at different times 
 considered. Accent dependent commonly on the quan- 
 tity of subsequent syllables. The consistency of the 
 acute with a short time demonstrated. The general 
 doctrine of human sounds, from the old Greek writers 
 on music. The three general cases of exception to our 
 present marks considered -------p. 168 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 How far ancient quantity is observed by those who dis- 
 regard the accentual marks ------ p. 191 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 That there are no sufficient reasons yet assigned for re- 
 jecting the present system of accentual marks. An ex- 
 postulation with modern editors on suppressing them, 
 
 p. 198 
 
 Remarks of Mr. Mar kland on our present Greek accen- 
 tuation: on the accented Greek inscription lately 
 found at Herculaneum. Remarks of Dr. Taylor on 
 the same p. 206
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 FIRST DISSERTATION. 
 
 Page 
 
 Introduction - 279 
 
 The original use of accents was musical - - - - ib. 
 
 The most ancient manuscripts and inscriptions have 
 no accents ------------- ib. 
 
 The modern system of accents is arbitrary and un- 
 certain -------------- 281 
 
 Contrary to analogy, reason, and quantity - - - 290 
 Contradictory to itself --------- 296 
 
 A due regard cannot be had at the same time to 
 
 quantity and accents, as they are now placed - - 304 
 Accents, though placed, are not read in poetry - - 30b' 
 Great accuracy of the ancients as to the different 
 length and shortness of syllables ------ 307 
 
 Accents inconsistent with the rhythm arising from 
 quantity ------------- 308 
 
 What rhythm is ------------ 310 
 
 Two uses of accents ---------- 3 LI 
 
 This no argument for a general use of accents - -313 
 Disadvantages of accents --------314 
 
 Accents are of less use in the Greek language, to lead 
 
 us to the knowledge of quantity, than in any other 315 
 The placing of accents not arbitrary, when a lan- 
 guage is founded in a natural quantity - - - ib. 
 Men are led to accent their ivords partly by the con- 
 stitution of their language, and partly by their 
 own temper ------------ $l(>
 
 CONTENTS OF DISSERT. I, XXV 
 
 Page 
 
 Barbarity of accents in the modern Greek language 317 
 The reason why words of the same form were ac- 
 cented differently ---------- 318 
 
 Hence the present manner of accenting probably 
 
 arose _--- 319 
 
 Origin of accents more particularly deduced - - 320 
 Accents were introduced to preserve the ancient pro- 
 nunciation ------------- 322 
 
 An argument to prove the antiquity of accents from 
 Demosthenes not conclusive ------- 324 
 
 What Suidas seemeth to say on this subject - - - 327 
 Corrupt manner of accenting probacy occasioned 
 by Alexanders expedition into Asia ----- 328 
 
 System of accents mot formed at once - - - - 332 
 
 Cases in which thesame word was accented differently 333 
 Conclusion ------------- 334
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 
 
 Page 
 
 Design of the former Dissertation, and of this- - - 345 
 
 Impropriety of the Grct>k accents not an opinion 
 started by Is. Vossius -_--___-- 346 
 
 A passage of Dionysius Halicamassensis considered 349 
 
 Another passage of Dionysius considered - - - - 352 
 
 A third passage of Dionysius considered, and an 
 emendation of it offered --------- 354 
 
 A passage of Quinctilian considered, and shewn not 
 to answer Mr. Foster's purpose ------ 357 
 
 An essential difference between vocal utterance and 
 singing ------------- - 360 
 
 A farther reason arising hence, why the above-men- 
 tioned second passage of Dionysius cannot be taken 
 in Mr. Foster's sense ---------- 361 
 
 The ear is the proper judge of quantity, and of the 
 power and force of accents -------- 362 
 
 Many degrees of quantity besides short and long - ib. 
 
 A paradigm, exhibiting a progression of quantity 
 from the shortest to the longest syllable - - - - 363 
 
 First observation upon it --------- ib. 
 
 Second observation ----------- ib. 
 
 Third observation ----------- 364 
 
 Fourth observation ----------- 365 
 
 The ancient Greek grammarians, from whom we 
 have received the doctrine of accents, did not 
 think that the acute accent was a mere elevation of 
 the voice ------------- ib.
 
 CONTENTS OP DISSERT. II. XXV11 
 
 Page 
 
 The sense in which I had taken a passage ofDiony- 
 sius Thrax, shewn to be agreeable to what those 
 grammarians taught ---------- 368 
 
 The hard or rough breathing, as well as the acute 
 accent, has the power of making a short syllable 
 long --------------- 370 
 
 In pursuance of this doctrine, some Latin poets, when 
 they made use of Greek words, followed a quantity 
 which was directed by the Greek accents, and not 
 by the nature of the syllables ------- 371 
 
 Mr. Foster, in calling this an abuse, does, in reality, 
 say nothing against those who are against pro- 
 nouncing the Greek language according to accents 373 
 
 A true state of the debate between those who are 
 against pronouncing the Greek language accord- 
 ing to accents, and those who are for it. Wlience 
 it follows, that, so far as the argument of the 
 former is intended to go, there is no difference be- 
 tween them and Mr. Foster- ------- ib. 
 
 Mr. Foster's argument founded upon the acute accent 
 taken in a sense different from that in which it was 
 taken by those whom he opposes. His description 
 of the accent which he proposes considered, and 
 shewn to be very obscure, if not contradictory or 
 unintelligible ----------- -^375 
 
 Unhandsome expressions made use of by Mr. Foster 
 and other disputants ---------- 377 
 
 Grammatical disquisitions not trivial or trifling- - 378 
 
 Conclusion -------- 379
 
 Gaudentii Philosopb. in 'App.oviKy daayojyfi. 
 
 *02 ouSe <j>66yyov KaraKOvoJV, ovds rriv <xko?)v ytyvfxvaa- 
 pivog, rjKfi tujv Xoyiov aKOVcropevog, ovrog aTriru) rag Svpag 
 imOtig Tdig aKoalg. lp(j>pa%£i yap rd wra icai irapiov, roj [irj 
 irpoyiviooKUv ravTa alaOijatt, 7rtpt S)V 61 \6yoi. 
 
 NOTE. — The references in Mr. Foster's Essay to Dr. G.'s Dissertations-relate to 
 the pages of the original editions ; the numbers of which, for the convenience of 
 the reader, have been marked throughout the present one.
 
 AN 
 
 ESSAY 
 
 ON 
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY, 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 On accent and quantity in general, their difference marked, their natural de- 
 pendence on each other, their necessary connexion and consistency. Em- 
 phasis, spirit, or aspiration distinguished from accent. Oratorial accent dif- 
 ferent from syllabic. 
 
 When the distinct natures and principles of those 
 things, which are the subject of any controversy, are 
 clearly denned and explained; and the question is by 
 that means at first properly stated, the dispute is at 
 once half determined. The want of this precision, at 
 first setting out, has drawn many inquiries to an unne- 
 cessary length, and unsatisfactory conclusion. This 
 consequence of discussing a point without ascertaining 
 the terms of it at first, and keeping them distinct after- 
 wards, I will endeavour to avoid : and accordingly, be- 
 fore we consider the application of the voice, in the for- 
 mation and modulation of syllables, to any particular 
 language, it will be proper to consider its power, and 
 use in general. 
 
 §. First, then, It is evident that nature hath given it a 
 variety of tones, that gradually rise or fall above or be- 
 low each other : this is the first and grand division of 
 
 it
 
 "Z ESSAY ON 
 
 sounds into high and low. In singing many of these are 
 used ; in common discourse and reading, fewer. 
 
 This perfectly agrees with what Dionysius of Hali- 
 carnassus observes on the difference between music and 
 ordinary speech : which is said by him to consist, not 
 in the quality, but number only of tones.* And, indeed, 
 if the reader in attending to this subject will but con- 
 sider the tones of his voice as like a few notes of an or- 
 gan or flute, he will, I am persuaded, be thereby ena- 
 bled to form much clearer conceptions, and a much bet- 
 ter judgment on the whole. 
 
 §. Secondly, It is evident, likewise, that the human 
 
 * Kai Ovx aXXoTgia. KE^n/xai rov nriky- 
 f/.a,m; elxovi' [/.ovo'im ya% ti; w km h t£v 
 KoXiTixSiv "Koyaii t<7rio-rri[/.n, to) IT02ii~J 
 SiaWaTTovc-a. T»{ Iv wSa?V Kal oeyavoiq, 
 ovyX ra noiI2~( (jrtfi trvvQia-. cap. 11.) 
 A learned author, who in a late treatise 
 hath maintained a system opposite to 
 that, which I shall propose to the reader 
 in the following pages, hatli explained 
 this passage of Dionysius in a different 
 manner, on the supposition that he is 
 not in this place comparing music with 
 oratory or common discourse, but poe- 
 try with prose. The context clearly 
 enough points out the former sense. 
 But even without the context it may be 
 evidently seen that music is meant by 
 Dionysius. Not that I am led to this 
 explanationby the word [xovo-Mri, which 
 I know is used in a very open sense, 
 relating to every thing thai has rhythm, 
 but by T?? Iv wjai? x.a.1 ofyavon;. which 
 words express vocal and instrumental 
 music, as perspicuously and directly 
 as any terms can do, which the Greek 
 language affords, Tlio-o; here hath the 
 sense, not of quantus, but of quotus, 
 i. e. expresses number, or arithmetical 
 quantity; that quantity, which (in the 
 words of H. Stephens) Dialectici dis- 
 cretam appellant. The word iroa-tZ in 
 the passage before us, is, I find, trans- 
 
 lated by the Latin interpreter quanli- 
 tate; but that I believe was owing to 
 the poverty of the Roman language, 
 not having a substantive quotitas be- 
 longing to quotus, as it has quantitas to 
 quantus. The Greek word nxoa-oc; cer- 
 tainly signifies quantity and number 
 too : which the reader may see con- 
 firmed by passages from the best Greek 
 writers in H. Stephen's Thes. ling. 
 Granc. in the word ireo-os, which " ex- 
 ponilur etiam quotus" with its deriva- 
 tives : as 7roa-o"»~juap signifies not how 
 long a day, but how many days : and 
 many more instances there are to the 
 same purpose. I have therefore the 
 greatest reason to think, as well from 
 the words themselves, as from the con- 
 text, that Dionysius means in this sen- 
 tence to say, " that oratorical or com- 
 mon discourse differs from music not 
 in the quality, but number only of 
 sounds." A person may speak with 
 grace and harmony, and perhaps not 
 exceed, all the time, the compass of 
 four or five notes ; while a strain or 
 air in music may lake in the compass 
 of twelve, or fourteen, or more. Dio- 
 nysius in a few lines immediately fol- 
 lowing this passage fixes the number 
 of them used in common speech at five, 
 &t iyyifTa.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. $ 
 
 voice, like every wind instrument, has a power of short' 
 ening or lengthening any of those sounds it utters. 
 
 1 . On the former division of these sounds is founded 
 what grammarians have called accent, relating merely 
 to the particular elevation or depression of them on cer- 
 tain syllables : the marks * of which are [ ' ] for the ele- 
 vation; [ ] for the depression; and [~or A ] for the ele- 
 vation and depression joined together on the same syl- 
 lable, forming what is called a circumflex; as the two 
 when separate are called the acute and grave. 
 
 As the word accentus comes from f accino, and the cor- 
 responding Greek word irpotruhia from <Jb), cantus; the very 
 derivation of these words marks out their particular re- 
 lation to music, which depends more on the variety and 
 combination of notes, considered as high and low, than 
 as long and short. By the enemies of accents the ety- 
 mology of these two words is supposed to imply, a re- 
 gard to music only, and not to ordinary pronunciation 
 at all. But that is a limitation, for which they have no 
 good and reasonable authority: and in order to esta- 
 blish it, they deal very unfairly in producing only part 
 of the old Greek definition of irpoaucia ; Trpocrucla (say they) 
 is defined 6 -6voq npoQ ov ySofiey, disingenuously leaving 
 out the other part of the definition, which extends it to 
 reading and speaking, xa\ tovq \6jovq Trowvfie^a ; which the 
 reader may see in % Placentinus, and in Alexander Aph- 
 rodisiensis himself, whom Dr. G. cites, omitting the lat- 
 ter part of the sentence. Lascaris, indeed, from whom 
 perhaps Dr. G. took it, gives it imperfect. But if the 
 Dr. had attended to the whole of what Lascaris says on 
 the Greek accents, he would never have produced any 
 thing from that learned Greek to prove they were con- 
 fined to music, or musical pronunciation only. Lascaris 
 
 * Accentus acuti nola', ita per obli- t Accentus dictus est ab accinendo, 
 
 quum aseendens in dexteram partem. quod sit quasi quidam cujUvSque sjlla- 
 
 Gravis nota ila\ a suinmo in obliquum bae cantus. Apud Grajcos ideo 7rpo- 
 
 quasi in dexteram partem descendens. <ra>5i'tt dicitur, quod TtforaSira.i toa<; 
 
 Circumllexus uota de acuto et gravi 3-i/XXa£a~j. Idem ibid. 
 
 facta, vel e dcorsum stans,\ Diomcd. $ Epiloui. Grrec. Palatograph, c. 11. 
 lib. ii. 
 
 b2
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 himself seems not to have had the least thought of their 
 being- ever restrained to singing : in the very beginning 
 
 Of his Octo Partes, he Says, Trpovydia earl tovoq (Jxdvyiq ky- 
 
 ypa/jfiarov* And this excellent grammarian's remarks on 
 the Greek language are not to be looked on, as grounded 
 merely on the principles and practice of his own times, 
 but as conformable to the rules of antiquity : for he de- 
 clares in his preface to his third book, that he drew his 
 materials from the ancient grammarians, e£iwv var-a to. 
 \el\pava rtiv iraKaitiv Tpa^uiTiKuv, and then mentions parti- 
 cularly f Apollonius Dyscolus, a Greek writer of great 
 note under Antoninus Pius. 
 
 2. On the latter division of sounds is founded, what 
 is termed Quantity, regarding only the quantity of time 
 taken up in expressing any of them. The delay of the 
 Voice in pronouncing them forms the long time % marked 
 
 * Accentus est intensio vocis Uteris 
 aajunctae. 
 
 t This author, and his son Herodian 
 are considered by Priscian as " prin- 
 cipatum inter Graecos scriptores artis 
 grammatical possidentes" (Putsch, p. 
 534.) whom he accordingly professes 
 principally to follow : as Lascaris did 
 afterwards. And what is here said of 
 Lascaris, may be applied likewise to 
 Gaza, Chrysoloras, Moschopulus.Chal- 
 condyles (from whom our late teachers 
 of Greek have compiled their gram- 
 mars) whose observations on their own 
 language agree with those of the best 
 ancients, Aristarchus.Dionysius Thrax, 
 Trypho, Abro, JEUns Dionysius, Am- 
 monius, Mosris, Apollonius, Herodian, 
 and others, as far as can be collected 
 from their remains, either published 
 separately, or scattered up and down 
 in the best scholia, Suidas, Eustathi- 
 us, Thomas Magister, Varinus, the 
 great etymologist, &c. Apollonius 
 tells us himself in his Syntax, p. 135. 
 that he wrote 7T£pi tgvojv, which work 
 of his is probably referred to by the 
 scholiast on the Plat, of Arisloph.v. 103. 
 
 on the word m6ov. And in the life of 
 Apollonius, prefixed to his works, his 
 son Herodian is said likewise, at the 
 desire of M. Antoninus, to have com- 
 posed tw Mtfixnv Jtai tw Ka.Qo'kix.riv Wgo- 
 o-wSi'av. That work of Herodian is lost. 
 But in parts of his TragSJcSoXai rov /a£- 
 yaKov prifxaros and two other pieces of 
 his in Aldus' Kigctg 'hfji.a.\Bua.;, there are 
 several remarks on the Greek accen- 
 tuation, that agree with our modern 
 practice. 
 
 X The reason of these marks the cu- 
 rious reader may see in Scaliger de 
 causis ling. Lat. lib. ii. cap. 55. 
 
 Longus est linea a sinistra in dexte- 
 ram partem ffqualiter ducta, — .Et bre- 
 vis, virgula similiter jacens, sed panda 
 et contractor, quasi c sursum spec- 
 tans 1 '. Sed in tills [accentus notis] 
 tonos : in his tempora dignosci vide- 
 mus. Dionied. The same description 
 of the marks of Accent and Quantity is 
 in Priscian; and in the editio prima of 
 iElius Donatus almost in the very 
 samewords. Putsch, p. 1742. Seealso 
 Maxim. Victor, p. 1913.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 5 
 
 thus [-]; the quickness of the voice in hastening over 
 them forms the short one marked thus [•" ]. 
 
 From hence it appears, that both accent and quan- 
 tity are equally founded in the very nature of the human 
 voice, are necessary and inseparable from it ; that con- 
 sequently no language can, or ever could, be pronounced 
 without them, except you suppose a monotony and equa- 
 bility in the voice, the existence of which it is difficult 
 to conceive. 
 
 Aristoxenus accordingly says, " There is a kind of 
 music in discourse, arising from the accents in words. 
 For it is natural to raise and sink the tones of voice in 
 ordinary speech."* This Aristoxenus was a scholar of 
 Aristotle, long before the time of Aristophanes Byzan- 
 tinus, who first introduced accentual marks. And I am 
 inclined to lay the greater stress on his authority, since 
 he is considered by Quinctilian as a musician and gram- 
 marian too. That his words tiriretveiv and kydvpu are to be 
 understood as relating to the rise and fall of the voice, 
 will appear by H. Stephen's explanation of eTrtramg and 
 avtaiq. " 'EttItcktiq (says he) est vocis commotio a loco 
 graviore in acutum locum : uvtatg vero contra. Nam 
 ab acuminis culmine in grave quiddam descendit. Est 
 autem soni gravitas, quum ex f intimo quidam spiritus 
 trahitur ; acumen vero ex superficie oris emittitur ."J 
 And indeed Aristoxenus himself explains them in the 
 same manner in another part of his work.§ " The «n- 
 
 * AtytTat yag Sij xai "Koywlic; ti /weXoj, t When Virgil therefore translates 
 
 to 0-vyxeifjt.ivov ix. nraiv TrpocrajJiaiv, to Iv Homer's (3ajt/o-T£va^o;y by " graviter ge- 
 
 Toif oTioy.a.a-1. tpva-mh yap to Ithteiveiv mitus imo de pectore ducens," his de- 
 
 y.a.1 aviEva-i Iv t<Z fouXkyia-Qcu. Though scription of the sound is strictly and 
 
 the word 'Kiyira.i is here used, and not physically true. 
 
 ie-Tt, yet the assertion is as full and % Stepb. Thes. ling. Grace, in voce 
 
 clear, as if it had been ectti : "for \sytrai teikjo. 
 
 is so far from being a token of want of § 'H fxh ovv \irha.n-iq i<rri ximrig rnt 
 
 evidence, that il is principally used <ptuvng cxntyriq ix. j3apuT£fou toVou s;f 
 
 upon the contrary account, when the ofsmpov. h fo) anc-ig, e£ o^vrifou toVou tl( 
 
 generality of writers are agreed. So &*fuT££ov. o^utus Jl, to yzw/A.ivov fori t?c 
 
 that \iyna.i does not imply a defect of iiriraaiajq' |3a£UT»c fo) to j/tvo/xevov ita, 
 
 proof, but rather a superfluity of it." t>j'{ a.wiu$. Harmon, lib. i. lO.j 
 Beutl. Dissert, on Pliat. p. 121, 2.
 
 6 ESSAY ON 
 
 rafftc is the movement of the voice from a lower pitch 
 to a higher: the avcatc, from a higher to a lower. 
 'OlvrrjQ then is what is formed by the emraaiQ; fiapWriQ 
 that which is formed by the avetne." 
 
 There unavoidably must be accent, if the voice has 
 only two notes (and fewer than two or three are hardly 
 ever, I believe, used even in ordinary discourse). There 
 must in short be a comparative * highness and lowness 
 of sound, except the voice has the use of only a single 
 note, like a drum or drone-base. As the rise and fall of 
 sound prevents monotony, which would give a deadness 
 to the human speech, accent is not improperly called in 
 Diomedes, anima vocis. 
 
 There must be likewise quantity, except you sup- 
 pose the voice to dwell, with a measure of time so ex- 
 actly equal, on all its syllables, as would be exceed- 
 ingly tiresome and offensive to every ear, and contrary to 
 that variety, which nature seems so much pleased with, 
 and the ear constantly requires. And accordingly Quinc- 
 tilian very truly observes, that we cannot avoid speak- 
 ing in long and short time. " Neque enim loqui pos- 
 sumus, nisi e syllabis brevibus ac longis, ex quibus 
 pedes fiunt ." f The consequence of which is, what he 
 remarks in another place, " metrici quidem pedes adeo 
 reperiuntur in oratione, ut in ea frequenter non sen- 
 tientibus nobis omnium generum excidant versus. Et 
 contra nihil est prosa scriptum, quod non redigi pos- 
 sit in qusedam versiculorum genera."j 
 
 To this division of the measure of sounds may be 
 easily referred that distinction of them, which Cicero || 
 
 * Ipsa enim natura, quasi modula- t Lib. ix. c. 4. 
 
 retur homimim orationem, in omni J Idem. p. 'ISO. edit. Gibs. 
 
 verbo posuit acutam vocem : nee una || Mira est enim nalura vocis : ctijus 
 
 plus, nee a poslreina syllaba citra ter- quidem e tribus omnino sonis, inflexo, 
 
 tiam. Cic ad Brut. Orat. 18. acuto, gravi, tanta sit et tain suavis 
 
 In like manner Qtiinctilian. Est au- varietas pert'ecta in cantibus : est au- 
 
 tem in omni voce ulique acuta. Inst. tern in dicendo eliam quidain cantus 
 
 Orat. lib. i. cap. v. obscurior. Cic. Orat. 17. 
 
 And after them Diomedes. Vt nulla This cantus in dicendo obscurior is the 
 
 vox sine vocali, ita sine accentu nulla same with XoyuU^ t( fxi'hat; of Aiistox- 
 
 «sl. lib. ii. eruis, and is cxacllj conformable like-
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 7 
 
 has made, and which holds good, not only in the Ro- 
 man language, which he had chiefly in view, but in 
 every language, that is in the human voice itself. 
 
 It may be remarked, that accent, though closely 
 united with quantity, is not only distinct from it, but 
 in the formation of the voice really antecedent to it. 
 The pitch, or height of the note is taken first, and then 
 the continuance of it is settled : by the former of these 
 the accent is determined, by the latter the quantity. So 
 closely combined and inseparable are these two things, 
 which have sometimes been represented as utterly in- 
 compatible with each other : so distinct likewise are 
 these, which at other times have occasioned much per- 
 plexity by being confounded together. 
 
 The inconsistence of accents with the harmony aris- 
 ing from quantity, is urged by the learned author of " a 
 " treatise against the Greek accents," lately published : 
 wherein he endeavours to prove this point in the follow- 
 ing manner : " Metre ariseth necessarily from syllables ; 
 but rhythm may arise from mere sounds. Metre there- 
 fore must produce one rhythm, and accents, if they 
 differ from quantity, must produce another. — Take 
 now the first example, which Longinus mentioneth, 
 that of smiths striking their hammers upon their an- 
 vils (from whence music is said to have taken its rise) 
 and suppose now two sets of them (consisting either 
 
 wise with what iJionysius says above Voces ut chordae sunt intentae, quae 
 
 on this subject : which will receive yet ad quemque tactum respondeant, acuta, 
 
 farther light from another remarkable gravis ; cita, tarda ; magna, parva, 
 
 passage of Aristoxenus, to this pur- quas tamen inter omnes est suoquasque 
 
 pose ; where he having been freaking in genere mediocris. Atque etiam ilia 
 
 of men, as JiaXiyo'^ 6 " ' an d |M£>>wX<juvte;, sunt ab his delapsa plura genera, laeve, 
 
 says, o£u v.aX @a.pb SiJXov if Iv a/x.<f>oTEpoij asperum ; contractum, diffusum ; con- 
 
 toijtoic Is-n'y. Element. Harmonic, lib. tinenti spiritu, intcrmisso; fractum, 
 
 i. p. 3. So ill-grounded is that opi- soissura, flexo tono ; attennatam, in- 
 
 nion concerning the old accents or fialura. Cic. cle Ornt. 3. 57. 
 
 tones, maintained by certain persons, Omnium longitudinum et brevitatnm 
 
 that they were merely of a musical na- in sonis, sicut acutarum graviumque 
 
 tttre, and are to be considered by us as vocum judicium natura in auribus nos- 
 
 not relating to ordinary discourse. tris collocavit. Idem. (hat. 51.
 
 8 ESSAY ON 
 
 of different numbers, or of the same number, but pro- 
 vided with hammers of different natures) to be strik- 
 ing on their anvils at the same time, and you will 
 clearly see that, though each set will produce a rhythm, 
 yet both sets striking at the same time must produce 
 discords." I have several objections to this illustra- 
 tion drawn from the two sets of different hammers, 
 which I shall not trouble the reader with, observing 
 only this, in answer to it, that the author, as far as I un- 
 derstand the application of his simile to the case of ac- 
 cent and quantity, plainly seems to think, that these 
 two, if used together in uttering the same syllable, do of 
 course, because they are two things, require therefore 
 two exertions, two operations of the voice to express 
 them, which in the same syllable seems impossible: 
 whereas they depend but on one operation, belong but 
 to one sound ; which sound, though a single one, is ca- 
 pable of mensuration two ways, in quality of elevation, 
 and degree of continuance. Height and length, though two 
 relative things, do always subsist together in one subject. 
 These two things in sound are very clearly distin- 
 guished and marked by Plutarch in his miscellaneous 
 works, where he says, " Three very minute things do 
 necessarily strike the ear at once, the tone or sound 
 itself <j>66yyoQ; the duration of it xjiwWe ; and the third 
 thing, to which they belong, the formation and articu- 
 lation of the letter or syllable." * And, having thus 
 shewn their distinction and connexion, he thon declares 
 those persons to be incompetent judges of sound and 
 speech, who cannot perceive the difference between 
 them.f The word fdoyyog in its proper sense signifies 
 
 * Aiei yag avayxcuov rgia IXayio-nt X a '^K Btv &x- a < rriyv T "' v elptifxivctjv, ita.%a.x&- 
 
 llvat Ta ffiTTTOVTa Ei? twv axohv, >pdoyyov Xou&e~v re Suvairdat toi? HaQ' exatrTa, xal 
 
 TE %ai Xpwov, xdl (TuXXaSw n yoa.fx.fxa. truvopav to &' i.fx,et^Tavofxevov ev s>ca.o-Ta> 
 
 ifxov Se ffpo?aiyovTft>v afxa. avrZv na.1 to fx.fi. " Sed et hoc constat, 
 
 tw -r«f aio-QiiiTEai; IwKfo^av avaynaTov quod, nisi possit sensus discernere sin- 
 wotsTo-Sat. Plut. torn. ii. p. 1144. Xy- gula praedictorum, nequit fieri ut corn- 
 land, -prehendat, quod ad singula attinet, ne- 
 
 t AXXa fx.hv naici"vo <f>av6pov, o<ri eux. que judicet quid in singulis aut praram 
 
 ivh^trai, fxM Juva^tiwjf t>k a:V9ii<r«<af aut rectum sit." The tydoyyoi, i X?' JVC:i '
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. I) 
 
 simply any sound or note of the human voice, ab- 
 stracted from the consideration of any particular mode. 
 In this sense <j>d6yyog is used, through all the old Greek 
 writers on music published by Meibomius, as a single 
 independent tone, whether high or low. *$wnjfc ttt&giq 
 iirt play ra<nv, 6 <j>d6yyoc, says Aristoxenus. Almost the 
 same words are repeated by the other writers in Meibo- 
 mius' collection. 
 
 The perception of sound arises from a certain im- 
 pulse of air on the drum of the ear ; on the first impres- 
 sion of the air depends the accent : if it be a quick 
 piercing stroke, it forms the d§»e, acutus, sharp or high 
 sound : if it be a duller impression, it forms the fiapvc., 
 gravis, flat or low sound. The physical cause of these 
 different impulses, which experience hath discovered, 
 and philosophy hath now well settled and explained, is 
 not part of our present business. But whatever be the 
 cause, or kind of the impulse, whether it be quick or 
 dull, it certainly may be varied in point of + duration, 
 according to the continuance of the vibration, which it 
 is in the power of our organs of speech either to shorten 
 or lengthen. And on the measure of its duration de- 
 pends prosodical time or quantity. 
 
 As spirit, or emphasis, hath been sometimes con- 
 founded with accent and quantity, I will endeavour 
 to point out its distinction from the other two ; that 
 these three things may be kept as separate in the mind 
 of the reader, as they are in their own natures. This 
 spirit is in truth another measure of the voice, and is so 
 marked out by Scaliger, and added as a third by him to 
 the foregoing two. Cicero likewise has done it, though 
 
 *) y^a/xf^ara. are distinguished in like dem sphacrice movetur aer, sicuti unda 
 
 manner by this author in some other ex lapilli projectu ; quod sentit secun- 
 
 lines immediately following this pas- do deanima Averrois, et piimo de mu- 
 
 sage. sica Boethius. Unde et piinceps in 
 
 * Harmon, lib. i. p. 15. ratione pulsuum, quos cum musica ra- 
 
 t On the formation and duration of tione simile quitldam habere prodit, 
 
 sounds Caelius Rhudiginus writes thus: circulos temporum nominavit, sicnt et 
 
 " Aerem porro sonum deferentem un- casus, Arsin intelligi volens et Thesin." 
 
 dam vocalera appellat Avicenna, siqui- Lcct. Antiq. II. 27.
 
 10 ESSAY ON 
 
 not so methodically, in the passage above cited, where 
 he considers the voice as lenis or aspera, attenuata or 
 inflata. This distinction cannot possibly be more clearly 
 stated than in Scaliger's own words. " Cum vocem 
 quantitate metiamur, et syllaba in voce sit ut in sub- 
 jecta materia, et quantitas triplici dimensione consti- 
 tnatur, longa, lata, alta: necessario quoque iisdem 
 rationibus syllaba affecta erit, ut levatio aut pressio 
 in altitndine ; afflatio aut attenuatio in latitudine ; trac- 
 tus in longitudine sit." * The reader will here first ob- 
 serve, that Scaliger uses the word quantitas not as we 
 commonly use it in the limited sense, as relating merely 
 to time or the length of a syllable, but applies it to the 
 height and spirit too : the whole quantity including all 
 three. However, when I shall have occasion in the fol- 
 lowing pages to use the word quantity, I would have it 
 understood in the popular sense, as referring to time only. 
 In regard to the nature of spirit, that, which Scaliger 
 means by the afflatio in latitudine, constitutes what we 
 commonly call emphasis ; a mode of sound requiring 
 a greater profusion of breath, giving either an aspira- 
 tion to a single letter, or marking with peculiar earnest- 
 ness some particular sentence in a discourse, or some 
 single word in a sentence; which yet is very distinct 
 from accent and quantity, though occasionally joined, 
 with them. This may appear by attending to the follow- 
 ing case : two men with different voices, or with dif- 
 ferent exertions of nearly the same voice, may pronounce 
 the words of the same sentence with the same accent and 
 quantity, observing the like proportion in the elevation 
 and prolongation of the same syllables, and yet use a 
 different spirit, the one speaking with emphasis, the 
 
 * Decausis ling. Lai. lib. ii. cap. 52. syllabara, — qui tripartite dividitur acu- 
 
 This is Piiscian's doctrine, " Vox to, gravi, circumtlexo. Accentus nam- 
 
 (says he) dum tangit auuilum, tripar- que acutus ideo insertus est, quod acnat 
 
 tite dividitur, scilicet altitudine, latitu- sive elevet syllabam ; gravis ideo, quod 
 
 dine, longitudine: habet quideui litera deprimat aut deponat: circutnllexuseoj 
 
 altitudinem in tempore." And then he quod deprimat atque aeuat." Priscian, 
 
 proceeds, " Accentus est certa lex et apud Putschium, p. 1286." 
 rcgula ad elevandaui et depriineiitiain
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 11 
 
 other without it. An instance of two persons blowing 
 the same notes on a flute, the one with more, the other 
 with less breath, will perhaps set this distinction in a 
 clearer light. 
 
 The part of Scaliger's book De Causis, which I have 
 here made use of, was considered by the author himself 
 as a part of his writings, that he had laboured with 
 great subtlety, and finished with particular accuracy. 
 For thus he speaks of it in a subsequent work. " Alter 
 est soni potius modus, de quo in libris de Causis acu- 
 tissime disputatum est. Accentum dixerunt veteres 
 soni moderationem in tollenda premendaque voce." # 
 
 If however this threefold division of Scaliger should 
 be considered by some persons, as founded rather in 
 the refining imagination of that great modern, than in 
 fact and the nature of things, which may induce them 
 not to admit it on his authority ; it may perhaps have 
 greater weight, when it is shewn to be the very same 
 which Aristotle gives in the 20th chapter of his Poetics 
 where he is treating of the powers and letters of speech. 
 
 TavTa ce diatyepei aviiuarri re Tu>y CTvaaroc, Kal tuttolq [perhaps 
 it should be read tvttoic] rat cWurjjri Kal \^i\6rr]rt, Kal p'/icei Kal 
 ppa-^vTTjri, 'in ce Kal o^vttjtl rat (3apvrr)Tt rat tS /Jecry. *j- " Ha3C 
 
 vero differunt formationibus oris, et locis (vel formis 
 et characteribus) densitate aspirationis et tenuitate; 
 longitudine et brevitate ; insuper etiam acumine et gra- 
 vitate, et medio, i. e. inflexione, quae accentum circum- 
 flexum format." We may now then call this Aristotle's 
 division, as well as Scaliger's. 
 
 As there are accents naturally on particular syllables 
 of single words, which must be rightly placed to make 
 
 * Poet. lib. iv. c. &7. but a tone between them, i. e. the com- 
 
 t By /xirtv bere.Thcod. Gonlstonus, mon pitch of voice: and then Ba-^i, 
 
 whose interpretation I cite, understands must be somewhat below that. But as 
 
 the circumflex : so does Dacier : and Bafv is itself most commonly supposed 
 
 I believe too, Castelvetro, who translates to belong to the common pitch as well 
 
 it by ripiegato, which signifies among as to any depression below it, Ms<roy 
 
 other things, bent, croaked, winding. here seems to have that sense, which 
 
 Msa-cv may indeed mean the middle, not is given by Aristotle's interpreters, 
 ■fcmpoundcd of the two o£o and Zafv,
 
 12 ESSAY ON 
 
 pronunciation simply proper ; so there are accentual 
 variations of the voice on the particular parts of whole 
 sentences, and on particular sentences of whole para- 
 graphs, the right inflexion of which constitutes good, 
 graceful, and harmonious pronunciation. The con- 
 nexion of this, which may be called the oratorial ac- 
 cent, with the syllabic, and the subordination of them 
 to each other, however difficult it may appear, is, yet 
 easy in practice. This it is that forms the difference 
 which we observe in the manner of speech between any 
 two persons, that use the same language. Let a good 
 speaker and a bad one pronounce the same sentence, 
 which they both equally understand, they will in the 
 single words agree in placing the acute and long time 
 on the same syllables, and yet in the utterance of the 
 whole differ very widely. Whence arises this differ- 
 ence ? Not from the syllabic accent, which respects 
 the modulation of one syllable of a word in regard to 
 another; but from the oratorial, which respects the mo- 
 dulation of whole words and parts of sentences in re- 
 gard to the rest. And this oratorial accent may have 
 aspiration or not, according as the general manner, or 
 particular intention of the speaker may happen to be. 
 This latter kind of accent is what Quinctilian means 
 in that part of his book, where he speaks of reading : 
 " * superest Lectio ; in qua puer ut sciat, ubi suspen- 
 dere spiritum debeat, quo loco versum distinguere, 
 ubi claudatur sensus, unde incipiat, quando attollenda 
 vel summittenda sit vox; quid quoque flexu, quid 
 lentius, celerius, concitatius, lenius dicendum, de- 
 monstrari nisi in opere ipso non potest." This accent 
 of sentences has not yet had marks assigned it, and per- 
 haps could not easily be ascertained by grammatical 
 characters : which makes Quinctilian say, that, " de- 
 monstrari nisi in opere ipso non potest." But this 
 kind of accent belongs not immediately to my present 
 subject, which relates merely to the tone of syllables in 
 
 * Lib. i. c. 18.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 13 
 
 single words. Not that I would preclude myself from 
 touching on the oratorial accent,* when I may be oc- 
 casionally led to it. 
 
 * Herman Vanderhardt, the anthor 
 of a small treatise entitled " Arcanum 
 Accentuutn Graecorum,'' published at 
 Helmstad, 1715, considers the marks 
 of Greek accentuation as referring not 
 to syllabic, but oratorial accent. If 
 this supposition were true, we should 
 not meet with the same word constantly 
 accented in the same manner, as we see 
 
 it at present. A word's oratorial ac- 
 cent will vary according to the general 
 sentiment of the passage wherein it 
 occurs. But its syllabic accent will be 
 invariably the same independent of its 
 connexion with other words in the sen- 
 tence : except in the case of enclitics, 
 and a few others, which will be shewn 
 hereafter.
 
 14 ESSAY ON 
 
 CHAP. ir. 
 
 On the quantity of the English language. The nature of a long time. The long 
 and short times of the Greeks and Romans : the case of doubtful vowels. 
 The coincidence of the acute tone and long time on the same syllables in our 
 language. On what foundation and authority quantity is established. 
 
 £Yftj3tj3i]ic£ Se tio (fiOoyyi^ [^pota *] Toiroq, \povog. )(jaovog 
 fxlv ovv laTi, Kaff ov paKporipovq Iv ir\dovi y^povio, kcu (5pa- 
 Xyrlpovg Iv IXuttovi (jidtyyoptOa. tqttoq oe Igti (j)06yyov, 
 Keif? ov Tovg plv fiapvripovc;, tovq oe 6c,vTipovg 7rpo'i£pzQa. 
 " The adjuncts of human sound are place and time. 
 Time is that, in regard to which we utter longer sounds 
 with a greater measure of it, and shorter with a less. 
 The place is that, according to which we utter some of 
 them lower, and some higher." Thus says Gaudentius 
 in his Elaayuiyt) appovucrj with equal perspicuity and truth. 
 But, it seems, since his time the nature of the human 
 voice is changed. The northern nations, according to 
 the representations of some people, have utterly lost the 
 Xpovog, retain no quantity at all, having nothing but the 
 T07TOC, the place, tone, or accent left. But surely the 
 foregoing division of sounds, as applied to syllables, 
 founded in the very nature of the voice itself, suffici- 
 ently shews the absurdity of those assertions, which we 
 so frequently hear from the mouth sometimes of scholars, 
 " that the true pronunciation of Latin and Greek is di- 
 rected by quantity, and that of English by accent:" 
 intimating, that the former depends not at all on accent, 
 nor the latter on quantity. Whereas both accent and 
 quantity do inseparably belong to every language. 
 
 * I take no notice here of the Xfo/a, some other things relating to tyQiyyoQ 
 
 not that it is against, but beside my will be more fully shewn in another 
 
 present purpose. By the toVoj of place, where I shall have occasion to 
 
 sound, the Greeks meant the degree of speak more particularly of the old wri- 
 
 il» elevation or depression. This with tersou music.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 15 
 
 The accent of the Greek and Latin shall be considered 
 afterwards. At present I shall take notice of the popu- 
 lar error in regard to the English language having no 
 quantity. Not only the authors of our common spell- 
 ing books, but even a man of great learning, in an ela- 
 borate * treatise on the Greek accents, has declared, 
 that " In the modern languages the pronunciation doth 
 not depend upon a natural quantity; and therefore a 
 greater liberty may be allowed in the placing of ac- 
 cents." In another place the same author, speaking 
 of the northern languages of Europe, says, that " It was 
 made impossible to think of establishing quantity for 
 a foundation of harmony in pronunciation. Hence it 
 became necessary to lay aside the consideration of 
 quantity, and to have recourse to accents." In these 
 and some other passages that writer seems to look upon 
 accents as alone regulating the pronunciation of Eng- 
 lish, and quantity asf excluded from it. 
 
 But does the author of that treatise, or any person in 
 England, usually pronounce an English disyllable or 
 polysyllable without making the voice rest longer on 
 some one syllable than on the other ; in which thing the 
 very nature of quantity consists ? For (as this same 
 writer himself says) " How can a syllable be consi- 
 dered as short or long, but by the actual pronuncia- 
 
 * The abovementioned one, p. 97. It is quite otherwise with us. The mo. 
 
 t A French author in a dissertation dern languages, quite different from 
 (in the Hist, of the Acad. vol. xii.) the Greek and Latin, are wholly corn- 
 concerning the comparative meritof the posed of words, the syllables of which, 
 moderns and ancients in point of ge- to judge of them properly, are neither 
 nius and learning, doth not only abso- long nor short: that is to say, their 
 lutely exclude quantity from all the pronunciation is not restrained to any 
 modern languages, but carries the ab- fixed time. It is therefore impossible 
 surdity so far, as from thence i j deny that our prose, still more so that our 
 the very existence of modern poetry. verse, should have the same measure, 
 " The language of the Romans was numbers, cadence, and harmony with 
 (says he) like the Greek, wholly com- theirs. To speak properly, we have 
 posed of words, of which the syllables not in our language either epic poem, 
 were either long or short : it thereby ode, elegy, or comedy. For our verses 
 became susceptible of the same num- differ from each other only in the num- 
 bers, and by consequence, of the same ber of syllables." 
 kinds of poetry with the Greek.
 
 1G ESSAY ON 
 
 tion of it, or giving it one measure in the former case, 
 and two measures in the latter I" Well then : does he 
 not employ more time in uttering the first syllable of 
 heavily, hastily, quickly, slowly, conqueror, than in the 
 second or third syllable? Does he not spend more 
 time in pronouncing the second syllable of solicit, mis- 
 taking, researches, delusive, than in the others ? Or is 
 he not longer in expressing the last of deny, compose, 
 revenge, than in the first ? If he is (as he certainly is, 
 and necessarily must, if he speaks them properly) he 
 then uses a long quantity. And by this the English 
 metre is regulated (notwithstanding what is vulgarly 
 said of accent excluding quantity) as much as the Greek 
 or Latin. This quantity is not indeed settled by the 
 same rules, by which the Latin and Greek is, as " that 
 one vowel preceding another should be pronounced 
 with a short time, or preceding two consonants with a 
 long one." But still, if the voice is retarded in some 
 syllables, and quickened in others, by what cause so- 
 ever that delay or rapidity be occasioned or directed, 
 there is truly and formally long and short quantity. 
 When in the words Honestly, character, I dwell longer 
 on the first syllable, than on either of the two last, which 
 I hurry over swiftly, the two last are the short ones, not- 
 withstanding the consonants, with which to the eye they 
 appear to be clogged: and had there been six conso- 
 nants instead of three in those two last syllables, if my 
 voice should in practice hasten over each of them in less 
 time than it does over the first, which is disencumbered 
 with consonants, the latter syllables would certainly 
 have a short quantity, and the first a long one. And 
 thus it must appear to every one, who will not suffer 
 his eyes to judge for his ears. 
 
 Whether the measure of the long time be exactly in 
 the same proportion to the short one, as two to one 
 (which is supposed by grammarians to have been the 
 proportion in the pronunciation of the ancients) or only 
 as one and a half to one, or more as two and a half, or 
 three to one, makes no material difference in regard to
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 17 
 
 what I here say. I do not believe the rule of Prosody, 
 Syllaba brevis unites est temporis, longa vero duorum, to 
 be in all cases strictly true : that proportion of two to one 
 not* invariably holding between long and short sylla- 
 bles. The second syllable of maximos may have been 
 pronounced shorter than the second of tenebrte. And 
 for this I have Dionysius' authority, who (in a passage 
 cited by Dr. G. and well explained by him) says that 
 " one short syllable differs from another short, and one 
 long from another long." diaWarTu fipaxfia <™AAa/3}) (3pa- 
 X £ "*c> kol juoKpa fiaKpag. Certain I am, that in English 
 the quantity of the first syllable of folly though long, is 
 yet not so long, as the first in dowry. So the first syl- 
 lable of tollit among the Romans was probably not so 
 long, in proportion to its second, as the first of odit. 
 
 The principles, on which I suppose the o to be 
 shorter in tollit than odit, may explain what Ammo- 
 niusf says of the quantity of a in the second syllable of 
 Karay/jLa, being long when the word is used in one sense, 
 and short in another: and what J Mceris Atticista ob- 
 serves on the Attics pronouncing the second a of ayo- 
 paZu) long, implying that the common Greeks used it 
 short: and in the same manner, what§ Draco Stratoni- 
 ceus says of dissyllable barytone verbs in a£w having the 
 a short, as in araZ,(o, atyaZo), /3a£w, and polysyllables in 
 like manner, except they have t subjoined, as fxardi^w, 
 o-^aSot%w. In these cases, where the a is said to be 
 
 * There is to this purpose a passage Longum intelligunt, quod babet duo 
 
 in the Scholia on Hephaestion. 'io-rioy tempora, neque quicquam ultra respi- 
 
 5s, ?ti aXXai? XapQhovo-i re* Xpo'vov oi ciunt. Rhythmici vero dicunt aliud 
 
 Mirpixoi riyovv oi r?a[A[Aa.TMot, xai aXXauj alio esse longius, aiuntque banc quidem 
 
 oi Pv9[amU* o! rga,cc/>iaTixot Ixe"vov pa- syllabam habere duo tempora cum di- 
 
 gov x?^ vov fewWBHj t3v Ip^ovra 5-o p^go- midio, illam tria, istam plura." He- 
 
 twti xai ov xaraylvorrai i\q [Ati^ov phasstion himself distinguishes between 
 
 Ti" oi $e PuBfjuxol "Kiytiuvi to'vSe &vai a letter ftaxpov, and /j,n>cv]iofj.evov. 
 /LtttK^o'TEjov ToZh, <f>a<rxovTEs rhv fjt.iv rSiv t Auiiuod. in Haraypa. p. 78.Valck. 
 
 truWaQZv ei'vttf Svo hp.i<rtti>$ y^mm, tr,\ 5e % 'Ayopa^Eiy, Ixtei'vovte; toQ a, oi 'At- 
 
 t^imv, rw $e ttXeio'vot/. p. 73. edit. Pauw. tixoi. 
 
 " Sciendum, quod aliter accipiuntTem- § Iu the note of J.Pierson on the pre- 
 
 pus Metrici vel Gramraalici, aliter cediug word in Moeri J, p. 70, 
 Rhythmici. Grammatici illud Tempus
 
 18 ESSAY ON 
 
 short, the syllable we know is long : but being long only 
 by the position of a short letter before two consonants, 
 it is shorter than one long by its own nature. This may 
 serve likewise to account for what Cicero mentions in 
 regard to the different length of certain letters, which 
 we now call long, and see used as such in the best Ro- 
 man poets. In his* Orator he says, that the first letter 
 of inclytus is short, the first of insanus and infelix long : 
 he does not say the first syllable of inclytus is short, but 
 the first letter: the. letter may be short, though the syl- 
 lable be long by the position of the short vowel : as it is 
 in inclytus, which hath its first syllable used long in the 
 Roman verse. But yet it sounded not so long as in the 
 two latter words. So Maximus Victorinus says that 
 the prepositions in and con are sometimes short : but 
 followed by s and / are long, as instare, mfidus : in all 
 other cases are short, as inconstans, imprudens. Which 
 observation of Victorinus well agrees with Cicero's in- 
 stances above, and with whatf Gellius likewise cites 
 from Cicero. The same Gellius in another:}; place says, 
 that in the frequentative verbs tsito and unctito the first 
 vowel was pronounced long, but in dictito the first short : 
 that the first of actito should be pronounced long, though 
 some learned men in his time expressed it short. In an- 
 other § chapter he inquires, whether in quiesco the e should 
 be pronounced long or short. Of the same nature is 
 what he || says on the vowels of sub, ob, and con, being 
 short in compound even before words beginning with a 
 consonant. Donatus on the^f Andria of Terence, " fili- 
 um perduxere ut una esset," says, " si producta legatur 
 esset, significat cibum caperet, sive ederit." And on 
 the** Eunuch " ut de symbolis essemus," he observes, 
 " melius essemus producta e litera." The true power of 
 
 * " Inclytus dicimus brevi prima li- t A. Gell. lib. ii. cap. 17. 
 
 tera, insanus producta : inhumanus bre- X Lib. ix. cap. 6. 
 
 vi, infelix longa : et ne multis, quibus $ Lib. vi. c. 15. 
 
 in verbis eae prima? litera? sunt, qua? in || Lib. iv. c. 17. 
 
 sapiente atque felice, producle dicitur; 11 Act. i. sc. 1. 
 
 in caeteris omnibus breviter." Oral. 48. ** Act. iii. sc. 4.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 19 
 
 this long e Cratinus and Varro said might be perceived 
 in the* bleating of sheep, f Charisius says, " Plinius 
 os oris producta efferendura censuit, os ossis correpta." 
 Corinthius in his treatise on the Greek dialects, speak- 
 ing of the iEolians, says they are fond of shortening syl- 
 lables, and accordingly change <j>Qdpu) into <j>9ippw' vt 
 yap 6i(TH paicpa iXarTwv tori tijq (j>vau paKpag, E7rd kcu to 
 a to <f>v<jn paicpbv puZ,6v taTt Ti]g m ^i<f>06yyov. 
 
 We ought not to forget, that of the three Greek du- 
 
 * E longum, cujus sonus in ovium 
 balalu senlilur, \it Cratinus et Varro 
 tradiderunt. Cavin. Hellen. p. 26. 
 
 And after them Eustatliius upon the 
 499th v. of Iliad. I. remarks that the 
 
 WOrd /3X<3vj/, EtTTlV T?C JtXEvf-uS^aj v^ps 
 fxif^rmnxi; xara tou? iraXmovq' @h, i"/} 1 
 f/.i[xr,a-iv irgoQaTtev <pwvn$. KpaT~voj. (3X^4-, 
 est clepsydra sonus ex imitatione secun- 
 dum veteres : et Qh imitatur vocem ovium. 
 Cratinus. On the 452d {verse A,"* A 
 osiV, ov y.h — having said, that 3 a Ja- 
 cvvQtv yixura SnXs?, he writes thus, elffi 
 tjvej fMfJWruuu <powa.l avrdi x,a-ra avTabs 
 tow; <paivovvTa;' to m air, vo.vtix.6v. iroifAtvi- 
 xov Js to /2ir x.a.1 to XjJpfe ov£oTiniv a 
 a aspiratum risum eiprimit. sunt qucc- 
 dam imitatrices voces per se ipsa: juxta 
 ipsos qui eferunt. S Sir nautica est, pas- 
 toralis Qh, et xyfo subulcorum propria. 
 Our Sailors O-up, or Ho-up is, we see, 
 the old Greek call on shipboard. Thus 
 when Bacchus in the BaTpa^ot of Arist. 
 (at the end of act. i. sc. 4.) bids 
 Charon give the water call, AIO kclto.- 
 xeXelw Hi. XA. 'iloir, 'aioir Sir. But 
 that such observations as these, made 
 to ascertain pronunciation, may not 
 appear ridiculous, I will propose to 
 the reader's consideration the fol- 
 lowing words of Sir John Cheke on 
 this subject to the Bishop of Winches- 
 ter. " Sed ridiculum putas hie ad 
 oves et boves confugere, ut a brutis ra- 
 tione defectis quicquam cognoscamus. 
 
 Non est ridiculum a natura quicquam 
 petere, et a brutorum constantia ad dis- 
 cendum aliquid haurire. Et cum mul- 
 tarum virtutum exempla ab ill is peti- 
 mus, cur ridiculum erit quasdam sono- 
 rum controversias ex illorum constantia 
 potius, quam ex hominum quoruudam 
 intemperantium levitate discere. Sed 
 neqaaquam Demostheni tnrpe videba- 
 tur, ne optimis quidem relictis raagis- 
 tris ad canes se conferre, et ab illis, 
 lileras vim et naturam petere, illorum- 
 que in sonando, quod satis esset, mo- 
 rum imitari. At nos Demosthene elo- 
 quentiores pudet eandem viam discendi 
 persequi, et quod certum est ab ovibus 
 haurire, ne videlicet nimis stolidi oves 
 imitando esse ducamur. Quo tandem 
 ilia apud Platonem sententia evanuit, 
 qua? praecipit, ut doceavius citra invi- 
 diam, discamus citra pudorem? Modo 
 enim id, quod discitur, sit honeslum, 
 quid refert a quo discas ? Non tam 
 enim auctoritasdocentisquaerilur, quam 
 discendorum Veritas ; et si hoc, quod 
 discitur, cum auctoritale utilitatem con- 
 junctam habet, non tam laborandum, a 
 quo proficiscatur,quam inquantam viro- 
 rum utilitatem desinat. — Epist. prim, 
 ad Episc. Vinton, p. 124. 
 
 t Lib. i. 
 
 X " Litera enim longa positione mi- 
 nor est quam ea,quae longa natura est. 
 Cum etiam a longa natura major sit 
 quam dipthongus at. 
 
 c2
 
 20 ESSAY ON 
 
 bious vowels, as they are called, and the five Latin ones 
 each single character doth virtually contain the powers 
 of* two vowels at least, a long and a short one : which 
 two powers under one letter do as distinctly exist, asf 
 o and a) did in o, before the addition of the mark a> to 
 the Attic alphabet, and as c and tj did in e, before the 
 additional character 17. And indeed Quinctilian says, 
 that these two powers had been formerly expressed in 
 his own language by two characters; for that, before 
 Accius's time, and even after it, the ancients used to 
 write their long syllables with two vowels : " usque ad 
 Accium, et ultra, porrcctas syllabas geminis vocalibus 
 scripserunt." — Lib. I. 7. What we now write cogo was 
 then coago, cdgito, cougito, captiv'i captivei, libo leibo from 
 \rffio), dlco deico from Sh'koj, which certainly sounded 
 differently from dlca of &kt) : so the preterits with the 
 temporal augment emi eemi, ?gi aegi, tdi eedi. Instances 
 of this kind may be seen in every line of the Leges Re- 
 giae et Xvirales, collected by Lipsius.J The Greeks 
 seem not ever to have used two short vowels in like 
 
 * Sextus Empiricus therefore, with Meiele hominum, duo Meillia, item 
 good reason, (though Dr. G. thinks huic utroque opus meii.es, 
 
 otherwise, p. 28.) concludes, that there Meilitiam, tenues I. Pilam qua lu- 
 are ten Greek vowels. — Adv. Gram. dimus, Pilum 
 
 I. 5. §. 112. Quo pinso, tenues I. plura haec feceris, 
 
 t The reader may see some very Peila 
 
 sound and ingenious criticism, ground- Quae jacimus, addes E, Peila, ut ple- 
 ed on the different powers of Homer's nins fiat." 
 
 o (which indeed were three, of o, m, and The ei instead of the long i we find 
 
 eu) in Dr. Taylor's Elements of Civil several times in every page of Varro, 
 
 Law, p. 553. 4. 5. See also p. 561. as published by Jos. Scaliger. The ei 
 
 on the Roman vowels. On the Greek was likewise used in many plurals of 
 
 vowels, see likewise his Commentary nouns, where we now have the long e: 
 
 on Marmor Sandvicense, p. 7, 8, 9. our omnes was omneis : in the Augustan 
 
 X They are given also by Sylburgius age it was omnis. Not that the two 
 
 at the end of his first vol. of Dionys. vowels in these places were then quite 
 
 Halic. Scaurus (de Orthograph. p. out of use: for inscriptions even of that 
 
 2255.) cites some lines of Lucillius on aera give us Civiisus Seuvateis. The 
 
 this subject. " Item quod Lucillius, final us of the genitive singular, nomi- 
 
 ubi I exile est, per se jubet scribi, at ubi native, and accusative plural of the 
 
 plenum est, pruponendum esse E credit, fourth declension, is a contraction from 
 
 hisversibus: uis, ues ; manuis, tnanues, manus.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 21 
 
 manner for a long one : but one character served both 
 purposes. 'Ou yap 7j lypwfitQa, aXXa. £ to iraXaibv, says 
 Plato in his Cratylus: and again, to yap o avrl tov at 
 !xpwjU£0a.* We say now that i or u is doubtful : and so 
 it is to us, on account of our ignorance of the ancient 
 pronunciation : but in that there was no ambiguity ; the 
 two powers long, and short, of i or u, were then as easily 
 discernible as a and o are now. In general as the pow- 
 ers of all the letters existed in the human voice before 
 the invention and formation of the letters themselves, so 
 there are many distinct sounds and powers at present, 
 that have no different character yet assigned them. + 
 
 And the long t of the fourth conjugation 
 is, I believe, a contraction of the like 
 kind. Audi-ts from Audi-o is like Legis 
 from Leg-o : from Audi-ts, Audit, And so 
 perhaps docc-o, doci-is, doccs. Scaliger 
 with good reason supposes, that the 
 loug i in the penultima of illius, unius, 
 alius, " quasi dipthongus Gra?ca re- 
 
 mansit, ac longa fuit,i£/eius 
 
 Secundus hie casus possessivus dictns 
 est : possessivorum autem rnulta sic in- 
 venias, Petreius, Luceius, Locutuleius, 
 
 a petra, luce, locutione 
 
 Ergo vir doctissimus Terentianus non 
 fuit veritus producere in alterius, quum 
 tamen caeteri corriperent." De Caus. 
 Ling. Lot. c. 43. The verse of Teren- 
 tianus, to which Scaliger here refers, 
 is the following Trochaic, tetrameter 
 catalectic ; 
 
 Sescupla vel una vincet alterius singu~ 
 lum. Putsch, p. 2412. 
 
 * This double use of the same cha- 
 racter is taken notice of by the Scho- 
 liast on the Phoenissas of Euripides, v. 
 668. In that passage he understands 
 the words trol ixytvoi not in the nomina- 
 tive plural, but dative singular, saying 
 " it may be written a-S viv Ixyova x-nVav, 
 
 not as it is now a-ol sxyom 
 
 • The occasion of the mis- 
 
 take was this. Before the addition of 
 long vowels, when Euclides was Ar- 
 chon of Athens, they used short ones 
 instead of long, i instead of n, and 6 in- 
 stead of a. AiijUa) was then written 
 with the i added thus aIjUoj. Those 
 therefore, who did not think of turning 
 here the o into the d have confounded 
 the meaning of the verse." It was in 
 the Arconship of Euclides that these 
 long letters, (after having been invent- 
 ed by Simonides, from him received 
 into common use among the Ionians 
 about 50 years before Christ, and set- 
 tled afterwards in the alphabet by Cal- 
 listratus the Samian) were admitted 
 into public writings and inscriptions by 
 the Athenians. See Suidas in iijUajvi'Jij; : 
 in 'ATTixiflYAo'f : and in lay.'icov l SS/t*of. 
 This magistracy of Euclides is there- 
 fore a remarkable era in literature, and 
 gave occasion to that expression, t>?j 
 pET Elxteifav r^a|UjUctTw«f . Euripides 
 lived before Euclides : Plato twenty 
 years after him. Callislratus was the 
 person, who settled the Greek alphabet 
 in the form wherein we now have it. — 
 See Valcken. ad Phatniss. p. 260. 668. 
 t " Quibusdain Uteris deficimus, 
 quas tamen sonus enunciationis arces- 
 sil." — Velius Long, apud Putschium.p. 
 2219. As the ancient alphabets, like
 
 22 ESSAY ON 
 
 In regard to the Romans, what is said above will be 
 more clearly seen in Latin words, which are either de- 
 rived from the Greek, or from which Greek ones were 
 afterwards derived : as in venter (from ivrepa with the 
 initial tEoHc digamma) the first syllable, though long, 
 was shorter on account of the short e, than the first of 
 Census, Festus, (in Greek KijvaoQ, (j)r}(TTog) where not only 
 the syllable, but the vowel too was long. 
 
 In general, the difference between the long and longer 
 time is this : in the former case the vowel derives its 
 length from being joined close in articulation with the 
 following consonant, as in fal-lit: in the latter case, the 
 vowel commonly stands alone disjoined from the next 
 consonant, as in falle-bat. Thus in English the first syl- 
 lable of mt-tre is longer than the first of bet-ter. The 
 longest time of all is when the long vowel comes before 
 two consonants, as in <&r\<jTOQ, essemus, finder, mind. 
 Very often in English the vowel before a consonant 
 seems to derive its length from the vowel following it, 
 as in bite, write : which without the final vowel is short, 
 bit, writ. But this is never the case among the Greeks 
 or Latins, who in no single syllable have a consonant 
 between two vowels. But this exactness is of no great 
 significance towards establishing quantity. That sub- 
 sists, whenever in comparing two times there is an * ex- 
 
 our own, were defective, so were they bebant, non pronunciabant." — Gasp. 
 
 redundant likewise in having two clia- Sciopp. Gram. Philosoph. p. 216. 
 racters sometimes for the same sound. * Musici non omnes inter se longas 
 
 " Grascos (says Gellius. xix. 14.) non aut breves pari mensura consistere, siqui- 
 
 tantae inscitiue arcesso, qui ou ex o et dem et brevi breviorem, et longa longio^ 
 
 u scripserunt, quanta? qui ei ex e et I. rem dicant posse syllabam Jieri. .... 
 
 Illud enim inopia fecerunt, hoc nulla Sed hctc scrupulositas 
 
 necessitate subacti.'' And Diomede Musicis et Rythmicis relinquatur • • • 
 says in plain terms, the Roman alpha- cum metris nihil majus mi- 
 bet was redundant : " Ex viginti et tri- vusve afferat hujusmodi ratio, Musicis 
 bus [Uteris] duas supervacuao K et Q." potius quam metricis id auscultaiulum 
 lib. ii. And after them the best Latin esse dicemus. — Mar. Victorini. Art. 
 grammarian since Piiscian : " Romaui Gram. lib. i. p. 2482. Putsch. As the 
 partim pronunciabant literas, quas non nicer subdivision of times into longer 
 scribebant, et quarura charucteribus and longest, shorter and shortest, does 
 defioiebanlur; partim eas, quas scri- not much concern metre, we may there-
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 23 
 
 cess on one side, whatever the cause or degree of that 
 excess may happen to be. 
 
 The power of two consonants, among the Greeks and 
 Romans, in retarding the voice during the pronunciation 
 of a vowel preceding them, suspends not only the vowel 
 coming before them in the same word, but acts back- 
 wards also on a short vowel at the end of the preceding 
 word ; particularly when the former of the consonants 
 is an S ; which, according to * Terentianus Maurus, 
 
 — Quanquam capite alterius verbi teneantur, 
 Sufficiant retro vires et tempus oportet, 
 Consona quod debet geminata referre priori. 
 
 This after the time of Lucretius is almost universally 
 observed among the good Latin poets, except in such 
 writings of a looser metre, as are Sermoni propiora : and 
 therefore in Horace we have Seepe stylum vertas. But 
 in the good Greek poets f it is always observed: in- 
 stances of which may be seen in almost any page of 
 Homer or Sophocles. 
 
 This rule of Terentianus, confirmed by Victorinus 
 (though little attended to at present) is enforced by the 
 ingenious Mr. Dawes, as far as it regards $ the Latin me- 
 tre. I cannot here omit observing, that the same rule is 
 particularly remarked in respect to the Greek by the 
 Scholiast on Callimachus ; in one of whose hymns is 
 the following verse : 
 
 Kriivea <piv Xot/xbg Kara/3o<7K£Teu, tpya & Traxvr\. 
 
 In Dian. v. 125. 
 
 Some persons have thought that <$>iv in this line, being 
 an uncommon word, should be altered to <j$iv : but that 
 
 fore on the whole admit what Longinus 485. Gibs. 
 
 Jajs down : 'ev Ss to; f^erfix^g eiSlvaj * Pusch. p. 2-106. 
 
 M on iras-a B^^~a tan, ku.1 vara p,axfi t The initial p among the Attics had 
 
 In. In re. metrica illud tenendum, om- the same power with two consonants. 
 
 net breves inter se esse equities, item Dawes. Misc. Critic, p. 159. 160. 
 
 omnes tongas.— Fngm. Proiegom. iu j Misc. Crit. sec. i. 
 
 Hephaest. See also Quiuclil. ix. •*. p
 
 24 ESSAY ON 
 
 it cannot be a<ptv, the scholiast observes, <}>iv x w P*c rov 
 a, $ia to fxkoov, because if a<j>iv is placed there, it will 
 lengthen the final voAvel of the preceding word icn'ivea 
 a<j>iv. The reader cannot but take notice that the obser- 
 vation of Terentianus and Victorinus on the power of s, 
 retro vires ac tempus sufficientis, is very conformable with 
 what Cicero says above on the short syllable in being 
 long before s, though short before some other conso- 
 nants. * Jac. Ceporinus allows this in the Greek metre. 
 But he is mistaken in denying that the same takes place 
 in the Latin. He takes notice very properly of one 
 thing on the subject of metre, which is often overlooked, 
 that [iv, KT y 7rr, in regard to the preceding vowel, are each 
 of them considered as a mute and liquid in conjunction ; f 
 AlyvwTiovg Odys. S. 83. 'HAticrpuwvjje Hcs. Scut. Here. v. 
 16. 35. Ttfivu Iliad. N. v. 707. Thus verbs beginning 
 with those two consonants repeat the former of them in 
 the reduplication of the preterit tense ; which syllable 
 of reduplication with the consonant is in general short, 
 but without the consonant the additional £ is long, as in 
 the first of e&jko. 
 
 When we see so very frequently Greek vowels made 
 short before two consonants, (of which a hundred % in- 
 stances might be given) and on the other hand, made 
 long before other vowels, as in aXylov, Sa/cpwe and num- 
 berless other words ; why should we be surprised at 
 finding the same in our own language, as in really, cru- 
 elty, &c ? There is indeed no good reason in the nature 
 of our sound, why the voice should not dwell long on a 
 single vowel, and in a short time hurry over more than 
 one consonant. But arguments of general reason, in a 
 case relating to speech, I do not so much regard, as 
 
 * Si sequens dictio substriiul binas vel t See a remark of Herodian, pub- 
 
 duplices consonantes, pracedentis dictio- lisbed from a MS. lately by Mr. Valc- 
 
 nis vocalemjinalem brevem Gratis sufful- kenaer on Pboenis. v. 1508. 
 ciunt. Cum tumen apud Latinos biiuz % See Mr. Heath's uotes on /Escli. 
 
 consonantes dictionis postertz principales Agam. v. 120. Sopb. Elect. 122. 128. 
 
 nihil juvent positu vocalem brevem nude Eurip. Hec. 683. and Mr. Dawes, p. 
 
 finalem dictionis prioris. in Hesiod. de- 196, 
 claratiuncula.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 25 
 
 fact. And fact, I am sure, allows of what is said above. 
 The first syllable of the word strength-en, where the 
 vowel appears to the sight to be clogged with six con- 
 sonants and an aspirate, hath as quick and easy a pro- 
 nunciation, as the first syllable of oo-zy, where two vow- 
 els stand alone. 
 
 This brings me again to the consideration of English 
 quantity : in regard to which, it will be said, that those 
 syllables, which I call long, receive a peculiar stress of 
 voice from their acute accent, as in really, cruelty. I al- 
 low it ; and by that means they are elevated : but they 
 are lengthened too. The case is, we English cannot rea- 
 dily elevate a syllable without lengthening it, by which 
 our acute accent and long quantity generally coincide, 
 and fall together on the * same syllable. If we pronounce 
 the word majesty, we utter the first syllable with an 
 acute higher tone and long, the two last with a grave 
 lower sound and short, majesty. Here, because the 
 same syllable is pronounced with a higher note, i. e. 
 acuted, and with a protracted one, i. e. lengthened at 
 the same time ; we are apt not to distinguish between 
 these two different modes of the same syllable, between 
 its accent and quantity. But let one brought up in 
 Scotland, pronounce this word, and we may soon mark 
 the difference between them; by his pronouncing the 
 first syllable long with an acute : as, majesty . 
 
 But the coincidence of the acute and long quantity 
 on the same syllable is certainly most f usual with us in 
 the pronunciation of our own language, (which will be 
 admitted by any one, who with this view attends to the 
 sound of an English voice.) And this has probably been 
 the occasion, that accent and quantity have been con- 
 
 * This is confirmed by the decisive acting together, 
 
 authority of Mr. Saml. Johnson, whose ,t I say most usual, not universal, 
 
 very great abilities and extensive eru- The accent is on a short syllable in 
 
 dition have done an honour to bis age privy, though on a long one in private. 
 
 and country. He, in the rules of his On the other hand, though the acuted 
 
 prosody prefixed to his dictionary, syllable is generally long, yet every 
 
 considers the acute tone and long quan- long one is not acuted. 
 tity, in English verse, as equivalent by
 
 26 ESSAY ON 
 
 founded together by numberless persons, not only in dis- 
 course, but in writing on this subject ; and quantity been 
 frequently considered, as excluded from our language. 
 There are several propositions of the following kind 
 in many parts of Dr. G.'s treatise, which, with all my at- 
 tention, it is not in my power to comprehend. A man, 
 (says he) of a phlegmatic temper will love long syllables, 
 and will be pleased with the majesty of quantity and ac 
 cent. If the use of accent and quantity be a sign of 
 phlegm and solemnity, every nation of the earth, from 
 the creation down to the present times, must come within 
 this description; and the Hottentots, Iroquois, and Sa- 
 mceids, are as majestic and solemn in their manner of 
 speech, as the fiapwTiKoi ^Eolians. For all these barba- 
 rous people have, I make not the least doubt, a voice 
 with at lea st two tones, and those varied in length ; and if 
 they have, they must have accent and quantity the same 
 in quality though not degree with Cicero and Demos- 
 thenes. Again, he says, that the great disproportion be- 
 tween long and short syllables in the northern languages 
 made it impossible to think of establishing quantity, &c. 
 He here writes as if language and its pronunciation were 
 established, like civil institutions, by public laws and 
 decrees. Pronunciation is originally established in all 
 places accidentally by the ear, to which the organs of 
 speech, without men's thought or attention, modulate 
 and adapt their sounds. We are apt indeed to say, that 
 the authority of such or such an ancient writer estab- 
 lishes the quantity of such a word : and so it does to us, 
 who cannot perhaps go further back for it. But this au- 
 thority did not really settle it at the time he wrote : the 
 actual pronunciation of his countrymen had before 
 determined it and familiarized it to the writer's ear; 
 from whence he adopted it ; and accordingly used the 
 syllable with that measure of sound, which he found as- 
 signed to it in common speech. If, when Virgil used the 
 first syllable of bonus short, his countrymen at the same 
 time had lengthened the sound of it, he would not only 
 have not succeeded in establishing his own quantity,
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 27 
 
 but by refusing to conform to the public ear in this and 
 the like instances, would have raised a disgust against 
 his writings, which must probably have stifled them in 
 their birth, For, as Scaliger well observes, " Quis nes- 
 cit a pueris sermonem ortum, sui usum agrestibus prae- 
 buisse ? quern ad eum modum acceptum, in alias distor- 
 quere leges, etiam sapientibus religio fuit. Quare his ita 
 positis ad pedum naturam et genera accedendum est.*" 
 Quantity therefore depends on nothing but the common 
 actual pronunciation; not on the authority of a writer, 
 not on rules : for it is antecedent to them. " Ante enim 
 carmen ortum est, quam observatio carminis.f" It may 
 be indeed afterwards, as it has been, reduced to rules ; 
 but those rules again relate not to the general pronun- 
 ciation of all languages. Many of these may have a 
 different manner of their own, on which difference par- 
 ticular rules may be formed for them, as particular ones 
 had been formed for others. This is the state of the case 
 between the quantity of ancient and modern languages, 
 and the rules respecting it ; which rules must always be 
 considered as following, not prescribing the pronuncia- 
 tion of any language. For, after all, let the rule be ever 
 so rational, the practice, which is conformable to it, is 
 not right on account of the rule, but the rule is right on 
 account of its conformity to the preceding practice. But 
 scholars often talk of speech, as if it were formed by 
 scholars ; whereas it was formed in every country long 
 before scholars remarked it. And when they do make 
 their remarks on it, they must take it as they find it. 
 The question always in this case is, not what could or 
 should be, but what is. And thus in regard to quantity ; 
 when a German can % precipitate his voice over four or 
 
 * Scalig. de pedum gener. in poet. brevia producunt, ul debauch^, imple. 
 
 lib. ii. Germani, Belga, Angli dipfhongos et 
 
 t Quinct. lib. ix. c. 4. positiones etiam difficiles subinde ne- 
 
 t This Henninius complains of, not gligunt : v. gr. immerdoer, overdracht, 
 
 only as perverting quantity, but as de- Kettinghen ; Hamilton, Canterbury." 
 
 stroying the very nature and essence *EXA»jv. '0^9. p. 87. j. cxi. 
 
 of it. " Galli longu subinde corripiunt,
 
 28 ESSAY ON 
 
 five consonants without lengthening the sound of the 
 preceding vowel, where a Greek or Roman voice would 
 be retarded by only two ; it is absurd to say, this Ger- 
 man has not a natural quantity. It is natural, formed as 
 much by the nature of his organs and senses, as that of 
 the Greeks and Romans by theirs. But many men call 
 that only natural and rational, * which is agreeable 
 to their own nature and partial way of thinking. Thus 
 an African thinks a white complexion unnatural, and 
 millions of Europeans think a black one so : whereas 
 both are natural, in a limited peculiar sense. A thing 
 may be natural without being universal. A Chinese or 
 Muscovite has the same right to call his particular pro- 
 nunciation a natural one, as Dr. G. has to call the Greek 
 and Roman by that name. When therefore he says that 
 " natural quantity" is excluded from the northern lan- 
 guages, he can mean only a particular kind of quantity 
 reducible to his own Greek and Latin rules of it. But 
 every language doth, beyond all doubt, establish a dif- 
 ference between syllables, making some long and others 
 short, and consequently hath a natural quantity, which 
 is one source of whatever harmony it hath. 
 
 I will not deny, that where there is a greater number 
 of vowels in a language, there will be more harmony. 
 Homer's iitXioio, or Herodotus's Iwiirlou, where out of 
 seven letters there are five syllables and six vowels, is 
 certainly infinitely superior in sweetness to Chrultznitz, 
 where in a greater number of letters there are but two 
 vowels and two syllables. But yet there is quantity in 
 Chrultznitz : there may be quantity with little harmony, 
 and indeed with scarcely any at all : for mere quantity, 
 consisting in general of only two measures, hath not in 
 itself sufficient variety to be the foundation of much 
 harmony, as will be fully shewn in another place. 
 
 * Thus Henninius calls tbatpronun- languages, the Arabic, Latin, and old 
 
 ation alone rational, which is directed Greek upon his plan. The pronnncia- 
 
 by a regard lo the peniiHinia. This lion of all other languages, particularly 
 
 takes in, according to hiin, only three the modern, is irrational. See p. 87. 88.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 29 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 The metre of the English language. The kinds of it. Why no hexameters. 
 Mere metre not sufficient to constitute good verse. In what the pronunciation 
 of the English, Scotch, Welch, and Irish, differs. 
 
 IF then quantity is not excluded from our language, 
 and the English, as well as Greek and Latin, metre is 
 regulated by it; a question may arise, why cannot our 
 language be adapted to the old heroic measure, consist- 
 ing of dactyls and spondees, as it is shewn by Dr. Bentley 
 to admit the iambic, trochaic, and some others. Our 
 common epic verse consisting of five feet, is trimeter 
 iambic brachycatalectic : 
 
 v An holiest man's \ the noblest ivdrk | of God. 
 Suls et Ip- | sa Roma vl- J rlbus. 
 
 '&2g wfyeXov \ irapoiOev lie- | \itthv. 
 
 And so far the common English iambic is in the qua- 
 lity of its feet, though not in number, like that of the 
 Greeks and Romans, admitting likewise, as they do, 
 dactyls, spondees, anapcests, and tribrachs. The dactyl 
 is not very common, but may be found in every place of 
 the verse, except the fifth : the rapidity of it on particu- 
 lar occasions in the second place, where it is unusual, 
 has great force, especially when joined with other quick 
 feet, the trochee or Pyrrhic : as in these, 
 
 Shoots in- | visible \ virtue | e'en to the deep. 
 With im | petuous | recoil, and jarring sound. 
 
 The anapast is common in every place, and it would 
 appear much oftencr, with propriety and grace, if abbre-
 
 30 ESSAY ON 
 
 viations were more avoided. The tribrach too is often 
 seen, as in 
 
 Yet beauty, tho' injurious, hath strange power. 
 
 But there is one particularity in our iambic, in which 
 it differs very much from that of the ancients. They, it 
 is well known, never admitted a trochee into their iam- 
 bics ; according to them 6 Tpoyaioc avrnraQu no 'Ia/u^y. 
 But in the English, a trochee placed at the beginning of 
 an iambic verse gives it a peculiar beauty and vigour, as 
 in this : 
 
 Die of | a rose in aromatic pain. 
 
 This pleasing effect of the trochee Mr. Pope, beyond 
 all other English poets, seems to have felt, and has ac- 
 cordingly used it oftener than any of them. He has like- 
 wise introduced it on particular occasions with great 
 success, in the middle, as well as the beginning of his 
 verse, and even at the end of a sentence : 
 
 On all sides round the forest hurls her oaks 
 Headlong. 
 
 In general, that nervous springiness (if I may so ex- 
 press it) so very observable in Mr. Pope's metre, is often 
 owing chiefly to a trochee beginning his line. And the 
 weakest lines among his, in point of versification, are 
 those which begin with a pure iambic. The trochee is 
 admitted in every place of our verse, except the last. 
 It is sometimes followed by an iambic, and so forms the 
 choriambic, as in the foregoing, die of a rose: sometimes 
 by a spondee, and so forms the second epitrite, as 
 
 Lives through all life, extends through all extent. 
 It must be so : Cato, thou reason's t well.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 31 
 
 The second epitrite, and clioriambic, appear, both in 
 this: 
 
 Boiv'd their stiff necks j louden with stormy blasts. 
 
 The clioriambic in the first and second places, or third 
 and fourth, is better than in the second and third, or 
 fourth and fifth ; as in 
 
 Wliere were ye, nymplis \ wlien the remorseless deep — 
 
 it is more harmonious, than in this, 
 
 In their triple degrees, regions to which — 
 Fierce rain with lightning mixt, ivater with fire. 
 
 The pyrrhic too is as frequently admitted into our 
 verse, as the trochee, and very greatly contributes to the 
 variety of the modulation. It is chiefly excluded from 
 the last place in rhymed verses, by the mere force of 
 the rhime : it is however sometimes admitted there, and 
 in blank verse very often, especially in dramatic poetry, 
 where it gives a more natural air and kind of ease to 
 the dialogue : 
 
 In the calm lights of mild Philosophy. 
 
 It is sometimes followed by a spondee, and so forms 
 the minor ionic, as here, 
 
 Eternity, thou pleasing, dreadful thought. 
 Each praifr accepted, and each wish resign d 
 
 Sometimes it is followed by an iambic, and so forms the 
 fourth pceon: 
 
 As full as perfect in a hair, as heart. 
 J del, who with inhospitable guile.
 
 32 ESSAY ON 
 
 Though the measure formed by the pyrrhic and spon- 
 dee, is very agreeable to an English ear, and probably 
 was so to an Ionian, yet to a Roman it seems to have 
 been not so pleasing, if we may judge in this case from 
 the omission of Horace, who among the Latin writers 
 is distinguished by the name of numerosus, and has left 
 but one instance of this* Ionic measure, of which he 
 seems to have been soon tired, 
 
 Miserarum est | neque anion \ dart, ludum. 
 
 Though he hardly gave it a fair trial, as he used it 
 unmixed. I wish we had the whole of that ode of Sap- 
 pho, which began with one of these verses : 
 
 Tt jue IlavSt- | ov\q wpa- \ va Y/AtSwv. 
 
 This Ionic movement we have in some of our songs. 
 
 The admission of so many different measures into our 
 common verse, gives it a variety (which in all modula- 
 tion is of the greatest consequence, and in Milton most 
 remarkable) not to be exceeded, if equalled, in any of 
 the ancient kinds of metre, at least not in their epic and 
 dramatic. That, which makes our verse fall short of 
 the excellence of the ancient, is the want of that dignity 
 and solemnity, which distinguishes their heroic measure. 
 
 The compass of our long heroic verse is but narrow. 
 A Latin or Greek epic line does, in the language of 
 prosody, consist of twenty four times. A Latin or 
 
 * Tereutianus Maurus has taken notice of this, in two Ionic lines : 
 
 Simili le- \ gc sonantes | numeros ad | Nenbnlen 
 Dedit uno ] modulatus | lepide car- j mine Flaccus. 
 
 Hephnestion mentions an ode of Ale- Ionic from the two Phrynichi, the tra- 
 
 man, and one of Sappho in this metre, gic and comic poets. Pag. 39. edit, 
 
 and gives a verse from eacli ; as like- Pauw. Dr. Benfley says in primis 
 
 wise from Alcaeus, who is said hy him dulce est metrum (not. ad Hor. cann. 
 
 to have written several odes in the lib. iii. 12.) and thinks the difficulty of 
 
 same measure. He cites also some it alone prevented Horace from making 
 
 trctrametercatalectic lines of the minor a second attempt.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 33 
 
 Greek iambic, if pure, of eighteen times. But the long 
 English heroic, if it consists of pure iambics, has but 
 fifteen times. So that it is, for this reason among 
 others, difficult for an English poet to translate any 
 number of Latin or Greek iambics or hexameters into a 
 like number of English epic lines. 
 
 But to resume our question. If the English admits 
 the iambic, why not the dactylic and spondeic metre ? 
 The reason seems to be this : there are not many dactyls 
 in our language, and hardly any spondees, I mean, scarce 
 ever two syllables, next to each other in the same word, 
 both long alike, as they frequently are in Greek and 
 Latin. In general our language is iambic and trochaic, 
 our dissyllable nouns being for the most part trochaic, 
 and our verbs iambic, as in the 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 frequent 
 
 frequent 
 
 converse 
 
 converse 
 
 concert 
 
 concert 
 
 process 
 
 proceed 
 
 premise 
 
 premise 
 
 refuse 
 
 refuse, or refund 
 
 produce 
 
 produce 
 
 present 
 
 present 
 
 object 
 
 object 
 
 project 
 
 project 
 
 absent 
 
 absent 
 
 contest 
 
 contest 
 
 conduct 
 
 conduct 
 
 descant 
 
 descant. 
 
 Some polysyllables are indeed dactylic : but in most 
 words of more than two syllables, the long syllable is 
 so placed, as to make the word, when divided, resolve 
 itself into an iambic or: trochaic foot, as reft- \ ner, or 
 re- | fintr. Thus for the most part the long and short 
 syllables of our language are alternate. And accord- 
 
 D
 
 34 ESSAY ON 
 
 ingly in many words derived from Latin, those letters 
 Which form two short syllables together in their original 
 tongue, in English form but one, by which the long and 
 short times succeed each other alternately. This is 
 seen particularly in substantives ending in ion, as nation, 
 mention, which sound and are scanned in metre thus, 
 nienshon, nashon, where our last short syllable makes 
 two in Latin, mentio, nafio. This tendency of our lan- 
 guage to iambic and trochaic measure hath insensibly 
 made it run so much into verses of that kind, and ren- 
 dered it incapable of bending to the ancient heroic me- 
 tre ; which Avas the reason of Sir Philip Sydney's mis- 
 carriage in attempting to introduce English hexameters 
 on the Greek and Latin plan, 
 
 And Sydney 's verse halts ill on Roman feet. 
 
 This is confirmed by Dr. Bentley, who speaks of the 
 metra dactylica in relation to our own language, as a 
 kind, quod patria lingua non recipit. By this means 
 our language is deprived of that kind of metre, which is 
 of all others the most noble and solemn, according to 
 what Longinus truly says of the dactylic measures, 
 *£uy£VH7TciTot ovtoi Ktu fieyeOoTroiol: and Aristotle likewise, 
 •f 6 fj.lv fipqoQ ae/avbg, ku\ ov Xzktikoq : whereas the iambic 
 more nearly approaches to common discourse, 6 Si tap- 
 pog avri] \ariv i) \££,ig twv 7roX\{ov' dio fiaXicTTa ttuvtiov tCov 
 julrpwv lafifiua fyOiyyovTCii \iyovreg*. But in whatever 
 metre the long and short syllables are alternate, to that 
 our language is easily adapted : as to this, where the 
 amphibrachys is used, 
 
 With honour \ and glory \ through trouble \ and danger 
 
 * Nobilissimi hi sunt, et ad sublimi- $ Iambus est ipsa dirtio vulgi. quare 
 
 tatem facientes. Sect. 39. Aristides maxime cmnium metrorum Iamhica effe- 
 
 Qninlilianus accounts for this, de Mu- mint vulgo hquevtes. Rhet. iii. 8. See 
 
 sic. lib. i. p. 51. also Poet. c. 4. 
 t Pes Herons snlomis, nee sermoni tiptuS.
 
 ACCENT ANI5 Qt ANTITY. 35 
 
 or where the cretic, 
 
 O the sweet \ country life | blest with health \ peace and 
 
 (ease. 
 
 (As this foot is called the fescenninc, it probably was 
 chietly used in the old poetic ribaldry, that has the same 
 name.) But to none more happily than the trochaic, to 
 express alacrity, and exultation : 
 
 Vital J spark of j heav'nli/ \ flame: 
 Quit, uh quit this mortal frame : 
 HarJc ! they ivhisper ; Angels say, 
 Sister spirit, come away. 
 
 So Milton in describing his rustic jollity, 
 
 When the \ merry \ bells ring \ round, 
 And the jocund rebecks sound, 
 To many a youth and many a maid 
 Dancing In the chequer' d shade. 
 
 There is indeed no kind or degree of harmony, of 
 which our language is capable, which may not be found 
 in numberless instances through Milton's writings : the 
 excellency of whose ear seems to have been equal to 
 that of his imagination and learning. 
 
 Notwithstanding the confidence, with which it is often 
 affirmed, that English metre depends on accent and not 
 on quantity, which I have endeavoured to refute ; and 
 though I have allowed that accent jointly with quantity 
 doth direct it ; yet I cannot help thinking, that the es- 
 sence of it is founded in quantity alone. And to this I 
 am induced by the following fact : let a Scotchman take 
 some verses of any of our poets, as these, 
 
 All human things are subject to decay, 
 
 And when fate summons, monarchs must obey. 
 
 He will pronounce them with the accent transposed thus, 
 
 d2
 
 36 ESSAY ON 
 
 All human things are subject to decay, 
 
 And when Fate summons, mondrchs must obey. 
 
 Now, though he alters the tones, and transfers the 
 acute from the beginning to the end of words, yet in this 
 pronunciation the metre still essentially subsists,because 
 founded in quantity, which is not violated by him. Did 
 the metre depend on accent, it would be necessarily 
 disturbed and destroyed by his transposition of that 
 accent. 
 
 Metre depends on quantity alone. Rhythm is in its 
 nature more complex, and seems to comprehend accent 
 with quantity. The difference between mere metre, and 
 rhythm, considered in this light, will be readily seen by 
 any one upon reading the two following lines : 
 
 Tali | cbncidil J impiger \ ictus ] vulnere j Cdesar 
 H6c ic- | tus ceci- | dit vio- \ lento \ vulnere \ Cdesar. 
 
 The metre here in both is the same, accurate and 
 good : but the rhythm, by which I mean the result of the 
 whole, is different, being in the former verse very bad : 
 because, though the times in each foot of it are right, 
 the tones, in regard to the modulation of the whole, are 
 wrong and placed improperly. " Neque vero tarn sunt 
 intuendi pedes, quam universa comprehensio."* Scali- 
 gerf, I know, accounts for the bad rhythm of such verses 
 as the preceding (where single words complete single 
 feet, and both are closed together) by saying, that the 
 words in scanning should run into each other, as stones 
 and pieces of timber do in buildings, where the joints 
 are carefully diversified. But this is only a rhetorical 
 illustration of the fact (i. e. the ccesura) in Greek and 
 Roman verse, not an explanation of the cause in gene- 
 ral. If this principle of his operated universally, it 
 would in our language, and the following verse would 
 accordingly be faulty in rhythm, 
 
 * Quinct. ix, 4. t Puttie. II. J. tt iv. 49.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 37 
 
 Heroes, repel attacks, command success. 
 
 Here the single feet are each separately complete in 
 single words, as in the Latin line above : and yet in this 
 English verse there is no want of poetical rhythm and 
 harmony. The case seems to be this : since with us the 
 long times and acute tones coincide, if these times are 
 right, the tones cannot be wrong ; and therefore what- 
 ever makes true metre, will always make tolerable 
 rhythm. But in another language, where the long quan- 
 tity and accent are frequently separate, the times and 
 metre may be perfectly right, and yet, by a particular 
 position of the tones, the rhythm may be very defective. 
 This thing however is of a subtile nature, and admits 
 perhaps of a different and better explanation. I can at 
 present see no other reason, except that assigned above, 
 why the Latin and Greek verse should require the* 
 ccesura anymore than the English. We may be assured, 
 that the harmony of ancient verse was somehow affected 
 by accent, even if the ccesura was not at all connected 
 with it, because Quinctilian says, (lib. xii. c. 10.) that 
 the difference between the Greek and Latin accent occa- 
 sioned the difference in point of sweetness between the 
 
 * On the application of the ccesura therefore perhaps no caesura. Athe- 
 iu ancient metre, see Beda de metr. ra- nasus mentions a poem of Castorion 
 tion. p. 2368. Dr. Bentley, de metr. Solensis, as a very particular one, 
 Terent. p. 2. et seq. and more fully Mr. wherein the single feet were completed 
 
 D'orville, Crit. Van. p. 323. et seq. in single words. To Je Kao-ro^iajvof tou 
 The only kind of verse, wherein it was 2o\sa>f, ij o KXsa^o; <p>i<nv, Et? tov ITava 
 
 not required, was the anapcEstic. Be- irolri(j.a. toiovtov Ia-r<. T£v -aroSaiv £xa<n-of 
 
 cause, as that consisted of no particu- o'Xoif hiifxavi mpi£t\» l u/j.iv<i; Travra; oy.oitct 
 
 lar number of feet, but was capable of hyef*ovMol{ xai ax.o\ovSr>TiKovt; e^ei tov; 
 
 being either extended to agrert length, -bjcJoj tovtojv $e eWo-toj tZm iroSSiv, 
 
 or cut short after any foot ; it had not ij a; t? Ta£si 8?;, to airo ^etjOv a.7ro- 
 
 auy one foot written with a regard to Swsi. Castorion Solensis, at Cleurchus 
 
 another, (except in the quantity of its elicit, in Panu hujusmodipoema condidit. 
 
 final syllable,) but each was independ- Singuli pedes iniegris vocabutis compre- 
 
 ent of the other, being detached and hensi, et antecedentes et stquentes omnes 
 
 complete in itself: and thus there was pedes similes habent Horumpe- 
 
 uorhythrnofaiy/ej/est'fQffeet.asinoiber dum quisque, quocunque modo iispona- 
 
 measures required or observed, and ti r, idem metrum reddet. lib. x. p. 455.
 
 'H? ESSAY ON 
 
 Greek and Roman verse, and gave so great a superiority 
 to the former. 
 
 There are many accounts of the poetical 'VvOuqq or 
 mimerus to be met with among the grammarians, both 
 ancient and modern ; some of which I do not clearly 
 understand. Of those which are intelligible to me, I 
 know not any one more full and satisfactory, than this 
 which Scaliger gives. " Oritur fPufy/oc vel numeru&] 
 ex partium quantitate, qualitate, dispositione. Quan- 
 titas duplex, in corpore et in tempore : corpus appello 
 dictionis extensionem, tempus tractum pronunciationis. 
 Qualitas in tenore etin sono : tenorem intelligo elationein 
 vocis aut depressionem, sonum aeris verberationem qua- 
 lemcunque. Dispositio comprehendit locum, situm, 
 ordinem. Quod ambigua voce dixerunt numerum ve- 
 teres (nobis liceat) canorem appellemus. Est quippe 
 numerus in oratione concentus quidam*." The reader 
 may see this further explained by Scaliger, with great 
 discernment and subtlety, in another passge, wherein he 
 shews, how rhythm comprehends metre, and ought to di- 
 rect it.f Aristotle, with his usual brevity, says the same 
 in his poetics, where having mentioned the difference of 
 letters in oaawrjn teal \pi\oTr)Ti, kcu ju//i«t kcu j3pa\vTr]TL, tri 
 
 §£ KCU O^VT^Tl KCU j3apUT7}Tt KCU TCO /X£(TW, he ObSCrVCS, that 
 
 each of these particulars is to be regarded, where metre 
 is concerned, ween &v Kaff 1 ekcmtov wv toiq wcrpticoTc irpocn'}- 
 
 Kit QshfOUV. 
 
 In regard to the difference of manner in the pronun- 
 ciation of our own language among those different na- 
 tions which use it, it may be stated thus: 
 
 The English join the acute and long time together, as 
 in r/berti/. 
 
 The Scotch observe our quantity, and alter our ac- 
 cent : liberty. When I say they observe our quantity, 
 I mean they pronounce the same syllabic long which 
 we do, but they make it longer. In respect to the cir- 
 cumflex with winch their pronunciation abounds, it may 
 
 * Puftic. in. 44. t hi. ii. 2.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 39 
 
 be remarked that it is not formed, as the Greek, Latin, 
 and English, of an acute and grave, but of a grave and 
 acute, vdvg. ros. round, Engl, round, Scot. 
 
 The Irish observe our quantity and accent too, but 
 with a greater degree of spirit or emphasis, which Sca- 
 liger calls ajflatio in latitudine, giving to most syllables 
 an aspiration : liberty. 
 
 The Welch keep our quantity, and alter the accent, 
 with a manner of voice, which Cicero calls aspera, frac- 
 ta, scissa, flexo sono: liberty'. 
 
 Nor need we wonder, that in the different provinces and 
 kingdoms where our language is used, there should be a 
 variation in the tones, though there be none in the syl- 
 lables themselves, or their quantity. The same exactly 
 was the case of the Greek tongue in different countries. 
 The Asiatic Greeks in using the very same word and 
 quantity with the Attics, pronounced it with a different 
 spirit* and accent: What an Attic called Itpsiig, an iEo- 
 lian did Upevg, what the former did eyw, the latter iytrt. 
 The same general adherence to words and quantity, and 
 particular variation of tone and spirit are certainly ob- 
 servable in the use of our own language now; the man- 
 ner of pronunciation among the Scotch, and Welch, 
 being oxytone, that of the English and Trish barytone; 
 the former carrying the accent forward to the end of 
 
 * The particular accent oftlie Altics, (torn. II. p. 189) Las turned from Io- 
 dislinguished from that of tlie other nic into Attic Greek, the difference be- 
 Greeks, is shewn at large, from the Iween the two, which is first observa- 
 best grammarians of antiquitj', by H. ble, is the frequent aspiration in Ihe 
 Steph. App.de Dial. Attic, p. 192. latter, not seen in the former. The At- 
 193. 194. Eustat. 341. 12. 21. Their tics aspirated the middle or final, as 
 particular aspiration is remarked by well as initial syllables, as TaS; nien- 
 Tzetzes on Hesiod. To eXi* 'attixoi tioned by Athenneus (p. 397. Casaub.) 
 Saa-uvovtrr ol Ss Xocaroi Travrsj vf-iXou<ri- out of Trypho. A final aspiration is ob- 
 Oi yap Attikoi SaavvTai e'sti, \iytv- served by Prisoian, in the Roman, Sy- 
 TEf XiV<f>oi, if Kal to S./xa^a- h Si rian, and ^Egyptian languages. Putsch. 
 Kcm haKtKTog Kal to a/xa^a 4-iXo~, Ka- p. 548. 9. Caninius from Athenaeus and 
 0s>5 Aa;£if Kal AioXif, Kal tuvig. p. 108. Huslathius takes notice of several mid- 
 See also 1'iersonad Mcerid. p. 179. In die syllables being aspirated, that have 
 the gpeecfc of Xerxes, in the Polyhym- no niaik of it at present, 
 niaof Her'jdetn>, which Dionysitis Hal.
 
 40 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 words, and the latter drawing it backwards towards the 
 beginning. In this method of considering pronunciation 
 I have followed Sir John Cheke's direction : whose words 
 on this head are remarkable, declaring, " that the na- 
 ture of ancient pronunciation is not so abstruse, as not 
 to be capable of being explained, and even illustrated 
 in writing : nor by any means so difficult and intricate, 
 as not to lie open and obvious, if a scholar would apply 
 it to his own language : nor yet at the same time so un- 
 serviceable and fruitless, as not to afford him the means 
 of easily discovering and marking out the traces of an- 
 cient eloquence."* 
 
 The learned and judicious J. Pierson makes the same 
 application of the Greek language to his own. " The 
 Attics," says he,f " uttered several words with a particu- 
 lar accent and spirit, as we are taught by all the gram- 
 marians. And I would not have such observations as 
 these rejected as the imaginary and trifling conceits of 
 teachers. For is not the same variation observable in 
 the use of our own language, in different provinces ?" 
 Aldus % has made a like remark on the Italian. 
 
 The consequences drawn from the peculiarity of join- 
 ing the acute with a long time, in pronouncing our own 
 language, shall be considered by me afterwards, as they 
 affect our pronunciation of Latin and Greek, and have 
 not, as far as I know, been hitherto observed. 
 
 * .. ■ 
 
 1 Pronunciationis ratio non tam ab- quam magistrorum uugas et mera deli- 
 pita et recondita est, quit) oratione non rameuta a quibusdam explodi. In lin- 
 modo doceri, sed illustrari possit : ne- gua vernacula quis ignorat Zelandos 
 que tam difficilis aut aspera, quin faci- inulta cum spiritu aspero proferre, 
 lem ingressum el facilem viam habeat, quae caeteriBelgasleniler pronunciant?" 
 si quis eruditus earn primo ad Lalinam, Prtef. ad Mxrid. Atticist. p. 34. 
 deinde ad vernaculam linguam transfe- f " Imitamur tamen hanc linguarum 
 rat : neque tain inutilis aut infructuosa, varietatem et copiam lingua vulgari. 
 quin magnum antiquae eloquentiae in ea Non enini eadem est Romanis lingua, 
 et gravilatis vestigium facile cernat." qua; Parthenopa?is, qua; Calabris, quaj 
 Epist. ad Steph. Episc. Vinton, p. 158. Siculis. Aliter Florentiui loquuntur. 
 t " Attici inulta vocabula accentu aliter Genuenses. Veneti a Mediolanen- 
 mutato pioferebaot, et multa a vocnlj sibus lingua et pronunciatione multum 
 iucipientia aspirabant. Nollem beec tan- diflerunt." Pruf. ad Hart. Adon.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 65 
 
 CHAP. IV. j. 
 
 On the accent of the Romans. The agreement of the Latin accent and dialect 
 with the Mulic. Some account of the iEolism of the Roman language. Ho- 
 mer's holism. An argument drawn from thence in favour of our present Greek 
 accentuation. The difference between the Roman apex and accentual mark. 
 
 THAT the Romans had a regular accent, that is, used 
 a particular elevation and depression of voice on cer- 
 tain syllables, distinct from the prolongation of it, is 
 evident, not only from the nature of things and neces- 
 sity of the human voice, but likewise as a fact, is clear 
 from what will have greater weight with many persons ; 
 I mean, from the fullest and most undoubted authority. 
 Not to trouble the reader with numberless and needless 
 testimonies, I shall insist chiefly on Cicero and Quinc- 
 tilian, who will doubtless be allowed to have been ac- 
 curately acquainted with the niceties of their own lan- 
 guage, which in their writings they had frequently occa- 
 sion to discuss. Cicero in several passages, some of 
 which are cited above, expressly speaks of this thing, 
 as well known and observed by his countrymen. The 
 word accentus was not perhaps known in his time : but 
 I am here speaking of the * thing ; and that certainly 
 
 •"Quaecunque syllaba, simpliciter in 
 pronunciando paulum inten debatnr f ilia 
 dicebatur acui eiacutum habere accen- 
 tum, cujus nota fuit lineola ab sinistra 
 parte, unde scribimus, sese e;igens. 
 Reliquse syllabae.quae remissius pronun- 
 ciabantur, credebantur habere gravem 
 accentum, quasi in guttur subsidentem, 
 et proinde ejus nota fuit lineola ab si- 
 nistra parte sese demittens. Notis qui- 
 dem istis vetercs non reperiuntur usi, 
 sed tamen snuos ipsos, prout vel inten- 
 debantur, vel remittebantur, istis appel- 
 
 lationibus dislinxerunt." — Perizonius 
 ad Sanctii Minerv. lib. i. cap. 3. 
 
 The reader will, I doubt not, be 
 pleased with whatScaliger says on this 
 head. " Gravem appellarunt, ab instru- 
 ments scilicet vocis : propterea quod 
 in guttur aut pectus earn demitteremus. 
 Alteram autem priorem illam ab affec- 
 tn potiiisnominaruutacufum: ferit enim 
 aures, quarum viribus objecta est. . . . 
 . . . Evenit autem ut du<e syllabi inter 
 se concurrerent, quarum prior liaberet 
 acutuin, altera gravem : quare ea; cum
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 was ; as the word was afterwards used in the time of 
 Quinctilian. 
 
 This author not only mentions the Roman accents oc- 
 casionally, but treats particularly of them, and lays 
 down those rules, to which they might be reduced in the 
 pronunciation of his countrymen. As I shall hereafter 
 refer to these rules, when I come to consider our mo- 
 dern pronunciation of the Latin language, I will extract 
 the principal ones from his book of institutions, and set 
 them before the reader. That author having said that 
 the accent was never carried back beyond the third syl- 
 lable, then shews in what manner it was placed on those 
 three, to which it was confined. 
 
 In Polysyllables, the penultimate, if it be long, 
 will have either an acute or circumflex : as contemnit, 
 ordior. If the penultimate be short, the antepenulti- 
 mate will have an acute : as mfacimus, dnimus, legeres, 
 perlegeres. " Trium porro [syllabarum] de quibus lo- 
 quor, media longa, aut acuta aut flexa erit : eodem loco 
 brevis utique gravem habebit sonum, ideoque positam 
 ante se, id est ab ultima tertiam, acuet." 
 
 In dissyllables, the penultimate will be always ac- 
 cuted:* as magnus, bonis, legos, amas. (This does not 
 
 eoalescerent, concreverunt in imum but mention a few exceptions. As M- 
 
 Cliara ipsi apices sic, * : quem Graeci lius Donatus in his editio prima, after 
 
 cum m%ia-Trxy.ivm dixerunt, abusi sunt having said " Aculus, cum in Graecis 
 
 li<;entiainventionis:nequeenimcircum- diclionibus tria loca teneat, ultimnm, 
 
 traclus fuit, sed o-vs-'rtcby.tvm rectius no- penultimum el. antepenultimum ; teneat 
 
 miiiassent. Nostri quoque circumjiexum apud Latinos penultimum et anlepe- 
 
 cum appellarunt, ad celeritatem potius nultimuin, ullimum nunquam :" Yet 
 
 pinsjentis manus respexere, qua? unico presently after subjoins ; " In Latinis 
 
 piotu virgulam arcuatam fecil, angulo nunquam accentus in ultima syllaba 
 
 dempto, sic. '" .'' — De causis ling. Lat. poni potest, nisi discretions causa, ut 
 
 lib. ii. cap. 53. There is much to this in adverbio pone, ideo, ne verbum pu- 
 
 purpose,andof the samenalure, in Just. tetur imperativi modi: neque circum- 
 
 Lipsius de pronunl. rect. Lat. ling. flexus, nisi in ea particula quae est, er- 
 
 c. 18. go.'' These two exceptions are men- 
 
 * Quinctilian sajsa/uw/y, Theother lioneci in like manner b_v 3Iax. Viotori- 
 
 old grammarians aftei hjm saj the sanie: nus. Putsch, p. 1913.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 48 
 
 exclude the circumflex, which always contains an acute, 
 and seems to have fallen on penultimates long by na- 
 ture, with the last short : as poma, p&ra) " Est in omni 
 voce acuta, sed nunquam plus una: nee ultima unquam : 
 ideoque in dissyllabis prior. Prasterea nunquam in ea- 
 «Jem flexa et acuta, quoniam eadem flexa ex acuta; 
 itaque ueutra claudet vocem Latinam." 
 
 In monosyllables, the single syllable will be acuted 
 or circumflexed : as quad, quis, (probably acuted, if 
 short, or long only by position ; and circumflexed, if 
 long by nature, as dens, mos) " Ea vero quae sunt sylla- 
 bse unius, erunt acuta aut flexa, ne sit aliqua vox sine 
 acuta."* These rules of Quinctilian are comprised in a 
 clear and concise manner within four hexameters by 
 Franciscus Sanctius : 
 
 Accentum in se ipsa monosyllaba dictioponit. 
 Exacuit sedem dissyllabon omne priorem. 
 Ex tribus, extollit primam penidtima eurta: 
 Extollit seipsam quando est penultima longa. 
 
 My exposition of Quinctilian is confirmed by Diome- 
 des in his second book, and by Priscian in his treatise 
 on the Latin accent : both of whom comment very fully 
 and distinctly on these rules of Quinctilian, making but 
 very few exceptions. There are indeed a few deviations 
 (much fewer thau might naturally be expected in the 
 compass of so extensive and copious a language) to be 
 met with in the Latin grammarians : as in Festus on the 
 word adeo, and in f Gellius from Annianus; where some 
 Latin critics refine so much, that Scioppius confesses 
 he can not, and Sealiger declares he will not follow them. 
 
 * Quinct. lib. i. c. 5. as ciled above ; c. 21, 22. But more 
 
 t Lib. vii. c. 7. But what Gellius largely by Despauterius in his chapter 
 
 says on the whole in that chapter, is de Accentibus et punctis : where the 
 
 reducible to Quinctilian's doctrine. — reader may see what has been said on 
 
 There are other exceptions collected by the Latin accent by grammarians sin.ee 
 
 Carnlus from Priscianj &c. in his Ani- Priscian's time. See also Sealiger de 
 
 waeiu. lib. vii. c. ". And by Lipsuis, Caus. c. 62, 63-
 
 44 ESSAY ON 
 
 I cannot here omit taking notice of a great impropriety 
 in the use of circumflex and acute marks in modern 
 editions of Latin authors, in which we continually meet 
 with these marks on the last syllables of words, as in 
 adverbs, docte, fere, (this final grave mark being under- 
 stood, according to grammarians, to have the power of 
 an acute,) and oblique cases of substantives, as musd, 
 gradus, in direct opposition to Quinctilian's declaration 
 here, that neither the acute nor circumflex ever falls on 
 the last syllable. There were some persons in his time 
 who affected to depart from his rule, and would place 
 the accent on the last syllable of some words, such as 
 the preposition circum, to distinguish the sense of them 
 from that of homonymous words. But this practice he 
 seems to think unnecessary,* and contrary to the genius 
 of the Roman language, derived from the iEolian.f 
 The iEolians drew the accent back in many cases, where 
 the other Greeks did not. Thus they altered the com- 
 mon futures of the fifth conjugation, as 6pw, tcAw, which 
 they made 6paw, HXaw ; the circumflexed terminations 
 of the genitive cases in wv of the first and second de- 
 
 * If to modern readers some mark mur, plerumque hac nota monendi su- 
 of distinction should appear necessary mus." Lib. i. c. 7. Why then should not 
 (as perhaps it may) on such occasions, we print and write favia, manits, plane, 
 to prevent ambiguity, I can see no rea- instead of fama, maiius, plane? Lipsius 
 son why the mark of time, (the old Ro- was sensible of this common misappli- 
 man apex, of which more will be said cation of circumflex and acute marks, 
 in another place,) mentioned and au- and apologizes for using the former, by 
 thorized by Quinctilian, should not be saying, " do me et perraitlo sive typo- 
 adopted by us. The apex was like our graphis sive vulgo" (de proinint. Lat. 
 mark of a long quantity, and its use ling. c. 20.) " Ego ejus [Apicis] loco 
 thus shewn by Quinct. " necessarium, accentu flexo utor, vel abutor in meis 
 quum eadem lilera alium atque alium libellis: quia typograpliis ita visum, 
 inlellectum, prout correpta vel pro- At priscum illud reduci veliin." c. 5. 
 ducta est, facit ; ut malus utrum arbo- t Continet autem (Etymologia) in se 
 rem significet, an hominem nun bonum, multam eruditionem, sive ilia ex Graecis 
 apicedistinguitur. Palus aliud priore orla tractemus, quae sunt plurima, prse- 
 syllaba longa, aliud sequenti significat : cipueque JEolicu ratione, cui est sermo 
 el cum eadem litera nominativo casu noUer simillinius, declinala: sive, &c. 
 brevis, ftblativo longa est.ulriim sequa- Quinct. lib. i. c. 6.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 45 
 
 clension they turned into awv : the circumflexed dv in 
 the infinitive of futures or second aorists, into kiv. 
 
 This difference of the ^Eolic pronunciation from that 
 of the rest of Greece is remarked not only by late gram- 
 marians, but by those of a higher date and character. 
 Joannes Grammaticus* in his treatise irtpi SiaXticrwv 
 gives instances of it in almost every page of his book. 
 According to him, to avoid a final circumflex or acute, 
 the iEolians would divide a monosyllable in two, to gain 
 a penultima for the acute, making tralq and Saig from 
 iraiq and Seng. Corinthus also in his book on the same 
 subject observes the same ; and then mentions particu- 
 larly their not having a dual number, which peculiarity, 
 he says, passed from them to the Romans : + rote SffKote 
 apiOfioig ovtol icl^prjvrat ovcafiuQ, Ka9a o») ical 61 'Ywfxaloi, 
 Tourwv ovr£c awoiKoi. But that which is the clearest tes- 
 timony of this vEolic peculiarity, and which even Vos- 
 
 * Joannes Grammaticus, called like- 
 wise Philoponus, and Corinthus tteji 
 iietXenraiv published at the end of Las- 
 caris' grammar. ISicv Js avrne; icrri tcs; 
 Ifyjrovove; Xs'^Sij avn<rTp£<f>£iV yoiacrxiXkaQa 
 evoyara Siaigti, TtL'it;, Jai'j , iwi rov 7ra~c, 
 $&'<;• iSia;? Ji obroi, ccra ma£ nfjCt Sacrvvtrat 
 t) o^urovtirai, J,i\S)s \tyovcri nal Bagurivctic;' 
 Baguromvcri Se ob fx.ovov rx QVoy.ct.ra, aXXa 
 Kal t« ag9ga. to. $£ Jis-DXXa&a, l£uriva>( 
 ira.% hyii heyo/xeva, avrol Ba^vrovaZcn- e9oj 
 Ji e^ciutri xai t« W^OTnyo^iXa. @a.gimv. 
 To. Js a.<&apiy.$ara xara'Kr.yovra e'c e7v, 
 avrol e'j eij {xerafiaWovtri. voily vUic., <ppo- 
 viiv <f>£0V£t?, JtaXsiv xaXEij- so likewise yt- 
 XttV yi'Kai;, Trsivav TTEivaij, opQovv ogflot?, 
 p^gue-oDv %pvo~otg. Proprium hnjus dia- 
 lecti est oxytonas dictiones invertere. Mo- 
 ncsyllaba nomina dhidit, traic;, Sai'f, ab 
 irais, Sat?. Peculiariter hi, quazcunque 
 apud nos aspirantur vel aciitum in ulti- 
 ma syllaba habent, cum spiritu leni et 
 acceutu in penultima dicunt. Barytona 
 faciunt non solum nomina, sed et articu- 
 los . Dissyllaba, apud nos oiytona, ipsi 
 barytona efferunt. Solent etiam et ap- 
 
 pellativa gravare. Infinitiva verba in 
 £~v desinentia illi in ei? mutant, vos~v voei?, 
 <J>povE~v (ppo'vEi?, ytXav yi\ais, ofloZv ogScut;. 
 So oxytone participles become bary- 
 tones il^rjuiig ilariKCiiv, vEvoijxa;? VEvewxaiy. 
 These instances of the transposition 
 of the JEolic tones are collected from 
 different parts of Joannes Grammaticus. 
 t Dualibus numeris hi nequaquam 
 ■utebantur, sicut etiam et Romani, coloni 
 ab his deducti. Quincliliau speaks of 
 some persons, who were of opinion that 
 the Roman language had a dual in the 
 third person of verbs ending in re, as 
 scripsere, legere. But this usage of the 
 final re he will cot by any means allow 
 to be a dual, but only applied to soften 
 the pronunciation, evitanda: asperitatis 
 causa, ideoque quod vocant duale, in illo 
 sologenere consistit. Whereas, had there 
 been a dual here in the verbs, there 
 would probably have been one in nouns: 
 as the Greeks had in both. He there- 
 fore concludes, there certainly is no 
 doal in his language. Lib. i. c. 5.
 
 46 ESSAY OH 
 
 sius himself would admit, is, what Apollonius Dyscolus 
 hath observed in regard to that dialect, as it appears in 
 some fragments of his published by Reitzius. Iv TtS irepl 
 tTis sya> nai &y^y«j says he, AloXug fiapiwg. So again 
 AIoXuq ifxoi $a$km* In another place for i/dug vju&c or 
 vufxeg AloXmv ; and for ri/xilg, AloXug cifi/itg. SO vpiozv for 
 vawv. for * <j<piov tyj rrcpHwv Kai AtoXfTc ^w«»Tai Kai Awpmc- 
 There are, I believe, fifty other instances of the like 
 kind in about sixteen pages of this Apollonius; who is 
 mentioned by Suidas, as having written On the dialects 
 and accents. This eminent grammarian, whose autho- 
 rity is very great with Vossius (who did indeed him- 
 self transcribe those fragments cited above, which Reit- 
 zius afterwards published from his manuscripts) speaks 
 expressly in another place of this very thing: (Synt. p. 
 304.) i) AloXig, fizraTiQiiaa rohg rovovg rovg Kara to riXog. 
 "The ^Eolic, + which transposes the final tones." Vos- 
 sius allows that from the time of Aristophanes of Byzan- 
 tium down to the age of Antoninus and Commodus, the 
 accentuation used by the Greek grammarians was right 
 as applied by Dionysius Thrax, Apollonius Alexan- 
 drinus, and others: " usque ad tempora Antonini et 
 Commodi perstitit antiqua et fere integra loquendi ra- 
 
 * If such a man as Apollonius thought the Scholiast on Theociilus IdjH. vii- 
 
 rtot those minute pails of language Un- v. 4. on the word Aux&jttios : V^a<^irat 
 
 worthy his observation, a modern gram- xaX Avmimai; Jii tou ai fxiyaXw, oWej 
 
 marian need not, I think, regard or AioXticSc Tr^orra.^inTar ItteiS^ ol Aio- 
 
 fear the application of the old lines of Xe~c 'a^iXXsi;?, xa.) TlnXsv;, xa) (Sao-ikiv/; 
 
 Herodius, on the rpafx/xaria-raL Barrows Xej/ouj-i. hy.dos$ xa) ri Auxi- 
 
 rwioBoftBvXBt;, [x.motT'j\\aB<>i, oia-f y.i- itiv;' Sia toZto >) t»v ei$ tug ye\iixh <ara.? 
 
 fxriXe avToT/; 7rgo7rajo^u'vETai. Scribitur etiam 
 
 To 2<f>iv xal 2<f>£iV, xai to Mtv, r$( Avxmlria>$ per <w, quod jEolice in antepe- 
 
 to Ni'v. nultima acuitur. Quoniarh JEoles * Av iX.- 
 
 Alhenrt. lib. v. p. 222. Xsuj, ITiiXeuc et Bac-iUvg barytona effe- 
 
 t It is almost needless after this to runt : similiter etiam Avx&mvs. Idcirco 
 
 mention other writers; as Stephanus genitivus in ai; apudillcsin aniepenulti- 
 
 de Urb. in AaiAi?. o^vnrat to Aat/Xi?, ma acuitur. See also what Svlburgius 
 
 to U aSxij AioXiKai? Bagyvnat, And Eu- has observed in his Anomalite Grammat. 
 
 stathius, p. 518. "ATfsu? siflEia wa^a at the end of his Apollonius, p. 446. 
 
 'AXxat'j) Et)g£0», xal BtB^puromrui, ai^Ai'o- add H. Sleph. de Dial. Attic, p. 193. 
 
 X»xoV AieXiajv yaf TJiov to Ba-evrovM. So Etistath. 265, 1.16.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY". 47 
 
 tio." # Now we see this very Apollonius tells us that 
 the iEolic pronunciation was barytone. When therefore 
 I find Caninius, and all the other modern teachers of 
 Greek, making the same remark, I am not only certain 
 that their doctrine, as far as it respects the ^Eolic dia- 
 lect, is right, but am by presumption strongly induced to 
 think that their other observations on accents are true 
 likewise. 
 
 Dr. G. seems to be aware of the tendency of this argu- 
 ment, drawn from the conformity of the Roman with the 
 vEolic dialect, and the agreement of both with the pre- 
 sent system of accents ; and endeavours strangely to 
 evade it by supposing this method among" the yEolians of 
 drawing back the accent was confined to the vulgar only 
 among them. But what private reason he has for this 
 singular supposition, lies not within the compass of my 
 knowledge or conjecture. 
 
 I have consulted many good authors who treat of the 
 ^Eolic dialect, and not a single one takes the least notice 
 of this barytone pronunciation being restrained to the 
 meaner sort. And indeed it can hardly be supposed, 
 there should be this difference in placing the acute tone 
 among natives of the same country, whatever distinction 
 there may be in their rank and situation in life. The 
 lower people do certainly in all places corrupt the true 
 pronunciation of their language, but very seldom in the 
 tones or times ; the mistake most commonly lying in the 
 formation and articulation of their syllables ; which is a 
 very different thing from their modulation. When an 
 illiterate servant says twilight for toilette, she hath caught 
 and pronounces the tone and time right, but mistakes in 
 the letters and compcsition of the syllables. There is 
 therefore no reason from Dr. G.'s supposition to imagine 
 that the old Latins did not derive the iEolic in all its pu- 
 rity from Greece. 
 
 The conformity of the JEolic (which was undoubtedly 
 different from the Attic) with the Roman, will furnish us 
 
 * P. 141.
 
 48 ESSAY ON 
 
 with another strong argument, besides that mentioned 
 above, in favour of our present system, which will be 
 explained and enforced in another place. 
 
 The history of the first introduction of the Greek 
 tongue into Italy, may be collected from the following- 
 lines of Dionysius Periegetes: 
 
 * Tvpprjvoi p.lv 7rpioT, lirl di adjim (j>v\a UtXaaywv, 
 O'l 7rorf Kv\\r)vri6ev l<ft 'EoxEpiijv aXa fiavrtg, 
 AvtoOi vrji]cravTO crvv av^paat Tvpprjvoiat. 
 
 Eustathius, in his commentary on this passage of Dio- 
 nysius, v. 347. gives a short history of these old Greek 
 settlements in Italy. " These people are called Tyr- 
 rheni, from Tyrrhenus a Lydian, the son of Atys, whom 
 his father sent out with a great number of followers in 
 a time of extreme scarcity. From him the country was 
 called Tvpprivia. Afterwards the Pelasgi, removing from 
 their own country for the same reason, came into Italy 
 from Cyllene in Arcadia, under the conduct of one 
 Evander, who, when Agamedes was ruler of Arcadia, 
 complying with the suggestions of his prophetic mother, 
 and collecting a large number of attendants, set sail and 
 arrived on the coast of Italy ; where he built a fortress 
 which he called UaWavriov, from his own son Pallas ; 
 from whence to this day the Romans call all places that 
 are the seats of princes, UaXana, suppressing the two 
 liquids A and v.f" Herodotus says that, " before these 
 Lydians reached Etruria, the inhabitants of that country 
 were called 'O/jifipiKoi ;" which name was afterwards 
 confined to a neighbouring tract, called Umbria. There 
 
 * Tyrrheni qnidem. primvm, post vero Tuscan language many traces of the 
 
 illos gentes Pelasgorum, old Greek miglit he found, and that not 
 
 Qui quondam a Cyllene per Hesperium intermediately from the Romans. See 
 
 marevecti his Var. Lect. xiv. 22. Caninius has 
 
 Ibi habitarunt cum viris Turrhenis. many observations of the like kind. 
 
 t The same is related of Tyrrhenus Concerning this settlement, see also 
 
 by Veil. Palerc. lib. i.e. 1. Peter Vic- Vet. Schol. ad Horat. Serm. I. 6. v. 1. 
 
 torinus thought that in the modern and Servius ad Virg. JEn. II. 781.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 49 
 
 were besides other colonies of Pelasgi settled in Italy. 
 Pliny says " * in Latium eas [literas] Pelasgi attulerunt," 
 which is very consistent with what is said of the Lydians 
 first introducing them into Etruria. The Lydians and 
 iEoliansf seem to have carried their language into the 
 country to the west of the Tiber, and the Pelasgians into 
 Latium to the east of it. A further mixture of Greek 
 was infused into the Roman tongue from those Dorians, 
 who settled in the south-east part of Italy, and differed 
 not much in dialect from the JiEolians. " Italy was 
 called fjieyaXr] eXXag (says Servius §) because from Ta- 
 rentum to Cumae all the cities were built by Greeks." 
 
 Dionysius has pursued this subject to a great length 
 through the whole first book of his Roman antiquities. 
 He begins his work with declaring, that he means to 
 prove the Grecian origin of the Romans. §i r)g ypa<pr)g 
 "EiWrivag re avrovg eiridei^eiv v-inay^yovfxai. He then enu- 
 merates the several migrations of Greeks in the early 
 ages ; and among them mentions that of the Lydians 
 under Tyrrhenus ; part of which story however he sup- 
 poses to be mixed with fable. But the history of Evan- 
 der's settlement he, on several accounts, believes to be 
 true ; and mentions particularly Evander's introducing 
 the Greek lettersinto Italy, ypainiuiaTwv 'EWtjvikCov yjpnmv, 
 vewarl tyavtiaav 'ApKam. The word Palatium is taken 
 notice of by him, as derived from UaXavnov. The Tro- 
 jans themselves, who came into Italy under iEneas, he 
 says, were of Greek extraction. And having thus gone 
 
 * Lib. 7. c. 56. see also c. 58. Ve- and iEolians are joined by Apollonius: 
 
 teres Gracas fuisse eusdem peine, qu& and so lliey are \>y Eustalh. 8. 1. 41. 
 
 nunc sunt Latmcc, indicio erit Delvhica § In Mo. I. v. 569. and so Athenaeus. 
 
 tabula antiqui (cris, quo* est hodie in Pa- lib. xii. p. 523. The Greek language 
 
 latio. in those lower parts of Italy was not 
 
 t See ChislniU Inscrip. Sig. 24. quite worn out in the time of Augustus. 
 
 J Pindar, who wrote in the broadest Horace speaks of the people of Canu- 
 
 Doric, calls his ode Ai'oXhiS* fAohirw. sium as using it mixed with the Ro- 
 
 Strabo reduces the four dialects to two, man. " Canusini more Bilinguis." Serm. 
 
 the Ionic and old Attic he calls the I. 10. v. 30. The Gvaca testa of Ho- 
 
 same, and the Doric and ^Eolic. lib. race (Carm. I. 20. v. 2.) is explained 
 
 viii. Thus above p. 89. the Dorians b_v Turnebus, Cumana. Advers. xvii. 5.
 
 50 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 through many historical discussions, he concludes his 
 first book with saying, that he has proved his point, 
 IXXaSa ttoXiv avrrjv aTroStiKvvfitvog. 
 
 What Quinctilian hath observed of his own language 
 respecting the ^Eolic, is remarked by other good Latin* 
 grammarians : and indeed was observed long before 
 
 * Priscian in his first book says, " o 
 transit in e, vt bonus bene, yaw genu, 
 itavt; pes, antiqui compes quasi compos, 
 in quo JEoles sequimur." In another 
 place, " ae ponitur pro a, ut JEsculapius 
 pro 'ac-xXdtho?, in quo Moles sequimur ; 
 Mi enim vvfA.^enq pro wy.<pa.<;, et <f>ai«-<v 
 pro $ ao-tv dicunt." Again: " oi locum du- 
 plicis obtinet consonantis, ut Troja pro 
 Tea'ia. ; in hoc quoque JEoles sequimur ; 
 sic enim Mi dividentes dipththongum 
 xoi'Xov pro xoTW dicunt." In another 
 place, " Ei dipthonga nunc non utimur, 
 sed loco ejus in Greeds nominibus e vel i 
 productas ponimits : et in priore sequimur 
 JEoles : Mi enim. tw Any-ao-Qevri pro A»- 
 y,otr8int, et ?wov pro eT-htov." In like 
 manner in another part ; '* bos bovis, 
 quod ideo assumit genitivo v loco digam- 
 ma, quia JEoles quoque solent inter duas 
 vocales ejusdem dictionis digamma pone- 
 re, quos inmultisnos sequimur, 0F1; ovis, 
 SaFo; Davus, aiFov ovum. Unde in no- 
 minativo quoque hujus 7iominis illos se- 
 quimur. Nam et JEoles et Dores (35? di- 
 cunt pro &av<;, ov dipthongon in o Ion gam 
 vertentes: et quod hoc verum est ostendunt 
 epigrammata vetustissima, qute Uteris an- 
 tiquissimis scripta in multis tripodibus 
 legi, et maxime in tripode Apollinis qui 
 est Constantinopoli, in loco quern fygoha- 
 <f>ov vacant. Stmt autem scripta sic An- 
 uo&aFw, AaaKaFmv pro AafaacLv ." Prise, 
 lib. vi. p. 710. The same writer hav- 
 ing mentioned a peculiar deviation in 
 the Roman accent from the general 
 rules, says, " necnon JEoles, contra con- 
 suetudinem mam, idem facer e." It has 
 
 been asked, why the short u of Numa is in 
 Greek by Plutarch, though not byDio- 
 nysius, turned into av Noi/^S? . This may 
 admit an vEolic solution from Priscian, 
 who speaking of the Roman u says, 
 "modo pro v longa, ut pro y.v<; mus : modo 
 pro correpta, tva^veo. purpura. In pie- 
 risque tamen JEoles secuti hoc facimus. 
 Itli enim Qouyarne dicunt pro BvyaTV?, 
 av corripientes: vel magis v sono u soliti 
 sunt pi-onunciare, ideoque ascribunt o, 
 non ut dipthongum faciant ibi, sed ut 
 sonum v JEolicum ostendant; ut Calli- 
 machus, KaXXfp^ou j^Sovoj oiifiaj davyarvQ. 
 Putsc. p. 554. I have given this pas- 
 sage concerning BavyaTng from Pris- 
 cian, because it throws, I think, some 
 light on the metre of a line in Homer, 
 that is apparently irregular, Odyss. II. 
 387. Et S' IfMV o'Se ju.tl6o? a<f>av&avE(, aX- 
 Xa |2ouXE5-0e. Where Dr. Clarke says, 
 " nulla ratione excusari potest, that Boo 
 should be short." But if Homer's lan- 
 guage was iEolic as well as Ionic, it is 
 accounted for at once by Priscian's re- 
 mark on Bavyarn^. Thus suus by the 
 old Romaus was written souus : (Syl- 
 burg. on Dionys. Halic. vol. I. p. 784.) 
 So the very learned and accurate Mr. 
 D'orville says " Boeotoruni dialectodi- 
 ci Qovyari^, et tamen corripi syllabam 
 
 bine suo jure Graeci pos- 
 
 tumus potuerunt vertere nia-rooy,o; , 
 nee tamen producere syllabam." Crit. 
 Vann. 491. The Boeotian and Doric 
 dialects are known to have been very 
 nearly allied.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 51 
 
 even Quinctilian's time, by a man, who certainly under- 
 stood both the Greek and Latin languages very well, 
 who says, " The Romans use a language not quite bar- 
 barous, nor yet purely Grecian, but mixed and com- 
 pounded of both, fc fortv 17 -irXdow AtoXt'e*. 
 
 But even if the agreement of the JEolic and Roman 
 dialect had not been so expressly mentioned by Diony- 
 sius, Quinctilian, Priscian, and others ; and they had only 
 said in general, that the Latin was of Greek original ; 
 we yet might have been certain, that the JEolic was the 
 mother language, from some other peculiarities in the 
 Roman tongue, beside that of the accent. In the Latin 
 alphabet there are two letters, F and the consonant V, 
 which are not in the Attic, and yet are in the old Pe- 
 lasgic and ^Eolic. That letter V of the Romans (the 
 power of which is the same with that of our W) resem- 
 bles in nature, though not in form, the tiEolic digamma ; 
 which having a soft open sound could not be expressed 
 by the other Greeks; who, when they attempted it, 
 either changed it into a simple aspiration, or sounded it 
 like (j>, and destroyed its true nature. The Roman F 
 was the (j> without the aspirate : and this letter too the 
 common Greeks could not pronounce ; concerning 
 which | Quinctilian mentions a particular fact of Cicero, 
 who, in pleading for Fundanius, laughed at a Greek, 
 who was brought into court as a witness, for not being- 
 able to pronounce the word Fundanius, and using a $ 
 instead of the initial F. The iEolians, we are told by 
 the oldest and best§ grammarians, did in general avoid 
 
 * Dionys. Halic. Antiq. Roman, lib. Sylb. Again, "AXXoj ju.ev"exx>jve? Sac-u- 
 
 i. ad finem. voviri t« (pttiwivra. AioXeij Se ov^a/jiZg. 
 
 t Concerning this letter, see the ibid. ■yiXomxoj oi AioXeij. Eustath. p. 
 
 postscript to this chapter. 27. 1. 38. Alii quidem Grceci cum as- 
 
 | Contra Gracci aspirare solent <p : piratione pfferunt in dictione vocales: 
 nt pro Fundanio Cicero testem, qui pri- JEoles vera soli cum spiritu leni. Hero- 
 mam ejusliteram dicere non possit, ir- dian in his iragix.@. ittfi. fxiy pvfA.. says: 
 ridet. lib. i. c. 4. xaviv ykg e<ttiv o Xsyaov, oti lav eifi&Za-t 
 
 § Ol fxh aXXot "EXXuve; Saruvovo-t ri Suo ff, to y.h ngZiTov -^iKovrai, to Je SeJ- 
 
 EV TW XE^Ef <{><DV>1£VTtt. AioXeT? 8e (A0V01 TE£0V oWlivETttf 010V, TTOp'pa), appaHTTO^ P^f'? 
 
 4iXo~e-[. Apollon. de Synt. p. 44. edit. tsSv AioXix<5v ot yap AioXei? 4'^*>Tai ovte? 
 
 E %
 
 52 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 aspiration, and used in many cases the digamma, where 
 the other Greeks did an aspirate. This is observed by 
 Terentianus Maurus in the following trochaics, 
 
 Nominum multa inchoata Uteris vocalibus 
 Usus JEolicus reformat et digammon prceficit* 
 
 He then exemplifies this in particular words. What an 
 Attic called 'EAIvij, they did FtXIvrj ; IWepoc they called 
 FtWfjOoc, from whence the Roman vesperus ; and the 
 same in many other instances. And thus, among the an- 
 cient Latins, they * used Fostia, not Hostia, Fostis, not 
 Hostis : and like the iEolians, according to Quinctilian, 
 to avoid aspiration, hordeum they called fordeum. In 
 regard to the letter H, he says in general, " parcissime 
 ea veteres usi etiam in vocalibus, cum cedos [non hcedos] 
 ircosque [non Jiircos] dicebant. Diu deinde servatum, 
 ne f consonantibus aspiretur, ut in Graccis et triumpis." 
 Thus in many Latin words of Greek derivation, either 
 the aspiration is entirely J left out, as in cano from 
 
 nal to $uo ff -SfikoZe-ir oTcv Jtsp'po), <f Sippta, 
 c-7TEppa>, in Aldi Then. p. 129. Regula 
 est qu<z dicit, quod, si reperiantur duo 
 ff, prius lenem spiritum, posterius as- 
 perum habet: ut nropfa, afyaxnot;, ex- 
 ceptis JEolicis. Moles enim, lenem spiri- 
 tum amantes, etiam duo ff leniter effe- 
 runt : ut xsppa;, (pBtfpa, <T7rsppi». So 
 Priscian, speaking of the iEolic di- 
 gamma, says " sciendum tamen, quod 
 hoc ipsum JEales quidem ubique loco as- 
 pirulionis ponebant, effugieutes spiritus 
 Asperitatem. Putsch, p. 547. " Spi- 
 ritual tenuem voco jEolicum, quod eo 
 delectentur iEoles, &c. v H. Steph. 
 Dial. Attic, p. 155. and Turneb. Ad- 
 vers. III. c. 10. on pilare and compilare. 
 
 * See Lipsii Antiqua; Lect, I. c. 2. 
 
 t Cicero observes the same : " cum 
 scirem ita inajores loculos esse, ut uus- 
 quam, nisi iu vocali, aspiratione ute- 
 
 rentur, loquebar sic, ul pulcros Cetegos, 
 
 triumpos, Cartagincm dicerem 
 
 Burrum semper Ennius, 
 
 non Pyrrhum. Vi patefecerunt Bruges, 
 non Phryges ; ipsius antiqui declarant 
 libri." Orat. 48. SoCharisius : " Pul- 
 crum Varro aspirari debere negat, ne 
 duabus consonantibus media inlercedat 
 aspiratio, quod minime rectum antiquis 
 videbatur." Putsch, p. 56. et 2256. 
 See also Taylor's Civil Law, p. 567. 
 
 J In the Latin language, as it stands 
 at present, there appear many words 
 of a Greek derivation, some of which 
 are without the Greek aspirate, as f ra- 
 ter, fur, fui, from (fpaT«p, <J>a>p, <f>w» ; and 
 others retain it, as Philosophies, Rhetor, 
 from 4>iXoVo<foc, 'fmoif. From whence 
 may this difference be supposed to pro- 
 ceed ? Perhaps from hence. The words 
 without aspiration were derived in the
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 53 
 
 Xaivo) ; fama from <j>i ]} in ; Dens 9e6g ; fagns (j>ny6g ; fuga 
 <pvy{) ; or turned into a V, as veneti from h/zroi, vesta 
 
 very early ages immediately from the 
 Pelasgic and iEolic, being in general 
 such words as were in most common 
 use among people at all times, even in 
 a rude state . The aspirated words seem 
 to have been introduced in the lower 
 ages of Rome, when there was a com- 
 munication between Italy and the Attic 
 Greeks, who then became the masters 
 of literature to the Romans; and the 
 words, which I here suppose to have 
 been derived in those latter ages from 
 the Attics, are of such a kind, as might 
 be expected to have been then added, 
 being expressive of things relating to 
 arts, sciences, and general improve- 
 ments of life. A view of some words, 
 in both these kinds, may set this in a 
 clearer light. 
 
 Of those, that have not the aspirate of 
 
 the Greek, are the following: 
 yjnipa cetera 
 
 o-ru<f>ot> stipo 
 
 poos, v. p£~of rivus 
 
 piykw v. <f>£W£o) frigeo 
 
 ayiai vagio 
 
 o-<ph£ vespa 
 
 ay.q{@iov vibium 
 
 afx^cc umbo and its 
 
 compounds. 
 ffvfaXXou fallo 
 
 <f>ga<ruto farcio 
 
 y-oefyh forma 
 
 <p\ty[Aa, JEo\. <p\E(A[/.a famma 
 ty\a.a> Jio 
 
 «f>uXXov folium 
 
 <paai for. fan 
 
 <J>a\aiva Balcena. 
 
 The following retain the Greek aspirate. 
 %i*vt chelys 
 
 x B k ye*^ 
 
 chirographum, 
 
 
 chironomia 
 
 
 chirurgia, &c. 
 
 JC£0VIX.3f 
 
 chronicus 
 
 X( va ~°s 
 
 in all its deri- 
 
 
 vatives 
 
 qaXay^ 
 
 phalanx 
 
 <pa\apa 
 
 phalercE 
 
 tyai/Ta<Tta 
 
 phantasia 
 
 <papfAax.o l !B , cv\y)(; 
 
 pharmacopola 
 
 <fiXoj 
 
 in many derivatives, 
 
 
 as philologus, &c. 
 
 <pia\a 
 
 phiala 
 
 <p\iy[A.a 
 
 phlegmona 
 
 <J>pEV>13-JJ 
 
 phrenesis 
 
 <p8io-i$ 
 
 phthisis 
 
 <pV<TlX.r) 
 
 physica 
 
 pa^sjJi'a, 
 
 rhapsodia 
 
 pBvfxa 
 
 rheuma 
 
 pufj.Boq 
 
 rhombus 
 
 pvBfJ.ii; 
 
 rhythmus 
 
 ^opk 
 
 chorus. 
 
 See also the collection of Greek words 
 Latinized by Cicero, in Budaeas. Com- 
 ment. Ling. Grasc. p. 1011. 
 
 That the Attic and common Hellenic 
 language had much more aspiration than 
 the yEolic and old Pelasgic, is certain 
 from the authority of the most ancient 
 grammarians, who often point out this 
 particular difference between the pro- 
 nunciation of the early and laterGreeks. 
 That of the early Greeks was followed 
 by the old Latins. Scaliger, speaking 
 of the aspiration of R, says, *' Latini 
 autem sprevere illam asperitatem . . . 
 . . Quidam minus sapienter Romam 
 aspirant : cum tamen Roman! ipsi de 
 suo R omnem exemerint usum aspira- 
 tionis." de ling. Lot. I. c. 45.
 
 54 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 from karia ; or changed into an * S, as v\n, sylva ; virlp, 
 super ; ov, sui ; e£, sex ; lirra, septem. Sometimes this 
 digamma was prefixed to vowels not aspirated; some 
 are mentioned in Dionysius's first book of Roman Anti- 
 quities : as FdvaZ,, Kcti Foikoq, Kai Fai/rjp, nai 7roXXa TOiavra. 
 Sometimes, as is observed above by Priscian, it was 
 used in the middle of words, as uiFbv, oFt^, SaFoc ". and 
 by this interposition of the digamma (or Ionic aspira- 
 tion, as he calls it) Mr. Dawes solves many difficulties 
 in Homer's metre, by inserting it in such words as XvFio, 
 aFop, SaFt£w, StFa, oXoFoc, and fmany others. In this 
 manner it passed into the Latin language : 
 
 * See Taylor's Civil Law. p. 411. 
 on Odyss. 0. 527. Concerning the 
 jEolic letter, see also his Commentary 
 on the Marmor Sandvicense, p. 43. et 
 seq. 
 
 t Mr. Dawes hath considered the 
 digamma in regard to the Greek metre, 
 which he has very well corrected by 
 the application of this letter. Not sa- 
 tisfied with Dr. Clarke's account of 
 the vowels in tiw, Xvoj, and such words, 
 he gives his own explication: Nos is- 
 tiusmodi vocales natura breves esse sta- 
 tuimus, Us autem subjici oportere conso- 
 nantem V. Hac utique inter duas vo- 
 cales intercedens in diversis pro arbitrio 
 syllabis enunciari potest. Verbi utique 
 Xinv oi priorem pro libitu constittiere lice- 
 bit vel Ku, vel \ww : si a vocali clauda- 
 tur Xv-yvu, non poterit non corripi: sin 
 a consonante Xtnv-iw, earn simul ac pronun- 
 ciaris, ea erit oris figuratio, ut ante se- 
 quentem vocalem w necessario sit effer- 
 etida. Futilrum vero Xuwcrsu in sylla- 
 bas ita secari nequit ut priorem corripiat. 
 p. 165. This doctrine of Mr. Dawes 
 I am much inclined to believe, because 
 it agrees so well with Priscian's ac- 
 count of V, being inserted in the mid- 
 dle of the perfect tenses of the third 
 and fourth Latin conjugation, and 
 making the preceding vowel long. 
 
 which would otherwise be short, as 
 cupivi, cupii; audlveram, uudieram. 
 Putsch, p. 855. So likewise Servius 
 on Virgil. Mn. I. p. 451. " QuarUe 
 conjugationis tenipus praeteritum per- 
 fectum vel in vi junetum exit ; vel sub- 
 lata digammo in ii pro nostro arbitrio : 
 ut lenivi lenii. Sane cum in vi exit, 
 penultima longa est, et ipsa accentum 
 retinet ; cum vero in ii, penultima bre- 
 vis est, et perdit accentum." And in 
 this manner we must, I suppose, un- 
 derstand the following observation of 
 Varro on the words pluit et luit. Qui- 
 dam rcprehendunt, quod pluit et luit 
 dicamus in pneterito et jirasenti tem- 
 pore, cum analogue sui cujusque temporis 
 verba debent discriminate. Falluntur: 
 nam est, ac putant, aliter : quod in prie- 
 teriteis dicimus V longum, in prasenti 
 breve, (de ling. Lat. lib. viii. p. 122. 
 edit. Scalig.) So that it was probably 
 pronounced as pluit in the present, as 
 pluvit in the preterit. Thus in Ennius : 
 " Nunc sumii Romani, qui fuimus ante 
 Rudini." i. e.fuvimus. And again, lib. 
 vii. Annal. 
 
 Comiter impertit ; magna cum lassu.' 
 
 diei 
 Parti fuvisset, de sutnme is rebu' gerun- 
 
 dels.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 55 
 
 VoiKog, vicus, 
 Fotvog, vinum. 
 Fa§ w , video. 
 FlSrjc, vestis. 
 Fijp, ver. 
 Fiov, viola. 
 
 Fig, vis. 
 
 Fo^Xoc, vulgus. 
 
 At Foe, divus. 
 'ApxttFov, Archivum. 
 "AtFwv, JEhum. 
 F[t,og, viscus. 
 NaFvg, navis. 
 'ApFw, arvum. 
 Sk<uF6c scevus. 
 
 The termination of the first declension in a passed 
 from the ./Eolic to the Roman tongue : as 'iwirora, 7rotTjra ; 
 from whence poeta, athleta, cometa, planeta, &c. We 
 are sometimes told that this nominative in Homer is 
 Macedonic ; they might as well say it was Persic. 
 Homer uses it not merely for the convenience of his 
 verse, as in "nnrora Nlorwp, but likewise in other places, 
 where the termination rag would stand as well, jn^ritTa 
 Ztvg, vrftXtiyipera Zevg. If Homer was an * iEolian (as 
 there is the greatest reason to think he was) and spent a 
 great part of his life in his own country, though he did 
 travel indeed and visit many parts of Greece ; why 
 should we not suppose that in his writings he used prin- 
 cipally the language of iEolia? Those iEolic varia- 
 
 See Lips. Antiq. Lect. II. c. 22. et 
 V. c. 2. Fluvida in Lucretius : Luvit 
 in Lucilius. 
 
 * "Oti Je hv AioXeuj' Ofxvpo; S>i- 
 
 Xo~ Js xat ev toutSe toij ewes-iv, on AioXeL; 
 
 WV TO"? VOjWOif ToTc TOUTOJV lfflr,T0. 
 
 Kft~S X' E7TI o-%ffy<; ° y' t ? m > ' 7r ' $' -w&vita. 
 
 oTvov 
 Aei#E' veoi Se Trap avrov l^ov mp.Trx@o}.a. 
 
 AioXeej yag f/.woi ra eTtXayyyo. iirl -n'vni 
 oi2l\£>v owrSa-iv, ol Ss aXXoi "EXXwe; iitl 
 tjjSv Kal ya.% nofjt,u£ou?iv ol AioXeT; ra 
 Ti'ivri •niyi.ttt. Herod, vit. Horn, sub 
 fiuem. Quod vero JEolensk fuerit Hu- 
 
 merus, indicat etiam in his versibus, quod 
 JEolensis ipse succgentis ritibus usussit, 
 
 tutu seginina car- 
 
 Ipse focis multo crepitantibus admovet 
 
 igni 
 Ciuda senex, el vina super nigranlia 
 
 fundit : 
 Quern verubus quinis juvenes ouerata 
 
 tenentes 
 Brachia circuinstaut. 
 
 jEolenses enim soli intestina quinque ve- 
 rubus fixa torrebant, reliqid Greci tri- 
 bus : pro TtiVTi enim dicunt JEoUnses
 
 5G ESSAY ON 
 
 tions, which are mentioned by Apollonius and other 
 good grammarians, such as the * resolution of circum- 
 flexed vowels to bring the acute backwards, and others 
 remarked above, are found in every page, and almost 
 every line, of his writings. In them there is certainly a 
 mixture of other Greek, which it is natural to imagine 
 he insensibly transfused into his original ./Eolic by his 
 travels. But the principles and stamina (if I may so 
 call them) of his language are, I make but little doubt,f 
 vEolic. And that lonico-poetic dialect, which is so fre- 
 quently attributed to him, is probably nothing but the 
 common language of his own native land. It may per- 
 haps be a question, whether the Ionic rejection of the 
 augment in verbs is not % Mo\\c too ; and from thence 
 passed to the Romans ; who, in the formation of tenses, 
 make no alteration at the beginning of verbs, discrimi- 
 nating them only by their different terminations : except 
 in those verbs, that have the syllabic reduplication, as 
 mordeo momordi, disco didici, &c. and the temporal aug- 
 ment in a few prasterits, as ago egi. Like those abbre- 
 viations in Homer, of fipt for fipiaphg, X'nra for Xnrapbc;, 
 Kpl for Kpi&r), &c. there are in Ennius, gait for gaudium, 
 coel for ccelum, Fabric for Fabricius; and in the carmen 
 Saliare, according to Festus, Pa for Parte, Po for §Po- 
 
 * jEolis amat per circuitum verba § Lips. Epist. Qusest. 1.19. Ua^ahly- 
 
 protendere. Diomed. lib. II. p. 435. /xaa-t Je p^pSvrai tou fjiiv itoimov, to KpT", 
 
 t This was the opinion of Philel- xal A» xai Ma.4-' 'Ha-io'Jou SI, on to BpiQu 
 
 phus, one of the most diligent inquir- xai ToEpfapovBp~>.£}>£(. Evfopixv $i x.a.1 
 
 ers into every part of Greek literature tIv !iX(ov "Kiyu rCK. Strabo. VIII. " Ex- 
 
 that latter ages have produced. In a eniplis utuntur Homeri, voce KpT, et Aw, 
 
 letter to Perleo he says " Lingua yEo- elMaj; et Hesiodi, quod vocabulum 
 
 lica, quam Hornerus et Callimachus in Bpiflu, et B^ia^ov dicit Bpr Eu- 
 
 "suisoperibuspotissimum suntsecuti." phorion vero etiam faiov dicit »ix." Sal- 
 
 Apud Hodium de Gr<£C. Illustr.-p. 188. masius (de re Hellenist.) has a particn- 
 
 X Scaliger speaks of this, as iEolic. lar remark on monosyllables: " cer- 
 
 " Canere Latini ab Hiatu dixere, Graeca turn est, linguas omnes, quae monosyl- 
 
 voce eyavov : nam yEoles, ab eo quod labis constant, eaeteris esse antiqui- 
 
 est yainiv, non apponunt incrementa ores." And then mentions, as an iu- 
 
 praeteritis, sed dicunt j^avcv, demuntque stance of this, the number of them in 
 
 aspiratior.es, ut rem barbaram." de ancient Greek, as appears in the old 
 
 caus. ling. Lai. c. 52. poets, and later imitators of them.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 57 
 
 pulo. Thus are cited by Victorinus,* do for dorno, 
 famul fox famulus, guberna for gubernacula. 
 
 Some of the Romans, jealous of the honour of their 
 language, which they were desirous of having considered 
 as primitive, seemed unwilling to acknowledge its Greek 
 original. On this principle it probably was, that Varro, 
 the great antiquary ,f etymologist, and general scholar 
 of the Romans, often acquiesced in a far-fetched, absurd, 
 Latin derivation, rather than accept the Greek one that 
 could not but readily offer itself, and was not less true 
 than obvious. % And perhaps Virgil felt some of this 
 national bias in favour of the Latin origination of his 
 own language, when he makes Jupiter, on determining 
 the important point of the Trojan settlement in Italy, at 
 the close of the yEneid, say (XII. 834. 837.) 
 
 " Sermonem Ausonii patrium moresque tenebunt 
 faciamque omnes uno ore Latinos." 
 
 Uno ore, that is b/uoyXuxjcrovQ, not as some explain it, 
 uno nomine; for that had been promised just before, 
 " Utque est, nomen erit." What Jupiter here declares, 
 is in answer to a most earnest request of Juno, 
 
 " Pro Latio obtestor, pro maj estate Tuorum, 
 Ne vetus indigenas nomen mutare Latinos, 
 Neu Troas fieri jubeas, Teucrosque vocari, 
 Aut vocem mutare viros." — 
 
 It is not unlikely that § Tyrannio, when he was at 
 
 * Mar. Vict. Art. Gram. lib. I. p. nostris, omiuoque Latinis Uteris lumi- 
 
 2499. nis attulisti,et verbis. 
 
 t This was considered by his coun- $ " Aliqui autera, inter quos Varro, 
 
 trymen as no inconsiderable part of his etiaui maligue ernerunt omnia u Lati- 
 
 character. " Tu aetatem patriae," says nis.Graecisque suas origines invidere." 
 
 Cicero to him Academ. Quast. lib. 1.3. Scalig. de caus. ling. i.e. 29. 
 
 " tu omnium divinarum humanarum- § This was Tyrannio, jun. who was 
 
 que rerum Nomina, genera, ofiicia, author of a piece tte^ t>jj < P»' j u.ai'xiij Sia- 
 
 causas aperuisti : plurimumque poelis Xsxtw o'ti icrh in t?c 'EXXiiviK??. Suid.
 
 58 ESSAY ON 
 
 Rome in Cicero's family, wrote his treatise, mentioned 
 by Suidas, concerning the Roman tongue, in order to 
 correct those wrong notions, which seem to have been 
 popular there at that time. I wish that work of Tyran- 
 nio had come down to us. 
 
 As for the Latin accent derived from the iEolic, 
 Quinctilian we have seen above is very explicit in his 
 account of it. He does not indeed expressly say, that 
 the accent, but only in general the Romani sermonis ratio, 
 is deduced from the iEolic. But Athenaeus, who well 
 knew the Roman language, mentions the derivation of 
 the very accent, saying " The Romans follow the ./Eo- 
 lians in every thing, even in the tones of their voice."* 
 
 After Quinctilian, it may appear unnecessary to trou- 
 ble the reader with accounts of the same given by sub- 
 sequent old grammarians, who all copy from him with- 
 out any considerable variation. But although what 
 they say cannot much confirm an authority better than 
 their own, yet it will serve to shew, that the Latin ac- 
 cents, which are now little thought of, were considered 
 by the f Romans themselves as essential a part of their 
 language as the quantity of it. 
 
 in V. Tvpaniuv. This learned Greek vaff. lib. X. c. 6. Romani in omnibus 
 
 was carried prisoner to Rome, and Moles imitantes, xtt et in tonis Voeis. 
 
 there presented to Terentia, Cicero's See also the observations of Palmerius 
 
 wife. He was a scholar of the elder on this passage of Athenaeus. Exercit. 
 
 Tyrannio ; who, after having been pre- in Auct. Gr. p. 514. 
 ceptor of the famous Stiabo, had been t In the contents of Charisius's Trea- 
 
 carried to Rome by Lucullus, where tise, addressed to his son, there ap- 
 
 he was much esteemed in general for pears the title of a chapter de accentu, 
 
 his learning, and honoured particu- though it is not in that part of his work 
 
 larly with the intimacy of Cicero, who which we now have in Putschius's edi- 
 
 speaks of him often. (Epist. ad Attic. tion, which is the only one I could ever 
 
 II. 6. IV. 4. XII. 2 et 6. ad Quinct. see. There are remarks however on 
 
 Fratr. II. 4.) The elder Tyrannio is accent in those remains, which we have 
 
 said to have made a collection of above of him ; as on the word ne. " Ne acuto 
 
 30,000 volumes. acceniu recipit imperativa, ut ne fac : 
 
 * 'PiefxaXot nrh-ra. roi{ A;oXe~; jA.ifjt.ou- quotics vera graci accentu, pro eo quod 
 
 /j,ivot ojj x.at Kara roln; TO'nOY£ trie <$&• est apud Gr&cos i'va ph accipitur, opta-
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY 
 
 09 
 
 We, whose ears are accustomed to receive the sound 
 of an acute and a long quantity as nearly the same, 
 when we find the acute joined with a short syllable, as 
 in bonis, are apt to startle, and think the accent here in- 
 consistent with quantity. The reason of this apparent 
 inconsistency will be considered afterwards: its real 
 consistency, as a fact, is clear and certain beyond the 
 possibility of cavil. 
 
 The Romans did very seldom, if ever, use tonical or ac- 
 centual* marks, as the Greeks did. Which Melancthon 
 
 tiva recipit : utapud Horatium nefacias, 
 quod Numidius. Nonnunquam lutein, 
 etiamsi acuta accentu. eff'eratur, optativa 
 quoque recipit, utue facias, tie scribas." 
 Putsch, p. 202. Dioinedes, in his se- 
 cond book, lias a long chapter deaccen- 
 tibus, agreeable to Quinctilian's doc- 
 trine. Grillius ad Yirgilium de accen- 
 tibas is cited by Priscian, lib. I. p. 560. 
 Priscian himself has a whole book on 
 the Roman accent ; and his subject he 
 there opens with this general remark : 
 " Sed nos locuturi de partibus, adaccen- 
 ium, qui in dictionibus est 7iecessarius, 
 transeamus. Accentusest certa lex et re- 
 gulaad elevandamet deprimendam sylla- 
 bam uniuscuj usque particular orationis, 
 &c." And then proceeds to lay down 
 those rules, which are referred to above. 
 Donatus in his editio prima has a chap- 
 ter de tonis. Sergius in his commen- 
 tary on the editio prima of Donates, has 
 given us a long chapter de Accentibus. 
 Cledonius, in his exposition of Dona- 
 tus, has one chapter de accentibus, an- 
 other de ratione accentuum. Maxiinus 
 Victorinus in his Ars Grammatica has 
 a chapter likewise on the same subject. 
 Alcinnus in his Grammatical Dialogues 
 omits not this : F. Syllabe quot acci- 
 dunt ? S. Quatiwr : tenor, spiritus, tern- 
 
 pus, numervs. D. in quot species divi- 
 ditur Grammatica'! M. in xxvi. in vo- 
 cem, in literas, in syllabas, pedes, accen- 
 tvs, §c. So constantly and uniformly 
 do the oldest and best Latin gramma- 
 rians consider accent as an essential 
 part of their language. Macrobius has 
 mixed his remarks on the Latin accent 
 with some on Lhe Greek; among which 
 are the following : "'AvapEfA.fara,qu(Ein 
 o-ftai exeunt, aut tertium a fine acutum 
 sortiuntur accentum, tit \kyta-Qai, ypa.- 
 <f>Es-9ai ; aut secundum, ut mlxdai, xe- 
 xagdat : aut circumfiectunt penultimam, 
 ut TrotiicBai, voeis-dat. 'Awap^u^aTov, 
 quod in <7%en exit, si habeat in penultima 
 v, modo prasentis temporis est, modo praz- 
 teriti perfecti, et hanc diversitatem dis- 
 cernit accentus. Nam si tertius a fine 
 sit, prascns tempus ostendit,ut o\\v?Bai, 
 pnyvvo-dai, ^ivyvus-Qcu: at si secundus, 
 prateritumperfectum, ufXiXua-Qat, i£v<r- 
 8cu. Unde 'ifva-Sai si in cupite habeat 
 accentum, <rv/jt.aivii I'Xjtso-flai, quod est 
 prasentis ; si in penultima sit, o->)f/.a.mi 
 el^x-vs-dat, quod est prgteriti, vna. xenti- 
 pva-Qai." De different Graoc. Lat. Q. 
 vcrbi. p. 2762. Putsch. 
 
 * " Modum [prouunciationis] diver- 
 sum accentu exj)resso Latini Graiuinatici 
 non indicaverunt. Gra:ci indicavcrunt.
 
 60 ESSAY ON 
 
 however laments as a defect, and wishes, for the sake 
 of preserving the genuine Latin pronunciation, that 
 such had been used.* "The most ancient Greeks," 
 says he, " affixed no apices in writing, as may be seen 
 in some ancient inscriptions, and is confirmed by Poli- 
 tian. The following age of scholars, having more prac- 
 tice and artificial skill in literature, added these marks 
 to the tops of letters, as directions in pronunciation. 
 And whoever at that time disregarded them, was looked 
 upon as illiterate. I should have been glad, had the 
 like attention been paid by the Romans to the observ- 
 ance and settlement of their tones; and I make no 
 doubt, but, had that been properly done, the Latin pro- 
 nunciation through former ages would have retained a 
 much greater degree of purity." 
 
 We know, however, that the Romans, though they 
 applied not the marks of tone, did occasionally use 
 those of time, and placed a horizontal line, called an 
 apex, over some long syllables to distinguish them from 
 short ones with the same letters ; as in solum the ad- 
 jective, to distinguish it from solum the substantive; in 
 aret of areo, as different from aret of aro ; which use of 
 
 Res Latinis Graecisque communis : rei Aldus, in his edition of Statins in 
 
 signum apud Grascos solos invenitur." the year 1502, has prefixed a vocabn- 
 
 D'orvill. Crit. Vann. p. 332. See also lary of near fifty pages, which he en- 
 
 Lipsius de pronunt. ling. Lat. c. 19. titles, Orthographia etflexus Bictionum 
 
 * " Vetustissimi Graeci nullos apices GrtEcarum omnium apud Statium, cum 
 
 scripserunt, ut est in antiquis quibus- Accentibus et Generibvcs ex variis utrius- 
 
 dam inscriptionibus cernere, et con- que lingua; Autorilms. And Robert 
 
 firmat Politianus. Postera a?las Gram- Stephens in his Latin, ling. Thesaurus 
 
 maticorum, artibus exerc,ita,haec Uteris hath generallymarked the circumflexed 
 
 adjunxit IwwtvXk*, quasi notas pronun- syllables, though seldom the acuted 
 
 ciationis: habitusque turn, qui ea con- ones. Those marks, that are used by 
 
 tenmeret, non sat politus. Vellem et Dr. Bentley in his Terence, Pha-drus, 
 
 Latinis par diligentia in observandis and P. Syrus, regard only the Ictus 
 
 tonis fuisset ; nee dubito quin mansis- metrici. I never saw bat one Latin 
 
 set integrior superioribus saeculis ratio book accented throughout: that is, 
 
 loquendi." Melancth. Grammat. cap. Grammatics Quadrilinguis Partitiones, 
 
 de Tonis. by Johan. Drosacus. Paris, 1544.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. (Jl 
 
 the apex is remarked by * Quinctilian, afterwards by 
 Scaurus, in the end of his Orthographia, and likewise 
 by Caninius, who says, " Latini in longis vocalibus 
 utebantur apicibus, palus, mains." These always de- 
 noted quantity. But in some ancient Latin inscriptions, 
 mentioned by Dr. G. instead of this horizontal line over 
 long vowels, an oblique ascending one, like the com- 
 mon acute mark mentioned and described by Diomede, 
 is placed: as patro'no', cu'rione, pe'danio ; which, 
 as he says, " sheweth, that in the sense of those who 
 engraved these inscriptions, a syllable was long, when 
 it had such an elevation given to it, as is proper to an 
 acute accent." But does it shew that any syllable was 
 ever by this acute mark denoted long in the sense of any 
 scholar, or of any person except the blundering carvers 
 or engravers, who did not know the different applica- 
 tion of the apex of time, and accentual character of tone? 
 For want of attending to this distinction, Cardinal Noris 
 hath sadly perplexed himself in the last part of his Ceno- 
 tapJiia Fisana, where he confounds these two things; 
 and misquotes Quinctilian, in saying that " apicem, seu 
 accentum addi solitum," where Quinctilian says only 
 " apice distinguitur." We are sure the oblique marks 
 were not applied by any scholar in the foregoing in- 
 scriptions, as the true marks of the real acute sound, 
 because he would never have placed them over a prae- 
 antepenultima, as in pe'danio, cu'rione, nor two of 
 them in one word, as in patro'no'; for he must have 
 known, that one acute was never carried back beyond 
 the antepenultima, and that two could not take place in 
 one word. This mistaken use of these marks in some 
 Latin inscriptions made the judicious Gerard Vossius 
 say, " they were cut by such illiterate persons as to 
 deserve not the least regard." f I cannot therefore see 
 
 Lib. i. c. 7. Jam eorum rationem haberi oportere." <le 
 
 t He is speaking of some Latin ac- Art. Gram. lib. ii. c. 8. Ar.d Muretus, 
 
 centual marks, and says " lapides all- in tbe dialogue with Lipsius, on these 
 
 quos objectant, ubi reperiuntur ; sed im- inscriptions, says, « Imperita aliqua 
 
 pertte adeo scalptos, ut satis liqueat md- sculptoris manus litre sciipsit, sed et
 
 02 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 how Dr. G. could allege any of them in favour of his 
 system. If he means that the acute mark did properly 
 denote, or the acute tone imply, a long quantity, he is 
 much mistaken, as will be shewn fully afterwards. And 
 yet if he meant neither of these, he could mean nothing 
 to his purpose. What says Melancthon to this? f " Time 
 and tone are by no means the same qualities of a syl- 
 lable. And accordingly the terms of one are not appli- 
 cable to the other. You are deceived, if you say that 
 acute and long, or grave and short, are the same. I 
 must enlarge a little on this, because the generality of 
 grammarians are apt to blunder wretchedly in this affair. 
 All long syllables are not acuted; in Virgilius, vir is 
 long, but not acuted. Nor are all acuted ones long; in 
 Virgilius, gi is acuted, though short. We often in Latin 
 pronounce the words pkilosophia, theologia, prosodia, 
 with the i acuted; not that we imagine the i to be long, 
 but because it is acuted in Greek : and the words them- 
 selves, being Greek, have not been so familiarized to a 
 
 male euriosa .... hac inepta, stulta, 
 et a bardis. Nisi si id tamen vnluerunt, 
 apices eos esse, quis insignirent (ita sus- 
 picor ) vouales." de Pronunt. ling;. Lat. 
 c. 19. 
 
 t " Non idem syllabae accidens est 
 tempus, quod tonus. Deinde et qua; 
 cuique appellationes conveniunt, inter 
 se dissident. Erraveris si idem dix- 
 eris longum et acutum, grave ac breve. 
 Longius haec oportet agam, quod vul- 
 gus Grammaticorum inejyte in hac re 
 versetur. Non omnes longae acutae 
 sunt; in Virgilius vir longa est non 
 acuta. Non omnes acuta; sunt longas; 
 in Virgilius gi acuitur etiamsi brevis 
 syllaba. Plerumque Latini homines 
 philosophia i acuta dicimus, ita theolo- 
 gia, prosodia, non quod censeamus i 
 longum esse, sed quod acuatur, atque 
 
 id solitum isto pronunciari modo, non 
 Latino sed Graeco. Grsecas sunt dic- 
 tiones, nee adeo Romanis attritse Un- 
 guis, ut exuerint genuinnm tonum." 
 
 Despauterius remarks the same mis- 
 take. " GrcECtf lingua parum periti 
 crediderunt, ut apud Latinos fit, ac- 
 centum quantitatibus [longisj ferine 
 concordem etiam esse apud Graecos, 
 Itaque audientes accentum a Graecis 
 locari in harum dictionum penultimis, 
 Theologia Aristottles, &c. (in quibus pe- 
 nultimam corripi docuimus) ob earn 
 rem crediderunt penultimam produci. 
 Contra, quia in dnthropos, idolon, &c. 
 Groeci antepenultimas dant accentum, 
 crediderunt indocti penultimam cor- 
 ripi; in qua miserabiliter deceptisunt." 
 p. 580.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. G3 
 
 Roman tongue, as entirely to lose their original and na- 
 tive tone." 
 
 A like caution against confounding accent with quan- 
 tity is given by Erasmus,* Beza,f and Ger. Vossius.J 
 
 The consistency of the acute with a short time, is not 
 only indisputable as a fact, but will be demonstrated af- 
 terwards (as it hath been partly already) to flow na- 
 turally from the essential powers of all vocal sounds. 
 
 * Dialog, de pronunc. ling. Graec. t Alphabet. Graec. p. 72. seq. 
 
 et Lat. p. 124. + Aristarch. II. c. 10.
 
 Gi ESSAY ON 
 
 POSTCRIPT TO CHAP. IV. 
 
 On tlie iEolic Letter, in the ancient Greek and Roman Alphabets. 
 
 In the old Pelasgic and ^Eolic alphabets, as given by 
 Chishull, Monfaucon, and others, there appears a letter, 
 commonly called the digamma, omitted afterwards in 
 the Attic and common Hellenic. The best and oldest 
 grammarians speak of this letter. Besides the authors 
 cited by Mr. Dawes, the famous Apollonius Dyscolus, in 
 some fragments of his published by Reitzius at the end 
 of the Dutch edition of Maittaire's Dialecti Grcecce, men- 
 tions it by name, in his remarks on Wtv' Sci^e on ko.1 to 
 AIoXikov clyappa rdtg Kara to Tphov 7rp6aoJ7rovTrpo(Tevtpi}aav, 
 kclBo kcli at cnrb (j)b)v{]£VTog ap^opevai cWuvovrat. 'AXiccuog. 
 
 WOT£ OttoV fX1)dlv 'OAuUTTUUV A0<7£ arEjO jWtV. p. 425. MciTli- 
 
 festum est quod et JFolicum digamma tertice persona 
 pronominibus addiderunt, sicut a vocali incipientia spi- 
 rit am asperum habent. Alc&us, artp FiOev' The same 
 eminent grammarian again on "Og" AloXug utra tov F 
 7rA£ovo<TvX\a(3uv /com iraaav tttwgiv ko.1 yivog. Tov ibv 
 TTalca KaXei Sa7r^)w* »cai 'AAic/xav of (rvv£\wg a\o\iZ,wv (primv 
 to. ta Ku^ea. 'Opoiwg icai Botwrot. P. 432. JFoles cum F 
 syllabam addunt in omni cam et genere. Tbv ibv [lege 
 Ftov] TrdiSa dicit Sappho. Et Alcman, JEolismi servan- 
 tissimus, dicit tcl ka [lege Ft'a] KaSta. similiter etiam B(eoti. 
 Again, on Ipol, ao\, 61' Ot <rvvi)Br]g 'Arrticote kolL "Iwaiv' 
 Tle^oXoyoi l\pi\aavTO YlXaTwv koi Sevo<j>u)v' tipyyrai, wg opOo- 
 rovouutvrj TrepunraTcii. AloXug (tvv tm F' tpaivtTai Fot Krjvog' 
 2a7r0w. p. 427. 01 usitatur Atticis et Ionibus. Prosa 
 scriptores usi sunt Plato et Xenophon. Dicitur, quod 
 rectum accentum habens circumjlectitur. JEoles cum F. 
 $>aiviTai Fot Kr}vog. Sappho. Thus we are certain this 
 digamma was used by the iEolians and some others of 
 the old Greeks, and considered by them as a letter of
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY, 65 
 
 their alphabet. When the ancient Greek language was 
 carried into Italy, both the character and power of the 
 digarama passed thither with it. From the Pelasgic F 
 very probably came the old Latin and afterwards Ro- 
 man F: from the iEolic F or T came the Etruscan 
 T, (which the reader may see in a plate p. 24 of Mr. 
 Chishull's Inscriptio Sigea.) As the Roman language 
 was compounded out of the old Latin and Etruscan, it 
 took the power and character too of the Pelasgic F, in 
 its own F : it took likewise the power, but not the cha- 
 racter, of the ^Eolic or Tuscan 1, in its V. Some in- 
 deed think (Montfauc. Palaeog. Gr. p. 562.) that the 
 Roman language had originally the character as well as 
 sound of the iEol, digamma. However, if it had, it 
 certainly lost it afterwards ; and for many ages the V 
 was used till the time of Claudius both as a vowel and 
 consonant; as a consonant, having the power of the 
 jEol. digamma, as a vowel of the common u. Diomede 
 and Priscian speak both of this. But I rather give it in 
 the words of Cassiodorus, as the fullest to this purpose. 
 Est qucedam litera in F literce speciem figurata, qua di- 
 gamma nominator, qua duos apices ex gamma habere vi- 
 detur. Ad hujus similitudinem soni nostri conjunctas vo- 
 cales digammon appellare voluerunt, ut est, votum, virgo. 
 itaque in prima syllaba digamma et vocalem oportuit 
 poni, Fotum, Firgo : quod et JEolii fecerunt, et antiqui 
 nostri, sicut scriptura in quibusdam libellis declarat. 
 Hanc literam Terentius Varro dumvult demonstrare, ita 
 perscribit, VA : qui ergo in hac syllaba sonus est, idem 
 literce erit. Nos hodie V literam in duarum literarum 
 potestatem coegimus : nam modo pro Digamma scribitur, 
 modo pro Vocali. Vocalis est, cum ipsa per se est; hoc 
 enim cum ceteris quoque vocalibus patitur. si cum alia vo- 
 cali, digamma est, qua est consonans. de Orthogr. cap. xi. 
 there is more to the same purpose in his 4th chapter. 
 Thus the Roman V answered two purposes, until the 
 time of Claudius, who, disliking this double use of V, 
 endeavoured to introduce the old ^Eolic or Tuscan cha- 
 racter of the digamma, and so leave V a vowel only. 
 
 F
 
 66 ESSAY ON 
 
 Nee inutiliter Claudius JEolicam Mam ad hos usus F li- 
 teram adjecerat. Quinct. i. 7. This institution of Clau- 
 dius was certainly a good and useful one, though his 
 authority could not establish it: for his new letter was 
 not used long, but gave way to the consonant V, 
 which again resumed its double power of digamma and 
 u. Caesar (says Priscian, p. 545.) lianc figuram jl scri- 
 bere voluit : quod quamvis Mi recte visum est, tamen con- 
 suetudo antiqua superavit. We, in English, have the 
 sound of the W where we use no character at all : the 
 word one we pronounce as if it were wone. The Ro- 
 mans continued after the time of Claudius to use the V 
 for the digamma, as they had done before it. Quinc- 
 tilian, in another place, speaks of their retaining the 
 power, after having rejected the character of this iEolic 
 letter: JEolicce quoque literte, qua servum cervumque 
 dicimus, etiamsi forma a nobis repudiata est, vis tamen 
 nos persequitur. Lib. xii. c. 10. 
 
 The figure of the Roman F being like the iEolic F, 
 and a mistaken passage of Priscian (cited by Dr. Mid- 
 dleton in his little treatise de Latin, liter, pronunc.) 
 have betrayed some persons into an erroneous opinion, 
 that the powers of these two characters were alike : 
 which was by no means the case. It is the Roman V, 
 and not the F, that corresponds with the Molic di- 
 gamma. V loco consonantis posit a (says Priscian, lib. i.) 
 eandem prorsus in omnibus vim habuit apud Latinos, 
 quam apud Aioles digamma F. The Roman F was a 
 different letter, approaching nearer in its nature to the 
 Greek <l>, nor yet altogether like that (as some persons 
 have imagined, and among them Salmasius) being itself 
 with very little or no aspiration. When the Romans 
 expressed the Greek <i>, they did it by PH. H quoque 
 interdum consonans, interdum aspirationis creditur not a. 
 hcec si C mutcB subjuncta fuerit, \ ^otat Grcecam : si P 
 prceposita fuerit aspirationi, </> significat. Diomed. lib. i. 
 sub init. And though we sound the initial consonants 
 of forum and philosophia alike, the Romans did not, 
 phi having a strong aspiration, and /a scarce any. Hoc
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 07 
 
 tauten scire debemus (says Priscian, having mentioned 
 ph, <f>, and f) quod non tarn fixis labris est pronuncianda 
 f, quomodo Ph. Putsch, p. 543. see also p. 548. This 
 difference is clearly expressed by Terentianus Maurus : 
 " we," (says he, speaking of the Roman F) 
 
 Si quando Grcecam $ necesse exprimi, 
 
 P et H simul solemus, non Latinam heme [F] ponere ; 
 
 Cujus a Grceca recedit lenis atque hebes somis. 
 
 The Roman F seems to have sounded more like our 
 V; certainly Terentianus' description of the manner in 
 which the sound of his f was formed, nearly suits our V: 
 
 Imum superis dentibus adprimens labellum, 
 Spiramine lent, (velut hirta Grain vites) 
 Hattc ore sonabis. — Putsch, p. 2388. 
 
 So does the description, which Martianus Capella has 
 given of it : F, per denies lab rum inserius deprimentes, 
 lingua palatoque dulcescit. Though Capella here ap- 
 plies the word dulcescit, and Terentianus the epithet 
 lenis to the F, to Quinctilian it appears to have been 
 more offensive than any in the alphabet : quce sexta est 
 nostrantm, pcene non humana voce, vel omnino non voce 
 potius,per discrimina dentium eJJJanda est. xii. 10. But 
 which of our letters are we to suppose like the Roman 
 V and/Eolic digamma? most probably our W. This is 
 doubted indeed by some persons (see Middleton de 
 Latin, lit. in V) but affirmed by others, and those of 
 the best authority, as Erasmus, Lipsius, Dr. Bentlcy, 
 Mr. Dawes, and some others. The formation of the 
 sound of the Latin consonant V, as described by Teren- 
 tianus, corresponds in the exactest manner with that of 
 our W, both being uttered, according to his words, pro- 
 ductius coeuntibus labellis. (Putsch, p. 238(>.) Now this 
 would not be true of the Roman V, if sounded like our 
 V; but is strictly so, if like our W. Thus Martian. 
 Capella: V ore constricto labrisque promulis exhibctnr. 
 So Victorinus Afer in almost the same words with Te-
 
 68 ESSAY ON 
 
 rentian : V literam quoties enunciamus, productis et cce- 
 untibas labris efferemus. As the formation, so the sound 
 of our W is well described by the Roman grammarians 
 when they speak of their consonant V. The fullness of 
 it, though without aspiration, is expressed by the words 
 pinguis and erassits. Digamma (says Sergius) inventum 
 est, ut adhibito sermonibus impinguesceret somis. Again : 
 Prteterea et hoc propriam V habet, at dig amnion sonet, id 
 est, pingue quiddam, quumsibiipsaprceponitur, ntservus, 
 vulgus. And so Terentianus on the same letter, v. 
 161, 2. 
 
 Ut vade, veni, vota refer, teneto vultum, 
 Crevisse soman perspicis et coisse crassum. 
 
 Dionysius Halicarn. when he turns the Latin word 
 Telia into Greek, calls it OY'lXta : in which Mr. Dawes 
 thinks Dionysius is mistaken. By which mistake must 
 be meant, either that Dionysius did not know the sound 
 of the Latin consonant V, or if he did, that he applied 
 to it improper letters from his own alphabet. But 
 Dionysius could not be ignorant of the true sound and 
 real power of this V, which he must have heard a hun- 
 dred times every day during his long residence at Rome : 
 and the word Velia itself, being the name of a well 
 known place in Italy, he probably had very often heard 
 pronounced by the Romans. Neither on the other hand 
 is it likely, that this great critic, so well skilled in both 
 languages, should not choose out from his own Greek 
 alphabet those letters, whose nature approached the 
 nearest to the Roman V ; the sound of which he in- 
 tended to convey to his Greek reader. It is evident 
 from his book -rrepl avv9. that he had studied the minutest 
 parts of his own language in the most accurate manner: 
 and therefore, if he thought the sound of ov was the 
 nearest to that of the Latin consonant V, we may, I 
 think, presume that it was so, notwithstanding any mo- 
 dern authority to the contrary. 
 The propriety of Dionysius in assigning ov as the
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 69 
 
 nearest in sound to this V, is confirmed (if what he says 
 needs confirmation) by the first words in a public me- 
 morial drawn up near 200 years before the time of Dio- 
 nysius, and sent by the Romans to the Teians. It is 
 given at length by Chishull, (Antiq. Asiat. p. 102.) with 
 the name of Marcus Valerius (then Prsetor for foreign 
 affairs, in the year of Rome, 559) thus addressing the 
 Teians in their own language : Mapicog OvaXapiog, Map- 
 kov } arparnybg, k. t. A. Marcus Valerius, Marci F. Prcetor 
 
 Concilia, Populoque Teiorum salutem, &c. There 
 
 can be no doubt of there being the greatest care taken 
 on such an occasion to write the principal magistrate's 
 name in proper Greek. There is, therefore, from the 
 foregoing testimonies, the greatest reason to think that 
 the sound of ov was from among all the Greek letters 
 the nearest to that of the Roman V. What then was 
 the sound of this ov ? Most are agreed, it was like that of 
 the Latin* u, these two appearing as convertible be- 
 tween the two languages : ovpavla becoming Urania, and 
 custodia Kovarwdia. Now both the ov and u are gene- 
 rally thought to resemble our oo, or the French f ou: 
 and both these latter dipthongs nearly agree with our 
 W ; the French oui sounding like our we, Corno«faille, 
 Cornwall ; and indeed our own W is analyzed by the 
 eminent author of a late " Introduction to English Gram- 
 mar," into oo. (p. 33. in the note.) Certainly many 
 words beginning with V in Latin, that have passed into 
 our own language, are by us used with the W : vinum, 
 ivine; vasto, to waste; via, way ; vicus, wick (a. termina- 
 
 * Priscian. p. 554. " Quod nos se- 
 cuti [jEolicain scilicet rationesn] u 
 modo correptam, modo productam habe- 
 mus, quumvis videatur ou dipthongi so- 
 num habere. 
 
 t Dipthangus ov profei'tur veluti ou 
 in dictionibus Gallicis nous, vous. Scot. 
 Grararu. 3. And the like sound of the 
 Latin u is clear from a passage in Plau- 
 tus (Mensech. p. 622. edit. Lambin. 
 fol.) 
 
 Men. Egon' ctedi ? Pen. Tu, tu istie, 
 
 inquam, vin' afferri Noctuam, 
 Qua: tu, tu, usque dicat tibi? nam nos 
 jam nos defessi sumus. 
 
 It here appears an owl's cry was tu 
 tu to a Roman ear, as it is too too to 
 an English. Lambin, who was a French- 
 man, observes on the passage, " Allu- 
 dit ad nocture vocem seu cantam, tu, 
 tu, seu tou, tou."
 
 70 ESSAY ON 
 
 tion to several names of places) ventus, ivind; vespa, 
 wasp, &c. Aspiration seems every way excluded f:om 
 this V: which had, as Scaliger says twice in one page, 
 sonum mollissimum (de ling-. Lat. c. 10.) The Greek 
 writers in general, after Dionysius, as well as before him, 
 when they have occasion in Roman names to turn this 
 V into Greek, most commonly do it by ov, as Dionysius 
 above: Severus becomes "Eeovripog, Verus ovijpog, Varro 
 ovapwv, Virgilius ovtpylXiog, Vespasianus ovetnrcKriavog. 
 And, on the other hand, the Latins have turned the ov 
 into V, as from ovai vce. Sometimes indeed their V be- 
 comes in Greek B. Dionysius writing- Varro Bappiov, and 
 Plutarch making Servius ^Lapovtog, and SIpjSioc- And 
 Gaza, one of the most learned of the latter Greeks, in 
 his translation of Cicero's treatise de Senectute, for 
 Turpione Ambivio magis delectatur writes £7rl TvpTriwvt 
 'Ajuj3t/3«i> ijSetcu : and for vidi etiam senem Livium elBov %n 
 Ktu Alfiiov yipovra. There certainly was some relation 
 between the iEolic di gamma and B, which seems to 
 have been a favourite letter of the xEolians. In B etiam 
 solet apud JRoles transire F digamma, quoties ab p inci- 
 pit dictio quce solet aspirari, ut p?'rrwp j3pjrwp dicunt. 
 Priscian. cap. de lit. The same is mentioned by Joan. 
 Grammaticus and Corinthus, who say that, " to words 
 beginning with p they prefix j3, and avoid the aspirate, 
 as poSa |3poSa, 'FaSapavOvg BpaSajuavOuc, paicog fiptucog." 
 So Caninius : ** Lacones, Cretenses, et Pamphylii 
 pro digamma utuntur j3, wtbv wj3eov ovum, Qaog <pd(3og 
 lumen. Hesychius citat dafiaicog sedes, et SafiaXog lam- 
 pas, pro OaKog, $a\6g." And as among the Greeks them- 
 selves there was some affinity between /3 and the ^Eol. 
 digamma, so there was between the j3 and Latin V, as 
 appears in Greek words passing into Latin, /3tw vivo ; 
 fiioTrjviota,vita; j3a$?£u>, j3at)w vado; j3fjveu, j3euva> venio; 
 /3o(xkw vescor; fiopog vorax. Lipsius on the affinity, 
 which he says there was among the ancients between B 
 and V, both in writing and pronunciation, grounds a 
 pretty emendation of a fragment of Afranius preserved 
 by Gellius, where it stands thus : —
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 71 
 
 " Hem iste parentum est vitabilis liberis, 
 " Ubi malunt metui, quam vereri se a suis." 
 
 There is neither sense nor metre in the former line, as 
 we here read it. Muretus was sensible of it, and altered 
 it thus : " Horumce parentum est vita bilis liberis." i. e. 
 amara, odiosa. A correction this not unworthy of Mu- 
 retus. But Lipsius thinks he proposes a better in 
 
 " Horumce parentum est vita vilis liberis." 
 
 By the change of V into B, he would restore a line of 
 Pacuvius, which appears in Nonius thus : 
 
 " JS T on potest hie, Melanippe, sine tua opera exantlari 
 clavos." 
 
 For clavos he reads labos. (Lips. Var. Lect.ii. 28.) He 
 speaks there of the treatise of Adamantius Martyr " de 
 affinitate V et B," which he says he had seen in manu- 
 script : of which we have only some short extracts in the 
 fifth and eighth chapters of Mag. Aurel. Cassiodorus de 
 Orthogr. Salmasius thinks, that even " cum linguam 
 Romanam puriorem usurparent, bitidum pro vitulo dix- 
 isse, et vellum pro hello, cujus hodieque pronunciationis 
 vestigia expressa remansere in Glossariis Latino-Grgecis 
 ante mille annos scriptis" (de Hellenist, p. G2. and more 
 to the same purpose in Prof at. ad Philox. Gloss, a La- 
 bceo.J The like remark is in Peter Victorius. Var. 
 Lect. xxvii. 2. The Latin B in many words passes with 
 us into V: habeo, have; taberna, tavern; lib ero, deliver. 
 But though the B is sometimes used in Greek versions as 
 corresponding with the Roman consonant V, yet it is not 
 so often as ov; ^eovrjpog being met with more than twelve 
 times in Goltzius' medals, where St/3r?poc is but thrice. 
 Dionysius, when he writes OviXta to express Velia, 
 says, " The old Greeks (i.e. the vEolians and Pelasgians) 
 used frequently to prefix to words beginning with a vowel, 
 this ov expressed by a single character. And that single
 
 72 ESSAY ON 
 
 character was as a T, with two transverse lines joined to 
 a perpendicular one." 'E-rrlvdovTai ye §77 7rpoe rovg ntXao- 
 yovg, teal SiSoacnv avrolg -\wpia, rr\g tavrwv inroSaoa/uvot, to. 
 irspl ti)v hpav \ifxvr\v, iv olg r/v ra rroWa eXwotj, a vvv Kara 
 tov ap\a"tov rr\g (HaXtierou rputrov, OveXia bvofxaZ.i.Tai. <Tvvt)6eg 
 yap r\v roig ap\a(oig "EXXrjow, wg ra 7roXXa, TrpoTiOevai twv 
 ovoixariov, ottogwv at ap\at utto <pwvy)Lvriov iyivovTO, rrjv OY' 
 ori»XXa|3>]v £vi (Troi\£u^ ypa(f>Ofi(vriv. tovto §' v\v woTTtp ya/x/ua 
 diTTaxg £7ri fiiav dpdijv lirfevyvvjizvov raXg irXayiaig, wg Fe- 
 XtVrj, Kat Fava£, Kai Foticoe, kcii Fav?)p, icai 7roXXa romvra. 
 (Antiquit. Horn. p. 16. edit. Sylb.) 
 
 Thus much concerning the character and power of the 
 digamina. Its application to the correction of some im- 
 perfect Greek metre, particularly that of Homer, in 
 many places, has been pointed out in general by Dr. 
 Bentley, and made more fully, with a different name 
 given it, by Mr. Dawes. This proposed use of the di- 
 gamma hath been thought whimsical by some persons, 
 and ridiculed by others; by one especially, who in learn- 
 ing and knowledge was as much inferior to Dr. Bentley, 
 as in taste and genius he was superior to most of his age. 
 The critic is introduced by the poet as saying, 
 
 Roman and Greek grammarians ! know your better : 
 Author of something yet more great than letter ; 
 While tow'ring o'er your alphabet, like Saul, 
 Stands our digamma, and o'ertops them all. 
 
 Mr. Pope here intended to expose Dr. Bentley's in- 
 solence, not his ignorance: but through a mistake of his 
 own he has made the Doctor speak like an illiterate, as 
 well as vain man. Would he ever call himself greater 
 than the Roman and Greek grammarians for being the 
 author of a letter, which he meant to introduce solely on 
 the authority of those very grammarians ? Or would he 
 speak of the digamma as in figure o'ertopping the rest of 
 the alphabet, when he must so well understand the fore- 
 going passage of Dionysius ; who says not a word of its
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 73 
 
 extraordinary size, only that it was like a gamma, with 
 this difference, that it had two transverse lines joined to 
 a perpendicular one, F, the common gamma having only 
 one, r ? That great critic's application of this ancient 
 Greek letter, notwithstanding the sneer of the satyrist, 
 is an extraordinary instance of that sagacity, which 
 was almost peculiar to him; and is now confirmed by 
 the express testimony of one of the greatest gramma- 
 rians of antiquity, Apollonius, who in parts of his writ- 
 ings lately published, and not known to Dr. Bentley at 
 the time of his first proposing the introduction of the di- 
 gamma, mentions it by name as used by the old poets 
 in those very words, to which the Doctor added it by con- 
 jecture. I cannot help mentioning another particular 
 confirmation, which one of his conjectures has received 
 since his first offering of it. The epigram of Philodemus, 
 which he said would throw light on Hor. Serm. i. 3. v. 
 120, 121. if it were found, has lately been published in 
 an Anthologia of Greek epigrams by Reiskius at Lipsic, 
 1754, and illustrates the sense of the passage according 
 to the Doctor's explanation of it. This epigram of Phi- 
 lodemus, a famous Epicurean Greek in the time of Cicero 
 (Fin. ii. 35.) is addressed by him to the celebrated Piso, 
 his scholar. 
 
 Eivi pv\dig Kpa^iag Soiovg irtpiBakirti) zpwTag 
 Tov filv 'Pwjuai'Soc, tov St KopivQiaSog, 
 'H juev parpwvag te rpoirovg kcu fiQea crripytiv 
 
 OTS' Ct7TO K£KpV$aAoV P^XP 1 TSp'O'KfAlStoV. 
 
 'H Si "xycrjv trapi\u irday ^tXorrjrt Trpoar\vwg 
 
 UXaoTovpyovcra Tvirovg roiig , ^\e<pavTiadog. 
 *Av Se piav to.vto.iv, ITaaov, p alpuv iTrrtiXkug, 
 Eiv 'E^vpy pipvw, TH V N A' "APA TA'AAOS "EXOI. 
 
 We from hence see the propriety of his reading, 
 
 Illam, post paulo, sed pluris, si exierit vir, 
 
 Gallis: Hanc Philodemus ait, sibi, quce neque magno, fyc
 
 74 ESSAY ON 
 
 But to return to his digamma. When a hint of this 
 kind is once given, it is apt to be so much improved by 
 others, as perhaps sometimes to be extended too far. 
 Whether some critics, proceeding on the Doctor's plan, 
 have not inserted this letter in some words, to which it 
 did not originally belong, I presume not to say. There 
 is, I think, one circumstance in this case of the digamma, 
 which may be a safe guide to conjecture: I mean, when 
 there is a Roman word, derived from the Greek, with the 
 digamma, we may fairly conclude that the Greek word 
 itself had formerly the same : that tc therefore had it, 
 from whence vis, olicog vicus, olvog vinum, a'Sw 't§ov video, 
 &c. especially as these and many other such words in 
 their position through Homer require, in order to per- 
 fect the metre, the addition of a consonant. This seems 
 an application of it on sure principles. Beyond this 
 there is room for more ingenuity than certainty. 
 
 This digamma bearing some resemblance in figure to 
 the other Greek letters r, T, I, II, hath occasioned many 
 mistakes in Hesychius, as is observed by Dr. Taylor in 
 his Lectiones Lysiacce, c. 9. and in his commentary on 
 Marmor Sandvicense, p. 44. and by Albertius on Hesy- 
 chius. Thus Dr. Taylor has well explained Homer's 
 GtyaXoag out of Hesychius by jroiKikog rg ypa<f>rj , and sup- 
 posed it should be read aiFayoFcig, as aiaXCoaai is ex- 
 plained in Hesych. by iroiKiXm : in the latter word, <na- 
 \waai, the digamma being entirely omitted ; and in the 
 former, myaXoug, changed into a F. Mr. Dawes, in his 
 Miscel. Crit. p. 181, 182. hath collected some words into 
 which the r hath crept instead of F; and adds to them 
 ayaZttQai, which he supposes should be aFaZzoQm, from 
 whence Homer's aFaaaaro, commonly read aacraaro. I 
 am strongly induced to believe that Homer's Fivro may 
 be added to that list, and was originally written Fivro. 
 The common account of Eustathius, of 7 being prefixed, 
 is very unsatisfactory. "EAw, from whence is 'IXto, 'ivro, 
 probably had the digamma, as the Latin vello, or volo 
 seems deduced from it. Hesychius explains yivro by 
 zXafizv. And the very next word to it in Hesychius, 
 
 /
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 75 
 
 Fivra, (explained tcpta, mrXayxva) is evidently for Tlvra, 
 from whence Venter. And, just after that, TivTivot (for 
 FivTivot) muteim, which Guietus explains ol evrbg ovrtg. 
 Then rhrip (for Flvrep) KoiXia : pro fitvrtp, says Salma- 
 sius. So Firia (for Ftrla) W(a, the same with iVrj and 
 hat,, Lat. vitex: with us, withy. With the help of the 
 digamma, and no otherwise, it is easy to conceive how 
 ttW came to be used, contrary to the apparent form of 
 all other aorists beginning with a vowel ; since it not 
 only takes no augment, but even loses one of the times 
 it had in a'Sw. But this difficulty vanishes at once, if we 
 suppose it was originally Fe&w, whose second aorist was 
 then regularly e'Ft<W, as eAwrov is of Xenrw: and that, 
 when this character was dropped, without any other letter 
 in this word being substituted in its room, it was left from 
 the Ionic Fidov, t<W. The supposition that Homer's 
 yivro is for %vro, with the digamma prefixed, is much fa- 
 voured by a passage in Herodian 7repi ptyaXov ptywrog 
 (in Aldi Thesaur. p. 205.) where he inquires ttoOsv rb 
 yivro, and says it is Ik tov sXw to Xapfiavw, ov 6 iraOriTiKog 
 EVforwe to 'tXofiai, kcu 6 TTaparaTiKOQ tX6fxr\v, to y sXeto kol 
 Kara avyiconriv aloXiKiiv tXro, tcai Kara, /xerademv tov \ elg 
 v SwpiKiog evro, Kat TrXeova<j[i(£ tov Y 'AIOAIKQTS yivro. 
 From the manner in which the T is here mentioned, it 
 is probable the ./Eolic digamma is meant by Hero- 
 dian. 
 
 In regard to the r appearing sometimes instead of F, 
 Mr. Bowyer (Postsc. ad Kust. de Verb. Med. 143.) 
 thinks this is not always a corrupt reading arising from 
 the error of its transcriber, but sometimes proceeded 
 from some affinity between the gamma, as pronounced 
 by some nations, and the digamma: as from ayopa. 
 comes forum, from yaXij felts; and what the French call 
 Galles, we do Wales; guerre, war.* This may have 
 been the case sometimes. But, undoubtedly, in a pas- 
 
 * So Lipsins, " Digammos ajigura plex, G rescriptum reperies: ut Wil- 
 dicta, non a sono : quamquam et in parte helmus Guilhelmus, Waltherus Gual- 
 inclusus ille. Nam sffipe ubi W du- tlierus. de pronunc. c. xii.
 
 76 ESSAY ON 
 
 sage cited above from Apollonius, the 7 is by a mistake 
 of the copyist inserted for F, in yl0o>; for Apollonius 
 not two lines before says the digamma was u^sd in this 
 word, mentioning it by name, AIoXikov Aiyafifxa, and then 
 gives an instance of it from Alcaus in arep yiOev : where 
 we can have no doubt but it should be FIQev. 
 
 The similar forms of letters (though the lines that 
 compose them, considering their smallness, seem vari- 
 ously modified to as great a degree of diversity, as 
 human wit and sagacity could possibly carry them) 
 have yet, as is well known, miserably corrupted the 
 text of ancient books. Thus the likeness between the 
 small Roman r and t hath, I believe, corrupted the 
 following passage of Virgil in his naval games : ^En. 
 v. X30. 
 
 Hie viridem JEneas frondenli ex ilice metam 
 Constituit, signum nautis, pater, unde reverti 
 Scirent, et longos ubi circumflectere cursus. 
 
 By the insertion of pater here in the second line, the 
 construction is embarrassed in a manner unknown to 
 Virgil: the word itself is unnecessary, if not absurd. 
 When it is joined in construction with JEneas in the 
 other parts of the poem, it is generally close in position 
 likewise: Turn pater Mneas; at pater JEneas; &c. 
 Thus it is used in seventeen places : I can find but one 
 where they are disjoined, iEn. viii. 28. 
 
 Cum pater in ripa, gelidique sub cetheris axe 
 iEneas, tristi turbatus pectora bello, 
 Procubuit. 
 
 Here, however, though pater is separated, it yet stands 
 first as in pater JEneas: and the sense of the word here 
 is very emphatical. In like manner pater is closely join- 
 ed with Anchises in nine places, and separate but once,
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 77 
 
 where the construction is however perfectly easy, ./En. 
 iii. 610. 
 
 Ipse pater dextram Anchises, hand multa moratus, 
 Dat juveni. 
 
 On which account I suspect our common reading not to 
 be Virgil's, and that he wrote it thus : 
 
 Hie viridem JEneas frondenti ex ilice metam 
 Constituit ; signum nautis patet, wide reverti 
 Scirent, et longos ubi circumflectere carsus. 
 
 The changing of two letters in Ivavrlov for two others 
 of a form somewhat similar, will perhaps give the true 
 sense of a passage in (Edip. Col. of Sophocles. OEdipus 
 towards the close of that defence, which he makes for 
 himself against Creon before Theseus, says, " My hands 
 have indeed been guilty of my father's murther, but they 
 were guided in this by accident, perhaps by the Gods. 
 Yet you upbraid me with the whole of this, before these 
 people." 
 
 Totavr ovuS'&ig fie rwvS' 'ENANTI'ON. V. 1057. 
 
 Thus he speaks, according to the present reading. 
 But would not the conclusion here be much fuller, and 
 more agreeable to the manner and spirit of Sophocles, 
 were we to read 
 
 Toiavr ovu&Zeig jue twv$ 'ANAI'TION. 
 
 " And yet you injuriously charge me with the whole of 
 this, innocent as I am" 
 
 In the same play, v. 1585. 
 
 STPE'^ANTA x«poc rfc uvikvtov /3e%j.
 
 78 ESSAY ON 
 
 What if instead of orptyavTa here, which seems too weak 
 a word applied to thunder, it were read 
 
 SKH'^FANTA x H P°£ T *>£ uviki'itov /3tXyj. 
 
 2kt)7ttoc is often used, particularly by the tragic poets, to 
 express thunder, lightning, or storm ; and by the best 
 authors in general: see D'orville ad Chariton, p. 692. 
 and H. Steph. Thes. Gr. in V.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 79 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Ou the accent of the old Greeks. Some passages of Dionysius of Halicarnassus 
 and Plutarch considered. The tones as well as times regarded by the ancients 
 in their compositions. Importance of accent to harmony. 
 
 IN regard to the accents among the old Greeks, (I do 
 not here mean the marks or virgulce, which we now see 
 in the editions of their books, the introduction and use 
 of which I shall consider in another place) that they did 
 regularly raise and sink their voice on certain syllables, 
 I cannot help thinking as needless to piove from pas- 
 sages of their own authors, as it would be to prove la- 
 boriously from Plato, Aristotle, and Plutarch, that they 
 walked with their two legs, or saw with their two eyes. 
 If they had a voice, with two or three different notes 
 belonging to it in use, they could not avoid having 
 accent.* 
 
 But in order to comply in some measure with the 
 common expectation of readers on this subject, I shall 
 just mention, that the present names of accents, though 
 used more frequently by later Greek critics and gram- 
 marians, were by no means first invented by them to 
 express a thing of their own discovery, but were well 
 known to the Greeks of the earlier and purer ages. 
 Aristotle, we have seen above, uses o^vt-qq in the accen- 
 tual sense. He uses likewise the word Trpoatocia, as we 
 do, in his Poetics and Elenchi. Plato, in his f Cratylus, 
 
 * " Quando has [accentuum Gra> 
 cormn] Tiotas caeperint apponere, non 
 inquiro : res ipsa semper fuit." D'or- 
 vill. Crit. Vann. p. 333. 
 
 t Speaking of the etymology of some 
 compounded words, he says, ttoXKayaq 
 tTriixBctWojxiv ■ypap/A.cna., rx J' tZaigoZ- 
 ft£V xal raj o|uri)-ra; (A.iraBa.Wv- 
 
 /j.bv. Sspe inserimus literas, aliasque 
 
 eximimus et acumina 7nuta7nus. He 
 
 then gives an instance of this in Ait 
 
 <j>lXof TO, T£ £TE{0V ttliToflsV land. l^siko/XlV, 
 
 Kctl avTi o^siaj t?j fjiks-ti; truWa^.;, $a- 
 £E~av t$9fy£a/xiQa,. In Aj£ <}hAo;, alteram 
 iota exentimus, et pro acuta media sijllaba 
 graie/n pronunciavimus. InsUad of SA
 
 80 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 mentions the very words o^sla and fiaptia as regarding 
 merely the accent of the voice. Dionysius of Halicar- 
 nassus, speaks as distinctly of these tones by the names 
 we now have of them, as he does of long and short 
 quantity. " Every word," says he, " that is placed in 
 a sentence, is not pronounced with the same intension 
 of voice: one is expressed with an acute [on its last 
 syllable] one with a grave, and one with a tone com- 
 pounded of the other two. Of those that have these 
 two tones, some have the acute and grave in close con- 
 junction on the same syllable, which we then call cir- 
 cumflex : some have them separate, each with its dis- 
 tinct proper power on different syllables. In dissyllables 
 there is no middle place for acute or grave : in polysyl- 
 lables of all kinds, there is a single syllable that has 
 the acute, and all the others have graves."* 
 
 <}>iXo; it was pronounced Ai'*f>tXo?, by 
 leaving out one iota of iii, and giving 
 the <(>i a grave instead of an acute. He 
 then proceeds and gives an example in 
 the word avflpoiTTo? of an opposite case, 
 where some letters were added, and the 
 tones likewise changed. aXXa>v Ss tou- 
 vavri'ov iy.t3a.XkofA.tv y^a[xfj.ara, to. Xe 
 o£ei»c BaguTEga, qBtyyofjizQa. ToSto toLvvv 
 ev nal to t£v 'Av9f<wff(»v ovofxa. iriTrov&tv. 
 st. t. X. In aliis contra vocabulis addi- 
 mus literas : el qua erant acuta, gravio- 
 res ■pronunciamus, &c. T. i. p. 399. 
 edit. Serr. 
 
 * Ov y.riv affaa-a. yi h Xe£ij, h iiaB' ev 
 jixofiov Xoyov TttTTO^wivn tH; avrvt; XlyETat 
 Tacriai;' «XX' h /uev iirl t>k ofyiaq, h Js 
 iirl t«j /3a.p£i'ac, h 5e lie' aptyoTv. twv Se 
 afAtyoripat; Taj Tao-eij I^outSiv, al f/,h 
 xaTa yiav avXKafint <rv\i4fiao[A.iwt i%ovtn 
 tS o£e~ to B&ev, at; Si) 7rtganrtUfjt,ivag xa- 
 "KoviJt.iT al Je ev etejw te Kal etejoj %»{'? 
 
 EJCaTEfOV, E<j>' EaUTOl! ti» olxitav <f>llXttTTOV 
 <{>uo-iv. Kai rait; y.h S(o-vXXa'/3«j ouSev to 
 Sia ftirov ^piov /3«puT>jT0? Ha) o^vrn-rot;- 
 
 t«"{ Se Tto'kvirvXhaBoi!;, oiai itot av liia-w, 
 
 h TOV IQjV TOVOV \y0\K7O. fj.10. EV TToXXaif 
 
 Bapiatt; sveo-tiv. Dionys. tteji trvv9. 
 
 T/JLVIA. la. 
 
 The word rtivai, though in its general 
 primary signification it expresses ex- 
 tension every way, in length as well as 
 height, yet when used in a prosodical 
 sense, is restrained to the signification 
 of height alone ; and so are its deriva- 
 tives toVij, rovoq, from whence the Latin 
 toni, or tenores, and our tones. It is 
 constantly used in this sense through 
 the old musical writers. Scaliger gives 
 an explanation of these words being 
 used thus. Hos omnes Grieci tovouj vo- 
 cavere, translata ratione a Jidibus, quo- 
 rum intentione atit remissione acutior 
 graviorve redderetur vox. de cans. ling. 
 Lat. ii. 53. But whatever was the 
 reason of this word's particular appli- 
 cation to the height of sound, it cer- 
 tainly is so applied in fact. "Evtovov is 
 explained in Hesychius by o|u. 'AvaTEivsi 
 in Stephens, by sursum cxtollo, erigo,
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 81 
 
 I know he speaks in the same chapter of the contra- 
 riety of accents to metre on some occasions ; and that 
 
 sustollo, attollo ; as likewise 'nrmivco 
 and h-riiva, metaphorice ah intentione 
 arcus vel lyrie. Every one knows that 
 the usual difference between a man's 
 voice and a woman's consists in this, 
 that the former uses lower, or deeper 
 notes than the latter : what difference 
 there is, is in the comparative height 
 of the notes, not in the length. When, 
 therefore, I find to'voj Ba^b; used to 
 distinguish a man's voice from a wo- 
 man's, I am certain that those two 
 words refer only to high and low. This 
 then 1 find in Lucian, in his eiko've; 1 he 
 is there describing a fine voice, and. 
 says, wS? Js o tovoi; rou ydi-ypn-ros, oTos 
 anaXincnat;, ovrs Bafvt;, £•? ei; to ay$ggioy 
 rip/xatrrai, oxni nam Xetttoj i; &t)XijTaTOf 
 ilvai. Omnis vero tonus vocis mollissimus, 
 neque gravis, ut qui virilis, neque valde 
 tenuis ut prorsus muliehris esset. Thus 
 Aristotle applies o*u and Bapu : $10 ndi 
 '0%v, iwa.y.ta>i; cvfx.ttov. Ka\ 'igyov Ta 
 "ANIZ ateiv . to. Se Bajs'tt KA'Ti2. Probl. 
 sect. xix. et Physiog. c. 2. As Saguj 
 in Greek, so gravis in Latin, when ap- 
 plied to sound, signifies lowness: thus 
 Lucretius uses it, iv. 549. 
 
 Quum tuba depresso graviler sub 
 murmure mitsit. 
 
 and Virgil, Turn sonus anditur gravior, 
 tractimque susurrant, where he is ex- 
 pressing the low hummiug of bees. So 
 Cicero de Orat. iii. 6. Est item contra 
 quiddam remissione gravissimum, quo- 
 que tanquam sonorum gradibus desceu- 
 ditur. From ai^ai tollo, comes in like 
 manner agenj as opposed to Sriffif on 
 •which Scaliger speaks thus ; Syllabg 
 igitur modus, quo tollitur in ea vox acu- 
 lior, dietus est a Greeds £.e.<rts, recte sane: 
 
 in alteram autem subeuntem cum demit- 
 tatur vox, SeViv appellarunt, minus com- 
 mode : — qu<E melius xaraditrt; dicta fu- 
 isset : — vel tequabilitatem vocis potius 
 appellassent. unde etiam in musicis o/xo- 
 t6ve~; quidam dicuntur tractus, in quibus 
 apo-it; est nulla. See likewise the ac- 
 count of E7riTaa-ij and avsc-ir above in 
 ch. i. So in Priscian. in unaquaque 
 parte orationis arsis et thesis sunt,velut 
 in hac parte natura : ut quando dico 
 natu, elevatur vox et est arsis in tu ; 
 quando vera ra, deprimitur vox, et est 
 thesis. Nigidius, (in Gellius xiii. 25.) 
 speaking of the accent of the word 
 Valeri in the genitive case, says, " se- 
 cunda syllaba superiore tono est, quam 
 prima; deinde novissima dejicitur. at 
 in casu vocandi summo tono est prima ; 
 deinde gradalim descendunt." The re- 
 mark of Gellius himself upon this is, 
 " summum autem tonum 7r£o<ra)Jiav acu- 
 lani die-it.'' Quinclilian, when he speaks 
 of a syllable being acuted, says, acuta 
 excitatur. And the old Roman philolo- 
 gist, Martianns Capella, calls the te- 
 nores or tonos, fastigia et cacumim, 
 which perhaps should be read acumina, 
 as being the word more often used — 
 Accentus (says Diomedes) quidem Fas- 
 tigia weaver unt, quod capitibus litera- 
 rum apponerentur ; Alii tenores vel to- 
 nos appellant. Nonnulli acuiniua deji- 
 nire maluerunt. Thus Herodian applies 
 the word eysifto to the acute. 'Ex U 
 avTcdVUfjuZv, a\ f/.h iyupvrai t«v o^itav 
 ■jijy 7T£0 auTovv, iyx\ifx,artxal xaXoZvTar 
 cd Si fj.h iy£i;3wai,of0oTov<3;j^Ey«(. Herod. 
 infi Ej/JtXtT. Ex pronominibus, ea qu<E 
 acutum excitant ante se, enclitica vo- 
 cantur: qu<z vero non ilium excitant, 
 op8oTovoi^*Ey«, i. e. rectum accentum ha- 
 
 il
 
 82 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 passage hath been urged as affording an invincible and 
 conclusive argument against the use of accents in ge- 
 neral among the old Greeks. But if we consider this 
 passage a little, we shall see how very unfairly it has 
 been represented in relation to this subject. I allow 
 then, that Dionysius doth complain of accents as sub- 
 versive of quantity, on some occasions : but on what 
 occasions? Why, when some unskilful composers of 
 music (for in this place he is comparing the modulation 
 of rr\g opyaviKrig re kcu lodiicrig fxovarjg with that of common 
 discourse, the SiaXiicTov piXog), when they, I say, who set 
 the Greek odes to music, did sometimes join a long 
 syllable to a short note, an acuted one to a grave note, 
 and vice versa ; who made (as he there * says) the words 
 bend to the musical notes, and not the notes to the 
 
 bentia. And so Apollonius in fifty places 
 calls the acate dieynye^fA-ivov to'vov. 
 
 It should be remembered, that besides 
 the arsis of accent, mentioned here by 
 Scaliger and Priscian, there is another 
 that more frequently occurs in grammati- 
 cal writers, the arsis of metre, relating to 
 the elevation of the foot or hand at the 
 beginning of feet, in order to mark the 
 division of their times in scanning. 
 " Arsis igitur ac Thesis (says Mar. Victo- 
 rinus) quas Grcrci dicunt, id est sublatio 
 ac positio, significant pedis matum. Est 
 enim arsis sublatio pedis sine sono : 
 Thesis positio pedis cum sono." Putsch. 
 p. 2482. This raising of the foot, in 
 dividing the times, should not be con- 
 founded with the arsis of accent, which 
 signifies the elevation of voice. The 
 metrical arsis often takes place on a 
 grave syllable, that has the accentual 
 thesis. More will be said on this in 
 another place. 
 
 ,* 'H Ss IpyavMn te Hal oJSixJj (A.ou<ra — 
 Taj Xe£eij toij jt/iEXecnv liroraTTeiv a£toi, 
 xai oil ra juiXi ra~j XE^ssriv, &>; i£ aXXoiv 
 
 TE TToXXaiv $n\w, Hal fxakia-ra t£v Evg;- 
 
 Tri'SoU fJ.BkuV, a TCZKoinHZ T«» 'HXEXTfaV 
 
 "hiyovtrav Iv 'OfEo-Tu ttjoj tov X°Z° r 
 iXya, <r.ya, Xeuxov i'^vo? agQvXns 
 
 Ti6e~TE, fA.fl XTUTTElTE. 
 
 ' Alton £oZa.T IxsTo-', anoTrgoBi xoiTaj. 
 
 'Ev yap 5« toutoij, to a-~ya s\ya "kivv.iv, 
 I<b' evoj q>6oyyou y-iXxliiTai, xairoi tocv 
 toiSiv Xe^eojv ly.atrTn Sapsi'aj te Ta<r£i; 
 EVEi xai o^Eirtj. Kffli to 'Ap/SuXn; ETJ fj.itrri 
 O-vKhaQn TW T£IT»V OfAOTOVOV Ep^Et, «|«>l^a- 
 vou ovtoj ev ovo/jia, Silo Xa/SEiV o^Ei'a;. Hal 
 tou TiSeite, QapiiTEga fj.lv h TrgZrn yivsrai, 
 $vo Je m.st' avryv o^vrovoi te xai cfA.i<pmvof 
 tov Ktu7TeTte, o itipivira3-fj.l<; Jjtfiayia-Tac 
 vua yap al SCo o-vWa&ai Xiyovrai TatrEi. 
 Kai to ' hnon^an, ov \af/,Qavsi rnv t?;j 
 meVwj o~uXXa)3>)j wjoo-a)Siav o^£~av, aXX' 
 \iii t«v TETapTnv trvWaQfiV xaraBsBix-SV 
 h rao-u; rng t^itjjj. Qiue vero instrumen- 
 
 tis cantuique aptatur Musa r/icft* 
 
 ones concentui submittendas postulat,non 
 vero concentum dictionibus : ut ex multis 
 aliis patet, et prcecipue ex hoc Euripidis
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 83 
 
 words. This he instances in some lines ont of the 
 Orestes of Euripides : 
 
 Srya, arya, XevKov i\vog ap/3v\i]c 
 
 TlOilTE, flrj KTViriLTS. 
 
 ' ATTOTrpofiaT tuaia cmoirpoBi Koirag. 
 
 Now, says lie, " though it is impossible there should 
 be more than one acute in one word, yet the word apfiv- 
 Xrjc here is made to have two, by having the same tone 
 on the middle and third syllable." Where are these 
 two ? not on the word, according to any pronunciation 
 that would be assigned it by the patrons of accents, or 
 by the common rules of them : by them it has but one, 
 as Dionysius himself limits it. Where then were the 
 two, which he objects to 1 why, in the musical notes of 
 those composers, who set these lines of Euripides to 
 music ; and, in doing that, gave as high a note to the 
 last syllable of ap/BuArje, as to the second : so that, ac- 
 cording to these musicians, the word was accented thus, 
 ap(5v\i]Q. So in KTVTTHre (says he) " the circumflex is by 
 them quite destroyed : for, by their setting the long 
 syllable ttu to a note like that, which they assigned to 
 the short syllable next to it, these two syllables, of 
 
 cuntico, quo in Oresle fecit Electram ad turn eundem liabent. Vocabuli, KtuotIte, 
 chorum uti : circumflexus penitus obscuratur : una 
 
 Tacite, tacite, candidum soled? vestigium 
 Ponite, strepitum ne edite. 
 Ahscedite bine procul a leeto. 
 
 enim ditcc syllable intensione efferun- 
 tnr. Et vox, 'A7ro7rpo£aTS, non habet in 
 media syllaba accentum acutum, sed us- 
 que ad quurtam syllabam transfertur 
 Na7n in his <r"ya, <?~ya, Xswov, u% .) vocis intensio tertice. ■ I have here corrected 
 sono decantantur, etiumsi trium harum the common Latin version, which in 
 dictionum unaqueque suos habeat tarn some places is faulty. In many other 
 graves quam auctos accentus. Et vox translations of passages from the Greek 
 'Ap/2uX>ij quoque in tertia syllaba eundem authors, which I have occasion to cite 
 quern in media tonum habet, etsi nequit throughout this Essay, I have not 
 fieri, ut una dictio duos habeat ucutos. thought it necessary to adhere to the 
 Ac vocabuli, Tiflsire, gravior quidem pri- common versions, but have often given 
 ma fit syllaba, duct vero sequentes acu- a new one. 
 
 g *
 
 84 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 different accent and quantity, are by them reduced to an 
 equality. And in tnroTrpofiaTe the middle syllable hath 
 not the acute, which is carried to the fourth syllable." 
 But it surely is not carried to the fourth now ; nor can 
 be according to our modern accentuation. By that, 
 a7ro7rpo/3aTf is acuted on the middle syllable, in the very 
 manner which Dionysius here prescribes. The method 
 then of accenting these lines in Euripides, remarked here 
 by Dionysius, is as follows : 
 
 "Sitya aija \svkuv 1.\voq appv\i]Q 
 
 lit/art, ju»7 KTvirtiTt, 
 
 1 AiroTTfiofiuT Ikug tnroTrpodi KOirag. 
 
 Whether the giving of such tones to these syllables in 
 music be really a fault, I pretend not to say : let musi- 
 cians* themselves settle that with Dionysius. I only 
 
 * However the common accent of 
 syllables might be regarded by the 
 Greek composers of music, it seems to 
 be acknowledged that the quantity was 
 duly observed. ProbabiUor eorum est 
 opinio, qui dicunt, toni sea vocis prola- 
 tionem, syllabae. quantitatem semper sequi. 
 Thus writes the learned author of a 
 piece de Antiqua Musica Graca, printed 
 at the end of the Oxford Aratus : and 
 this he grounds on good authority, par- 
 ticularly on that of Martianus Capella. 
 I know not any writer, that expresses 
 the quality of lowness and height in 
 sound, with more perspicuity and ele- 
 gance, than Capella. Constat omnis mo- 
 dulatio ex gravitate soni et acumine. 
 Gravilas dicitur, qua modi qitudam t de- 
 missione moilescit : acumen vero, quod in 
 aciem tenuatam gracilis et erectce modu- 
 lationis extenditur. — Satyr, lib. ix. 
 
 The author of a letter to Mr. Avison, 
 concerning the musie of the ancients, 
 speaks thus of their observation of 
 quantity. " The tunes which were 
 played to odes, like those of Horace, 
 must have been plain and simple, be- 
 
 cause of the speedy return of the same 
 stanza, and because of the quantity of 
 the syllables, which was not lobe vio- 
 lated, or at least, uot greatly, by the 
 music. The modern musicians, who 
 have attempted to set such Latin or 
 Greek odes to music, have often too 
 much neglected this rule of suiting the 
 tune to the metre, and have made long 
 syllables short, and short syllables long, 
 and run divisions upon single ones, and 
 repeated some of the words. In mo- 
 dern vocal music we regard not this law, 
 but perpetually sacrifice the quantity 
 to the, modulation ; which yet surely is 
 a fault. If we had the old musical 
 notes which were set to any particular 
 ode or hymn, that is extant, I should 
 not despair of finding out the length of 
 each note; for the quantity of the syl- 
 lable would probably be a tolerable 
 guide : and I would consent to truck 
 the works of Seignior Alberli for the 
 tune that was set to Pindar's 
 
 X^va-ia. <$oe(AiyZ 'A7reXX*vcf.''
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. S5 
 
 mention the thing as a fact, which he censures, for being 
 not only contrary to quantity, but the true accent of the 
 language too. I have taken this particular notice of 
 that passage in his works, because I know it hath, either 
 with inconsiderate haste or wilful misconstruction, been 
 alleged to shew that he objected to the use of accents 
 in general pronunciation, whereas he there objects to 
 the abuse of particular accents among musicians, who, 
 in setting their words, neglected the ordinary quantity 
 and accent. 
 
 After he has exemplified his assertion by particular 
 instances, then follows the favourite passage of the ene- 
 mies of accents ; 77 /utv yap 7TE&7 \i£ig ov^tvbg ovn bvofia- 
 toq ovre pyj/xarog /3m£erat rovg \povovg, ovdt f.i£TaTiQt)cnv' 
 aXX o'lag TrapdXritye ry (pvcru rag avWafiag, rag t*. fxaKpag 
 nax rag ftpa\dag, TOiavrag tyvkaaau. — " Now prose, [which 
 is not subject to this perversion of musical composers] 
 never violates nor transposes the quantity of any noun 
 or verb ; but preserves the natural quality of syllables 
 both long and short." These lines Dr. G. hath inadvert- 
 ently twice quoted, without attending in the least to the 
 context, as a proof against accents, and advanced them 
 in the title of his book, as the bulwark of quantity ; of 
 which he is very tender and tenacious, though not so 
 much as I am myself, as will appear in the following 
 pages. Accordingly I should most readily reject the 
 present accentual system in Greek, if it were really con- 
 trary to quantity, as hath been alleged. Whether it truly 
 be so or no, will be further matter of inquiry in another 
 place. 
 
 In regard to the point before us, can they, who have 
 supposed the foregoing passage as a declaration against 
 accents, imagine that such a very sensible man as Diony- 
 sius, could object to the accents of general pronunciation 
 in one part of his treatise, and then contradict himself 
 in another, where, in the clearest terms, he speaks of 
 these very tones as contributing greatly to the harmony 
 of language ? Among the constituent parts of perfect 
 writing or speaking, which he recites in his xixth chap-
 
 80 ESSAY ON 
 
 ter, he mentions these accents as such : o-y/jjuaTa travrola 
 kal TA'SEIS (pwvrjg, di KaXovfievai nPOSQiAl'AI, Siadjopoi, 
 KkiTTTovaai ry iroiKikia tov Kopov. " All kinds of rhetori- 
 cal figures, and different tones of voice, that are called 
 accents, which by their variety insensibly beguile us, 
 and prevent our being sated and fatigued by an irksome 
 repetition of the same sound." 
 
 The same excellent author in another part of his rhe- 
 torical treatise, where he is giving some general direc- 
 tions for harmonious composition, says it must be diver- 
 sified, and particular care be taken to avoid repetitions 
 of words of the same number of syllables, of the same 
 tones, or same quantity, placed near each other, *ftfrrt 
 oXiyoavWafda 7roAXa t&w Xafifdavtiv' (kotttztcii yap rj a/cpoa- 
 mc) (Lyre To\v(TvWaf5a TrXuio rwv ikclvuv, fiv^il o?j OMOIO'- 
 TONA Trap' ofioiorovoiQ, firjdt bfiotoyjpova Trap bfioioyjpovoiq . 
 Now if the Greek tones and times had been the same, 
 had there been no difference between the buoiorova and 
 vfxoioxpova, Dionysius would never have mentioned them 
 as distinct, in a part of his book that required any 
 precision. The two things are therefore certainly 
 distinct: Xoyoc and ttovtoq are ^ptoiorova, though not 
 bfxoio^pova. 
 
 But farther : these words of Dionysius .shew not only 
 that the tones and times were really distinct things, but 
 likewise that the former were attended to as well as the 
 latter in the avvBemg even of t prose : a thing, of which 
 
 * HEgt <rwQ. iff. Neque paucarum tione vetat esse, mimemmjubet. Orator. 
 
 syllabarum diciiones multas ordine assu- §. .51. Not hut that well-turned prose 
 
 manuis (nam hide offenduntur aures) will insensibly slide into a variety of 
 
 neque plures ex pclysyllabis quam necesse metre. Quinctilian says, it will do so 
 
 sit, neque qu<£ eundem accentum, neque unavoidably : and Cicero from Theo- 
 
 qucE eadem tempora habent, prope inter phrastus says, that in most orations you 
 
 se componamus. may easily trace out pieces of dithy- 
 
 t Aristotle, speaking of oratorical iambic measure. Longinus, in his frag- 
 
 expression, says, Sio puSfxlv Se~ ej/eiv tov ments, §.iii. has given instances of epic 
 
 \oyov, |t*ST£ov Se fj.h. T\olnfjt.ot. ya? 'ia-rai. and Ionic metre in Demosthenes. Ma- 
 
 Which Cicero (after having said, Quis ny iambic and choriambic verses found 
 
 in rebus judicandis acrior Aristotele fu- in Demosthenes and Isocrates, are seen 
 
 it ?) translates, is igitur versum in era- in the Scliol. on Hennogcnes, p. 536.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 87 
 
 many persons at present seem not to have the least 
 idea. 
 
 Nor yet need we wonder at Aristotle, Dionysius, and 
 the best rhetorical writers laying so great a stress, as 
 
 Hexameters liave been observed in the 
 Gr. Test. Matt. xiv. 14. Luc. xxi. 18. 
 Jo. xiii. 5. xvi. 28. xix. 39. Tit. iii. 2. 
 Jac. i. 17. Heb. xii. 13. Pentameters 
 in Luc. xiv. 30. Heb. xii. 26. Tim. vi. 
 16. It is well known that Sallust has 
 begun his Jugurthine war, and Tacitus 
 his annals with an hexameter; and 
 Ryckius is so trifling as to think that 
 Tacitus did it designedly, because Sal- 
 lust had before him ; which no doubt was 
 accidental in them both : as it will some- 
 times be in every prose writer. In all, 
 regular and apparent verse is judged 
 faulty by Cicero. But there certainly is 
 a rhythm in prose, as well as in metrical 
 writing. And this rhythm will present 
 itself, without being sought, to a good 
 ear. Among ourselves, in linglish com- 
 position, il seems to be industriously 
 sought chiefly in epitaphs, and other 
 inscriptions. However, the attention 
 to it should be in some degree con- 
 cealed. It is perhaps too evident in 
 parts of Mr. Addison's works. It 
 should be perceived, but not stand 
 forth too much, and offer itself as it 
 were to view. Aristotle, in the chapter 
 of his Rhetoric, from whence I gave 
 the passage above, stales this briefly, 
 precisely, and clearly, (lib. iii. c. 8.) 
 to Je a-^fAa t?j XE^Ea;; Se~ jouitE ifA/xB- 
 Tgoy eTvat, /wits apjivSfAov to fxtv yap atxi- 
 &avov, TrEir\a.e%at yag Sonii to Js 
 
 CjjpLifi/UOV, aTTEgttVTOV. QvC[J.0q EJTTtV, 
 
 ov xal Ti [/.ir^a. fy.rira.) Jjo puZf-iov Se7 
 
 rj^Eiv tov ~Koyov pi/SjUOV $£ jxn <x>cgf- 
 
 $<£<;• touto Se Efl-Tai lay /UEp^i tou rj. 
 Fnrniam orationis decet neque rnetrum 
 habere, ncque rhylhmo prorsus centre. 
 
 Quod enim metrum habet,fidem non f li- 
 cit : elaboratum enim videtur. Quod 
 
 vero rhulhmo caret, infinitum est. 
 
 C Rhythmus est , cujus et metra sunt seg- 
 menta) Quare Rhythmum habere oportet 
 oruiionem, rhythmum vero non nimis ac- 
 curate ; hoc autem fiet, si sit ad cerium 
 modum. Prose here is to have rhythm, 
 but rhythm not elaborate and apparent. 
 And on the same principles, since some 
 kinds of metre will slip into prose, that 
 is best which is the least conspicuous 
 there : for this reason the P<eo?ifoot is 
 recommended to orators by Aristotle in 
 the same chapter, on account of its 
 being the least observable, oxtte fxa- 
 Xio-ra. XavflavEiv; the first Piron-""" fora 
 beginning, the second (now commonly 
 called the fourth)"""- for a close. The 
 whole of this subject is opened by Ci- 
 cero, in his Orator. The annotations of 
 Majoragius on this passage of Aristo- 
 tle, throw much light on the subject of 
 prosaic metre and rhythm ; but more 
 particularly has Quinctilian illustrated 
 every part of it, with a view to what 
 had been written by Aristotle, Cicero, 
 and all the celebrated rhetoricians be- 
 fore him, in his excellent chapter de 
 Compositione. Lib. ix. 4. The Abbe 
 Colin, in his remarks added to his trans- 
 lation of Cicero's Orator, has written 
 judiciously on the same subject. The 
 deficiency of the moderns, and great 
 accuracy of the ancients, in oratorical 
 numbers, is well touched on by the ele- 
 gant Mr. Melmoth, in Fit/.osborne's 
 Lett. xxiv. But more particularly and 
 fully has Mr. Mason considered this sub- 
 ject, in regard to English compositions.
 
 88 ESSAY ON 
 
 they do, on accent, as essential to the perfection of com- 
 position. The importance of it is grounded in the very 
 nature of things. For mere quantity, as hath been re- 
 marked above, containing in general only two measures, 
 hath not variety enough to constitute much harmony ; 
 but when we take accent into our account, that is, the 
 compass of four or five notes, each of which is capable 
 of two modifications in point of length, we have then 
 eight or ten different modes of sound, to form harmony 
 out of their various combinations. The materials thus 
 multiplied, enlarge the foundation of harmony, and make 
 it sufficient for any poetical or oratorical rhythm, which 
 the human ear can require. 
 
 Those, therefore, who, in considering the numerosity of 
 writings, attend to quantity alone, regard only the infe- 
 rior part of the subject before them. If they add to that 
 the consideration of accent, they will by those means, 
 and no other, be proper judges of the whole, and (to use 
 the words of one who had a quick sense of the powers of 
 rhythm) 
 
 Pleas' d shall they hear and learn the secret poiv'r 
 Of harmony in TONES and numbers hit 
 By voice or hand, and various-measurd verse. 
 
 Milton. 
 
 The ears of the ancients were nice to the highest de- 
 gree of sensibility ; and were truly, as they are often 
 called by the old writers themselves, teretes et religiosce, 
 difficiles et morosce, quorum est superbissimum judicium. 
 Nor is there in these and the like expressions implied 
 any censure, but rather commendation of this extreme 
 accuracy. Cicero himself, in his rhetorical works, de- 
 scends to several very minute discussions on the nu- 
 merous construction of sentences, proceeding on such 
 principles of refinement, as in some cases exceed almost 
 the comprehension of our grosser sense. The Roman 
 ear was exactly and scrupulously fine, but more particu- 
 larly so was that of the Greeks ; whose great attention
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 89 
 
 to the nice harmony of their language is well observed 
 and expressed by Terentianus Maurus ; 
 
 Artium parens et altrix Grceca diligentia est: 
 Literarum porro curam nulla gens attentius 
 Repperit : * polivit usque jinem ad unguis extimum. 
 
 If a fuller testimony in regard to the Greek accent is 
 required from Dionysius, the following will probably 
 appear so. Ta -ypa/x^ara orav 7rai$£vu>iui&a, irptorov /ilv ra. 
 ovofiara avrCov iK/xavS'ai/Ojittv, eireiTa rovg rvirovg koi rag 
 cvvafiHg, tiff" ovtw rag ovWafiag kol rci Iv Tavraig iraOi). icot 
 fiera tovto i)CT) ragXt^eig, icai ra GVfifitfirjKuTa avraig, tKracFtig 
 te Xiyu) koi (JVGToXag, tcai nPO^QtATAS, icai ra Trapcnr\{]ma 
 Tovrotg.f " When we are taught our letters, we first 
 learn their names, then their forms and powers ; and thus 
 we proceed to syllables, and their affections or proper- 
 ties: after this to whole words, with their particular 
 modes and qualities ; I mean, the length and shortness 
 of them, and their accents, with other things of the like 
 nature." If this passage does not prove the existence 
 of tones, their difference from quantity, their use and 
 application in ordinary pronunciation and discourse, no 
 passage of an historian can prove the existence of Julius 
 Caesar. The reader will see, by a foregoing passage 
 cited from this author, that he probably here uses the 
 word 7rpoati)3ia to signify the tone itself, not the mark. 
 He will see, likewise, that the word aKracng here is ap- 
 plied to the length of sound, not the height ; as Iktuvu) 
 
 * Plato, in his etymology of words, p. 408. on aj-T^amv, p. 409. on Jixaio- 
 
 which he gives in his Cratylus, where crvvri, p. 412. On the word <S>tpj>s$a.TTa. 
 
 he accounts for the changes made by he goes so far as to say : vDv 8s avrnt 
 
 derivation or composition, frequently sxxXiWa-i to ovofxa, E'TJTOMl'AN <mi(i 
 
 takes notice of the great regard which sd-Xei'ovo; -rroiov/xivoi rnq aXnbsiai;. Nunc 
 
 his countrymen had to elegance in vero illius dejiectunt nomen, elegantis et 
 
 everything respecting language. In venustg pronunciationis priorem habentet 
 
 the word nos-etSiv, a change is said curam quam veritatis. T. i. p. 404. Seri 
 
 there to be made E'YnPEnEl'AZ mxa. ran. 
 
 p. 402. Nearly the same remark is t weji :wS. c. 25. 
 made on 'a9w£v. p. 407. and on 'BffxSs,
 
 90 ESSAY ON 
 
 likewise, when it refers to sound, signifies extension in 
 length, though Tthxv, Ivruvw, avareivio, and tTrireivw relate 
 to height, as hath been shewn above. 
 
 From this passage it may likewise be inferred, that 
 the system of Greek accents was not so simple and ob- 
 vious, as that of the Roman. The latter was so plain, 
 as to be easily learnt without much instruction, or ex- 
 ercise in reading. But in Greek, the case was different. 
 Novices in that language, whether children or strangers, 
 were obliged to pay a more particular attention to the 
 accent of it, as we may conclude from what is here said 
 by Dionysius Halic. and by Dionysius Thrax, as cited 
 by * Sextus, " Idem Thrax sex facit partes Grammati- 
 cae : exercitatam in accentu lectionem, expositionem per 
 tropos," &c. 
 
 An argument has been drawn in favour of our accents, 
 from a passage f of Plutarch's lives of the ten orators, 
 wherein it is said that Demosthenes was censured by 
 some Athenians, for certain peculiarities in his speech, 
 among the rest 7rpo7rapo£iiva>i/ the word 'AcncXtririov. This 
 word TrpoTrapo^vvuv has been generally understood, be- 
 fore Dr. G. undertook to explain it otherwise, to signify 
 " acuting the antepenultima." He rejects that sense as 
 " too strict a one forced upon the word ;" and is there- 
 fore for taking off this restraint, saying it means " laying 
 an uncommon stress upon the antepenultimate." Now 
 this expositor in other parts of his treatise, by a parti- 
 cular stress of voice, means the power of an acute. And 
 if he means any thing else here, I wish he had made it 
 known by some other word ; and at the same time had 
 produced some authority for this new interpretation of 
 TrpowapoKvvd). H. Stephens gives no other signification 
 of it whatever, but the common accentual one. He cites 
 
 * C. 16. veroper iEscnIapiuiri, 'Ac-xXwiov in an- 
 
 t <2>6gv(2ov ixi'vija-fv, afMvi ii xa» tov tepenullinia acueus, atque ostendit se 
 
 ' Ao-xXrnrdv , rrpoTta^vvtev 'Ac-xAimov, x<ti recte ita vocem eft'erre, Deum enira wjo» 
 
 •nrafuhiMuEv alrov o^Sxg Xsycvra. £?vai ya.% mitem esse. Et ob hoc sappe tuinnltara 
 
 tovQiov rjmwxal l-jtl tovtoj woXXaxif tfio- excitavit. v 
 
 fi'/?>;fl>j. " Tumulluni coinmovil, jurabat
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 91 
 
 no passage, indeed, as authority for it; I suppose, be- 
 cause it had that sense only. But I could bring a hun- 
 dred passages from Greek writers of good note, where 
 the word is undoubtedly used with that meaning, and can 
 have no other. One of the best grammarians who ever 
 wrote uses it thus, I meanApollonius, who, in his syntax, 
 p. 27. says, to' Apiorapxpi Trpo-nrapo^vveTai. Again, the same 
 author, ret irapo£,vv6fie va i) TrpoTrtpici7ru)fxeva, avv^emv ovaSc- 
 ^afxtva, irpoirapo^vvovTaC Kovpog, aKOvpog, liriKOvpog' doXog, 
 aSoXog' 7rXr)(7toc, TrapcnrXimoQ.* And indeed, Dr. G. ad- 
 mits the word in this sense, in many parts of his own 
 book. Certainly Eustathius understood it so, in this 
 very case of Demosthenes ; for, as it happens, he has 
 taken t notice of the same. ?j 6suto vr\<ng rov ovofiarog 
 ['Ao-K:Xj]7rtoc] *X U "^opiav' kciXwc liroki Ar}fio(r6ivi]g, wc 
 
 tOTOpUTlU, TTpOTTUpG^VVlOV Tl)v Xf^tV, Kttl UVUJIVIOCFKWV A<7~ 
 
 kXijttioc;. 
 
 But if the foregoing passage of Plutarch should still 
 appear questionable, in regard to our present system of 
 accents, the following must be admitted as indisputably 
 
 * Dictiones in penultima acuta vel 488. edit. Taylor) is rejected by Dr. G. 
 
 circumflextE, in campositione antepenulti- It is however certainly confirmed by 
 
 mamacuunt: nov^oq, axougoc, In'movpoq. the Aldine, and some other editions, 
 
 $i\oi;, aSoXo?- wXne-iOff, 7rafawX«<r(0f. p. and some MSS. of good authority, as 
 
 (30. may be seen in Dr. Taylor's note on 
 
 t Ad 11. p. 3.53. Edit. Basil. Vocis the passage, (j». 679.) who there says, 
 'Afr-xXiiWiSj acumen in ultima aliquam in thai some were of opinion, that Quinc- 
 ke difficultatem habet. Recte faciebat tilian might allude to this very case in 
 Demosthenes, cum, ut refert historia, lib. v. 13. lta vero adversus omnes et 
 acumen in antepenultimam njiceret, di- recepta et non inhumana conquestio, si 
 ceretque 'A<rxXn7rio?. See also H. Steph. collide quid tacuisse, breviasse,obscurus- 
 App. de Dial. Attic, p. 239. There is se, distulisse dicuntnr. Where, instead 
 a passage in Photii Myriobibl. where of tacuisse, Dr. Taylor gives from the 
 this story of Demosthenes is related in old copies acuisse. I mention this ra- 
 the same manner : Ts5 Sfi/xa) 8opu@ov hi- ther for the sake of this latter reading 
 Tjrci'txrEv, airmg xcu lirl tb o/xvuvai -rov in that passage of Quinctilian, than that 
 'AerxXwicv, y^iy-ittiq tjT (ptvv'ri 7rpo7raft£u- I think Llpian's observation of anycon- 
 Tovajj. Ulpian's remark on the artful sequence. On the contrary, I am very 
 mistake of Demosthenes in pronounc- ready to say with Dr. Taylor, " Ego 
 ing the word fxio-Qairog wrong, in his fa- profecto Ulpiani istnd eommentum nun 
 Hious oration -zc-egi Zri^awu (torn. ii. p. valde probo.''
 
 02 ESSAY ON 
 
 confirming it. icai (xvv avrotQ "Ep/uiov, ttvdpa twv y A&i'iv\imv 
 etnrarpiSwv" a</>' ou icai tottov 'Epf.iov koXhv oiKiav rovg Tlv- 
 OoiroXirag' oi>k opBwg ti)v dtvripav <Ti>AAfl|3rjv TrtpHJirwvTag, 
 Kid -n)v So^av IttI Qtbv otto "Hpwog ^araTiOivrag.* 
 
 How the Greek tones are in their nature consistent, 
 and in their modern application often inconsistent with 
 quantity, will be seen in another place. 
 
 * Et cum UtisHcrmnm ndbilem Athe- Xyland. I am obliged to the excellent 
 
 ■uiensem ; a quo locum Hermou-oeciam editor of Lysias and Demosthenes for 
 
 dicere Pythopolitas,quiparumrecte cir- directing ine to this passage of Plu- 
 
 eumflectant secundum syllabam, hono- tarch, together with that above from 
 
 remque ad Deum Mercurium ab Heroe Photius. 
 Hcrmo traducant. Vit. Thes. p. 12. edit.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. JJ3 
 
 POSTSCRIPT TO CHAP. V. 
 
 Among those ancients, who wrote on the Greek tones, 
 are found the names of the most considerable scholars 
 of antiquity. Zenodotus, the first librarian of Alexan- 
 dria under Ptolemy Philadelphus, is quoted by Apol- 
 lonius Alexandr. (Synt. p. 1G7.) on the subject of 
 accent. 
 
 Aristophanes Byzantinus (of whom more will be said 
 in the next chapter) is referred to by Apollonius, and 
 the scholiast on Aristophanes, in a case of accent. 
 
 The famous Aristarchus, scholar of Aristophanes 
 above (as appears from some scholia published lately 
 by Mr. Valckenaer with Ammonius, on Iliad. E. G56. 
 and from other scholia), either published his edition 
 of Homer with accentual marks, or wrote upon accents. 
 A particular remark of his on the tone of a/uvydaXr) is in 
 Athenaeus, lib.ii. p. 53. and many others elsewhere. 
 
 Dionysius Thrax, scholar of Aristarchus, appears 
 from Sextus, as cited above, to have considered this 
 subject : even if what Fabricius hath published as his, 
 be spurious. 
 
 Tyrannio, who taught at Rome, and was some time 
 in Cicero's family, wrote irepi 'Ojurjpt/cije Ilpo^'iag. Suid. 
 inV. 
 
 Trypho, a man of great character in the time of Au- 
 gustus, wrote his "Attikti JlpovySia, so frequently cited 
 by the following writers, Apollonius, Athenaeus, Ammo- 
 nius, and others. 
 
 Abro, a scholar of Trypho, according to Fabricius, 
 is cited on this subject by Apollon. Syntax, p. 130. 
 
 Herennius Philo (who lived under Domitian, accord- 
 ing to Fabricius, though placed after the age of Ammo- 
 nius by Valckenaer) has left remarks on the same.
 
 94 SS8AY ON 
 
 Heraclides (who lived under Nero) wrote KaOoXiK^v 
 TlpotripBiav, which is quoted by Ammonius on the word 
 vvv, and by Apollonius. Synt. p. 326. 
 
 Seleucus, called Homericus, is quoted on the same 
 subject by Apollon. Synt. p. 167. 
 
 Ptolemseus Ascalonita, before the time of Ammonius, 
 by whom he is often cited on accent, wrote 7T£joi Ilpoa^- 
 §uov of the Iliad and Odyssey. Amman, in ora^uA/j. 
 
 iElius Dionysius, (who lived under Hadrian accord- 
 ing to Pierson in praef. Mcer.) hath a tract still extant 
 TTfjoi eyicXivofitvcjv Xe^Ewv, in the Ktpag ' ApaXOdag of Aldus. 
 Remarks of his on accent are cited by Eustath. and 
 Etymol. M. 
 
 Ammonius, who lived in the time of Hadrian, and 
 Mceris Atticista his contemporary, often explain words 
 with remarks on their accents. 
 
 Nicanor of Alexandria, under Hadrian likewise, 
 (Suid. in V.) is quoted in the scholia, mentioned above 
 as published by Valckenaer, in a case of accent, on 
 Iliad, r. v. 230. 
 
 Apollonius Alexand. Dyscolus, under Hadrian and 
 Antoninus, wrote, according to Suidas in V. 7rejOi tovwv 
 Kari]vayKci(Tpivwv, two books ; irepl rovtov aicoXiwv, one ; 
 Trepl Trpoaojcuov, in general, five. His work^pi tovmv is 
 referred to by himself in Synt. p. 135. 
 
 His son Herodian, as hath been mentioned before, 
 wrote very largely on this subject. The 20th book of 
 his -rrpocTofi'ia is cited by Steph. Byzant. in V. &jiai. This 
 great work of Herodian was epitomized by Aristodemus, 
 according to Suidas. Another epitome of it is still 
 extant among the Bodleian MSS. 179. by Theodosius, 
 who is known likewise to have commented on Dionysius 
 Thrax. Dr. Bentley, in his Epist.ad Millium, p. 37. says 
 he had read this Epitome. Besides his KadoXiKrj Ylpom.j- 
 &a, he wrote avopaXog TTpomoSia (see Etymol. 31. in V. 
 apx,cuog) 'Attiki) TrpoaioSia (see Schol. ad Aristoph. Aves 
 v. 4S5, and Etymol. M. in V. ^wpiapog) likewise 'OpripiKri 
 TrpompSia (see Suidas in v. /acjuvtrro. Etymol- M. in y.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 95 
 
 7$oe. and Schol. Aristoph. Aves,v. 862). And Fabricius 
 lib. v. c. 7. mentions another still extant, unpublished, 
 de tonis adverbiorum. in cod. Barocc. 125. 
 
 Concerning the KaOoXiicr) irpoaySia, Dr. Taylor in a 
 letter of June 22, 1762, writes to me thus: " Something- 
 of this kind [*. e. visible accentuation] I think I discover 
 in the Anthologia. Lib. i. Tit. 17. 
 
 JLvTTldlOV ' A6l]Vaiov GTlZjaVTOQ 
 
 tIjv KaOoXov. 
 
 TavToXuyiov Kavovwv (ptv 7rXi}06og, ?}§' aidiiXojv 
 Evcrpiawv, XtTTTog rag l)(apa£,£ §6va%. 
 
 Of.ifj.aTa pzv KtKjUTjice, Ttviov, pa\ig, Iviov, &/xol' 
 Trig KaOoXov St (pipto rr)v 6($vvr}v KaSoXov. 
 
 " I need not acquaint you that this regards the gram- 
 matical work of Herodian, so often quoted by the an- 
 cients, and distinguished by the emphatical name of 
 r H KaOoXov, without the name of the author. So it is in 
 the Schol. of Apollon. Rhod. i. 54. 'Aiitypvcroio] ypafperat 
 kol cia tov ft. o>c Aiovvcnog. tan Se iroTaiiog QeaaaXiag. 
 irpoTrapo^vverai de, wg ev ry i] rr]g KaOoXov, i. e. in the 8th 
 book of Herodian s Universal Prosody. Now Eupithius, 
 the scribe or critic, was employed lv t$ vrtZ,uv rrjv 
 KaBoXov. As the grammatical books more particularly 
 had accents, and anypr) is any point or mark in general, 
 why should not the employment of Eupithius be that of 
 accenting Herodian's book? The business of mere 
 punctuation could hardly have occasioned that extreme 
 
 labour and fatigue complained of in the epigram. 
 
 Herodian's book, as it appears to have been written 
 near the reign of Hadrian confessedly upon the subject 
 of accents, clearly shews they had been settled and 
 digested for some time. Indeed every thing shews the 
 antiquity of them, and the authority of the present sys- 
 tem." 
 
 Pamphilus and Philoxenus are quoted by Athensus 
 on the accent of a particular word, lib. ii. p. 52, 50.
 
 96 ESSAY ON 
 
 Phrynichus, who lived in the time of Antoninus, in 
 his Ecloga has left observations on accents. 
 
 Orus, of Alexandria, and nearly of the same age, 
 wrote, according- to Suidas in v. 7tejoi Sixpoviov, kcu vepl 
 'EjkXitikiov fxopiwv. 
 
 Athenaeus, who lived about the same time, has many 
 remarks on the same subject. 
 
 Of Charax, who is placed by Is. Vossius among the 
 Alexandrine grammarians in order before Herodian, 
 we have a piece, in the collection of Aldus, to this 
 purpose. 
 
 Alexander Aphrodisiensis, of the same age, has left 
 occasional observations on accents. 
 
 Julius Pollux, who addressed his ovopaariKov to Com- 
 modus Imp. has left the like. See lib. ix. c. 2. In the 
 following ages several authors wrote either professedly 
 or occasionally on this subject, as Porphyry, whose 
 work TTipl Trpoaafiiag is cited by Dr. G. and mentioned 
 by Fabricius. A MS. treatise of Arcadius Antiochenus 
 Trspl tovwv is commended by Salmasius de modo usura- 
 rum, p. 256. Chaeroboscus, of the fourth or fifth cen- 
 tury, has some pieces, published by Aldus in his kyittol 
 'ASoWSoe, on this subject, and another, not published, 
 Trept irpoaqSuov mentioned by Fabricius (lib. v. c. 7.) in 
 Cod. Barocc. 116. 
 
 Olympiodorus, of the fifth century, may be added to 
 this list. I must not here descend any lower through 
 the later ages to Stephanus Byzant. Hesychius, Photius, 
 Stobaeus, Theodorus Prodromus, Is. and Joh. Tzetzes, 
 &c. for I shall be told by some persons that I am here 
 carrying my reader Inter inhumance nomina barbaric, 
 and plunging him in the very sink of barbarism, from 
 whence nothing but corruption is to be drawn. How- 
 ever, the preceding names, that are found in the purer 
 ages, sufficiently shew the attention that was constantly 
 paid to the tones of their language by the most cele- 
 brated scholars of Greece.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 97 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 On Ihe introduction, use, and accidental abuse of the Greek accentual marks. 
 Vindication of the character of Aristophanes Byzanlinus. Accentual metre of 
 Tzetzes. Character of the learned Greeks of the lower empire : and of some 
 of their scholars. A review of the history of the Greek language. 
 
 " Veteres quidem Graeci (says* Caninius) accentus 
 pronunciabant, non scribebant. Quod ex Elenchis Ari- 
 stotelis potest intelligi." The passage of Aristotle, 
 which Caninius means, is in his third chapter Elenchwn, 
 where he is considering the several kinds of sophistry 
 used by disputants ; and says, that " those ambiguities, 
 which are occasioned by the use of homonymous words, 
 cannot be so easily applied to perplex a controversy, 
 which is carried on between two persons debating and 
 conversing together : because the accent there deter- 
 mines the sense of the word. But when the dispute is 
 managed by writing on each side, there the accent hav- 
 ing no visible mark to fix the sense, leaves an ambiguity 
 and room for cavil, which would be avoided in ordinary 
 discourse, "f 
 
 Alexander Aphrodisiensis comments very largely on 
 this passage in his exposition of the Elenclii ; from 
 whence I will transcribe a few lines, because they con- 
 tain a definition of TrpoouSia, part of which was, perhaps, 
 copied from him by Lascaris, and from Lascaris hath 
 been given by disingenuous or ignorant writers, as 
 
 * Hellenism, p. 98. mate magis. — Sophist. Elench. lib. i. 
 
 t riaga Se rhv TTfoirwSiav lv f*.h to"; c. 3. see also c. 21 and 23. Iu the 
 
 anv y£*q>ns SiaAexTDtoij oL pa'Jiov itoiwm seventh chapter where he speaks of 
 
 Xoyov, lv $£ to"? ■yey^a.fx.y.ivoii; n 7romfjt,a?i itqtti?<M*, he uses the terms avity-Evoi; 
 
 fxaXXov. Per accentum in Us, qiue voce x«i iwiTeivOjOtevo? o ^oyot, as they are ap- 
 
 sine scripto fiunt, disceptationibus non plied to accent and explained in the 
 
 facile est dialecticis sophisticum sermo- former part of this Essay. 
 nem facere : in scriptis autem vel poe- 
 
 H
 
 98 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 the complete and perfect one of Alexander himself. 
 Alexander's words are these : * irip-rrrog rpowog tCjv irepl 
 
 T7JV \£%,IV GOtylGfiaThiV, 6 7T£jOt TTJV 7TjOO(7(i>StaV lariv. og TIQ 
 
 fj.lv Iv toIq SiaXtKTiKoiq \6yoig toIq jut) yeypappivotg, aXXa 
 Xeyopivotg, ov pqSlwg yivtraC Iv St to7c yty pappivoig ciaXtK- 
 TiKdlg \6yoig kcll roig 'Opnr^piKOig ironifiaai ovvarai yeviauat. 
 ovopiaCerai & veplr^v irpotryStav, on 'O TO'NOS IIPtfS*ON 
 "AtAOMEN KAF TOY'S AOTOYS nOIOY'MEOA, Trottt 
 tov TrapaXoytcrpov' vvv plv ovTiog, uXXots §' aXXwc V Ka ^ 
 aXXaYov Tidzptvog. — Iv ptv bpiXlq koi ctaX(t,u, ouk cnrarriaeig 
 ttotI oXtywv/ETAI'PA XPYSI'A E'l <S>OPOI'H AHMOSIA 
 "ESTO. £t'Xr}7rrat yap 6 Xiyiov Trapo^vTovwg tov Xoyov i£,e~ 
 viyicwv, i\ tv^ov koi TrpoTrapot,vr6vii)g. nal oi>K av aocptcraiTO 
 ttote tov -!}Kpoi]pivov , vvv filv 7iapoL,VTOvii)g Xiywv, vvv OE tig 
 TrpoTvapo^vTOva jUETaXajUj3avoJv* tt7ras yap up\)Kh)g, ecrr)p.av£ 
 to tavTOv /3ouXrjjua. el St Iv ypa(py elr\ Keipevov to oripoma, 
 ovSiva tovov e\ov, totz c»jra koi tov TrapaXoyujpbv "\" aireicr). 
 
 From the foregoing passage in Aristotle (on which 
 Alexander hath fully commented) it appears there was 
 
 * Quinlus cavillationis per verbum 
 modus ad accentum pertinet. Qui qui- 
 dem in sermonibus, rum scripto sed voce 
 fact is, baud facile contiugit : in scriptis 
 vero sermonibus, et H'omericis carminibus 
 fieri potest. Dicitur vero ad accentum 
 pertinere, quia tonus Me, ad quern cani- 
 ttius et verba facimus, captiosam ambi- 
 guitatem facit ; mine in hoc, deinde 
 
 illo, aliasque alio locopositus. in 
 
 sermone muluo coram habito, nunquam 
 falles si dicas " arnica si aurum eerat, 
 5«|Uoa-itt sit.*' Deprehenditur enim qui- 
 vis loquens, cum accentu vocemproferens 
 vel in.penultima syllaba, vsl etiam for- 
 tasse in antepenult ima : neque fallat 
 unquam audientem, nunc in penultima 
 eum ponens, deinde in antepenultimam 
 transponens : semel enim cum dixerit, 
 ostendit plane quod sensit. Quod si in 
 scripto sit vox hrec Sn^oo-ia, nullum to- 
 mim palam habens, turn quidem capti- 
 
 unculam facit. — See also Auimonius- 
 Henn. F. de interpretations, p. 10.43. 
 50. 52. Dr. Taylor lias pointed out to 
 me a passage in Hermogenes like the 
 preceding in Ales. Aphrod. 'H juevtcs 
 a.fj.^iZo'kla. not airl too iwfxatoq itrn 
 tyavzei. "Ecti j/ig afxtyiQo^la, ay.tynrQrf 
 Trie-it; ittol puTcv, i» Tr^otra-'Sia? h Siaa-ra- 
 <te<b? e-vWa&Siv ywo/ASm. 'Ex. /j.iv Trgosr®- 
 Jwj, oTov, ETAIPA XPT2IA EI OOPOIH 
 AHM02IA E2TI2. Tlzfciparat ti; <|>o- 
 govrra' Hal h /«£V ta yj/vala <pnrh iivai 
 AHMO'ZIA, <K(0'Ka.ep$vn:'m<>)(; avctytvuxr- 
 Kouc-a tov vojCioy. ol Se ov ra %pvtria,, dxx' 
 alnhv Sn/xoc-iav [sc. AHMOSl'A] elvai, 
 nttteifynbws amyivwo-HoVTZs. — Hermog. 
 p. 59. edit. Crisp. 
 
 t There is a corruption in this pas- 
 sage, as it stands at present : perhaps 
 it should be read thus, tote Sirra Hal o 
 itaoa'Koyiv^ aidZn.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 1)9 
 
 a dispute in his time among scholars about the meaning 
 of these two lines in Iliad xf/. 
 
 Hottjke c;i»Aov avov, ogov t opyvi vxtp air\q, 
 *H Spvbg jj 7T£uktjC) to /lev ou KaTcnrvQeTai opfipaj. 
 
 The sense of the second verse would be very different, 
 according as it should be read with ov or ov, the former 
 signifying non, the latter i^fo' or cujus ; in which case 
 there could have been no doubt, if the same marks had 
 then been used, which we now have. Aristotle * says, 
 that Hippias' determination in favour of the negative 
 ov was at length agreed to. 
 
 In this manner many diligent persons have with learn- 
 ing and industry laboured to prove from passages of 
 ancient authors and other strong testimonies, that these 
 marks of accentuation were not known to the old 
 G reeks. f And they have, I think, proved it satisfac- 
 
 * Kai tov "Ofxn^ov Ivioi Sio^Souvrai w^of 
 TouijlXEyp^ovTttf, oo; d-roVa? Ei^xora, "to 
 fj.iv ov xaTaTrvBiTai ofA-Ggai," Xiiovti yag 
 avTi rr, Trpoo'cuSitt, Xej/ovtej to oi> o£lte£ov. 
 Kai to mi) to huirviov tov 'AyafA.BfA.vovo*, 
 on ovx. avrot; a Zeus eTwev, " SifyoiEl' Se o! 
 ivyoi a^o-Qat," aXXa to ivunvio) IvsteX- 
 Xeto JiSovai. to. fx.lv oZ>v -roiaZra na^a. tw 
 yrpos-wStav eo-ti'v.— Elench. I. These two 
 cases are mentioned by him in another 
 place : Kara. Si TrpotrcoSiav, aio-itio 'limiac; 
 eXuev o QaVis; to " SiSg'^ev SI ol" xai, 
 " to fA.iv oil Kara7rvStrai OfA-Gpo!." — 
 Poetic, c. 25. This Hippias, we see, 
 by the difference of accent in the word 
 SiJojUEv, solved an objection, that was 
 made by some of the ancients against 
 Homer's representation of the supreme 
 Deity. In the commands, which Ju- 
 piter gave the dream in order to de- 
 ceive Agamemnon, there were these 
 words, $ioofj.iv Si ol iv-^og agicr&ai (which 
 by the by do not appear in our present 
 copies of Homer). These, if we un- 
 
 H 2 
 
 derstand Si'SojUEV in the sense of damus 
 or spondemus, make the god guilty of a 
 lie. Many of Homer's readers were 
 much offended at it, and Plato in his 
 second book de Bepub. makes it matter 
 of reproach against the poet. Rut Hip- 
 pias cleared up the difficulty, by say- 
 ing, that SiSo/xev was not to be taken in 
 the indicative sense with the accent on 
 the antepenullima, but in the infinitive, 
 for SiSo'^Evai, acuted on the penullima 
 S(So'//sv. And then the god says, im- 
 peratively, " give or promise him suc- 
 cess." This proves two things : both 
 the non-existence of visible accentu- 
 ation in the time of this Hippias, and 
 the propriety of our present accenting 
 the Ionic infinitives in [a.zv on the pe- 
 nultima. 
 
 t Hennin. from sect. 38 to 58. See 
 also Gul. Canter. Syntagm. de rat. 
 emend. Gr. Auct. c. 6. — Politian. Mi$- 
 cell. c. j8 et 60. 
 
 a
 
 100 ESSAY ON 
 
 torily : which yet, perhaps, they might have done as 
 clearly by a shorter way,* I mean by this plain argu- 
 ment : that such helps and directions in the pronun- 
 ciation of a language of any country are notf requisite 
 in writings, drawn up in the vernacular tongue of that 
 nation for the use of its natives ; who must be supposed 
 not to want instruction in that respect. An author in 
 general, when he writes in the language of his country- 
 men, and for their perusal, need not any more affix such 
 marks for the regulation of their voice, than a poet in 
 particular need mark the quantity of his syllables : be- 
 cause in both cases such a practice would be altogether 
 needless. When a language is to be taught and ex- 
 plained to persons ignorant of it, either children or 
 foreigners, then indeed such helps become necessary. 
 And such we see now used in grammars and dictionaries 
 of modern languages, but not uniformly in the ordinary 
 writings of them. Such exactly was the case with the 
 Greeks. When their language became, what it was for 
 several ages, the favourite one of foreigners, then those 
 persons who particularly studied it with a view of illus- 
 trating and making it more generally known, did, in 
 order to facilitate the instruction of others, wisely and 
 properly enough apply marks of direction for that pur- 
 pose. Whether these marks were invented by a gram- 
 marian, or only borrowed by him from those of musi- 
 cians (as is supposed by % Vossius) is of little conse- 
 quence in the present question. It is not the derivation, 
 but the application of them solely, in which we are con- 
 cerned. As, likewise, whether they were then used by 
 grammarians in the same form§ with those we now 
 
 * This might have saved Henuinius of the marks from a scholar of Aristar- 
 
 the pains of writing - many pages. — Sect. chus (for so this Dionysius was) which 
 
 2 — 8. appear from thence to have been nearly 
 
 t Hennin. acknowledges this. — Sect. the same with those used at present. 
 
 16 — 19. See Append, ad Dissert. Westen. con- 
 
 t P. 140. and Hennin. p. 26. taining a few observations on this MS. 
 
 $ If that MS. of Dionysius Thrax, of Dionysius, communicated by Mag- 
 
 which is cited by Dr. G. (p. 67.) is liabechi. 
 authentic, we there have a description
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 101 
 
 have, is equally insignificant. Marks themselves are 
 quite arbitrary : and if they are but faithful, are good. 
 But whatever signs or characters grammarians either 
 borrowed or devised on that occasion, the thing signi- 
 fied by them, i. e. the particular rise and fall of the 
 voice, was the same, not invented by them, but existing 
 always before them (as much as speech was* before 
 any characters were formed) and only pointed out by 
 them in a certain determinate manner. 
 
 This then was done to ascertain to foreigners the due 
 elevation and depression of their voice on certain sylla- 
 bles. Bat it will be asked perhaps, why was not the 
 same method of some visible mark requisite to direct 
 them likewise in the continuance of it, that is, to fix and 
 settle the quantity as well as accent? The reason, I sup- 
 pose, is, that the quantity of syllables did in a manner 
 point out itself even to strangers, who did but know the 
 power of the Greek letters. Their long and short vowels, 
 and diphthongs, and the position even of dubious ones 
 before consonants, would readily enough, with but little 
 direction, mark the quantity of syllables. Had these 
 accentual notations been introduced before the addition 
 of H and G to the Attic alphabet, and the use of diph- 
 thongs ; such a circumstance might perhaps have given 
 some reason to think that these signs were intended to 
 mark quantity. But since the distinct characters of H 
 and Q were added by Simonides near CCC years before 
 the time of Aristophanes, the inventor of the accentual 
 virgulce, and the quantity of the Greek language was for 
 that and other reasons more obvious perhaps than the 
 quantity of any other language whatever, it is almost 
 absurd to suppose, tha x these virgulce were applied to so 
 needless an office. The same kind of direction, therefore, 
 which accent required, was not wanted to teach quantity. 
 
 * The Spaniards, when they first be- They had a regular civil establishment, 
 
 came acquainted with America, could and were in many respects a very sa- 
 
 not find that the inhabitants ever had gacious people. One of the royal 
 
 any letters among them. And yet no family of Peru became afterwards a 
 
 one will suppose they had no language. good writer in Spain.
 
 102 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 Agreeably to what is here said, we are told that the 
 person who introduced the signs of accentuation, was 
 *Aristophanes of Byzantium, a grammarian, and super- 
 intendant of the Alexandrine library, who flourished 
 under the Ptolemys, Philopator, and Epiphanes, and 
 devised them for the use of his scholars : " not (says the 
 learned Montfauconf) that the Greek language before 
 his time was without accent or spirit ; for no language 
 can be pronounced without them : but that he brought 
 under certain rules those sounds, which practice had 
 before introduced ; that he invented signs and charac- 
 ters for them, and shewed where they were to be placed." 
 This man was not the first that observed the accents of 
 the Greeks, or gave them their name, TrpocrioSlai, though 
 he first gave the visible notation.:}: The same tones 
 
 * See Salmasii Epist. ad Sarravium. 
 This Aristophanes is placed by Suidas 
 in the 145lh olympiad, about 200 
 years before Christ. Vitruvius in pra?f. 
 lib. vii. places him under Ptol. Phila- 
 delphus. 
 
 t " Aristophanes Byzantinus wgo- 
 c-wMav sive accenlus excogitavit. Non 
 quod ad illam usque setatem Graeca 
 lingua accentibus et spiritibus carue- 
 ril : nulla eniin potest lingua sine ac- 
 centu et spirita pronunciari. Sed quod 
 ille ea, quae usus magister invexerat, 
 ad certas normas et regulas deduxerit, 
 signa et formas invenerit, quo loco es- 
 sent couslituendi accentus, docuerit." 
 Montf. Palteog. Griec. p. 33. I make 
 this Aristophanes the introducer of 
 accentual marks, on the authority of 
 Salmasius, Huetius, and Monlfaucon. 
 They say not, whence they learnt this. 
 Their authority is however great: espe- 
 cially as their account well agrees with 
 the time, when we might naturally look 
 for their introduction. The conjecture 
 of Baillius is not an improbable one, 
 who supposed they were first used 
 
 somewhat before Cicero's time. (Baill. 
 apud Scot. p. 791. See to the same 
 purpose Muncherus de origin. Accent, 
 and J. C. Albrechl de constitut. ling. 
 Grajc.) But this matter would proba- 
 bly be cleared up, upon consulting 
 Arcadii Grammatical (mentioned amoug 
 the unpublished Greek grammarians, 
 by Fabricius, lib. v. c. 7.) 'ApxaSiou wsji 
 Tovoy tSv oxtm fx.t(Zv tou 'hoyoo, xai itsci 
 lutitTixit; tSv 7rpo<ra)Siaiv, xal tte^i tyx\t- 
 Vovtojv, ev m xai WEpi wvEUjU.aTa)V, xai 
 y§ova>v. in Cod. Colbert. 3123. I take 
 the word Trgos-aiSioDv here to mean the 
 mark, not the tone : otherwise I cannot 
 see how it can be joined with tuferis. 
 For you can no more say eveeo-is t£v 
 ToW, than you can eugsins t??s Qaivvi;, 
 or " the invention of seeing, and breath- 
 ing, or Sancho Panca's invention of 
 sleeping." 
 
 £ Herm. Hugo says that Pherecydes, 
 master of Pythagoras, did DC years 
 before Christ give Ihe first marks, and 
 thinks he has authority for this from 
 Diog. Laerlius. (c. 27. de prima scrU 
 bendi origine.)
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 103 
 
 with the same name irpoobfilai are mentioned, as hath 
 been seen before, by Aristoxenus, who lived at least a 
 hundred years, and by Plato, who lived not less than 
 one hundred and fifty before him. 
 
 This Aristophanes, who, by Vossius, is contemp- 
 tuously called literator, an insignificant petty teacher, is, 
 by Suidas, termed rpa^uemKoe ; which Vossius very well 
 knew was an honourable appellation among the an- 
 cients : not being then restrained in its sense, and im- 
 plying, as it does at present, a person employed in con- 
 sidering, or teaching, the inflexions and construction of 
 words, and attending merely to the minutia of language, 
 but one comprehending within the compass of his stu- 
 dies every thing relating to polite literature. " Litera- 
 tum a literator e distinguunt, ut Grasci Grammaticum a 
 Grammatista, et ilium quidem absolute, hunc mediocri- 
 ter doctum existimant."* We are not, therefore, to 
 wonder at the best Greek writers, Aratus, Apollonius 
 Rhodius, and Callimachus, being called, as they were, 
 Vpa/ijuariKoi. 
 
 Other circumstances related of him by Suidas, make 
 it very unlikely, that he should have been such a mean 
 inconsiderable man as Vossius represents him: he is 
 said by Suidas to have been the son of Apelles, rtyovfjie- 
 vog arpaTKoriov, a military officer of rank ; and to have 
 been the scholar likewise of three eminent men, Callima- 
 chus, Zenodotus, and Eratosthenes.f This very ill agrees 
 with the appellation of literator. Such misrepresentations 
 of one scholar are very unworthy of another. Especially 
 since this person, by Vossius' own account, introduced no- 
 
 * Sueton. de illustrib. Gram. And tat xat to. cvyyga.fAfAa.Ta. koIto. airofAyri- 
 
 thus Quiuetilian understands the word (ji.mi\) fAa.ro. Ttayra. naX Xoyina, Im-nlStufAa.- 
 
 grammatice ; "Cum prreter ralionem to.. — Scholiast. Dionus. Thracis apud 
 
 recte loquer.di, non parum alioqui co- Valcken. Animadv. ad Ammon. i. c. 
 
 piosam prope omnium maximarum ar- 13. 
 
 tium scientiam amplexa sit." lib. ii. c. t Eratosthenes is said by Suidas to 
 
 1. 'AvTo'Stwpoj $6 Ti? Ysa.fAfAa.Ti'.ili; rga/A- have left, when he died, (AaStirhv 'Eni'- 
 
 //.ari/ihv avTnv aivofxaa-zv it ago. tw yvZiriv 2HM0N, "Afio-TO^avw tov EiȣdvTiov. in v. 
 
 rj;y ypu.y./A.a.T»iv. rga/AfAara, li naXovv- 'TgaroaShni;.
 
 104 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 thing inconsistent with quantity and true rhythm, which 
 he supposes was not injured by accentuation till the age 
 of Antoninus, or Commodus ; that is, till near four hun- 
 dred years after the time of Aristophanes. This man, 
 by contributing to the establishment and perpetuation 
 of the genuine Greek pronunciation (which he did ac- 
 cording to the concessions of Vossius himself), did, by 
 this general convenience and direction of tone, which 
 extended itself to every part of the language, do more 
 real service to the cause of rhythm and harmony, than if 
 he had written fifty treatises " de Poematum cantu, et 
 viribus Rhvthmi." 
 
 But farther, this same {iterator, Aristophanes, was 
 the person who invented and first made use of punc- 
 tuation: which every one will acknowledge to be a 
 thing of extreme utility. Before his time the words 
 were written uno ac perpetuo ductu, the letters of the 
 same and of different words at exactly the same dis- 
 tance, without any mark of a pause to distinguish either 
 sentences, or members of sentences, or words from one 
 another. This would be even at present very inconve- 
 nient to a common reader: but much more must it have 
 been so then, when writers made use of but one set of 
 letters, all large capital ones : for small* ones were not 
 invented, according to Montfaucon's account, until 
 some hundred years after. The merit, therefore, of this 
 single inventiont of punctuation, I should not scruple 
 
 * " Literee unciales observantur in 
 libris omnibus ad nonuni usque sascu- 
 lum.'' — Palaog. Reccns. p. 12. 
 
 t Huetius, in a passage where he is 
 mentioning the punctuation in old co- 
 pies with capitals, speaks of it thus : 
 " Triplici punctorum situ orationis 
 distinctio oinnis absolvitur, collocalo 
 puncto vel ad suminum litera?, vel ad 
 medium, vel ad imum. Positura prior, 
 quae est ad summum literae, sententiam 
 perfecte claudit, ul nihil preeterea ad 
 ejus absolutioncm lectoris animus re- 
 
 quirat. Alter situs ad medium literae, 
 sententiam quidem claudit, sed non 
 perfecte ; ut ad explendum lectoris 
 animum et absolvendam penitus sen- 
 tentiam aliquid prscterea desideretur, 
 et ejnsdem fere sentential commata di- 
 vidit. Infima vero positura morulam 
 iuterponit quandam, dum lector spiri- 
 tum ducat, et diversas ejusdem sen- 
 tential partes una connexione aplas in- 
 ter se et conclusas distinguit. Prions 
 generis punclum, TEXEi'a en-ypn appel- 
 latur ab antiquis grammaticis ; secuudi
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 105 
 
 to prefer to that of the best critical or grammatical trea- 
 tise that was ever written, not excepting even Aristotle's 
 and Quinctilian's great rhetorical works : which, though 
 admirable performances, are not of that general conve- 
 nience, and extensive utility, as the simple marks of 
 punctuation. And, indeed, in most cases, even a slight 
 invention of something new, is of more service and im- 
 portance to the world, than a considerable improve- 
 ment of what is old. This Aristophanes is, I believe, 
 the person meant by Thomas Magister, in his life of 
 Pindar, prefixed to that poet's works in the Roman edi- 
 tion of Calliergus ; where it is said, that the ode begin- 
 ning with apujTov fxlv vStop, was placed the first in order, 
 vtto ' ApLGTotyavovq, tov avvrd^avTog* ret TlivSapiicd. Varrcj- 
 speaks of him as a person of very great erudition. By 
 Cicero, he, in conjunction with Callimachus, is consi- 
 
 u.ia~n ; tertii Jwoo-ny^. Atque id 
 inventum ad orationis nitorem excogita- 
 tum, Aristophani Grammatico acceptum 
 refertur. Quod cum ipse boo tempore 
 reperisset, quo Uteris quadratis et raa- 
 jusculis vulgo scribebatur, aptissimus 
 fuit et utilissimus s-riy^aivillaruin usus, 
 quod literarum amplitudo intercapedi- 
 nem observatu perfacilem tres inter 
 punctorurn sedes conslitueret." — Dan. 
 Huet. praf. ad Orig. comment. See 
 also Montf. Palasog. Gr. p. 31, 32. 
 The same thing is related of Aristo- 
 phanes by Salmasius, and explained at 
 length by him in his Epistle to Sarra- 
 vius. Both he and Huetius lake no- 
 tice of the change that was made in the 
 form of these a-riyfjutt afterwards; 
 when, instead of the great square capi- 
 tal letters, the smaller round ones were 
 introduced. But this occasioned only 
 a different modification in the charac- 
 ters of punctuation ; the thing itself, 
 with its application to the division of 
 sentences, which we have at present, is 
 the same, derived from Aristophanes. 
 
 The same account of the use of the first 
 <rrty[A.al is given by Diomedes, who 
 wrote before the introduction of small 
 letters. But as be had no occasion in 
 that place, where he mentions them, to 
 speak of the inventor of them, I rather 
 chose to give the whole in the words 
 of Huetius. 
 
 * This circumstance, mentioned by 
 Thomas Magister, joined to what is 
 said of him by Dionysius in his twen- 
 ty-second and twenty-sixth chapters 
 7T£pj 0-UV&. gives reason to think, that 
 the disposition of Pindar's poems, and 
 adjustment of bis verses, was settled by 
 this Aristophanes. Dionysius, speak- 
 ing of the KaXa, divisions of sentences 
 in prose, says, Hwha. Se ;j.t te%ai vwl xi- 
 yeiv, ov% oij ' Api3-T otyain; h tZy aWcmvru; 
 jU.£T^ix£v SiExoVjttijcrg Tag wSi;. and in his 
 last chapter on that fine elegiac frag- 
 ment of Simonides : yiy^avrai Se nark 
 Jiaj-ToXaj, oupf dv ' Ae,i<nofav»<; h aKKoq 
 tj; x.cLric-KVja<rs mii'Koov. 
 
 t De ling. Lat. lib. v. sub init. 
 lib. viii. p. 103. is. p. 140. edit. Seal.
 
 106 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 dered as holding the same high rank in general litera- 
 ture which Hippocrates did in physic, Euclid and Ar- 
 chimedes in geometry, Damon and Aristoxenus in mu- 
 sic* So very different was the opinion which Cicero 
 
 * " An tu existimas, cum esset Hip- 
 pocrates ille Cons, fuisse turn alios me- 
 dicos, qui morbis, alios qui vulneribus, 
 alios qui oculis niederenlur ? Num geo- 
 luetriam Euclide aut Archiinede, num 
 musicam Damone aut Aristoxeno, num 
 ipsasliteras Aristophane autCallimacho 
 tractante, tam discerptas fuisse, ut ne- 
 mo genus universum complecteretur, 
 atque ut alius aliam sibi partem, in qua 
 elaboraret, seponcret?" De Orat. lib. 
 iii. 33. On which passage Strebreus 
 remarks, " Aristophanes Byzantius, 
 discipulas Callimachi et Zenodoti et 
 Dionysii cujusdam,ac!eo profecit in li- 
 teris, id est, in arte grammatica qua) 
 i:omen habet a Uteris, ut nihil artis 
 ejus ignoraret." He is mentioned by 
 several writers, after Cicero, as a man of 
 great note. Pliny calls him celeberri- 
 mus in arte grammatica. Hist. lib. viii. 
 c. 6. Athenasus speaks of him as a 
 celebrated person. In Chaiisius de 
 Analogia he is mentioned as the mas- 
 ter of the great Aristavc>.us, as he is 
 likewise by Suidas in V. ' Apinapyoq. 
 He is by Quinctilian joined with Aris- 
 tarchus. " Aristarchus et Aristo- 
 phanes poetarum judices," lib. x. c. 1. 
 And so he is in the scholia ■^iv'Suw ya 
 of Didymus on Homer : y.ara rhv 'Aji- 
 ctkpyov xa\ Apicro-pavcv; oo'^av. II. A. 5. 
 See also Sch. Odyss. *■. 296. B. 190. 
 To him, iu a case of accent, we are 
 referred by the scholiast on Aristo- 
 phanes, Nub. v. 1149, on the word 
 cLtraioXv, where it is said, 'Api<rTo<f>av>if 
 o^uvScS'a./ <fmc-l TW la^arnv, aVaioXn. 
 and by Apollonius, in his Syntax, lib. 
 iv. cap. 2. p. 304. Sia t^to ojS oi iti^i 
 TOV ' ' A^iaro^aWJ rQwav Qa^v'Jicr^sai to. 
 yo^ia xara tkv AioXi'5a SiaAEiiToy. Am- 
 
 monius cites him in V. "Appcetrrog, and 
 ripaiv (see Valckeu. Animadv. lib. i. c. 
 12. and Athen. lib. ix. p. 375). A 
 piece of his I find mentioned by Dr. 
 Taylor (Lect. Lys. c. 2.), by the name 
 of trapaWnXow MwavSpou te xa) aty »v 
 ekXe^ev BKKoyai. Another of his, called 
 i?hynTis Aaxoovixw, is mentioned by 
 Hesychius in V. nrov piano;. He is 
 cited by Harpocration in V. 'ieya veoiv. 
 <m^axJi;ia. He is called o BtKnTrot 
 * Apia-Totyamc, by Porphyry, in Qusest. 
 Horn. c. 8. In the schol. ou Herino- 
 genes (p. 38.) there is a pretty com- 
 pliment of his to Menandsr, 
 
 ■ aMEvavS^E xal Bi'e, 
 
 IToTEpoj ap byZv irbrigov airEy.iy.ntTa.ro; 
 
 The scholiast on Apollonius Rhod. 
 iv. v. 973. V. ipiiya\xoiO. xa\ 'Apicrro- 
 tyavn; Se o rpay.yarix.oi; trem yuairai rov- 
 to. He is quoted by the schol. on Eu- 
 rip. Orest. v. 713. 1043. 1292 (edit. 
 King), in such a manner as would in- 
 duce one to think that he gave an edi- 
 tion of Euripides, as he probably did 
 of Homer. See likewise the schol. on 
 Hippql. 172. 612. Eustathius very 
 often cites him, with the name of his 
 particular works : ttej; bvoyatriac. 'HXi- 
 xiSv, p. 772, 1720, 1752. tteji o-vyyivi- 
 xiv hoyarm, p. 648. ntip\ xawr'ipwi Xe- 
 %im, 279. yXxjjai, 150, 217. edit. Ro- 
 man. His Sio'piWi? 'Qy-oeiM seems to 
 have been much esteemed. The little 
 pieces of his writing, now extant, are 
 an argument, in iambic verse, to the 
 OSdipus Tyran. one iu prose to the 
 Antigone of Sophocles, and Medea of 
 Euripides ; and another in verse to the 
 Pluttis of Aristophanes. His epi- 
 tome of Avbtvl. de Animalibus, and
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 107 
 
 had conceived of this eminent scholar from that which 
 Vossius expresses, when he applies to him the degrading 
 name of literator. On the whole, in regard to this man's 
 real character and merit, I cannot help repeating what 
 is said above, and declaring even more, that posterity 
 hath been more truly and essentially benefited by the 
 ingenuity of this learned Greek, than by the writings of 
 any one profane author of antiquity. 
 
 These marks were used by his successors at* Alexan- 
 dria for the same purpose to which they were applied 
 by the inventor ; but in general were omitted by writers 
 and transcribers (the grammarians only excepted, for 
 which the reason is assigned above) down to thef se- 
 venth century after Christ. 
 
 Even the grammarians in those ages seem not univer- 
 sally to have used them. In the gradual compilation of 
 Hesychius' lexicon (as it is generally now imagined to 
 be the work not of any one man, but to have grown to 
 its present size by the detached collections of many, 
 from time to time added to it), the accentual marks seem 
 not to have been constantly used. Many homonymous 
 words are explained there in their different senses under 
 one article : as eXw is explained by Kart^w, eXaao). Had 
 accentual signs been then attended to, that word would 
 probably have made two articles, thus : e\w, rarf^w, tXw 
 tAa'ffw, and so in several words. Though in others, again, 
 the senses are distinguished according to the accent, as 
 fipoTog, aijxa. (3por6f, (pOaprog. fiibg, Tot,ov' fiiog, £ojrj, 7re- 
 
 remarks on -mha.v.a.% of Callimachus, regi caepit. Taylori Comment, ad 
 
 are mentioned by Fabric. Bib. Gr. lib. Marm. Sandv. p. 9. 
 iii. c. 6, 19. Meursins, in Eibl. Graec. t Montf. Palaeogr. Graec. p. 33. In 
 
 Jonsius de script. Hist. PhHjsoph. pag. 219, he produces a Gr. MS. of St. 
 
 Valckenaer. ad Scliol. Phcen. p. 691. Paul's Epistles, of the seventh century, 
 
 and Kuster on Suidas, mention some with accents, and those coeval with 
 
 other works of his. the text. This is, perhaps, the oldest 
 
 * Emicuit schola Alexandrina, cui book of that sort. He just before pro- 
 
 curae fuit Gra?cae lof[uela3 nitor et ele- duced one somewhat older, with the 
 
 gantia : tnm primum fortasse tonus vo- accents added by a later hand, though 
 
 sis et inflexio apicum et signorum usu not much lnler.
 
 108 ESSAY ON 
 
 piovola. Hesychius himself is supposed to have lived 
 at the latter end of the fifth, or the beginning of the sixth 
 century. But though the use of these marks was not 
 universal in the centuries immediately before and after 
 Christ, yet it was general enough to be known by all 
 scholars ; and, therefore, we cannot be surprised to find 
 one so early as Gellius speaking of them as mentioned 
 by the ancients, the veteres docti before him. " Quas 
 Graeci irpomo^iag dicunt, eas veteres docti turn notas vo- 
 cum, turn moderainenta, turn accentiunculas, turn vocu- 
 lationes appellabant."* By veteres docti, Gellius means 
 those grammarians, some of whom we at present know 
 to have written on this subject. After Aristophanes 
 himself (who probably used the marks in his editions of 
 Greek authors, as that of Alcaeus, whichf Hephaestion 
 ascribes to him), after him Trypho, who, in the time of 
 Augustus, wrote his 'ArrtKi) TrpoviySia, does, in that work, 
 speak of the accents of certain words in such a manner 
 as is unintelligible, but on the supposition that the co- 
 pies of those authors, to whom he refers, had the ac- 
 centual marks. When he says,! that rawg had its last 
 syllable circumflexed and aspirated, and quotes Eupolis 
 and Aristophanes for it ; when he cites Aristophanes for 
 
 * Lib. xiii. cap. 6. Gellius lived evQiTa. iraia 'AXxai'oi thpLS-n, nal @t@apv- 
 about tbirty years after Quinctilian. To'v>jTai, i>q hlohmm. 
 In Quinctilian, I know not thai the % Athenaeus, p. 397, edit. Casaub. 
 Greek marks of accentuation are men- It is remarkable that Athenaeus, speak- 
 tioned, though the accents themselves iiig of the accent of th-hh;, from Try- 
 are, " Tenores (quos quidem ab anti- pho, uses the word ayayivwyxowi, 
 quis dictos tonores comperi, ut videli- " they read it thus in Eupolis.'' Read, 
 cet declinato Graecis verbo, qui tovovi; what? a thing not visible nor legible? 
 dicunt) vel accentus, quas Graeci irpoo-- a character not existing ? For -raSj, 
 oiSLa; vocant." lib. i. cap. 5. see Arisloph. Aves. v. 102, where it 
 
 t P. 74. Edit. Pauw. In the chapter stands at present circumflexed ; and 
 
 irepl Zvy-etiuv, he mentions rov 'AXxaiou the scholiast on it observes : Taut;, 
 
 tw 'Apia~ro<p avziov exWiv : and to this l^vvnai, xai mcie-'srS.Ta.r to Je ovofx.3. itt- 
 
 edition of Alcaeus, by Aristophanes, it f itrTrZcrtv oi 'Attixoi. Thus the several 
 
 is probable that Eustathius appeals, in scholiasts in such remarks frequently 
 
 a passage cited above (p. 90, in the agree with the best grammarians of an- 
 
 note) on the accent of 'hTftug. "Atjwj tiquily.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. ]09 
 
 Xaywv, Sophocles for Xayol, Eupolis for Aeryw, having an 
 acute, and* Xenophon for \ayiv, having a circumflex on 
 the last ; when hef quotes Euripides for the accent of 
 rpo^oi ; he must, in these cases, mean not only the tone 
 itself, but the mark : for without the mark the citation 
 of the bare word proves nothing to his purpose. How 
 could Trypho's reader be sure that Euripides used rpo- 
 X<*>v as a barytone, if in the copy of that poet it stood 
 thus, rpox^v 1 If it should be said, it might be collected 
 from the metre, how will this be where he quotes authors 
 of prose, as well as of verse ? Athenaeus,^ when he 
 speaks of the tone of dfxvyZdXr), says, that according to 
 Pamphilus, when the word signified not the fruit but 
 the tree itself, it was circumflexed on the last, as poSfj 
 was in a poem of Antilochus : and then brings passages 
 from Eupolis, Aristophanes, and Phrynichus, for its 
 accent in both senses. So Ammonius, in many places, 
 not only remarks the particular accent of words, but 
 brings authorities from passages in writers : on djuvySa- 
 Xrj, as differing from a/xvy^dXr}, he quotes the Taxiarchi 
 of Eupolis ; Menander on the word ap7ray»j ; Homer on 
 dafpoStXog ; Thucydides on juoy^poe ; Aristophanes on 
 Trapeiai and irapuai; Menander and Demosthenes on 
 ttotoq and 71-oroe ; Homer, as cited by Ptolemaeus Asca- 
 lonita, in his second book of accents, in the Iliad, on 
 GTCHpvXji; Aristophanes on ^ouc and x°«c- The same 
 proof of the existence of accentual marks in the ancient 
 copies may be drawn from the manner in which Mceris, 
 in several words, remarks the difference between the At- 
 tic and Hellenic accent. Solon, in some§ scholia, men- 
 tioned above, Says, 'O jutv 'Aptorapyoc to ctfiapTrj X W P'C 
 tov i TPA^EI kol '05fY NEI.ot St Trepl'UpwSiavbvTrepKnrw- 
 m, kcl\ Trpo(rypd<f>ovm. What can be here understood but 
 the actual mark in Aristarchus' edition of Homer ? So 
 
 * Id. lib. ix. p. 400. $ Lib. ii. p. 52, 53. 
 
 t In Ammonius, on tbe word t^o'^oi, § Published by Mr. Valckenaer, 
 
 p. 137, edit. Valcken. on which see wilh his Ammonius. Anirnadv. p. 241. 
 
 Valckenaer's Animadvers. lib. iii. c. [ad Iliad. E.v. ti.36.] 
 15. also lib. iii. c. 6. and 12.
 
 110 ESSAY ON 
 
 Charax, the old grammarian, published by Aldus, with 
 /Elius Dionysius, Herodian, and others, 7rfpi twv tyicAivo- 
 fiiviov, says, that " Aristarchus, at the beginning of the 
 Odyssey, would not give two acutes to dvdpa fxoi [ovk 
 ifiov\i)Qii dovvai tig top, avcpa fioi, cuo 6%,tlag, aXXd jiiav elg 
 to av] but only one to the av." In the same tract, he 
 says, " the second person of the verb tl/ju is an enclitic, 
 as in Homer, alfiarog tig dyaOoio." How could Charax 
 know this himself, or prove it to others, except the 
 marks of accent were in the copy of Homer, to which 
 he appeals ? The frequent mention made of accents in 
 the syntax and fragments of Apollonius, who brings in- 
 stances from Homer, Sophron, Alcman, Alcaeus, Aris- 
 tarchus, Trypho, Heraclides, and other ancient authors, 
 of some peculiarity in the tone of certain words, must 
 likewise assure us of there being a visible notation of 
 accent on those words. Strong deductions of this kind 
 might be likewise made from some passages of Herodian 
 and Chasroboscus : which, however, I omit as unneces- 
 sary. From them, and later grammarians, particularly 
 from Eustathius, it would be easy to produce numberless 
 passages of the foregoing kind ; if, after having con- 
 sulted the great grammarians of the first centuries, it 
 were requisite to pursue the same subject through those 
 of the following ages, as Hesychius, the several scho- 
 liasts, Thomas Magister, &c. through whose remains the 
 history of our present accentual system might, if it were 
 necessary, be easily traced down to Lascaris and 
 Gaza. 
 
 To the time of these Greek exiles, from the age of 
 Aristophanes himself, the signs of accentuation appear 
 to have been well known, though not perhaps constant- 
 ly applied. Accordingly, we find Demetrius Triclinius 
 speaking of them, their nature, use, and invention, in the 
 following manner.* " Those ancients, who wrote on 
 
 * Oi waXat -ra Weji ypa^^ctTix^? fl-W- erv'K'ha.@Xiy zat T>jv <5rjo$ofav Jiaj/iVcuirxEiv 
 
 Ta^a.[jLBvoi, trnfjCBia Tint irocJ>5? iTtmhtrav- £X ! "/ a£V • ="uM*?£v $e f*ot xa» ou arai^um 
 
 fit; irapaiitiitixao-iv, I| aTv riv te Swa.aiv ttyrai, iitt^h 'ra ph e-roi^sXa, x.e.6' a.1- 
 
 ■/.:<.. rr.v, »'f av stwsj Tif, Tr'Anma -rm ts xEi^uEva, oi^uiaf two; ^.l-viyii Suva-
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. Ill 
 
 grammatical subjects, wisely invented and delivered 
 down certain marks, by which we might know the 
 power and quality of syllables, and distinguish the true 
 pronunciation of them. I mean syllables, not letters ; 
 for letters, taken singly, partake not of this peculiar qua- 
 lity : but compounded, and united with each other, and 
 thus constituting syllables, they have certain powers 
 and properties. Scholars, therefore, invented various 
 signs: I mean accents, spirits, and the like; which they 
 called 7rpocrw§t'eu, as conducive to the establishment of 
 musical and common pronunciation." Montfaucon, in 
 his Palaeographia,* says, there is no appearance of these 
 marks in MSS. earlier than the seventh century ; and 
 that in MSS. of the seventh and eighth, they are fre- 
 quently misplaced, and often omitted. In some MSS. 
 of the eighth and ninth centuries, they are accurately and 
 properly placed. The use of them seems to have been 
 universal, not only among grammarians, but Greek wri- 
 ters in general, after the ninth century. Baillius de- 
 clares, that he had carefully himself examined above 
 eight hundred old MSS. in the library of the queen mo- 
 ther of France, Catherine de Medicis, written by Greeks 
 some ages before the taking of Constantinople, and ob- 
 served the omission of these marks scarce in one. And 
 those were the very times in which one might naturally 
 expect more particular care would be taken by the 
 
 [/.itu;' o-uXXiKfS-svTa Se k*1 oiov evoi&sW* bendi accentus et spiritus in septimum 
 
 irfoi; aKknXa. not ret? a-vWaSai; affOTsXs- circiter a Christo nato saculum conj'et- 
 
 cravTtt, iuvapsn; ts nvaj nal notormas ri posse videtur. cum semel eorum 
 
 Ijje*. IwEvcuo-av J! aXka. te tmfx.sia, rovovq ususiuvectus est, alii accuratius, alii neg- 
 <fm,w.i xcu Trvsu/xara Kai ra Xoiwa, a. $r> Ugentius, pro cujusque arbitrio, accen- 
 tual i7f>Go-&'fc'a? iirifjuta-av, ij wpo? tw otifr tus perscribebant. p. 223, 4. I am not 
 x.a.1 t>iv ix^Mvne-jv tSv trvlXaBZv owTSXci- myself very solicitous about their ap- 
 traf in Prrefat. ad Aristoph. pearanceor omission in the very oldest 
 * Ante septimum seculum in solis and best copies, thinking that even if 
 grammaticorum libris observatafuissevi' they had never appeared before the 
 dentur. Qu<£ vero dicimus [sc. de Codd. fifteenth or sixteenth century, they 
 vetust'nsimis quinti seitique s<ec] de visis would be equally defensible. 
 tantum. p. 33. Consuetndinem descri-
 
 112 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 learned Greeks to fix the pronunciation of their lan- 
 guage. Barbarism from the south-east was making 
 daily inroads upon the Greek provinces, and threaten- 
 ing them continually with more : then, according to the 
 testimony of Demetrius Triclinius (who lived at the be- 
 ginning of the fourteenth century) then it was, that these 
 marks were more punctually observed and applied. 
 " Pronuntiationis Graecae suavitas, teste Demetrio Tri- 
 clinio, omnino periisset, nisi eo tempore, quo Graecia 
 barbarie faedari ccepta est, notae aliquas, quae etiam po- 
 steritati integram tradidissent, asum familiarem sibivin- 
 dicassent."* 
 
 After the ninth century, the use of these marks is 
 however supposed to have been sometimes mistaken 
 and perverted. In the rambling poems of John Tzetzes, 
 written in the twelfth century, they are by some persons 
 imagined to have regulated his metre. On this suppo- 
 sition, most of hisf versus politici are tetrameter iambic 
 catalectic ; as the following;}; lines taken out of the first 
 Chiliad : — 
 
 * Baillius, p. 783. apud Scot. And 
 this agrees with what Henninius sup- 
 poses in sect. 32. " Accentus, seu. 
 Apices, in usum publicum venire cae- 
 perunt, invalescente nimium barba- 
 rie.'' 
 
 t These versus politici are Utile 
 more than plain unadorned narratives 
 put into verse ; a species of poetry not 
 unknown in the time of Dionysius of 
 Halicarnassus, who speaks of such 
 prosaic pieces of poetry under the title 
 of XoyoEi^Ei?. By bis account they were 
 metrical lines composed on unpoetical 
 subjects, in very unpoetical expres- 
 sion, with loose metre, and, accord- 
 ing to their name, sermoni propiora. 
 The scholiast on Hephaestion, speak- 
 ing of this \oyo£i$h<; poetry, says, eVtiv 
 o wE^oTEpo? Ttf crvvbBaet (what Horace 
 calls, musa pedestris). The versus poli- 
 tici did not differ much from the hoyoii- 
 
 Seij, both being written anv trabovi; n 
 t^ottou. The scholiast brings the fol- 
 lowing line as an instance of the Xoj/oh- 
 
 "Ittttovs Se Jttv&af sitaTov not mvrniioVTa. 
 
 HepliEest. edit. Panw. p. 93. 
 
 } The intended metre of these lines 
 is supposed to be the same with that 
 of the following: 
 'iij h$v Jtai- | vote 7rpa.yy.aa1v I not Je- 
 
 £ioiff I oy.i- I Xeiv, 
 Kat raiv jta&ES-TaJTUJV voyaiv uWSptyovEiV 
 
 Suva<r&<*». Aristoph. 
 
 Nam si remittent quippiam Philumeruz 
 
 dolores. 
 Quot commodas res attuli ? quot autem 
 
 ademi curas 1 Ter. 
 
 I'll climb the frosty mountains high, 
 
 and there I'll coin the weather, 
 I'll tear the rainbow from the sky, and 
 
 tie both ends together.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 113 
 
 'Ottoctov Su- | vavro \a(5uv \ liciXtva \ XP V(TL ~ I ov ' 
 KpoTo-ov kivu irpbg yeXwra |3aSi<T£i icai ry via. 
 
 O ' ApraKafiag fiaviXtiig typvyiag tt\q [xtyaXrjg. 
 
 HpoSorog rbv Yvyi)v Se troifiiva juev ov \iyu. 
 r H Epe^Oiwg Tlpoicpig re /cat Tlpa^iOeag Kopr\. 
 'Avvifiag, wg AioSwpog ypddtu kcu Aiojv afia. 
 
 The quantity of these iambics the reader must perceive 
 is miserably corrupt : several short syllables are made 
 long where an acute is joined to them, as if that directed 
 the quantity, and was a mark belonging to it. A blun- 
 der this (if it really be one in Tzetzes) exactly the same 
 with that committed in many of our schools, where the 
 sign of an acute, on whatever syllable it appears, is 
 considered as denoting* the stress of a long quantity to 
 be given to that syllable. 
 
 There is extant a poem (if it may be so 
 called) by Michael Psellus, of a like 
 kind with that of Tzetzes, entitled 
 tivo-^a; rZv v6fx.cev, 8ia o-rlyjw 'la^aiv xai 
 WoXiTixaJv, addressed ttjoj tov Satn'kka. 
 Kaia-a^a Mi%clv\ tov Aouxav. This Mi- 
 chael Duca was the Greek emperor of 
 the east M.LXXI. The verses gene- 
 rally consist of fifteen syllables, there 
 being seldom more than two syllables 
 to each foot. Johannes Damascenns 
 wrote in the same metre before the 
 time of Tzetzes. Fabricius (Bibl. 
 Graec. V. 7.) mentions another piece 
 of this Psellus of the foregoing kind, 
 de Grammatica, ad Constantiuum Mo- 
 uomachum, among the MSS. of the 
 French king. I have here allowed the 
 metre of the versus poliiici to be accen- 
 tual, as it is generally acknowledged 
 to be ; and so willingly give my op- 
 ponents all the advantage of this argu- 
 ment in their favour (Hennin. sect. 
 66). But I do myself strongly suspect 
 that those verses are not iambics regu- 
 lated by accent, but loose trochaic!:, 
 as independent of it as any in Euri- 
 
 pides. Vossius himself says, (p. 144.) 
 maxime similes sunt Archilochiis catalec- 
 ticis. And Euslathius, as cited by 
 him, speaking of these verses, says, 
 trafyrai o T^o^aino/; pu$n*oj. Whether 
 the metre of them be considered as ac- 
 centual, or as common temporal metre, 
 it is faulty and corrupt each way. But, 
 on the whole, I do not think it accen- 
 tual. 
 
 * The misapplication of the Greek 
 accentual mark seems to have followed 
 words into the Latin language, and 
 corrupted their pronunciation there in 
 the time of Ausonius, who makes idola 
 from Ei'Sa;Xa, and eremus from £pn/t*oc, 
 dactyls. We likewise pronounce St. 
 Helina from 'EXeva, and idia from ISea : 
 these two words are probably of alike 
 kind with philosophia, prosodia, men- 
 tioned in a former chapter by Melanc- 
 thon ; that is, words which, in passing 
 into the Roman language, carried their 
 acute with them, and retained it on 
 the penultima, though the Latin me- 
 thod of accentuation would naturally 
 have carried it back to the antepenul-
 
 J 14 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 It is, however, certain, that if Tzetzes regulated his 
 metre in those verses by a vicious quantity, yet he did it 
 wilfully and knowingly : he was at the same time well 
 acquainted with the true ancient quantity, from what- 
 ever cause his corruption of it might proceed. This 
 clearly appears in those iambics of his at the end of the 
 eleventh Chiliad, written according to the old rules of 
 good metre, beginning thus : 
 
 Tohq rfjc ovb) vvv Mvaiag upovq /naOe, 
 
 and ending 
 
 Atywv yap tv ri fxvoia [yt] 7rapar£>E\£i. 
 
 The same regard for due quantity is seen in a long 
 poem of iambics by the same author at the end of his 
 thirteenth Chiliad, Trepl irai'Suv aywyrje : in a short poem 
 of hexameters, and that followed by another of iambics. 
 What is very particular, and at the same time a strong 
 proof of what I have said above of Tzetzes' being ac^ 
 quainted with true quantity, is, that in some introductory 
 verses prefixed to his poem de liheris instituendis, he 
 speaks with disapprobation and contempt of that bar- 
 barous metre which then prevailed. Such he calls the 
 metre of a mean, strolling, vulgar muse,* fiovorjg dyvp- 
 
 tima. Several of this sort are men- 
 tioned by Aldus, in the vocabulary 
 prefixed to Statius ; and by Servius, in 
 many parts of his notes on Virgil. 
 Now, wherever we find a Latin acute, 
 to that in our English pronunciation we 
 commonly annex a long time, as will 
 be considered more fully in another 
 place. And thus we come to pro- 
 nounce the words, Helena, idea. 
 
 * Mus<£ circulalrich, 
 Qua pedum concinnum non servat grei- 
 sum. 
 
 Quid vero quispiam artijicioso scriberet 
 
 metro, 
 Pedesque seriaret itbique, et ancipite$ 
 
 litems, 
 Et omnia subtiliter, prout decet, liina- 
 
 ret, 
 Cum aquali in honore sint artijiciosa et 
 
 barbara, 
 Et indocta velut docta dominentur ? 
 Et h<ec quibus? Us qui ridentur sapien- 
 
 tissimi. 
 Sic quod honest um est evanuit ex vita, 
 Sic ubiqne laluit vulgaris inscitia.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY'. 115 
 
 *H ti)v 7roSwi/ tvovSjiov ov rrjoti fiaatv. 
 Kal* ti yap av rig r£Y_v(i«i> ypa^cn photo, 
 IloSac ts rijpot iravra^ov, koX Sf^povovg, 
 Kal TravTa Aottwc, tog \petov, airo&oi, 
 "\otov $OKOi>vTtov TtyyiKtov /eta j3apj3apwi>, 
 Kai tCjv ari^vtov tog aofptov Kparovjiivtov ', 
 Kat ravra iroioig ; roT^ Sokouot. 7ravcro^)OtC' 
 OvTto to koXov £^a7T£7rri) row j3tou, 
 Owrto KarEicparjjcrtv 17 \^uoatorrjc. 
 
 The vulgar corruption, which hef here laments, and 
 the sense which the intelligent and learned had of it in 
 the twelfth century, agrees nearly with the account of 
 the Greek tongue three hundred years afterwards, given 
 by Philelphus, who, in the fifteenth century, was at Con- 
 stantinople, and seems to have made very particular in- 
 quiries into the state of the language and pronunciation 
 there. In a letter to Peter Perleo, in 1441, twelve years 
 before the taking of that city by the Turks, he says, 
 " that though he took pains to get what information he 
 could, in regard to their language, from the schoolmas- 
 ters there, he could meet with nothing satisfactory from 
 them." But though he describes the depraved state of 
 the Greek tongue among the common J inhabitants of that 
 city, he tells his friend, that it still retained its ancient 
 purity among persons§ of higher rank and learning, who 
 
 * Ti or -n, is always short. He J In a letter written about two 
 
 might have written, Aia riyap x. r. X. M. years before the taking of Constantino- 
 
 t There is mentioned by Fabricius, pie, he speaks of linguam vulgar em 
 
 Bibl. Graec. lib. v. c. 7. p. 48, a ma- earn, qua et k plebe erat depravata atque 
 
 nuscript piece of this Tzelzes, er titled corrupta ob peregrinorum mercatorum- 
 
 Versus Politici de pedibus et metris poe- que multitudinem, qui quotidie Constan- 
 
 ticii. in Bibl. Vindob. et Cod. Barocc. tinopolim conftuebant, in urbemque re- 
 
 131. Fabric, in the same book, p. 17, cepti incolce, Grcecisque admixti, locutio- 
 
 18, mentions likewise a MS. of his, de nem optimam infuscarunt inquinarunt- 
 
 omni versuum genere, et de versibus poli- que. Apud Hodium de Grec. illustr. 
 
 tick MS. Reg. 84. A sight of this last p. 188. 
 
 piece would probably clear up this § Graci, quibus lingua depravata non 
 
 matter at once. sit, et quos ipsi turn sequimur, turn imita- 
 
 \2
 
 116 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 use (says he) the same language, and speak in the same 
 manner at this very time, as the Greeks did eighteen 
 hundred years ago. 
 
 As it is plain that Tzetzes was well acquainted with 
 the true nature and use of accent, so it is evident, that 
 those learned Greeks, who, both before and after the 
 taking of Constantinople, came into the west, and there 
 taught their own language (some of whom had the care 
 of the* first editions of the old Greek authors that were 
 
 mur, ita loquuntur vulgo hue etiam tem- 
 pestate, ut Aristophanes cmnicus, ut "Eu- 
 ripides tragicus, ut oratores omnes, ut 
 historiographi, ut philosophi etiam ipsi, 
 et Plato, et Aristoteles. Viri Aidici ve~ 
 terem sermonis dignitatem atque elegan- 
 tiam retinebaiit : in primisque ipsa no- 
 biles mulieres, quibus cum nullum esset 
 omnino cum viris peregrinis commer- 
 cium, merus ille ac purus Grecorum 
 sermo servabatur intactus. Idem in 
 epist. ann. 1451- A pleasing and af- 
 fecting picture this of the Greek court 
 a year or two before its destruction. 
 
 The same person, in a letter to 
 Saxolus Pratensis, in 1441, after dis- 
 suading him from going into Pelopo- 
 nese, where there was nothing that de- 
 served his regard, except Georgius 
 Gemistus, advises him rather to visit 
 Constantinople: illic enim et virieruditi 
 sunt nonnulli, et culti mores, et sermo 
 etiam nitidus. 
 
 The particular mention made above 
 by Philelphus, of the women in the By- 
 zantine court keeping the purity of the 
 Greek language, agrees well with an 
 observation of Cicero, in his third 
 book de Oratore, " Facilius mulieres 
 incorruptam anliquitatem conservant, 
 quod inultorum sermonis expertes, ea 
 tenent semper qua; prima didicerunt." 
 
 * Demetrius Chalcoudvles pub- 
 
 lished Suidas, at Milan, 1499. John 
 Lascaris was employed in editions at 
 Rome. But more particularly Marcus 
 Musurus, of Crete, under Leo X. in- 
 spected the editions of many Greek 
 books printed by Aldus and Blastus, 
 particularly of Aristophanes, with the 
 excellent scholia, Athenaeus, Plato, 
 Hesychius (the last of which was 
 printed from a single MS. copy, being 
 the only one then found). Aldus often 
 gratefully acknowledges the services 
 of these Greeks. In a dedication of his 
 to Musurus, prefixed to his Statius, he 
 says, " Non est moris nostri fraudare 
 quenquam sua laude : irao decrevimus 
 omnes, quicunque mihi vel opera, vel 
 inveniendis novis libris, vel commo- 
 dandis raris et emendatis codicibus, 
 vel quocunque modo adjumento fuerint, 
 notos facere studiosis, ut et ill is de- 
 beant, si mihi debent. — Atque utinam 
 plurimos id genus haberemus reipubli- 
 cse literariae benefactores, quauquam 
 plurimos speramus futuros, non in Ita- 
 lia solum, sed el in Germania et Gal- 
 liis, atque apud toto orbe divisos Bri- 
 tannos, in quibns habemus Grocinum 
 sacerdotem, et Thoniam Linacrum vi- 
 ros uiidecunque doctissimos ; qui olim 
 Florentia? sub Demetrio Chalcondyle, 
 viro clarissimo et gra?ca3 facundi* in- 
 stauratore magnoque decore, grascis li-
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 117 
 
 printed, and in them placed their accentual marks as we 
 now find them) that they, I say, considered accent, of 
 which in all their books they published the characters, 
 as distinct from true quantity, and not inconsistent with 
 it. For it is certain at that time, when they used these 
 accentual virgulce, they perfectly knew, and duly re- 
 garded, the old pure quantity. This appears not only in 
 their editions of the ancient Greek poets, the metre of 
 which they were undoubtedly well acquainted with, but 
 likewise in some of their own metrical compositions, 
 in which the metre, regulated by true quantity, is as ac- 
 curate as in the poems of their ancestors two thousand 
 years before them. Of this the reader may see a proof 
 in some* iambics of Theodore Gaza: in an epitaph on 
 the famous cardinalf Bessarion, archbishop of Nice, 
 written by himself; likewise in that of John Lascaris, 
 composed by himself : 
 
 AdaicapiQ aXXoScnrij yaiy IvucdrQaTO, yair^v 
 
 Ovt£ \iriv %dvr]v, w %,ivz, fis/Kpo/hievog' 
 Evpero fxei\i)(iriv. aXX d^Oerai, tlirsp 'A^atotc 
 
 Ouk en \ovv \^ u Tropic iXsvOepiov. 
 
 Lascaris externa terra jacet, haud tamen ipsi, 
 De gente externa quod quereretur, erat : 
 
 Nee piget hospitii. dolet hoc, quod Grcecia natis 
 Amplius hand prcestat libera busta snis. 
 
 I have produced these lines of Lascaris particularly, 
 as they appear to me pathetically expressive of those 
 tender emotions, naturally arising in the author's mind, 
 from reflecting on the situation of himself (who was of 
 
 teris incubuerunt. — Gaudeant igitur teras bonasque arles propagari nostra 
 
 bonarum Hterarum studiosi. nam D. aetate desideraut, omnia suppeditabi- 
 
 O. M. annuente, assiduisque laboribus mus, quibus in summos viros queant 
 
 nostris, atque acadeinicorum nostro- evadere." 
 
 rum auxilio, et caeterorum bonoruni * Hodius in vita Gaza?, p. 58. 
 
 doctorumque liomiuum, qui bunas li- t Id. p. 151.
 
 118 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 the Greek imperial family) and of his country at the 
 time of his death : 
 
 Hie tibi mortis erant metes : domus alta sub Ida, 
 Lymesi domus alta; solo Laureate sepulchrum. 
 
 But to return to our argument. This pure quantity is 
 seen also in some verses of his prefixed to the first edi- 
 tion of the Scholia on Sophocles, at Rome [1518] (where 
 he was appointed by Leo X. president of a Greek aca- 
 demy, instituted chiefly with a view of giving accurate 
 editions of the Greek authors,) and many other epi- 
 grams of his now extant. 
 
 The elegiac poem of Musurus, prefixed to Aldus' edi- 
 tion of Plato, and addressed to * Leo X., for which that 
 prince made him an archbishop, will likewise prove 
 
 * This great pontiff (whose charac- 
 ter, as far as it respects learning, may 
 be thus briefly given in the words of 
 his celebrated historian Paulus Jovius : 
 " ad beneficentiam, ornandamque vir- 
 tutem natus educatusque"), by his own 
 polite taste and liberality, repaired in a 
 great measure that loss which the arts 
 had sustained from his famous prede- 
 cessor Pope Gregory ; exciting among 
 the scholars of that age a most won- 
 derful spirit of recovering ancient, and 
 improving modern literature ; which, 
 by opening the old treasures of sound 
 knowledge, and giving a freedom and 
 vigour to men's thoughts, did eventu- 
 ally, though not intentionally, contri- 
 bute much to that great work, the re- 
 formation of the western church. 
 
 Thus Leo's encouragement of learn- 
 ing was in its consequence not. more 
 fortunate to that, than to the religious 
 and intellectual liberties of Europe, 
 and tended, in the end, to shake that 
 throne, which lie had adorned with a 
 spirit of urbanity, polite and judicious 
 munificence, and general humanity, be- 
 
 yond the example of any of his prede- 
 cessors. 
 
 The labours of Aldus, favoured by 
 the patronage of this prince, and con- 
 nected with the learned Greeks of his 
 age, are astonishing: in a preface to 
 Euripides, addressed by him to Deme- 
 trius Chalcondyles, he says, " mille et 
 amplius boni alicujus autoris volumina 
 singulo quoque mense emittimus ex 
 academia nostra." We must not here 
 understand the word volumen, as Sir 
 William Temple did, iu his writings 
 on ancient learning, to signify what we 
 call a volume,bat only a part, in a single 
 roll, of a larger work. There were not 
 600,000 books in the Ptoleinaeanlibrary 
 (as Sir William states the number), be- 
 cause there were 600,000 volumes. 
 
 The Greek Academy of Leo's insti- 
 tution well answered the purposes of 
 its excellent founder ; but as it flourish- 
 ed under him, so it sunk with him. 
 Upon his death, in 1521, it fell into a 
 gradual decay ; from which Gregory 
 XIII. did afterwards iu vain endea- 
 vour to recover it.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 119 
 
 that the admission ofthe accentual marks, as they stand 
 at present in our books, was not considered by those 
 Grecian teachers of Greek, as inconsistent with the 
 quantity and rhythm of their language : for they strictly 
 observed the quantity, and yet retained those marks. 
 
 That these Greeks did not look upon Trpoatj^ia and its 
 notations as affecting quantity, I am certain likewise 
 from the manner in which these things are treated by 
 them in their grammars, * wherein they are constantly 
 kept distinct. 
 
 * They generally distinguish tliein, 
 as Theodore Gaza has done in the fol- 
 lowing parts of his third book : at the 
 beginning of which he recounts the se- 
 veral particulars, in winch a person 
 might speak or write improperly : Qap- 
 Gaglfav ti? Ixlyytrai, r> svJew, h TrXtcvar- 
 fxa, n IvaKhayy, >i X?° v Vt * wjoirwo'ia, h 
 ypa^n. 
 
 "Ojoj wpoT'X^ia;- ITPOSIiiAl'A fj.lv ovv 
 S5"Ti T&iri; Tioia, tij <{>a>vi]j iyy^af/.fj.d-rou 
 Wfo? Ewpajviav tod oXod \oyov. Afterwards 
 he says, 'icrri 5e to'voj, STriracrt; h avicriq, 
 h fxicrorrig, c-DXX.a?oiv ivtyajviav lament, h 
 fj.iv yag o^iia to E7rtT£Tayw.£vov i)(ti tod 
 <p86yyou, h Ss @a.g£ia to aviifxivov, h Je ff£- 
 piiT'naifj.lvn to fj.icrm. 
 
 XPO'N02 Je mraaiq n crvtrroXh tywvntv- 
 toc. lunivnai fj.lv yap in fj.ci.sipa- crvink\- 
 XETai Je ff, Qpa^iia. 
 
 These words of Gaza are the verv 
 same that Aristotle and Arisloxenus 
 used 1800, and Dionysius of Halicar- 
 nassus, 1500 years before hira. The 
 first sentence of Gaza, here cited, 
 agrees with Diomedes' account of So- 
 Icecisinus ; " qui fit modis generalibus 
 decern et quatuor; immutatione gene- 
 jum, casuum, numerorura,personarum, 
 
 teinporum per geminationem ab- 
 
 nnendi, peraccentus, &c. iinmu- 
 
 iatio accentus ; ut si, Post, adverbium 
 cam gravi pronuncietur accenlu, erit 
 praepositio ; si aculo, erit adverbium, 
 
 ut longo post tempore veni." — And, 
 shortly after, in the same page ; " Te- 
 nor, quern Graeci Tao-iv aut Tr^ocrxSiai 
 dicunt, in flexibus vocis servandus est. 
 Nam quaadam acuto tenore, pleraque 
 gravi, alia flexu desiderant enunciari." 
 Diomed. lib. ii. Nearly the same is in 
 Charisius. lib. iv. c. 1. 2. and Donatus 
 de Barbarismo. p. 1767. Gaza's ac- 
 count of BaeSapir/iict; is expressed al- 
 most in the same words with those of 
 an old grammarian, published by Mr. 
 Valckenaer, on the same subject, in 
 some pieces subjoined to Ammonius, p. 
 191. 2. 4. One passage there on ac- 
 cent is as follows : Kara, SI TcVov &*£- 
 Gagi^oucnv et XfyovTSj, lav QovhZfj.ai, xai 
 lav d^Sifxat. $E~yag \lyBiv, lav Gou\ajfJ.ai 
 xai lav a^m/juu. 'OfJ.0ia$ na\ tlBp] todc 
 To'vouf £apoapt£oDa-iv, et Xe'j/ovtej, dxparov 
 7r£07T££i;"7raj/n6V»J' Set" ya% "Krytiv axparoy 
 '^^7J07^apo^t;To'va»;• h yap tod a. crrspnTic; 
 •B-jOTtflfjUEV)! Taiv hcruXha&wv hvofj-arcev Et; 
 oj \nyovTnv, dvaQ&a^li tov to'vov oiov xax.os 
 axajto;'<*>9apTo; a<p6agTO<;'ov>ioZv y.al xga-rot; 
 a.xga-ro<;. p. 195. " Those are guilty of a 
 barbarism in tone, who say, lav £ov\£i- 
 /wai,and lav d^Sj'Aai : for they ought to 
 say, Qov'hxfj.ai and a^tof/Mi. In the 
 same manner they who say, axpSrov, 
 with a circumflex on the penultima ; 
 for they ought to say ax.pa.-rov, acnting 
 it on the antepenultima, for the priva- 
 tive a prefixed to dissyllable noun*
 
 120 ESSAY ON 
 
 Those great and deserving men, who came out of 
 Greece into Italy in the fourteenth, * fifteenth, and the 
 beginning of the sixteenth centuries, and restored the 
 Grecian language which had been lost in the west for 
 several ages; whose names and memories ought to be 
 dear to every ingenuous admirer of that excellent lan- 
 guage, have strangely been represented by some dispu- 
 tants (merely to support a favourite system) as low, ig- 
 norant persons, unacquainted with the purity of that 
 tongue which they professed to teach, using themselves 
 a barbarous language and pronunciation, and put, in 
 short, on a level with the illiterate priests of the Archi- 
 pelago, or those strolling Greeks, of whom f Rutgersius 
 has given so ridiculous a description. At other times 
 they are represented as men of some knowledge indeed, 
 but of great pride, avarice, aud dishonesty, who knew 
 better perhaps than they taught ; but, in order to raise 
 their character and stipends, wilfully perverted the real 
 propriety of their language, in order to make the attain- 
 ment of it more % tedious and difficult to their scholars ; 
 who might thereby think more highly of their masters' 
 sagacity in explaining so intricate a thing to them, and 
 be more ready to reward their great learning and trouble 
 with extraordinary liberality. The former of these re- 
 
 ending in oj, draws back the accent : of the ancient language, which was 
 
 as xaxos ax.ay.ot;, <f>9ajTo? a<f>6afro;, and, used in the liturgies of many churches 
 
 therefore, xgaroq anpaToc." This obser- there : as the liturgies of St. Basil and 
 
 valion agrees with what is cited above St. Clirysostora are to this day used in 
 
 flora Apollonius, at the end of the fifth the churches of Greece. But although 
 
 chapter. See also p. 203. of Valcken. in Calabria there might be then some 
 
 on the accent of ivytvni;. remains of the language, yet a general 
 
 * I say the fourteenth century, for it ignorance of it was spread over every 
 
 was so early that Leontius Pilatus of other part of the wesl. Many instances 
 
 Thessalonica taughl in Italy, where he of which are related in Zwinger. " Orat. 
 
 was the master of Boccace, and lived de barbarie superiorum saecul." and in 
 
 some time with Petrarch. Petrarch Chr. Becman. on the same subject, 
 himself learnt Greek from Barlaamus, t Varioe. Led. lib. ii. c. 11. 
 
 a Calabrian monk. In Calabria, which X Vid. Adolph. Mekerchi tract, de 
 
 is part of the old Magna Gra?cia, there veteri et recta pronun. ling. Gr. p. 
 
 remained even then some knowledge 21.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 121 
 
 presentations is at present clearly contradicted by fact : 
 it is by no means certain that they all used, even in com- 
 mon discourse, that barbarous language, the modern 
 Greek, which is objected to them. From Philelphus' 
 account of the learned men in Constantinople, just be- 
 fore the taking of that city, we have good reason to 
 think the language of scholars was far from being cor- 
 rupt. But whatever might be the vernacular tongue, 
 especially of those who were natives of the southern 
 provinces of the Greek empire, they indisputably knew 
 what was ancient Greek. How were they otherwise 
 enabled to write such good grammars, prefaces to edi- 
 tions of Greek authors, occasionally good verses, and 
 many other literary pieces, some of which, in point of 
 propriety of language, would not have disgraced their 
 ancestors sixteen hundred or two thousand years before 
 them? They may be invidiously called Graeculi, Graeca- 
 nici, Semi-Barbari, Grasco-Turcse, Romano-Hellenistae, 
 to vilify and sink their characters. But these are only 
 words against facts. Their industry, their knowledge, 
 and in many of them their taste and genius, entitle them 
 to far different appellations. They were, indeed, sur- 
 rounded and persecuted by barbarism, but seem not to 
 have been tainted with a mixture of it. Their literature, 
 notwithstanding the pollution with which it was threat- 
 ened, escaped with purity : 
 
 Doris amara suam non intermiscuit undam. 
 
 As for the latter representation of their manners and 
 general character, there is something so uncharitable, so 
 illiberal and unworthy a scholar in this imputation, at 
 the same time so base and ungrateful towards these 
 Greek teachers, that it must raise some indignation in a 
 good mind, to find learned men, in arguing against what 
 they think corruptions of pure Greek, attribute them to 
 these unfortunate scholars, and so turn that little Greek 
 knowledge they have against those very persons from 
 whom alone they originally derived it.* 
 
 * A brief account of these illustrious his Pdyhistar. lib. iv. c. 6. " Nitni- 
 Greeks is thus given by Morhofius in rum erant novem inter exules e Graeci*
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 The only thing in which some of these Greeks seemed 
 to want a truly judicious discernment, is, that they 
 
 Roman) profugos, qui praecipue Grae- 
 cas literas in occidentem et septeutrio- 
 nera intulernnt. Sunt vero illi, Bessario 
 Cardinalis, Emannel Chrysoloras, De- 
 metrius Chalcondflas (tot egregiis dis- 
 cipulis clarus, Leon. Aretino, Franc. 
 Barbaro, Fr. Philelpho, Bapt. Gaarino, 
 et PoggioFlorenlino)Theod. Gaza, Joh. 
 Argyropulus, Georgius Trapezuntius, 
 Marc. Musurus, Michael Marullus, et 
 J. Lascaris : qui postremus ex illustri 
 Lascarina Iraperatorum familia oriun- 
 dus, Medicaeam Bibliolhecam insigni 
 Graecorum codicura thesauro ditavit; 
 eumLegatusaLaurenlio MedicasoCon- 
 stantinopolin ad Bajazetem missus om- 
 nes Grsecias bibliothecas scrutaretur. 
 Eodem Lascare auctore Leo X. Ponti- 
 fexRomanus(Laurentii Medicaei filius) 
 ipsam propemodum Graeciam in Italiam 
 quasi in novam coloniam deduxit. Pue- 
 ros enim ex tota Graecia, in quibus vis 
 ingenii et bona indoles inesse videba- 
 tur, cum suis praeceptoribus, Roman* 
 evocavit, ut linguam Romani suam 
 ipsis commodias traderent, vicissim- 
 que suam illi Romauis. Addendus vero 
 his novein Graecis Antonius Eparchus 
 est, Corcyrensis, qui snperiore saccuio 
 per aliquot annos Venetiis Grsecas lite- 
 ras docuit, prosecutusque est Elegiacis 
 versibusruiuam Constantinopolis : de- 
 mum Corcyram regressus, inter suo- 
 rum literatos consenuit ; is quoque 
 centum codices Grajcos secum attulit 
 venum Imperatori Carolo V. et Fran- 
 cisco I. Galliarum regi oblatos. Prae- . 
 terea e Graecis, quibus Graeca eruditio 
 mullum debet, Hieron3'mus Spartiata, 
 necnon Franciscus Portus, Cretensis, et 
 jEmilius Francisci filius, memorandi 
 sunt, omnes laboriosissimi : ut et Nico- 
 laus et Zacharias Calliergi, Cretenses 
 
 itidem, quorum utrique curamimpressi 
 primo Magni Etymnlogici, posteriori 
 insuper collectionem Scboliorum Theo- 
 criti debemus." Morhoff might have 
 mentioned several other editions Qf 
 Zachary Calliergns, as the Pindar with 
 scholia in 1515, and Phavorinus' Lexi- 
 con in 152.3, with other books. Ema- 
 nuel Chrysoloras, before he taught in 
 Italy, was at London in the reign of 
 Richard II. on an embassy from the 
 emperor Joannes Palasologus, to desire 
 his assistance, with that of other Christ- 
 ian princes, against Bajazet. This he 
 mentions himself in a letter, which he 
 wrote from Rome to the Emperor. Pa- 
 laeologus did afterwards himself, in per- 
 son, come into England, on the same 
 occasion, in the time of Henry IV: as 
 appears from a MS. (cited by Dr. 
 Hody) in the Lambeth library, entitled 
 '•' Speculum Parvulorum," lib. v. c.30. 
 On the subversion of the Greek em- 
 pire, there were several mean illiterate 
 Greeks scattered over the west and 
 north of Europe. These being some- 
 times accidentally met with by the 
 scholars of Germany and our own coun- 
 try, and appearing, as they really were, 
 low ignorant persons, raised in stran- 
 gers an unfavourable opinion of the 
 Greek refugees in general. Accordingly 
 we find some writers of Germany and 
 England speaking of the exiled Greeks 
 with great contempt: while those of 
 France and Italy, who by their situa- 
 tion were acquainted with the real cha- 
 racters of those illustrious men, men- 
 tioned above by MorhofT, hold them in 
 the highest estimation. 
 
 Several writers have given the his- 
 tory of the revival of Greek learning : 
 Christ, Rosa " de Turcismi fuga, etGr.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 123 
 
 * affected to depreciate Cicero's writings (though f others 
 among them illustrated parts of them with comments, 
 paraphrases, and translations). But this, perhaps, did 
 not proceed from want of taste for such excellent com- 
 positions, and may not improbably be accounted for by 
 a general national prejudice, which there seems to have 
 been through all ages among the Greeks against that 
 great Roman. Dr. Middleton observes, that Dio Cas- 
 sius's spleen and malignity against him might arise from 
 a Grecian's envy to a man, who for arts and eloquence 
 was thought to £ eclipse the fame of Greece. Cicero is 
 known likewise to have provoked this enmity of the 
 
 ling, incremento." C. F. Boerner " de 
 altera migratione lit. Gnec. &c." Sam. 
 Battier. " Orat. de lit. Graec. post in- 
 ductam barbariem, &c." 
 
 * Particularly Joan. Argyropulus. 
 
 t Theod. Gaza ; Georg. Trapezunti- 
 us, &c. 
 
 X Among the Romans themselves 
 Cicero's character was not at first pro- 
 perly treated. He is never mentioned 
 by Horace or Virgil : thongh the latter 
 had an opportunity of doing it with ho- 
 nour in a part of his poem, that conld 
 hardly fail of bringing Cicero to his 
 mind, where he is describing the shin- 
 ing qualities of his countrymen, com- 
 pared with those of other nations : 
 
 Tn regere imperio populos, Romane, 
 
 memento : 
 Ha tibi erunt artes : pacique imponere 
 
 morem, 
 Parcere subjectis et debellare superbos. 
 
 Here was a fair occasion of asserting 
 the literary character of his country: 
 but he gives it up, and rather than do 
 justice to Cicero's character, which he 
 could not but hold in the highest esti- 
 mation, he chooses to do an injustice 
 to Rome itself by yielding the superi- 
 ority of eloquence to others : 
 
 Eicudent alii spirantia mollius or a: 
 Orabunt causas melius, ctelique meatus 
 Describent radio, &c. ■ 
 
 This silence, which itself is a great in- 
 justice to so extraordinary a man, Dr. 
 Middleton well accounts for, by shew- 
 ing that his name could not but be ob- 
 noxious to the court of Augustus, and 
 the very mention of it be a satire on a 
 prince who was so infamously concern- 
 ed in his destruction. As this court 
 prejudice subsided, his character rose : 
 and following Roman writers seem to 
 pride themselves in their illustrious 
 countryman, and to be fond of consi- 
 dering him in a comparative view with 
 the Greeks. " Marcus Cicero," says 
 Paterculus, " ut vitaclarus ita ingenio 
 maximus, qui effecit, ne quorum anna 
 viceramus, eorum ingenio vinceremur." 
 And Pliny, " Facundise Latiarumque 
 literarum parens — omnium triumpho- 
 rum lauream adepte majorem, quanto 
 plus est ingenii Romani lerminos in 
 tantum promovisse, qnam imperii." 
 Hist. 7. 30. Another says, " Demos- 
 thenes tibi pneripuit, ne esses primus 
 orator ; to. illi, ne solus." Apnd 
 Hieronym.
 
 124 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 Greeks against him, by taking every opportunity through- 
 out his* works of drawing a comparison between the 
 abilities and genius of his own countrymen and of the 
 Greeks : the latter of whom he allows to have quicker 
 inventive talents than the Romans, but to be inferior to 
 them in solidity and real strength of parts. In answer 
 to these comparisons of Cicero, it has been remarked, 
 that Plutarch seems to have written his Lives partly 
 with a view to confute what Tully has endeavoured to 
 prove in almost all his prefaces, the superiority of the 
 Romans over the Greeks ; and, for this end, to have 
 
 * In many parts of his writings he 
 speaks with some contempt of the 
 Greeks. " Graecorum doctrina perridi- 
 cula." de Orat. " Graeci fallaces et le- 
 ves, et diuturna servitute ad nimiam 
 assentationem eruditi. Graeci omnes 
 vias pecuniae norunt, omnia pecuniae 
 causa faciunt. Graecorum familiaritates 
 parum fideles sunt, ad Qu.fratr. Homo 
 levitate Graccus, crudelitate Barbarus. 
 pro Flac. Graecorum luxuria et levi- 
 tas." ibid. And even their language he 
 will not allow to be so full and copious 
 as the Roman : " ita sentio, et saepe 
 diaserui, LaLinam linguam non modo 
 non inopem, ut vulgo putarenl, sed Io- 
 cupleliorem etiam esse, quam Graj- 
 cam." de Fin. I. iuit. Which is con- 
 trary to the general acknowledgment of 
 the other good Roman writers them- 
 selves, from Lucretius, who complains 
 of egestas lingua: and patrii sermo7iis 
 more than once, down to Muretus, who 
 saj's, " in Grteco sermone, qui Roma- 
 no immensuin quantum copiosior est.'' 
 Var. Lect. xv. 20. (See more to this 
 purpose in that elegant and judicious 
 writer, v. i. xix. 4. and P. Petit. Mis- 
 cell. Observ. iv. 5.) Many other expres- 
 sions of the foregoing kind are scat- 
 tered up and down in Cicero's works : 
 who yet, probably, did not mean always 
 to reflect on the Greeks in general, but 
 
 those of a particular profession or cha- 
 racter, whom his subject brought to 
 his thoughts. In his orations, re- 
 flections of this kind might be thrown 
 out to invalidate the credit of an evi- 
 dence. In his rhetorical and philoso- 
 phical dialogues, the person who speaks 
 introduces several things to serve his 
 own purpose, very foreign from Cice- 
 ro's own sentiments. But, perhaps, 
 his Greek readers did not always make 
 these distinctions, and applied to them- 
 selves, what was not intended as a na- 
 tional censure when it came from Cice- 
 ro's pen. Certain it is, that in many 
 parts of his works, particularly in his 
 Epistles to Atticus, he discovers a strong 
 passion for Greek literature ; in order 
 to gratify which, he seems very desir- 
 ous, with the assistance of Atticus and 
 his Greek correspondents, to make a 
 good collection of books in that lan- 
 guage; which, if he could complete, 
 supero Cramtm dcritiis (says he) atque 
 omnium lucos et prata contemno. Ad 
 Attic, i. 4. He speaks likewise, in 
 many places, impartially and honour- 
 ably of the Greeks, as men from whom 
 the Romans received " philosophiaru 
 et omnes ingetiuas discipliuas." deFin. 
 But a single censure will by some per- 
 sons be remembered long after a hun- 
 dred compliments are forgotten.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 125 
 
 chosen out the most artful parallels. Some such national 
 spirit might operate in Argyropulus against Cicero's 
 works. It can hardly be any other way explained, how 
 some of these latter Greeks, who had a relish, in com- 
 mon with all other men of taste and discernment, for the 
 other good * Roman writers, should yet so particularly 
 except to Cicero. But so the fact was. And the same 
 spirit was transfused into some of their scholars ; among 
 whom was our learned countryman, Linacer, physician 
 to Henry VIII., who was for some time a student in 
 Greek at Florence, and appeared afterwards among the 
 foremost of the Anti-Ciceroniani. And yet, what is very 
 particular in Linacer, though his professions were 
 against Cicero, his practice was with him; and his 
 books de Latini sermonis structura have more examples 
 of proper and beautiful diction from Cicero than from 
 any other Roman writer. 
 
 As many parts of the literary history of these times 
 serve to illustrate some characters, the vindication of 
 which is much connected with my argument; the reader 
 will, I hope, on that account consider, what has been 
 here introduced on that subject, as less foreign and di- 
 gressive. 
 
 What has been said of those Greek exiles retaining 
 and using the accentual marks, may be said likewise of 
 those very learned and eminent men of Italy, France, 
 Germany, Holland, and our own country, the successors 
 of those Greeks above-mentioned, in spreading the 
 knowledge of that incomparable language over the 
 west; who, from the time of Gregory of Tifernum to the 
 present, have, by their lexicons, commentaries, and 
 editions of ancient authors, been smoothing the rugged- 
 ness of the road to ancient literature, and done posterity 
 a service, which is ill repaid by some persons at pre- 
 sent in disputing their authority, and questioning the 
 propriety of the means made use of by them to convey 
 to the world the knowledge of that language in all its 
 
 * Lcoulius Pilatus, though a man of a saturnine disposition, was extrava- 
 gantly fond of Terence.
 
 126 ESSAY ON 
 
 purity. But let us not hastily aud inconsiderately re- 
 ject, what they, our superiors in Greek knowledge, have 
 carefully and faithfully adjusted for us : 
 
 tune studio disposta fideli, 
 Intellecta prius quam sint, coTciempta relinquas. 
 
 They certainly were thoroughly convinced of the ex- 
 pediency and even necessity of these marks. If they, 
 and the first printers of Greek, had not been satisfied of 
 this, they would not have clogged an infant art, as print- 
 ing then was, with needless impediments, when it was 
 encumbered with so many other unavoidable difficulties 
 of its own. 
 
 The destruction of the Greek empire in the fifteenth 
 century, which involved the Greek language in its fall, 
 naturally raises in our minds some reflections on the par- 
 ticular circumstances observable in the history of it: 
 those, I mean, which regard its extent and duration. 
 
 First, when we consider its extent, we see it, under 
 the successors of Alexander, spread far beyond the 
 bounds of the Greek provinces, particularly about the 
 time when visible accentuation was first introduced. It 
 was then the Romans began to pay great attention to 
 it, when literature made* its first appearance among 
 them in Greek. Q. Fabius, and L. Cincius, two of the 
 early Roman historians, quoted so often by Dionysius, 
 wrote in f that language. Hannibal % himself wrote 
 
 * " Anliquissimi doctorum.qui iidem sterhuis, therefore, properly censures 
 
 etPoetaeet Oratores serai-graeci erant Lucian for representing Hannibal as 
 
 (Livium et Ennium dico : quos utraque learning Greek for the first lime in the 
 
 lingua domi forisque docuisse aduo- shades below, not, ad Luc. torn. i. p. 
 
 turn est) nihil atnplius quam Giasce 381. Hannibal's knowledge, however, 
 
 interpretabantur." Sueton. de illustr. of tbat language was contrary to the 
 
 Gram, laws of his country ; for some years 
 
 t D\onys. Halic. Antiq. Rom. lib. i. before his lime the Carthaginians had 
 
 p. 5. Sjlb. "o<roi ri i&o.'haia e^ya -r«j enacted a law, " ne quis postea Car- 
 
 OToXEia; 'EMwxji SiaXEJtTac-uvi^a^ttV tiv thaginieusis aut Uteris Grascis aut ser- 
 
 iic-i wjsc-SuTaToi, Koivtoc 4>i|3io?, Aivxto; moni studeret ; ne aut loqui cum hoste 
 
 KiyKio;. These two are cited afterwards aut scribere sine interprete posset.'' 
 
 very frequently. Just. xx. 5. Alex, ab Alexand. torn. i. p. 
 
 $ Corn. Nep. in \iu. c. 1j. Hem- 529.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. Vll 
 
 what he composed, in Greek ; as did afterwards Juba,* 
 his countryman, who is recorded to have been a very 
 voluminous writer, and by what we know of his charac- 
 ter and abilities, probably a very good one. All the 
 ages of Rome, down to the time of Cicero, produced 
 hardly one Latin f historian. He himself wrote in Greek 
 the history of his own consulate, with several other % 
 pieces : some for his private exercise and improvement 
 in composition, and some for publication. The Greek 
 Epistles of Brutus, and history written by Lucullus, are 
 well known from § Plutarch. About a hundred and 
 fifty years after the invention of accentual signs, the 
 language became almost general. " Graeca (says || Ci- 
 cero in his defence of his Greek friend) leguntur in om- 
 nibus fere gentibus ; Latina suis finibus, exiguis sane, 
 continentur." And, therefore, several % Roman authors, 
 in order to make their writings more public, composed 
 them in Greek, even while they belonged to the imperial 
 court at Rome. In like manner Josephus and Philo 
 preferred Greek to their own language, not only as more 
 beautiful, but, probably, as more general too. This com- 
 mon use of Greek must be owing principally to the ex- 
 cellence of the language itself. We have seen, indeed, 
 a modern language so very widely extended, as to seem 
 almost to promise itself an universality in Europe : I 
 mean the French. But this has been owing, not only to 
 its own intrinsic merit, to its delicacy and perspicuity, 
 which it undoubtedly possesses in a high degree ; but to 
 the extent likewise of the power and political influence 
 of its nation. This was far from being the case with the 
 Greek tongue, which had none of these advantages. 
 
 * 'EXhwmv toTj no}<vfj<.aQttTTaToi$ iva- § Vit. Lncull. p. 492. 
 
 fiQ/xc? crvyyga<piv(riv. Plut. in C<csar. p. || Pro Arcliia. v. 
 
 733. Xyland. See also in Sertor. p. % " Quum multi ex Romanis, etiam 
 
 572. Consularis dignitatis viri, res Romanas 
 
 t Cic. de Leg. i. 2. Gra?co peregrinoque sernioue in histo- 
 
 $ Epist. ad Attic, ii. 1. ix. 4. and in riam contulissent." Justin, prtef. Many 
 
 inany other places. " Cicero ad Prae- of these writers are enumerated by 
 
 turam usque Greece dcclainavit." Sue- Carteromacluts in Orat. de lit. Gi«c. 
 
 ton. de Rhet. i. apud H.Steph. Tb.es. G. loin. i.
 
 128 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 At the very time, which Cicero mentions, the Greeks, 
 in their civil capacity as a people, were in the most hum- 
 ble condition : while the Romans were in the height of 
 their power, being, as Atheneeus* calls them, Afj/ioc rijc 
 mtt&vfuvns- Alld Y et tiie language of this conquered 
 people recommended itself universally in preference to 
 that of their conquerors ; who yet had brought their own 
 tongue to great perfection, having added much grace 
 and elegance to its natural strength and vigour. They 
 had likewise not only carefully improved their own lan- 
 guage, but, through a nice regard for the dignity of it, 
 did in many public casesf discourage the Greek. But 
 nothing could stop its general reception and progress. 
 It was continually enlarging its own bounds, with those 
 of the Eoman empire. So that Juvenal says, "nunc 
 totus Graias habet orbis Athenas." In Rome itself, it 
 was the principal language both of science and polite 
 literature.! 
 
 * 1. 17. v 
 
 t Cicero himself was reprimanded 
 for addressing the council of Syracuse 
 in a Greek oration. (Verrin. Act. ii. 
 lib. iv. towards tlie end.) Tiberius was 
 fond of Greek, and well skilled in it : 
 but never used it in the senate. He 
 carried this punctilio so far, as to apo- 
 logize to them for being forced to use 
 the word Monopolium ; and ordered 
 the word "E/i*0XJi ( «a to be struck out of 
 a decree, with a strong injunction that 
 a Latin one should be inserted in its 
 stead, or if one could not be found 
 adequate to it, that it should be ex- 
 pressed by a periphrasis. (Sueton. in 
 Tiber. 71.) Claudius afterwards was 
 equally jealous of the honour of his 
 own language ; of which he gave two 
 remarkable instances, in degrading two 
 very considerable Greek nobles for not 
 understanding Latin ; one of them, af- 
 ter having for some time enjoyed the 
 privileges of a Roman citizen, and 
 
 being likewise at that very time a pub- 
 lic character. (SWt. in Claud, xvi. Dion. 
 Cass. Ix. 17. Dr. Taylor's Civil Law, 
 p. 513.) But yet Claudius wrote him- 
 self in Greek twenty-eight books of 
 history. Suet. xlii. 
 
 J Dan. Heinsius, in one of his Ora- 
 tions (p. 356, &c.) gives ns a pretty 
 view of its general use at Rome, where 
 it was properly looked on as " non 
 tam unius populi, quam ernditionis nni- 
 versae, et ipsius sapientiae sermo^ct 
 inter mulieres, utquaeque vel prudentia 
 vel generis splendore excellebat, ita 
 expeditius ac elegantius sermone hoc 
 utebatur." Dr. Renlley goes farther, 
 in saying, " Neque enini eximia qua> 
 dam Mascenatis laus erat Grace Lati- 
 neque scire, cum Romas ea tempestate 
 quivis Senatoris Equitisve Clius, imo 
 et de plebe innumeri, libertini etiamet 
 servi, Gra?ce Ioquerentur." Ad Ilorat. 
 Cam. iii. 8. v. 5.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 129 
 
 The wide extent of it was without doubt owing to 
 other causes, besides its native excellence ; to the com- 
 mercial genius* of the people that spoke it ; to the num- 
 ber of colonies, which Grecian cities at different timesf 
 sent out. One city alone, Miletus, according to^: Seneca 
 and ||Pliny, sent forth, at different times, no less than 
 seventy colonies. The great numbers that came into 
 Italy, have been mentioned in a foregoing chapter. Mar- 
 seilles is well known to have been founded in this man- 
 ner, which, in §Cicero's time, seems to have been hardly 
 inferior to Athens itself in the cultivation and improve- 
 ment of the civil and polite arts ; and by ^[Strabo is 
 considered as the great seat of learning in the west. 
 The Gauls in general, according to **Caesar, made use 
 of Greek letters. We learn from tfPl m y> that the 
 Greeks settled likewise in Spain. No one is ignorant 
 how numerous they became in several parts of Africa, 
 and over the JJeast, under the successors of Alexander. 
 And from the intercourse between the people of Mar- 
 seilles and Britain, as mentioned by Strabo, and between 
 the British and Gallic Druids, as related by Caesar, we 
 have some reason to think that our own island was not 
 ignorant of the Greek tongue, and that what Camden, 
 Meric Casaubon, and others, have said on this subject, 
 is not altogether without foundation. Erasmus j|||de- 
 clares, " veterem Britannicae gentis linguam, quae nunc 
 Vallica est, satis indicare earn aut profectam a Graecis, 
 aut certe mixtam fuisse."§§ Camden accounts for this 
 
 * See Dr. Taylor's Elements of Civil |||| In Adag. 'Pohoi tw Sve-iav. 
 
 Law, p. 510. et seq. where much light §§ And thus Conrad Heresbachius : 
 
 is thrown on this subject. " Britannornm pars, quae Cornubia di- 
 
 t Lipsiusde rect. pronunt. ling. Lat. citur, reliquias Grsecas linguae profite- 
 
 c. 3. tnr.'' And immediately after : " Quid 
 
 X Consolat. ad Helv. c. 6. dicam de Germania nostra, in cujus 
 
 || Lib. v. c. 29. lingnainnumera vestigia Graecas linguae 
 
 § Orat. pro Flacco. remanent? et nos observavimas ali- 
 
 H Lib. iv. quando aliquot centnrias vocabulorum, 
 
 ** Bell. Gall. lib. vi. c. 13. quae mere Grncca sunt." Ex Orat. apud 
 
 tt Lib. iv. c. 20. H. Steph. Th. Gr. i. p. 13. 
 XX Senee. ad Helviam. c. 6.
 
 130 ESSAY ON 
 
 from the immediate commercial connexion between 
 some Greeks and the Britons ; Meric Casaubon, from 
 those people who, in the early ages, came over hither 
 from the north-east parts of Europe, connected remotely 
 with the Greeks and their language, and by their settle- 
 ment here transmitted it to us. Which two suppositions 
 are consistent with each other, and may in part be both 
 equally true. 
 
 As the Greek tongue was so extensive at the time of 
 the introduction of Christianity into the world, the first 
 promulgers of the gospel did perhaps, for this reason, 
 publish it in Greek as the best human means to facilitate 
 the propagation of it. 
 
 This extent of that language cannot fail of raising it 
 somewhat in our estimation; but much more must it 
 claim our regard, when we add to that the consideration 
 of its surprising stability and permanency. 
 
 To reckon only from Homer's* time to the taking of 
 Constantinople, it had subsisted 2350 years. But we 
 may fairly, in our account, carry it much higher. For 
 though such a writer as Homer most probably improved 
 it, yet we may suppose, that he found it in no very rude 
 state. A fine language does not grow up to any tolera- 
 ble degree of perfection in one generation: its improve- 
 ments must be successive and gradual. And therefore 
 we may believe the Greek was no contemptible language 
 before Homer's time. But its continuation *only from 
 his age for 2350 years is an eminent proof that there was 
 something intrinsically good and vital in the principles 
 of it, which could support itself for such a length of 
 time, through such various revolutions in the political 
 state of its nation. 
 
 Ergo non hy ernes Mam, non flabra, neque imbres 
 Convellunt : immota manet, multosque per annos 
 Multa virum volvens durando scecula vincit. 
 
 * This is placing Homer's age a hundred years lower than Petavius has 
 done. Doctrin. Temp. ix. c. 30.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 131 
 
 Turn fortes late ramos, et brachia tendens 
 
 Hue ilhic, media ipsa ingentem sustinet ambram** 
 
 Some persons have argued from these revolutions to 
 prove, that the language, through a course of them, 
 must have been greatly corrupted. But matter of fact, 
 in this case, is more powerful than the most refined spe- 
 culations. And the actual corruption of it has not yet 
 been proved. It undoubtedly, in such a course of 
 years, underwent many alterations. But every altera- 
 tion is not a corruption. An addition is an alteration : 
 and additions to it were necessarily made, through a 
 series of ages, as they are continually to all languages, 
 from new ideas, which must have new terms, in laws, 
 arts, and sciences, and the general improvements in 
 civil life. Many single words are by this means used in 
 writers of the lower empire, which were unknown to 
 their predecessors. After Hadrian, when the Roman 
 language began to droop, there were several Greek 
 translations of Latin authors ; and from those versions 
 probably many Roman words became Greek. Some of 
 these appear in Hesychius : what can Aj3ac be, which 
 he explains ayac, but Habes ; and A/3iv, which he ex- 
 plains IXdrrjv, but Abietem? Mr. Wetsteinf has observed 
 that the Greeks took many words, not used by their 
 heathen ancestors, from the septuagint and Greek Tes- 
 tament; and the Byzantine lawyers, as appears in 
 the Basilic a, % introduced many' from the Roman insti- 
 tutes. But though the vocabularies of the tongue were 
 by this means enlarged, yet the language itself was not 
 so properly changed (much less corrupted) as ren- 
 dered more copious, its genius in the mean time continu- 
 
 * Those however, who have called num, composed in the ninlh and tenth 
 
 it the most durable of all languages, centuries, in emulation of Justinian, 
 
 are certainly mistaken : it is in this re- by Basilius Macedo, Imp. and his sons, 
 
 spect inferior to the Hebrew and Syriac. Leo and Constantine, for the use of 
 
 Dr. Bentl. on Phal. 404. the eastern empire, out of the several 
 
 t Orat. i. de C rase. ling. Greek versions of Justinian's corpus, 
 
 J Called likewise Jus Grczco-Roma- and other books of law. 
 
 K 2
 
 132 ESSAY ON 
 
 ing the same. The same terminations, same inflexions, 
 same syntaxis, and nearly the same general synthesis, 
 are seen in the Greeks of the lower empire, as in those 
 who long preceded the Christian era. And a person 
 from reading Xenophon, may turn to Eustathius, who 
 wrote in the twelfth century, that is, fifteen hundred years 
 after him, without being shocked with any corrupt alte- 
 ration in the general manner of the language. Nay, 
 much later, in Georgius Gemistus, the Byzantine Plato- 
 nic, commonly called Pletho (who attended the council 
 of Florence in 1439) the language need not raise any 
 great disgust, except in a very fastidious reader. No 
 one, who is at all acquainted with the Byzantine history, 
 can be ignorant of the great number of learned and 
 good writers on various subjects, some of whom adorned 
 every age of the Greek empire.* Dr. Taylorf observes, 
 " that there is less disagreement between the Greek of 
 the first ages and of the last, than there is between two 
 Roman authors of the same century : and that we now 
 have many authors in Greek, who wrote with great purity 
 and elegance, after the Roman language became in a 
 manner barbarous." Whether this purity continued in 
 civil and popular use, or only in the writings of the 
 learned (as Dr. Bentleyf thinks) who maintained it by 
 imitating the old authors, does not much affect our 
 agreement; if it did continue, that is all which concerns 
 this question. 
 
 They who take it for granted that the language of the 
 lower empire was corrupt, and say it necessarily must 
 have been so from the incursions of barbarians, as the 
 Roman tongue suffered and was destroyed by the north- 
 ern invaders, argue from one case to another that is 
 very different. The language of the Romans ceased to 
 
 * " An dicenms, florente virisdoctis co-Romanum, Syuodica, et Nomoca- 
 
 Constantinopoliperiisselinguam? Quot nona Grsecorura, et similia scripta de- 
 
 in re historica, in doctrina canonica, cantata turpiterignoret." Westen. Orat. 
 
 in variis scientiisclaros auctores dede- p. 17". 
 
 rit ilia astas, nemo est qui ignoret, nisi t Elcm. of Civil Law, p. 500. 
 
 corpns Historiae Byzantina-:, Jus Grae- J Dissert, on Pha!. p. 405, 406. '
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 U*3 
 
 subsist as a living one, because their metropolis itself 
 was taken, their civil polity subverted, and the empire 
 itself destroyed. In this general ruin the language 
 could not well survive. But this was not the case with 
 the Greeks. Their European enemies indeed from the 
 north-west, and those of Asia from the south-east, did 
 certainly, for several ages, exceedingly harass them, and 
 sometimes threaten their capital. But though they were 
 victorious in several attempts on the Greek provinces 
 (where they probably infected the language) yet the 
 empire, however weakened, still* upheld itself, the 
 capital was considerable, having a regular and magnifi- 
 cent court, and a succession of learned persons, who 
 maintained the language in its ancient state. Though 
 Zonaras may perhaps be suspected of court flattery in 
 saying that Anna Comnena, who wrote this history of 
 her father Alexius Comnenus, used a language aicpifiwg 
 aTTiKit,ovaav, yet Vossius, Dufresne, Peter Possin, and 
 others, who highly commend her style and eloquence, 
 cannot be supposed to speak of her in so favourable a 
 manner from any such motive. But though the style of 
 this learned princess, and of some other Byzantine 
 writers, may not deserve all the commendations that 
 have been bestowed upon it by certain critics, yet cer- 
 tainly it is far from barbarous or contemptible. And thus 
 it continued, till the Turks made a complete and finalf 
 conquest of that empire, by the reduction of Constanti- 
 
 * Three of the principal causes, 
 irhich Henninius assigns as destructive 
 of a language, did not at this time 
 affect the Greek. Corrumpuntur et mu- 
 tantur Ungues, aut defectu erudkorum, 
 qui istam linguam excolant, atque per 
 Philosophies Literaturesque traditionem 
 perenni memories consecrent : aut in- 
 ducla lingua dominatrice apud Gentem 
 devictam : aut eicisa gente, cui hesc vel 
 ilia lingua est familiaris, interiisse quo- 
 que linguas est observation. Sect. 143. 
 
 t The language could not suffer 
 
 much alteration from the removal of 
 the Greek court and seat of empire, 
 from Constantinople to Nice, and then 
 to Adrianople, that is from one part 
 of the empire to another not far dis- 
 tant : this happened in the thirteenth 
 century, during part of which the 
 French or Latin emperors were in 
 possession of Constantinople, continu- 
 ing there for about sixty years, till the 
 return of the Greek court nnder Mi- 
 chael Palaeologus.
 
 134 ESSAY ON 
 
 nople : then the language, as a living one, sunk with it, 
 but not before. Nor is there any circumstance in the 
 reason of things to make us imagine it should be greatly 
 depraved before that, though somewhat altered. At 
 least, the pronunciation of it seems to have been hardly 
 changed at all among the learned, since the rules of it, 
 as far as it regards tone, given by the latest Greeks, do 
 well agree with those that are given by writers of the 
 earlier ages. " For what we have upon the subject of 
 Greek accents, according to the present system, is con- 
 veyed to us by the Greek scholiasts and grammarians, 
 
 who copy one another ; and all seem plainly 
 
 to derive their doctrine from the grammarians of the 
 schools of Alexandria ; many of whom lived before the 
 times of Antoninus and Commodus ;"* those very gram- 
 marians, to whom Vossius refers us for pure pronuncia- 
 tion. 
 
 But Dr. G. is of opinion that the pronunciation not 
 only of the latter ages, which we have been considering, 
 was corrupt, but even of those which are generally 
 reckoned pure. And he looks for the origin of this 
 corruption in an age very remote, even that of Alexan- 
 der, and opens it with saying,f " it is no improbable 
 conjecture, to suppose, that a corrupt manner of pro- 
 nouncing some words in the Greek language was occa- 
 sioned by Alexander's expedition into Asia. His army 
 might have learned to accent some words according to 
 the manner of the Asiatics." 
 
 But whatever weight of probability this hypothesis may 
 have with Dr. G., to me I must acknowledge it appears 
 one of the most improbable conjectures I ever met with. 
 Alexander is supposed to have carried about 35,000 Gre- 
 cians with him on his Asiatic expedition. Now it is well 
 known, that an army in a foreign country mix very little 
 in converse with the natives of it, and keep up only a 
 more close intercourse among one another. And accord- 
 ingly the Macedonian army probably attended little to 
 
 * Treatise against Accents, p. 158. t Ibid, p, 128.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY 
 
 105 
 
 any thing respecting the Asiatics, but what was of a 
 military nature : and least of all to their language. And 
 even, if they had attended to that, the tone is the last 
 thing of a foreign language that is caught. We find that 
 persons, who are long resident in a strange place, and 
 have there leisure, inclination, and patience, diligently 
 to pursue the study of its language, do seldom attain the 
 right pronunciation of it ; applying frequently the tone 
 of their own language to the foreign one, but very sel- 
 dom the tone of the foreign one to their own. Alexan- 
 der's men therefore, circumstanced as they were, were 
 surely not likely to transfer much of the Asiatic tone 
 into their own Greek. But even suppose they did, out 
 of these 35,000, it is hardly probable that 10,000 ever 
 reached Europe again. And could 10,000 men, scat- 
 tered over Macedonia, and the northern parts of Greece, 
 with a few corrupt tones, influence the pronunciation of 
 Greece in general, especially of the southern parts, 
 where the purity of the language was principally con- 
 cerned? Did we find, upon the return of our army out 
 of Flanders at the end of the last war, that our national 
 tongue received any tincture Of the French, German, or 
 Flemish ? Or are we likely, at the end of this war, to 
 perceive any alteration in the English accent, though we 
 have sent out, during the course of it, three times the 
 number of Alexander's army on different services, to 
 countries more various and remote ? We shall not, I 
 dare engage, be able to mark the least trace of corrup- 
 tion in that respect, imported from the Iroquois, Chero- 
 kees, West or East Indians, or Germans. 
 
 But if the Greek language did " receive a wound" by 
 Alexander's* expedition, it certainly pretty well reco- 
 
 * If the Greek tongue had been tire to posterity, the vast crowds of 
 much affected by Alexander's con- Ihose that would have come to court 
 quests, it must have been in a manner from the furthest parts of the monar- 
 different from that supposed by Dr. G. chy, would have made the same alte- 
 " If he had returned out of Asia, and ration of the language there, as after- 
 placed the seat of his empire in some wards happened at Rome." (Dr.Bevtl. 
 city of Greece, and transmitted it en- Dissert, on Phul. p. 403.) The altera-
 
 13(> essay on 
 
 vered from it soon afterwards. For under his succes- 
 sors, particularly at Alexandria, some of the best Greek 
 writers, whose remains we now have, are known to have 
 flourished. But although their language be pure, Dr. G. 
 thinks the pronunciation of it " must* have been greatly 
 corrupted. And that upon P. JEmilius' conquering 
 Greece, the genuine pronunciation and accentuation of 
 the Greek language must have been farther corrupted." 
 How miserably then must it have been vitiated, when 
 Dionysius of Halicarnassus, wrote a hundred and fifty 
 years after this; whose notice however it escaped, as 
 it has indeed the knowledge of most of his readers 1 
 But if it was so depraved at that time, by a parity of 
 reason, it must have been perfectly barbarous even in 
 the first ages after Christ, before it " received an addi- 
 tional wound by the irruption of the Goths into Greece 
 in the third century ."f How sore that, and some fol- 
 lowing wounds were, I leave to others, with the help of 
 Wolfang, Lazius, to explain ; remarking only this, that 
 after " its last wound, under Heraclius, at the begin- 
 ning of the seventh century,"Jit appears to have lived in 
 a tolerably sound state, at least in Constantinople, for 
 above eight hundred years. 
 
 I cannot leave these lower ages of the Greek em- 
 pire, to which we are now brought, without remarking 
 the injustice of several reflections that have been thrown 
 on the state of their literature. Some persons, who 
 have formed an imperfect notion of the dark ages (as 
 they are called) conclude that no remains of taste, 
 genius, and sound erudition, could possibly be found in 
 a Byzantine court, much less in Thracian and Bithy- 
 nian monasteries. Concerning the learning, however, 
 
 tion in tbe language at Rome, which provement. 
 
 Dr. Bentley here means, was within * Treatise against Accents, p. 129, 
 
 the .space of about a hundred years 130. 
 
 from Duilius to Terence; and which t Treatise against Ace. p. 130. 
 
 therefore was not a corruption, but im- % Ibid. 132.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 137 
 
 and real merit of some even among the Greek monks 
 (which is now become a term of contempt) I am not 
 ashamed to own myself of the same opinion with* 
 Vavassor, who appears to me to have defended their 
 cause with judgment as well as eloquence. But if their 
 literary abilities be still disputed, or despised, let them 
 at least not be deprived of the merit of having preserved 
 with some care and fidelity the most valuable writings of 
 antiquity. For certainly to these monks it is principally 
 
 * Lib. de Epigr. xvi. Equidem facere 
 non possum, quin indigner, siquando in 
 scripta incido, aut sermonibus et querelis 
 intersum eorum, qui in cactus hosce homi- 
 num piorum simul ac doctorum invehan- 
 tur, tanquam in perditores elegantiorum 
 artium et liberalium studiorum : quibus 
 tamen, si verum qucerimus, artes et studio, 
 et optimum quodque literarum, incolumi- 
 tatem, salutem, ac vitam quodammodo 
 debeant, &c. See also Fabric. Bibl. 
 Graec. lib. iii. c. 28. Mr. Home has 
 shewn us, that the general reproach of 
 ignorance, with which the mouks of 
 those ages in our own island have been 
 loaded, hath as little foundation in 
 truth. " The clergy of those times 
 (he says) preserved the precious lite- 
 rature of antiquity from a total extinc- 
 tion. Their writers are full of 
 
 allusions to the Latin classics, espe- 
 cially the poets. There seems also in 
 those middle ages to have remained 
 many ancient books, that are now lost. 
 Malmesbury, who flourished in the 
 reign of Henry I. and King Stephen, 
 quotes Livy's Description of Cae- 
 sar's Passage over the Rubicon. Fitz- 
 Stephen, who lived in the reign of 
 Henry II., alludes to a passage in the 
 larger History of Sallust. In the ool- 
 leclion of letters, which passes under 
 the name of Thomas a Becket, we 
 see how familiar all the ancient history 
 and ancient books were to the more 
 
 ingenious and dignified churchmen of 
 that time." History of England, vol. 
 ii. p. 440. MorhofiF, in his Polyhist. 
 lib. iv. 7, says, that Robert Grosthead 
 (or Capito, as he is otherwise called) 
 Bishop of Lincoln, did in the thirteenth 
 century translate all Suidas into Latin, 
 that is within two centuries after Sui- 
 das himself wrote. Bale mentions 
 this, from Matt. Paris, de Script. Angl. 
 Cent. iv. p. 306, and speaks of an- 
 other unpublished work of the same 
 Bishop, by the name of Animadversiones 
 in Suidam. It would perhaps be pay- 
 ing too great a compliment to the old 
 Bishop to suppose there was in his 
 book the same knowledge and skill in 
 Greek, which we find in one lately pub- 
 lished with a like title : but certainly 
 a man, quite ignorant of the language, 
 would hardly think of translating or 
 commenting on that author. Conrad 
 Heresbach says (I know not, indeed, 
 on what authority) that Charlemagne 
 gave audience to Greek ambassadors, 
 and answered them in their own lan- 
 guage: and that the Emperor Otho II. 
 in his Apulian expedition against the 
 Saracens and Greeks, being surprised 
 and taken by the enemy, escaped out 
 of their hands, imposing on them by 
 his readiness and fluency in the use of 
 Greek. (Orat. apud H. Steph. Th. Gr. 
 torn. i. p. 13.)
 
 138 ESSAY ON 
 
 owing, that we now have any good Greek author extant. 
 It was their piety, not their ignorance, which induced 
 them to bum most of the old Lyric Poems, on account 
 of their impurity. This loss a Christian scholar will 
 hardly object to them. If, however, he does, he should 
 still remember to thank them rather for what they saved, 
 than reproach them for what they destroyed.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 139 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 The popular objection considered against the present accentual marks, on account 
 of their inconsistency with true quantity. Some errors of Dr. G. noted. The 
 true nature of the acute tone stated and explained. 
 
 I HAVE above allowed the use of our marks, accord- 
 ing to the modern system (as it is invidiously called) as 
 not being injurious to quantity. But a heavy charge is 
 brought on this head against them for corrupting it ; the 
 acute causing any short syllable on which it falls, to be 
 pronounced long by those who attend to these apices, 
 and regulate their reading by them. I acknowledge the 
 fact, and am sorry for this misapplication of the mark ; 
 but think it unreasonable that an imputation brought 
 against the abuse of any thing should be fixed on the 
 thing itself, and the proper use of it. This abuse is en- 
 tirely our own, owing to the nature of our common Eng- 
 lish pronunciation. But Dr. G. goes further, and says, 
 that the acute, not only in our practice and application 
 of it, but in its own nature and universal practice gives 
 length to a sound. He here speaks out plainly, and 
 freely declares (what I find to be the real* ground of 
 many persons' objections to accentual marks) that he 
 looks upon the power of an acute tone and long time 
 to be the same; that he has in short confounded in his 
 mind the ideas of these two very distinct things. Which 
 
 * When they complain of accent all their instances singly and distinctly, 
 contradicting quantity, and give an in- would be not only tedious, but altoge- 
 stance of it, it is always in a word, that ther unnecessary : for if the doctrine of 
 has an acute joined with a short sylla- this chapter be true, it is a full and 
 ble. And when they say, that the ac- satisfactory answer to what is con- 
 cent of the ancients was agreeable to tained in two hundred pages of the 
 quantity, they exemplify it in words, writings of those who object to our 
 wherein they suppose the acute was present system, 
 joined with a long time. To answer
 
 140 ESSAY ON 
 
 confusion hath occasioned numberless errors, both in his 
 writings and those of others, on this subject. He asserts 
 then, " that* it cannot be said, that accents only denote 
 an elevation of the voice. For no such elevation can 
 subsist and be made sensible in pronouncing, whatever 
 may be done otherwise in singing, without some stress 
 or pause, which is always able to make a short syllable 
 long." In answer to this, I will allow that such an ele- 
 vation doth not commonly subsist in the English pronun- 
 ciation without a prolongation too. But I affirm, that 
 it hath subsisted ; and doth subsist at present in the 
 voice of the Scots, and of many persons in England. It 
 did most indisputably subsist in the Roman pronuncia- 
 tion, except Dr. G.'s authority is to supersede Quincti- 
 lian's. Let us try this case in some particular word be- 
 tween these two grammarians. We will take the word 
 amas. Quinctilian tells me, in as clear a manner as pos- 
 sible, that the penultima is here acuted : Dr. G. says, 
 that an acute lengthens as well as elevates; consequently, 
 that the former syllable of amas is long. But that it 
 was really short and always pronounced so by the Ro- 
 mans, I have the strongest evidence such a thing is ca- 
 pable of, from the concurrent usage of the best Roman 
 authors who wrote in metre. 
 
 Again ; let us try this in a Greek instance, Atyt, Ae- 
 ytTE, XeyojLteva. We are assured that each of these syl- 
 lables was a short one, pronounced by the old Greeks 
 with a measure of time less than that of long syllables 
 in words joined with these in a sentence. We are as- 
 sured likewise by Cicero, Quinctilian, and Dr. G. that 
 one of the syllables in each of these words is, and must 
 be, elevated. Place this necessary acute on what sylla- 
 ble you please, you must join it with a short one. Con- 
 sequently, an acute accent is as consistent with a short 
 time, as with a long one. That this is not readily con- 
 sistent in our practice, I allow. But what is that to the 
 real existence and nature of the thing itself? An argu- 
 
 * Treatise against Greek Accents, p. 68.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 141 
 
 ment drawn from our own practical inexperience of a 
 thing against its possible existence, is almost too trifling 
 to be refuted. A West Indian's argument against 
 frost and snow, as impossible and unnatural, is of this 
 kind. 
 
 But let us see on what reasoning and authority this 
 extraordinary position of Dr. G. concerning the nature 
 of an acute is grounded. " Every accent (says he*), if 
 it is any thing, must give some stress to the syllable 
 upon which it is placed : and every stress that is laid 
 upon a syllable, must necessarily give somef extent to 
 it. For every elevation of the voice implieth time, and 
 
 * Treatise against Accents, p. 67. 
 
 t In a bad translation of Lascaris' 
 Grammar, tovo; <ptung, is interpreted 
 " extensio vocis" instead of intensity. 
 Whether this hath misled some of his 
 readers in their notion of to'voj, they 
 best know. I find likewise that the 
 scholiast on Hephacstion (p. 77. edit. 
 Pauw) supposes that the acute is capa- 
 ble of lengthening a vowel, otherwise 
 short, and gives an instance of it in this 
 Terse, 
 
 TpaJej X ippi'yus-av, Ittei TSov aU\ov ocjxv. 
 
 Here the 5 of o'4>iv, he says, is long, on 
 account of the acute. An admirable 
 expositor this of a writer on metre! 
 But he is as little consistent with him- 
 self, as with truth: for this very verse 
 he cites afterwards (p. 92.) as an in- 
 stance of the (usi'oufoj, i. e. of an hexa- 
 meter ending with an iambic, and then 
 the first vowel of ctyiv is to be isiiort. 
 It is not my business here to solve the 
 difficulty which appears in the metre 
 of this line. It certainly was under- 
 stood as a miurus by Athenajus (lib. xix. 
 p. 632.) and by Terentianus Maurus, 
 whose authority in a case of this kind 
 is superior to that of most, if not ali, 
 writers. He, speaking of the miurus, 
 
 alludes to this verse of Homer, and 
 translates it so as to give the same in- 
 stance in Latin: 
 
 Versus Homericus Ausonio resonans 
 
 ita vi6do : 
 Quern fAtlougov Achdica gens vocitare 
 
 snlitu est. 
 Attoniti Troes viso serpente pavl- 
 
 tant. 
 
 He describes the miurus thus, 
 
 Dactylici Jinem versus si claudat iam- 
 bus. 
 
 And then exemplifies it, 
 
 Auribus acciderit novitas inopina, 
 
 melius 
 Versus ut hie resonare potest, ita si 
 
 cecineris : 
 Ite domum saturas, venit Hesperus, 
 
 ite satura?, &c. 
 
 It seems that one of the oldest Roman 
 writers, Livias Andronicus, used this 
 kind of metre. 
 
 Livius Me vetus, Graio cognomine, s&ce 
 Inserit Inonis versu puto tale docimen : 
 Prazmisso Heroo subjungit namque 
 
 Hymnum quando chorus festo canit 
 ore Trivtts. Putsch, p. 2425.
 
 142 ESSAY ON 
 
 time is quantity." And these propositions he strengthens 
 by a passage from a Greek MS.* ovre \povog x w P^ tovov 
 evpiaKerat, ovre tovoq x<i>pig \povov. Now, in answer to 
 this, it may be asked, Is every time a long- time, and 
 every quantity a long quantity ? or does yjpovog signify 
 a long time any more than a short one ? if it does not, 
 this far-fetched testimony proves nothing for our au- 
 thor's purpose. And, indeed, \p6vog signifies no parti- 
 cular measure of time, but expresses the general abstract 
 idea of it, and will signify either a long or short measure, 
 according to the qualifying word with which it is joined. 
 Thus much for his application of the latter part of this 
 sentence. Let us examine now the former, ovte \povog 
 ■\uyp\g tovov 8iipt<TK£rat, which he, according to his own 
 sense of xpvvog, must understand thus, " that no long- 
 time is found without an accent." We will allow here 
 his construction; and see what will be the consequence. 
 In the word avOpwirwv, we have three long times, and, 
 according to our author's exposition, they are all three 
 to be accented. And Dionysius, therefore, Cicero, and 
 Quinctilian, are mistaken, when they say, as they do very 
 expressly, " that no one word can have more than one 
 acute." But, not to trouble the reader any further with 
 a criticism on this sentence, the meaning of it is no more 
 than simply this, " that accent and quantity go toge- 
 ther." Which I readily allow, and which in truth is 
 the very thing i have endeavoured fully to explain, and 
 have largely insisted on in the beginning of this essay. 
 
 But Dr. G. has another passage, from Dionysius 
 Thrax, which he thinks declares that " a tone or accent 
 giveth a greater extent or quantity. Tovog irpbg ov «2o- 
 juev, k(u rrjv <f>ijjv})v zvovripav Troiovp-tv."^ If DionysiusJ 
 
 * " Neqne Tempus sine Tono repe- in the same MS. speaks the language of 
 ritur, neque Tonus sine Tempore." all the other good grammarians on this 
 Porphyr. itii\ ireog-xtiiai;. MS. Bib. Reg. subject. "Eo-r« to'voj (says he) i«riVa<n? 
 An", p. 2. « avitrij n [xiaorrit; av\\a.$Zv EiKpcuviav 
 t " Tonus ad queni canimus, et vo- t-^wa-a.' Est tonus intensio, vel remissio, 
 cem latiorem facimus." vel medietas vocis, syllabarum aptam mo- 
 ll This Dionysius, a few lines after, dulationem continent. These words are,
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 143 
 
 had here said <pu>vrjv /laKpoT^pav instead of ivpvripav, it 
 might have been some confirmation of the Dr.'s asser- 
 tion. But till it can be shewn, that tvpvg wide or broad, 
 and ficacpbg long, are the same, the citation proves no- 
 thing in favour of his argument. The truth is, tvpvrriQ 
 relates to a measure of the voice, totally distinct from 
 the height and length of it, though joined with them 
 both, as hath been shewn above in my first chapter, and 
 may be seen explained more fully in Scaliger's book 
 there referred to. This, therefore, by no means dis- 
 proves the consistency of an acute tone with a short 
 time. 
 
 The possibility and real existence of an acute and 
 short quantity together, is remarked in the Welch lan- 
 guage, as may be seen in some annotations relating to 
 the pronunciation of it, in Bishop Gibson's edition of 
 Camden's Britannia, communicated to him by Mr. 
 Lhyyd : they are there prefixed to the account of South 
 Wales ; among which is a mark given, shewing the ac- 
 cent only on a short vowel.* 
 
 When Quinctilianf says, that the words Olympus and 
 Tyrannus, had the middle syllable acuted, because the 
 Roman language did not here admit the accent on the 
 first short syllables, when the long ones immediately 
 
 without any variation, transcribed by saspect and am almost certain that the 
 
 Gaza, in a passage before cited. The negation is omitted in the former part 
 
 whole of this passage of Diony sius, for f the latter sentence, and that it should 
 
 which Dr. G. refers us to the MSS. in De rea ^ « acu t us in correplis non sem- 
 
 the Medicean library, may be seen at per." 
 
 the end of Mr. Wetstein's dissertation. f Lib. i. c. 5. in that part of the 
 * There is a passage in Diomedes on chapter, where he is considering the 
 this head, which is, I believe, cor- Roman language as derived from the 
 rupted. Not that I desire to alter it, Greek, or otherwise connected with it. 
 in order to bring it to my purpose, for See Lipsius on this passage, de pro- 
 it equally favours that, whether it is nunt. ling. Lat. c. 20. Servius on Mn. 
 altered or stands as it does at present. i. v. 104. says that Simois is acuted 
 " Sunt vero tres, acutus, gravis, etqui on the middle syllable, because it is a 
 ex dnobus factus est, circumflexus. Greek word : and the same on Periphas, 
 Ex his acutus in correptis semper, in- jEn. ii. v. 476. 
 terdum productis syllabis versatur." I
 
 144 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 followed ; does not this imply, that the Greeks did place 
 their accent on the first short syllable, as we now see it 
 in 6\vfnroQ, rvpavvog! 
 
 I am certain, from the testimony of Terentianus 
 Maurus, that the word SwKpm-jjv was accented by the 
 Greeks in the same manner in which it appears at pre- 
 sent in our common Greek copies. For how otherwise 
 can be explained the difference which he mentions be- 
 tween the times in the thesis of A'ppulos and Swjcparrjv, 
 but on the supposition that the second syllable of the 
 latter was acuted ? 
 
 Rdmulos si nominemus, appulos aut Ddricos: 
 Sesquiplo metimur istum, quinque nam sunt tempora: 
 *Nunc duo ante, tria sequuntur ; nunc tribus reddes duo, 
 Italum si quando mutat Grains accentus sonum: 
 'Appulos nam quando dico, tunc in apau sunt duo, 
 2d>Kparfjv Grains loquendo reddet in QLou duo.\ 
 
 Part of Terentianus' plan, in his Metrical Essay on 
 Metre, was, according to his own words, 
 
 quo probarem planius, 
 
 Et simul quam multa Gratis nostra non respondeant, 
 Quaque respondent, ab ipsis nobis esse tradita. 
 
 In regard to the acute, even when it is joined with a 
 long syllable, as in contemnit, though the duration of 
 the sound be long, the power and effect of the acute is 
 short and$ quick to the sense. When a high note sue- 
 
 * Appulos and 2aix.pa.Triv do both form 
 a Cretic foot consisting of five times : 
 these five are divided into two and 
 three, between the metrical arsis and 
 thesis, according as the word is ac- 
 cented. In Cretico nunc sublatio Ion- 
 gam et brevem occupat, positio longam : 
 vel contra positio longam et brevem, 
 Sublatio unam longam : pront syllaba 
 se obtvlerit, id fiet. Mar. Victorin. p. 
 2483. Putsch. 
 
 t Apud Putschium, p. 2414. 
 
 X The word o£u?, throughout the 
 Greek language, implies quickness, as 
 acutus does likewise through the Latin. 
 
 'o£u ittti B«f£i (says Suidas) Kara, [j.na- 
 
 <f>opav liii rnj aKoua-THMS o*u yap Xs- 
 
 yerai, iiii -n?; a^f, to TAXE'HS inpyouv. 
 oiov to fjiaxa^iov 'OE'Y, ot( TAXE'jlZ 
 XEVrer ay,@\v $£, to 0gu$ia>s hleyovv, Hal 
 oiov oh x-tvrovv, aXX' SoQovV, an; to vittpov 
 outw; oEv x,a\ iiil rZv •^ifyaiv, OE TN
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 145 
 
 ceeds a low one, or rises above the grave tone of voice, 
 the perception of it is sudden and instantaneous, before 
 
 "Kiyoptv tov TAXE'ii2 <BHXfa.ywy.iivi \<w\ 
 Tnt aio-Qna-w, xai ra-^itaq a<Eroira,v6fjt,Evov. 
 
 @aphv 51, rlv avaKoyov t» ay.BXi~ 
 
 aio-itip al TlTa/xivai fjuLWov vivpal, otov h 
 
 NlaTH, t£v lit IXttTTOV TETa^EVOJV, OiOP 
 
 t5j TvraTtif, roiif fydoyyougo^vTipov; am- 
 SiSovo-iv h yae, nam tSv aXhwv ptaXhov h 
 Tea KpovarQai Sta rr,v ratrtv rayiaof ttXat- 
 TWG-a. tov aiga, o^urarov mil? toy <p$6yyov 
 xai h 'OAl'rfti /c*iv XPO'Nfli iiroiwt rtZ- 
 to* Itti woXu Ss i<pu\a%e. Acutum et 
 grave dicta sunt per translationem ad 
 
 auditwn ducta In tactu dicitur 
 
 acutum id, quod celeriter agit : ut gla- 
 diolus acuLus, quia cit-o pungit. Hebes 
 vero, qufid tarde agit, ut turn pungens, 
 
 sed trudens, sicut pistillum sic etiam 
 
 in sonis, acutum vocamus eum qui cele- 
 riter ad sensum pervenit, et celeriter de- 
 unit : gravem vera analogia similem 
 hebeti Ut chorda, magis tense, qua- 
 ils nete, sonos acutiores eduut quam ille, 
 que minus sunt tense, quails est hypate. 
 Nete enim.cum puhatur, celerius quam 
 alia; propter intensionempercutiensaerem, 
 acutissimumfacit sonum : et quidem brevi 
 tempore hoc jack, sed plurimum vim 
 suam tenet. V. o|u. Nothing can be 
 more clear and satisfactory than this 
 account, given here by Suidas, of %l$ 
 applied to sound. But we shall find 
 that in its general signification the idea 
 of quickness is conveyed. Eust; thins 
 on ofrvapn (Iliad. (3'. v. 440.) explains 
 it o^bq o toiouto; agrx;, ov f/.hov Sta. to ra- 
 Xp QavaTouv, £ti Si Hcti Sia. to Qvy.tx6v. So 
 on o^i/v apna (II. x'. v. 835.) o^l; ainc i) 
 
 o Ta-^yq, n o rp.rmx.iq- ix. [xira^oeaq tZv 
 o£saiv Bi\Zv. r) 6 IttSouj-jcuJu;- o£si;,tS yap 
 t\iy<svrai si Qu/xixziTZpot [dupux.- what we 
 call passionate, hasty men] On X*/?*, 
 (II. I. v. 180.) c'*vXjJ?5 pvy-a, Ta^txq 
 
 anoiot). On l£u$ af«?, (II. <rr. v. 350.) o 
 rayjji; iroXifxot; xal evpoo^oj. Most of 
 these explanations of Euslathius are 
 transcribed by Phavorinns into his 
 Lexicon. Plato uses o£Lc itpoq a'o-%1- 
 criv to express a person of quick sensi- 
 bility. Diphilus, as cited by Athenaeus 
 (lib. ii. p. 47.) 
 
 rigTfopai yvfMciut; cgZv 
 Toy; 'OSYriEl'NOYS, xai wgo rZv xat- 
 
 pZv a. il 
 TlaVT tlSivai SITE'rAONTAZ. 
 
 " In discendi desiderio morse impa- 
 tienles." Aristotle in his 2. Rhetor, ob- 
 serving that the desires and passions of 
 children are quick and violent, but not 
 lasting, says, not o-tyoSpa y.h liriQufjioZcri, 
 tayry Si iravovrar al yag iir^ofxiai tZv 
 TOtovraiv Ta^iTai. o£i~ai yap al |3ouXi5s-eij 
 xa) ou //.lyaXai, SiTTtip al tSv Ka/Movraiv 
 Si'^ai xai TTiCvai. Et vehementer quidem 
 appetunt, cito vera cesiant ; appetitiones 
 enim talium sunt celeres. Acute, i. e. 
 rapidce. sunt lubidines neque magna: ac 
 diaturne, sicut laborantium sitis tt esu- 
 ries. So in his Physiogn. c. 3. among 
 the 'AvaiSovs a-rtfji.ua., he reckons Iv raTj 
 Kima-i<riv o£u'; : which Du-Val translates 
 " in motibus acutus." i. e. agilis, citus. 
 Thus a man is said to be o|uj, who is 
 ready and nimble. Thucyd. lib. viii. 
 Siatyogoi yap ttAsiVtov "vtej tcv nrpoirov, oi 
 fxh i^t"q, oi SI @e.aSc~<;. Plutarch in Ca- 
 millus uses o|e"; IwiTEXlo-ai ; and in Ro- 
 mulus on one Celer, aw kxilmu Tolf t«- 
 p^Eif oi Vocfj.a~oi Hal o^e7j, XEXspa? ovofj.a- 
 t,wa-{. Cicero likewise joins these two 
 things together, when he says, "motus 
 animi celeres et acuti." Acutus is con- 
 tinually applied to quickness of sight, 
 of understanding, and motion: " tam
 
 146 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 the continuance of the note is determined one way or 
 the other, for long or short. This I more clearly con- 
 
 cevnis acutum." "est eniin homo valde 
 acutus et sagax." Cic. Statius describ- 
 ing an active champion, says, 
 
 " motu Spartanus acuta 
 " Mille cavet lapsas circum sua tem- 
 po ra mortes." 
 
 'O^jWE^ijUVOf in the Birp. of Arisloph. 
 903. denotes quick invention. Plato, 
 at the beginning of his Theatetus, axx' 
 site o££~f, aio-irip outoj, xai ayyiwot Hal 
 fA.riy.oi/Bs, i; Ta7ToXXa, Hal-tsr^q ra? opyaj 
 
 0*tJT£C7rol E(V;, Hal aTTOVTE? <J>£pOVTal, 01T- 
 
 TTEf ra avt^fxaTis-ra. TrXoTa. o"te ol if*,- 
 @pi8ia-T£goi, vai6goi Ttaiq, Sec. Sed acuti, 
 sicut hie, et sagaces ac meinores, ut piu- 
 rimum affectihus etiam celeres smit, et 
 instabiles feruntur, tanquam saburrcc 
 expertia navigia. Gruviores vero tardi 
 aliquo inodo, &<x And, agreeably to 
 this, o^utd? is explained by Suidas ra- 
 P£ut>;; T?,- Siavoiaj. Critical cases in 
 physic are called o£ia waSn ; by the 
 Romans " vitia prsecipitia.'" And thus, 
 in Sophocles, Philoctetes complains of 
 the anguish which he feels from his 
 wound, 
 
 'OEEI A <f>oiTa Hal Ta%ti' afff'pp^ETai. 
 
 o|u used adverbially, signifies quickly, 
 as in Homer, "n.q i^ar, 'OHT* 5' aHovtrev 
 'Oi'Xr?oj Tap£u? Ala?. And ofi is therefore 
 explained by Hesychius, TayiooQ, ra- 
 j^L/Spo'jUai; ; by Phavorinus Ta^Ectj, o\f>o- 
 Sp«s; o£uj by Suidas, tayyq. This 
 sense of o£L? and o*ut»? runs through 
 the third chap, of Jul. Pollux Onomast. 
 lib. i. "STEpi tayknx; xa» (JpaSiajj eij ?gya. 
 So Thomas Magister.in the word o£iif 
 to o£u etti ( <*ev (jt.axa.ipat; Hal o^&oXjUaiv 
 XEyo'/^Evov, IvavTt'ov l^« to ay.Q\u' lirl Se 
 fMvic, to (3«pu. to' Se o*ew; i^vuSn, xai 
 
 O^EOJf a<JHJCT0, IvaVTlOV £p£E! TO )3^ttJEttJf. 
 
 Thus the Great Etymologist : o%hv av- 
 Spmirov, tov Tttp^Eovj S'y^toUjU.Evov. I find 
 that all these expositions of 'OS'TZ are 
 copied from Aristotle -arEpi 4 U X^ S » c> ^" 
 almost in his words, which therefore 
 shall not be repeated here. Johan. 
 Stobaeus in his Eclogcc Physics, cap. 44. 
 ex Plat. TimocO, on the subject of speech 
 and hearing, has these particular words 
 to our present purpose. oXXa; ph ovv 
 <f>0/V>!V SaJjUEV rr,v oV oitiDV bit aEpo? iynt- 
 <pa\ou te Hal a"(j.arcs /oce^( ^X^'S 'EtXij- 
 yiiv SiaStSo/xEvw, TEXEUTaJo-av Se ijrEgf tkv 
 tou rnraros E^pav anofiv oVu Je out!?; Ta- 
 p^Eia o£t7av, oVu Se (JpaSimpa JspaSWEjav, 
 (f. legend. (SaguTEpav) tw Se ofxa^h 
 X£~av, T»iv Ss ivavTiav Tpap^Eiav, ^EyaXw 
 Se w ttoXXw, o<rn Se ivavrta o-fxtxgav. 
 Punamus etiam Vocem per aures ab acre 
 cerebrum ac sanguinem usque ad anhnam 
 ferientem, ac Jinem habentem circa je- 
 coris sedem auditum : Ictum vero illius 
 celerem esse acutum, tardiorem vero sra- 
 viorem, aquabilem autem lavem, contra- 
 riumque asperum, validum vero mag- 
 num, contrariumque parvum. " De 
 cursu et carsoribus haec dicuntur (says 
 Camerarius iu Commentar. p. 469.) 
 oiHvl, ^acacev, xoD<poc, o£ij, !Xa<f>fOf, iro- 
 3»xi)f, Tap^uf." And in the Glossary of 
 Philoxenus, o^imt; cito, raptim. o£t/j o 
 tayui;, Pernix, velox, &c. o|uTaT6f ocis- 
 simus. Peter Victorius, in his Fariie 
 Led. lib. vii. c. 3. where he is consi- 
 dering Quinctilian's figure, (xs-raKn-^ii; 
 transumptio, says, " tropus rarissiinus, 
 etiam improprii usus : Gra?cis tamen 
 frequentior, qui rio-ovq 0oaj o^Eia? dicunt. 
 Homerus autem insulas Soaj, cum 
 acuta; forma; significare vellet, vocavit 
 hoc versu ex xv. libro Odysseae, 
 
 "Evflsv V cm vhroifo imiteo'wxct So?«v.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 147 
 
 ceive,, than I can perhaps express. I can however en- 
 gage to make it perceptible to a common English ear in 
 any Greek word, according to its present accentual 
 mark. 
 
 The account, which I have here attempted to give, of 
 the true nature and power of the acute tone, is confirmed 
 by what Aristotle, de Anima, in his chapter mpX -^ofyov 
 Kcti. a.Kor\Q, says, to filv '0£i» klvu rijv alaOrjmv Iv oXiyw yjpovty 
 iiri irokv' to Si Rapv, Iv ttoWcJj iir oXiyov.* Acutus SOnus 
 movet sensum in brevi tempore plurimum: gravis vero, 
 in multo paulum. Again, in another place : tov Iv (jxvvy 
 
 Oc,iog ovrog Kara to 6Xiyov to Si Ol,v Si oXiyoTrjTa, 
 
 Tayv.f Cum acutus in voce existat breviter — — Acutus, 
 propter brevitatem vel levitatem, velox. It may perhaps 
 receive further illustration from a passage of Plutarch, 
 in his Qucestiones Flatonicce, where he is treating of 
 sounds in general. That author, having mentioned the 
 harmony of sounds, says : 6£uc p-lv yap 6 ray^c yivsTai, 
 ftapiig Si 6 ppaSvg' Sib kcu Trportpov kivovgi Tijv aiadrjcnv ol 
 6£eig' orav Si tovtolq r/£») papcuvopivotg nai cnroX^yofiivoiQ ol 
 ftpaStlq l7rifia\b)(nv ap-^Ofuvoi, to upaOlv avTwv Si bfiotoira- 
 uetav riSovrjv r»J anorj jraplor^ev, rjv <rvfj.(f>ti)viav KaXovcnv.^ 
 
 Hanc autem rationem secntus illeno- (3apuj a lower tone, without any consi- 
 
 mina immutavit, alterumqae pro altero deration of length, through the musical 
 
 capit, quod boh et o£u sunt imv»yu^f*. writers. 
 
 l£v autem Grrecis non tantum ostendit, * Cap. vii. p. 641. tom.i. edit. Val. 
 
 quod velox est in niotu, verum etiam t Probl. sect. xix. p. 767. torn. ii. 
 
 quod forma iu tenuitatem acutumque So iu p. 765, he joins the two, to SI 
 
 porrectum est: quare, quod est liuic "rap^u x.a.1 o|u. 
 
 0-wsmjfjt.ov, tanquam et ipsuin idem pe- X Acutus enim celer Jit, gravis vero 
 
 nitus significant, loco alterius posuit." tardus : quare et prius movent sensum 
 
 Strabo in viii. lib. ywypa<povy.wcov acuti soni. Cum vero his evanescentibus 
 
 " ejusdem Homerici verbi eandera af- succedant graves incipientes, milium 
 
 fertdeclaratiouem.positonamque versu quiddam ex his per nature convenien- 
 
 ilio, addidit, 6oaf S' t'pwev -rac o£sMtj.'' tiam vnluptatem auditui prcehet, quam 
 
 As it is certain that o£us, with its deri- sumphoniam vocant. Tom. ii. p. 1006. 
 
 vatives and compounds, implies some- Xjl. So Lipsius, when he distin- 
 
 thiog quick, in its general application guishes betweeu the circumflex and 
 
 throughout the Greek language, so in acute: " iste [acutus] celeri quadam 
 
 its peculiar musical sense, it is univer- sublatione vocis efterendus est, sine 
 
 sallv used for a high lone, opposed to institione ulla aut mora, ille [flexus] 
 
 1,2
 
 148 ESSAY ON 
 
 The explanation which * Macrobius gives of the acute 
 sound, is like the preceding. Diximus nunquam sonum 
 fieri, nisi a'ere percusso. Ut autem sonus ipse aut acutior 
 aut gravior proferatur, ictus efficit: qui dum ingens et celer 
 incidit,acutum sonum prcestat ; si tardior leniorve, gravi- 
 orem. Indicio est virga ; quce, dum auras per cutit, si im- 
 pulsu citoferiat, sonum acuit: si lentior, grayius ferit au- 
 ditum. In fidibus quoque idem videmus: quce si tractu 
 arctiore tenduntur, acute sonant ; si laxiore, gravius. 
 
 On the whole, from every thing that I have been able 
 to collect, from writers, both ancient and modern, of the 
 best note, in regard either to the general sense of the 
 word 6%vg, and acutus, or to the particular meaning of 
 them applied to sound ; I find, first, that the idea of quick- 
 ness is conveyed in them ; and secondly, when referred to 
 sound, that extent in length is never implied, but in 
 height only, and a quickness in the manner and effect of 
 this elevation. Cicero has, in one sentence, expressed 
 both these qualities of height and quickness as belong- 
 ing to the acute. " Quam ob causam summus ille caeli 
 stelliferi cursus, cujus conversio est concitatior, acutoet 
 excitato movetur sono."f 
 
 magis tractim et cum vocis longiore * In somn. Scip. lib. ii. c. 4. This 
 ductu : sic at syllaba, cui incumbit, was likewise Salmasius's idea of it, 
 geminanda sit, eadem elata pariter et who, in his Pliniance exercitationes, 
 depressa." de pron. ling. hat. c. 20. speaks of it thus : "o£ei* vox aures et 
 Bishop Hare has conceived and ex- auditnm quasi sciudendo penetrat: ita 
 pressed this very clearly. " Hinc usu »£&« c °l° r ocnlos visumque fulgore suo 
 venit, ut syllaba acuta* proxima pro <l uas ' pnnctira ferit. Communicant in- 
 correpta habeatur, breviorque acuta vi- ter se sensus proprietates suas, et quod 
 deatur, etiam cum ipsa quoque brevis unius proprium est, vocibus translatis 
 est." de Metr. Comic, pag. Iviii. The alii tribuitur. similiter in voce, quas 
 force of this is strongly seen in what he proprium est ala-Srirlv auditus, aculos 
 gives afterwards as an instance of it. et graves sonos Qa.^ xai oJeTj appella- 
 " Quae acuuntur in tertia ab extrema, nius, ducta metaphora ab iis rebus, 
 interdum acutam corripiunt, si posi- qua? circa tactum versanlur. nam o£b 
 tione sola longa sunt, ut Uptime, servi- ct acutum proprie est quod tactum 
 tus, ptrvelim, Pdmphilus, et pauca alia, pungit et stimulat : grave quod con- 
 quo Cretici mutantur in Anapaestos. tundit et premit : ita el de voce acuta 
 Idem factum est in niutiquam, licet in- et gravi." Tom. i. p. 200. 
 sipiat ii diphlhongo." pag. lxii. t Somn. Scipion. §. 5.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 149 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 The hypothesis of Isaac Vossius, Henninius, Sarpedonius, and others, erroneous. 
 The Greek accent difl'erent in its position from the Roman. Dr. Bentlej's 
 and Scaliger's remarks on the Latin accent. Difference between the accen- 
 tual and metrical arsis. 
 
 BUT not only Dr. G. but Isaac Vossius conceived a 
 •wrong idea of the acute, being misled into an opinion, 
 that it partook of the nature of a long quantity, at least 
 was not well consistent with a short one. This is plainly 
 seen in that passage of his book de Poematum cantu* 
 where he complains, that the received method of accen- 
 tuation corrupts the harmony, and gives an instance of 
 it in some verses of Homer, 
 
 'HeXtoc 8' avopovcre, Xnriov TrepitcaWia \ifivr\v, 
 Ovpavbv Ig itoXv^oXkov, Iv aQavaroiai tyavtii] 
 Kat SvriToicri fipOTolaiv iirl ZdSwpov apovpav. 
 
 " The accent placed in the foregoing manner, as we 
 now have it in our printed books," says he, " spoils the 
 verse : the ancients themselves used the accent far other- 
 wise, and placed it thus, 
 
 'HeXjoc S' avopov(T£, \nru)v 7T£piKaX\ta \ifivr\v, 
 Ovpavov eg ttoXv^oXkov, iv adavarotm <j>aveiri 
 Kai %vr)T(H<n fipoTvicriv eirl £aSwpov apovpav." 
 
 The reader, on comparing the former method of ac- 
 centing these verses here censured by him, with the lat- 
 ter, adopted and recommended by him as the genuine 
 method of the ancients, will find, that the difference be- 
 
 * Pag. 142. apnd Hennin.
 
 150 ESSAY ON 
 
 tween them consists in the transposition of the acute 
 from short to long syllables, as from 
 
 'HAioc c .... to ... . 'HeAtoc 8', 
 
 avopovae . . » avopovae 
 
 7repiicaX\(a TTipiKaXXta 
 
 ovpavbv ovpavov 
 
 Tro\v\a\Kov iro\v\d\KOv 
 
 %d$iopov apovpav Z,u^Copov apovpav. 
 
 His objection was evidently to the acute, as incon- 
 sistent with short syllables, and he has accordingly re- 
 moved it from them and placed it on the long. 
 
 The reader will likewise observe, if he turns back to 
 the fourth chapter of this Essay, that Vossius, in altering 
 the accents of all the foregoing words, except rieXibg, 
 hath regulated his method of replacing them exactly ac- 
 cording to the laws of Roman accents, (though I believe 
 he was not sensible of it at that time) those very laws 
 which I have in the foregoing chapter transcribed from 
 Quinctilian. Which circumstance alone, notwithstand- 
 ing* the confidence of Vossius that his manner of re- 
 adjusting them is agreeable to the pronunciation of the 
 ancients, is to me a strong proof, that he is wrong : be- 
 cause Quinctilian expressly mentions a particular dif- 
 
 * Hesays,thatany one will beconvinc- juevwv Xs*s<uv in Aldiis's Thesaurus, and 
 
 ed of this, who looks over the writings as quoted by later grammarians, (see 
 
 and fragments of the old grammarians, Eustatli. Iliad. M. p. 867, on apiz-iyn 
 
 Dionysius Thrax, Apollonius Alexand. and k^rtctyi). and Valcken. Aniinadv. ad 
 
 yElius Dionys. Arislarchus junior, &c. Ammon. lib. i. c. 8.) furnishes us with 
 
 Now some of these writings are, as is several remarks, that tend to confirm 
 
 allowed by Dr. G., totally lost, and the truth of our present system. No 
 
 some that remain contain nothing on one that is acquainted with the con- 
 
 the present subject. But of those that tents of Aldus's Thesaurus, which Dr. 
 
 do remain, both the syntax and frag- G. mentions in thecase of Ml. Dionys., 
 
 ments of Apollonius, will supply us could ever surely dispute the anthenti- 
 
 •wilh ample proofs of the falsehood of city of the Greek accents. A defence of 
 
 Vossius' s doctrine : his assertions are them might be drawn from that collec- 
 
 as little favoured by what remains of tion alone, to part of which we are re- 
 
 jElius Dionysius ; who, in his tracts ferred by Vossius for the refutation of 
 
 WEf * axXlTtvi gt>fAci.Taiy, and neel lyx>uvo- them.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 151 
 
 ference which there was between the Roman and G reek 
 practice in accenting their syllables ; and complains of 
 the Latin manner as less harmonious and diversified than 
 the Greek. " Sed accentus quoque cum rigore quodam, 
 turn similitudine ipsa minus suaves habemus, quia ultima 
 syllaba nee acuta unquam excitatur, nee in flexa. cir- 
 cumducitur, sed in gravem vel duas graves cadit semper. 
 Itaque tauto est sermo Graecus Latino jucundior, ut 
 nostri Poeta;, quoties dulce carmen esse voluerunt, illo- 
 rum id nominibus exornent."* 
 
 Quinctilian, by closing his sentence here with semper, 
 as he does another on the same occasion with nunquam, 
 an adverb, (which the best Roman writers never place 
 at the end of a period, but on particular occasions, where 
 some great stress is laid on the sense of the word;) by this, 
 I say, he seems to point out the very extraordinary in- 
 flexibility of the Roman accent ; and this he remarks as 
 opposite to the nature of the Greek tones: for it is in 
 that part of his book where he draws a parallel between 
 the two languages in point of harmony, and shews the 
 inferiority of his own in several particulars. Here in the 
 accents, " ultima syllaba nee acuta unquam excitatur, 
 nee in flexa circumducitur," as in Dens, Dei, Deo : this 
 being opposed by him to the Greek use of tones, gives 
 me reason to think, that by them the last syllables were 
 sometimes acuted and circumflexed, as in Qtog, Quo; as 
 
 * Lib. ii. c. 11). Since the Roman Latina est: wide penultima hubebit ac- 
 
 poets, by introducing into tbeir verses centum. In numero vero plurali, quia 
 
 Greek words with their proper accent, tropaea dicimus, sicut Greed, nee aliquid 
 
 intended to give some peculiar grace hide mutilamus [f. mutamus] erit 
 
 and sweetness to their lines; Aldus, Grtecus accentus sicut apud Grcccos, 
 
 therefore, did very properly in publish- scilicet tertia syllaba a fine." This 
 
 ing Statius with a collection of all the agrees with what Victorinus, in his 
 
 Greek words, used by that poet, ac- Grammat., says, " Gr<eca nomina, si iis- 
 
 cented. And accordingly remarks of dem Uteris proferuntur, Gracos accentus 
 
 the following kind, in Servius on Vir- habebunt. ,> And M\. Donatus, "Sane 
 
 gil, are not to be considered by us as Greca verba Greeds accentibus melius 
 
 mere critical refinements of that fa- efferimus." The editors, therefore, of 
 
 rnous commentator ; who, on the 542d Latin poets should pay some regard 
 
 verse of the 10th jEneid, observes to this circumstance in their authors, 
 upon the word tropkcciim, " Declinatin
 
 152 ESSAY ON 
 
 we see them marked by our present virgula. Then he 
 says, " seel in gravem, vel duas graves cadit semper ;" 
 as in tiger, agri, Animus, dnimi : this being opposed by 
 him to the manner of the Greeks, gives room to suppose, 
 that their accent was otherwise varied, either in different 
 words, or different inflexions of the same word, as in 
 aypbg aypov, ayaObg ayaOov, StvTepog devripov. This 
 variety, so different from the Roman method, we see 
 in the application of our accentual marks; and this 
 application of them perfectly corresponds with what 
 Quinctilian's account of the Latin tones necessarily 
 implies. 
 
 The particular limitation of the Roman accent to the 
 penultima and antepenultima, and its difference in this 
 respect from the Greek, is taken notice of not only by 
 Quinctilian, but by the other old Roman grammarians 
 and critics after him. Diomedes, in his second book, 
 says, " In Graecis dictionibus cum acutus tria loca te- 
 neat, ultimum, penultimum, et antepenultimum. — apud 
 Latinos duo tantum loca tenet, penultimum et antepenul- 
 timum." Priscian says, " Acutus acccntus apud Latinos 
 duo loca habet, penultimum et antepenultimum ; apud 
 Graecos autem et ultimum." Donatus in like manner : 
 ** Tonus acutus, cum in Graecis dictionibus tria loca te- 
 neat, ultimum, penultimum, et antepenultimum; tenet 
 apud Latinos penultimum et antepenultimum ; ultimum 
 nunquam." So Maximus Victorinus, "Acutus, cum 
 apud Graecos tria loca teneat, apud nos duobus tantum 
 poni potest; aut in penultima, ut prcelegistis, aut in ea 
 quae a line est tertia, ut pralegimus" And in another 
 place: " Graeca nomina, si iisdem literis proferuntur 
 [Latine versa] Graecos accentus habebunt : nam cum di- 
 cimus, Thy as, Nais, acutum habebit posterior accentum ; 
 et cum Themisto, Calypso, Theano, ultimam circum- 
 flecti videbimus. Quod utrumque Latinus sermo non 
 patitur, nisi admodum raro." Sergius likewise on the 
 editio prima of Donatus, " Acutus accentus in Latinis 
 non tenebit, nisi penultimum et antepenultimum." And 
 after these Scaliger: " Latini suis libris omnes testati
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 153 
 
 sunt, nullam apud nos supremam syllabam acui."* 
 There is a particular remark of Olympiodorus on this 
 subject. Tore fitv FpaiKOi E/cXjjS'iio-av, vvv St "E\\r}veg. 
 tovto Se to ovofxa ol piv 'Pwpaioi irapolivvovcri, TpaiKOt XI- 
 yovTtg. 17 Se KOivrj SidXtKTog o^vvu. KaS'oXou St ol Viopaloi 
 ttclv ovofxa napo^vvovat Sia tov kojxttov' oS"£v vTnpr\vopiovTtq 
 iK\r)9i)(rav virb rC)v iroiriTwv.'t There seems to be some- 
 thing whimsical in the reason assigned here by Olympi- 
 odorus for the Romans drawing the accent back from 
 the last, that they did it Sia rbv ko/jttov, to give a more 
 stately and solemn air to their pronunciation. " Caste- 
 rum," as Dr. Bentley well observes on this passage of 
 Olympiodorus, " quod hie fastui tribuit, id dialecto 
 JEoliccB, unde lingua Latina partem maximam profluxit, 
 rectius imputatur. iEolenses enim, ut notum est, Bajov- 
 
 • Cans. ling. hat. c. 58. see also c. 
 146. To the same purpose also Ser- 
 vius. " Notandum Bucolica vel Geor- 
 gica, cum apud Gra?cos in fine habeant 
 accenlura [Bot/xoXixa, reapyixa] apud 
 nos in tertia a fine habere : nam tit in 
 ultima sit, Latinitas vetat: ut inpenul- 
 tiina non sit, brevitatis efficit ratio." in 
 Procem. ad Virg. Bucolica. So like- 
 wise on JEn. vi. v. 670. " Ergo est 
 sola particula, qua; habet in fine cir- 
 cumflexum. per accentus mutationem 
 in adverbium transit." 
 
 t In Aristot. Meteora. p. 27. Tunc 
 quidem rjaixoi vocati erant, nunc vero 
 "EXAdvej. Hanc autem diclionem Ro- 
 inani in penultima acuunt, l'^a.lx.01 di- 
 centes: sermo vero communis Grcecorum 
 ultimam ejus acuit. In universum ?o- 
 mani omnis vocis accenium rctrahiuit 
 propter fostum : unde Imgrmoptarrti; sn- 
 perbi ac magnijici vocati sunt a Poetis. 
 If there really is more dignity in a ba- 
 rytone pronunciation, than in another, 
 the KOfj.nro<;, however, of the Romans, 
 which Olympiodorus here remarks, 
 could not be the cause, but the effect 
 and consequence of such a pronun- 
 
 ciation : the pronunciation itself was 
 owing to an accidental derivation from 
 some particular colonies of Grecians, 
 who insensibly established it among 
 the old Latins, at a time when there 
 was nothing in their civil state and cir- 
 cumstances to elevate their spirit, and 
 give them that air of grandeur, which 
 foreigners afterwards thought they dis- 
 covered in every thing belonging to 
 the Romans, even in the tone of their 
 language. This we find observed by 
 Gregory Thaumaturg. in laudatione 
 Origen. who, speaking of Justinian's 
 Latin Collection of Laws, says, they 
 were drawn up and published if "Pa>- 
 fxainy tycdim, xa-ra'arX jixtix? y.h xal 'A AA- 
 ZO'NI, Jtai fi-y^n^aTt^OjUEVi) airaiv in 
 i^ova-ia. t>) ZatriKutn, " in the language 
 of the Romans, which is awful and so- 
 lemn, and of a nature conformable to 
 the majesty of their empire." Seneca 
 characterizes the two languages, and 
 distinguishes them thus : Latina lin- 
 gua POTENTIA, Greece GRATIA. 
 Consol. ad Polyb. c. 21. On potentia 
 here Lipsias says, Bene, nam hac im- 
 perabat.
 
 154 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 tovoi erant; et Gc'oc, avyp pronunciabant, cum alii £reoc> 
 
 avrip. * 
 
 * As the Roman language is so in- 
 flexibly barytone, one observation 
 readily offers itself on a comparative 
 view of that with our own, which is, 
 that the English, having a due and 
 equal mixture of barytone and oxvtone 
 words, does, in this respect, appear to 
 bave a great advantage and superiority 
 over the Roman. What debases the 
 English language is the want of diver- 
 sified terminations in verbs and nouns : 
 which is not only a great defect itself, 
 but, since it is unavoidably supplied 
 by articles and auxiliary verbs, leaves 
 room by that means for the admission 
 of other things equally destructive of 
 the beauty of language. But no lan- 
 guage admits of greater variety, as far 
 as mere tone is concerned, than our own. 
 Every Roman dissyllable, and every 
 Greek verb in a, has the accent on the 
 penultimate: the English verbs have it 
 in general on the last, the nouns and 
 adverbs on the penultimate, or ante- 
 penultimate : by which means our 
 tones are as much diversified in their 
 position as the Greek, and more than 
 the Roman. We place the acute some- 
 times on the praeantepenultimale, as 
 in necessary, favourably, &C And so 
 do the Italians, as in stquitano, deside- 
 KtriQ : and even on the fifth and sixth 
 syllable from the end, as portdndose- 
 nela, desideranovici. Caninius mentions 
 two words that have it on the eighth 
 syllable stminanovicisene, edijicanovi- 
 cisene. The Hebrews, on the other 
 band, do not admit the accent even on 
 the antepenaltiina, according to Joh. 
 Simon. [Introd. Gram. Crit. in ling. 
 Grasc. sect. ii. p. 28.] There does, in- 
 deed, seem to be matter of just objec- 
 tion, when more than two graves in one 
 word follow an acute, especially when 
 
 they are joined with short times: for 
 then the latter sounds are not only low, 
 but rapid, and must be consequently 
 indistinct. We see, however, that 
 many negative rules, in a thing so ar- 
 bitrary and variable as language, are 
 very often found to be contradicted by 
 practice. That rule of Cicero, wherein 
 he says that nature limits the aente to 
 the three last syllables of every word, 
 is here evidently superseded. And 
 therefore the word Natura, which he 
 nses in that passage, must not be un- 
 derstood in an wiiversal, but partial 
 sense, as relating only to the particular 
 nature of the Greek and Roman lan- 
 guages : which, when he was writing 
 that sentence, were nearest to his 
 thoughts. That a wider compass al- 
 lowed to the acute is not unnatural, is 
 certain, because it is found in the na- 
 tural and easy practice of so many 
 millions. Neither can Scaliger see any 
 reason against it. " The Creeks," says 
 he, " did not choose to remove the ac- 
 cent farther from the end : quos etiaui 
 Latini prisci secuti easdem posteris, 
 imitalione potius quam consilio ducti, 
 leges prrescripsere. Nam quamobrem 
 non liceat mihi tollere vocem in quarta 
 a fine, nulla inusica ratio possit per- 
 suadere : possunt enim eodem lenore 
 tarn in voce, quam in tibiaaut in fidibus, 
 deduci multa; vel breves, vel longre." It 
 may be so, as he says, and we are sure 
 it is. But the Greek and Latin method 
 is certainly better : though the mo- 
 dern deviation from it is commended 
 by Scaliger, as the rejection of an un- 
 reasonable yoke. " Sapienter a pos- 
 teris factum est, qui nullum hn- 
 
 jus putidi servitii jugum ferre volu- 
 erint." Caus. ling. c. 58. 
 
 1 mentioned above the great defect,
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 155 
 
 Dr. Bentley, in his tract de metris Terentianis, from 
 whence the foregoing remark on Olympiodorus is taken, 
 gives the following verses of Virgil thus accented : 
 
 'Arma virumque cdno, Trojte qui primus ab oris 
 Itdliam fdto profugus, * Lavinaque venit 
 Litora ; miiltum ille et terris jactdtus et alto 
 Vi superum, saevce memorem Junonis ob iram. 
 
 " He that reads these verses properly and tunefully," 
 says he, " will pronounce them according to these ac- 
 centual marks; not as schoolboys scanning them, and 
 placing the accent at the beginning of each foot, as, 
 
 ' Italidm fato profugus, La — 
 
 but according to the rhythm of the whole verse, in 
 which not one word has the accent on the last syllable, 
 except viriim; and that properly on account of the sub- 
 sequent enclitic que."f 
 
 under which the English language la- 
 bours, in not having a variety of ter- 
 minations to nouns, inslead of arti- 
 cles : and to verbs, instead of auxi- 
 liaries. The great importance of this 
 variety to a language perhaps no where 
 more clearly appears, than in the fol- 
 lowing five lines of the Odyssey, t'. 
 204, &c. 
 
 T«; S* <£g' axovoixrnt; pit $dx.gva, rrtKBTO 5e 
 
 'fit; SI %iiv Ha.'ra.TmiT Iv ditpoizr<MOi«"iv 
 
 opeasrtf, 
 "Hv t Eupoj xariri^EV, t'mhv %k^vpoq na- 
 
 t actual' 
 Twojj.ivn<; X' apa. tSi? 7ioTa.fji.ol izrAiiSwo- 1 
 
 pSOVTES - 
 
 "fit; Tn; Tnv.no xaXa 'Sjapnia, $axpv^eovo"rn;. 
 
 In these five lines some part of the 
 word twu occurs five times, and yet 
 
 by the advantage of its various termi- 
 nations the repetition is not disagree- 
 able. A word thus repeated in English 
 would be extremely offensive. Mr. 
 Pope has accordingly avoided it in 
 translating this passage : the word 
 melted he uses but once. Perrault has 
 literally translated the same passage, 
 and designedly repeated his liquefio 
 four times, lo make it appear ridicu- 
 lous; and thereby exposed his own 
 ignorance in not discerning the great 
 difference between the inflexions of 
 the Greek language and his own. 
 
 * Lavinaque should be otherwise ac- 
 cented, thus, Lavinaque, on account of 
 the enclitic joined with it. 
 
 t The Latin enclitic taken notice of 
 by Dr. Bentley, is explained by Dio- 
 uiedes,lib. ii. " Complexiva conjunctio 
 sive copulatio que, et disjunetiva ve, 
 et dubitaliva ne, adjuncts ijpsas amit-
 
 156 ESSAY ON 
 
 Exactly in the same manner, in which Dr. Bentley re- 
 gulates the accentual pronunciation of "Arma virumque 
 cano," does Scaliger likewise declare it was practised 
 by the ancients. In his fourth book of Poetics he has 
 marked the elevation and depression of the ancient tones 
 in that line, and, in order to do it more clearly, hath set 
 them to musical notes. He says, indeed, that if the nice 
 tonical pronunciation of the ancients could be expressed 
 by a modern, it would be disagreeable to our ears. It 
 might have been so to his. But that is beside our pre- 
 sent question. Our inquiry here is only concerning the 
 fact, what the ancient pronunciation was. Scaliger, 
 how r ever, certainly complains in that chapter of persons 
 in his time confounding accent and quantity together. 
 His words being applicable to the common mistake of 
 our own age, induce me to transcribe them. " Quod a 
 nullo accepimus praeceptore, voluimus hie explicari, ne 
 alios quoque vel lateret vel falleret, sicuti din nos quo- 
 que fefellit. Casterum, cum tenorem a quantitate non 
 distinguant, atque barbare pasne omnia pronuncient 
 (omnia enim producunt Itali, omnia corripiunt ita Vas- 
 cones, lit devorare videantur) quibus temporibus, quoque 
 tenore antiqui pronunciarent, pictum dedimus: 
 
 d 
 
 n 
 
 -b-zt&B-v& tj 
 
 ^O □ P^K ^TT] 
 
 J 
 
 Arma vi-rumque cano Trojae qui primus ab oris." 
 
 Thus Scaliger has marked the tenores of this line> and 
 in the manner of it entirely agrees with Dr. Bentley. 
 
 tuut fastigium, et verbi antecedents culas adjunguntur, aecentns tribuilnr, 
 
 longius positum acumen addncunt et nt mustique, illene, hujusce i" the final 
 
 juxta se proxime collocant : sic ut, li- ce here being like the Greek yi. Thus 
 
 mindque laurKsqne Dei : item ve, ut nam is often an enclitic, as in quinam : 
 
 Hyrcanisve Arabisve parant, et cala- and cum, in mtrum, is called so by 
 
 thisve Minervae. ne, nt hommtsne fe- Scaliger. ling. Lat. c. 146- Me, Te, Se, 
 
 ragne." Servius likewise upon Virgil and Rem, are reckoned sncli by Dr. 
 
 JUn. i. " Pronunciations causa, contra Bentley. See also Bp. Hare de mctr. 
 
 usum Latinuin, nltiinis, quibus parti- Comic, p. j8.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 157 
 
 The reader may, perhaps, on recollecting Quinctilian's 
 rules of accenting, be at first surprised to find that both 
 these learned men have assigned a grave to qui and ab, 
 which, according to the general rule, ought to have had 
 a high acute tone given them. But this is a particular 
 case, and happens to be remarked by Quinctilian, who 
 considers qui so closely joined to primus, and ab to oris, 
 as to form, as it were, but one word.* 
 
 As Vossius was led into his mistake by supposing 
 that the accentual marks originally referred to quantity, 
 and were, as he says, " a grammaticis suis usibus ac- 
 commodates, ad declaranda tempore, et syllabarum quan- 
 titatem"f (for which he has no authority from antiquity) ; 
 so Henninius likewise, supposing that they related to 
 metre, declares,;); " accentus Groecanicos esse receptos 
 primum pro re metrica in scholis privatis, deinde post 
 etiam publice, pro facilitate discendi Hellenismi." He, 
 as well as Vossius, judging of the true nature of these 
 marks from the barbarous and perverted application of 
 them among their countrymen, is betrayed into many 
 inconsiderate assertions against them. With the same 
 inaccurate haste, of which Vossius was guilty, and with 
 more confidence (as if he had been a contemporary and 
 countryman of Plato and Xenophon, and was risen 
 from the dead to teach the world the pure pronunciation 
 of his fellow-citizens), he assures us,|| " that the pro- 
 nunciation of old Greece, as rational or regular, was re- 
 ducible to four rules of his own laying down, which four 
 rules are of an immutable nature and eternal truth among 
 
 * "Cum dico, circiun liiora, tan- exaltata intelligetur acuta vel prodwAn, 
 quam unuin enuncio, dissimulata dis- caetertc gravatae." P. 50. Acuta and 
 tinctione : ilaque tanquam in una voce, prod acta with him are synonymous, 
 una est acula : quod idem accidit in illo, || Sect. 163. p. 129. This is his 
 Trope qui primus ab oris." Lib. i. c. 5. grand conclusive proposition, which is 
 t Pag. 140. printed in large characters at the end 
 X Sect. 162. pag. 128. That he con- of his work, as containing the sum of 
 founds tone and time, is plain from the his doctrine, which he has been labour- 
 following words. " Si una syllaba vo- ing to prove through a long series of 
 cis prae caeteris exaltetur, ceteris syl- learned sections, by arguments which 
 labis aequali tono modulatis, ilia syllaba he himself calls Hevculeun.
 
 158 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 all nations that have a rational pronunciation." I have 
 so many objections to these propositions of his, that I 
 hardly know which to advance first. An answer to this 
 " natural and rational" pronunciation hath been already 
 given in the second chapter. It may be sufficient here 
 farther to observe, that he proposes, what Vossius did, 
 an accommodation of the Greek pronunciation to the 
 Latin accents : his * rules for its regulation being the 
 
 * His four general canons of rational 
 and ancient pronunciation are these, 
 (p. 88, 89, 90.) 
 
 I. Omnis vox monosyllabu modulatio- 
 
 nem habet in sua vocali : ut <}>£?, 
 mons, §c. 
 
 II. Omnis vox dissyllaha modulatio- 
 
 nem habet in sylluba priori : ut 
 o'Jof (quamvis ita notetur accentu 
 iJilJ montes, c\c. 
 
 III. Omnis vox polysyllaba penulti- 
 mam lungam modulatur ; ut av- 
 Qfiiroi;, TwrSjiiai, jucunda, <5)'c. 
 
 IV. Omnis vox polysyllaba, penultim a 
 brevi, modulatur antepenulti- 
 mam : ut dominus, aXoyav. 
 
 He is not satisfied with introducing 
 these rules by the name of regular in- 
 fallibiles, but closes the recital of them 
 with the following words : Et lite qui- 
 dem Qiiatuor regulcr sunt tarn opud 
 Latinos, quum Gracos, sine ulla excep- 
 tione aXernaz veritutis. In these four 
 rules we have a synopsis of his whole 
 book, all the arguments of which are at 
 once refuted by that single passage of 
 Quiuctilian, cited above. To answer 
 them all singly, would not be difficult, 
 but after this quite unnecessary. 
 
 I cannot, however, leave Henninius 
 without taking particular notice of one 
 argument, which he urges in the most 
 specious manner : it is this . (sect. 119. 
 p. 91.) " Since the verses of both lan- 
 guages are formed on the same rules of 
 
 metre, therefore the modulation of both 
 must be the same, and consequently 
 the accent." The metre no doubt is 
 the same, the Romans having borrowed 
 all theirs from the Greeks : but the 
 modulation is not always the same, 
 where the metre is. For does not Quinc- 
 tilian say above, " that the modulation 
 of the Latin verse was improved by 
 introducing words with the Greek ac- 
 cent." Here then the metre continued 
 the same, while the modulation was 
 altered by the difference of tone. An 
 instance will best explain this. The 
 following line of Virgil, having a Greek 
 word in it, will serve for this purpose: 
 Castorea, Eliadum pdlmas Epiros equa- 
 rum. 
 So we commonly read it : but Servius 
 here observes, " Sane Epiros Graece 
 profertur : unde etiain e habet accen- 
 tual. Nam si Latinum esset, Epirus, 
 Epiri, pi haberet, quia longa est." Ac- 
 cording to this remark of Servius, com- 
 pared with the foregoing observation 
 of Quiuctilian, the true and better mo- 
 dulation of that verse, as it is sounded 
 to the ear of the Author himself and 
 his Roman readers, was without the 
 least change in the metre, as follows ; 
 
 Castorea, Eliadum pdlmas' Epiros equd- 
 rum. 
 
 This, which we have on the best au- 
 thority of the Romans themselves, en- 
 tirely subverts the plausible reasoning
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 159 
 
 very same which Quinctilian gives for the Roman lan- 
 guage. But Quinctilian tells me that the Roman accent 
 differed # from the Greek, and in harmony was much 
 inferior to it. What am I then to determine between 
 these two contradictory authorities ? Am I to believe 
 Henninius, in opposition to Quinctilian? No: I will 
 adhere to the latter, though Henninius were patronized 
 by ail the critics, grammarians, and universities, in 
 Christendom. 
 
 When the Ynca Garcillasso de la Vega was carried 
 into Spain, and there made one of the lords of the bed- 
 chamber to his catholic majesty, he had immediateo c- 
 casion to observe the difference between the Peruvian 
 language and the Spanish, which he naturally was in- 
 duced to learn for his convenience at that time, and, 
 as it appeared afterwards, for his farther use in writing. 
 His own remarks on the difference he has given us at 
 the beginning of his history ; and one of the first that 
 seems to have occurred to him is, " that the Peruvian 
 words never have any accent on the last syllable, but 
 almost always on the penultima, and very seldom on the 
 antepenultima: though there are some persons who main- 
 tain that the accent ought to be on the last."+ These 
 
 of Henninius, drawn from the similarity remarks worth ournotice. " On ne doit 
 
 of Greek and Roman metre. The kinds done pas trouver mauvais, que je tache 
 
 of verse were the same in both htn- de coustrver ma lungue naturelle dans 
 
 guages : but the degrees of sweetness toute sa purete, et que f ecrive les mots 
 
 in the two were different, according to lndiens de le meme maniere, que les gens 
 
 the difference of accent. du Pays les prononce. — Je ne park pas 
 
 * And thus Servius on Virg. Eel. x. de plusieurs autres choses, qu' on pour- 
 
 1. 18. Georg. I. 59. and in many other roit observer sur cette langue, qui differre 
 
 places, beaucoup de I' Espagnole, de I' Italienne, 
 
 t I have taken this from Badouin's et de la Latine. Les Motifs et les Orioles, 
 
 translation : " Les mots n out jamais qui ont tant soit peut de curiositt, y doi- 
 
 d' accent sur la derniere syllabe, mais vent bien prendre garde; mais je leur 
 
 presque toujours stir la penultieme, et rends un ban service, de leur montrer 
 
 fort rarement sur V antepenultierne : (pour ainsi dire ) avec le doigt.de la cour 
 
 qiwiqu' il y ait plusieurs persons, qui d' Espagne, ou je me trouve, quels sont 
 
 sontiennent mal-a-propos, que I' accent les principes de leur Langue, ajin qu' ils 
 
 doit etre sur la dernierey He has other la conserrent duns sa purete. Quel dom-
 
 160 ESSAY ON 
 
 persons were, I suppose, some Spanish missionaries, 
 and others concerned in American affairs, who thought 
 every language ought to fall under the rules of those 
 which they happened to know. They might as well 
 have said, that the climate ought to be the same in Peru 
 with that of their own country. But reason in both 
 cases is out of the question ; the only inquiry is about 
 a fact. 
 
 Concerning the Greek accents, Sarpedonius has fol- 
 lowed the steps of Vossius and Henninius, and * left 
 the question, which he did not understand, rather more 
 puzzled than he found it. Mr. Dawes hath just touched 
 on this subject in his Miscellanea Critica, but seems not to 
 have employed much thought upon it, and to have fallen 
 therefore into the popular error of accents being incon- 
 sistent with quantity : though he does not expressly say, 
 the accents themselves are so, but the common use that is 
 made of them. I wish so able a man had thought this 
 subject more worthy of his notice. The trifling decla- 
 mation of a late editor of Callimachus, is too insignifi- 
 cant to be taken notice of. He proposes his question 
 thus, " Whether the pronunciation of the Greek is better 
 conducted by accent or quantity ?" Which is a question 
 
 mage ne seroit-ce pas de souffrir, qu' une word ay% oixo; was circumflexed on the 
 
 langue si belle, et si utile a ceux, qui la middle syllable, or acuted on the first, 
 
 savent, se corrompit, et s' alterat pe.u a- I will not here dispute with hiin. But 
 
 peu?" The dogmatical position of the certain I am, that all ivords of the same 
 
 absurd Spaniard, which the Peruvian form had not a circumflex on the pe- 
 
 laughs at, is exactly in the style of nullima.because Apollonius assures me, 
 
 Henninius, who applies the words Ana- p. 305. that truvoMo;, wa'jxjixo;, /uirotKo;, 
 
 logia, Ratio, debet, in the same manner with some other compounded words 
 
 throughout his dissertation ; and of having a long pennltima, yet had the 
 
 Dr. G. who continually uses ought, and accent on the antepenultima. 
 
 should thus, particularly in p. 145. * He states the question thus : " An 
 
 " I rather think and am persuaded that script! fuerint accentus ab antiquis ? 
 
 aypoMoq and ayoeaiot;, and all words of 2, deinde, si scripti non fuere, an inter 
 
 the same form, had originally, as they loquenduin saltern fuerint observati ? 
 
 ought to have, a circumflex on the pe- 3, denique, si inter loquendum obser- 
 
 nullimate." Now, whether that single vati fuere, idne in prosa tanluni, an si-
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 161 
 
 of a like kind with the following, " Whether in walking 
 or running a man had better use his right, or his left 
 leg singly ?" 
 
 mul in versibus accident?" Dissert. correspondent Job. Geor. Grsevius, 
 
 pars tert. cap. 1. Verwey, in his nova part of whose letter on this subject is 
 
 via (Praef. p. 22. seq.) does nothing published in the preface of Verwey 
 
 more than copy the errors of Vossius. cited above. 
 This is true likewise of his friend and
 
 162 ESSAY ON 
 
 POSTSCRIPT TO CHAP. VIII. 
 
 On the different "Ajs-i; of Accent and of Metre. 
 
 THE ictus accentuum, of which Dr. Bentley hath given 
 us the marks in his Terence (and which have some- 
 times been confounded with the general accent of the 
 language), are purely metrical, falling on a particular 
 syllable of a foot, or dipodia, and marking the several 
 divisions of the verse, according to the manner of scan- 
 ning it. Dr. Bentley places them in iambics on the 
 latter syllable of the former foot in each dipodia; in 
 trochaics, on the first syllable of the dipodia. But they 
 do by no means always fall on accented syllables. Ac- 
 cording to Dr. Bentley, they fall in the following iambics 
 thus : 
 
 Ducunt volentemfata nolentem trahunt. 
 Anus cum ludit, morti delicids facit. 
 AovXov ytveadai Trdpatypovovvrog gIgttotov. 
 'Hko> vcicpojv KtvOfiwva Kai gkotov TtvXag. 
 
 In the following trochaics thus : 
 
 'Irritare est calamitatem, cum tefelicem vocas. 
 
 Eta $tj, %i$6g irpoKWirov irag rig Eurp£7ri^£Tw. 
 
 But the marks of accent will fall on the preceding lines 
 thus : 
 
 Ducunt volentemfata, nolentem trahunt. 
 'Anus cum ludit, morti delicias fdcit. 
 AovXov yzviodai irapcuppovovvTog §£<jtt6tov. 
 
 "HkW VSKpWV KEvOfltJVa KOI (TKOTOV irvXag. 
 
 Irritdre est calamitatem, cum tefelicem vocas. 
 Ela S?7, Ztyog irpoicwirov irag rig tvTptinZ,iTU). 
 
 To these ictus metrici (which by Dr. Bentley and Mr. 
 Dawes are called ictus accentuum, improperly, as I think,
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 163 
 
 for two reasons) are most commonly to be referred the 
 words arsis and thesis in writers on metre. Arsis, as 
 hath been briefly observed before, does in this sense re- 
 late to the raising' of the hand or foot in marking the di- 
 vision of time. Pes dictus est (says Mar. Victorinus) 
 sive quia pars mensurce et modus quidam similiter Pes vo- 
 catur,sive quia in percussione metrica pedis pulsus ponitur 
 tolliturque, p. 2486. See also Diomed. p. 471. The ar- 
 sis and thesis of metre are undoubtedly distinct from 
 those of accent: and accordingly the rules of these two 
 kinds are very different. In that of metre the rule is, 
 that the times of one in respect to the other should be 
 either 
 
 1. The same, as in a spondee £ j !idactylj[ | o i, 
 anapasst i i J _£ : or 
 
 2. In the proportion of two to one, as in iambic 
 « j 1- trochee £\ 6 : or 
 
 3. In the proportion of three to two, as in a cretic 
 *P \ i £^ or thus_f o | ^_ In simplicibus pedibus arsis 
 ac thesis aut simplici, aut duplici, aut sesquipli ratione 
 
 texatur neque enim syllabarum numero, sed ratione 
 
 Temporum arsis thesisque pensatur. Victor, p. 24S8. 
 And so Terentianus, with his elegant precision, speak- 
 ing of the arsis and thesis, says, 
 
 Temporum momenta sane lege cert a dividunt, 
 Seu duas pes quisquejunget, sive plures syllabas. 
 Aut enim quantum est in apaai, tantum erit tempus Oiaei : 
 Altera aut simplo vicissim temporis duplum dabit : 
 Sescuplo vel una vincet alterius singulum. (p. 2412.) 
 
 The amphibrachys not being reducible to these rules, is 
 said by Victorinus to be on that account minus aptus 
 pesinmetris: and by Terentianus is considered in the 
 same manner ; 
 
 Septimum pedem loqueinur, quern vocant duQifipaxw, 
 Quum duce breves utrinque, media longa ponitur: 
 
 m 2
 
 164 ESSAY ON 
 
 Quale si veils amaenus, aut amicus dicere. 
 "Apmg hinc sumat necesse est tria priora tempora, 
 Et Biaei relinquat unum : vel licet vertas retro, 
 "Ap<TiQ uno sublevetur, deprimant Bicriv tria, 
 Par pari figura non est, pugnat unum cum tribus; 
 Nee modum dupli rependit, nee tenetur sesquiplo — 
 (p. 2414). 
 
 But now between the arsis and thesis of accent this 
 proportion of times is by no means observed. The 
 times in the thesis of the Greeks and Romans seem 
 never to have exceeded three (except in two or three 
 very particular words, as ToioSeaai) but then these three 
 often followed only one time in the arsis, as in legtres, 
 Xiyovai. 
 
 I have supposed that in the metrical arsis there was 
 an elevation of the foot or hand, but probably not of the 
 voice. Dr. Bentley, however, speaking of this arsis, 
 seems to think the voice was in some degree elevated 
 too : and there are passages, I own, in the old gram- 
 marians, that appear to favour this opinion. But if the 
 voice was elevated, it was not to such a degree as to 
 supersede the common syllabic accent. For if it did, 
 the accent of their verse and prose was different (which 
 it is difficult to suppose), the arsis in verse coming often 
 on a syllable that had the thesis in prose, and so vice 
 versa. Itdliam fdto profugus is here acuted according 
 to Quinctilian's direction : but according to the metrical 
 arsis thus 'Italidm fatb profugus La. — Dr. Bentley says 
 (as we have seen above), that this latter way of accent- 
 ing these words is vicious ; and I believe him, because 
 Quinctilian would say the same. But in every thing, 
 which he says on this head, I cannot so readily follow 
 him. 
 
 He says the Roman comic writers took care to have 
 the metrical apmg light as often as possible on the ac- 
 cented syllable, and consequently, as their language was 
 barytone, not on ultimates. But cast your eye on any 
 page of his Terence, and you will find his mark of apmg
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 165 
 
 not only on prae-antepenultimates, but on ultimates too 
 in every three or four lines ; as in the following, 
 
 Quis igitiir relictus est objurgandi locus ? 
 Quam ut bbsequatur gnato. quapropter ? rogas ? 
 
 I know he limits his remark, by saying this was not 
 so much observed by writers in the first and third dipo- 
 dice, but was strictly so in the second ; i. e. it was ob- 
 served in two feet out of six. But even in the second 
 dipodia his metrical apmg is found on an ultimate, as in 
 
 Persudsit nox, amor, vinum, adolescentia. 
 
 But indeed there is no occasion that the "Apmg of 
 metre and accent should coincide. In many cases it is 
 better they should not. Certainly in Latin measure, 
 where they meet together in the former part of the verse, 
 the rhythm of the whole suffers by it, as in 
 
 Tali I concidit impiger \ ictus \ vulnere J Casar 
 Satur- | ndlibus \ hue fu- \ gisti \ sobrius j ergo. 
 
 Separate now the two apaeig, and let that of accent be 
 in the metrical Oiaig, and the rhythm here will be good, 
 
 Hoc ic- | tus ceci- | dit vio- \ lento vulnere Ccesar 
 Satur- | ndlis 6- \ pus fu- j gisti sobrius ergo. 
 
 After all, I know not why Dr. Bentley assigns the 
 metrical apmg to the latter syllable of an iambic foot. 
 Antiquity says otherwise, and speaks of the former syl- 
 lables of feet in general as in the apmg. " Pes est sub- 
 latio ac positio duarum aut trium ampliusve syllabarum 
 spatio comprehensa. Pes est poeticae dictionis duarum 
 ampliusve syllabarum cum certa temporum observatione 
 modus recipiens apmv et &W, id est, qui incipit a sub- 
 latione, et finitur positione." Diomed. lib.iii. p. 471. 
 Again, Mar. Victorinus, treating of the metrical apmg
 
 1C6 ESSAY ON 
 
 and Bimg, says : " In iambo unius temporis arsis 
 
 ad *disemon thesin comparatur." p. 2484. It is clear 
 from hence, that this "Apmg belongs to the former sylla- 
 bles of feet. It is as compatible with the first short sylla- 
 ble of an iambic, as with the first long of a trochee. The 
 long quantity, I believe, here misled Dr. Bentley. I am 
 sure it did Mr. Dawes after him : for he, writing on the 
 same subject, says plainly ; " In ipsis iambo et trochaeo, 
 cum ilium syllabse brevi longa, hunc longae brevis sub- 
 jecta constitueret ; postulabat rei musicae necessitas, 
 ut acutum longce secies determinaret." p. 188. Which 
 assertion of his is evidently contradicted by the an- 
 cients themselves, and favoured by no reason in the na- 
 ture of sound, to the necessity of which he appeals. 
 
 If it be said, that although Dr. Bentley gives this 
 apaig to the latter syllable of a single foot, yet it is in the 
 former part of the dipodia ; there yet seems an error of 
 his still behind. He considers this apmg as marked by 
 the foot of the musical performer, or director striking 
 the ground ; and therefore supposes the words, ictus, 
 percussio, "Apmg, and elevatio, to be synonymous, (p. 1, 2. 
 Metr. Terent.J Whereas it appears quite otherwise in 
 Victorinus. It is shewn above from him that "Apmg 
 was the raising of the musician's foot, " sublatio pedis 
 sine sono :" and Qimg the dropping of it and striking 
 the ground, "positio pedis cum sono." The words ictus, 
 therefore, or percussioncs, which Dr. Bentley joins with 
 the "Apmg, do seem properly applicable to the Qtmg only, 
 in closing the feet. 
 
 When I said above that the coincidence of the accen- 
 tual and metrical "Apcng was so far from being requisite, 
 as to be sometimes even prejudicial in Latin measure, I 
 
 * Disemos, a metrical term, signifies whence tbe terms disemns,trisemos, &c. 
 
 the same as duo tempara habeas. "Tern- that sometimes the letter B was set as 
 
 porum incrementa a duobus ad duode- the mark of one time, and M the mark 
 
 cim procedant, id est, a disemo a i duo- of two. The word wpos-a)$/ai used there 
 
 decasemum." Mar. Victar. p. 2485. by him relates merely to time, not 
 
 He says there were <ryy.£~a, musical even to the elevation of the metrical 
 
 marks of time set over syllables ; from arsis.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 167 
 
 meant most kinds of metre, as the epic, elegiac, and 
 common lyric ; not all: for the anapaestic admits it, and 
 indeed seems not affected any way by accent: metre 
 only being sufficient to that kind of verse ; so broken 
 is its cadence, and so detached are its feet* 
 
 * In the anapaestic verse or system 
 {for every system of it on account of its 
 luvatytia, as Dr. Bentley bath shewn, 
 is to be considered as one verse) the 
 number of feet is uncertain : tbey may 
 be long continued ; they may be O oon 
 cut short by adding the catalectic Paroe- 
 miac syllable. In every other verse, 
 
 the whole of which is limited and known 
 to the ear, there is a certain general 
 rhythm, which is the result of that re- 
 gulated and circumscribed whole: but 
 (as Aristotle says,Rhet.iii.8.)"A*p'PT©- 
 MO'N lava 'AnE'PANTON : Rhythmo ez- 
 pers est indejinitum.
 
 168 ESSAY ON 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Objections to the irregularity of the present Greek accents considered,' and an- 
 swered. An argument drawn from it in their favour. The doctrine of encli- 
 tics and atonies vindicated. The position of the present marks conformable 
 to the ancient accounts of the tones themselves. The variation of accent in 
 some words at different times considered. Accent dependent often on the 
 quantity of subsequent syllables. The consistency of the acute with a short 
 time demonstrated. The general doctrine of human sounds, from the old 
 Greek writers on music. The three general cases of exception to our present 
 marks considered. 
 
 THE foregoing passage cited from that very intelli- 
 gent and accurate writer Quinctilian, concerning the 
 rigor et similitudo, the rigid inflexibility and uniformity 
 of the Roman accent compared with the Greek, will 
 supply me with a full and satisfactory answer to some 
 other objections brought against the present Greek sys- 
 tem. Dr. G. draws several arguments against our ac- 
 cents, " from their irregular use and application, so re- 
 pugnant evidently not only to quantity, but to analogy 
 and reason, and on the whole quite arbitrary." This 
 kind of reasoning runs through* a great part of his 
 Treatise, wherein he considers the canons of Greek 
 accentuation, and their strange contrariety to his notions 
 of analogy. Thus he complains of " the accent inf 
 oblique cases varying often, and without reason, from 
 that of the nominative, both as to nature and place ;" and 
 of the same kind of unaccountable " variations in the 
 several;}; inflexions of verbs." To these and the like 
 objections it may be answered, first, in general, that, in 
 
 * From p. 8 to 66: and in several have not gone to the bottom of this 
 
 other parts of his book. These are subject. This I am certain of, that the 
 
 those new arguments produced by him method, which I have pursued, is 
 
 on the subject, which he means in his quite different from any which I have 
 
 preface, when he says there : " If I yet seen." P. 3. 
 
 am not greatly mistaken, they [Hen- t Pag. 20. 38, 39. 13, 44. 
 
 ninius, and Mirtisbui Sarpedoniusj {Pag. 40. seq.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 169 
 
 regard to speech, a thing depending originally in some 
 measure on* chance, it is rather matter of wonder there 
 
 * " Profecto tandem eo confugien- 
 duin fuerit, quo sese recepit Aristote- 
 lis divinam Judicium adversus Plato- 
 nem : loquentis arbitratu facta plera- 
 que : multa etiam tenure orta." Scalig. 
 Poet. lib. ii. c. 3. The part of Plato, 
 to which Scaliger here I believe chiefly 
 alludes, is the Cratylus, particularly 
 the latter part of it. There are un- 
 doubtedly many admirable things in that 
 piece concerning language, but there is 
 throughout a great mixture of whim, 
 and, on the whole, much more conceit 
 than truth. That rational grammarian 
 Quinctilian speaks, as Scaliger does, 
 of language : who, in his first book, 
 says : '• Non, cum primum fingerentur 
 homines, Analogia demissa coelo for- 
 mam loqnendi dedit, sed inventa est 
 postquam loquebantur, et notatum in 
 sermone, quid quo modo caderet : ita- 
 que non ratione nititur, sed exeniplo : 
 nee lex est Ioquendi, sed observatio ; 
 ut ipsam Analogiam nulla res alia fece- 
 rit, quam Consuetudo." 
 
 These general principles of language, 
 and its true authority, have been al- 
 ready briefly considered in the second 
 chapter of this Essay. I cannot for- 
 bear adding to it, what Diomedes, from 
 Varro, has, with great good sense, ob- 
 served on the same subject. 
 
 " Latinitas est incorrupta Ioquendi 
 observatio secundum Romanam lin- 
 guam. Constat autem (ut asserit Var- 
 ro) his quatuor ; Natura, Analogia, 
 Consuetudine, Aucloritate. 
 
 " Natura verborum nominumque im- 
 mutabilis est, nee quicqnam aut minus 
 aut plus tradidit nobis, quam quod ac- 
 cepit. 
 
 " Analogiasermoms, a natura proditi, 
 est ordinatio secundum revviKovf. 
 
 " Consuetudo non ratione analogies, 
 sed viribus par est : ideo solum re- 
 cepta, quod multoruin consensione con- 
 valuit ; ita tamen, ut i 111 artis ratio non 
 accedat, sed indulgeat. Nam ea e me- 
 dio Ioquendi usu placita assumere con- 
 suevit. 
 
 " Auctoritas in regula Ioquendi 110- 
 
 vissima est. tautum opini- 
 
 oue secundum veterum lectionem re- 
 cepla, nee ipsorum tamen, si interro- 
 gentur, cur id secuti sint, sciendum." 
 See also Varro de ling. Lat. lib. vii. 
 viii. ix. This is most strictly and phi- 
 losophically true, not only of the Ro- 
 man, but of every language. " It is 
 so, because it is so," is, after all, in 
 many grammatical points, the best and 
 only reason to be had : certainly, very 
 often the only one necessary. 'o§6o'tht<% 
 t£v ovofAartuv eTvo.1 tw 2TN©h'khn : rec- 
 tam rationem verborum CONSENSI- 
 ONE sive Consuetudine contineri, we 
 may say in the words of Plato, though 
 it is not what he maintains. Cratyl. 
 sub. fin. 
 
 An analogy or rationale never thought 
 of, much less acknowledged, by the best 
 ancient writers themselves, and formed 
 since their time on the partial observa- 
 tion of some of their readers, is, by a 
 preposterous kind of reasoning, some- 
 times applied as a test to examine 
 the propriety of parts in those writings, 
 which are independent of such restrain- 
 ing principles. To try by these every 
 thing respecting an ancient laoguage, 
 is tiying an old Athenian or Roman by 
 laws enacted in a following age and 
 country. That there are certain gene- 
 ral principles, which probably operated 
 in the formation and direction of every 
 language, must be admitted : and it is
 
 170 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 are not more irregularities, as they are called, than that 
 there are some. But we may frequently observe, that 
 grammarians often argue against obliquities in speech, 
 as if the practice of that was formed on grammar, and 
 not, which is most undoubtedly the case, grammar on 
 practice. Which consideration, had it been always 
 duly attended to, would have saved them much unne- 
 cessary and fruitless trouble in their laborious refine- 
 ments to reconcile these* irregularities to their own 
 general rules. But, what in the present case is parti- 
 cularly unfortunate for the Doctor's reasoning, this de- 
 viation in the Greek accents, from a few general rules, 
 which he objects to, is the very thing which Quinctilian, 
 in the passage above cited, seems to admire : wherein 
 he complains of the Roman method of accenting, which 
 was more simple and uniform than that of the Greeks, 
 and reducible to fewer rules, as giving a deadness and 
 flatness to the Latin pronunciation. The Greek method 
 was therefore certainly more varied, i. e. more irregular, 
 as Dr. G. calls it. And this account of the Greek tones, 
 deduced from Quinctilian, perfectly agrees with what 
 
 pleasing to follow Mr. Harris through 
 his philosophical speculations, tracing 
 language back to its original conslilu- 
 tion, and there view it in his excellent 
 analysis. When, on such a review, 
 wc find the subsequent use of language 
 agreeable to antecedent reasons, we 
 cannot but be pleased to find practice 
 so well founded. But still, it is prac- 
 tice which confirms the antecedent prin- 
 ciples, and not so much those princi- 
 ples which determine practice. This 
 subject deserves to be considered dis- 
 tinctly by itself, and will be more fully 
 examined in another place. 
 
 * " Cum in vestitu, tedificiis, sic in 
 supellectile, cibo, caetereis omnibus, 
 qua? usu ad vitam sunt adsumpla, do- 
 tninetur IN^EQlJALITAS ; in icrnwnc 
 
 quoque qui est usus causa constitutus, 
 ea non repudianda." Varro. ling. Lat. 
 lib. vii. p. 90. Again, presently after : 
 » Verborum D1SSIMILITUDINEM, 
 qiiEe sit in Consuettidine, non esse Titan- 
 dam.'' Analogy has but little weight 
 with him, if it contradicts practice. 
 " Si apertam [oralionem] elKciat Con- 
 suetudo, brevem temperantia loquentis ; 
 et utrumque fieri possit sin& Analogia, 
 nihil ea opus est." p. 89. Again, where 
 he speaks of the end of language, " Si 
 id consequimur una Consuetudine, nihil 
 piodest Analogia," ibid. All this and 
 much more that might be brought from 
 the best authority, is as justly applica- 
 ble to tone, as to any other part of 
 lan-uage.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 171 
 
 Dionysius Halicar. in a passage above-mentioned, says 
 of them, that rdaeig (JHjJvii)Q, ai koAow/zevcu irpoa^iai, Bid- 
 <jtopoi kXztttovcti ry IIOIKIAi'At rbv tcopov. This Kupog, 
 this tiresome satiety, which Quinctilian imputes to the 
 similitudo of the Latin usage, was agreeably prevented, 
 according to the joint testimony of him and Dionysius, 
 by the ironciXia of the Greek accents. The case then is, 
 Dr. G. dislikes* Kvpiog, nvplov, nvpiw, for not being 
 acuted alike, as dominus, domini, domino : Quinctilian 
 seems to dislike dominus, domini, domino, for being 
 acuted alike, and not varied as Kvpiog, Kvpiov, Kvpiy. On 
 which account, that which is the ground of the Doctor's 
 objection against our present virgulce, in this and the 
 like cases, is with me a strong presumptive proof that 
 they are right. 
 
 In whatever sense we understand this UoiKiXia, it will 
 be very difficult, and I believe impossible, to reconcile 
 it with Dr. G.'s analogy in his doctrine of accents, by 
 which analogy f he means " a conformity to those gene- 
 ral rules of accenting, which profess to have a regard to 
 quantity, and to keep, as much as possible, the accent of 
 the first word or words of the same form, in the same 
 place." Sameness is the soul of his doctrine, variety of 
 that of Dionysius and Quinctilian. 
 
 Not only many seeming irregularities may thus be 
 presumed to be right by inference from Quinctilian, but 
 several of them may be proved so by the direct testimony 
 of the old grammarians themselves, whose authority, in 
 this case, is acknowledged by all. Nothing seems a 
 greater deviation from general analogy, than that the 
 penultima of the passive praeterit participle should be 
 acuted, XiXty/iivog. And yet this we have on no less 
 authority than that of Aristarchus and Herodian. J 
 
 V 
 
 Page 43. ferent from that of common preterits, 
 
 t Page 6. aud accounted for in a particular mau- 
 
 { The accent on tlie antepenultima ner. Etynwl. M. in V. Ol-rdjxivoi. 
 
 of ouTa/xsvoj, supposed to be a partici- Herodian observes the same on ihnXa- 
 
 ple of the preterit tense, is remarked by ^evoj and olray.i]i<s<;. Etymol.M. in V. 
 
 Aristarchus as a particular case, dif- 'Axtt^'i^evsr. 'ir-riov otj to 'Anay^-vo;,
 
 172 ESSAY ON 
 
 The irotKiXia of the Greek accents was more likely to 
 strike Dionysius than most other Greek writers, on ac- 
 count of his living so long at Rome, and having thereby 
 an opportunity of observing both languages, and mark- 
 ing the difference between them. The peculiarities of 
 any thing are always better remarked when considered 
 in a comparative view with another. It is well known, 
 from his own preface to his Roman antiquities, that he 
 was at Rome in the time of Augustus, and continued 
 there for two-and-twenty years; all which time he em- 
 ployed in studying the Latin language with great exact- 
 ness, and connecting himself with the most learned per- 
 sons there, that by their assistance and his own private 
 researches into the ancient literature of the Romans, he 
 might be able properly to execute that great work which 
 he had planned, of illustrating the Roman antiquities. 
 A remark, therefore, coming from him on the iroiKiXia of 
 the Greek accent (which probably arose from his com- 
 paring it with the sameness and stubbornness of the 
 Latin, and which, in Greece, might not have occurred to 
 Aristotle, who might not perhaps have an opportunity 
 of taking such particular notice of the difference in tones 
 between his own and a foreign language) has, on that 
 account, much greater weight with me than the testimony 
 of any other Greek critic whatever, the circumstances of 
 whose life were different from those of Dionysius. That 
 he was not inattentive to the accent of the Romans, is 
 
 iwti <w$£iXe iffa^vna-dai, i; to Tlenoiv- non est prasteriti temporis qun- 
 
 /uivo?, ovk eWi 7raga.xEiju.Ev0; niam participium prasteriti in penultima 
 
 0V1 h /uETO^rj tou TragoxEijuivov Tta.oo£vvi- acuitur, cum alia omnia [in vo{\ acuan- 
 
 Tot, t£v aX\n)V irao-Zv Tr^oirapo^vvofxevaiv tur in antepenultima Voces vero 
 
 to Se ovrdyivoi xai IXoXa'/xEvo;, oiiTcL[A.ivo;, et IXnXa'jUEvo?, negal Herodia- 
 
 o 'HgoiJiavoj ou <}>ia-i xctTa 7ra0o{ yiW5ai nus per passionem fieri proparoxjto- 
 
 7rpo7rapo£uTova, dmb rou ovTa.try.evoi; nal nas, ab oiracr/xEvo; et £\r,\atr[*hos, sed 
 
 IXuXao-jUf.voj, dX\' alio t*> si? ju7, toS te a verbis in fu, nempe oStd^i et eX>jX>]- 
 
 oJthjui xai IXwXhjUi. xai Eia-iv evecttSte;, (ju : et sunt praesentis temporis, ut 
 
 i; "o-r>iy.i, irrufjuu, lo-ra, pivot. " Scien- tg-rvfju, ia-ray.ai,lirrd.{xevoi;." Much the 
 
 dum quod vox 'A.x.a^/j.tvo;, quoniam same is in Phavorinus, on the same aa- 
 
 [si esset praeter. particip.] deberet in thority. V. ax«xf*«v»;. 
 penultima acui, ut ne7roi>i/xEvoc, ideo
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 173 
 
 evident from his observing, immediately after having 
 mentioned the name of Numa, " that the second sylla- 
 ble of it is to be pronounced long and with a grave ac- 
 cent," * Kar ovofia Nov/xav' \prj St rrjv dtvripav <rvAAa/3r}V 
 Ikteivovtciq fiapvrovuv. 
 
 The doctrine of enclitics and atonies hath given as 
 much disgust to our new reformers of Greek as the other 
 parts of the accentual system. Enclitics and atonies are 
 certain words, which, if taken singly, have an accent, as 
 all others have, but by their construction in a sentence 
 either transfer or entirely lose it. To this two objec- 
 tions are made : the one is, that it contradicts that true 
 and universal rule, Est in omni voce acuta. Which rule 
 (Dr. G. t says) " it is easy to observe, destroyeth all that 
 part of the doctrine of accents which relateth to ato- 
 nies." It is, however, very difficult for me to draw from 
 thence such an inference against them. For they, by 
 their close apposition, when pronounced, do, in effect, 
 become part of the word to which they are joined: and 
 the whole word, so compounded, has its proper accent. 
 How then is the great rule here violated? I wonder, 
 that in the same chapter of Quinctilian, from whence he 
 draws his conclusion against atonies, he could not see 
 an express assertion and direct instance of them in this 
 sentence : J u Cum dico circum litora, tanquam unum 
 enuncio, dissimulata distinctione : itaque tanquam in 
 una voce, una est acuta: quod idem accidit in illo, 
 Trojce qui primus ab oris." Here circum, qui, and ab 
 are atonies : i. e. they are considered and pronounced 
 not as single independent words by themselves, but as 
 part only of that with which they are joined, circum-U- 
 tora, qui-prrmus, ab-oris, {$ sv, with one acute regularly 
 for each of the words so combined. And thus the rule 
 is strictly observed, " Non est aliqua vox sine acuta." 
 This close apposition of words, by which the accent 
 of some is dropped, the reader, with the least atten- 
 tion, will find in almost every sentence of his own 
 
 * Antiquit. Rom. p. 120. Sylburg. f Page 54. t Lib- i. e. 5.
 
 174 ESSAY ON 
 
 language, which' he either hears, reads, writes, or 
 speaks. 
 
 But there is another objection, somewhat connected 
 with the foregoing, brought against atonies and enclitics. 
 For it is declared to be * "a great absurdity, and con- 
 trary to the nature of all languages, that the same word, 
 when pronounced separately, should be subject to a dif- 
 ferent modulation from what it must have when it makes 
 part of a continued discourse." If this be true, the 
 whole doctrine of atonies and enclitics sinks at once. 
 For those words are said to have an accent when pro- 
 nounced singly, and often to have none when they make 
 part of a discourse. How far this is contrary to the na- 
 ture of all languages, I can by no means judge, because 
 I am acquainted with but few. But sure I am it is not 
 contrary to our own, in which we hardly ever utter 
 a sentence without omitting the accent of some words, 
 particularly pronouns and articles, and several mono- 
 syllables, which yet we accent, when we use them singly 
 or emphatically . Our verb is we make sometimes an 
 enclitic like the Greek Irrn, and sometimes an oxytone. 
 When I say, " the man s is virtuous" the accent of is 
 sinks, as in dyaOog tort. If in answer to a question I 
 say, " he is" the accent is preserved, as in tort. So our 
 indefinite one is used in this respect like rig. should one 
 see a man : one here loses its accent, and transfers it to 
 should, as in i)v rig t'Srj avOpivirov. But you cannot use 
 the interrogative ivho without an accent, and so rig the 
 interrogative constantly and properly has it. Thus, like- 
 wise, our pronouns are enclitics or not, according to 
 their sense. If I say, send me that book, me is here a 
 perfect enclitic, and is pronounced almost as if it were 
 f joined with send, thus, sendme. But when I say, send 
 
 * Dr. G.'s Treatise, p. 52. and some of the Greek, as h in oTko'vSe: 
 
 t The enclitic is not only in pronun- it is likewise so with us, in homewards, 
 
 ciation incorporated with the preced- hedvemoard, hitherward ; where the 
 
 ing word, but sometimes in writing too word ward, though it has an accent 
 
 is so connected with it, as if it were in when taken singly, yet loses it here by 
 
 actual composition. Those of the Ro- throwiugitbackon the foregoing words, 
 
 man language are generally written so : of which it makes part by composition.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 175 
 
 me the book, do not give it 1 him : here me hath its proper 
 accent, as in contradistinction to him: In the former 
 case the Greeks called it IjkXitikov, in the latter bpOoro- 
 vod/xsvov. They, indeed, with their usual accuracy and 
 precision, made another difference between their enclitic 
 and contra-distinctive pronouns; for the former, they 
 used fiov, juoi, fie ; for the latter, commonly, Ifmv, Ipoi, 
 tfxi. Thus they would say, dog fxoi aprov, where the 
 sense of fxoi is not opposed to any other thing or person ; 
 but Ifiol §be aprov, oinc tKeii^, when ijuol is opposed to 
 iKHvy. As instances of this kind, where certain words 
 either retain or lose their accentual mark according to 
 their sense and position, are frequent in our best printed 
 copies of all Greek authors, their* editors are justified : 
 in either giving or omitting their marks, by the authority 
 of the best grammarians of antiquity, f Apollonius, % He- 
 rodian, iElius Dionysiusy Charax, Chaeroboscus, and 
 ||Priscian. 
 
 In considering the case of the ancient accents, I have 
 mentioned chiefly the acute, because it is the use of 
 that solely to which exceptions have been made. The 
 grave being only the privation of an acute ; and the 
 
 * Thus with good reason and pro- of Herodian, M\. Dionysins, Charax, 
 
 priety It is accented in St. Paul to the and Chseroboscus, in the Thesaurus of 
 
 Romans, xi. 18. Ou <rv tw p/£av ffas-rd- Aldus. 
 
 £e<?, aXX' h pi£* 2e. " You do not bear || Apud Grtzcos alia sunt demonst ra- 
 the root, but the root bears Thee." So tivorum pronominum absolata, alia dis- 
 in Homer, Iliad. I. v. 610. cretiva. Absoluta dicuntur, qua: rum 
 »*< / „ egent alterius adjunctione persona, qua 
 
 A.i 2_ ..* ./^ _■ j _,j. ■ .!• ±* ; j *it 
 
 _>,. !.,/. " v v . ' a ^ , ' tyxXtTMa., id est, inclinativa apud illos 
 
 stmt, ut eTSe'v /ai, lXttX7)3-£v pot. Discre- 
 Onwbich the Schol. Victorian. well ob- tiva sunt, qua. egent adjunctione ob- 
 serves : Mo; l%e.w ofioroveTy, ha. avrih- Tum persouarum, qua o^oroyovfuya vo- 
 
 tto-TEXX^Tot 'Ayay.ip.wn. For Achilles cant, ut, {thy e>e, ovk IxeTvov. Apud 
 
 here says to his friend and governor nos autem pronomina eadem et absolata 
 
 Phoenix: " You ought not to shew this et discretiva sunt. Putsch, p. 1062, S. 
 
 regard for him [Agamemnon] by which See also the Hermes of Mr. Harris, to 
 
 yon. may lose that love and regard whom we may justly apply his own 
 
 which I have for you." words on Apollonius, declaring him 
 
 t Synt. lib. i. c. 3. lib. ii. 13. 15, 16, " one of the acutest authors who ever 
 
 17, 18. lib. iv. c. 1, 2. etseq. wrote on the subject of grammar." 
 
 X See the tracts wEpi t£v lyn'Xtvoy.ivM B. 1. c. 5.
 
 176 ESSAY ON 
 
 circumflex being only joined with long syllables, have 
 not met with the same objections, but peaceably enjoyed 
 the place assigned them by grammarians. On this head, 
 however, I cannot but add, that this circumstance of 
 the circumflex mark being affixed only to long syllables, 
 is a thing that much favours my opinion. Had this, 
 which consists of an acute and a grave, marking an ele- 
 vation and sinking of the voice on the same syllable, 
 and, consequently, requiring a double measure of time 
 for that purpose ; had this, I say, been ever found placed 
 on a short syllable, I should immediately renounce it as 
 inconsistent with quantity, and deny its right and claim 
 to antiquity. But as it always is joined with a long 
 time, its strict propriety and consistency in that respect 
 is at least one inducement to think well of the two other 
 parts of the accentual system, the acute and grave. 
 
 Again : as we are assured by Cicero, Quinctilian, and 
 other old writers, that the ancient acute tone did al- 
 ways lie within the compass of the three last syllables of 
 words ; had the modern marks ever exceeded that com- 
 pass, by being fixed on the fourth or fifth of polysyllables 
 from the end, that would have been an insuperable ob- 
 jection against them in such a place. But since they 
 are actually now seen in a position that is strictly con- 
 formable to the oldest and best accounts of the tones 
 themselves, which they denote, they have from that cir- 
 cumstance in their favour a presumptive proof of their 
 propriety and faithfulness. 
 
 But it appears from some Greeks of later ages, that 
 the accents of some particular words have been different 
 at different times : and, therefore, we have no certainty 
 that the marks of any words at present are faithful. 
 But how is this inferred? Suidas and others say that 
 certain words were accented differently in their time 
 from the manner in which they were some ages before. 
 That is, the actual pronunciation of those words was 
 altered in a course of years, as it is in some words, I 
 believe, in all languages: the accentual marks, which 
 followed the actual pronunciation, consequently were
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 177 
 
 altered with it: and in both positions were true and 
 proper. Among ourselves the word ally was four or 
 five years ago pronounced as an oxytone ally"', and 
 any grammarian, who had then fixed the acute mark on 
 the last syllable would have done right : now, by many 
 persons of very good sense, the same word is pronounced 
 as a barytone, ally ; and a grammarian who should 
 now place an acute mark on the first syllable would do 
 right too. The variation of the tonical apices does there- 
 fore no more disprove the existence of the varied tones 
 themselves, than the main stream of a river shifting 
 from one side of the channel to another disproves the 
 real existence of the current at different times on both 
 sides. Had the variation of the accentual signs ever 
 been such as to have fixed a circumflex mark on a short 
 syllable, or an acute on any syllable beyond the antepe- 
 nultimate, that being contrary to the nature of the Greek 
 tones themselves, as founded partly in reason, and de- 
 clared by Dionysius, such an alteration would have been 
 just matter of objection against our virgulce: but the al- 
 teration,* circumstanced as it is, affords none at all. 
 
 The accent might vary not only at different times, but 
 at the same time in different places, as hath been men- 
 tioned in a foregoing chapter, and may be more fully 
 seen in H. Steph. Dialect. Attic, c. 15. de Orthographia 
 Attica. 
 
 I acknowledge that Eustathius and the author of 
 Etymologicum M. say, that polysyllables in oiog and oiov 
 were once circumflexed on the penultimate, though the 
 
 * The Latin accent varied in like without donbt, just and right when he 
 
 manner. In the word Valeri it was made it : nor does Gellius mean to 
 
 changed between the time of Nigidius dispute his authority, for he calls him 
 
 and A. Gellius. Nigidius said it was on this very occasion " hominem in 
 
 aculed on the first syllable : Gellius disciplinis doctrinarum omnium prae- 
 
 afterwards says : " sic quidem Nigidi- cellentem." Noct. Att. xiii. 25. And 
 
 us dici prascipit : sed si quis nunc Va- Dr. Bentley, on the same subject, 
 
 lerium appellans, in casu vocandi, se- speaks of him by the name of " Ro- 
 
 oundum id praeceptum Nigidii acuerit manornm a Varrone doctissimus," not. 
 
 primam, non aberit quin rideatur.'' ad Ter. Andr. ii. 1. 20. 
 And yet the remark of Nigidius was, 
 
 N
 
 178 ESSAY ON 
 
 later Attics acuted the antepenultimate : I know that the 
 same authors, with Suidas and the scholiast on Aristo- 
 phanes say, that the old Attics circumflexed the penulti- 
 mate of some words in aiov, which others acuted on the 
 antepenultimate. I will not dispute the truth of these 
 observations, and will agree with Dr. G., that the accent 
 was by those old Attics placed agreeable to quantity. 
 But then I must insist, that it was equally agreeable to 
 quantity, as used by later Attics on the antepenultimate, 
 and that this latter method was not a corrupt one. For 
 who are these pieTayzviaTtpoi and vewrepoi twv ^AttikCov ? not 
 writers of a low age and baser note, but those of the 
 highest character ; and though posterior in age, yet equal 
 in authority with ol vaXaiol 'AttikoI. Among the later 
 Attics are found the great names of Plato, Xenophon, 
 Aristotle, Isocrates, the Orators, Menander, and after 
 them Dionysius Halic, Josephus, Phiio Judaeus, Plu- 
 tarch, Diogenes Laertius, and others. We surely must not 
 call their Greek corrupt, though differing in some respect 
 from that of the old Attics, Thucydides, the great tragic 
 writers, and some authors of the old comedy. Persons, 
 when they meet with the words ol vzwrtpoi, perayeviarepoi, 
 or "EXXtjv£c> are apt to annex some idea of barbarism to 
 them, especially when opposed to the ol iraXatoi. Thus 
 Dr. G. calls the ptrayevicnepoL 'AttikoI * moderns. But 
 this is a mistaken notion : since some of the best writers, 
 whose works are now extant, belong to this class. Which 
 thing is clearly explained by J. Pierson, in his preface 
 to Mceris Atticista.t 
 
 I think it a matter of indifference to my argument, 
 
 * Page 145. Adde eundem in AiawwixiVai. Moeri- 
 
 t P. 26, 27, seq. Dr. Taylor also in dem inTLXCvm. Aeivuo"(. XoAa'S^. et scbol. 
 
 Ind. Attic, ad Lysiam, speaking of the Arisloph. Plut. 514. 553. Ita ladem 
 
 style of bis author, says, after Dionys. novara et antiquani meminit aliquoties 
 
 Haliearn. " non eo uti Attice scribendi schol. Apollon. Rhodii ; Doricam dupli- 
 
 genere [Lysiam] quo Thuoydides cem Prolegomena ad Theocritum." See 
 
 verura dialeeto recentiori Atticam also Valcken. ad Phamiss. v. 1395. and 
 
 novam meraorat Laertius in Epiraenide, Bernard ad Thomam Mag. V. AvyUvq. 
 
 Suidas in "AWTEsrStti, utramqae (novam Dr. Bentl. Dissert, on Phal. p. 401, 
 
 sc. et antiquiorem) idem in Tpiwaia. &c.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 170 
 
 whether the old Attics did circumflex those long penulti- 
 mates mentioned above, or no. But certainly it was not 
 universal. The word spvpog, though circumflexed in 
 Homer on the penultimate, was acuted on the antepe- 
 nultimate by the * Attics. Porphyry, as cited by Dr. f G., 
 says the same of ofioiog. And one of much higher au- 
 thority, Mceris J says, FeXoiov, fiapvrovwg, 'An-dcwc* Te- 
 \olov, TrpoirtpiGTrojpivwg, 'EXXrjvticojc. 
 
 I cannot dismiss this subject of the variation of ac- 
 cent in particular words, without observing, that the 
 very mention of it by the old grammarians as a peculi- 
 arity, is an implicit proof, that the main part of their 
 language both among the old Attics and the later Greeks 
 was in tone the same. It is taken notice of as a singu- 
 larity, and therefore no argument can be drawn from it 
 to the variation of the tone in general. 
 
 To return to quantity : so far are the present marks 
 from being inconsistent with it, that their position is in 
 most cases regulated by the quantity of the subsequent 
 syllables, of the ultimate in Greek, as of the penultimate 
 in Latin (the reason of this difference I shall no more 
 inquire into, than why the Pallium differed from the 
 Toga): so that these marks are frequently of use in lead- 
 ing us to the knowledge of quantity, by tracing the cause 
 through the effect. That the accent of the Romans is 
 regulated by the quantity of the penultimate, hath been 
 shewn above. That among the Greeks it was directed 
 by the ultimate, I may affirm on the authority of iElius 
 Dionysius, to whom Vossius refers us for information 
 in these points : who, in § Eustathius, says of nouns of 
 the second declension ending in a pure, ol Trakatol 'Attocoi 
 Hiiruvov rag tiov tolovtwv bvofiaruyv \r]yovaag. ATO teal 
 7rapo)^,vvav avra. dyvola yap tXzyov, kcu nj tvicXda, k. r. X. 
 " The ancient Attics made the final a of such words long; 
 Wherefore they acuted their penultima : and said dyvola, 
 tvicXrfa" &c. And it would be difficult to assign a rea- 
 
 * Etymolog. Mag. in the word egu- t Ed. Pierson. p. 109. 
 
 y.oi. § Odyss. H. p. 284. See also Schol. 
 
 t Page 115. ad Eurip. Orest. v. 261. 
 
 n2
 
 180 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 son, why the quantity of the ultimate should not be as 
 much regarded in this case, as that of the penultimate. 
 
 I offer not this use of our marks in discovering the 
 quantity of the following syllables as a thing of any 
 great utility, but only as a fact : neither do I choose to 
 mention another use of them, which has been sometimes 
 urged in their favour, that they serve to distinguish the 
 different senses of homonymous words ; because it is 
 certain this difference may be discerned without any 
 such helps. Other languages have words, which ex- 
 press at different times, without any difference of ac- 
 cent, not only different, but sometimes opposite ideas : 
 and yet the particular meaning of them in a sentence 
 may with common attention be collected easily from the 
 context. The consideration therefore of accentual marks, 
 as being necessary * on such occasions, I readily wave, 
 
 * The best Greek grammarians 
 themselves do certainly distinguish 
 very often the different signification of 
 homonymous words by their different 
 accent. Ammonius has done this in a 
 great number, Moeris in some, and 
 Eustathius in many. H. Stephens has 
 printed in his Gr. Thes. Append, a large 
 collection of such words from Cyrillus, 
 or Philoponus. In his tract " de bene 
 instituendis Gr. ling, studiis," p. 53, he 
 gives a particular instance of amislake, 
 occasioned by not attending to accen- 
 tual marks, in confounding the three 
 words Sia0a\aiv, 8(a(3aX£y, and Sia/3oX£v 
 in a passage of the Euthyphron of 
 Plato : and observes upon it " tanti 
 refert discrimen, quod tales notulae hie 
 constituunt, novisse." — See also p. 54, 
 55, of the same piece. The famous 
 Alberli in Peric. Crit. p. 57. has in- 
 geniously corrected Hesychius in V. 
 ttivov, by pointing out the passage in 
 Odyss. *. HO.which the authorquotes : 
 from whence it appears that the person, 
 who inserted that article in the lexicon, 
 was led into an error by not knowing 
 
 the different accent of aTvo;, and aivoy, 
 and so confounded together two words 
 of a different signification. But still, 
 as Apollonius with his usual good sense 
 observes, y^n /uevtoi tov vovv vm^ia-av- 
 Titf, (A.r) Sia tov to'vou Ji&aVxEa-Sai, Jia $£ 
 tou Tra^Trofxivov Xoyou. naBcfme Kai ait' 
 aWtuv aittigaiv cLfA.<pi@6\tvv Sjax^iVsif itapt- 
 itmtai In ritv litaKo\ouBo6vTwv T0~f Aoyofj, 
 oiot i£ lyxXiVeiwv, oi/Ss l£ ojflaiv ratrlmv. 
 " Veruntamen oportet nos attentius ani- 
 mum advertentes, non tenore tantum, 
 sed oratione consequeuti hoc dignoscere. 
 Nam alia: quoque ambiguitates innume- 
 rabiles, non tenore aut inclinatione, sed 
 oratione consequenti dignoscwitur." — 
 Syntax, lib. ii. c. 20. 
 
 The Chinese, we are told, have no 
 mark of accent, though they have ho- 
 monymous words, that signify five dif- 
 ferent things according to their differ- 
 ent pronunciation. " Ya pro diverso 
 accentu (says an author speaking of 
 the Chinese language) quinque signi- 
 ficat : stuporern, excellentem, anserem, 
 mutum, dentem. Ba incolis regni Tun- 
 qnin pro pronunciations diversitate
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 181 
 
 and rather confine myself here to this single point and 
 question, " whether these marks are faithful notations 
 of the ancient tones." 
 
 Notwithstanding the reluctance of Vossius, Henni- 
 nius, and thousands after them, to admit the acute as 
 compatible with a short time ; if I could have them near 
 me with a flute in my hand, or rather with an organ be- 
 fore us, I would engage to convince them of the con- 
 sistency of these two. I would take any two keys next 
 to each other, one of which would consequently give a 
 sound lower than the other : suppose the word auSe be- 
 fore us, or apovpav ; both which words Vossius would 
 circumflex on the penultimate, instead of giving an acute 
 to the first, according to our present marks : I would 
 conformably to these marks just touch the higher key 
 for the initial a, and take my finger off" immediately, and 
 then touch the lower key, on which I would dwell 
 longer than I did on the higher, and that would give me 
 a grave with a long time for the syllable et ; the same 
 lower key I would just touch again and instantly leave 
 it, which would give me a grave with a short time for 
 & : ands. Now if this can be done on a wind instrument, 
 within the narrow compass of two notes, it may be done 
 by the organs of human speech, which are of the nature 
 of a wind instrument, in ordinary pronunciation. For the 
 sounds of our voice in common speech differ from those 
 of such musical instruments, not in quality, but in arith- 
 metical discrete quantity or number only, as hath been 
 observed before, and is confirmed by the decisive judg- 
 ment of that nice and discerning critic, Dionysius of 
 Halicarnassus. Here then is, to demonstration, an acute 
 tone consistent with a short time, and a grave tone with 
 a long one. 
 
 The notes used in ordinary discourse, are, according 
 to Dionysius, nearly as five, wg eyyiara, not insisting ri- 
 
 geptuplicis est significationis." — J. Si- c. 27. Confer, lurcher. China illuslr. 
 num. iulroduct. Gramm. Grit. sect. ii. P. i. c. 3.
 
 182 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 gorously on musical exactness ; the acute not rising, nor 
 the grave sinking, more than three tones and a half.* 
 Certain it is, that with five notes of his voice, duly 
 varied and combined, a man may pronounce very har- 
 moniously ; many, I believe, do it with four or three ; 
 some, perhaps, with fewer. The words of Dionysius 
 are, °f" AiaXinTov /xlv ovv /JtiXog tvl jUfrpEireu Sukttijuciti, tq 
 XeyofxivM Sta irivTZ, wq iyyiara, koi ovtz kiriTdverai 7rtpa tCjv 
 
 TQUOV TOVisiV KOI f}fllTOVlOV IttI TO c£,l>' OVTt aviBTCll TOV yjj)QlOV 
 
 tovtov rrXuov hr\ to fiaov. By Stacrrrjjua here is meant the 
 difference or distance between any number of sounds in 
 lowness and height. Aristoxenus % in his first book of 
 harmonics defines Smor^a as distinguished from <p06y- 
 yog: " (pOoyyog, (says he,) is a simple sound or single 
 note ; StaVrjjjua is formed by two different tones." <£wv?) 
 
 * The intent of the fistula eburneola 
 (as it is called by Cicero), or the rovo- 
 giov (according to Quinclilian) applied 
 by Gracchus, in his pleadings and ha- 
 rangues, was lo confine the voice with- 
 id its proper degree of elevation and 
 depression. (There is reason to think 
 that the Roman compass of tones was 
 somewhat less than the Greek.) And 
 what was the consequence of this nice 
 attention of Gracchus to the modula- 
 tion of his speech? What Quinclilian 
 relates in his eleventh book, where he 
 is shewing the eflicacy of pronuncia- 
 tion: " Eadern [pronunciation] C. 
 Gracchum, in defleuda fralris nece, to- 
 tius populi Romani lacrymas conci- 
 tasse." The word tovo^iov points out 
 its office, as regulating the tones or ac- 
 cent. — Cic. de Orat. lib. iii. 60. And 
 Quinct. lib. i. cap. 10. "Sed ne hasc 
 qnidem praesnmenda pars est : ut uno 
 interim contenti simus exemplo C. 
 Gracchi, praecipui suorum teinporum 
 oratoris, cui concionanti consistenspost 
 euin inusicus, fistula, quam -rovogiov vo- 
 cant, modos, quibus deberet inteudi, 
 rpinistrabat. Hiec ei cura inter turbi- 
 
 dissimas actiones, vel terrenti optima- 
 tes, vel jam timenti fuit." The word 
 intendo used here exactly answers the 
 word ivriTHvco of Aristoxenus and Dio- 
 nysius. Cicero, having mentioned the 
 fistula of Gracchus, in some following 
 lines observes, " Est quid dam conten- 
 tions extremum, quod tanien inlerius 
 est quam acutissimus clamor, quo te 
 fistula progredi non sinet, et lamen ab 
 ipsa contenlione revocabit. Est item 
 contra quiddam in remissione gravissi- 
 mum, qucque tanquam souorum gradi- 
 bus descenditur. Hasc varietas, et bic 
 per omnes sonos vocis cursus, et se 
 tuebitur, etactioni aft'eret suavitatem." 
 In a preceding part of the same book, 
 where he is speaking of the modes of 
 sound, he says, " hi sunt actori, ut 
 pictori, expositi ad variaudum colores." 
 
 t ITsjji a-vj'b. (». In communi sermone 
 vocis modulatio uno ut plurimum mensu- 
 ratur intervallo, dicto Diapente : haut 
 neque plus tribus tonis cum dimidio in- 
 tendatur ad acutum, neque majore spa- 
 tio ad gravem deprimatur. 
 
 t Page 13.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 183 
 
 ^aorjj^uariKTj is therefore the voice varied and modulated 
 by elevation, depression, and inflexion. The same ex- 
 pression of oWrrj/xa and SmorjjjuartKT/ runs through the 
 other old musical writers, collected by Meibomius, in the 
 same sense. Euclides, the second in that collection, 
 defines it in the same manner with Aristoxenus ; <$06yyog 
 tort (JHovrig TTTMcrtg efi/j.eXrjg } lirl fxlav Taaiv. Amcmjuct cl to 
 ireptE^OjUEvoi' virb $vo (pOoyytov civojuoiiov bi,vTt]Ti /ecu papv- 
 rr\Ti : " the cVtcmjua is comprehended within two sounds 
 unlike, and differing in height and lowness." The very 
 same is in Bacchius. So Gaudentius ; (jytovtjg Igti roirog, 
 J/c papvTrjTog tVl o£,vty)tci §id<mt]fxa, teal avdiraXiv : he then 
 shews how this StaWrjjud takes place in ordinary dis- 
 course : ol filv lv rij XoytKij, KttO' ?]i* dXXfiXoig ciaXtyoneSa, 
 (puoyyoi (Tvve\ug kavrolg tov tottov tovtov cie^ip^ovTcu, pvcrei 
 riv\ TTfirovOoTa irapcnrXi'icnov, £7rt to 6£u, kcu avdiraXtv, ovk eirl 
 /niag [ffrttjUEvoi rdrrewg. " These sounds in our talking and 
 conversing together, pass through this SidaTruna, in a 
 close and gentle manner, not unlike the continuity of a 
 stream, shifting from high to low, and not fixing on one 
 tone." There is much more in Gaudentius to the very 
 same purpose. Martianus Capella* says of diastema, 
 that it is " Vocis spatium, quo acuta et gravior includi- 
 tur." We cannot but clearly see by this, what is the 
 diduTtifia of the SiaAtKTou fiiXog in Dionysius. 
 
 A musical reader may not be unwilling to see the ge- 
 neral doctrine of the Greek philosophical musicians, in 
 regard to the distinction of sounds, briefly stated. Their 
 first division is the natural one into high and low tones, 
 kcit o^wrrjra kcu /3a0UTjjra, by their tottol oiacrr^juartKOi, their 
 
 * DeNupt. Philolog. lib.ix. p. 185. sonant." Intervallum and spatium are 
 edit. Meiboiu. See also H. Steph. the two terms which are most com- 
 Tlies. ling. Grace, torn. i. c. 1757. monly used by the Romans as corres- 
 1796. on ho.trriif4.tt. Virgil expresses ponding with Aiao-Tv/*.*. Cicero thus 
 the Siao-Tjj/^a by discrimeu. iEn. vi. 646. often applies intervallum: and St. Aus- 
 tin, on the subject of music ; where, 
 with the exaclest propriety he says, 
 " numerositatis, qua? temporum atque 
 " Discrimina (says Servius on the pas- intervallorum dimensionibus movetur." 
 sage) quia omnes chordae dissimiliter De Music, lib. i. 
 
 " Obloquitnr numeris septem discri- 
 mina vocum."
 
 181 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 situation according to their several degrees of elevation 
 and depression. Then comes in the ypovog, the duration 
 of any one of these tones. Afterwards follows the di- 
 vision of them into organical and vocal sounds : the or- 
 ganical are discrete and separate, having all a sensible, 
 however small an interval between each other, so that 
 the end of one tone does not by continuation join the be- 
 ginning of another : wherefore they are said 'laracfOai, con- 
 sistere, non profluere. The vocal sounds are in this respect 
 very different, not necessarily divided from each other 
 by intervals, but awtxug, continent es, connected so very 
 closely together, particularly in speaking, as to run one 
 into the other, like colours in a rainbow, being indeed 
 each of them infinitely divisible : and accordingly the 
 human voice can make a more minute subdivision of 
 tones, than any instrument could in the time of Aristoxe- 
 nus. He says this had been remarked by no one before 
 himself.* I do not know that he distinguishes between 
 
 * UfZroV [A.h olv awavrocv Try T«f <f <u- 
 »Sg xlmtriv JiO^icTEOv, tw xara -rotzov. ou 
 yag us rgoizros avrn; aiv tvyyavii. . JtiVEirai 
 (asv ya%, xal JiaXEyo/t/iSVaJV hfAaiv, neu (Al- 
 Xwo\juvto>v, tw tlprifjihriv xivwiv. o£y ya£ Jtai 
 @agb SJjXov, if iv afxtyoripoi'; toutikj eo'ti'v. 
 etlrri Se Icttiv h xara. toVov, xaQ' ijv o£v tl 
 xal $aoxj ytvtrai. aXX' ou to.vto ei'Soj t»J? 
 xivhtrlwt; ixarega; linlv. loTi[Ai\S:g S' ou- 
 Jevi ttoiotots ytyivnrai vrepi tovto SiojtVai, 
 Tif hxarigas airSv h Jia<f>oja. xai nroi tov- 
 tov fxh Siojio-Qevtoj, 0v OTaVU ptt'JtOV ElTTSlV 
 TTEpt $>6oyyou, ti wote eVtjv. Harmon. 
 lib. i. p. 3. "First then we must deter- 
 mine the movement of the voice in re- 
 gard to place, or tone. The manner of 
 it is not in all cases the same. For it 
 shifts its place, as hath been said, both 
 when we speak, and when we sing : 
 high and low evidently taking place in 
 both these cases. Now the place of 
 the voice is determined by its particu- 
 lar situation iu regard to elevation and 
 depression. But the manner of its 
 
 movement is of two kinds. No one 
 hath yet with sufficient accuracy re- 
 marked the particular difference of 
 these two motions. And yet except 
 this is distinguished, it will not be easy 
 to treat clearly of sounds." 
 
 After Aristoxenus, the difference be- 
 tween the tynvn Siaa-T»i|UttTi)ti) and <ruvi- 
 yjit is mentioned by many : by none 
 with more clearness and elegance, than 
 by Aristides Quinlilianus. Tn; Je xm- 
 
 aioot; ij fAtv ervtiyjii; , h Se SiaaTy/Aarixri' 
 
 avvt^g jaIv ovv e<tti tywh, h Taf te oveo'Ei; 
 Hal Taj ETTiTao-ftc KlXriQoraiq Sia to Ta'^o? 
 'TroiovfAtw <$iaa"iv[AaTMh Se, h fa<; (aiv 
 
 tciVei? <f> avEfaj 'iyjivo-a. h [aiv ovv truv- 
 
 eyjig ia-riM y ^laXiyo/Asda. " Moluum 
 vero, hie quidem continuus, ille vero 
 intervallis discretus. Conlinua igilur 
 vox est, quae et remissiones ad gravi- 
 tatem, et intensiones ad acumen laten- 
 ter ac celeriter facit : intervallis vero 
 discreta, qu.ne tonorum dislinctionem 
 manifestam habet Coutinua au-
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 185 
 
 vocal tones used in singing and discourse in such a man- 
 ner, as to ascertain the particular number of them com- 
 monly used in speech, as Dionysius hath done. But this 
 exactness was certainly the business of the rhetorician 
 rather than of the musician. Aristoxenus, however, and 
 those who wrote on the same subject after him, speak 
 of the high and low tones used in common speech, by 
 the name of XoywEeg fiiXog, XoyiKoX raaug. AiaXejOfxivwv 
 •yap i)fj.u)v ovt(i)q 17 0a>v>) Ktvurat Kara roVov, wars nrj^afxov 
 Sokuv 'tGTaaOai* And in like manner the other musical 
 writers. The application of all this to our present pur- 
 pose is obvious, and hath been already made. 
 
 As there are but three places in which the accentual 
 mark at present appears, so there may be three cases 
 put, to one of which every exception, that has ever been 
 made to our accents, may be referred. And if the po- 
 sition of the mark in these three cases can be explained 
 and justified, every objection to them is answered at 
 once. 
 
 I. It appears often on the last syllable, as in Otog. 
 This is disliked by many of my opponents. Henninius 
 
 tem ea est, qua loquimur." — De Music. 
 lib. i. p. 7. And to the same purpose 
 Porphyry, Hypomn. ad Harm. Ptolem. 
 c. i. p. 194. 
 
 The flexibility of the voice, I am in- 
 clined to think, was meant by Virgil in 
 his expression of" udce vocis iter," (iEu. 
 vii. 533.) and I therefore rather follow 
 Germanus on the passage, explaining 
 it Jiexilem et circumactilem, than Ser- 
 vius when he says, " Hoc est u urn 
 vocis iter." In thus applying udus, 
 Virgil might intend to follow the Greeks 
 in their sense of i>yfc$, which signifies 
 flexible as well as moist. 'Ty^ov, {AaXaHw. 
 Heysch.Tryphiod. v. 79. calls the back 
 of the wooden horse Lye,w, Jiexilem, 
 where his learned editor observes that 
 Piudar thus uses iygov v£tov, Pytk. i. 17. 
 
 and Theocritus kejh? vyg&v. xxv. 206. 
 It is certain Virgil understood vyooy 
 axavdoY of Theocritus thus, for he trans- 
 lates it, " fiexi vimen acanthi." The 
 flexile ingenium of Hyperides is cha- 
 racterized in Longinns by the words 
 vyqh •GTveZf/.a, Kal ya.% f^a^axi^erat 
 
 Hal oh indvra i^nt; xal MONOTO- 
 
 NJ2Z XsyEi xttl iv 'rrVSli vrviv- 
 
 (Aini ^n^oiiva-ai eti E'rX.AMTi'HZ aHoait;. 
 " Etenim mollis est, neque omnia uno 
 ac simili tenore dicit — et cum facili 
 versatilique spiritu ad digrediendum 
 maxime_/Zex(7is." Sect, xxxiv. See also 
 Mr. Heath on Soph.Antig. 1250. Eurip. 
 Phocn. 1448. 
 
 * Lib. i. p. 9. " Loquentibus eriim 
 nobis ita vox movetur secundum locum, 
 ut nullibi vidcatur consistcre."
 
 180 ESSAY ON 
 
 roundly declares it wrong, and says it should be ac- 
 cented thus, Otog, according to his (i. e. the Roman) rule, 
 " that dissyllables should be accented on the former 
 syllable." 
 
 But let us now consider the position of the Greek ac- 
 cent on the last, either simply as -a fact, or as grounded 
 in reason. As a fact, it is necessarily implied by Quinc- 
 tilian, and expressly declared by other writers of the best 
 note, Athenseus,* Trypho, Ammonius, Mceris, fApollo- 
 nius, Herodianus, and others. And to judge of it by 
 reason or the nature of vocal sound, do we ourselves 
 perceive any reason X against it in our own language, 
 where oxytones are very numerous, or in the French, 
 where they are almost general ? But though we are sure, 
 we do now pronounce a great number of words with 
 the accent on the last, yet perhaps a thousand years 
 hence, when our language may be read and studied as a 
 dead one, some Henninius of those later ages, who shall 
 form rules of general pronunciation on those of a parti- 
 cular language, may say, " it is impossible the old Eng- 
 lish should pronounce the word regret with an acute on 
 the last, when it is so much more natural, for obvious 
 reasons, they should have pronounced it as a barytone, 
 
 • 
 
 * See what is cited from him above it stands now, has variety and har- 
 
 in c. vi. Again in lib. xiv. p. 644. we mony. 
 
 have, 7rs£«r7rao-T£ijv Se "Kkyovraq TIKclkovi; f " Illud tainen miror, quid ita Fa- 
 
 tw J)o,(w7Twiiv. Posterior vocis TlXaxovt bius et Rornani omnes acui vocem fu- 
 
 syllaba,nominandicasu,accentucircum- gerint in fine. Grreci aliter, ut scimus; 
 
 jlexa notatur. sed et riatura. Quae enim res, aut ratio 
 
 t He (ells us (Synl. p. 105. c. 5. me vetat vocem tollere finientem, aeque 
 lib. ii.) that pronouns used feiKTixZs ac ordieutem i Nulla, nee illi ipsi prae- 
 with the final i added, as olrorl, ixsivoa-j, tores nostii causam iuterdicli sui aliam 
 have ihe last syllable acuted. Sop.329. attulerint, prater noluisse." Lipsius de 
 he says, adverbs ending in it are cir- pronunt. ling. Lat. c. 20. The reasoning 
 cumflexed, as itou it£, alrou alrei. of Scaliger (ling. Lat. c. 58.) against 
 Herodian Tnpi fxiyaXov pii^aroj (p. 191. a final syllable being acuted, on the sup- 
 Ald. Tkes.) inquires, hart to <f>ao-i (a,i- position that the rising of the voice re- 
 tcj^ #a.puvETa(, to l\ pnpa. qatrh l^uvtrat. quired a fall in the same word, is con- 
 st, t. x. I can never believe that Ho- tradieted strongly both by the nature 
 mer (Iliad. X. 57". ) would write Tfwaj of vocal sound, and by practice. 
 xa.1 Tgvof : but Tp£«< xa) T§a>a?, as
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITV. 187 
 
 regret." This is the style of reasoning among many 
 persons on the Greek language. 
 
 II. The acute appears often on the short penultima 
 of a polysyllable, as in Sevrfyov, SwtcpaVrjv. And our 
 reformers would in all these cases bring it back to the 
 antepenultima, Sevrepov, Swicparrjv, as in Latin mdximos, 
 dominos, Socratem* But its former position is attested, 
 not to mention numberless other authorities, by Teren- 
 tianus Maurus above, and by f Apollonius, who says 
 TrXrjmog is acuted on the penultima. 
 
 But is there then any reason against it ? Dr. G. says, 
 that as there are allowed to be three times in the thesis 
 after the arsis, " two of these three may be either in the 
 penultimate or the last."$ Agreed. But though there 
 should be no more than three times in the fall, must 
 there be no less ? There surely may be only one, as in 
 defende. If there must be three, wherever there can, and 
 two of these three may be either in the ultimate or penul- 
 timate, then I may as well say to him, in objection to 
 his Latin accent, " why should not defende be acuted 
 thus, defende ? there are but three times in the thesis 
 here, and according to your own account, two of these 
 three may be in the penultimate." Thus I might use his 
 reasoning : but I will not, being convinced, that to argue 
 from one language to another is in many cases a most 
 
 * Not but even in Latin we have wrote. — Noct. Attic, xiii. 25. and 
 
 instances of the short penultima being Bentl. not. ad Terent. Andr. II. 20. 
 
 in this case accented. So Servius says, t Synt. p. 60. edit. Sytburg. And 
 
 and he well knew. " Mercuri, Domiti, Athenaeus, lib. ix. p. 388. on the word 
 
 Ovidi 1 tertia a fine debuit habere ac- * Avrayaq. ntgij-TrZo-i Y ol 'Attixoi iraea. 
 
 centum, quia, penultima brevis est : tov ojflsv Xoyov rovvofxa. ta ya= £i? aq 
 
 sed constat have nomina apocopen per- ykywra. ixTBrafAivov, vTrsp Ju'o 3-tAXa|3a?, 
 
 tulisse : nam apud majores erat iaem ore sp^si to a. iraoctKr,yov, @ag{,Tova is-nv, 
 
 vocativus qui et nominalivus; ul. hie oiov, axaSaq, adafxag, aH.ay.ai;. Circum- 
 
 Merciirius, o Merciirius. unde cu licet Jlectunt in ultima hanc vocem Auiciprce- 
 
 brevis sit, etiam post apocopen, suum ter justam rationem. Nam polysyllaba 
 
 servataccentum." ad Ma. I. 451. Thus in a.% tongum desinentia,cum habent a. in 
 
 we learn from A. Gellius that the se- penultima, barytona sunt, ut ajtaJaj, 
 
 cond syllable of the vocative case, a$a/*a;, ax.dfj.a~s. 
 
 Valtri, was acuted in his time, though f Dissert, p. 43. 
 the first was acuted when Nijjidius
 
 188 ESSAY ON 
 
 fallacious method. At present we pronounce the words 
 contriver, sollicit, as paroxy tones. A future reformer 
 may say, " it is absurd to suppose, that the ancient 
 English placed the accent on the penultimate of these 
 words. Do not contriver, sdllicit sound as harmonious ? 
 Certainly they do. And besides, the accent in the ante- 
 penultimate here is more agreeable to quantity. The 
 accenting therefore of these and other such words on 
 the penultimate cannot be founded in the rules of reason, 
 harmony, analogy, or quantity." 
 
 III. The Greek acute is frequently seen on the ante- 
 penultimate, when the penultimate is long, as in aeiSe, 
 Tvpawog, agovga, ofioioQ. In all such cases our oppo- 
 nents would (in order to make the accent agree with 
 quantity, as they call it) remove it, according to Quinc- 
 tilian's rule for the Roman tones, to the penultimate, 
 ati^e, apovpa, rvpavvog, b/tioiog. But what occasion is 
 there for this? Its position on the antepenultimate, 
 though followed immediately by a long syllable, is cer- 
 tain as a fact from Apollonius, * who says anovpoe was 
 acuted on the antepenultima. And if we consider it 
 according to Dr. G.'s rules of reason or harmony, we 
 may justify it even by them. Since he appeals to these 
 rules, I am very ready to try the case by them. 
 
 Kai 0»J ToXaVTM jUOUfftK?) <TTa9[X1}(T£Ta.L. 
 
 He says " that two times of three in the thesis may be 
 either in the penultimate, or in the last ;" I admit it. And 
 if he will abide by his own effatum, he must acknowledge 
 there is nothing in the ratio of harmony against the acute 
 in the first of a'aSe, rvpawog, &c. The arsis here has but 
 three falling times following it, and two of them are in 
 the penultimate, as allowed by himself. Why then so 
 much pains taken through the latter pages of his book 
 
 * Apollon. Sjnt. p. 60. as cited be- gives instances of it in xddnrcti, ivdxei- 
 
 fore, and likewise p. 323, where liav- rat, o-vveifti, trCv<p»y.i, cruvoiJa, xaTEX0E, 
 
 jng said that it is usual for compound Ka.-rcLSa.'KKz, xcd aWa Tr>,iia-ra.. 
 words to draw back llieir accent, lie
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 181) 
 
 to remove the accent from the first to the second sylla- 
 ble of such words as ytAotoc, aypoiKoc, iToifiog, &c. ? They 
 have nothing more than he has before admitted. 
 
 At present we pronounce cruelty, Mnesty, sepulchre, 
 as pro-paroxy tones. Some future reformer of the Eng- 
 lish old tones may say, " it is hardly possible to con- 
 ceive the old English should accent the first syllables of 
 these and many other such words. Is it not more har- 
 monious to place the accent on the second syllables, 
 cruelty, honesty, sepulchre ? it certainly is ; and there is 
 no doubt, but if we could recover, what the gramma- 
 rians under George the Third wrote on this subject, we 
 should find that all such words were accented on the 
 penultimate." This is exactly the language of Vossius 
 and his followers. 
 
 To argue against the present position of the Greek 
 accent from its want of harmony at first to our ears, 
 which have been accustomed to the Latin accent, is in- 
 deed a plausible and popular, but very treacherous kind 
 of reasoning. The harmony of all pronunciation is a 
 relative thing, depending much on habit. What is habi- 
 tual and therefore harmonious to a French, will often be 
 unharmonious, because unusual, to an English ear. It 
 may be so at first with the Greek accents in respect to 
 us. I well know, that Scaliger, who admits them, ac- 
 cording to their present marks, as genuine, yet thinks 
 that in some cases their position is absurd. But the 
 proper way of examining this thing is, not to consider 
 what it should be, but to find out, if possible, what the 
 pronunciation of the Greeks was: if we can find that, 
 we may be sure it was harmonious to them, and will be 
 so to us after some practice. I say, to us, though fo- 
 reigners: for the Romans were so ; and to them we are 
 sure, not only that it was agreeable, but even more 
 pleasing than the accent of their own language, accord- 
 ing to the testimony of Quinctilian himself. 
 
 Some have endeavoured to prove it unharmonious by 
 reasoning on the proportion of times in the arsis and 
 thesis. It is known there are allowed three measures of
 
 1.90 ESSAY ON 
 
 time in the thesis after the arsis. In Greek, according 
 to present appearances, two measures out of these three 
 are not admitted in the ultimate (except in a few parti- 
 cular cases, as in (piXoyeXwg and some Attic words), in 
 Latin the two are there admitted, as in ammo. Dr. G. 
 can see no reason, why the two falling measures should 
 be any more excluded from the ultimate of the Greek, 
 than of the Latin. # I can only say, they are excluded, 
 and am satisfied with it without a reason. But if he 
 insists on having - a reason, I will engage to give him one, 
 when he will assign one to me, why XWog and not Xd-n-ig 
 is Greek for a stone. If the languages are two, they 
 must differ somehow. And accordingly wherever I find 
 a difference, I acquiesce in it as a thing expected. 
 
 ^rptTTTrj yap yXwae lari (iporiov, TroXhg c tvi fxvSroi 
 
 UltVTOlOl' £7THi>V St TToXvg I'OfXOg tvSd KOI %V%CL. HotTl. 
 
 His reasoning on the two falling times in the penul- 
 timate has been shewn above to turn against himself, 
 and to support that system, which he endeavours to 
 overthrow. 
 
 'Ap' ii) tclv loiav rag apfioviag lfiirpr\<riv ; 
 
 The general sources of the numerous errors in the 
 writings of my opponents do, on the whole, appear to 
 be these two : first, an opinion, that the acute is more 
 agreeable to a long, than to a short time : the second, 
 an indistinct notion, that the place of the Greek accent 
 should agree with that of the Roman. For all the alte- 
 rations proposed by them to reform the present Greek 
 system, are either in order to transfer the accent from 
 short syllables, or to accommodate the Greek to the 
 Latin tones. 
 
 * Dissert, p. 43.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 191 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 How far aucient quantity is observed by those who disregard the accentual marks. 
 
 ONE cannot but smile on finding persons, engaged in 
 the defence of a favourite point, insensibly depart from 
 those very principles, for which they contend. This is 
 done by the disputants in the case before us. Quantity 
 is the thing, to which the enemies of the present system 
 of accents declare the most inviolable attachment. And 
 yet this very quantity they do all (most of them with- 
 out knowing it) most grossly corrupt. This assertion, I 
 am aware, is very repugnant to the prejudices of many 
 persons, who have long flattered themselves with an 
 opinion, that in their pronunciation of Greek and Latin, 
 they strictly adhere to right quantity, and will therefore 
 startle at the very mention of their violation of it. Yet 
 this, I am persuaded, will appear to an attentive English 
 reader, who shall make trial of a few lines, either in 
 verse or prose, in any ancient author, with this view. He 
 will find, I believe, that he pronounceth as long, every 
 short penultima of all dissyllables, and every short ante- 
 penultima of all polysyllables that have their penultima 
 short too. Dhmus, roirog will sound either as dwmns or 
 dommus, twttoq or ro-mrog : imptrium, pyyropiKog will sound 
 either as impfjrium or imperrium, pr)TwpiKog or pi)roppiKog. 
 And thus in all words of a like form, which are very 
 numerous in both languages, the short vowel, as placed 
 above, is pronounced, either as if it were long in its 
 own nature, or as if followed by two consonants. Let 
 me ask the reader, whether he does not pronounce the 
 first syllables of the following words, though they have 
 different quantities, alike, at least with a long time ? 
 
 Svpwg, operculum, as Kvpiog, dominus. 
 
 fiporog, mortalis, cruor fipurog, comedendus. 
 
 fio\og,jactus, |3wAoc, gleba. 
 
 Atog, Jovis, Siog, divinus.
 
 192 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 Ov/uog, cepa, 
 iov, viola, 
 iov, particip. 
 XvKog, lupus, 
 
 populus, people, 
 alia, adj . 
 oculi, subst. 
 calidus, 
 edat, may eat 
 plaga, climate, 
 plagce, nets, 
 lego, is, 
 dicam, subst. 
 caro, subst. 
 
 latus, subst. 
 
 nota, subst. 
 velis, verb, 
 viri, of vir, 
 
 as OvfjLog, animus, 
 
 / tog, jaculum. 
 — XiVKog, Candidas. 
 
 s 
 
 7 
 
 populus, a tree. 
 alea, subst. 
 occuli, verb. 
 callidus. 
 edat, may utter, 
 
 plaga, a blow. 
 
 lego, as. 
 dicam, verb. 
 caro, adj. 
 latus, adj. 
 latus, particip. 
 nota, particip. 
 velis, subst. 
 viri, of virus. 
 
 In these and a hundred other instances that might be 
 brought for this purpose, the reader must perceive, that 
 the long and short penultimates of dissyllables, and an- 
 tepenultimates of polysyllables, are pronounced alike, 
 both as long syllables. 
 
 On the likeness of sound to a modern ear between 
 the first syllable of mare, and the second of amdre, is 
 grounded a piece of criticism of the famous Muretus. 
 In the miles gloriosus of Plautus, a young Athenian is 
 introduced, disguised in a sailor's habit, with a bandage 
 about one of his eyes, in order to cheat the captain, and 
 steal his mistress. Being met and asked by the captain, 
 why he had muffled up his eye, he says, " I met with an 
 accident at sea ; had I not been there, I should have 
 had this eye as sound as the other." 
 
 Maris causa hercle ego hoc utor oculo minus; 
 Nam si abstinuissem a mari, tanquam hoc uterer.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 193 
 
 This is the obvious sense of the passage, and a very 
 natural one it is. But Muretus is not satisfied with it, 
 and thinks he sees something more in it. He supposes 
 a mdri (which he would read a mare) to have been pro- 
 nounced as amdre, and that there was intended an am- 
 biguity in the word : " had I kept clear of love ; or of the 
 sea." But this is supposing that the short vowel in 
 mare, because it was acuted, sounded to the Romans 
 like the long circuraflexed one in amdre : which I can 
 never believe ; and accordingly look on this refinement 
 of Muretus as ill-grounded. If, however, in this quib- 
 ble proposed by him, an exact similarity of sound, be- 
 tween the two syllables ma and md, between the long a 
 and the short initial a of amdre, be not insisted on, his 
 conjecture may be right, as it is certainly ingenious.* 
 
 As an heroic verse consists of six feet, and each of 
 these feet, whether dactyls or spondees, contains four 
 times, in every such verse the times are, grammatically 
 speaking, twenty-four. Let us see how many, according 
 to our pronunciation, are in the following line : 
 
 Utjubar eximium ! ut superum iiitet (eihtrius sol ! 
 
 Here, by our making no less than five false quantities, 
 we make the times amount to twenty-nine, and by not cut- 
 ting off um of eximium, to thirty-one. And this we call 
 reading by ancient quantity. But we certainly corrupt 
 it exceedingly. And if a person should now write a 
 Latin or Greek verse, and for the metre consult his ear 
 alone, he would almost in every line be deceived by it. 
 And if this were not the case, if the ear did really receive 
 as long every long syllable, and as short every short 
 one, what occasion would there be for the assistance of 
 
 * Lect. Var. lib. III. c. 17. It is " Hoc quoque pro suo naper edidit 
 plaiu that Muretus was himself pleased Caelius : sed secundus. Ego enim ab- 
 with his correction and explanation of hiuc quindecim annos primus edide- 
 this passage, since he disputes the ram.'' 
 claim which Caelius made to the same. 
 
 O
 
 194 ESSAY ON 
 
 books, composed for our direction in the prosody of 
 both languages, even after we have been long practised 
 in reading them 1 Would not the ear be able to direct 
 itself? How could there be a doubt now about the 
 quantity of so many syllables, if we pronounced them 
 as the ancients did ; whose actual pronunciation of them 
 did alone constitute and determine their quantity 1 The 
 truth is, even those scholars, whose practice and ob- 
 servation render books of prosody unnecessary to them, 
 do not in their Latin or Greek compositions regulate 
 their metre by their ear, but their judgment ; which, 
 aided by experience and memory, imperceptibly corrects 
 the ear, and the wrong impressions really made on it. 
 This is not unlike that well-known case in optics. As 
 there, several objects at different distances, though by 
 being painted on the same plain of the retina they truly 
 and physically strike the sense as equally distant, do 
 notwithstanding appear at different distances : so here, 
 syllables of different quantity, though in our pronuncia- 
 tion they really affect the ear with the same protracted 
 sound, do yet, in a manner insensible to us, appear dif- 
 ferently lengthened. In both cases, judgment and ex- 
 perience correct the informations of sense. 
 
 We shall find, upon a little examination, what is 
 worth observing, that all those short syllables, which we 
 viciously pronounce long, are the very syllables, on 
 which the accent falls according to the Roman method, 
 as given above from Quinctilian. It seems the accent is 
 readily carried by an English voice to the same syllables 
 which the Romans acuted, as in dominus, bonis. And so 
 far is our pronunciation of Latin right. But then, why 
 do we pronounce all these acuted syllables as long too 1 
 Here lies the difficulty. The reason of which however 
 may, I think, be collected from what is said in the 
 second chapter above, concerning our common pronun- 
 ciation of English; according to which an elevated 
 sound is generally a protracted one, i. e. our acute and 
 long quantity coincide on the same syllable : and as 
 they are so closely connected in our own language, we
 
 * ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 195 
 
 cannot, without attention and some practice, separate 
 them in our pronunciation of another. 
 
 I allow then, that the place which we now give to the 
 accent in Latin, is right; though it often spoils the 
 quantity by our connecting the Roman acute with our 
 own long time. But as Quinctilian assures us, that the 
 method of Greek accents is different frOm the Roman, 
 is less uniform and regular ; the manner of accommo- 
 dating the pronunciation of Greek to the Roman tones 
 (which is proposed by our modern reformers) must cer- 
 tainly be faulty, not only in quantity but accent too ; 
 neither of which therefore is by those persons properly 
 observed in Greek. 
 
 On this view of the matter, the Roman accent being 
 confounded with our long time ; the Greek either disre- 
 garded and rejected by its enemies, or misapplied and 
 perverted by many of its adherents ; the quantity in both 
 languages most wretchedly corrupted by most of us in 
 our ordinary practice ; how little of the ancient pronun- 
 ciation do we now retain 1* And how wonderfully does 
 it likewise shew the excellent harmony of the Greek and 
 Latin composition, particularly in their verse, that it 
 should still be agreeable to our ear ; still be able to re- 
 commend itself so powerfully to us, and, under all its 
 present losses and disadvantages, be superior to that of 
 any modern language ? 
 
 In the mean time, as the ancient accents do certainly 
 upbraid us with our northern hardness of voice, editors 
 may perhaps, on that account, choose to remove the 
 
 •This gave occasion to the excel- truscam dino Sirena Johamiem Ciainpo- 
 
 lent Scioppius to say, that he was well lum Latine loquentein audiat, fore, ut 
 
 assured, if Cicero was alive, he would ue unum quidem verbum satis perci- 
 
 not understand a word of a modern piat : sicut neque nostrum quenquam 
 
 scholar speaking Latin, nor would a declamante Cicerone plus, quam si 
 
 modern understand Cicero's Latin any Arabice peroraret, inlellecturuni arbi- 
 
 better than he would Arabic. " Itaque tror." Among the sources of modern 
 
 pro exploratissimo habeo, si Cicero in corruption in pronunciation, that very 
 
 terris hodie exsistat.et nou modo Gal- judicious and discerning scholar reck- 
 
 los, Gerraanos, aut Hispanos, sed et ons accent as a principal oue. Gasp. 
 
 ilium ipsum florein illibatutn Italia?, He- Sciopp. de Orthoepia libell. 
 
 2
 
 196 ESSAY ON 
 
 marks of them, as disagreeable monitors, reminding 
 them of their barbarous pronunciation. But let not the 
 suppression of these marks be misconstrued into an 
 implication, that the pronunciation, which is left disen- 
 gaged from them, is, of course, the right one. 
 
 Many modern teachers of Greek, who are tenacious 
 (as they ought to be) of quantity, find the use of these 
 marks is very apt to be perverted, and applied to the 
 notation of quantity : according to which dpfyoripip 
 sounds as dpfyorripio, or dptyoTeppy ; at this they are justly 
 offended. Their scholars are then ordered to disregard 
 the accentual mark; and to prevent effectually the mis- 
 application of it, it is to be totally neglected. Thus 
 they remove a vicious pronunciation : but do they sub- 
 stitute a pure one in its room ? Their scholars follow 
 this direction in regard to the virgulee, and then pro- 
 nounce the word dpfyoTrepio : that is, they avoid one 
 false quantity, and incur another. The false quantity 
 certainly may be avoided in both places, because it has 
 been. I can myself more easily, and more agreeably to 
 my own ear, shorten the acuted penultima of dfx^oripw, 
 than the acuted antepenultima of dptyortpoq, and of 
 Kvptov than of domini. 
 
 If these teachers mean to regulate and reform the 
 Greek pronunciation on that maxim of Sir John Cheke, 
 " a quorum temporibus petuntur verba, ab eorum astate 
 discantur* soni," their reformation is certainly very im- 
 
 * These sound principles of reforma- adullerinum notandum est; omnesque 
 
 tion, in pronouncing' the ancient Ian- sonorum rationes ad earn normain ex- 
 
 guages, were enforced likewise by Mr. plorentur, ad quam et voces; nihilque 
 
 Cheke's industrious and learned friend, sit recte prolatuin, quod non eo modo, 
 
 Mr. Thomas Smith, Greek professor quo autiqui solebant, sonuerimus. Quod 
 
 likewise in Cambridge. " Quod archi- si difficile factu est, nihilo tamen secius 
 
 tecti principes linguae illius, de qua faciendum est : Nam ut slipulationem 
 
 agitur, probabant et in consuetudine non extinguit difficultas pra3stationis, 
 
 ponebant ac usu, verum illud et since- ita nee veritatem. Neque enim ideo 
 
 mm,purumque ac germanum habeatur; minus rectum est, quod fieri de- 
 
 Quodque aliunde per obreplionem et bet, quia non (it, neque ideo quia non 
 
 calumniam ingressum est, et ita diu facile lit. ^a.\!7rk to. xa'Ka." De Grtec. 
 
 abtinuit, ut jam praescriptioue velit Ling. Pronunr. lib. i. p. 13. Lutet. 
 
 ititi : nihilo tnmeu minus ut spurium et apud R. Steph.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 197 
 
 perfect ; the pronunciation of dfifyoTTtpy being as remote 
 from that of the ancients, as a^orr^. And we may 
 even now truly say of that, which many scholars call 
 the purest pronunciation of Greek, what Sir John Cheke 
 did two hundred and twenty years ago of what he then 
 found : that* " should any of the old Greeks return to 
 life, and hear our unharmonious pronunciation, so very 
 different from the sweet and distinct elocution of the 
 ancients, it would give him uneasiness to find, that 
 what he had left so perfect and excellent, was now re- 
 duced to a wretched state of corruption and barbarism." 
 
 * " Si aliquis ex priscis Graecis jam ram atque illustrem tunc reliquisset, 
 
 excitaretur, et ista tarn absoua et ab- nunc tain incultam atque agrestem 
 
 surda audiret, quae toto cselo ab anti- invenisse." Epist. ad Episc. Vinton. 
 
 quorum suavilate et claritate distant, p. 64. 
 t!a? ille doleret, se earn, quam prBecIa-
 
 19S ESSAY ON 
 
 CHAP. XL 
 
 That there are no sufficient reasons yet assigned for rejecting the present system 
 of accentual marks. An expostulation with modern editors on suppressing 
 them. 
 
 AS it is evident from what has been alleged above, that 
 we have not the true ancient pronunciation at present, so 
 are we never likely to recover it, if we reject the most 
 essential means left that can restore it to us, I mean the 
 accentual marks. Though we have not the certainty of 
 mathematical demonstration, that these virgulce are faith- 
 ful marks of the elevation and depression of the voice 
 among the Greeks, yet there are no sufficient arguments 
 to prove the contrary: the common objections to them 
 have been considered and refuted. But though we 
 have but few positive proofs, except in the case of 
 the JEolic accent, to evince the genuineness of them in 
 particular words, the presumptive proofs in favour of 
 them, as generally used, are various and cogent. Some 
 of our present canons, relating to them, are expressly 
 declared by those very writers of antiquity, to whose 
 authority and decision an appeal has been made by my 
 adversaries. And if, by the misapplication of the inju- 
 dicious, which yet the discerning may easily avoid, 
 these old marks have been perverted, and, in practice, 
 rendered inconsistent with quantity, let not that acci- 
 dental abuse be urged as an argument against their pro- 
 per use, and end in their total abolition. If a thing, 
 that is capable of being misapplied, is to be destroyed 
 for fear of such misapplication, on this principle of cau- 
 tion and prevention we should be obliged to discard the 
 means of every convenience we now enjoy. 
 
 We all know that, in the best literary institution what- 
 ever, it is impossible totally to guard against the perver- 
 sions of ignorance and indolence. But surely it is
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 199 
 
 beneath the care of a great university to make such pro- 
 visions against the misapprehension of a blundering 
 schoolmaster, as to leave out of their copies a genuine 
 mark authorized by antiquity, and its own general uti- 
 lity towards preserving the purity of an admirable lan- 
 guage, for fear such a person should mistake and mis- 
 apply it. There does not appear any reason why such 
 an expensive compliment should be paid to ignorance. 
 Demetrius Triclinius, with more spirit and sense, pre- 
 scribes the manner in which such persons should be 
 treated on this occasion. " The ancients (says he) in 
 their ingenious and excellent invention, did not design 
 or publish them for such men, but for the intelligent, 
 paying little regard to the absurd and illiterate. And I 
 should think that man guilty of an injury to the learned 
 and discerning, who should conceal and suppress a wise 
 contrivance, because he apprehended, perhaps, the cen- 
 sure or mistakes of the injudicious; of those who, hav- 
 ing but little experience in letters, can take a book in 
 their hands, and see, indeed, the characters, but know 
 nothing of their real powers."* 
 
 Nor let it here be said, that if we should retain these 
 marks, we can never apply them to their proper use in 
 practice. Who can affirm that with certainty? An 
 English voice was capable of doing this in the time of 
 Henry VIII. and why not now ? Sir John Cheke declares 
 it is not only practicable, but was actuallyf practised ; 
 
 * Ov$l yap oiJ* oJ naXat ri KaXXurr* t Non est autem tarn diflicilis pro- 
 
 imvuionnirei, ravra. to~{ toioutoij exSe&ju- nunciationis nostras susceptio, quani tu 
 
 xacriv, aWa. to"? owiT0~t, B^xyi ^oyov arbitraris; et multi alii docti antehac 
 
 tuiv y.h o-uvstSv i^ovn;, ii<; xai ttov ri( judicaverunt, qui priiuo quoque lem- 
 
 £<f»i, 'Aei'S* |uvST0ij-i, flu'paj S' Imdeo-Bi pore rem laboriosissimam et difficulta- 
 
 £e£»Xo<. 'E-yii He nal <1Sjxe~v av <f>ai'»v tis pleuissimam earn esse putabant : 
 
 toIj o-wiTovi;, o« av linmnras <?o$ov n, postea libata tautura re et lustrata, fa- 
 
 tovto Xi&nf €ip&o7f naraxg&fiu, Se&isjj cilem et jucundam et utilem esse per- 
 
 js-oof rhv Ik tZv turwirorti fjt£[4^iv — dinves spiciebant. Ego vero non de me ipso 
 
 (Ah ■ypa/j.fA.a.Tcvv e^ovte? TO-sT^av, xat &:$- (nam id quidem fortasse arrogans vi- 
 
 Xioy ava, ^E~paj afa.fj.ivoi, SxeVouj-i /Av deri posset) sed de raullis, qui hodie 
 
 TJTtovt; yja^uaToev, ciSiv Se t£v lyy.ity.i- hujus lingua; studiosi sunt, asseverare 
 
 vuv 1a-a.srn. Anur.r. rov Tp;xXiv.'ou rcifi possum, illos ninnem liano pronuntia- 
 
 cr.fxuw. in pmf. Aristopb. iionis formam ita tenure, ut rer»m ii-
 
 200 
 
 ESSAY ON 
 
 that he knew many persons who could express these 
 sounds, consistently with quantity, perfectly well. I 
 know one person, who, after a few trials, is now able to 
 do the same. But even if an English voice could not 
 at present express these tones, yet persons of another 
 age, or country, into whose hands our printed copies of 
 Greek may come, may be able to apply them. 
 
 In regard to novelty, which is frequently urged against 
 
 terarum sonum, quaniitatem, uccen- 
 tum,summa cum facilitate ac suavitate 
 eloqui possint. Nam Tongi et Billi et 
 Aschami si tibi noti essent, ut alios 
 praHeream, ita sentires eos Gra;ce loqui 
 ac sonare, ut melius et perfectius ali- 
 quid non requireres. Epist. ad Episc. 
 Vinton, p. 284. This, which Mr. 
 Cheke mentions as a fact within his 
 own knowledge, Dr. G. declares to be 
 impossible, p. 67. " No man can read 
 prose or verse according to both ac- 
 cent and quantity." Again, in p. 71. 
 " It is as impossible to read prose ac- 
 cording to accents, and, at the same 
 time, maintain a due regard to quan- 
 tity, as it is to read poetry according 
 to quantity and metre, and, at the 
 same time, maintain a due regard to 
 accents. This hath never been at- 
 tempted. Neither can the other any 
 more be done.'' Thus half the physical 
 truths in the world hare at different 
 times been termed impossibilities. This 
 impossibility of Dr. G. I will call a 
 physical truth. If he doubts it on my 
 authority, will he deny Mr. Cheke's ? 
 Will he deny that of Michaelis, who 
 appeals to a whole nation in proof of 
 accent and quantity being distinct, and 
 yet consistent with each other ? It 
 could not but give me great satisfac- 
 tion to find, after I had published my 
 own thoughts on this subject, the idea 
 of two learned men to agree so exactly 
 with my own. " As to the principal 
 
 objection, that accents do not coincide 
 with the prosody of the Greek poets, 
 and are therefore to be considered as a 
 modern corruption of the Greek lan- 
 guage, it is to be hoped, that Profes- 
 sor Gesner will soon communicate to 
 the learned world what he has col- 
 lected on that head. The papers of 
 this learned gentleman relating to the 
 subject are at present in my hands ; 
 and I find, upon perusing them, that 
 his opinion amounts to this : that the 
 accents do not at all determine which 
 syllable is to be pronounced longest ; 
 that the accent, for instance, of avSpa- 
 Troq, being placed on the first syllable, 
 doth not oblige us to pronounce the 
 word as a dactyle ; that as the Greeks 
 spoke somewhat more musically thau 
 we, they pronounced some syllables 
 more distinctly than others; they 
 raised their tone, and dropped it ; and 
 the accents are evidences of this. His 
 opinion seems to me very probable; 
 and we need only hear a native of 
 Hungary speak his own, or the Ger- 
 man language distinctly, and we shall 
 find, that he pronounces the syllables 
 strictly according to prosodical quan- 
 tity, and yet raises some syllables 
 which are not the longest in the word. 
 I cannot express rnycelf so clearly to 
 the reader, as I might if my paper 
 could speak." — Translat. from Intro- 
 duct. Lectures of Michaelis to the Nevx 
 Test. sect, xlii.p. 95.
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 201 
 
 the virgulce, marks of a late invention, relating to an- 
 cient things, are not immediately to be discarded for 
 being modern. If they are but conformable to the 
 practice of the ancients, though not actually in use 
 among them ; if they faithfully and clearly denote 
 things which existed among them, though not marked 
 by them with certain characters, and may be useful at 
 the same time to us, they certainly have a right to our 
 acceptance. 
 
 The marks of punctuation are exactly of this kind. 
 Salmasius,* in his epistle to Sarravius, and Huetius, in 
 his preface to Origen, have already shewn, that these 
 marks, ariyfial, were equally unknown to the ancients 
 (that is, till about two hundred years before Christ) 
 as those of accents, and were invented by the same 
 person to whom we owe the first accentual signs, Aris- 
 tophanes of Byzantium. But yet an editor would be 
 reckoned mad, if he should at present reject these any- 
 fiai on account of novelty: and justly too ; for the only 
 question in this case is, not when the thing was invented, 
 but what it is; whether the modern mark be agreeable 
 to the use and manner of the ancients (not whether it 
 was used itself by them), and may be likewise service- 
 able to us. If it be so, its mere possible utility, not- 
 withstanding its novelty, is sufficient to recommend it 
 to any reasonable person. 
 
 If it be an objection to the present use of a character 
 in a modern edition of a Greek writer, that it was not 
 known or used by the writer himself; this will hold not 
 only against accentual signs, but likewise against the 
 admission of several letters of the Attic alphabet into 
 the printed copies of Homer ; for it is certain that the 
 letters H, S, y ¥, 12, were invented after his time, though 
 
 * " Quod ad Grjeca exeraplaria at- ductu sine ullo inlerstitio voces om- 
 
 tinet, ante Aristophanem, qui primus nes exarari solebant et sententia; 
 
 w§os-M$.'av excogitavit et accentus in- etiam continuari." Salinas, ad Sarra- 
 
 venil, nulla fuit Uterinum distinctio vium. 
 neque sabdistinctio. Uno ac perpelu-)
 
 202 ESSAY ON 
 
 the powers of them existed long before. Nay, it may 
 be equally urged against the use of all small letters 
 whatever; since, according to Montfaucon, they were 
 not introduced till several ages after the introduction of 
 accentual marks. But who would so absurdly attach 
 himself to antiquity, as in every respect religiously to 
 adhere to it in its simple form, and by that means volun- 
 tarily deprive himself of those helps and conveniences, 
 which later times have introduced for the readier con- 
 veyance of ancient knowledge ? Who would choose to 
 read a copy of an old author written or printed in capi- 
 tals only, without any punctuation, or different inter- 
 vals between the letters of the same and different words ? 
 No one, except through curiosity, or with a view of 
 examining it for a critical purpose. As novelty, in this 
 case, is no objection to our modern characters : neither 
 is it really so in the case of accentual marks. But they 
 have been falsely supposed by some persons to be in- 
 consistent with quantity, and then different reasons are 
 found out for discarding them, and among many others, 
 more particularly this of novelty has been advanced. 
 
 It will be asked, perhaps, why these marks, though 
 they may truly denote ancient tones, should be used in 
 Creek copies any more than they are in Latin or Eng- 
 lish ? My answer is, that one of these is a living lan- 
 guage, and therefore stands not in need of them, except 
 in grammars and dictionaries, in which they are pre- 
 served. And in the Latin, though the accent of that lan- 
 guage is far more simple and uniform, and consequently 
 more easy to be retained than the Greek, yet even in 
 that, I cannot help wishing with Melancthon, that accen- 
 tual signs were used, at least constantly in all vocabu- 
 laries of that language. The case, however, of these 
 three languages is by no means alike : and Greek may 
 and does require them, even though they should be 
 utterly excluded from the Latin and English. 
 
 On the whole, if I might express my private wishes 
 for the convenience and advancement of Greek learning, 
 they are, that editors of old Greek authors, instead of
 
 ACCENT AMD QUANTITY. 203 
 
 depriving us of the present marks of speech, merely for 
 being of an invention later than some of the authors 
 themselves, would rather add to them, by recovering 
 and restoring to us those characters, which certainly 
 were known and used in the early ages ; and, in an edi- 
 tion of Homer insert the JEolic digamma, which proba- 
 bly was as much a letter of Homer's own alphabet, as 
 B, r, or A : and without which his metre is in a thou- 
 sand places irregular, imperfect, and languid, accord- 
 ing to present appearances. But such a restoration of 
 ancient characters is, I fear, rather to be the object of 
 our wishes than hopes ; for to effect it would require 
 pains and industry: whereas the rejection of them, un- 
 luckily for us, favours both idleness and ignorance. 
 
 But however agreeable this rejection may be to some 
 modern principles, it is very contrary to those of Mr. 
 Cheke, who, in express terms, condemns such an inno- 
 vation.* " He cannot see what scholars have to alter, 
 either in the words themselves, their sound, their spirits, 
 or accents, in short, in any the least part of the lan- 
 guage : a language, that neither can nor ought to be 
 changed by times, places, or persons : in which those 
 are the best skilled, who can best imitate the ancients 
 themselves in their use of it ; and all are the less so, the 
 more they depart from the prescribed mode of antiquity. 
 They should not therefore think themselves empowered 
 to displace any thing that hath been so long established, 
 but should rather carefully maintain it in its ancient 
 state. 
 
 So sacred and inviolable did that great professor hold 
 every part of the Greek language in that form, wherein 
 
 * " Non video quid doctis relinquatur quos in dicendo possunt. Indoctiores 
 
 Mt mutent, non in verbis, non in sonis, antem sunt, quo magis ab illorum prae- 
 
 non in spiritibus, non in accentibus, scripta formula discedunt. Nonigilur 
 
 denique in nulla ne minima quidem in istorum potestate hoc situm et collo- 
 
 linguae parte.— Neque lempori- catum est, ut quicquam a loco, in quo 
 
 bus, neque Iocis, neque hominibus, mn- olim fuit, diraoveant ; sed potius ut in 
 
 tari potest, aut debet. Illi Grace doc- antiquo gradu conservent." Epitt. p. 
 
 tissimi sunt, qui optiine imitari anti- 238, 9.
 
 204 ESSAY ON 
 
 it hath been transmitted to us through more than nine- 
 teen centuries : and so particularly is the visible accen- 
 tuation of it mentioned by him as a part not to be 
 touched or altered. Those objections to it, which have 
 been raised since his time, I have, in the foregoing 
 pages, endeavoured to answer, as far as I have been able 
 to collect. The reasons that have engaged the Oxford 
 editors to omit the marks, are not yet published: and, 
 till they are, we must suppose, that to this deviation from 
 the practice of the Aldi, Calliergi, Stephani, Turnebi, 
 and our own Bentleys, Taylors, and Marklands, they 
 were induced by those reasons which have been pub- 
 licly urged by the writers mentioned above in this 
 Essay. The only notice, which they have hitherto taken, 
 of this new method, is in a short preface to some elegiac 
 and lyric fragments published at Oxford, 1759, where 
 we find these words : " Sine accentibus denique cuncta 
 dedimus impressa, partim rei ratione adducti, partim 
 auctoritate Academics, quas Theocritum suum ita im- 
 primi voluit." 
 
 The AcademixB auctoritas I shall not presume to call 
 in question in the present case, taking leave only to ob- 
 serve, that although the name of an university be weighty 
 and venerable, yet when it is considered as consisting of 
 fallible individuals, and those perhaps but few, who on 
 such occasions call themselves the university, it greatly 
 abates of that awe which its name otherwise inspires. 
 But although I must not, perhaps, think of combating 
 the Academics auctoritas, yet in regard to the rei ratio, I 
 may say, that, until it is better explained than it hitherto 
 has been, the rejection of our Greek characters doth in 
 the mean time subject the editors to the imputation of 
 unfaithfulness. An essential part of an admirable lan- 
 guage, ascertained by the contrivance of an eminent 
 grammarian, of the greatest knowledge, judgment, and in- 
 genuity, in an age of sound and pure Grecism, in a court 
 very highly distinguished by its munificent and successful 
 encouragement of learning and genius ; adopted by his 
 successors in literature, and confirmed by the authority
 
 ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 205 
 
 and practice of near two * thousand years; this, which 
 an academical editor should with a particular care pre- 
 serve and look on as a deposit in his hands, is by a kind 
 of breach of trust given up and destroyed by him. And 
 a Greek author might, in expostulating with him, and 
 remonstrating against this unwarrantable defalcation, 
 not improperly use the words of Philomela, in the Greek 
 epigram, complaining to her sister of the perfidious and 
 cruel treatment she had met with from Tereus, 
 
 rXiotraav lf.ii\v z^ipiaGt, ku\ icrfisrrsv EXAtt'Sa (pwvi'iv. 
 
 * The very exact and truly learned 
 Mr. D'Orville allows the marks may 
 perhaps be not so old, but yet can see 
 no reason why we should pavt with 
 them. His words, I am persuaded, 
 must have great weight with all real 
 scholars, and to sucli I here propose 
 them : '* Possem foi le accedere Isaaco 
 Vossio, in libro de Poematum cantu, 
 p. 19. ante mille annos maxime inva- 
 luisse accentus adpingendi usum fre- 
 quentem. At turn amissam fuisse vete- 
 rem rationem pronunciandi ; gramma- 
 ticosqae istam penilus corruptam ra- 
 tionem accentibus expressisse, minime 
 mihi adhuc persuasum est. Accentus 
 uon quantitatis indicandae causa ad- 
 positos : sed ad prouanciationcin et 
 
 rhythmum regendum reor. Stul- 
 
 tam satis ab usu etiam per mille annos 
 recepto temere recedere." Crit. Vann. 
 p. 333. 
 
 If Mr. D'Orville does here by rhyth- 
 mus understand (as he probably loes) 
 that harmony, which results from the 
 sound of a whole, it perfectly agrees 
 with what is said in the third chapter 
 above on rhythm being dependent on 
 accent: as likewise with what is cited 
 afterwards in the eighth chapter from 
 QuinctiliaB, and from Dr. Bentley on 
 
 the rhythm of Itdliam fdto prtfugus, 
 &ic. And all is very consistent with 
 what is given in the sixth chapter from 
 Theod. Gaza on •oj-goc-a Mx," which is," 
 he says, " a certain intension of the 
 voice in speaking, for the harmonious 
 utterance of the whole, lijpoc tlxpcuvlay 
 rov "OAOY AOTOT." As£u is a single 
 word, Aoyo; a connected series of 
 Asfet;, forming either a sentence or dis- 
 course, according to the definition of 
 these two terms by the same Gaza. — 
 Introd. Crainra. 1. 4. after Aristotle in 
 Poet. c. 20. and Plato in Cratylus, p. 
 385. Serrau. 
 
 The word rhythm, which is often 
 used by me in the foregoing pages, I 
 would have understood, as it is here, 
 in (he enlarged grammatical and ora- 
 torical sense, in which it is used by 
 Scaliger (cited above, p. 38.) and by 
 Aristotle pud Cicero, who often apply 
 it to finite as well as to verse, la its 
 strictly musical and metrical significa- 
 tion it relates merely to the division of 
 time in verse alone, by the metrical 
 arsis and thesis: and there takes place 
 in any two regular feet properly com- 
 bined. The rhetorical sense of the 
 word includes much more.
 
 A 
 
 LETTER 
 
 FROM 
 
 Mr. MARKLAND 
 
 TO 
 
 THE AUTHOR. 
 
 DEAR SIR, July 4, 1762. 
 
 I received and have read your Essay, and as- 
 sure you, that my sentiments concur with those of every 
 person, who has mentioned it to me, that you have proved 
 your point as fully as it need be proved. And I hope 
 your endeavours will do service to the Greek language, 
 which from many signs, and not least from the omission 
 of accents, I have long thought was leaving us. In this 
 cause I think you need not regard or fear the censures 
 of any adherents to the Oxford press, as far as I am 
 able to judge. I rather hope, that what you have written 
 will restore accents to that press, that it may not be 
 said of Greek learning, 
 
 timuitque mortem 
 
 Hinc, unde vitam sumeret aptius. 
 
 I am very glad that Dr. Taylor will look over his pa- 
 pers for you before you reprint your book. For my own 
 part, I have been so long satisfied of the antiquity of 
 the Greek accents, that I have not taken the pains in the
 
 A LETTER, &C. 207 
 
 course of reading, to note down any passages to that 
 purpose ; though I remember to have met with several 
 things in Athenaeus and elsewhere, which long ago I 
 thought much to the purpose. But, indeed, I did not 
 think that any real scholar would ever doubt of it. For 
 though Isaac Vossius was unquestionably a very learned 
 man, yet his whimsicalness and love of paradox scarce 
 leave room for him to be considered as a reasonable one 
 in many points. The present common way of quoting 
 Greek without accents, I always took for nothing more 
 than a subterfuge for ignorance, except in a few persons. 
 At the best it was to me a sure mark, that the Greek 
 language was going out of England ; and I was as sure 
 that the Latin would soon follow it. But I never ima- 
 gined till lately, that accents were omitted out of a prin- 
 ciple of erudition. 
 
 When Dr. Taylor gave me notice of your publication, 
 and at the same time sent the Italian inscription of the 
 verse of Euripides, and desired my opinion of them ; 
 long before I had received the Essay, I wrote to him the 
 following letter, which upon second thoughts I deferred 
 sending, until I had seen what you had said on the sub- 
 ject, who I was sure had examined it more than I had 
 done. The letter is as follows : 
 
 " As to the design of the Greek accents, I am per- 
 suaded, that though they are very ancient, and were 
 formed by Greeks, yet they were not formed for Greece: 
 because persons, who were bred up from their infancy 
 in only that language, could have no need of marks to 
 know upon what syllable of each word the accent was 
 to be laid : as we in England need not be taught to pro- 
 nounce conventicle or righteousness ; because we learn 
 it of course. But had any of us been brought up in 
 France, Spain, or Germany, and had a mind to speak 
 English, it would then have been necessary to be di- 
 rected in the true pronunciation of those words. Some- 
 thing like this I imagine may have happened with regard 
 to the Greek accent. Persons who left Greece to settle 
 in a nation of a different tongue, if they were desirous
 
 208 A LETTER, &C. 
 
 that their children or successors should continue in the 
 knowledge or use of speaking the Greek language, would 
 probably leave them some marks, whereby they might 
 know how each word was rightly pronounced in the 
 country from whence they came. This, or something 
 like it, possibly might be the original of accents, which 
 seem to be valuable remains of antiquity, as they partly 
 teach us how Greek was pronounced, probably in con- 
 versation and reading. If this be so, it is no wonder 
 that a verse of Euripides should be found with accents 
 in a foreign country, in a part of Italy, which abounded 
 with people in the Greek taste : but it would have been 
 seemingly more unaccountable, had it been found with 
 the accents in Attica or Thessaly, in the midst of Greece, 
 where Greek was the native language at the time this 
 city was destroyed by the earthquake ; and whither, one 
 would think, accents could not have come, unless by 
 some accident." 
 
 This I had put down, chiefly relating to the accented 
 Italian inscription, before I had seen your Essay : and 
 I was pleased to find that it was not contrary to, nor 
 contradicted by, your observations ; of the truth of 
 which I have a thorough conviction. 
 
 Our friend, Mr. Hall, in an answer to a letter of mine, 
 wherein at his desire I had given him my thoughts in 
 general on the subject of accentuation, writes to me as 
 follows: " To confirm your observation, I take the 
 liberty of giving you the remark of a learned Italian 
 commentator, Girolamo Ruscelli, written in his own 
 country upon his own living language. As you possibly 
 may not have at hand Ariosto's Orlando Furioso, with 
 Ruscelli's annotations, I will send you his note upon 
 the following line, 
 
 Corrd lafresca e matutina rosa. 
 
 La parola s'ha qui, &c. We are here to pronounce the 
 first o in con o large or open, and lay the accent on the 
 latter. The word is abbreviated from cogliei 6, like many
 
 A LETTER, &C. 209 
 
 others, as porro from ponero, verro from veniro. In 
 such words as these we see how much our language stands 
 in need of the letters, added by Trissino and Tolomei, 
 and chiefly of the accents. Without the aid of the accent, 
 we should not know how to distinguish corro, " I will 
 gather," from corro " I run," both words being written 
 with the same letters. We pronounce the first o in corro 
 large or open, because it comes from cogliere, in Latin col- 
 ligere, whereas the first o in corro is pronounced strait or 
 close, as partaking of the letter u in the Latin curro, from 
 which it is formed. Now though the laying down the 
 rule of pronunciation be not altogether necessary for us 
 Italians ( some of us however are of that opinion) who, 
 by skilfully distinguishing the signification of words, 
 know hoiv to accommodate the pronunciation of them to 
 their proper meaning, yet, to say no more of it, it is abso- 
 lutely necessary to other nations, and to posterity, that 
 the true pronunciation of our tongue may be known by 
 the mere writing of it. 
 
 " This, you see, is a quia timet argument, and is an 
 instance of precaution, similar to that which Mr. Foster 
 has given in Garcillasso de la Vega ; though I think 
 somewhat stronger ; inasmuch as at that time the Italian 
 language was lifting up its head, and beginning to make 
 a figure in matters of learning. While half the scholars 
 of Italy were busying themselves in polishing and per- 
 fecting their language, the danger of its falling into cor- 
 ruption and decay must be seen at a very remote dis- 
 tance. 
 
 " This Ruscelli addressed his book of criticisms (en- 
 titled Tre Discorsi) to L. Dolce, and in truth handled 
 him most roughly: I mention it for the sake of a story, 
 which makes the introduction to his second discourse ; 
 where there is a very humorous description of an igno- 
 rant foreigner, pretending to much learning, and blun- 
 dering wretchedly in mistaking the Latin Galea, as he 
 found it in his Calepin, for the Italian Galea; into 
 which mistake he could not have fallen, had he known 
 
 p
 
 210 A LETTER, &C. 
 
 that the former was accented on the antepenultima, the 
 latter on the penultima. 
 
 ####### i am yours, &c. 
 
 JER. MARKLAND. 
 
 The Italian accented inscription, to which Mr. Mark- 
 land refers in the foregoing letter, appears in p. 34. of 
 the last volume of Herculanean Antiquities presented 
 lately by his Sicilian Majesty to our Universities : where 
 it is introduced thus : — 
 
 Negli scavi di Resina a 6 Marzo, 1743. s' incontro su 
 una parete, cheformava V angolo di una strada, che con- 
 ducea al theatro, scritto con lettere nere e rosse ilseguente 
 verso nella maniera appunto, come que si vede inciso : 
 
 tog iv<ro <f>bv fiovXtviia rag iroWag Xupag vikcl. 
 che dovrebbe cosi leggersi : 
 
 u>g tv (TO(j)bv j3ov\£ujuci rag iroWag %£tpac viicq. 
 Questo e un verso di Euripide citato da Polibio I. 35. 
 E ne'frammenti delV Antiope, v. 77. nel Barnes. 
 
 ~2i0(j>bv yap iv fiovXtvfia rag 7roXXac X*P a G 
 
 Nuca. 
 
 Concerning this inscription, Dr. Taylor, in a letter of 
 June, 17G2 r writes to me thus : — 
 
 " The inscription at Herculaneum, I hear, is going to 
 be disputed, on account of the small characters. That 
 will be difficult: because under the statues of the Muses 
 found there, we read TPArwAIAN. EPATw, &c. &c. in 
 the same manner as we do in the following inscription 
 at Rome, the age of which is high and cannot be dis- 
 puted ; on a marble monument there, 
 
 In front, 
 
 ATIMETVS PAMPHILI 
 
 TI. CAESARIS. AVG. L. L. 
 
 ANTEROCIANVS. SIBI. ET. 
 
 CLAVDIAE. HOMONEAE 
 
 CONLIBERATAE. ET. 
 
 CONTVBERNALI,
 
 ITALIAN INSCRIPTION. 211 
 
 H nOXY CEIPHN^N XirYPaTEPH H nAPA BAKX»I 
 KAI 0OINAIC ATTHC XPTCOTEPH KTnPIAOC 
 
 H XAXIH 4>AIAPH TE XKXEIAONlC ENQ OMONOIA 
 KEIMAI ATIMHTart XEIITOMENH AAKPYA 
 
 Tart nEXON ACnAClH BAIHC AIIO THN AE TOCAYTHN 
 AAIMoiN AIIPOI$HC ECKEAACEN cflXIHN. 
 
 On the left side, 
 
 Ty qui secv'ra' proce'dis mente farvmper 
 
 siste gradvm quaeso verbaqve pavca lege 
 illa ego qvae claris fveram praelata tvellis 
 
 hoc homonoea brevl condita svm tvmvlo 
 cvi formam papiiie' charites tribVere deco'rem 
 
 qvam pallas cvnctis artievs ervidllt 
 nondvm bis de'nos a'etas mea vIderat anno's 
 
 inie'cere manvs invida fa'tamihi 
 nec pro me qveror hoc morte est mihi tristior ipsa 
 
 MAEROR ATIMETI CONIVGIS ille meI. 
 SIT TIBI TERRA LEVIS MVLIER DIGNISSIMA VITA 
 <JVAEQVE TVIS OLIM PERFRVEARE BONls. 
 
 On the right side, 
 
 Si pensa're Animas sinerent crv'delia fa'ta 
 
 et posset redimi morte aliena salvs 
 qvantvlacvnqve meae debentvr tempora vItas 
 
 pensarem pro te cara homonoea libens 
 at nvnc quod possvm fvciam lv'cemqve deosqvk 
 
 vt te matvra per stfga morte seqvar 
 parce tvam conivnx fletv qvassaue ivventam 
 
 fataqve maerendo solicitare mea 
 nil pro'svnt lacrimae nec possvnt fata moverl 
 
 vIximvs II IC omnIs EXITVS VNVS HABET 
 PARCE ITA NON VNQVAM SIMILEM EXPERIARE DOLo'rEM 
 
 ET FAVEANT Vo'tIs NVMINA CVNCTA TvIs 
 QVODQVE MIHI e'rIPVIT MORS IMMATVRA IVVENTAE 
 
 id tibi vIctv'ro PRORPGET VLTERIVS. 
 
 " In the Greek, according to Manutius, though neg- 
 lected by Gruter, the little lambda A, the 0, the S, the w, 
 are all remarkable. The small characters were then, 
 we see, known at that time, but reserved for private 
 use, and rarely mixed with their public monuments. 
 See Gruter dcvi. Manutii Orthograph. V. Maereo. 
 Mazochius." Thus Dr. Taylor. 
 
 The inscription is of the age of Tiberius : and, cer- 
 tainly, the inference, from the appearance of small 
 
 p2
 
 212 ITALIAN INSCRIPTION. 
 
 Greek characters in it, in favour of the authenticity of 
 the Herculanean inscription, is very just and strong. 
 As for the accents observable in the Latin lines, they 
 are the same with those which I have considered above 
 in the fourth chapter* of this Essay, falling contrary, to 
 the nature of the Latin tones, on ultimates and pras-ante- 
 penultimates, and sometimes two of them on one word. 
 
 * See Essay, p. 60 — 63. where is elder Vossius, concerning the accen- 
 given the opinion of Lipsius and the tiiation of such Roman inscriptions.
 
 MARCI MUSURI 
 
 CRJETENSIS 
 
 AD LEONEM X. 
 
 E L E G I A, 
 
 PLATONIS OPERIBUS 
 
 AB IPSO RECOGNITIS, 
 
 *T AB ALDO PR1MUM IMPRESSIS, PR&FIXA. 
 
 RECENSUIT, 
 
 ET VERSIONE LAT1NA, NOTISQUE ILLUSTRAV1T, 
 
 J. F.
 
 LECTORI S. 
 
 Dvje me potisshnum causae ad hoc carmen libro meo 
 subjiciendum adduxerunt : altera, quia a Ficino et Ser- 
 rano in editt. Platonis, quae fere solae jam doctorum 
 manibus teruntur, nescio quam ob rationem omissum 
 est, ideoque multo minus, ac debet, innotuit ; altera, ut 
 ex hoc Musuri opusculo cognosceretur, quales demum 
 ii essent viri, quibus Barbarorum nomen ab eruditis 
 quibusdam summa cum obtrectatione atque vitupera- 
 tione inustum est. 
 
 Ei yap yevoifXi]v k uvtoc a»^£ Bdpfiapog ! 
 
 Doctissimus D'orvillius (ad Charit. p. 348.) notat in 
 quibusdam locis magnificam heme Elegiam emendatione 
 indigere. Earn emendationem aliquoties praestitit CI. 
 Marklandus; qui cum carmen hoc nuper a me edi- 
 tum legeret, et dicpifidav in eo aliquando desideraret, 
 istud partim ex principe editione Aldina integritati re- 
 stituit, partim ex conjectura sua tentavit, et alioqui ex- 
 plicuit; et per literas compellatus, humanissime mecum 
 haec communicavit. 
 
 Cum anno proximo hoc Poema imprimendum cura- 
 rem, nulla mihi istius, praeter Aldinam et Basileensem 
 una cum Platonis operibus, editio, nee ulla omnino 
 versio nota est. Postea vero ab amico quodam moni- 
 tus, hanc Elegiam separatim esse editam a Philippo 
 Munchero, cum versione Latino, et elegantissima Zeno- 
 bii Acciaioli Metaphrasi Poetica Amstelod. mdclxxvi. 
 libellum eum sedulo, sed frustra quaesivi, donee copia
 
 216 
 
 ejus benigne mihi facta esset ab viro eruditissimo Ant. 
 Askew, M.D. ex ipsius bibliotheca optimis Codd. om- 
 nibus, praesertim Graecis, instructissima. Cum Mun- 
 cheri librum, mihi inde allatum, pervolverem, ut, quod 
 ex usu esset in illustrando Musuro, excerperem, plura 
 in versione ista corrigenda, quam mutuanda inveni; 
 observationes vero paucas, quas ad explicandas quas- 
 dam voces facerent, ex prasiatione exscriptas notis meis 
 interserui.
 
 ARGUMENTUM. 
 
 Exordio a Platone variisque ejus scriptis sumpto, qua^ quidem divcrsa 
 genere, Physica, Mctaphysica, Moralia ac Politica, laudatione per- 
 quam poctica rccensentur; ct facta doindc Diouysii Syracusani 
 (apud quern Platoneni olim aliquandiu diversatum esse testatur 
 Historia) mentione, ejusque cum Leone X. instituta comparatione ; 
 Musurus per artificiosam materia; continuationem, ad Pontificis 
 illius, doctorumque comitum laudes deflectitur. Quem versibus 
 non elegaiiter minus qiiam veheinenter v^r^wrixoXt, gravissima Pla- 
 tonis inducta persona, ad bellum adversus Turcas suscipiendum, ad 
 Graeciam servitute liberaudam, ad instaurandas excolendasque 
 Grascas literas hortatur. 
 
 Audiit, et voti Phoebus suecedcre partem 
 Mente dedit, partem celeres dispersit in auras. 
 Ut profugae liospitio frucrentur et urbe Camenae, 
 Annuit oranti : ut reduces patria alia videret, 
 Non dedit, iuqiie notos voccm vertore prouella*.
 
 M. MOTSOTPOT. 
 
 €)EI~E TlXoiruv, %vvo'&cc$s §eo~g Kcti locipo<rw ypug 
 
 Hoc(rcrvoni ^syccXco Xv\vi Trapso'Tirof^svoig, 
 ' Aof^a, %olt ovpccvov evpvv ocbXXo7Tqouv ore wuXuv 
 
 KeTvog sXa, ttt^vu $i<p(>cp e(p££opevog, 
 E* o' ccys vvv x,a.Tct£vi§i, Xnzruv xopov cvqolviuvuv, 5 
 
 'Ej yocv yvxo(pvuu sloB(ri^ 7rrepvyuv' 
 Ko» Xu^sv To£e revxog, Z,coxpa.TiK7Jv octpunuv 
 
 "Afjctpig £%£<, xoci arrjg ksovoc ytvs^Xoc (ppevog' 
 XI* evi KotrfjLOTSxyyjg oktoo TTTD-^ocg ovXvpt,7roio, 
 
 'E<£ ioiuv eXkuv ctpxervirov iffpasiriow , 10 
 
 AeiftotTO zocp'srocXi^ug' vtfcitv}V (rsXueoriv ctTreipoig 
 
 Aa,idocXXuv 9 tyjv ttso ytXzlofjizv aTtXuvia.' 
 Taj «y utpe^eiyg povotpeyyec&g Ifceropevirsu 
 
 v. 4. Ti-rnvx Ji'<f>pa I^e^o'^evoj.] Totns tonis, ad quae aMusuro in hoc exordio 
 
 hie locus adumbratur ex Platonis Phae- alluditur, sunt, Timaeus, Pliaedrus, 
 
 dro, p. m. 275. 'o ptv S>j /ulj/aj hyi- Phaedon, de Republica, et forte de Le- 
 
 f*iv h ovgavS Zei/j, nrwov ag/xa i\a.vyoov, gibus. — Markland. 
 
 TtrpSroj ito^virai, Siaxoa-|uav •Bravra. nal v. 9. oxri] Hacc dicunturde Plato- 
 
 t'!rifx.i\ovfA.tvog' r£ $' tnitai o-Tparja nis Physicis,quae ccelorum formationem 
 
 ©e£v ts xai Acuftomv, xari jvJex* /ulfii per multiplicem sphaerarum concava- 
 
 x.Bnoa-y,riy,ivti. Vide Maximum Tyrium rum, aliarum aliis interiorum, ordinem 
 
 Dissert, x. 4. et doctiss. Davisium ad explicant : quorum dogmatum partem 
 
 locum. Faciles jam intellectu sunt hi Ptolemaeus in sjstema suum postea 
 
 quatuor versus, et wtwvov a-opa. versu transtnlit. — Fost. 
 
 ultimo. Opera vero parlicularia Pla- v. 10. 'e£ i&i'a>v I'Xxan] Hie versus
 
 MARCI MUSURI 
 
 E L E G I A. 
 
 DIVINE Plato, comes Deis et Semideis praestans 
 
 Magno agmine summura Jovem stipantibus, 
 Cum ille per coelum amplum equos concitatissimos 
 
 Agitat, alato cumii insidens : 
 Age nunc descende, choro ccelicolarum relicto, 5 
 
 Ad terrain spiritualium remigio alarum, 
 Et accipe hoc volumen, quod Socraticos sermones 
 
 Continet, tuaeque honestos foetus mentis. 
 In quo Mundi fabricator octo sphaericos sinus coeli, 
 
 Ex suis trahens exemplar prascordiis, 10 
 
 Condidit celeriter: summum luminibus infinitis 
 
 Distinguens, quern quidem perhibemus Fixum ; 
 Reliquos autem ordine subjectos uno lumine splendentes 
 ccelavit, 
 
 ex illo Praxitelis epigrammate desump- Ibid. s^STopsus-fv] f. Ittt' iro^vnv — 
 
 tus videlur, quod apud Athenaeum ex- " cui subjecti sunt septem, qui versan- 
 
 tat. Statuarius iste ad exemplar Phry- tur retro contrario motu atque coelum." 
 
 nes, quara amavit, Cnidias Veneris si- Cic. sotnn. Scip. c. 4. Non vero ex toto 
 
 mulachrum finxit, et in basi stataas necessarium est sttt' Ito'^uo-ev, quia 
 
 Cupidinis, ad theatri scenam posita;, voces -raj l^^lrtt;, reliquos ordine, <\aem- 
 
 versus hos insculpsit : vis numerum expriment. sic illi, qui 
 
 _■».««••■ » 10 » octo irTuvaq nominavit, et unam exce- 
 
 ITpa§(TEXi)f, ov£7Tttirys, SinHnZaig-iv t^ana, , « , »» 
 
 »„■. , v «. . > *< P ll » a ' u&sFeujc per se erunt septem, 
 
 E§ itfm; eXxoiv afytrvmov xpajujj. , ..... . 
 
 sine ulla numeri istius mentione. Sus- 
 
 Atben. lib. xiii. p. 591. — Idem. picor vero hie Musurum confudisse 
 
 v. 13. ixfs^ei'i)?] Kara vox. usitalior I^E-ropii/crfv et s^iro^nvtrtv, et hoc ulti- 
 
 »<f>i|eiif. — M. mum voluissc. Dislinctionein verbo-
 
 220 MAPKOY M0Y20YP0Y. 
 
 Avto-jEV axpoTctT'/ig olvtkx. kivv [x,svug 9 
 * V H <r<pE<xg cUpwdi^oiKrct 7rccXifx,7rXocyKTOio keXsv^ov 15 
 
 Lu^si ccvayKocw, roci oe @u/i£6fievott 
 Ovx, cteKov<r<xi ewovtcu' opug sov o^ov ekcuttti 
 
 ' EfxwocXiv E^avuEi (3ccpdiov vj rdc^iov. 
 Hi £vi KUdgog tpug, ccwo yaiTjg viyocr ocEipuv, 
 
 IfAsoco u^cpcE QXayai KuWeog ovoctvioV 20 
 
 'Xli m Su fywxjxg (pv<riv ctffiopov, ov$\ c&pevvivov 
 
 X-KyvEvg oXXvpivov, aeTgc&g cc7roXXvyJvv]V' 
 ' AXXors Oioyavuv 7roXtv cvpocvoysiTOvot (puronv 
 
 Kn^Eig, o\,<ri [jleXei tstotvoc outouotruvrj, 
 Hoe xcu evvo[aitj xouporpctpog' oud oiir ekeivou 25 
 
 N00~(plV CC1TETpCX.TVETy\V O,0~TE0g 0(T(TE UTOCklV 
 
 Azdoog kou NEjjcEtrig. Tig ex.oc(ttcx. ke [AvSoXoysvoi 
 
 ' O<ro~oc $£07TVEV0~T0ig rccTtro IveQov o~eXictiv ', 
 Tag yE Xtz&cov cctpucoto ttoXiv £>cl<t 'iXq'iooi 7ra,a~Euv 9 
 
 ' Qcrcrtzg ouoqcvo^ev OEpKETUi qeXtog, 30 
 
 Pcoftviv ETTTotXotpoV) yccivjg KPOCTOg OUEV £%OU(TCtV' 
 
 l Wg dice pcE(T(rccTi7ig OvpPpig IXio-cro^Evog, 
 Koipocvog iLO"ws^ci}v 'srorccfjcuv, K£pctT7i<popog EKTIV 
 
 OvQag iricuvuv (3aXoixog AvtroviTig. 
 *EX§uv o , cv TixeXuv oXoo(ppovoc keiQi rvpccvvov, 35 
 
 Qpcxpxyov l,x.vXXyig XEvyocXEYjg Tpotpiftov, 
 YftpiCTYiV fzoviTEuu Aiovvcriov, dxXct yE OY\Eig 
 
 rum Togiieiv cocla re, sculpere, et -ropviv- p.m. 148. de figura mundi loquens, 
 
 £iv rotundare, tarnqre, notavit Salinas. dioit, quod Deus xuxXote^ec iuto i-rog- 
 
 in I'lin. Exeicil. et postea Beiitleius vivo-uto (in Voce media) Cicerone in 
 
 in not. ad Horat. A. P. v. 441. Admo- fragraenlu Tima-i, c. 6. liberius ver- 
 
 dum vetustus est liic error. Nam He- teute, idque ila tornavit,ut nihil effici 
 
 sychius Iiabet to^vei'ei, y\v<$u ; et toj- possit rotundius. Globus vel mbis rop- 
 
 vtvra], yXvTr-rai, pro rogevii, rogeuTat. Muirai, tornatur : poculum TO^fi/irai, 
 
 sed inulto magis yerisimile est, ut hi coclatiir. — M. 
 
 aeptem globi vel orbes dieautur to^veu- v. 22. Zjmveuj] Vox haec ex. Platone 
 
 tir9a.i, iornari, rotundari, quam ~ofiv- desumpta est, qui itidem ea utitur, 
 
 taSai, sculjii, caiari. Quo euim sensu 'Hy.iT; fjt-h yig i<r[A.iy "Vvyh, ^coov aQa*tt- 
 
 iioc ulliiuuin r Et ipse Plato in Tiuiico, tov b SviiTM Ka6u^y(A.iyo'/ y^ov^lm, tj $k
 
 MARCI MUSURI ELEGIA. 221 
 
 Protinus se oontrario motu atqae summum moveutes; 
 Qui ilios rapiens per remeabilem viam 15 
 
 Trahit necessitate, ill! vero quanquam compulsi 
 Non inviti sequuntur; veruntamen suum quisque cur- 
 sum 
 
 Contrario motu conficit, tardius vel citius. 
 In quo volumine honestissimus Amor, a terris in sub- 
 lime attollens, 
 
 Desiderio nos urit pulchritudinis ccelestis. 20 
 
 In quo tu animas naturam perennem, et, cum fragile 
 
 Corpus pereat, ostendisti non perituram. 
 Alibi nobilium virorum civitatem ad ccelos accedentem 
 
 Condis, quibus cime est veneranda justitia, 24 
 
 Et bene ordinatainstitutio, juvenum nutrix : neque ab ea 
 
 Urbe seorsum averterunt oculos 
 Pudor et Jus vindex. Quisnam singula enarret 
 
 Qua? a. Deo instinctis hisce inseruisti paginis? 
 His sumtis, adeas urbem dominam omnium, 
 
 Quot e co3lo sol aspicit, SO 
 
 Komam septicollem, terrae imperium semper habentem : 
 
 Per quam mediam Tybris labens, 
 Fiuviorum Hesperiorum rex, it corniger 
 
 Uber pinguetaciens gleba? Ausonise. 
 Illuc cum veneris, non Siculorum immanem ibi Tyran- 
 num, 35 
 
 Saevissimum Scyllae cxitialis alumnum, 
 Injuriosum in Musas Dionysium, sed utique invenies 
 
 JKHN02 wjos Kazov weguip/Aoo-sv h <p u*Jj. v. 36. 'l2,uo$ayov] Qnacri pnssit.quo 
 
 Ax'wch. p. 363. — F. sensu Dionysius dini potnerit aiy.o<pa- 
 
 v. 27. AiS«c jttti ^tfXiTit-] Ex He- yv,. Scribenduni pufo ktxoqayou, et 
 
 siod. "Egy. xa.1 'HfA?p. v. 198. — M. transferendum ad £*uXX»& vid. Horn. 
 
 v. 33. Keigctvot; x.. r. X.] Vertitistud Odyes. M. 245. seqq. Si offendant duo 
 
 Virgilii /En. viii. 77. " Corniger Hes- Epitlieta(vid. lDfra, v. 43.) legi polest 
 
 peridum fluvius regnntor Aquanim." — Xtvyahsoy rpoqifjiov. — M. 
 M.
 
 222 MAPKOY M0Y20YP0Y. 
 
 *£lt to9"' oficuov i$s~v (pcoTcc fjiurriv s7ro§eig' 
 AfjL(poTBoov, (rotpiyg re Trpopov, kcli ttoi^bvcc Xottov 
 
 '07T7Tocroi EvpuwTjv volistolovq-iv oXyv* 40 
 
 AotvoiocoijV, epurvjg QXcopzvTioog ccvTepct, urctTpvig 
 
 AauirpW a,Tctp MeSUuv roov ovopccvTOTarruv 
 TqXt^oov kolXov epvog, us&ocXeg, ayXccoKOip7rov, 
 
 lionrpiy Icactvvfjv, vuv d up o67reipe(nuv 
 Taiocuv ecrcyvoc, AEONTA, xpctTio~Tov oXvpirov 45 
 
 KXei^ou^ov, tov vsvp cog Aiog a,£ope§oi' 
 Tlctg ov ccvoc% (reQercti yovvovpsvog, ouoe rig ccvTta 
 
 ToXfAoi. crxyjTTTOvxuv dvTitpsptCe'pevui. 
 TLicrQag d oXfeioooapov ocvotxropov, zv^vg tpoc&Toig 
 
 ZeTo, IlXccTuv, KoXXovg oysut \v peyccpoig, 50 
 
 TluvToiocig ccperoiicri f^sfjLTjXoroig, yd ooc^Knocg 
 
 Tep7rvovg kcu 7riWT0vg Zyvog E7Tix9ovtou, 
 TlocvTcfotv ovg ocurog fA£T£7re[tyoc.To, yttxi cr(pi<ri %ot>ipu 
 
 TifjcqevTa. oioovg kcci "WoXvoXf3oc yipot,. 
 E£o%a o old 7rspi wqpi (piXei duo, tov (/,ev atp ip^g 55 
 
 'EXXolfiog, ov% evoc rcov, 01 7reXofzeo~§cc txvuv, 
 'Pccpoiiot Tpocmoi re xo&XEupevoi, aXXoe, TsruXutoTg 
 
 'ArQfiog, 4 ^Lirocpryig siksXov v\[A&£otg, 
 Acto~Kctp£uv yeveqg Ipixufieog uzpov ccutov, 
 
 Ka; Tpi7T(>ocru7ro(pccvovg ovvof/, f/ovTot, vsou. 60 
 
 v. 39. 'A|W4>oT£gov, a-of'mg « wfo'juov] Vid. D'orvill. in Chariton, p. 580. qui 
 Allusnm ad Homeri notum islud, citat ex Nonno, ITavToi'ai; afttycri /xi- 
 
 
 fjinXorig, et vertit, Omni virtute praditi. 
 Ibi locutionem explicat. — M. 
 
 V. 57. 'PdlfX3.~0l TpaixoiTE] f. 'Pt»f/.Ct~Q- 
 
 v. 43. T»Xe6o'ov] Munckerus habet V^aiKol yt. — M. 
 ©hXeSoov ; nescio unde : et interpreta- v. 60. Tpwf t>a-(ii'7ro$a.voZi\ f. Jearpoa-ai- 
 
 tur, Longinquum. notymovt;. Nam Janus biceps et bifrons 
 
 v. 49. avajtTogov] Bene Lie avaxTo- saepe occurrit. etiam quadrifrons : Ser- 
 
 {ov; cujus vocis notio duplex est, et vius ad iEn. vii. 607. et Macrob. Sa- 
 
 divinum et regium aliquod complec- turnal. 1.9. Quaero, ubi trifrons. Facile 
 
 tens. 'AvttJtTojaiv, va£y n oixojv Qaa-ihioiv. quidem fieri poluit, nt Musurus, Grae- 
 
 Hesych. — F. cos, non adeo accurate versalus faerit 
 
 t. 51. Tla.vToiai<;a.£fra.l!cri(A.tfj<,Kk6rct(;.~\ in Historia fabalari Latina. Sedmirum
 
 MARCI MUSURI ELEGIA. 223 
 
 Cui tunc similem videre virum frustra desiderabas ; 
 Utrumque, et doctrinae antistitem, et Pastorem popu- 
 lorum 
 
 Quotquot totam Europam incolunt ; 40 
 
 Laurentii filium, amcenae Florentiae stellam patrias 
 
 Splendidam : Mediceorum autem celeberrimorum 
 Virescentera pulchrum surculum, semper -florentem, dul- 
 ces fructus edentem, 
 
 Nuper Joannem, nunc vero infinitaruni 44 
 
 Gentium dominum, Leonem, qui praestantissimus cceli 
 
 Claves habet, cujus nutum ut Dei veremur : 
 Quern rex quisq; veneratur supplex, neq; aliquis illi 
 
 Audet sceptra gestantium se conferre. 
 
 Ingressus verofaustumsanctumq; palatium, statim ama- 
 tores 
 
 Tui, Plato, multos cernes in aedibus, 50 
 
 Omnigenis in virtutibus versatos, et sermonis socios 
 
 Amabiles ac sapientes terrestris Dei, 
 Quos ipse undecunque accivit, et ipsis gaudet 
 
 Honorifica donans et amplissima munera. 
 
 Prascipue vero ex animo diligit duos, hunc quidem ex 
 sacra 55 
 
 Graecia, non unum multorum, quales nunc sumus, 
 Romano-Grasci vocati, sed antiquas 
 
 Atticae aut Spartas Semideis similem, 
 Lascarinae gentis illustris summum florem, 59 
 
 Et triplices vultus gerentis [Jani] nomen habentis Dei. 
 
 est Aldum Manutiuni hunc errorem (si mensis divisionem in Nonas, Idas, et 
 
 error sit) non correxisse. Quod et de Calendas : Alii etiam apud Pierium 
 
 versu 152. dictum sit. — M. Valerium de Hieroglypbicis, indigitari 
 
 Ibid.'] Hoc unum est ex illis Musuri putant tempus prsesens, praeteritum, et 
 
 vocabulis, in quibus satisfacere sibi se futurum. An forte ob hoc triplex 
 
 posse negat Phil. Munckerus. " Quis tempus etiam Janus TgiTrgotrtuirtxp amt 
 
 praeterMusurum (rffrontem ilium appel- appellatur, et inde slatuae ei erectse 
 
 lavit ? Apud Hesiod. Theog. v. 287". sunt tricipites, quales non raro se vi- 
 
 pe* TjwajJivw ropwvtt quidam inter- disse narravit aliquando nobis Nob, 
 
 pretes Lunam intelligunt, ob triplicem Heinsius ?" Prasf. p. 10.
 
 224 MAPKOY M0Y20YP0Y, 
 
 Og \L £Tl TVT&OV eOVTOi, TtTOCTVip CtTZ (ptXTOCTOV ViOP. $ 
 
 Lrepyopevog, irep^i oy\ crrep^ev u,7T0 Kpccoiyg' 
 Ka,i poi creTvog ocov, nroog A^ocuooc pcovcrccv ocyovtrvjg, 
 
 Aet£ev ocpiyvurug povvog e r rtio~Toc^evog. 
 Tcv d erepov TpnrXouo-i xexoco-yJvov evesrivio-i, 65 
 
 Kat nrXoca^evroc rpioov X £ P <ri GQ$°fig xccqitcov, 
 BepfcixoYlv ypua,' "uTutvj^ oe crvvitrTooot ttocvtcov 
 
 ^v;zev ocuropoviTuv ovoctoc rovoe fteyag, 
 TlotvTct, 01 e^ocuouv pteXeov^ocru isropfpvpovTog 
 
 ®U[jlov, ava.7rrv(rcrcov r vjrop evepSev oXov. 70 
 
 KeTvot 07} o~ eo~ioovreg, ccyiv7jo-ov<rtv eg uwa. 
 
 Uocrpog' otariirao'lug oegeroci. uXXoc, o~v 7trep, 
 'Hi Sepig, ccwocvtov opufcoti vrcoog' iXutyi, Xe^ag, 
 
 \Q Uocrep, co 'woipctv iXaSi <roug ccyeXoctg' 
 Aeyyovo evpceveug oupov to, Tvep'AXaog olptuftcov 75 
 
 Ae-^/vjTocTg epi(pcov ypovrrrov ev kovoocicti, 
 Upofppuv coi 7rpo\'vj(Ti, oioTpetpeg' avrocp ccu,oi{3rjv 
 
 Tvjcro evepyeo'ivig Tires xeTvog &\vy\p, 
 OJ% \voc ol xpvcrcv re xcti ocpyvpov, ouo Iva, r sreu^jv\g 
 
 iLfA,7rXei7]v pyyecov Xocpvoococ 7rop(pvpeuv' go 
 
 AXX \v a-zrocr&ecnrvig fxotXepov srvp ccXXowpoo-ocXXou 
 
 Aavjog, rco vuv wczvr upic&vvvoftevx 
 ' OXXvrczi. cux ocieig, cog Euya.vetx.ig ev o&povpxig 
 YictvrcL nrXeoo XuQpov, ijTocvtcc nvXeu vexvuv. 
 Htxlouv oifjLoyvjv, tccci ^viXvTepuv oXoXvyvjv §5 
 
 v. 65. T;i7rXa~o-i] sc.Gncca, Latina, tat ii Graocos auclorespradegerel, sum- 
 el Italica. — M. ma cum auditorum fiequentia atque ad- 
 
 v. 68. aTToppwiuv] Fecit emu a score- miialione, turn etiam tanta ipsius dili- 
 
 tis, i. e. secretarium. — M. gentia, ul tolo vix quaiuor dies auno 
 
 v. 81. (UaXspov izruf a.A.A.OTTfoa-a.'K'Kou intennitterei, quill publice profitere- 
 
 *Ap>jof] In animo habuit Sopliiiclem tur ; afflicta demum bellis Venetorum 
 
 Q5dip. Tyran. v. 199. " h^ta. te tov pa- republica, Palaviuin deserere coactus 
 
 "Ktfov, of vuv ap^aXnof ao-rri<Sxv <$>\syei jj.i, est, et Venetias se conferee : ubi eas- 
 
 &c. 'AXXo7rp3s-aX\oLi"Aj>)i3f est ex Iliad. dem literas magna cum laude docait. 
 
 E. 831. — M. Annis post paucis, scilicet aim. mdxvi. 
 
 x. 83. Fvyanai^ Cum Musurus Pa- Romam a Leone X. auctoribus Alberto
 
 MARCI MUSURI ELEGIA. 225 
 
 Qui me, cum essem parvulus, ceu pater filium charis- 
 simum, 
 
 Dilectus, plurimuin dilexit ex anirao ; 
 Et mihi angustias viae, ad Graecam Musam ducentis, 
 
 Ostendit egregie solus sciens. 
 Alterum vero triplici instructum facundia, 65 
 
 Et formatum trium manibus solertibus Gratiarum, 
 Bembum praestantissimum. Magnus autem participes 
 ouinium 
 
 Arcanorum fecit aures hujus Pater, 
 Omnia ei declarans consilia revolventis plurima 
 
 Animi, explicansque cor funditus totum. 70 
 
 Illi vero te conspicati, ducent in conspectum 
 
 Patris : et ille amicissime excipiet : sed tu utiq; 
 Qua fas, sanctum apprehende pedem : " fave propitius 
 (dicens) 
 
 O Pater, O Pastor, fave propitius tuis gregibus. 
 Et accipe benevolus donum, quod Aldus optimus, 75 
 
 Subactis haedorum inscriptum pellibus, 
 Libens tibi mittit, nobilissime : vicem autem 
 
 Huic beneficio petit ille vir, 
 Non ut sibi aurum et argentum, non ut mittas 
 
 Plenam palliis arcam purpureis : 80 
 
 Sed ut extinguas perniciosam flammam mutabilis 
 
 Martis, qua nunc omnia deperdita 
 Jacent. Nonne audis, ut Patavinis in arvis 
 
 Omnia sint plena casde, omnia plena cadaveribus? 
 Puerorum lamenta et mulierum ululatus 85 
 
 Pio, Carporum principe, et Joanne Monovasiensis, Manilio Rhallo jam 
 
 Lascare, accilus est, ibique benignis- nuper mortuo, factus creditur. Euga- 
 
 sime exceptus. Anno vero jam ante nei vero sunt inter Alpeset mare positi, 
 
 tertio, quam Roraam commigraverat, et srepe pro Veronensibus, Patavinis, 
 
 opera Platonis ab Aldo priraum edita, &c.memorantur. Liv. init. lib.i. Plin. 
 
 prajstanti hoc carmine ad Leonem prae- lib. iii. c.20. Juv. Sat. viii. 15. Mar- 
 
 muniverat. Cujus qnidem poematis tial. xiv. epigr. 155, et alibi. — F. 
 gratia Arehiepiscopus Epidaurius,sive 
 
 Q
 
 22G MAPKOY M0Y20YP0Y. 
 
 OXo^ <T oXoij TifJLtvyj re §euv olxovg tb iroXiruv 
 
 AotpOOC7TT£l, [AOyBQUV T CCypOVOfJLUV KCCfACCTOVg. 
 
 "Oararuv o ocuff' Htpo&MTTog etpetcctTo, tccvt ccXuTroc^st 
 
 Ba.p&<xpog, ov crropyyjv ou<T bXbvjtuv \%oov. 90 
 
 TlcaxroV) aya£, ^ccpfjcyjv sptyvXiov, bvQso trcutriv 
 
 Tiutriv eipyjvyjv- tcui OiXoTTjTa, Uoctbd, 
 Z%ZTXioq tjv TtToi,y(jiV : ' Apvjg TroXvfisv^eg sg ccvrpov 
 
 'Xltre, X&oig (ppctfcctg tvu^loc Kocrupv^ea'iv. 
 AXXct <tu ftiv poyXoiiriv ctveXx.v<rov 7 yoe Xoyoio 95 
 
 AsTfcov idsiv Seiov Xarpicriv drpspsx 
 Eipvjvvjv woXvKupTTov, lutypova, QoTpvoooopov, 
 
 EipvjVTjv Kocrptco 7rotvTi 7ro9sivoroiT7]v. 
 AiiTup dpfouvftEvrctg tTwrpo'i.'utyov oc7ravrug 
 
 LOUDKoyzvcou czvofjLoig t-Jvztrtv ccivoXvkuv. 100 
 
 0\ "x^ovot. (louXeocruvTeg 'A%a«oa, vvv f^B^ccoccri 
 
 Nocvcri oie%7rEpc&<zv yy\v eg 'li]7rvyiyiv, 
 ZevyXav U7r£iXovvreg SouXbiov \w cw'/lvi Sqtreiu 
 
 ' Appiv, a'i(TTu(rBiv d obvofjux. Qsiotokcv. 
 ' AXXct (TV <5?j TTporepog tbv^ov (rtplcriv 0U7TVV cXs-bgov, 105 
 
 YlBfAtyocg sig ' A<rly\g [avoiu (pvXot ttboov' 
 XaXxeo9upvJKuv KsXrctcov Sovpiv bvvu, 
 
 l7T7rOVg KBVTOWTCQV TTpUOfTiV BtOQ^BVQVg. 
 AlQuVCOV fJLBTB7TBlTCX. (TOLY.B^^CiXoV E$VO£ if^VipUV, 
 
 Kca [a,bXxv 'ExQeTiyg 'Kefyfjt.otxoio vs(pog, 110 
 
 Tsppocvuv tb (pocXayyocg ccTTBipovccg ocvopoyiyctvTwv, 
 
 v. 86."Q*Tia-£^ev]f. "QjtTio-svav. M. dramate, v. 222, 223, 224. Ad eru- 
 
 v.95.^o X Xor^vavlx^ov] Aristoph. ditionem Musnri probandain pertinet, 
 
 Elpw- 306. ut intelligatur, ex quibus anctoribus 
 
 antiquis Imoia/; suas sumserit. Utinani 
 
 n ?' v f*°X Xo ~$ Ka ' /wupcavai'o-iv si? to <f5; p] ure s exhibere posseinus ! — M. 
 
 ave\Kv<rai v . 99. fytQfMBevras] De militibus 
 
 Tijv QeSjv nao-Zv piyia-rriv Jtai $i\a/A.- dictum, numero vel sorte lectis. Hesj- 
 
 itVKoni.Tnv. chins : a£&y.itveu, i^tra^irai : hoc est 
 
 Distichou praccedens est ex eodem quod nos dicimus, mustered. Eurip.
 
 MARCI MUSURI ELEGIA. 227 
 
 Misereri potuisset Cyclops, misereri potuisset Anti- 
 phates. 
 Ignis autem exitialis et Deorum aedes et civium domos 
 
 Devastat, et aerumnosorum agricolarum labores. 
 Quot vero pepercit flamma, haec perdit 
 
 Barbaras, non humanitatem neq; misericordiam ha- 
 ben§. 90 
 
 Siste, Rex, bellum civile, infunde tuis 
 
 Filiis pacem et amorem, Pater: 
 Quam prehensam dirus Mars in profundissimum antrum 
 
 Compulit, lapidibus occluso ostio alte defossis. 
 Sed Tu ipsam vectibus extrahe, et verbi 95 
 
 Divini cultoribus exhibe videndam securam 
 Pacem, fertilem, benevolam, uvss-feracem, 
 
 Pacem mundo toti maxime desiderandam. 
 Sed numero instructos praemitte omnes 
 
 In Turcarum barbaras gentes praedatorum : 100 
 
 Qui, subdita servituti Graecia, nunc ardent 
 
 Navibus trajicere in terram Iapygiam, 
 Jugum minantes servile se cervicibus imposituros 
 
 Nobis, et penitus perdituros nomen Christi. 
 Sed tu prior compara ipsis grave exitium, 105 
 
 Mittens in Asiae campos innumeras manus : 
 iEre-Ioricatorum Celtarum bellicum impetum, 
 
 Equos adurgentium promontoriis similes : 
 Ardentium deinde clypeatam gentem Iberorum, 
 
 Et nigram Helvetici peditatus nubem : 110 
 
 Germanorumque phalangas innumeras ingentium, 
 
 Supplic. 391. 2i-£ttTo? U Qaa-csi, Ka^i- cas, erit Christus ipse Deonatus: si a 
 
 T«££Tttt 'Bttoini, &c. — M. Qiiorwog, eril sacrosaucta Virgo, Dei 
 
 Ibid, awavra;'] Qainam sunt hi om- parens. Munckerus interpretatur, Dei- 
 
 nes? opinor anavTav, qui occurrant parte. Acciaiolus utramque significa- 
 
 Tnrcarum barbaris gentibus praedato- tionem expressit, 
 
 rum. vid. v. 105, 106. — M. " At Christo, et Mariae nominis exi- 
 
 y. 104. ©siotokou] Si a Qsiorojtoj du- titun." 
 
 Q 2
 
 22$ MAPKOY M0Y20YP0Y. 
 
 To7g o ewt Boettolvcov Xaov ccpyjl'cpiXuv. 
 X\u(Tv\q 6 IrciXivjg ho- ccXsvocto XEityuvct Ttrorpuv, 
 
 Ovoe otsfihoctcr^'f] oovpoccrtv otXXoOpouv. 
 AXXoi j&sv rpot(pepy;g ooXiyctq cK.va^rpy\<Ta.vnq 115 
 
 J\T^oi7riTovg, ocv oov} ytcti oioc f^eo'O'oysuv, 
 
 Kotl TTOTOl^M OlOL@CX.VTEg USl KSXoloOVTOC phdpOt, 
 
 Auo-ftev£eo-o~i ysvovg kyjool (pspoisv epov, 
 QwgvjX&evTsg, opou trvv Tlcciotriu ayxuXoro^otg, 
 
 ToTg voipcc. Tovpitixoov ocifxocri oevopevoig' 120 
 
 Avrocg ^tXiovocvg Bevetcov ccXog ixp^if^eaovruv 
 
 OuXupog, uJcuocXoig oXkolcti fACtpvcupevog, 
 Kat vesg Ictttocvuv psyccKYiresg, ovpeo-tv itroci, 
 
 At xopiKpotg kttwv evrog s^ovo-i ve(puv, 
 Eu-Jug eg EXXyictttovtov (v7rep KotpyyiVLtx. os <r<pewv 
 
 Atev ottipicftu (rrocvpog ccXz^iKotKog) 125 
 
 O^occr^coV y)v yccp re 7roXei BvCptvTioi TirpuTV 
 
 NoiTTifjLOv a,VTpatyy\ (peyyog eXev^spiyg, 
 Avtyju ksv §Xc6CT(r£iug tx/jioctfiocKsroio dpoacovTog 
 
 ZuVTgltylxg XEtpOiXviV' TOCXXoi OS ToTo fJL&Xvj 
 
 Bs7 tt,Xcc7rocovcc ysvoivro. Xsug on Sotpcog oceipocg 130 
 
 Tpouxog, o douXeia, vuv Kocrocrpyxo^vog, 
 Apj)(oay\g ocosryjg, IV eXsvSspov y)fjLoc^ i'oyjtoci, 
 
 MwyjcrBToci, ovrcc^cov oqiov IvoopvXMG' 
 Aurap £7T£t jcreivuo-iv ccXcco-ropocg, y 7rspocv lvouv 
 
 Q>£iryovTtxg xpxrepcx. y s^sXourucri /3iyi 9 135 
 
 AvTijpo&p o~u §so7g Iwivixtov vuvov ccsiouv, 
 
 Koci pceyocX^g xaipcov sivskoc xoLfjLpoviyjg, 
 Avdpouri viKyjrccTg, o-TEtpavYjCpopiz koccoct s^ovo-iv, 
 
 Acrioog a.(pvsi7jg ttXoutov kit e ipso- iov, 
 
 v. 115. nae-uc S'J f. ITas-Jif t*. — M. Turcas praelia secunda fecit. Inde 
 
 v. 120. TovgKaom al'fjiart huojj.ivoi{\ Crojam, praecipaam Epiri (quae nunc 
 
 Hoc ad Alexandri ducis Epirotarum, Albania est) urbem, Aruurathe oppug- 
 
 sive (lit a Turcis et vulgo vocatur) nante, parva inanu defendens, mirabilia 
 
 Scanderbecbires gestas videtur refeiri : virtutis exempla edidit ; per qua; Tur- 
 
 qni, cum ab Amurathe defecisset, pa- cis, alibi victoria elatis, magnum quoad 
 
 terua ditione reccpta, mulla adver.sus vixit terrorem incussit. — F.
 
 MARCI MUSURI ELEGIA. 229 
 
 Ad hos quoque Britannorum copias bellicosorum : 
 Et omnis Italian quot fugerunt reliquiae fatum, 
 
 Neque penitus fractae sunt hastis exterorum. 
 Alii terras longas emensi 115 
 
 Vias, per montes et per medium continentis telluris, 
 Et per fluviorum transmissi semper-resonantes rivos, 
 
 Hostibus mei generis cladem ferant, 
 Thoracibus muniti, simul cum Paeonibus curvos-arcus- 
 gestantibus, 
 
 Jam saepe Turcarum sanguine madefactis : 120 
 
 Sed mille navibus Venetorum mari imperantium 
 
 Densum agmen, velocibus navigiis pugnans, 
 Et naves Hispanorum praegrandes, montibus similes, 
 
 Quae cacumina malorum inter nubes habent, 
 Protinus ad Hellespontum (in summisq; ipsarum an- 
 teimis 
 
 Semper attollatur Crux salutifera) 125 
 
 Impetum faciant. Si enim urbi Byzantinae principi 
 
 Redux affulgeat lux libertatis, 
 Ipsum frangas immanis Draconis 
 
 Contusum caput, aliaque ipsius membra 129 
 
 Facile dissipentur ; quoniam populus animos tollens 
 
 Graecus, servitute nunc attritus, 
 Antiques virtutis, ut libertatis diem cernat, 
 
 Reminiscetur, vulnerans hostem usq; in viscera. 
 Cum vero interfecerint Furias hasce, vel ultra Tndos 
 
 Fugientes valida abegerint vi, 135 
 
 Illo die tu Deis triumphale carmen canens, 
 
 Etmagnam gaudens propter victoriam fortiter partam, 
 Viris victoribus, capita coronata habentibus, 
 
 Asias opulentas gazas immensas, 
 
 v. 121: Avto.% yiXiovauj] Connec- v. 107. recensentiir copiae terrestres, 
 tuntar haec cum praecedentibus ; ideo- quas contra Turcas mitti Masurus to- 
 que non plene distingui oportuit post luit : hie marine, nempe Veuet* et 
 huiftim;. v. 120. In superioribus, a Hispanac naves. — M.
 
 230 MAPKOY M0Y20YP0Y. 
 
 Tovokcicov afpsvog te, gwj<p£i/»V Te Kcu 'oX@ov, 140 
 
 c E^JCOJ/ragTiyV ov <tvveXe%e x?° v °S-> 
 Xepct Too'7Tuio\}'x t oiq $itt.occ<ra m £cci ccvopccKotg' ot o ecu 
 
 XKV\0X<X.QZiq TTOCT^q fJLV7\<TCC^EV0l (T^ETEO^g 
 
 MeX^ovrut >ca9"' o<5oV Ttrcttrjovoc, ztu tfpVhtp 07rXoig 
 
 'Opxy^ovTUi, oka $ U XP ayocXXopcEvot. 145 
 
 Koc) tots $q irari youocv cctt oupocvou euqvooeiccv 
 TlrvjcrsTcci 'Acrrpotlov TrpzcrQcx, Amy vWy&Trjfi, 
 
 MyxETi {AVjVtov(r<z pporotg' EffEi ovk et ocXit^ov, 
 'AXX Etrroa x9 vcr ov v '&& v y £v °S ypEoiwv, 
 
 XeTo §EpClO-TEV0VTOg oXvi j$0W, KOCl [X.ET bXEVgov 150 
 
 AvarcE^Euv, ov<rv\g nrocvTocx m V^piyig. 
 Koc) toc fjLEV e'i'Qs ylvoiTO. piocQyjptoccri vvv os ttocXocmv 
 
 'EXXvpcdv, di Va^, ccozEtrov oixopEvoig. 
 Qocpcuvov a Exo&roio (ptXocypV7rvovg U7ro(pv]Tocg, 
 
 Aupoig fAEtXicro-tov, xoc) yEpocEcrcri Qeoov' 155 
 
 tidVTotiwrrovQ re, TIccteo, ^uvocyslpocg vj pcEv 'A%a*wi/, 
 
 ,V H $e 'sroXvd'TFepBtov vtsocg Ecttteoiuv, 
 TlpuQij&oig, ytoci [avjte Qoevuv EirioEUEocg strtiXcov, 
 
 MqTE tpVljg, \M\T CUV UlfJLCLTOS EVyEVEOg, 
 
 'Ei> 'Pcopvi xocTccvoio~o~ov, E7ri(TTYi(rug (Ttpuriv ocvdoocg, 160 
 Oi (Tto^ovcri Xoyoov ^uTTvpov coyvyiuv. 
 
 v. 141. 'EfixovTas-nic] Sexagintaanni I. 136. qui, ut et Apollodorus Blbliotli. 
 
 a ConstaDtiuopoli capta jam elapsi fue- I. 2. facit eum unnm ex Titanibus. 
 
 ran t. — F. NotaiH istud Ovidii Metam. I. 149. — 
 
 v. 144. wpiJXiv] Callimachus Hymn. terras Ast ™ a reliqidt. H*c alibi ve- 
 in Jov. v. 52. catur J" 181 ' 1 ' 3 ' P ast> *• 249, Hunc lo- 
 cum Musuri non intelligo. Scripsisso 
 
 o5x* Se Ks&ptrif te TTBfl wpiX.v i^gfe potnit— AflTgafo «rgl<rg« Ai'o? 0(?*r«p : 
 
 o . avT0# nam Astraca seu Justitia erat Jovis et 
 
 Themidis filia. Sed probabilius puto, 
 
 item in Dian. v. 240. — M. Musurum memorise lapsu ita scripsisse 
 
 v. 147. ! A<TTgaiou — Aw-i Buy&rr.p] ut editur. Idem vult, quod Virgilius in 
 
 Quisnamsit hio Astrseus patey Justitiae, isto, Jam redit et Virgo. — M. 
 
 non invenio. Astrjeum pattern Vento- v. 151. AgE^iV] ita legcnduin vide- 
 
 rum video in Hesiod. Theog. v.378. tur pro vulg. hpt^'uH;. vid. D'orvill. ad 
 
 in quaa rem citatur a Servio ad /En. Chariton. 348. — M.
 
 MARC1 MUSURI ELEGIA. 231 
 
 Turcarum opesque, ac rerum copiam, et divitias, 140 
 
 Quas per sexaginta annos colleger unt, 
 Manibus tropaea ferentibus divides viritim : at illi 
 
 Spoliis gaudentes patriae reminiscentes sua? 
 Cantabunt per viam Pasana, et tripudium militare 
 
 Saltabunt, toto pectore exultantes. 145 
 
 Ac turn sane ad terrain latara a caelo 
 
 Devolabit Astrasi veneranda filia Justitia, 
 Non amplius irata mortalibus: quoniam non araplius 
 scelestum, 
 
 Sed erit aureum totum genus Hominum, 
 Te imperante toti terras, et post cladem 150 
 
 lmpiorum existente ubique tranquillitatc. 
 Et haec quidem utinam fiant. Literis vero nunc Veterum 
 
 Graecorum, o Domine, fautor adsis pereuntibus : 
 Et hortare Phcebi vigiles ministros, 
 
 Donis mulcens et muneribus sacris. 155 
 
 Omnesq; undecunq; Pater, collectos sive Graecorum, 
 
 Sive passim sparsorum filios Hesperiorum, 
 Puberes, et neque ingenii boni egentes, 
 
 Neq; speciei, neq; sanguinis nobilis, 
 In Roma inquilinos constitue, cum praefeceris ipsis 
 viros, 160 
 
 Qui servant vocum quasi scintillam vetustarum. 
 
 v. 152. Ktti t« /wev] Leoneru belli in <f>i«v, ovr ap <pphu$. — M. 
 
 Turcas gerendi ralionem inslituisse, v. 160. xaravao-o-ov] Academism 
 
 patet ex Paul. Jov. p. 92. — F. quandam Graecam Romse insliluit Leo, 
 
 155. 0££v] f. 6sou, sc. 'JSx&rmo. nisi auctoribus cum Musuro nostro, turn 
 
 malis not •yi^a.ia-a-i riaiv. haec enim vox Aldo, et J. Lascari ; quiquidem deinde 
 
 penultimam interdum corripit, ut in ipsi liuic Gj'nmasio praeeraut : ubi pu- 
 
 isto nescio cujus, eri ingeniosi ac nobiles, e Graacia un- 
 
 decunque acciti, alebantur et Romana 
 4 * ' simul lingua erudiebantur ; ne sermone 
 v '^ ov ' Grscco scite loquentium soboles inte- 
 nt Horn. Odyss. N. 128. 142. — M. riret. Plurirauin debenl docti monies 
 v. 158, 159. fjmn fpwav — (Ann huic Academiae. Hod. de Grasc. illuslr 
 $un\ Ex Horn. Iliad. A. 11,5. »Me p. 253. 301 F.
 
 232 MAPKOY M0Y20YP0Y. 
 
 Na/o/ev a cc7rccvBv9s 7roXv<rx.cx,p()p,oio xvooipov 
 
 Nyi'ccduv 7Tpoxou.7g yeiroveovrot copov. 
 Tea F exoioy][A,£iyjg ovoy, sivj KVOioiveiDTjg 
 
 ZijAw tw TrpoTepqg, v\v ttot eyca vepopyiv, 165 
 
 K.ovpoig ev(pvs£<T(riv ewKrTUfAivuq oixpi^uv, 
 
 Tovg y uvctfjupwicntcdv uv 7rapog txuroi ktolv. 
 'AAA* y\ ptsv ovj oXuXe. <rv o vjv xo&ivvjv ccvotipyvvig, 
 
 "EvQev up svptccOiYig 7rvpo~og ocvoLino^Evog^ 
 Botiov <X7ro PTTivavjpog, ccvolttXyictei pothot sroXXav 170 
 
 ^Myotg vjtQeav, (purog a,xv}f>o&<rtou* 
 *Ev 'PwftYi oe nev uuSig ccvr&qcretoiv 'AOyivoci 
 
 'Avt/ rot 'iXiro-ov @vp£piv cUpeityo&pevou. 
 TocvrocTOt EKT£Xe<ra,VTi nXeog, Ylocrtp, ovpocvofAVjKEg 
 
 , ¥ J Q"XjxTiolg $•*£< fjt,s<r(p eg 'TTzrep&optoov. 175 
 
 Hoioc yocp ttote yXcoo~irot, Tevjv 7roTov (tto^oc (prjftqv, 
 
 *H dyopvjTctuv , vj kou uoioo'nroXciiv 
 Ov% ocv l(pvptvvio~£iev ; apiuvowcrei de rig ocluv 
 
 TqXstpc&vrj roiTjg Trpvfeiog ayXxYvjv ; 
 Tuutoc reov yeverypog uoioipov, vjoe 7rpcm<x.7r7ruv 180 
 
 TlcCVTOCg S7T CCvQpUTTOVg QXiVO^OC ^VjKOCV, ccva^' 
 
 Tuv os <re9eu irpoTEpuv (3a,£ig kocxvj 'Ap%tepj]uv 
 KccKKEXUTc&i, are ov; 7rocpc7rocv ccpeipaveuv, 
 
 T. 164. ixaJujUEiJ]? legitur, quod idem v. 167. ava j ui 1 uviia-»a.'v] Haec verba 
 
 est atque 'AxaSujUEiac : quod loci nomen ad illud Platonis dogma referuntur, 
 
 dnclum est ab anliquo quodam heroe quod scientiam omnem rerumque cog- 
 
 Ecademo, qui euru Tyndaridarum tem- nitionem monet tantum esse Reminis- 
 
 poribus tenuit. Cum is suburbanus centiam. " Discere nihil aliud est, 
 
 locus esset amoenior, publice erat ab quam recordaii." Cic.Tusc. I. 24. qui 
 
 Atheniensibus emptus, luco, portici- et alibi : " Homines scire, pleraque an- 
 
 busque instructus, doctorumque prae- tequam nati sint, quod jam pueri cum 
 
 cipue factus disputalionibus accommo- artes difficiles discunt, ita celeriter res 
 
 dus ; quas cum ibiaSocratis discipulis iunumerabiles arripiunt, ut non turn 
 
 saepissirae haberenlur, disciplina inde primum accipere videantur, sed re- 
 
 Academica, quam post Socratem prin- minisci et recordaii." de Senect. 21. 
 
 ceps illustravit Plato, nomen suum Loci vero Platonis, ad quos Cicero et 
 
 dedux.it, apud posleros celebratissi- Musurus respexerunt, sunt in Menone. 
 
 mum.— F. p. 81, 82. Pluedro, p. 249. et Phaedone,
 
 MARCI MUSURI ELEGIA. 233 
 
 Habitentq; procul a multum trepidante tumulta 
 
 Naiadum fluentis vicinara domum. 
 Et huic Academiae nomen sit viros insignienti 
 
 iEmulatione veteris, quam olira ipse ordinavi, 165 
 Pueris ingenuis docte confabulans, 
 
 Eos admonens illorum, quae ante ipsi sciebant. 
 Sed ilia quidem nunc periit. Tu vero si no vara exhibueris, 
 
 Inde doctrinee lampas accensa, 
 Parva ex scintilla, implebit plurimorum 170 
 
 Mentes juvenum lumine purissimo. 
 In Roma sic iterum reviviscant Athenae 
 
 Ilisso Tybriin mutantes. 
 Tibi haec si perfeceris gloria, Pater, caelum pertingens 
 
 Ad fines usque ibit Hyperboreorum. 175 
 
 Quae enim unquam lingua, tuam quodnam os famam, 
 
 Vel oratorum, vel etiam poetarum, 
 Non celebraret ? quaenam abolebit aetas 
 
 Late conspicuum talis facti splendorem ? 
 Talia tui genitoris celebre, et proavorura 180 
 
 Omues apud homines nomen fecerunt, o Domine. 
 Te vero qui antecesserunt, inhonesta fama Pontificum 
 summorum 
 
 Diffusa est, ut qui omnino marte insanirent, 
 
 ubi Cebes ita Socrateni alloquitur : de ea Budaeus dicit, ornatus lantum 
 
 xa.T ix.t~v6v yi \6yov, m £aJxpa.TE; (ei a\r,8n; gratia, et explementi orationis; addi 
 
 lo-rj) ov a-b iicvQai; (tapa. Xsj/eiv, on hfxTv potest, et versus. — JVf. 
 h MA'QHZIS ovx. a\Ko ti n 'ANA'MNHSIS v. 180. j/evet^oj] Laarenlii Medicei ; 
 
 Tvyxavu oZa-a. §. m. Vid. Max. Tyrii cujuserat filias Joannes, postea Leo X. 
 
 Diss. 16. et Davisiiun ad locum : item Laurentius aulem, ut supra diximus, 
 
 ad Tuscul. Disp. I. 24. Ha;c vero a Musarum amantissimus, per Joh. Las- 
 
 Pythagoreis didieisse videtur Plato. carim, Constantinopolim ad Bajazetem 
 
 vid. Jainblicb. c. 14. — F. a se Iegatnm, bibliotbecara suam Gras- 
 
 v. 168. 'axx' ri fjt.iv $h oXaiXe] Niiv Je to cis voluminibus referserat. Paul. Jo v. 
 
 ^*ev JioXwXev — in Epigram. Slratonisci- in vit. Leon. p. 35. — F. 
 tatiD'orvillio in Chariton, p. 197. — M. v. 182. fttgij xaxii — xaxKE^uTai] Ex 
 
 v. 173. avTi toi] To( hoc loco non Plutarch, in Lacaen. Apopth. p. 241. 
 
 ponitur pro Dorico, Sol, ut opinor, sicut A. xaxi f«/x« teU xaxxE^tn-af. — M. 
 fit in versu,174. sed, quemadmodum
 
 231 MAPKOY MOYSOYPOY. 
 
 Kui re (piXqdovvTuv ccvopoxTcccrtctig a.\eysiva,7g, 
 
 K«» jcspuiCo[i£VOts ourrefTi repTrofisvcov. 185 
 
 TOI~A <rv Ttrccp(pcc[A£vo$ Trsicreig, cr'sreuoovra, Trocpopptuv, 
 
 ©£?£ YlXoCTUV' £7T£l 01 7TOiTpiOV £G~TIV iQoq 
 
 Eipqvyv CpiXeeiv, Ixocg Avcovog coQepsv cuqg 
 
 P^<poc, TuXuvpivov /3uo£oipo(pcovov aprj, 
 'HiJ' EXixtavtcificov 'JLXXqviov ocXcrog otysXXsiv 190 
 
 Oo7TviK£cr(n (puruv oipn xvicrxopsvuv. 
 Na< fJidv evpeyaQovg creo poptpvjg £Z7rp£7r£g tidog, 
 
 K.oci tb Osoig ixbXyjv ccOc&va.Toto'i (pvvjv, 
 Kcci yspocoovg copovg, (3oi9v^uirifi£VTci6 tb koo-jaqv 
 
 HclXXbvxov xopv(pv;g xsTvog oiyoctrcra^cBvog, 195 
 
 Aio£<r$sig t£ rs&o&g 7roXiuv, xoa o~£\jlvoc ysveia, 
 
 Ou vpiovcrTvi<r£i o~cov V7To9y;[A,ocrvvuv, 
 U£i9oT §£X%iv6c*> K7iXovp£vog. 'AA AA' TOI upa 
 
 YlTqVOV BUVTl §BUV CtpfACC KCi9l7TTOCf&evUt. 
 
 v. 186. ffapo^Eow] Hoc ipsum quo- nemo enim ad singulos apices ila es>t 
 
 niodf/ vertere debeam, hactenus ignoro. Lynceus. Mancker. praef. p. 12. 
 
 Musuro significare videtur, incitans. v. 190. 'EXiJt&waSwv 'EXXwov aX^o;] 
 
 Sedego mallem pro eo ^ita^fxxy, con- i. e. ' E\iy.tuna$uv seu Mov/rZv 'EXXw&aiv 
 
 tractum nempe ex wa^y.acuv. nago^sa) aXirof, Musarum Gratcarum nemus. 
 
 enim est, eadem statione utor, ab op/Aot; 'Ogwtixeevi yvrwv, &c. alludit ad Aca- 
 
 statio navium ; sed wago^aa) est incito deniiam Grsecam, quani Leo modo in- 
 
 ab ogfjiri, impetus. Si retineas nagop- stituerat. vid. ad v. 165. Hesycb. 
 
 (Aioov, et sic metaphorice interpreteris, KwVkei, <ruXXa^|3av£i. Kvla-xtrai, eynvo; 
 
 in eadem statione sive aula cum Leone yivttcu. — M. 
 
 degens ; id nimis, nisi fallor, erit puti- v. 194. yegafiout; aifxoui] Platonis no- 
 
 dum. Musurum ipsura hie errasse men erat priinum Aristocles : quod 
 
 quis ausit credere? Proximum foret postea Platone mutavit Gymnasiarcha 
 
 et tolerabilius statuere.iu editioue Ve- am t£v nXcnrinv ajf/,tuv. — F. 
 
 neta (licet ei corrigenda? Musurus prse- * Miror sane, unde Erasmus in Ci- 
 
 fuerit) remansisse hoc erratum typo- ceroniano M. Musurum, cum " virum 
 
 graphicum, napo^ioiv pro itapypw : insigniter eruditum in omni disciplina-
 
 MARCI MUSURI ELEGIA. 2i5 
 
 Et delectati essent caedibus horrendis, 
 
 Et populatis urbibus gauderent." 185 
 
 Talia tu admonens persuadebis, currentein incitans, 
 
 Divine Plato ; quoniam ei patrius mos est 
 Pacem amare, procul ab Ausonia repellere terra 
 
 Celeriter durum barbaro cum strepitu Martem, 
 Et Heliconiadum Graecum nemus augere 190 
 
 Surculis plantarum jam fructus habentium. 
 Magnae profecto tuae formas decoram speciem, 
 
 Et Diis similem immortalibus habitum, 
 Et augustos humeros, et demissis comis venustatem 
 
 Penitus albicantis capitis ille admiratus, 195 
 
 Reveritusque sanctam canitiem, et venerandam barbam, 
 
 Non respuet, quae subjicias monita, 
 Suada flexanima delinitus Sed tibi tempus est 
 
 Alatum linquenti Deorum currum devolare. 
 
 ram genere" dixisset, taraen " in car- Epigrammata : inter alia illud Platonis 
 
 mine snbobscurum et aftectatum" no- operibus prajfixum." Magnis hoc lau- 
 
 taret. Hoc certe carmine nihil non dihus eftert Munckerus in Prscf." nihil 
 
 modo gravius elegantiusve, sed nee in hoc genere gravius, nihilque elegan- 
 
 dislinctius dilucidiusve potest exquiri. this uspiani se legere" affirmans. Nee 
 
 Tale Aldo, Leoni, Gyraldo, Jovio ac minoribus Dan. Heinsius in prajfat. 
 
 caeteris omnibus fere doctis visum est : Pepl. Graec. Epigram. Musurus dig- 
 
 et Jovius quidem non dubital " cum nitalem Archiepiscopalem vix dum 
 
 antiquis elegantia comparandum esse," adeptus, mortepraereptus reliquitanuo 
 
 dicere. D'orvillius in Animadvers. ad 1517. In honorem deinde ejus, Romaj 
 
 Charit. Aphrod. p. 348, carmen hoc sepulti, hoc sepulcro epitaphion in- 
 
 admirandum, si tempus spectes, et scriptum est : 
 
 Elegiam magnificam vocat. Ger. I. Anlonius Amiternus Marco Musuro 
 
 Vossius in libello de poetis Grascis, Cretensi, 
 
 p. 81. " sane praeclarum Musuri Cre- Exactae diligentias Grammatico, 
 
 tensis ingenium testari (ait) pauca ilia Et rarae felicitatis Poetas, posuit.
 
 REVIEW 
 
 OP 
 
 SOME PASSAGES IN THE PRECEDING ESSAY, 
 
 IN REPLY TO 
 
 Dr. G.'s SECOND DISSERTATION. 
 
 Totydp ra fiev &S£avra ?>t)\w<tu>' <tv Sk 
 'Oijetav aKorfv toiq efidlc Xoyoig cifioiig, 
 Ei fit) ri Kaipov rvyx&vti), fieSupnoooy* 
 
 SOPH. ELECT.
 
 R E P L Yi 
 
 &c. 
 
 When I first submitted the foregoing Essay to the 
 public, I hoped, though not for a general concurrence 
 with me in opinion, yet for the pardon of those from 
 whom I differed, and even for the favour of some lovers 
 of ancient learning - , to whom I flattered myself that my 
 attempt would not be displeasing: one object of which 
 was, to prove their just right to some grammatical re- 
 mains of old Greece, of which they have long been pos- 
 sessed ; and at the same time to shew, together with the 
 genuineness, the true nature and use of those marks, 
 which appeared to have been of late not properly un- 
 derstood. 
 
 Nor have my hopes on this occasion been altogether 
 disappointed : my endeavours having met with the favour- 
 able acceptance of some scholars, though they have 
 not escaped the censure of a few others from whom I 
 have dissented, particularly of Dr. G., who hath ex- 
 pressed his displeasure against me in a book published 
 a few weeks ago, when this second impression of my 
 Essay was nearly finished, entitled " A Second Dis- 
 sertation against pronouncing the Greek Language ac- 
 cording to Accents. In Answer to Mr. Foster's Essay 
 on the different Nature of Accent and Quantity." This 
 title of his book immediately reminded me of the old 
 observation, that error is allied to ambiguity. Of this
 
 240 REPLY TO DR. G.'s 
 
 Dr. G. hath here given us an instance, by involving 
 himself, and, as far as he could, the question, in the 
 obscurity and ambiguity of the word accents. This 
 word has been used in so many uncertain senses, that, 
 as I before remarked,* it was necessary to deter- 
 mine and fix its signification, before it could be satis- 
 factorily applied : and this I hoped I had done by con- 
 fining it to tone alone, distinct from the present visible 
 notation of it, and from quantity. Dr. G.f acknow- 
 ledges that I did right in laying down this distinction. 
 But it is not agreeable to him at all times to observe it. 
 He therefore in his title has left it doubtful, whether by 
 " pronouncing the Greek Language according to Accents," 
 he means, according to the common perverted use of the 
 present accentual marks ; or, according to that ancient 
 and true use of them, for which I contend. If he means 
 the words in the latter sense, I dissent from him as widely 
 as he does from antiquity : if he intends the former, he 
 well knows that I agree with him, having expressly 
 condemned % the vulgar misapplication of the marks, 
 and carefully shewn that, as they did not and could not 
 originally belong to quantity, so neither should they be 
 referred to it now, or considered as the notations of a 
 long time. However, in both senses, he should have 
 said, " according to the accentual marks," not " accord- 
 ing to accents." But the words of the title, as they now 
 stand, are false in one sense, and true in another ; and 
 therefore admirably suited to the purpose of again en- 
 tangling the question, which was unravelled. 
 
 'AXXa <rb pvaai vtt 'HE'POS vlag 'AXAISTN, 
 
 rioojcrov o' Af'GPHN, £o£ 8' 6(j>6aXfioiaiv iSiadai) 
 'Ev St •PA EI kcu 6X( aaov. 
 
 Let his positions and arguments be set in a clear light, 
 
 • Introd. to Essay. t Essay, p. 159, and in many other 
 
 t Second Diss. p. 81. places.
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 241 
 
 that I may be sure I understand them ; and to the force 
 of them (should it even be to my own confutation) I 
 will readily submit. Truth is my object in this inquiry, 
 not triumph : and truth I shall gladly embrace, whether 
 I am indebted for it to my adversary's discovery or my 
 own. 
 
 And, indeed, when I published my thoughts on this 
 subject, it was with the hope, not that I should establish 
 every thing, which had occurred to me upon it, as right ; 
 but that, after having cleared the question from some 
 intricacy with which it had been perplexed, and shewn 
 what was false, I might perhaps be more fully informed 
 by others in what was wholly true. I should therefore 
 have thankfully received any farther lights thrown on 
 those points which I had not rightly seen. But this ad- 
 vantage of better instruction in some articles, which I 
 hoped to derive from my opponents (if any should arise) 
 I have not yet received ; having met indeed with some 
 censure, but very little information. 
 
 But this displeasure of Dr. G. is not, it seems, so 
 much on account of himself, as of the University, for 
 whose injured name he cannot help feeling much resent- 
 ment, though little for the confutation of his own opi- 
 nions. The name of the University is therefore the first 
 thing urged against me. In doing which, he hath endea- 
 voured to divert in some degree the public attention 
 from his own mistakes (most of which he hath prudently 
 by his silence acknowledged and renounced, though a 
 few he still maintains) and attempted therefore to blend 
 the cause of the University with his own : which how- 
 ever I know not that either the University itself, or the 
 public, doth conceive 10 be one and the same. But it 
 may be convenient for him, that the inquiry should now 
 be, not whether his principles or mine are right, but 
 whether the authority of a great University should not 
 outweigh that of an humble individual. And so Dr. G. 
 steps aside, and in some measure evades the question 
 between himself and me, by leaving me to another with 
 the University. 
 
 R
 
 242 REPLY TO DR. G.'S 
 
 This question with mc he hath in another sense like- 
 wise evaded, as far as he can, by shifting it from one 
 point to another totally different. For let it be remem- 
 bered, that his original position was, " that the present 
 system of accents is not founded on the genuine pronun- 
 ciation of the Greek language, which was agreeable to 
 quantity, but on a corrupt pronunciation, which began 
 and increased in later ages."* My position, on the other 
 hand, was directly opposite : " that the present system 
 was fixed in an age of pure Grecism, was agreeable to 
 quantity then, and may be so now." This was the main 
 point in dispute between us : and, not to mention se- 
 veral other articles wherein we widely differed, a very 
 material one this was ; though any one now upon seeing 
 the state of the controversy, as lately represented by 
 him,f would imagine that our sentiments on this subject 
 had all along coincided, and therefore wonder why I 
 should have been at the trouble of writing so many 
 pages in combating a shadow. But most of those for- 
 mer points appearing to him at present no longer defen- 
 sible on his side, he now agrees with me, and would 
 have it likewise supposed that he agreed with me before. 
 However, his present agreement with me, or rather 
 renunciation of his former opinions concerning the genu- 
 ineness of our present system, I accept, with observing, 
 that he now turns the question from the faithfulness of 
 our marks to the modern use of them, from the authen- 
 ticity of our system to the expediency of its practical 
 application in England : which are questions entirely 
 distinct from each other. I foresaw that an opponent, 
 when pressed hard on the article of their authenticity 
 and right position, would be very likely to give that 
 turn to the controversy, which Dr. G. has now given it: 
 and accordingly, that two different points might not be 
 confounded together, I carefully premised the limitation 
 
 * These are the words iu which Dr. Dissertation, p. 145. 
 G. draws up his conclusion from the t Second Dissert, p. 77, 78. 
 
 premised arguments, in his former
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 243 
 
 gf my former subject of inquiry, by declaring that my 
 main object of discussion then was, to find out, " as a 
 fact, what the ancient pronunciation was :* and whe- 
 ther our present marks were faithful notations of it."f 
 But since that is now settled, and by silence conceded 
 to me, I am not unwilling to follow the question in that 
 direction, which Dr. G. has now given to it; having 
 indeed already touched on this part of the subject in 
 the last chapter of my Essay, and being ready to ad- 
 vance much more, than will probably be required of me, 
 upon that or any of those points, on which he has in- 
 sisted in his Second Dissertation. 
 
 The first thing which there appears against me is the 
 name of the University, on which, however foreign from 
 the merits of the cause between us, Dr. G. has written 
 (and perhaps, because it is foreign) with more zeal than 
 on any thing respecting our question. To this part I no 
 more decline an answer, than to any other of his book ; 
 acknowledging, that the authority of an University must, 
 in every literary case, be allowed to have great weight, 
 and is not wantonly to be disputed. But on this occa- 
 sion I conceive the far weightiest authority to be on my 
 side. I say nothing of arguments and reasons: I mean 
 here authority of persons ; the authority of every emi- 
 nent scholar, except that visionary man Isaac Vossius, 
 from the age of Aristarchus down to the present time. 
 Particularly in respect to modern grammarians, I shall 
 not, I trust, justly give offence to any man, if I place 
 Budasus, H. Stephens, Salmasius, Grotius, Casaubon, 
 Hemsterhuis, Wesseling, D'orville, Alberti, Valckenaer, 
 (not to mention some very respectable names at home) 
 in a rank of learning and judgment superior to those 
 modern teachers and editors of Greek, with whom I am 
 now concerned. And if therefore they charge me with 
 rudeness for questioning themselves, I will retort the same 
 charge on them, for questioning their superiors. For, to 
 
 * Essay, p. Ib6. t Ibid. p. 181. 
 
 R-2
 
 244 REPLY TO DR. G.'S 
 
 depart from the uniform and established practice of 
 those great scholars, is at least calling the propriety of 
 it in question. If they do not dispute it, nay, if they 
 do not disapprove it, why reject it? 
 
 The more weight is allowed to the authority of an 
 university, the more necessary it becomes to point out 
 any thing that is really defective in its practice : be- 
 cause the sanction of such a name may propagate and 
 establish the defect. Had maimed Greek copies come 
 from a press at Birmingham, at Norwich or Gloucester, 
 or even at London, it might not have been worth regard- 
 ing. And this, perhaps, was the reason, why Dr. 
 Twells took no notice* of the suppression of accentual 
 marks in that edition of the Greek Testament which 
 was inaccurately published at London, in the year 1729. 
 Such an omission, authorized only by a common press, 
 may be confined to those particular copies so printed : 
 the credit of the press is not sufficient to influence others 
 to follow such an example. But that of a great uni- 
 versity, (the credit of which is, at least ought to be, the 
 highest in ancient literature) if it adopts an error, is 
 sure to spread it ; plus exemplo, quam errato nocet, its 
 influence is powerful and extensive: and on that ac- 
 count, whenever its example is not right, it more parti- 
 cularly requires reformation. 
 
 The charges, which I have drawn upon myself by 
 my manner of mentioning the university, of self -conceit ,f 
 opprobrious language, % indecency, § acrimony, \\ and great 
 assurance,^ in falsifying a testimony, are what I should 
 be as unwilling to return as to deserve. 
 
 The four first of these being general charges, and 
 urged in the common language of controversy, I shall 
 leave to themselves ; especially as I perceive that I 
 share in them with a better man** than myself on a like 
 
 * Pref.to Second Dissert, p. v. || Ibid. 
 
 t Ibid. p. v. and Dissert, p. 89. IT Ibid. p. 18. 
 
 t Ibid. p. 11. ** Some of the terms of reproach, 
 
 § Ibid. p. 14. in which Bp. Gardiner enforced his
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 245 
 
 occasion : the last being particularized by a fact does, 
 on that account, better admit an answer, as on account 
 of its severity it certainly requires one. 
 
 I am accused " of citing Mr. Cheke's declaration on 
 my side, which he not only did not make, but which 
 cannot even be* inferred from any thing which he has 
 said on this subject." How is this gross charge 
 against me supported ? Why thus : " Accents came not 
 within that professor's proposed subject of inquiry in 
 his ' exposition of the forma totius rei,' and I myself 
 acknowledged that they had no share in the dispute be- 
 tween him and Bishop Gardiner." I did so : they could 
 not be disputed ; for no scholar, that I know of, engaged 
 in that controversy, dreamt of their being wrong : but 
 though they were nota point in dispute, nor included with- 
 in the proposed subject of discussion, they yet occasion- 
 ally were mentioned in the course of it, as appears from 
 two passages cited by me,f where Mr. Cheke's declara- 
 tion is notinferred,butexpressed, in favour of my cause. A 
 man of Dr.G.'s erudition is surely not to be told, that the 
 contents of almost all books exceed the outlines marked 
 by their authors at their entrance upon the subject ; and 
 that it is impossible therefore to judge of what may occa- 
 sionally arise from what is professedly laid down as the 
 general argument. This I have myself found to be the 
 case in every book which I have yet perused. Which 
 shews only, that a person, before he asserts what a treatise 
 doth, or doth not contain, should know somewhat more 
 than its title, introduction, or first chapter ; which may, 
 
 edict, in answer to Mr. Cheke's re- me the honour to join my name with 
 
 monstrance, are these : arroganiia, p. Mr. Cheke's in the charge of unhand- 
 
 163; ■philautiu, 165 ; inanis loqiiacitus, some and contemptuous expressions, 
 
 ibid. ; irreverens illusio, ibid. ; lingua seems to think that the professor was 
 
 virulentia, 213 ;arrogans liceniia, ibid.; not only smartly, but justly repri- 
 
 supi'.rbia et petulantia, ibid. ; auducia, manded by the bishop in that answer. 
 214 ; temeritas, 217. Dr. G. in Sc- * Pref. to Second Diss. p. xv. 
 
 cond Dissert, p. 89, where he does t Essay, p. 199. 203.
 
 246 REPLY TO DR. G.'s 
 
 indeed, acquaint him with the forma totius rei, but not 
 with the tota res. Whatever Dr. G. may conceive of 
 the professor's work, from the premised exposition of 
 it, certain I am, that, before I published my Essay, I did 
 read, and do read there now, the following words : Ne- 
 que video quid doctis relinquatur ut mutent, non in verbis, 
 non in sonis, non in spiritibus, non in accentibus, deni- 
 que in nulla ne minima quidem lingua parte.* In which 
 words, if I am capable of interpreting them rightly, 
 Mr. Cheke declares, that " he sees not what is now left 
 for scholars to alter in the Greek language, either in the 
 words, the sounds, the spirits, the accents, or any 
 the minutest part of the language." He speaks of that 
 artificial form of the language, in which he received it, 
 and of which our present visible accentuation made a 
 part.f And he not only here says, that this part is to 
 be kept inviolate, but in another passage affirms, that it 
 was actually applied to its proper use in pronunciation, 
 consistently with quantity, by his friends and scholars. 
 JDe multis, qui hodie Juijus lingua studiosi sunt, asseve- 
 rare possum, illos omnem hanc pronunciations formam 
 ita tenere, ut verum literarum sonum, quantitatem, 
 accentum, summa cum facilitate ac suavitate eloqui 
 possint:^ By these words I have supposed that Mr. 
 Cheke says : " I can affirm of many Greek scholars at 
 present, that they are so far masters of my method of 
 pronunciation, as to be capable of expressing the true 
 sound of the letters, their quantity, their accent, 
 with the greatest ease and sweetness." If, in this con- 
 struction, I have faithfully followed the sense of my 
 author, the reader will see, though Dr. G. cannot,§ upon 
 
 * De pronunc. ling. Grae. ad Steph. video quid doctis relinquatur ut inu- 
 
 Episc. Vinton, p. 258. edit. Basil. tent," &c. id. ibid. He speaks of the 
 
 Ann. 1555. language here, as being no longer a 
 
 t " Nunc autein lingua hfec a popu- popular one, but subsisting only in 
 lariloquendi forma ad artificium quod- material characters, and therefore set- 
 dam deflexit, et certain habet formam, tied and invariable, 
 propriamque ideain suarc, ad quam $ Ibid. p. 284. edit. ead. 
 consequendam laborant docti. Neque § Pref. to Second Dissert, p. xvii.
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 247 
 
 what good foundation Mr. Foster could produce Pro- 
 fessor Chekefor an advocate in his cause : nor will he, 
 I presume, think that I have, by a too hasty inference, 
 and with a good degree of assurance, given this [testi- 
 mony ' of Mr. Cheke] to my readers for a certain fact* 
 I did give it as a fact, and a most certain one it is. If 
 those words, cited above, are not in Mr. Cheke's book, 
 I am guilty of forging them ; or, if they are retracted, or 
 contradicted by him in another part, I am inadvertent in 
 not comparing them with that part: but if they are 
 there, and not retracted in any other place, I am unjust- 
 ly accused, with more haste than a good and consi- 
 derate man ought to use in so heavy a charge, of impu- 
 dently asserting a false fact. 
 
 When Dr. Bentley wrote his famous epistle to Dr. 
 Mills, he did not formally propose to write upon the 
 Greek accents : but yet a sentence relating to them ac- 
 cidently came from his pen, which Dr. G. has given us 
 in his title. I will not say to him, " that this declara- 
 tion about accents is not in Dr. Bentley's epistle, be- 
 cause they are not comprised within the forma totius 
 epistolai." I read it there, and accept it as Dr. Bent- 
 ley's, with all the deference which is due to that great 
 master of ancient learning. But I doubt, whether by the 
 ratio hodie prcepostera atque perversa Grcecorum accen- 
 tuum, he did not mean the absurd and perverted modem 
 method of using them: if that was his meaning, I am 
 entirely of the same opinion, my declaration of which I 
 have very often repeated. But if he meant otherwise, 
 and really intended the present system of Greek accentual 
 marks, I should be glad to learn what his reasons were 
 for that opinion : if his reasons were the same with 
 those assigned by the common followers of Isaac Vos- 
 sius, and he had even published them, I should have 
 ventured, perhaps, to examine them ; and, after exami- 
 nation, should certainly have rejected them. If, how- 
 ever, Dr. Bentley's sentiments, concerning our system, 
 
 * Preface to Second Dissert. i>. xviii.
 
 248 REPLY TO DR. G/s 
 
 did really, at the time of his writing to Dr. Mills, agree 
 with those of my adversaries, it is evident that he 
 changed them afterwards : for, in another piece, written 
 by him in his later years, professedly on a subject of 
 metre and rhythm, he considers the Greek accents as 
 certainly differing* from the Latin (the accommodation 
 of which two is the consequence of every alteration 
 proposed by the scholars of Isaac Vossius), without 
 hinting the least suspicion of their present visible sys- 
 tem being vicious or corrupted. Undoubtedly he did not 
 what my opponents have so frequently done, consider 
 the mark of an acute as at all concerned with the quan- 
 tity of the syllable on which it appears; and laughs at Le 
 Clerc, on the supposition that he had made a mistake 
 of this kind in placing IWoroc, as aCreticfoot, at the end 
 of a trimeter iambic.f Dr. Bentley's authority, therefore, 
 in this cause will hardly be allowed to conclude any 
 thing against me. 
 
 But still less will the words of Scaliger, produced by 
 Dr. G.J be found to conclude against any thing which I 
 have advanced. He hath not, indeed, so much pro- 
 fited as he might have done by that admirable book, to 
 which he was directed by my Essay, and which he owns 
 he had not read when he published his former Disserta- 
 tion. For, observe now, what an use he makes of that 
 book. He finds in it a passage (of which he thinks I 
 was ignorant, though I referred to it in my Essay§) 
 
 * De metr. Terentian. p. 16, 17. is beside our present question." On 
 
 t " Ohominem eruditum, qui sena- the same passage, to which I then al- 
 
 rium claudi posse credidit vocabulo luded, I have more freely remarked in 
 
 txa/rrog : mirum ni verba, non quanti- p. 358 of the 2d edition, which was 
 
 tate syllabarum, sed accentuum ra- printed before the publication of Dr. 
 
 tione metitur." Emendat. in Fhilem. et G.'s Second Dissertation. And when 
 
 Menand. §lxiii. I declare that I wrote those remarks 
 
 X In Second Dissert, p. 5 — 11. long ago, I appeal (if it should be ne- 
 
 § First edit. p. 174. " He (Scali- cessary) for the truth of it, to the 
 
 ger) says, indeed, that if the nice to- learned Dr. Taylor and Dr. Barnard, 
 
 nical pronunciation of the ancients who kindly perused those papers of 
 
 could be expressed by a modern, it mine, which contained them, in the 
 
 would be disagreeable to our ears. It middle of the last summer. 
 
 might have been so to his. But that
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 249 
 
 wherein Scaliger attempts to prove that the Greek ac- 
 cents are, in some of their places, improper ; and from 
 thence he takes occasion to shew the falsity of an asser- 
 tion of mine, which I never made, viz. "that the opi- 
 nion concerning the impropriety of the Greek accents 
 was first started by Isaac Vossius." This was never in 
 my mind, nor on my paper. But Dr. G. often imputes 
 to both what never belonged to them: as in this case. 
 For I knew that Scaliger had long before (as I have 
 shewn) called in question the propriety of the accents 
 themselves in certain positions. And what I said of 
 Vossius was, that, " as far as I was able to discover, the 
 faithfulness and propriety of the* accentual marks was 
 never much doubted before his time." Which is true,f 
 at least as far as Scaliger is concerned. For Scaliger 
 acknowledged the faithfulness and genuineness of the 
 marks (which Vossius afterwards disputed), and argued 
 against the tones themselves, on the very supposition 
 that they were truly denoted and represented to us by 
 their present marks. The difference here is this : Sca- 
 liger took it for granted, that the old Greeks did apply 
 their tones to those syllables on which the virgulce now 
 appear ; Vossius thought that they did not so apply 
 them, but to other syllables. Here then Dr. G. is guilty 
 of the old mistake of confounding the word accents with 
 their visible marks: into which he ought not to have 
 fallen, after having been so particularly cautioned^ 
 against it ; nor so soon to have forgotten that distinc- 
 tion, which he acknowledges I made with a very good 
 
 * Inlroduct. to Essay. doubted before Isaac Vossius. And so 
 
 t There may have been some learned Henninius : " Viderunt equidein viri 
 
 men of the same opinion with Isaac doctissimi,sedpaucissimi, Gracismum 
 
 Vossius, before his time, whom I do male subinde pronunciari ; veruntamen 
 
 not know. But whoever they were, nemo unquani eruditorum illud inquisi- 
 
 they had not sufficient credit and au- vit — solus Vossius V. CI. ante annos 
 
 thority to recommend their opinions: hos forte decern mascule hauc corrup- 
 
 and that made me say, that the authen- telam notavit, sed strictim et paucis." 
 
 ticity of our marks, as far as I was Praef. p. xii. 
 
 able to discover, was never much $ Introd. to Essay.
 
 250 REPLY TO DR G. S 
 
 design, viz. to guard against ambiguity.* But that am- 
 biguity doth here furnish him with the means of making 
 me, by the help of altering my written words, appear 
 ignorant of the history of my question. This method 
 of serving a controversial purpose, by changing an au- 
 thor's words in a sentence quoted (as hath been done 
 here), or by suppressing that part of them which is not 
 convenient to an hypothesis (as hath been done by 
 the same person in a passaget from Alexander Aphro- 
 disiensis), I must not, perhaps, call disingenuous ; for 
 the expression is unhandsome. May I be allowed to 
 say, that I think it wrong ? 
 
 My foregoing words, concerning the younger Vossius, 
 have fared in a like manner with the next which Dr. G. 
 produces % from my Essay, and applies to himself and 
 his own arguments ; neither of which did I mention in 
 those pages, or had in my mind : for I was there con- 
 sidering what had been inferred from Dionysius by an- 
 other objector. That passage of Dionysius did indeed 
 lead me to another || which Dr. G. had twice cited : and 
 which, as it now stands, explained in connexion with 
 the context, carries a sense very different from that 
 which it appeared to have, when given before in a de- 
 tached form. 
 
 Another passage of Dionysius, no less perspicuous 
 than curious, which I truly did § apply to him, he thinks f 
 that I have mistaken. But to that interpretation of it 
 which I have given, and which to Dr. G. appears forced 
 and unnatural, I find myself obliged to adhere for the 
 following reasons, which readily present themselves 
 from the context. I before, indeed, in order to avoid 
 an unnecessary prolixity, omitted to produce them ; 
 which now, however, as they seem to be required by 
 Dr. G., I will explain. But first let it be observed, that 
 
 * Second Dissert, p. 81. || Essay, p. 85. 
 
 t Essay, p. 6. 98. § Essay, p. 2. note. 
 
 * Second Dissert, p. 13. cited from 1 Second Dissert, p. 20—27. 
 Essay, p. 82. 85.
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 
 
 251 
 
 the two things, compared in it by Dionysius, are now 
 allowed to be, as I stated them, " Oratorical or common 
 discourse with musical expression," not as he before 
 stated them, " Prose with poetry." This correction then 
 he admits. Let us see whether he will not now find rea- 
 son to admit the other. Dionysius, inquiring into the par- 
 ticulars which constitute agreeable and sweet composi- 
 tion, says, * " the consideration of oratorical or common 
 language hath been looked on as having somewhat of a 
 musical nature; differing from vocal and organical music, 
 not in quality, but degree. For even in discourse, the 
 words have melody, rhythm, variation, and grace." Here 
 then they both agree tw Ilotw, in quality. How do they 
 differ in ™ Uocno, in degree ? The particulars of their 
 difference in this respect, in degree of fxiXog, he proceeds 
 to shew very distinctly. " The melody of discourse is 
 measured by one diastema or interval called the diapente, 
 us lyyiaTa, at a mean computation. But organical and 
 
 * Mous-iJtr) yap ti?3v Xttl h t£v TroXiTixSv 
 7\6ycov \'Kl<TTr>fJ,n, to ITocrw SiaAXaTTOUirtt 
 T«j Iv w'SaTj xai opyavoj?, oip^i w IToiffi. 
 Kai ya£ ev TauTji xa.) fj.t'koq 'i^ovriv ai 
 Xe£ei?, kcu pvQ[j,ov, xcu fj.ira,@o'khv, Kal 
 
 ffps'wOV. 0)T7t Kttl £7Tl TaUTllJ h aXOr) TEp- 
 
 tusrai fj.lv toI's jU.eXeo-iv, ayirai Se to~; 
 (vQjj,o~<;, as-tta^nai Ss Taj fj.sra.lSo'Kas, 
 itoQlt S' ETTi ttovtojv to oikeIov. AiaXEXTOD 
 fj.lv ouv fjiKo; svi fJiTpsirai ^laa-rfifjart Ta> 
 "Ktyofj-ivxi AIA V nE'NTE, oij lyyuna, xai 
 OllTE EWlTEiVETa; fffpa t5v Tpi£v tov»jv Hcu 
 nfAlTOVlQU E7TI TO o£u' o2t£ dviETttf TOli yjM>- 
 ptOU TOUTOU %\l~0V E7Ti TO /3agu 
 
 H Je lfya.vi.im te (cat aJSiJtfl fjova-a. ^iaa-rn- 
 fjaa-'i te J££>rrai ttXeioo-iv, ou to; AIA* 
 nE'NTE jUo'vov, aX x' affo toD AIA' ITA2 ft~N 
 a^afjivn, KttX to AIA v nE'NTE ^eXsjJei", 
 xai to AIA V TE22A'PJ2N, xaj to AIA* TO- 
 NON, jtai to 'HfJlToviov, &>q &£ tive? oiWaf, 
 nai Trjv Aieo-iv altrfltiTiS;. Sect. xi. WEgt 
 2w9. Dr. G.'s friend, Isaac Vossius, 
 in Lis book de Poematum cantu, hath 
 explained this passage, concerning the 
 
 number of tones used in discourse, 
 which is in that respect different from 
 music, in the following manner: " Vox 
 in communi sermone ut plurimum intra 
 diapente subsistit, ita ut neque plus tri- 
 bus tonis cum dimidio iutendatur, ne- 
 que majore intervallo infra conimunem 
 loquendi modum deprimatur." He says 
 in another place, " in Cantu latius eva- 
 gari souos, quam in recitatione aut com- 
 muni sermone, utpote in quo vitiosum 
 habeatur, si vox ultra diapente, sea 
 tres tonos et semitonium, acuatur." 
 Mr. Upton hath quoted this on the fore- 
 going passage of Dionysius. Vossius 
 and Upton do both therefore interpret 
 it, as I have done, and refer the whole 
 to the wider compass of tones used 
 in music than in discourse. If how- 
 ever it should mean this, " that music 
 uses more kinds of intervals, than com- 
 mon discourse ;" this sense would 
 equally suit my general purpose, and 
 favour my main argument.
 
 252 REPLY TO DR. G/S 
 
 vocal melody [to which lyric pieces were set] uses more 
 diastemas, not confining itself to the diapente, but taking 
 in the diapason as well as the diapente, the diatessaron, 
 the diatonon, with the semitonion and diesis." Whoever 
 understands the meaning of these technical terms (and 
 any one may understand them by looking into Dr.Wallis's 
 Ptolemy, or the collection of Meibomius, and probably 
 a hundred other books) well knows that they relate to 
 tones considered numerically in their ascending or de- 
 scending, with their division of semitonion and subdivi- 
 sion of diesis. This is my reason for supposing that the 
 word IIoctw above signifies, in number. I well know that 
 JJogottiq doth signify any other, as well as a numerical, 
 degree : but I think not here ; because the illustration 
 of our UoaoTrjg in this passage is made by words, which 
 belong to number only. I therefore still imagine, that I 
 have the authority of Dionysius for saying, that oratorical 
 or common discourse differs from music, not in the quality, 
 but number of sounds. Every thing which Dr. G. in quar- 
 relling with my word number, says in opposition to it, 
 amounts only to this, " that there is a greater quantity 
 of fxiXog, pvdfioq, &c. in music than in discourse." I 
 never denied it ; and now say the same. But the differ- 
 ence between us lies here : he stops short, and says not 
 in what this greater quantity of melody, this more con- 
 sists : whereas I try to shew from the following words of 
 our author, which he overlooked, that this more consists 
 in a greater number of tones, or in more kinds of intervals. 
 But in whatever manner, or degree, the AioXIktov piXog 
 may differ from that of music ; whether it has five, fif- 
 teen, or only two tones ; the particular number is indiffer- 
 ent to me and my question. Let me be allowed but one 
 and a half, and that will admit elevation and depression 
 enough for all the purposes of my argument. This was 
 all which I desired to deduce from the words of Diony- 
 sius ; and this Dr. G. readily grants to me.* Why then 
 
 * " Both sides allow that each ac- two modifications in point of time ; and 
 cent, consideied of itself, is capable of may be varied to the compass of four
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 253 
 
 dispute with me the interpretation of the passage? He 
 is unwilling-, that too much assistance should be " bor- 
 rowed from music to explain the doctrine of accents;* 
 because this will confound vocal utterance with singing."f 
 I will rid him of those fears ; because I can engage to 
 explain my whole subject, on the scanty allowance, 
 which I mentioned above, of but one tone and a half, 
 for a Grecian voice, out of the $ia irivre of Dionysius : 
 and there cannot be much danger from thence of common 
 pronunciation being so modulated as to become a song. 
 But after all, what so great assistance hath been, or need 
 be, derived from music on this occasion ? The chief and 
 almost only help from musicians which I have had, or 
 required, is an explanation of those terms, which gram- 
 marians borrowed from them and used on this subject. 
 Yet this I ought to own has been an advantage. For if 
 I had not defined and fixed the sense of them on such 
 incontestable authority, my question, I am persuaded, 
 would have been still embarrassed, and many points still 
 disputed, which are now % given up. He is therefore 
 displeased with the very mention of a || musical term, 
 
 and five notes." Second Dissert, p. 78. this purpose I have recourse to the 
 This is one of the points in which he musical writers, and shew from them 
 now agrees with me, according to the that it signifies a high tone without 
 sense of the word agreement explained any consideration of length, I am then 
 above. told (Sec. Diss. p. 84.) that vocal utter- 
 * Pref. to Second Diss. p. i. ance is not singing, and every thing mu- 
 t Sec. Diss. p. 42 — 46. 84. Which sical is not music. When then I shew, 
 pages if I were to transcribe, many that this word in its original and conse- 
 sentences in them would make such quential, its common and rhetorical, its 
 an appearance, as those concerning ordinary and figurative sense, constantly 
 metre and rhythm given from his tormer implies haste and quickness, I might then 
 Dissert, in my first chap. have spared myself the trouble of proving 
 i Second Dissert, p. 77, 78. what nobody doth or will deny. It can- 
 || As the word oguj, with its deriva- not well be denied now, but the nega- 
 tives, is invariably used by the best tion of it was implied before, and is so 
 Greek writers to express the acute tone still by those who annex length as ne- 
 in common speech, it seemed highly cessarily joined with the acute. But 
 neoessary in this question to determine if the foregoing method of finding out 
 very exactly the sense of it. When for what ideas were by the ancients affixed
 
 254 REPLY TO DR. G.'s 
 
 because the clear musical explication of such words as 
 
 fj>96yyoQ, tovoq. raaig, liriTUvofxai, aviE/nai, o^vtjjc, fiapvTiig, 
 didcTT^fxa, k. t. A. hath greatly tended to the confutation of 
 his doctrine. 
 
 But if I should go a little farther than the mere ex- 
 planation of these grammatical terms, why should I be 
 debarred the means of illustrating a few positions by 
 arguing from the power and use of a musical instrument 
 to that of the voice in speaking ? Dr. G. seems to for- 
 get, that Scaliger, in that very passage which he cites,* 
 and much commends, has taken the same method. And 
 with good reason. For as all musical sounds within a 
 certain compass may be expressed by the voice, so there 
 is no common pronunciation, which may not be ex- 
 amined musically, and set to musical notes. Every sen- 
 tence uttered at the bar, on the stage, in the pulpit, or in 
 conversation, is as capable of musical notations, as 
 that line of Virgil which Scaliger has represented by 
 them.T And yet, because all vocal utterance may be 
 set to notes of singing, it is not therefore a song, as 
 Dr. G. thinks.^: As long as the voice, in rising or sink- 
 ing from one syllable of a word to another, exceeds not 
 the diapente, which Dionysius assigns to discourse (or 
 whatever other compass may be assigned more exact), 
 it may rise and fall within that compass, without the 
 least appearance of chanting ; and every word will at 
 
 to their words, is not the right one, ling. Lat.c. 58. apnd Second Diss. p. 8. 
 
 what other way will Dr. G. point out ? t Essay, p. 156. 
 
 Quid deml Quid non dem? Are there J " What may be expressed by mere 
 
 a set of authors still unexplored among sounds, cannot equally be expressed in 
 
 the Florentine MSS. by which we shall the pronunciation of words and sylla- 
 
 find that magnus signifies little, y.ay.eoq bles. On this is founded the differ- 
 
 wide, supuf and l^vq long ? ence between vocal utterance and sing- 
 
 * " Quamobrem non liceat mihi vo* ing. When words are set to music, 
 
 cem tollere in quarta a fine, nulla ratio then they are sung, and the modulation 
 
 musica potuit persuadere : possunt e- is strictly musical. But when words 
 
 nira eodem tenore tam in voce, quam are only uttered, then the modulation 
 
 in tibia, aut fidibus, deduci mul- is only said to be musical." — Second 
 
 tae vel breves vel longse." — De cans. Diss. p. 42.
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 255 
 
 the same time admit a musical notation, its sound may 
 be considered in a musical light, and referred to a mu- 
 sical instrument, as well as the words of any song set 
 by the wildest Italian composer, to an air in the most 
 excursive strains. 
 
 Whether the UoiKiXia attributed to the Greek accents 
 by Dionysius, in a passage cited by me,* be understood 
 in that plain sense which I have given, or in Dr. G.'s 
 more comprehensive signification, which he with the help 
 of a conjectural alteration proposes, I must leave to the 
 judgment of the reader ; who yet must perceive, how- 
 ever he may determine this point, that the UoiKiXia either 
 way will ultimately come to the same, and equally fa- 
 vour me. For if " composition is to be diversified by 
 combining words together with various accents," there 
 must be, I presume, a variety in the accent of words be- 
 fore they are combined, which consequently supposes, 
 in the general tones of the language, that UoiKiXia, which 
 I have imagined to be different from the Rigor et simili- 
 tudo of the Roman accent, as described by Quinctilian. 
 And this general variety will be a good reason, why 
 Dionysius should advise writers properly to avail them- 
 selves of it; which direction he would not perhaps have 
 given, had there been in his own language the same stiff- 
 ness and uniformity of tone, which Quinctilian per- 
 ceived in the Roman, confining the accent to two places 
 instead of three, and those two subject only to two or 
 three simple rules, while the Greek is hardly reducible 
 to twenty. 
 
 Be this HoLKikia however accepted in whatever sense 
 any one shall prefer. I am not in the least solicitous 
 about the success of that word (whatever stress Dr. G. 
 
 * Essay, p. 86. 'Pu9fx.nl ts aX- at the same time to disjoin it from its 
 
 Xot6 oXXoi, x.3.1 o-^jUttTa navroTa, xaX present subject raa-si? and npoa-wSi'at 
 
 Tao-Ei; <{)wv?? ai KaXoifXBvett npoo-wJiat with which it now stands immediately 
 
 Ziatyopoi Mhiitrovcru.1 rn noixtXi'a tov xogov. and solely connected, and to refer it 
 
 In the last clause of this sentence, Dr. equally to all the preceding nomina- 
 
 G. proposes from conjecture to read tives. Second Diss. p. 34. 
 xXt'ETTowi instead of x\i7tTove-at , and
 
 25G REPLY TO DR. G.'s 
 
 may imagine * that I lay upon it) in my application of 
 it to account for that arbitrary and preposterous irregu- 
 larity " in placing and changing* the places of accents, 
 which the present system prescribes." f For the whole 
 of this preposterous variation is defended by positive 
 proofs, some of which are produced in my Essay, from 
 the ancient grammarians, and admits of one general so- 
 lution, which I have likewise there given, and on which I 
 own I do lay great stress. For what is this irregularity 
 objected to them? Irregularity, if it means any thing, 
 signifies a deviation from rules. But from what rules 
 are the Greek accents said to deviate ? From none, 
 that I have ever known alleged, except the Roman. 
 And from the Roman rules they must depart, if the ac- 
 cents are Greek. Because the testimony not only of 
 Quinctilian, but of the other old Latin grammarians, ex- 
 pressly asserts, " That the Greek accents differed in 
 their position from the Roman." 
 
 What is to be done by my opponents with this ancient 
 testimony, which so straitens them ? They will not ad- 
 mit it. The Latin grammarians, it seems, are not com- 
 petent judges of this difference, which they think they 
 observed in two languages, which they every day heard. 
 Dr. G. boldly £ rejects the testimony of Quinctilian, as 
 cited by me.§ It is a pity he cannot entirely exclude 
 that distressing passage from Quinctilian's book, on ac- 
 count of its not being included within that author's 
 forma totius operis ; or shew the sentence is wanting in 
 some Medicean manuscript, or alter it by a conjectural 
 emendation. While it stands as it does, it is untoward, 
 stubborn, and utterly unmanageable by the followers of 
 Vossius and Henninius. Dr. G. is much out of humour 
 with it, and determined it shall not pass without some 
 stricture ; he therefore gives it an ugly name, and calls 
 it " very dimcult,"|| though it is as perspicuous a sen- 
 
 * Second Diss. p. 11, || " This passage hath considerable 
 
 + Ibid. p. 29. difficulties" Seoond Diss. p. 36. But 
 
 i Ibid. p. 38. yet how soon does Dr. G. himself clear 
 
 Essay, p. 151. up these difficulties, when he inimedi-
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 257 
 
 tence as any in that author's works. It is not easy, it 
 seems, for Dr. G. to conceive, how the difference be- 
 tween the Greek accents having three places, and the 
 Latin having only one less by being limited to two, 
 could occasion a difference in the harmony and sweet- 
 ness of the two languages.* Now whether I could con- 
 ceive this or no, I should believe it as a fact (as I do a 
 thousand other facts on proper authority, though I form 
 not clear conceptions of them) upon Quinctilian's word ; 
 because he certainly understood both languages better 
 than we do, and knew the sound of both from the mouth 
 of Greeks and Romans. But I not only believe it on 
 that account, but conceive it very clearly from my own 
 ear: because in our own language, which admits the ac- 
 cent on the last, as well as on the other syllables of 
 words, if in reading any well-turned sentence I remove 
 the final accent from all oxytones, and so make them 
 barytones, I perceive that I invert and confound the mo- 
 dulation of the whole sentence. To say there is none, 
 or not much, difference between the Greek and Latin ac- 
 cent, is saying there is but little, if any, difference in 
 arithmetic between three and two. The real difference 
 of Greek and Roman modulation, agreeable to Quinc- 
 tilian's remark, is briefly and strongly characterized in a 
 late work by a very celebrated prelate, where he distin- 
 guishes between " the pure and flowing sweetness of the 
 Attic modulation, and the strength and grave severity 
 of the Roman tone."f 
 
 Before Dr. G. had disputed the truth of Quinctilian's 
 assertion, he should first have proved the falsehood of 
 that position of mine, " that as the affair of the ancient 
 
 ately adds; " It would not be an easy never did, and that, upon this account, 
 
 matter to say what Quinctilian meant the Latin accents were not so sweet as 
 
 by a Similitiulo of accents, if he had the Greek." P. 36, 37. 
 
 proceeded no farther. But he hath ex- * Ibid. p. 37. 
 
 plained himself by saying, that the f The Doctrine of Grace, vol. i. p. 
 
 Greeks placed the acute and circumflex 74, first edit. 
 
 upon the last syllable, which the Latins 
 
 S
 
 258 REPLY TO DR. G.'s 
 
 tones was a matter of fact of antiquity, the ancients 
 themselves were the proper evidence of it." * I might 
 have added, too, the only evidence. I was aware, that 
 if my Essay should meet with opponents, they would 
 probably endeavour to evade the force of ancient testi- 
 monies, by confronting- them with some modern, to which 
 they might appeal : and, therefore, I premised that 
 caveat above (the reasonableness and truth of which is 
 not as yet questioned) against all such appeals. Our 
 f Gataker was an admirable scholar, and, perhaps, the 
 best critic our country ever produced, before the great 
 Bentley. But he never heard a Greek or Roman pro- 
 nounce their own language anymore than Dr. G. or my- 
 self. But Quinctilian heard both : for Rome, when he 
 lived and wrote there, was full of Greeks. And all tes- 
 timony in a case of sound depending on the sense of hear- 
 ing, he who delivers this testimony from his own sense, 
 must be allowed to have more weight than another who 
 has not that advantage ; and this according to the ac- 
 knowledged principles of Mr. Locke. £ There are, in- 
 deed, some points in which a modern grammarian may 
 deserve more attention than an ancient, even in what 
 concerns that ancient's own language. The modern 
 may compare the ancient grammarian with himself and 
 with other ancients, and by those means detect an error 
 even in Cicero or Quinctilian himself. And this, I 
 think, has been done, in some cases, by a few accurate 
 modern scholars. But then this detection depends on 
 the examination of one old authority opposed to an- 
 other. Let this method of confuting an ancient be tried 
 in the case before us. " Quinctilian was not infalli- 
 ble.'^ True; he was not. And, on that account, if 
 his testimony had on this occasion contradicted that of 
 the other Roman grammarians, I should by no means 
 have urged it as decisive. But when it is in this article 
 confirmed in the fullest manner by their universal con- 
 
 * Introd. to Essay. t Human Under, b. iv. chap. 11. §. 
 
 t Dr. G. appeals to him against 5. and chap. 15, 16. 
 Quinctilian. — Second Dissert, p. 40. § Second Dissert, p. 40.
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 259 
 
 currence, I cannot but acquiesce in his authority on this 
 point, without acknowledging his infallibility in all. 
 Those who agree with him in affirming the Latin accent 
 to be different from the Greek, are Diomedes, Macro- 
 bius, Priscian, Donatus, Sergius, Maximus Victorinus, 
 Servius. Some of these I cited, * and more might 
 easily have been produced in confirmation of the differ- 
 ence of those two things, which every alteration of my 
 opponents, if it were to take place, would make the 
 same. This difference, which is universally asserted by 
 the ancients, is likewise acknowledged by the best mo- 
 derns. Does not Dr. G. see this is admitted by the 
 two Scaligers, in those very passages f which he cites 
 from them in his answer to me ? If he overlooks it, I will 
 not, but will take their testimony, and add to it, if it 
 should be required, the suffrage of many other learned 
 moderns. On this single point of difference I am willing 
 to rest my defence against all the objections of Henui- 
 nius, and most of Dr. G.'s : because those objections, if 
 they were valid, must end in abolishing this difference, 
 and leave the accents of both languages the same. 
 
 But Quinctilian, with all the train of Roman gram- 
 marians after him, was mistaken, in thinking there really 
 was that difference between the accented Greek, and un- 
 accented Roman, ultimate, which he suggests. For if 
 this point be accurately considered, no such difference 
 will be found. % I shall be glad to join with Dr. G. in 
 any accurate consideration which he shall propose. 
 Quinctilian then was not subtle enough to see that this 
 difference he speaks of is, after all, only nominal. Why ? 
 " because Qebg is, in effect, a barytone, as well as Deus ; 
 and so is Qeov as well as Dei: in Qebg the grave mark no 
 doubt denotes a grave tone ; and the circumflex of Qeov, 
 when resolved into its constituent parts, i. e. an acute 
 and a grave, makes the word end, as all Latin words do, 
 in a grave, thus, Qwv." It does so : but still an acute is 
 on the last syllable of Owv (which never is on a Latin 
 
 * Essay, p. 152, seq. t Second Dissert, p. 5 — 11. and p. 71 — 73. 
 
 j Ibid. p. 38. 
 
 s2
 
 260 REPLY TO DR. G.'S 
 
 ultimate), though followed by a grave on the same sylla- 
 ble. The word is indeed closed with a grave sound, yet 
 not with a whole grave syllable, for half the syllable 
 is acuted. And thus Quinctilian is justified in suppos- 
 ing that there is a real difference between the tone of 
 such words as Geou and Dei. The same essential dif- 
 ference subsists between Qtbg and Deus. Those words, 
 whereon we now see a final grave mark, as Oebg, Xpiarbg, 
 dvijp, whatever Dr. G. may conceive of them as having 
 a final grave tone, had certainly their elevation on the 
 last syllable. Words of that form are called btyrova or 
 bZvTovovfxtva by the Greek grammarians, from Aristo- 
 phanes of Byzantium down to Lascaris, who always 
 denominate words by the accent of their last syllable. 
 Thus Aoyoc (or more properly \6ybg) is termed TrapoZv- 
 tovoq or fiapvrovoQ : dvi)p (or more properly avi)p) is 
 termed bZvrovog. Now in those which they call b%v- 
 Tova, as dvfjp, if the acute tone was not on the last, 
 where was it? It must be somewhere ; for " nulla 
 vox sine acuto," except enclitics and atonies. If 
 in dvrip it is said to be on the former syllable, what 
 distinction then between the old d^vrova and (daovrova ? 
 For the fiapvTova have it there. It therefore must be on 
 the last of oxytones ; and that not only at the end of a 
 sentence, but in avviTTH^ too, in any part of it. It might 
 have a greater degree of elevation at the end of a period 
 than in the middle of it; but in every position through a 
 sentence, it undoubtedly had an elevation which raised 
 the tone of that final syllable above the tone of the other 
 syllables in the same word. And this is not my opinion 
 only, but that of many scholars. * Still, therefore, after 
 all Dr. G.'s refinement f in order to set aside the testi- 
 mony of Quinctilian, an essential difference between a 
 Roman barytone Deus and a Greek oxytone Otoe, or 
 Qeog, doth certainly subsist. And my argument, built 
 
 * Gumprecht in Floril. Gramm. Hoffmannusderaodulatione ling. Graec. 
 
 Grsec. p. 81. Aactor Gramm. Graec. p. 45. Nouv. Methode de lang. Gr. 
 
 Halensis. p. 15, 16. Chr. Griineber- par Mess, de Port R. L. ix. cl). 6. §. 4. 
 gius in Gramm. Gnec. P. I. c. 3. Cl. t Second Dissert, p. 58.
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 261 
 
 on this difference, is therefore admissible, and if admis- 
 sible, conclusive. 
 
 But the affair of the final circumflex and acute is not 
 the whole. The Greek method of leaving the acute on 
 short penultimates, as in Sw/cpaVrje, and drawing it back 
 from long penultimates, as in rvpawog, so contrary to 
 the Roman method mSocratem and tyrannus, must have 
 caused a farther difference between the tones of the two 
 languages : and from this difference must result a dif- 
 ference of modulation between the two. And since 
 Quinctilian * says, " this difference of harmony engaged 
 the Roman poets to introduce Greek words into their 
 verse whenever they were desirous of giving it a pecu- 
 liar sweetness," who shall now doubt it ? especially since 
 the Latin grammarians f after him take notice of the 
 Romans having preserved the Greek accent in Greek 
 words Latinized. The remarks of Servius, therefore, on 
 £ Sinwis, Periphas, ' Evandrus \ and of Dr. Bentley § on 
 the Greek terminations in Horace, are far from being idle. 
 
 * " Itaque [i. e. ex Accentuum di- See him on this passage, and on v. 100. 
 
 versitate] tanto esl sermo Graeus La- of the same book, and on Mn. iii. v. 
 
 tino jucundior, ut nostri poeta?, quolies 308. See Servius also on Eclog. x. 
 
 dulce carmen esse voluerunt, illoram v. 1. and 18. and in other places, 
 
 id nominibus exornent." lib. xii. c. 10. § Circa Epod. xvii. v. 17. "Sane 
 
 t See Essay, p. 152. 159. observavi in Iambis, sermonibus, et 
 
 | " SimoVs. nomen hoc integrum ad epistolis Lalinas declinationes libeu- 
 
 nos transiit, unde suo accentu profer- tius adhibere nostrum; jn canninibus 
 
 tur. Nam si esset Latinum, in ante- Gracos. In illis Cretam, Helenas, Pe- 
 
 penulthna haberet accentum, quia se- nelopam habes ; in his Creten, Hele- 
 
 cunda a fine brevis.'' ad iEn. i. v. 100. nes, Penelopen. Quippe in illis pu- 
 
 " PeripJias. Ultima accentum non ha- ram et nativam orationem sectatus 
 
 bet, nefasmininumsit: nee tertia a fine, est; in his plus exotici nitodis et 
 
 quia novissima longa est : Erforiha- tranbmarink eleganti* aflecta- 
 
 bebil accentum." ad JEn. ii. v. 476. vit." Dr. Bentley does not indeedex- 
 
 " Evandrus. Aut non servavit nominis pressly mention the accent, but termi- 
 
 dcclinationem, nam Evander facil, si- nation only: but the accent is neces- 
 
 cutipse alibi, Pallas, Evander in ipsis: sarily implied as following the termi- 
 
 aut Grace declinavit, o EilavJ^oj." ad nation, according to that of Donalds ; 
 
 iEn. viii. v. 185. That Evandrus here " Sane Graca verba Gnecis accenti- 
 
 is the true reading, is shewn by that bus melius efferhnus." Putsch. 1741. 
 diligent and exact scholar Pierius.
 
 20'2 REPLY TO DR. G. S 
 
 Dr. G. defends his former explanation of a passage 
 from Dionysius Thrax (which I rejected) * by still sup- 
 posing- the word evpvripa, when joined with Qwvt), to sig- 
 nify the same as /xaKporipa : f and asks what else it can 
 there mean ? I say, it can not mean length without the 
 greatest perversion of language. It is the business of 
 the person who cites the passage, to ascertain what it 
 does mean : it is enough for me to shew what it does 
 not. And I cannot think that Dionysius intended by 
 those words to assign length, as necessarily annexed to 
 the acute tone (which is the thing that Dr. G. labours to 
 prove, and wants to deduce from those words), because 
 the same author, in the same MS. piece, applies to the 
 same Tovog such words as express height and lowness 
 alone. "Eon Tovog (he there % says), 'Eni'TASIS rj "ANE- 
 SIS, rj ii£gotv)q (TuAXa|3(I»v tv(j)<x)vlav e\ov<ra. That this £7Tt- 
 ramg and avecrig express elevation and depression of 
 tone alone, without any reference to ^ovoc, is clear from 
 Aristoxenus and others, cited in my Essay, who make 
 Xpovog a separate quality. I believe, therefore, that the 
 sense of long cannot any how be extorted from the words 
 of Dionysius. 
 
 The word dpvrrig hath led Dr. G. into strange confu- 
 sion, from a supposition that Aristotle's cWvrrje, Scali- 
 ger's ajflatio in latitudine, and what I have called em- 
 phasis, spirit, or aspiration, do belong to different mea- 
 sures of the voice. Whereas they all express the same 
 thing, a greater exertion or profusion of breath, differing 
 only in its application. When this adflatio, i. e. additio 
 
 * Essay, p. 142. Dionysius, which I have given, are 
 
 + Second Dissert, p. 62 — 65. the same with those used on the same 
 
 \ This is in a MS. of the Medicean occasion by Moschopuhis and Gaza, 
 
 library, communicated by Magliabechi And Urbanus (in tract, de accent.) says 
 
 to Mr. Wetstein, some parts of which they are by Choeroboscus attributed 
 
 he published in his Appendix ad Dis- toHerodian,who, probably, transcribed 
 
 sert. Dr. G. I suppose, took his sen- them from Dionysius Thrax. Such 
 
 tence of Dionysius from this Appen- a consistency there is in the doctrine 
 
 dix, in which I find it. The words of of the ancient and later Greeks.
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 263 
 
 spiritus is made to a single letter, as in <£, %> Q> ( on which 
 account Plato # reckons <£ among those letters which he, 
 with the greatest propriety, calls irveviiarwdri) it is gene- 
 rally termed aspiration; when it is made to a whole 
 word, to part of a single sentence, or of a whole dis- 
 course, it is commonly called emphasis, or spirit: but 
 the adflatio, the additional profusion of breath, is of the 
 same nature in all these cases. For a fuller illustration 
 of which, I refer the reader to the latter part of my first 
 chapter. 
 
 Dr. G.'s interpretation of Dionysius Thrax, brings me 
 to the consideration of that point; "which, indeed, is 
 the main foundation of the present controversy ;"f the 
 true nature of the acute tone : which I think by no means 
 necessarily connected with a long time, though some- 
 times joined with it. Dr. G. on the other hand, is of 
 opinion, that a delay of the voice or addition of time 
 must attend that stress which belongs to the acute ac- 
 cent.;]: I entirely agree with him in considering this as 
 the main point in the present disquisition : because, if 
 his hypothesis is true, our accentual system must fall at 
 once, since the acute mark appears over as many short 
 as long syllables, the true quantity of which must con- 
 sequently suffer by our expressing the lengthening acute. 
 On this head, those who have read my seventh chapter, 
 will not perhaps think it necessary for me to add much 
 here. But since Dr. G. supports his opinion by two 
 authorities (which are indeed much more in his favour 
 than those of Dionysius Thrax and Porphyry, unfortu- 
 nately alleged before), I will here examine what he now 
 farther advances in support of this strange doctrine, so 
 repugnant not only tc antiquity in general, but to the 
 powers and practice of millions of voices at this day in 
 
 * In Cratyl. torn. i. p. 427. edit. not only by the letters in the syllable, 
 Serran. but also by the stress that is added to 
 t Pref. to Second Dissert, p. i. it, or by the delay that is caused by 
 t " The pronunciation of a syllable the acute accent. And every such de- 
 depends upon the body of the syllable lay is /SpaSurn? ri; tov xpoW. Second 
 sounded. Now this body is made up, Dissert, p. 55.
 
 264 REPLY TO DR. G.'s 
 
 Europe, which not only can, but frequently do, elevate 
 the sound of a syllable without lengthening it. 
 
 The first author, whom he produces in defence of his 
 opinion, is the * scholiast on Hephaestion (whoever he 
 was), who says, " that the acute lengthens a short vowel :" 
 and gives an instance of it in this line of Homer, 
 
 Tpwec S' Ippiyrjaav, £7ra 'ISov aloXov odjtv. 
 
 Here then the first syllable of 6(f>iv is lengthened by the 
 acute. But let me ask, if so, how comes the first of i'Sov 
 not to be lengthened too ? How does that escape the 
 protracting power of the acute ? Does the acute operate 
 by prolongation on one short syllable and not on an- 
 other? This I cannot understand. Neither does the 
 scholiast, or collector of the scholia, himself; or if he 
 does, he thinks it not worth remembering ; for a few 
 pages f after, he forgets the protraction of the acute, 
 and gives the foregoing line from Homer, as an instance 
 of the /mdovpog, i. e. of an hexameter ending with an iam- 
 bic ; according to which the first syllable of 6<piv be- 
 comes short again, and so the acute is soon deprived of 
 that retarding power, which it had a few pages before. 
 I was not ignorant of this passage in Hephsestion's book, 
 nor have I dissembled it, but given it in the 141st page 
 of my Essay (which was printed long before I saw Dr. 
 G.'s Second Dissertation), to which place I beg leave 
 to refer my reader, who will from thence readily judge 
 what weight is to be allowed to such an evidence so 
 grossly contradicting itself. 
 
 But Dr. G. has another witness of more authority, who 
 affirms the same with the scholiast above; saying, J " that 
 
 * Second Dissert, p. 53, 59. Avm ovv <pvtriv xa\ $uva.[j.tv, w; /u>i y.6vov kwixeifxivt) 
 
 h J£e~a eViicei^evh tivi t£v ppcepgivy v @ga- tTneLvtc figa-xslas, y.nxvv£LV avrhv, a\\a xtu 
 
 •/ytofxhioiv Si^ovtuv, fjwxvvsr wq liil rov, <5tjo*ei j wev«, xa\ fjLiTctxufjiivn, JuvacrSai t!j 
 
 v > >>> ' v ... ,. „ (Spayzia. vpivov yapti~o-6a.i. 
 
 Tfceef S zppiyricrav, emit iSov aioXov optv. ' „ A ",. ,-, 
 
 t Pag. 92. edit. Pauw. 
 
 h oil/ IQtHa. Toiat/rnv e^ei \ Eustath. ad Odyss. K. v. 60. V. iii.
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 265 
 
 the acute is capable of lengthening not only the short 
 vowel on which it lies, as in aloXov o$iv, but likewise 
 the short vowel preceding and following it." A round 
 declaration this, extending the power of the acute very 
 wide indeed over the adjoining syllables ! In conse- 
 quence of which, not only the second syllable of Xsyo- 
 ftzva is or may be long, but likewise the first and third 
 too, and so the word, instead of being, as most scholars 
 imagine, a proceleusmatic foot, Xtyufuva will become the 
 fourth epitrite Xlyoiulva. Dr. G. I am persuaded, is too 
 well acquainted with ancient metre, to swallow doc- 
 trines, on the credit of the foregoing sentence, clogged 
 with such inconsistencies, and so utterly subversive of 
 all true quantity, for the preservation of which he is 
 justly solicitous. Such solutions of a difficulty will very 
 well serve such critics in metre as Joshua Barnes and 
 Ralph Winterton, who, to save themselves the trouble 
 of farther inquiry, hastily snap at them, and hurry on to 
 the next difficulty, which is to be cleared up in a like 
 manner. But they are laughed at and despised by every 
 schoolboy, who has but looked into Dr. Clarke's notes 
 on Homer. But how does Eustathius himself apply 
 these principles ? the penultima of AloXov, he says, is 
 
 fol. 1647. Edit. Rom. Second Dissert. the indifference and licence, which was 
 
 p. 60, 61. more allowed in the quantity of proper 
 
 names than of other common words. 
 
 Bw £if Aio'Xou n\vra iuy.ara This should have been produced ; be- 
 cause it is at least as good an account of 
 
 AttyapoTH? Ii-Tfv, an; rov Aio'Xov avTi fA.au- the matter as the other : though neither 
 
 paz expvrog TW TragaXnyovo-av — ■ 6sga- of them satisfactory and right. If Dr. G. 
 
 itila S= tou /xtrptxoZ TrdQovi; fxaXierra h read to the end of this note of Eiista- 
 
 Ifyta., Suvctixim Ixte/veiv, o>j aKXa^oZ thius, he there found in the remark on 
 
 Ipplfli), ov [aovov B^ayy <paivnBv Z ImKWreu, the circumflex of Bnv, a very ancient 
 
 aig Iv to! aioXov o^iv, dXXa xai to isp author quoted, Heraclides, (who wrote 
 
 alrtig, not to y,iT avrnv. Thus Dr. G. before Apollonius Dyscolus ; for he is 
 
 has cited it. But there is another cited in a case of accent, in Syntax, 
 
 reason given by Eustathius, (in a part p. 326.) whose observation on the ac- 
 
 of this comment omitted by Dr. G.) cent of e^w, i@w, and such words, is 
 
 to explain the irregularity of the metre agreeable to the rule and practice of 
 
 in AioXsu ; and that is the dSiaqo^a, modern accentuation.
 
 26*6 REPLY TO DR. G.'s 
 
 lengthened by the acute in the following verse, (Odyss. 
 K. v. 60.) 
 
 Bvjv ug AloXou kXvto. dwpara' tov c5' luiyavov. 
 
 Now he here owns himself, that in this penultima there 
 is XayaporriQ and /jitTpiicbv TraOog, a violation and laxity of 
 metre, of which the acute is to be the Oepcnrda, the resto- 
 rative medicine, such as it is. He calls the verse also, 
 in that part of the annotation which is omitted by Dr. 
 G. TrpoicXaoTOQ /ecu a^K^drjg, broken and pinched. These 
 words of Eustathius shew, I think, that he was himself 
 for from being satisfied with his own explanation : but 
 if he really was, he will hardly bring any accurate * per- 
 son into the same opinion. Barnes indeed in this book 
 of the Odyssey greedily catches at it, and applies it with 
 perfect assurance of its strengthening quality ; for in a 
 few lines before (K. v. 36.) where the same word occurs 
 with the same quantity, 
 
 Awpa 7rap' AtoXou ptyaXi}Topog 
 
 *' Media tow AloXov (says he) producitur ante Liquidam, 
 vique toni, quadam denique metri necessitate." That is, 
 " the tone lengthens it, and it is long because it must be 
 so." Let those accept this, who will. I will not, as long 
 as another explanation of it is to be had : and with that 
 Dr. Clarke, without going far, supplies me. " Notatu 
 dignius (says he on the same passage) quod ait Athe- 
 nams : 01 'A^atoi [f. 'Ap^aTot] no 6 a.Tri\pC}VTo ov povov t(j> 
 tjg vvv TVLTTirai cvvaptiog' aXXd icai ore ti)v St^doyyov ciaarj- 
 paivu, cia tov 6 ypa(j>ovcn.-f Ut adeo AloXov hoc in loco 
 
 * His famous abridger, Hadrian. Trpo'stXaj-ro; xa; <r<fnxooJn? : " the verse 
 
 Junius, who is generally judicious in thus circumstanced is not only loose, 
 
 his extractsfrom the Archbishop's great but broken and pinched." 
 
 work, seems to have been dissatisfied t "Graci veteres utebantur litera o 
 
 with his master's two solutions of the non solum in qua nunc ordinatur po- 
 
 knot before us : for he passes them testate ; sed etiam, cum diphthongns 
 
 over in silence, and says only o ovrco [ou] denntatur, characterem solum o 
 
 •fcSiiv a-ri^oi ov fxCyov Xaya^of, aXKa xa.1 adhjbent." Athen. lib. xi. c. 5.
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 267 
 
 pronuncietur AtouXou." Those who may doubt of this 
 on Dr. Clarke's authority, will, if they turn to Dr. Tay- 
 lor's Elements of Civil Law,* not only find all their 
 doubts cleared up in regard to this passage, but great 
 light thrown on others of the same author, by a masterly 
 application of the most sound principles of criticism. 
 
 When Dr. G. cites the foregoing passages from He- 
 pheestion's scholiast and Eustathius, he introduces them 
 by the name of testimonies of the ancient Greek gram- 
 marians ;f upon which I expected to see a creditable 
 list, containing the names of Aristarchus, the three Dio- 
 nysii, Trypho, Apollonius, Herodian, &c. Dr. G. is, I 
 believe, the first man who ever honoured that scholiast 
 above and Eustathius with this eminent title of the 
 ancient greek grammarians. Whether this name 
 is given to these two as the most distinguished, icar 
 l^oxnv, or, as the representatives of all the others, who 
 commonly bear the same name ; I do strongly except to 
 their new title, thinking that Aristarchus, Dionysius, 
 Apollonius, &c. have at least an equal, if not superior, 
 claim to that appellation. And they all give instances 
 of the acute being joined with syllables which we are 
 sure were short. And, indeed, after all, so does Eusta- 
 thius himself in a hundred places, and our scholiast in 
 
 * P. 553—556. " There are pas- 0> tne pronunciation was 0T. Ho- 
 
 sages in Homer, which generally are mer) a str anger to diphthongs, wrote 
 
 passed over disregarded and without t jj e following words, OlXopsvnv. NoZe-ov, 
 
 being understood, by all such who are & c# w i ta tne simple element thus, OAO- 
 
 strangers to the circumstances of Greek MENHN. N020N.— Upon the whole, a 
 
 literature at the time when Homer wrote. ma u that sits down to Homer, must 
 
 —A scholar and a critic is bound to see read him in his own alphabet, and not 
 
 a language in its first principles, ^n scrutinize his text by powers and cha- 
 
 what I think philosophers call the racters, by those helps and conveniences 
 
 Ratal form. For it is in criticism as of language, which were introduced 
 
 in physic. No medicine can be applied after his age, and of which it is not 
 
 successfully, without some knowledge possible he should have any idea." Dr. 
 
 of the constitution. The O for a G. I a:n convinced, will think this 
 
 while denoted the diphthong OT.— worth his attention in the case before 
 
 Thus we need not be startled at A£§a us.— See also Dr. Taylor's Comment, 
 
 •wag kliKov /j,iya\r)TO£CQ. Biv il; AiiXou ad Marmor Sandvic. p. 7. 9. 
 AKuta. Zc*fA,a.Ta. For the writing was t Second Dissert, p. 55.
 
 268 REPLY TO DR. G.'s 
 
 that quoted by Dr. G., wherein <j>i\og is acknowledged 
 to be * acuted on the first syllable, which is short. 
 
 In urging this point concerning the acute giving a 
 length as well as elevation to a syllable, I am surprised 
 he does not perceive that in consequence of this he must 
 prove the first syllables of all such words as dnimos, 
 legeres, legas to be long, and thus must lengthen near 
 half the short syllables of the Roman language. He 
 does and must allow the foregoing acuted syllables to 
 be short, i. e. to have been actually pronounced by the 
 Romans with one, or a short, measure of time. What 
 is to become here of the lengthening acute ? I am al- 
 most ashamed of dwelling so long on the proof of so 
 very clear a point. These Latin syllables then had the 
 acute, and yet were short : and why not the Greek have 
 it in like manner? But why should I labour to evince 
 by reason, what is granted to me by Dr. G.'s own con- 
 cession ; or why allege any authority against him but 
 his own; which allows " that each accent, considered 
 of itself, is capable of two modifications in point of 
 time,"f i. e. if I interpret these words properly, " ad- 
 mits two different measures of time, a greater and a 
 less?" 
 
 His singular doctrine concerning the lengthening power 
 of the acute is, I must own, introduced^: by him with 
 some diffidence and a seeming unwillingness to affirm, 
 that it absolutely gives a long time to a syllable. He 
 says therefore it gives an addition of time, a /3paSvrrjc 
 rig tov x?v vov > a kind of delay in time, a TrpoaOijKi] 
 aKov<jTiia) kcu aierOrpyj, an addition of length perceptible to 
 the ear, such as consonants give to a short vowel, by 
 which means arpo, though short, is longer than o. Be 
 it so. Yet this additional time of the rhythmici doth 
 after all leave the syllable arpo short with the metrici 
 and grammatici, to whom our question belongs. § And 
 
 * Second Dissert, p. 58. rhythmici, and metrici or grammatici, 
 
 t Ibid. p. 78. i" this respect, see what I have given 
 
 $ Ibid. p. 49 — 55. in the foregoing Essay, p. 17. from 
 
 § On the difference between thr Hephaestion, and from Victorinus, in
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 26$ 
 
 let the acute then be allowed to give the same additional 
 length to a short syllable, as in the penultima of Swjcpa- 
 tx]v, it yet, according to these principles, will leave it 
 short in a metrical sense ; and that is all I require : for 
 the quantity will be still unhurt : and in the following 
 lines the antepenultima $a, of oTfxxpdXiyyi, with all the 
 retarding quality of its acute, will be to all the pur- 
 poses of prosody at least as short as the prae-antepe- 
 nultima orpo : 
 
 MapvcijuLtvwv a'/x^' avTov' 6 S' iv aTpod)d\iyyi kovcoq 
 Keiro fxeyag fxeyaXuxTTi, X^Xacrixivog iTnroavvuhiv. 
 
 The same, which is here said of <pd with its acute con- 
 tinuing short, is equally true of the acuted penultima 
 fik in Mapvafxivwv, fjtiyag, XeXaafiivog, and the acuted ulti- 
 ma ot avrbv and jUE-yaAwort. 
 
 Not that I will admit this additional length from the 
 acute, harmless as it is to quantity, being persuaded 
 with Bishop Hare, that, instead of necessarily adding 
 the least degree of delay to a syllable, it may rather 
 make a short one even more short. Hinc usu venit, ut 
 brevior acuta videatur, etiam cum ipsa quoque brevis est.* 
 
 If Dr. G. should choose to retract his concessions 
 relating to the nature of the acute, i am not unwilling 
 to remit them to him, and will engage myself to prove 
 the truth of my own assertion, concerning it, to sense. 
 I will elevate and shorten the penultima of K vpiov, in 
 the judgment of any ear that can distinguish a high 
 
 p. 22. And to the same purpose also dam tempora, ad certam mensuram non 
 
 Sext. Empiricus : Movjixoi y.iv yap icrvt; minutim exueia, et varum uugmenta le- 
 
 aKoyovq TiVat; ^movq,x.ai <po)vuv napau^- via. Grummaticisvero, qui lion capituit 
 
 eras tivvna-ovTai a.Tto'Knreiv to~; Ss ph ^ai- profundhatem hujusmudi dubitationis, 
 
 £ovtri to toioDto (3a&t>j rga^yoiaTOcoi? rng sed solum Syllabam in genere dividunt 
 
 atroplat;, aW' avro y,6mv etf B^ay^itav x.a.1 in brevcm et longam, von aqiium est 
 
 /xciHgav Siat^oufA.mt; nvyzvuhv c-vKhu&nv , ignoscere. Adversus Grammat. i. 
 
 owt 'ia-ri a-iryyiicefA.on'iv Sixoiov. Rlusici cap. 6. 
 
 quidem fortasse poterunt relinquere quce- * De Metr. Comic, p. 62.
 
 270 REPLY TO BR. G.'S 
 
 from a low tone, in as easy and discernible a manner, as 
 I can shorten the grave penultima of mdximos. The 
 difference between the two to me is, that Kvpiov sounds 
 much more agreeably to my ear, than if it were Kvpiov . 
 I do therefore, in answer to Dr. G.'s queries,* declare, 
 that " I speak upon a supposition, that an acute 
 accent may be founded in such a manner, as will not 
 make the short syllable, upon which it is laid, appear 
 long." And let this then be called, as Dr. G. requires, 
 " the standard accent ;" by which I mean only an ele- 
 vation of sound, connected commonly with a long time 
 in modern languages, but frequently separated, and 
 always separable, from it in the Greek and Roman ; 
 separable not only by the ancients, but by us. And 
 when therefore we do not separate this acute from a 
 long quantity in places where the ancients did, that I 
 call an abuse. Dr. G. seems to think it strange, that 
 " I would have our own language pronounced by one 
 accent, and the Greek by another." But this I would 
 have done, and shew it may be. If to the Greek lan- 
 guage we are to join our own lengthened acute, because 
 we are Englishmen, why not join to it likewise our own 
 letters and characters, and thus thoroughly modernize it 
 at once by giving it English types 1 Which, if done, 
 however ridiculous this supposition may appear, would 
 not so much affect the true sound of that language, 
 as the application of an accent to it different from 
 its own. 
 
 Dr. G. complains,f that my account of the acute was 
 obscure and hardly intelligible. I had said that "accent 
 is not only distinct from quantity, but in the formation 
 of the voice really antecedent to it. The height or pitch 
 of the sound is taken first, and then the continuance of it 
 is settled.";}: Agreeably to this, after having shewn that 
 every acute sound operates quicker on the sense than a 
 grave (which is as well proved by modern philosophy 
 
 * Second Dissert, p. 7">, 76. 78, t Ibid. p. 83. 85, 8(5. 
 
 80. * Essay, p. 7.
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 271 
 
 as by those passages collected by me from the * ancients), 
 I said, that, " even when the acute is joined with a long- 
 syllable, though the duration of the sound [when elevated] 
 is long, yet the power and effect of the acute [*. e.-of the 
 elevation itself] is short and quick to the sense ; f which 
 can perceive the effect of this elevation, before the con- 
 tinuance of the note is determined one way or the other 
 for long or short." If he really does not understand this, 
 I am sorry that 1 am not more fortunate and clear in my 
 expression; but comfort myself with the hopes, that it ap- 
 pears not unintelligible to other readers. His complaints 
 of the obscurity of my writing in some places, and his 
 perversions of it in others, do now convince me of the 
 expediency of that advice, which I offered to certain 
 readers, from Gaudentius, and prefixed to my Essay. I 
 have great reason to think that Dr. G. is not duly n)v 
 aicoriv yzyv/uLvaaiLilvoz, hath not an ear lightly disciplined 
 to the question ; since he seems not to distinguish be- 
 tween the mere elevation of a sound, and the duration 
 of it after it is elevated. If he could have distinguished 
 this, he would not have written some of the latter pages 
 of his Second Dissertation. 
 
 When the acute accent, as described by me to be quick 
 and rapid, is by him called mine,% he gives to me what 
 has many owners, who have at least a joint property in 
 it with myself, and indeed a much better ; I mean || Aris- 
 totle, Cicero, Plutarch, Macrobius, Suidas, J. Pollux, 
 Stobams, Pet.Victorius, Salmasius, Lipsius, and Bishop 
 Hare. For all these writers described it before me in 
 the same manner. 
 
 As he diverts § himself so much with the confession 
 which I made, of my inability fully to express to my 
 satisfaction some things which I had conceived ; I could 
 amuse him, since he is so easily pleased, with a hun- 
 
 * Essay, latter part of the seventh |j Essay, latter part of the seventh 
 
 chapter. chapter. 
 
 t Ibid. p. 144. $ Second Dissert, p. 87, 88. 
 
 t Second Dissert, p. 86.
 
 272 REPLY TO DR. G.'s 
 
 died passages out of Cicero and all the best writers, who 
 frequently acknowledge the same inability. They all, 
 on several occasions, own they cannot find expressions 
 adequate to their ideas : and ray own incapacity in this 
 respect, I am neither ashamed to perceive or to acknow- 
 ledge. I often conceive things in my own mind, which it 
 is not in my power to communicate to another. Particu- 
 larly in a case of sound, it is frequently very difiicult to 
 convey in a precise manner the idea of it, except by 
 sound, or by characters appropriated to it, i. e. by musi- 
 cal notations. Of this, no doubt, Michaelis was sensi- 
 ble, when in writing upon this very subject he says, that 
 he " cannot express himself so clearly to the reader, as 
 he might, if his paper could speak."* Are we to con- 
 sider these words of Michaelis as a ridiculous confession 
 of inability, or as a proper apology of diffidence ? 
 
 To those many difficulties, which Dr. G. confesseth f do 
 attend the defence of his system, let me add a trifling one 
 which perhaps he doth not see, arising from the different 
 representations he hath given of me. For if I was capa- 
 ble of writing such despicable jargon, as he, by a mis- 
 interpretation of my words, imputes to me % in some 
 places, I must be so far from having those literary qua- 
 lities,|| which his unmerited complaisance hath attributed 
 to me in others, that I should be the most dull and illiterate 
 of mortals, and deserve to be debarred for the future from 
 the use of a pen on any subject, after having so egregi- 
 ously abused it upon this. But why should I complain 
 of being misinterpreted by Dr. G. when in this respect I 
 suffer in such reputable company, as (not to mention 
 other authors) Porphyry ; whose rovog, and yjoovoc too, 
 have been wrested and tortured by a more perverted § in- 
 terpretation, if possible, than my poor acute ? 
 
 * See the note in Essay, p. 200. sion of my words arises from his not 
 
 t Second Dissert, p. 87. distinguishing between the effect of 
 
 X " This is the same, as if Mr. Foster the mere elevation of sound, and the 
 
 had said, that though the sound of it be duration of it when elevated, 
 long, yet the sound of it is short." || Second Diss. p. 2. 93, Pref. p. xv 
 
 Second Dissert, p. 85. This pervei- § Essay, p. 142.
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION. 273 
 
 The conclusion of his work doth at length clear up 
 that ambiguity, of which 1 complained in the beginning 
 of it : for he closes his Dissertation by declaring, that 
 the main point, which he had in view, was to shew that 
 the ancient Greek language cannot be pronounced accord- 
 ing to accents, i. e. according to that [lengthened] acute 
 accent, which we use, without spoiling the quantity.* I 
 wonder it should be his main point, to shew what I had 
 myself shewn, and disapprove what I had condemned 
 and endeavoured to correct. But why was this exposi- 
 tion of his main point thus postponed, and not given ra- 
 ther in the first than the last part of his Dissertation 1 
 The reason of it is perhaps not very distant. Had this 
 declaration appeared in the title or first page, instead of 
 the last, the reader would hardly have turned to the se- 
 cond, or chosen to be at the trouble actum agere. But 
 we will take his explanation where we find it. And 
 the amount then of his argument, as it now stands, is 
 this. The present Greek marks of accentuation are, by 
 his silence, allowed to be antique, genuine, and faithful, 
 which he denied in his former Treatise. But they are 
 now, it seems, to be neglected and erased from the book 
 of learning, because we cannot in all cases express those 
 very tones which they denote. My opinion on the other 
 hand is, that they are to be preserved, not only as au- 
 thentic and curious remains of antiquity, but as appli- 
 cable also to their proper and original use. But allow- 
 ing, for the sake of argument, the contrary to be true, 
 " that we can not so apply them in expressing the old 
 tones ;" yet, if on account of misapplication we are to 
 reject them, we ought, en the same principle and charge 
 of abuse, to expunge from our present Greek alphabet 
 all those letter's, the ancient sounds of which we do not 
 properly express : which should we on that account an- 
 nul, we should leave the alphabet in as scanty a state as 
 Palamedes found it. This kind of reasoning therefore 
 proves too much, and is not to be admitted. But what 
 
 • Second Dissert, p. 94. 
 T
 
 274 REPLY, &C. 
 
 if we can express the old tones more truly, than we do 
 the ancient sounds of many single letters? And this we 
 certainly can. There is therefore less reason for sup- 
 pressing the tonical marks, than for cancelling those 
 single letters ; though no good or sufficient reason for 
 either. 
 
 If in any of the preceding pages there should be found 
 expressions, which may have escaped me in the warmth 
 of argument, appearing unhandsomely to reflect on those 
 from whom I am by rational conviction obliged to dis- 
 sent, all such indicta sunto. Every thing of that kind 
 I should always wish to have as remote from my papers, 
 as it is from my intention.
 
 DISSERTATION 
 
 AGAINST PRONOUNCING THE 
 
 GREEK LANGUAGE 
 
 ACCORDING TO 
 
 ACCENTS. 
 
 vouj, ouJe /M.6TaTi'9>)3-iv. aXX' o\'a$ TeaptiXn^i -rn tyuru raj a-uXXa#aj, raj re 
 ftaxgaf xcu toi |3gaj(Eia?, roiauTa; <£uXaVrEi. 
 
 Dionys. Halic. ITejJ 2w8e9\ Ovo/t-wtr. §. 11. 
 
 t2
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 BY the Greek language, which the title-page setteth 
 forth, the reader is to understand the ancient Greek lan- 
 guage, and not the modern. This I look upon as a dif- 
 ferent language from the former ; as different perhaps as 
 the Italian is from the Latin. We indeed call it the 
 modern Greek ; but the modern Greeks themselves call 
 it pwfia'iicfiv. Simon Portius was the first, who published 
 a grammar of this language at Paris in 1638, which he 
 entitled rpa/xfxaTiia) Trig pw/xaiicrig yXuxraag. And Joh. 
 Tribbechovius, in the year 1705, published at Jena an- 
 other grammar of the same language with this title, Bre- 
 via Linguce pufidiicTig Elementa. *" Appellator vero 
 vulgaris Grascorum lingua ptDfidiKfj sive Romaea, quia 
 Christiani Grasci Constantinopolim suam novam Romam 
 pridem dixerant." Consistently with this, by accents the 
 reader is also to understand those, which are commonly 
 used in writing and pronouncing the ancient Greek. 
 
 It is now about seventy years since Henninius and 
 Wetstein wrote upon the pronunciation of the Greek 
 language : and the same subject was moved again in 
 Italy not many years ago. fMirtisbus Sarpedonius 
 wrote against the accentual pronunciation, and $ Sta- 
 nislaus Velastus wrote in favour of it. If what these 
 
 * Mich. Langii Meletema de Ori- Romje, 1750. 
 
 gine, Progressu, et variis Fatis Ling. J Tho. Stauislai Velasti Disserlatio 
 
 Graecse. Sect. xx. Noribergaj, 1708. de Litterarum Groecarum Proiiuncia- 
 
 t Mirtisbi Sarpedonii Dissertatio de tione. 4to. Roraae, 1751. 
 vera Atticoruin Pronunciatione. 4to.
 
 278 PREFACE. 
 
 authors have said had been, either way, satisfactory to 
 me, the following papers might have been spared. But, 
 if I am not greatly mistaken, they have not gone to the 
 bottom of this subject. This I am certain of, that the 
 method which I have pursued is quite different from 
 any which I have yet seen. However, the reader is 
 free to consider what hath been, or may be said on both 
 sides, and then to judge for himself.
 
 DISSERTATION 
 
 AGAINST 
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 
 
 A right pronunciation is necessary in all languages. 
 And the more harmonious a language is in itself, the 
 more will it surfer by a wrong pronunciation : as, there- 
 fore, the Greek language recommendeth itself, above al 
 other languages, upon account of its harmony, it must 
 be well worth our while, if we would be acquainted 
 with its real beauties, to know how it ought to be ~ 
 pronounced. 
 
 The use of accents in the ancient Greek language 
 was one thing, and the modern use of them in the same 
 language is another. The Trpomodim were musical, trpoa- 
 ty$ia, fizT opyavov wdi). Hesych. irapa to Trpbg avrag (kl- 
 Oapag) acuv ripag raxg (fxvvalg' ij irapa to irpbg avTag a^ea- 
 Oai to. Trou]fxa.Ta. Etymolog. Mag. — And so * Alexander 
 Aphrodisiensis, amuchmore ancient writer : irpoowSia, 6 
 Tovog irpbg ov aEopsv. 
 
 f Henninius and others have argued against the modern 
 use of accents in the Greek language, chiefly from ancient 
 manuscripts, inscriptions, and medals ; in none of o 
 which any accents appear: and this argument is cer- 
 
 * Ad sophisticos Elenchos Aristo- t 'EXXwcr^of opMi;, 
 
 telis, c. iii.
 
 280 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 tainly very strong and conclusive. For as to that part 
 of the argument, which is founded upon ancient inscrip- 
 tions and medals, if it should be said, that no accents 
 appear in them because they could not be conveniently 
 placed there, this cannot be said as to that part of the 
 argument, which is founded upon ancient manuscripts, 
 where they could have been conveniently placed. The 
 main force, therefore, of this argument ariseth from an- 
 cient manuscripts. And it will appear to have a still 
 greater force, if it be considered, that no manuscripts that 
 are a thousand years old and upwards have any accents : 
 which is a full proof, not only that accents, as they are 
 now used in the Greek language, were unknown to the an- 
 . cient Greeks, but also that they are of a very mo- 
 dern date, and were not in common use but after the 
 abovementioned period, i. e. since the seventh century. 
 * Nor were accents generally written in manuscripts 
 immediately after that time : for there are many, and 
 good manuscripts too, written since the seventh century, 
 which have no accents at all. But the practice began 
 in the seventh century, and by degrees prevailed. 
 
 In the library of St. Germain des Prez there is a 
 manuscript of St. Paul's Epistles, which was copied from 
 a manuscript ofPamphilus, the martyr; as is said in the 
 last lines of the said copy. The original manuscript was 
 destroyed when the library of Cassarea was burnt; and, 
 r consequently, the copy must have been made before 
 the year 800. In this manuscript there are accents 
 which are placed as accents are now placed ; and these 
 accents appear to be as old as the manuscript itself; 
 for the letters and accents are written with the same ink. 
 In some places, indeed, the accents have been re- 
 touched ; but yet so, that it still appears in these very 
 places that the original accents (which are not quite 
 obliterated) were placed just as they are now placed. 
 This, I believe, is the oldest manuscript extant that hath 
 
 * Montfaucon's Palseograpliia Gncca, p. 215.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 281 
 
 original accents. But even this manuscript carrieth 
 with it a proof that accents were not then in common 
 and general use : for it hath, not only many words, but 
 even many lines, without any accents ; which must have 
 arisen from the copier's being used to write indifferently 
 with or without accents. 
 
 When I considered this subject, many years ^ 
 ago, I thought one might argue more effectually 
 upon it in a manner that may be called a priori, i. e. 
 from the nature of syllables, and even from the analogy 
 of the doctrine of accents. Upon this principle I drew 
 up some observations, which I have since put together, 
 and now submit to the judgment of the reader; premis- 
 ing this, that, by the analogy of the doctrine of accents, 
 I mean a conformity to those general rules of accenting, 
 which profess to have a regard to quantity, and to keep 
 as much as possible the accent of the first word, or 
 words of the same form, in the same place. 
 
 My design is not to write against all use of accents ; 
 some accents are and must be used in all Ian- » 
 guages, for there is no harmony in continued mono- 
 tones ; and therefore * Alartianus Capella very justly 
 saith, that accents are the soul of words, and the found- 
 ation of music : Anima vocum et musices seminarium. 
 But my design is to shew, that the modern way of 
 placing accents in the ancient Greek language is wrong, 
 because it is, 1st, Very arbitrary and uncertain ; 2dly, 
 Contrary to analogy, reason, and quantity ; and, 3dly, 
 Contradictory to itself. 
 
 The truth of these propositions will appear from an 
 induction of particulars ; and it will be almost impossi- 
 ble to keep them so distinct but that they will sometimes 
 run one into another. The doctrine of the Greek accents 
 is so perplexed a thing, that what is a rule in one o 
 case, sometimes becometh the foundation for excep- 
 tions to a rule in another case. And sometimes also the 
 rules and the exceptions may be fairly transposed : so 
 
 * Lib. iii. c. de Fasligio.
 
 2S2 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 (hat the exceptions may be converted into rules, and 
 the rules may become exceptions. However, I shall 
 endeavour to keep these things as distinct as the nature 
 of them will allow. 
 
 PROPOSITION I. 
 
 The modern use of accents in the ancient Greek lan- 
 guage is arbitrary and uncertain : 
 
 I. Accents are not placed upon words of the same 
 form by any uniform and constant rule, but words of the 
 same form are accented differently ; and words ol dif- 
 ferent forms are accented in the same manner. 
 
 A polysyllable, whose last is short, and penulti- 
 mate long, by nature, may be accented three ways, 
 viz. on the last, penultimate, and antepenultimate ; as 
 rtyovaa, rvrroixra; rairuvoq. And sometimes one and the 
 same word of this form is accented two ways : as dviaai, 
 ascendimt ; and dviam, sursiim mittunt ; diriam, abeunt ; 
 and d(j>Lum, dimittunt; Mam, transeunt , percurrunt ; and 
 liiam, transmittunt ; timaoi, or tviaot, introeunt ; and 
 tlmam, or Iviam, intromittunt ; KarUun, descendunt ; and 
 KaBuiai, demittunt ; lurtatn, persequuntur ; and fxtQCaai, 
 omittunt. All these are third persons plural of iqpt, eo ; 
 and "jfjut, mitto ; and, as they are all of the same form, 
 they are capable of being, and so ought to be, accented 
 in the same manner : whether they come from trjjut, or Ufu, 
 the sense will sufficiently determine ; and, therefore, 
 the rule prescribed in this case must be quite arbi- 
 trary. " Hoc tamen sciendum est, in eundi significa- 
 tione penultimam, cum simplicis verbi, turn composito- 
 rum, utrumquerecipereaccentum posse : sed proparoxy- 
 tonam habere desinentiam, quum prima singularis est 
 tlfu (i. e. irjjuj) ; properispomenam, quum prima singula- 
 ris est "rifii."* This rule, I say, is arbitrary in itself: and 
 
 * Scot. Uirivers. Gram. Grseo. p. 320.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 283 
 
 what further evidently sheweth it to be so is, that, in fact, 
 there are, as* Caninius hath observed, many variations 
 from it. " In compositione (ab In/xi) Iviaai, at dalam. 
 avviaai vero et avviuai. Trpoaiaat, noil Trpoaiaai : at iaai, ab 
 slfu, sic componitur, Trpo'iaoi, non irpo'iacn- at avium et 
 aviam. Kariaaiv et kotuuti. Suaariv et Biiacri. periatnv et -.^ 
 fxtTictat" 
 
 The first in fiia hath an acute upon the penultimate, 
 though its a final is short ; pia being- excepted from the 
 general rule, by which nouns ending in to have the a final 
 long. But the last in piag and put hath a circumflex, 
 though they are both capable of having an acute upon 
 the first, becausef the last is long. The case of tag, i$, 
 and pt)$epiag, p-qdepiq, is the same. And so in aptyw, and 
 Suw ; which have an acute upon the first, and a circum- 
 flex upon the second in aptyolv and Svolv. 
 
 Aoyog hath an acute upon the first, but 6$6g hath an 
 acute upon the last; though both of them are 19 
 words of the same form. And so Ikwv, volens, is an 
 oxytone, but okwv, nolens, is a barytone. 
 
 Monosyllables, long by nature, should be circum- 
 flexed ; as>lv, rig, r). They are indeed circumflexed when 
 they are contracted, but when they are uncontracted, 
 they are oxytones by the general rule ; and so wv and 
 ov are accented in the same manner. But this distinc- 
 tion is quite arbitrary; for if a syllable be long in its 
 nature, no possible difference, as to its sound and pro- 
 nunciation, can arise from its being originally long, or 
 from its being so by contraction. And, besides, as it is 
 laid down for a rule in the doctrine of accents, that, when 
 the last syllable of a word is short, and the penultimate 
 long by nature, this, if ii is to have an accent, must 1q 
 be circumflexed ; by this analogy, all monosyllables, 
 long by nature, should be circumflexed, because it is sup- 
 posed that they are to have an accent; and because, by 
 being long by nature, they are as capable of being circum- 
 flexed, as if they were penultimate syllables. But the 
 
 • Helleuism. edit. 4to. p. 279. t V id. Etyiuol. Mag. Voce Eif. p. 30a.
 
 284 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 rule is otherwise, and the exceptions from it are the 
 only monosyllables that are rightly accented. 
 
 Verbal nouns ending in tog, ia, £ov, (which answer to 
 the gerunds of the Latins) are accented with an acute 
 upon the penultimate, though the last is short, i. e. they 
 are accented in the same manner as if they were words 
 of the same form with those that have the last syllable 
 long-. 
 
 Verbal nouns ending in rog are accented upon the 
 14 last ; as oparog. But when they are compounded, the 
 accent is drawn back to the antepenultimate; as aooarog, 
 i. e. *if the composition is made after the derivation. 
 But if it is made before, i. e. if these nouns are derived 
 from a compound verb, then they retain the accent upon 
 the last; as scWo?, eiriOvfinrqg. But what sense is 
 there in this 1 and what purpose can it serve, but to 
 perplex things, which are very simple and easy in them- 
 selves ? 
 
 Verbal nouns ending in roc are sometimes used in 
 
 different senses ; and grammarians are not agreed how 
 
 to accent them according to their different senses. — 
 
 5 Ammonius saith, that apr\Tog, with the accent upon 
 
 the antepenultimate, signifieth the harvest, i. e. the fruits 
 
 of the harvest ; but that apnrog, with the accent upon 
 
 the last, signifieth the time of the harvest. "Apnrog ttqo- 
 
 TTapo^vToviog ar\paivu avTti tcl ^ipiapara, tovt \<jti tov Kap- 
 
 7roV oZvTovwg Se tov Kctipov tov Stptepov. Philoponus 
 
 agreeth with Ammonius. But the great Etymologist 
 
 saith just the reverse : apr\Tog 6 icaipbg tov Stpovg' apr\Tog 
 
 Si, 6 Sepiapog' oiovh avrbg 6 ap.wp.tvog nap-nog. And SO doth 
 
 Suidas : aprjTog, avTa tcl T&Eptapiva, 6E,vTOvo)g. irpo7rapo%v- 
 
 Tovwg Se, apr\Tog, 6 mipbg tov Sepovg, ev o) oei apav. Hesy- 
 
 chius differeth from himself: apr\Tog, Szpiapog' aprjTog, 6 
 
 tcaipog, scil. Sepiapov. And so as to Tpvynrog, a word of 
 
 the same form. Tpvyrjrog, 6 icaipog. Tpvyt}Tog, 6 rpvyog. 
 
 And in this he agreeth with the Etymologist. But 
 
 1G when he expresseth himself in words at length, he 
 
 * Sylburgii Rudimeut. Grace. Ling. p. 259. N. Meth. Grec. p. 383.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 285 
 
 saith just the reverse, and agreeth with Ammonius : 7% 
 
 fitv wpuTriQ OL,vvofXhvr\q avra to. Ttdzpiaiiiva' rr)g de TtXtVTaiag, 
 6 Kdipbg rrjg GvyKO/iadrig rwv Kapirwv. If this was the real 
 sentiment of Hesychius, as there is most reason to 
 think it was, then the accents in the former instances 
 must have been placed wrong-, both in the manuscripts 
 and printed books ; as indeed they easily might. And 
 though these grammarians are ancient in respect to us, 
 yet are they modern in respect to the true Greeks : and 
 their disagreement is a full proof that the ancient Greeks 
 did not use any accents to mark the different senses of 
 the same word, but that they are the invention of mo- 
 dern grammarians. 
 
 This is farther evident from hence, that the same 
 variation is to be found in the manuscripts, in which 
 words of this form are accented; as H. Stephens him- 
 self confesseth, even when he professeth to adhere to 
 the rule of Hesychius, as it agreeth with that of Ammo- 
 nius. For after he had quoted two passages out of 
 Hesiod, in which the word aii n rog is accented upon the 
 first, and signifieth the harvest, or gathering of the fruits 
 of the earth, he addeth,* " Re vera in quibusdam ex- 
 emplaribus Hesiodi non ajxiirov legitur, seel a/xrjrou in ci- 
 tatis modo locis." + Sylburgius hath farther observed, 
 that awoptiTog, signifying both the action and the time of 
 sowing ; and aAoijroe, signifying both the action and 
 the time of threshing, are never accented but with 
 an acute upon the last; and that the abovementioned, 
 and many more words of the same form, arc accented 
 sometimes differently, though the sense be the same; 
 and that sometimes the sense is different, though the 
 accent be the same. And it may be still farther ob- 
 served, that in words of this form the grammarians have 
 provided but two places for the accent, according to 
 two different senses. Whereas some of them bear three 
 different senses ; and yet nothing is said as to placing 
 
 * Thus. Ling. Grscc. t. i. Gal. 383. aie"E<>}<. nal 'ttyrtf. v. 382. j?3. 
 un\ lire passages which he refers to, t Ubi supra.
 
 2S6 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 the accent for this third sense. For instance, aprjrog 
 signifieth the fruits of the harvest, the time of the har- 
 vest, and the reaping, or act of getting in, the harvest. 
 But upon the whole, Moschopulus ingenuously con- 
 fesseth, that in all the words of this form, there is no 
 reason for placing the accent differently, according 
 to the different sense which they bear. And, as what he 
 saith on this subject is very full and express, I shall 
 produce it here : apiiTog b Kaipbg ore apCxn, kcu 6 Kapirug 6 
 apwpevog, ical r) Ivipyua, i'ryovv avrb to apav. Sxrnrep aXorfTog 
 b Kaipbg ore aXouxri, kcu 6 Kapirbg b aXoiLpevog, kol to aXoav. 
 kcu b rpvyriTog b Kaipbg ote TpvyCom, kcu b Kapwbg b Tpvywpi- 
 vog, kcu to rpvyav. aporbg Se b Kaipbg 6Ve cipiomv, kcu to 
 apovv. coKOixTi £>£ b£,vv£<j%ai, wg vecitoc> liraivtTog, vot)Tog, 
 ayaTn)Tog, StuTog, vpv^Tog, kcu cnrXwg iravTa to. eig bg cnrXa. 
 baa ano 7raS"rjrtKwv TrapaKtip£vii)v yivtTai 7repiairu)ptv(i)v avZ,v- 
 yitov. curia cl ov (paivtTai oi rjv fKCtarov tovtwv IttI rowSe plv 
 tov ar\paivopivov o^vTovTjS^CTCTat, ItrX ct tovc)z n poirapo^vv- 
 SfocTai. "Eoy. kcu r H,u. ver. 386, &c. Edit. Heinsii, 
 p. 95. 
 
 II. The accent of the oblique cases varieth often, 
 " and without reason, from the accent of the nomina- 
 tive case both as to nature and place. 
 
 Oxytones in tvg circumflex the last syllable of the 
 vocative in eu ; as fiamXzvg, w fiamXzv : though they 
 might retain the acute of the nominative case. And so 
 contracts of the fourth ; as Xeyw, w X^x 01 '• which also 
 might retain the acute of the nominative case. 
 
 The genitive plural of the first declension is to have 
 a circumflex on the last syllable ; as tcuuwv, reXtoviov, 
 juouawv, Tifijjy. Now in most of these cases, the last syl- 
 lable ought to have no accent at all ; but the penulti- 
 mate should be accented with an acute ; both because 
 the last syllable is long, and because the accent of 
 the first word is upon the penultimate, rapiag, teXw- 
 vt]g, fxovaa. 
 
 Qvya.Tr\p hath an acute upon the penultimate. But in 
 the oblique cases this accent is shifted about in a 
 strange manner. It is upon the last in the genii, and
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 287 
 
 dat. sing, and dual, and in the genit. plur. Svyarpbg, %v- 
 yarpi, Svyarpoiv, Svyarpwv. It is upon the penultimate 
 in the dat. plur. Svyarpaai. And in the other cases it is 
 drawn back to the first ; and so as to all nouns ending 
 in r\p. 
 
 III. All dissyllable prepositions (except ova and Sm), 
 when they are placed after the case, which they govern, 
 draw back their accent; as Seov trapa, tovtwv irtpi. This 
 is quite arbitrary, and very absurd ; for in such 
 cases there is no change either as to quantity, or 
 signification. 
 
 The reason of this, I suppose, is, that these preposi- 
 tions are, in this case, considered as if they were, in a 
 manner, enclitics. But this is introducing one absurd- 
 ity, to support another: for the rules by which the ac- 
 cents of enclitics and synenclitics are directed to be 
 moved, are as absurd and arbitrary, as those which re- 
 late to the accents of words, which are not enclitics. 
 
 If an enclitic is to be considered as so connected with 
 the preceding word, as to make a part of it so far as ac- 
 cent is concerned, there is more reason to alter the ac- 
 cent of the first word, than to remove the accent of the 
 dissyllable preposition ; as in the foregoing instance, 
 3-£ou -rrapa. For a circumflex bears upon its follow- 
 ing syllable ; and so this cannot have another ac- 
 cent. And it cannot bear upon more than one syllable, 
 and this too must be a short one : whereas Ztov iraoa 
 would be agreeable to the general rules, and have its 
 proper accent. 
 
 When a preposition goeth before its case, and is 
 joined with it as one word, then the preposition loseth 
 its accent, and the accent of the compound word is 
 placed according to the general rules; as irapaxp^fia. 
 AVhy then should not dissyllable prepositions, when they 
 come after the cases which they govern, be considered 
 in the same manner, and have their accents regulated 
 according to the general rules, by which compound 
 words are accented? For as these prepositions are, in
 
 288 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 both cases the very same, they ought to be pro- 
 nounced in the very same manner. 
 IV. As to the doubtful vowels a, t, v, they may be 
 considered in three respects : 
 
 1. As being long or short in the same word. 
 
 2. As being always short in the same word. 
 
 3. As being always long in the same word. 
 
 Now in those words, in which the doubtful vowels 
 are always long, this consideration (in respect to the 
 effect which it hath upon the accentuation) taketh place 
 only as to the last syllable, but not the penultimate. 
 AVhereas it would be of equal, if not more service, in 
 the latter case, because here the reader is in greater 
 danger of pronouncing wrong. For instance ; in ay- 
 X v 9 a > yt<pvpa, kivSvvoq, Ztvyvvfii, Z,avyvvm, third per- 
 son singular, the accent is placed upon the antepenulti- 
 mate. And yet in all these words v is always long, and 
 is, in this respect, and in respect also of the final syllable 
 (which, in all these instances, is short by nature, or so 
 far as accent is concerned), as capable of receiving a 
 circumflex as /nv%og, kvSoq, gvkov, Z,tvyvh<yi, third person 
 plural; or as any of the doubtful vowels, when they are 
 always long at the end of a word, are capable of causing 
 an acute to be placed upon the penultimate. For in all 
 these cases, a, i, v, have the power of aa, a, w ; and 
 are therefore as truly long, as rj and w are. For these are 
 said to be long by nature for no other reason, but be- 
 cause they have the power of ee and oo, i. e. r\ and w 
 require just as much time to pronounce them, as ee 
 and oo. And all diphthongs and vowels by contrac- 
 tion, are long by nature, because they have in them the 
 power of the vowels, which compose them, or from 
 which they are contracted ; and so they require the same 
 time in pronouncing them ; which is the very case of a, 
 i, and v, not only when they are always long, but in 
 every case, in which they are long; for whenever a 
 vowel is long, it hath the power of two short vowels, 
 otherwise it would not be long. 
 The doubtful vowels, when they are short, are always
 
 CREEK ACCENTS. 289 
 
 considered as such in placing- accents. They are indeed 
 oftener short than long. But if they are always consi- 
 dered, in respect to accentuation, as short, when they 
 are short, why should they not also, in respect to ac- 
 centuation, be always considered as long, when they _ 
 are long? But this is very rarely done. And ac- 
 cents are placed in verse just as if verse were prose. 
 
 No vowel can, in its nature, and at the same time, be 
 long and short. The vowels a, t, v, are common only in 
 this sense, that they are capable of admitting of a double 
 prosody. But when they have been so qualified, they 
 really are as long in one case, and short in the other, as if 
 they were always long or short. For it is not the bare 
 figure or character of a vowel which determineth its na- 
 ture, but the sound, or time, which is given to it. It is 
 upon this principle that * Sextus Empiricus argueth, 
 when he would prove that the vowels a i v are not in 
 their nature Stypova aroi^ta. Ta roiavra tojv oroiytliov 
 
 tTTl$£lKTlXa EOTl fXl]KOVQ T£ KCU GVGToXrjQ, O'OTE OE jUOKpa ~ ft 
 
 Igtiv, ovre |3pa^la, ou3"' tKarepov, irp\v cnrb irpoaojclag 
 Troir)Sr)vai. But Empiricus carrieth the argument too far 
 when f he concludeth from hence that there are ten 
 vowels, viz. rj, to, and a i v long, and s, o, and « i v short. For 
 such a multiplication of vowels would serve no purpose. 
 And besides, what the grammarians mean by St'^pova 
 aroi\tia is sufficiently intelligible and consistent. For 
 when they say that a syllable is long or short by nature, 
 they only mean, that it is so by the prosody, or time, 
 which is given to it. And even rj and w are long by na- 
 ture only in this sense. But the conclusion which I 
 would draw from hence will still follow, viz. That if, in 
 the present system of accents, a due regard was paid to 
 quantity, the places of accents, in respect to the 
 vowels a i v, would vary according to the prosodia 
 of them in their respective situations ; which it is evi- 
 dent they do not. 
 
 * Adv. Grammat. I. i. c. 6. sect. 106, 7, 8. t Sect. 112. 
 
 U
 
 290 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 PROPOSITION II. 
 
 The modern use of accents in the ancient Greek lan- 
 guage is contrary to analogy, reason, and quantity. 
 
 I. At and 01, being diphthongs, are long by nature : 
 and yet in placing accents at and ot final are reckoned 
 short; as TvirrtaSai, avSpwrroi — but there is no foundation 
 in reason for this. For no diphthong, considered simply 
 in itself, can be favoured in its pronunciation as a sylla- 
 ble, which is common in its nature, or by a weak posi- 
 tion, can : and so it is not capable of being pro- 
 nounced short or long at pleasure. This is not done 
 when any other diphthong is at the end of a word ; and 
 yet the diphthongs ai and ot have at least as full a sound 
 as any other diphthongs ; especially if they are pro- 
 nounced as the ancient Greeks did probably pronounce 
 them : for a and o are the chief vowels in these diph- 
 thongs. In all contractions the t gives way to them ; 
 they require, in the pronouncing of them, a peculiar 
 opening of the organs of speech : and in these northern 
 countries we do not extend our organs of speech suffi- 
 ciently to give them that fulness of sound which they 
 ought to have, and which is given to them in the south- 
 ern parts of the world. Farther still, a and o t >, with an t 
 subscribed, are contractions of the diphthongs at and 01 : 
 q1 I mean only as to the writing of them, for they are 
 the same as to time ; * or rather, they are the very 
 diphthongs at and ot, having the t written under them after 
 the modern way, instead of having it written at the side 
 after the way of the ancients, who were strangers to the t 
 subscribed. And yet a and 10 are never considered as 
 
 * Dativus casus, qui, in Vocibus in vectum esset. — In Inscriptione Farne- 
 
 o*, per a>, subscripto i, exaratur horlie, siana dativus casus in fet w per EI et 
 
 bic (i. e. in Inscriptione Baudelotiana) 01 exaratur, ut in Baudelotianis Mar- 
 
 per o exprimitur, s una serie adscripto, moribus. Similiterque dativus in a, 
 
 ut animadvertas in illis vocibus EN TOI subscripto i, per AI. — Montfauc, Pa- 
 
 rTOAEMOI : idque anteqnam <» fxiya. ad- Ictogr. Grac. p. 138. 141.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 291 
 
 short in the placing of accents ; which manifestly shews, 
 that the modern doctrine of Greek accents is not founded 
 upon any analogy or quantity, but is contrary to both. 
 
 From this rule, however, some exceptions are - 
 made. 
 
 For ai 
 
 In the tenses of the optative mood ; as fyiXfom. 
 
 For ot 
 
 1. In the tenses of the optative mood ; as rervfyoi. 
 
 2. In contracts ; as So7r^o7, A?jrot. 
 
 And some perhaps may be disposed to think that more 
 exceptions may be made from this rule. For instance : 
 For at 
 
 1. In the nominative cases plural of nouns, which 
 have an acute upon the penultimate of the nominative 
 case singular ; as rafxiag, ra/xiai ; Alvdag, Alveiai. 
 
 2. In all infinitives ending in eu, which are accented 
 upon the penultimate ; and which accent is acute, 
 
 if the penultimate is not long by nature ; as Ttrvfyi- 
 vm, TvirivSuL, excepting the first aorist of the middle voice 
 in atrial ; which, still making its last syllable short by the 
 rule, is therefore always accented upon the antepenulti- 
 mate ; as TvipaaSai. 
 For ot 
 
 1. In the nominative cases plural of nouns, which have 
 an acute upon the penultimate of the nominative case 
 singular ; as rerv/xfjiivoQ, TBrvfifxivoi. 
 
 2. In adverbs ; as oucot. To distinguish it, it is said, 
 from otKot, iEdes. 
 
 I could indeed wish that these, and more particulars, 
 might be admitted as exceptions from the rule ; because 
 they would bring things nearer to the standard of quan- 
 tity : but this is not to be done. 
 
 For though it followeth that the last is short, or • 
 considered as short, when there is an accent upon 
 the antepenultimate, yet it doth not follow that at and ol 
 final are considered as long, because the foregoing sylla- 
 ble hath an acute ; for a penultimate may, according to 
 the doctrine of accents, have an acute, whether the last 
 
 u 2
 
 292 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 syllable be short or long. The truth of the case is, that 
 the rule, with all its exceptions, be they more or fewer, 
 is contrary to reason and quantity. For how can a syl- 
 lable be considered as short or long, but by the actual 
 pronunciation of it, or giving it one measure in the for- 
 mer case, and two measures in the latter ? Now this is 
 a thing which can be determined only by the length or 
 shortness of syllables themselves. But the doing of it 
 merely upon the account of accents, and in so ar- 
 bitrary and inconsistent a manner, is dealing too 
 freely with quantity, which is not founded on arbitrary 
 principles, but in the nature and reason of things. 
 
 The considering the diphthongs at and 01 as short in 
 respect to accents, seemeth to have owed its rise to a 
 corrupt pronunciation of the diphthongs, which pre- 
 vailed among the Romans in the times of Claudius and 
 Nero. And if the Romans introduced this pronuncia- 
 tion into Greece, as it is probable they did, for the 
 Greeks knew it not before Greece was subdued by the 
 Romans, then this part of the doctrine of accents will 
 evidently appear to be modern, and the time of its com- 
 mencement may very nearly be pointed out. Isaac Vos- 
 sius hath spoken very fully concerning the facts, 
 from which these consequences follow. * " Eas 
 (scil. diphthongos) integras fuisse, et vere diphthongos, 
 ita ut utraque vocalis exaudiretur, quamvis vel ipsum 
 testetur vocabulum, certius tamen colligitur e scriptis 
 illorum omnium, qui floruere antequam Graecia Romanis 
 serviret. Claudii et Neronis temporibus mutata demum 
 fuit pronunciatio, tunc quippe praecipue usus invaluit 
 ut diphthongi absorberentur, quod ipsum quoque Latinae 
 contigit Linguae, utpote in qua bivocalium usus maxima 
 ex parte cessarit jamdiu ante aetatem Ciceronis. Non 
 tantum insolens quid, sed et vastum et rusticum prae se 
 ferre videbantur diphthongi AI et 01, nee defuere, credo, 
 qui fauces non satis patere, nee sine dolore in tam 
 latos sonos diduci et explicari posse adhrmarent. 
 
 * De Poeinat. Cantn. p. 16, 17.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 293 
 
 Sine mora itaque a Romanis transiit vitiosus hie pro- 
 nuntiandi ritus ad Graecos, gentem adulandi peritissi- 
 mam, frustra reclamantibus doctis, et antiqui moris stu- 
 diosis ; qui licet aliquaindiu restitere, brevi tamen et 
 ipsi quoque in mollius loquendi genus concessere; et 
 adeo quidem ut Trajani et Adriani seculo bivocalium 
 usus penitus cessasse videatur. Hinc est quod in illis 
 Marmoribus, quorum lnscriptiones factae sunt post ea 
 tempora, mira diphthongorum confusio occurrat, cum 
 tamen in vetustioribus lapidibus Orthographiae ratio 
 optime sibi constet." This soon became the case of all 
 the diphthongs. For * Sextus Empiricus lived under 
 Comrnodus, or soon after ; and he expressly saith 
 that the sound of the diphthongs at, a, and ov, was 
 simple and uniform, i. e. they were pronounced as mere 
 Vowels. 'O tov ai tcai a <p%6yyog cnrXovg lari, kcu povou- 
 
 CJ/£. KCU 6 TOV OV (pSoyjOQ jUOVO£tS»7C Kot a<JVV%£TOQ KCU cifit- 
 
 ra/3oXoc, £s apxVQ aXP f TeXovg Aa^jSaverat. Advers. Gram- 
 matic. 1. i. c. 5. §. 117,8. — This also agreeth with, what 
 seemeth to me to have been, the true origin of the Greek 
 accents : an account of which I shall lay before the 
 reader before I finish this subject. 
 
 II. In the motion of nouns through their numbers and 
 cases, the accent of the first word is not kept in its place, 
 or removed, or changed, by any uniform rule of analogy 
 or quantity. 
 
 Monosyllables, which increase in declining, have 
 a remarkable variation in their accents. The acute, 
 which is upon the nominative case, ought, according to 
 the analogy of the doctrine of accents, to be kept upon 
 the same syllable of the increased word as much as pos- 
 sible. And yet, in contradiction to this, and to other 
 general rules, an acute is placed upon the last syllable 
 of the genit. and dat. sing, and of the dat. plur. ; as \u- 
 ooq, x H P' l > X 6 ?^'; an( * a circumflex is placed upon the 
 last syllable of the genit. and dat. dual, and of the genit. 
 plur. ; as \eipoXv, x £l 9^ v ' And, besides this, the penul- 
 
 * Fab. Bib. Grace. I. iv. c. 18.
 
 294 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 timate, if it be long by nature, and is followed by a 
 syllable, is circumflexed in the accusat. singular, and in 
 the nominative, accusative, and vocative dual and plural, 
 as x il P a > X £l 9 £ > X tl 9 a ^- Whereas the accent of the 
 first word might have been kept upon the same syl- 
 lable in all the oblique cases ; viz. either an acute or a 
 circumflex : for the quantity of the penultimate and last 
 syllable would, in all cases, allow of one of them. 
 
 III. The general rule for placing accents on verbs, is 
 to remove them as far back from the last syllable as 
 possible. And yet in the motion of verbs through their 
 moods, tenses, numbers, and persons, the accent is not 
 always kept back as far as possible, but it is moved for- 
 wards when the nature of the syllables, and even the 
 analogy of accents, do not require so forward a motion. 
 
 Example. 
 
 TVTTTh) active. 
 2d ftrt. indicat. 
 
 tvttw, rvTreig, tvttu. 
 
 TVTTUTOV, TVTTUTOV. 
 
 TVTrovfxev, TU7rar£, tvttovgi. 
 
 Optat. 
 
 Tviroifii, TVTroig, tvttoi. 
 tvttoXtov. 
 
 41 
 
 TOTrOlf-ltV, TVTTOlT'c, TVTTOUV. 
 
 Infinit. 
 
 TVTTUV. 
 
 Particip. 
 
 TVTTtOV. 
 
 Middle 
 Indicat. 
 
 TVTTUV fiat, TVTTIJ, TVTTUTai. 
 TVTTHOSSOV, TVTTUG%OV. 
 TV7TU(T%t, TVTTOVVTIU. 
 
 Infinit. 
 
 TVTTU(t5(U.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 295 
 
 So also the 2d aor. infinit. and particip. active, rviruv, 
 tvttwv ; — the perf. and plusperf. infinit. and particip. ac- 
 tive, TtTvfyivai, TtTV(j>w(; ; — the two aors. subjunct. infinit. 
 and particip. passive, Tv<pS<o tvttoj, rv(p^i\vai tvttyivcu, 
 TV(pBeig,TVTrug; — the perf. and plusperf. particip. pas- 
 sive, TiTvufxtvog ; — the 2d aor. imperat. and infinit. middle, 
 Tv-rrov, TvirtaScu ; — and the perf. and plusperf. infinit. and 
 particip. middle, Ttrvirlvat, Ttrvn-wg. 
 
 In all which instances the accent of the first word 
 might have continued the same, and have retained its 
 original place, either by the natural quantity of the last 
 syllable, or because the diphthong at is reckoned short 
 in the modern system of accents. Whereas now the 
 accent of the first word, instead of being removed back, 
 is not even kept back so much as its original place re- 
 quired ; but is carried more forward than the natural or 
 artificial quantity of the last syllable requires. 
 
 IV. An acute, after its agmg or elevation, cannot 
 have more than three measures in its Simg or fall ; 
 for the ear cannot well go farther to judge of accents. 
 But then the distribution of these measures is quite ar- 
 bitrary in the modern system of Greek accents ; for when 
 an acute is upon the antepenultimate, two of the three 
 measures in the fall must be in the penultimate, and not 
 in the last. Whereas there is nothing in the rules of 
 harmony, and of genuine pronunciation, that can hinder 
 two of the three measures in the fall from being either 
 in the penultimate, or in the last; as it is in Latin. 
 Kvpiov and icvpno are as harmonious as domiiii and do- 
 mino. And therefore the accenting of such words upon 
 the penultimate, though the accent was originally 
 upon the antepenultimate in the nominative case, 
 cannot be founded upon harmony, analogy, or reason. 
 
 This is farther evident from hence ; that even in the 
 present system of Greek accents, some words are, con- 
 trary to the abovementioned general rule, directed to 
 be accented upon the antepenultimate, though the last 
 is long ; as Alvt'u oj, ofcwg, and many others, which will 
 be produced under the third proposition.
 
 296 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 V. The system of accents, I have said, professeth in 
 its first rules to have a regard' to quantity, but in its 
 progress departeth from it without any reason. Many 
 words which might, by the first rules in the system of 
 accents, be accented so as to agree with quantity, are 
 yet accented contrary to it — epr/^oc hath an acute 
 upon the antepenultimate ; though according to 
 quantity it ought to have a circumflex upon the penulti- 
 mate, and according to the first rules in the system 
 of accents, it might be so accented. For they allow 
 this, and all words of the same form, to be capable of 
 having a circumflex upon the penultimate. And words 
 of this form ought never to have an acute upon the first, 
 but a circumflex upon the second. For a circumflex is 
 the natural and proper accent of every syllable, that is 
 long in its nature ; and a circumflex consisteth of an 
 acute and a grave, i. e. it sheweth that there is both an 
 elevation and depression of the voice in the syllable over 
 which it is placed. 'Ep^oc therefore must be so pro- 
 nounced, as if the long vowel in its penultimate was 
 resolved into two short ones, and the former marked 
 with an acute, and the latter with a grave ; as thus, 
 ip&pbg. Now if every vowel, which is long in its nature, 
 hath also a natural elevation in its first part or measure, 
 it followeth that Ip^xog, and all words of the same form, 
 ought not to have, and cannot have, an acute upon the first : 
 because they would then have an elevation upon each of 
 their two first syllables ; which no language alloweth. 
 
 PROPOSITION III. 
 
 The modern use of accents in the ancient Greek lan- 
 guage is contradictory to itself. 
 
 I. The rule for accenting words ending in vg, the 
 * Etymologist telleth us is this. Polysyllables end- 
 ing in vg, which have the v short, are to have an 
 
 * In Voce T^iytia..
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 297 
 
 acute upon the antepenultimate. Ta tig vg v-irtp §io avX- 
 Aafiag, a-uareXXovra to v, TrpoirapoZ,{w£Tai' olov, Xt&KO(j>pvg, 
 rtfxicTvg, aTpa<j)at,vg. According to this rule, IXaxvg ought 
 to have an acute upon the antepenultimate ; but yet it 
 is directed to be acuted upon the last. And the reason 
 given for this is, because there is another rule, contrary 
 to the former, for accenting some words ending in vg, 
 which directeth the accent to be placed upon the last, 
 when words of this form have a neutral ending, and an 
 a in the penultimate : hretBfj to. elg vg cYovra ouSm'pov 
 irapaayrifMiTiGIJLOv , TrapaXrjyo/itva rw a, b^vvtrca, olov irpavg, 
 ra\vg, tovtov \apiv /cat to k\a\vg 6%vvercu* There is the 
 same contradictory rule for the accenting of eXcr^ta ; 
 the general rule is this : nouns feminine, ending in a, „ 
 which come from nouns masculine, ending in vg, 
 are to have an acute upon the antepenultimate, if the 
 masculine hath a grave upon the last ; but if the mascu- 
 line hath an acute upon the last, then the feminine is 
 to have a circumflex upon the penultimate. Ta tig a 
 X/jyovra S'rjXuica curb tCjv dg vg apatvinCov ytvofitva, tl /liIv 
 fiapvvzTai tcl apatviKa, TrpoirapoEvviTai Ta ^rjXvjca' olov Trpicr- 
 fivg irpicrpeia, i\p.iGvg i)fiiaeia' tl t>t bt,vvtTai to. apatvuca, 7rpo- 
 7r£0£(T7rarcu to. SrjXuica. According to this rule, tXax^ia. ought 
 to have a circumflex upon the penultimate ; but yet both 
 tXaxeia and Xiyeia from Xiyvg are directed to be acuted 
 upon the antepenultimate. And the reason given for 
 this is, because there is another rule, contrary to the 
 former, for accenting some of these feminines, which 
 directs an acute to be placed upon the antepenulti- 
 mate, when the word cometh from a present tense. Ta 
 o£ curb IvtGTWTog wapriypiva Sta tov tla S'rjXvica, irpoTrapo^v- 
 vtTaC olov ju/;Sa>, Mi'joW* Xiyw, Xlytia' and SO lXax£ia> be- 
 cause * kXaxvg is, by them, made to come from tXw, as 
 Xiyvg is from Xlyw or Xtyw. But the grammarians would 
 be very hard put to it to prove that these nouns come 
 from those verbs, if something more were required of 
 them in proof of it than bare assertion. However, the 
 
 * Etjmol. in Vocibus 'iXassm et Aiyuj.
 
 298 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 rules manifestly contradict themselves ; and, instead 
 of paying a due regard to quantity, one would think, 
 were made on purpose to oppose it. 
 
 TL An oxytone becometh a barytone in a continued 
 discourse, except in the case of enclitics ; and the acute 
 r ^ accent, when so changed, doth not seem to be either 
 a proper acute, or a proper grave. Not a proper 
 acute, for if it were there would be no change, and 
 it would have the same effect upon following words that 
 all final syllables, which arc acuted, have upon enclitics, 
 i. e. to draw them as it were into one word. Neither 
 doth this accent properly become a grave, for there can 
 be no grave upon the last but when there is a circum- 
 flex upon the foregoing syllable, or an acute upon one 
 of the two foregoing syllables, which cannot be the case 
 of an oxytone; so that in pronouncing such a word, the 
 last syllable is not to be uttered as if it were accented 
 with either an acute or a grave : not with a grave be- 
 c-i cause it is originally acutitonous ; and not with an 
 acute for the reasons abovementioned. * " Le grave 
 ne se marque jamais que dans la suite du discours, et a 
 la fins des mots, ou il y auroit naturellement un aigu, 
 montrant qu'alors ces mots ne relevent pas tout a fait 
 leur finale, mais la soutiennent seulement un peu. lis 
 la soutiennent, dis je, parce qu'il est de la nature de la 
 voix, de soutenir to uj ours quelque syllable en chaque 
 mot, et qu'autrement elle fondroit trop : et ils ne l'ele- 
 vent pas tout a fait, parce que cet elevement paroistroit 
 tellcment au respect du mot suivant, qu'il sembleroit 
 l'unir a soy, ce qui ne se peut faire qu'aux encliti- 
 ques." 
 
 The making oxytones become barytones in such a 
 manner that they are not to be pronounced either as 
 c oxytones or barytones, is really monstrous. But 
 besides this, it is a great absurdity, and contrary to 
 the nature of all languages, that the same word, when 
 pronounced separately, should be subject to a different 
 
 * N. Meth. Grec. p. 546.
 
 CREEK. ACCENTS. 299 
 
 modulation from what it, must have when it makes part 
 of a continued discourse. 
 
 Indeed the nature of accents hath not been sufficient- 
 ly considered : it is evident that every word must have 
 an accent ; and it is, I think, as evident, that there is, 
 and can be, in nature but one accent, viz. the acute. 
 The grave is not an accent, but the privation of an ac- 
 cent : and all polysyllables which have an acute in the 
 middle, must have, or be supposed to have, as many 
 graves as there are syllables in those words besides the 
 acuted syllable. For the syllables which precede the 
 acute, are to be pronounced with a privation of ac- ~n 
 cent, i. e. with a grave, as well as those which fol- 
 low it. But the tone with which the syllables, which 
 precede the acute, are to be pronounced, is not deemed 
 an accent ; and, therefore, as the reason is the same, 
 the tone with which the syllables which follow the 
 acute are to be pronounced, cannot be deemed an 
 accent. The circumflex, as it consisteth of an acute 
 and a grave, can be deemed an accent only in re- 
 spect to the former part of it : but this cannot make it a 
 distinct accent. The figure of it, indeed, is one, but the 
 nature of it is double; and if it be expressed according 
 to its constituent parts, as it was originally expressed, it 
 will evidently appear, that the latter part of it is only the 
 privation of an accent, i. e. no accent at all ; and that 
 the former part of it is what only can be deemed an ** 
 accent. 
 
 This must be the meaning of Quinctilian when he 
 saith : " Est autem in omni voce utique acuta :" as is 
 farther evident from what nearly follows : " Praeterea 
 nunquam in eadem, flexa, et acuta, quoniam eadem 
 flexa ex acuta." From the former of these passages it 
 is easy to observe that it destroyeth all that part of the 
 doctrine of accents which relateth to atonies : " ea vero 
 quae sunt syllabae unius, erunt acuta, aut flexa, ne sit 
 aliqua vox sine acuta." histii. lib. i. c. 5. 
 
 1 will not pursue this any farther : 1 mention it only 
 to shew how contradictory the doctrine of accents is to
 
 300 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 itself, and to all manner of reason in this instance. For 
 when, by this doctrine, oxy tones become barytones, the 
 patrons of the system of accents never tell us where 
 the acute is then to be placed ; and yet it is evident 
 that they must have one, for every word must have an 
 accent, and every grave supposes an acute. 
 
 III. Many Greek words have an acute upon the ante- 
 penultimate, though the last is long, contrary to a funda- 
 mental rule in the doctrine of accents. Of these there 
 are four classes : 
 
 1. The Ionic genit. cases in ew for ov, as Alvdeoj. 
 
 2. The Attic genit. cases of contracts in ig and i, as 
 utytw-r, 6(f>au>v ; mvi'iwtioQ, aivijirewv. 
 
 3. Nouns in wg and iov, which do not increase in 
 the genit. case, as zvyziog, avuyzwv. 
 
 4. The compounds of y£\wg, as KarayeXwg. 
 
 r-,. These, indeed, are introduced as exceptions from 
 the general rule, but the words which are compre- 
 hended under these exceptions are so numerous, and of 
 such a nature, that they must be allowed to be a mani- 
 fest contradiction to the general rule. And, besides, I 
 have this farther observation to make upon them, that 
 they all prove what I have before advanced, viz. that 
 there is nothing in the nature of syllables, or the ana- 
 logy of the doctrine of accents, to hinder an acute from 
 being upon the antepenultimate when the last is long. 
 For the reasons given for the accents continuing upon 
 the antepenultimate in these exceptions, will equally 
 prove that it might remain upon the antepenultimate of 
 all words which have it upon that syllable in the nomi- 
 £- native case ; and, consequently, that Kvpiov and kv- 
 piu>, and all words of the same form, may, according 
 to this analogy, have an acute upon the first, because 
 they have it upon that syllable in their nominative cases. 
 
 IV. One general rule in the doctrine of accents is, 
 that the accent of the first word remaineth on the same 
 syllable in declining when no particular rule requireth 
 it to be removed. Now, 
 
 1. The rule itself is contradicted by all those in-
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 301 
 
 stances in which the accent of the first word is removed 
 in declining without any particular rule ; as fxia hath an 
 acute upon the penultimate, but a circumflex upon the 
 last in juiac and fiiq. So ^urj§ejuta, jui)8£/xtac, /iTjStjUtu ; and 
 SO afi(j)w, dfxtpoXv ; Svw, dvoiv. 
 
 2. This rule, when observed, is, in many cases, con- 
 tradictory to another general rule, which requireth r o 
 that an acute should be placed upon the antepenul- 
 timate when the last syllable is short, and the penulti- 
 mate is not long by nature ; for when a masculine par- 
 ticiple hath an acute upon the penultimate, this acute 
 will, by the present rule, remain upon the penultimate 
 of the neuter gender. And so hjidZ,ov hath an acute 
 upon the penultimate, because ayidZ,wv hath an acute 
 upon the penultimate, and a neutral participle doth not 
 draw back its accent ; though it ought not to have an 
 acute, as the last syllable is short ; and it cannot have a 
 circumflex as the penultimate is not long by nature, but 
 its proper accent should be an acute upon the antepe- 
 nultimate. And so, likewise, in the imparisyllabical 
 declension, when the last syllable of the nominative ^ Q 
 case hath an acute, this remaineth on the penulti- 
 mate of the oblique cases, though the two last syllables 
 are short, as Xa/jnrag, XafxiraSog, XajLnraSi. 
 
 3. In contradiction to the abovementioned general 
 rule, the place of the accent on the first word is directed 
 to be removed by three particular rules : 
 
 1 . One particular rule, which requireth the accent of 
 the first word to be removed, is this : that the last sylla- 
 ble of the genitive plural of the first declension is to be 
 accented with a circumflex, as rafiiuv, reXwvwv, povatov, 
 although their nominative cases are accented upon the 
 penultimate, as rapi'iag, Tt\ww\g, fiovaa. This particular 
 rule, so far as it goeth, is a contradiction to the present 
 general rule ; and what is farther observable upon it is, 
 that it is subject to many exceptions which yet are r() 
 all agreeable to that other general rule,which placeth 
 an acute upon the penultimate when the last is long. The 
 exceptions are, that the genitive cases plural of \Xovvr)g,
 
 302 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 Xprjcrrrtg, 'Er>>mt, a<j>vti, and of the feminines of adjec- 
 tives in og, are not to be accented with a circumflex upon 
 the last, but with an acute upon the penultimate. Now 
 these instances shew the absurdity of the particular rule 
 for placing a circumflex upon the last syllable of the 
 genitive case plural of nouns of the first declension ; 
 and the particular rule, so far as it goeth, contradicteth 
 the rule for retaining, in declining, the place of the ac- 
 cent of the first word : for all nouns of the first declen- 
 sion, which have an acute upon the penultimate, are ca- 
 Pj pable of retaining it in the same place in the geni- 
 tive plural ; and it would be more agreeable, even 
 to the analogy of accents, for them to do so, without 
 perplexing the doctrine of accents by rules which are 
 perpetually contradicting one another. 
 
 2. Another particular rule, which requireth the ac- 
 cent of the first word to be removed, is this ; that mono- 
 syllables which increase in declining, acute the last syl- 
 lable of the genit. anddat. sing, and of the dat. plur. and 
 circumflex the last syllable of the genit. and dat. dual, 
 
 and of the genit. plur. ; as x^ l P> X H 9°^> X H ?' l > X f P ffl '> X ei P°* v > 
 yzioCov. And yet in all these cases, the accent of the 
 first word may be preserved upon the same syllable of 
 the increased word, viz. an acute when that syllable is 
 not long by nature, and a circumflex, when it is long 
 *~ by nature and the last syllable is short. So the cir- 
 cumflex is placed in the accusat. sing, and in the no- 
 minat. accusat. vocat. dual, and plur. of words of this 
 
 form ; as \upa, x&pt* X £ V £ C> X^ l P a ^- And so tne acu ^ e * s 
 placed in the oblique cases of all monosyllable partici- 
 ples ; as %£vrog, aruvTog, cuvrog, ovrog. 
 
 3. A third particular rule, which requireth the ac- 
 cent of the first word to be removed, relateth to femi- 
 nines ending in ua, which come from masculine oxy- 
 tones in tvg or i]g. Those which come from a masculine 
 oxytone in tvg, are to have an acute upon the penulti- 
 mate; and those which come from a masculine oxy- 
 tone in rig, are to have an acute upon the antepenulti- 
 mate. The reason given for this is, because in (he for-
 
 CREEK ACCENTS. 303 
 
 nier case a filial is long, but in the latter it is short. 
 But this is no reason at all as to the present point ; 
 for a final, whether long or short, is capable of being 
 acuted. And therefore all the instances of this kind 
 are, in both cases, equally contradictory to the rule for 
 keeping- the accent of the first word upon the same syl- 
 lable as much as possible. 
 
 V. As the first in rt^r\ptt, iarijfu, didw/ni, tzvywfii, is ac- 
 cented, this accent should remain upon the first of the 
 third pers. plur. as it remaineth upon the first of all 
 the other persons, whether the penultimate be long or 
 short. And yet, contrary to this analogy, the penulti- 
 mate of this person is circumflexed : TtSrsim, icrra<n, &- 
 Sovat, Zevyvvm. If it be said, that this is done to make 
 these persons conformable in their accent to the 
 dat. case plur. of the participles of the same 
 tenses, to which they are like in all other respects, this 
 is rather a reason why they should not be so accented, 
 that they might differ in accent, as they do in sense. 
 But even that rule is not universal ; for aeim, third pers. 
 plur. of aiifit spiro, is accented by some upon the first. 
 
 VI. The second and third persons sing, of the opta- 
 tive passive of verbs in jut have a circumflex on their 
 penultimate ; as t&uo, t&hto ; laraio, toroTro ; Stdoio, §l- 
 Soito. But Svvaio, Svvairo are accented upon the first. 
 And so these persons, in these tenses, are always ac- 
 cented, when the active is not in use ; as Svvrtfja is not. 
 But how can this circumstance be a foundation for any 
 difference in the placing of accents in the above- 
 mentioned persons of the optative passive of verbs, 
 which in all respects are the same, whether their ac- 
 tives be in use or not? However, so it is, though it 
 contradicts the general analogy of such verbs. 
 
 VII. Dissyllable prepositions, when they are followed 
 by a word which beginneth with a vowel, lose their last 
 syllable, and have no accent at all ; as Trap' Ifiov. But 
 this is contrary both to reason and to the general doc- 
 trine of accents ; for no monosyllable can be pronounced 
 without some accent. And this analogy is observed
 
 304 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 whenever the elision is made in a declinable word ; as 
 SeiV tiraStv. For in this case the accent is always drawn 
 back to the penultimate, though it might have been 
 otherwise placed before the elision ; and so it sheweth 
 that all monosyllables ought to have an accent, 
 and that the depriving monosyllables, which arise 
 from dissyllable prepositions, of an accent, is contrary 
 both to reason, and to the general analogy of accents. 
 
 It is in vain to pretend that accents, as they are now 
 used, are consistent with quantity, and that a due regard 
 may be had to both. 
 
 1. Because quantity is not the constant, is seldom 
 the rule for placing of accents. And therefore, whenever 
 accents are not placed according to quantity, this must 
 cause a difference in the pronunciation. For why are 
 accents in any case placed according to quantity, but 
 that they may both agree in the pronunciation ? and if 
 the pronunciation is genuine and rational when accents 
 and quantity agree, it must necessarily be corrupt and 
 
 irrational when they disagree. One of them must 
 give way to the other. And if quantity doth this, 
 then it will be at variance with itself; and if accents 
 give way, then they are nothing as to pronunciation. 
 
 2. Because this is not true in fact. No man can 
 read prose or verse according to both accent and quan- 
 tity ; for every accent, if it is any thing, must give some 
 stress to the syllable, upon which it is placed. And 
 every stress that is laid upon a syllable, must necessa- 
 rily give some extent to it, for every elevation of the 
 voice implieth time, and time is quantity, * ovtz xpovog 
 
 X l0 PL£ TOVOV £i>£)t(TKErCU, OUT£ TOVOQ \<JiQlQ \p6l>OV. For tlliS 
 
 reason Dionysius Thrax saith, that a tone or accent 
 
 giveth a greater extent or quantity, t tovoq irpog ov 
 
 aSo/jiEv Kol 7i)v (pwvijv tvQvitgav ttcuoujuev. Even a 
 
 rough breathing is able to make a short vowel long for 
 
 no other reason, but because it layeth a greater stress 
 
 * ne«<f>upiou Trs^i TTfOtrajSiet;. Ms. Bib. t Ms. Bibliotliei 1 . Me<Ucea\ 
 
 Reg. Aug. j). ?.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 305 
 
 upon it than a smooth breathing doth. And the pause 
 which must necessarily be made at the end of every 
 verse, is the true reason why the last syllable is not 
 common, but necessarily long. It cannot therefore be 
 said that accents only denote an elevation of the voice, 
 for no such elevation can subsist, and be made sensible 
 in pronouncing, whatever may be done otherwise in 
 singing, without some stress or pause, which is always 
 able to make a short syllable long. 
 
 It is upon account of this connexion between accent 
 and quantity that Quinctilian saith, that, in the case of 
 common syllables, the place of the accent varieth 
 with the quantity of the syllable. * " Evenit, ut 
 metri quoque conditio mutet accentum : ut 
 
 " Pecudes, pictceque Volucres. 
 
 Nam Volucres media acuta legam : quia etsi natura bre- 
 vis, tamen positione longa est, ne faciat iambum, quern 
 non recipit versus heroicus." So that, according to 
 Quinctilian, when the penultimate of volucres is long, it 
 must be read with an acute accent ; but when it is short, 
 it must be read without one : which, in both cases, can 
 be founded only in the connexion between accent and 
 quantity. For if these were unconnected, the two last 
 syllables in volucres might make either a spondee, or 
 an iambus, without any alteration in the accent. 
 
 In some ancient Latin inscriptions, an acute ac- 
 cent is put to shew that the syllables, over which it 
 is put, are long: as fsTA'Tio', patro'no', pe'danio', 
 cle'mens, ma'nibvs, cv'rione, pecvnia'. The pro- 
 per mark of a long syllable indeed was an apex, or bar. 
 However, this sheweth, that in the sense of those who 
 engraved these inscriptions, a syllable was long when it 
 had such an elevation given to it, as is proper to an 
 acute accent: for otherwise the engravers would never 
 have put two such accents upon one word, nor such an 
 accent upon the first syllable of cvrion e. 
 
 Inslit. lib. i. c. 5. lisii Cenotaph. Pi.san. Dissert, i v. c. 
 
 t Lips, de L. L. Pronunt. c. 19. No- ult. 
 
 X
 
 306 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 Upon the same account some ecclesiastical poets 
 have made short some syllables of Greek words, 
 which originally, and in their nature, are long, 
 merely because they had only a grave accent, and have 
 made long others, which originally are short, merely be- 
 cause they had an acute accent. So in Sidonius Apol- 
 linaris the penultimate of Euripides is long, because 
 Evpnr&rig is accented upon the penultimate ; and in 
 Prudentius, the penultimate of eremas, Idola, Mathesis, 
 Serapis, is short, because these words in the Greek lan- 
 guage are accented with an acute upon the antepenulti- 
 mate. 
 
 It is as impossible to read prose according to accents, 
 and, at the same time, maintain a due regard to quantity, 
 as it is to read poetry according to quantity and metre, 
 and, at the same time, maintain a due regard to accents. 
 This hath never been attempted, neither can the 
 other any more be done. 
 Though accents are placed, yet they are never read in 
 verse ; because if they were, they would turn verse into 
 prose. * " Si quis itaque hodiernos Graecorum accen- 
 tus sen prosodiam sequatur et legat Carmina vel Ho- 
 meri, vel cujuscunque alius antiqui poetae, nullos om- 
 nino pedes, nullum vel metrum vel rhythmum agnoscet, 
 nihil quod numerosum sit, vel aures afficiat ; sed sonum 
 absonum et ridiculum, et versus qui cantari nequeant, 
 denique quid vis potius quam Carmina intelliget." In 
 the original use of accents quantity always agreed with 
 the elevation and depression of the voice. But as the 
 modern use of accents seldom agreeth with quantity, 
 those who would have a pronunciation formed 
 upon both accent and quantity require an impossi- 
 bility. 
 
 Nothing would shew the absurdity of the modern 
 system of accents in this respect more effectually, than 
 to take a piece of poetry, and place the accents accord- 
 ing to the quantity, which the doubtful and long vowels 
 
 * Is. Vossius de Poeniat. Canln. p. 21.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 307 
 
 and diphthongs have in their respective places. This 
 would cause such a variation in the places of the ac^- 
 cents, arising from the different length or shortness of the 
 vowels and diphthongs in their different situations, as 
 would make the modern system of accents appear quite 
 ridiculous. For of the two sets of accents, which this 
 would exhibit, the one would at least approve itself by 
 its agreement with quantity, and the other would imme- 
 diately shew its absurdity by its disagreement from 
 even what it pretendeth to. 
 
 There are syllables, which are shorter than short, and 
 longer than long. * AiaWdrTEi /3paxaa avXXafirj fipa- 
 X eia Q> *ai /xciKpa p.aicpag, kcu ovte rrjv avTi)v S^st Svva/Mv, ovte 
 tv Aoyoig xpiXotg, out Iv ironjfjLacnv, rj /niXem $ia pvS/xiov r) 
 fiiTpu)v Ka~a(TKtvaZ,o}iivoiq Trcicxa [ipa\da, koi iraara fiaicpd. — 
 When a short vowel is followed by another vowel, it 
 is shorter than when it is followed by a mute and a 
 liquid, though it be also short in this position. And a 
 long vowel is not so long when it is followed by another 
 vowel, as when it is by one or more consonants. Far- 
 ther still, the ancients were so nice upon the subject of 
 quantity, that they made a difference in the degrees ma 
 of the quantity of the same vowel, in respect, not 
 only of the letters which followed, but also of those 
 which went before it. f Dionysius Halicarnasseus, to 
 illustrate this, produceth the words 6S6g, poSog, rpoirog 
 and aTp6(\>og ; in all which the first syllable is short, and 
 yet it is longer in poSog than in 6Soe, longer in rpoirog 
 than in poSog, and longer in orpofyog than in rpoTrog. Ac- 
 cents can, and do take no notice of this. But quantity 
 can, and doth. And so did the ancients in reading or 
 repeating both poetry and prose; and made the differ- 
 ence sensible to the ear. So in the foregoing instances, 
 Dionysius saith that the first syllable of the last word, 
 though it still remaineth short, yet becometh longer than 
 the shortest by the three sensible additions, which 
 are made to it : rpLcnv aurjj Trpocr^fiKaig uKovcFTcug p.a~ 
 
 * Dionvs. Halicnr. Tlifi ZvM<t. 'ovo^s't. §. 15. t Ibid. 
 
 \ 2
 
 308 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 fcporepa yevi'iairai rijg fipa\VTart}g, fiivovaa tn fi(>a\ua< 
 And from hence he raaketh this conclusion : * therefore 
 these four differences in a short syllable, which 
 have or produce a correspondent sensation, are 
 measured or estimated by the addition, which is made of 
 one, two, or three consonants to the first short syllable. 
 Indeed all the different kinds of writing, so far as the 
 judgment of the ear is concerned, arise from the differ- 
 ent manner in which writers dispose letters, syllables, 
 and words. As there is no mystery in this, one would 
 be disposed to think there could be no great difficulty 
 in the right management of it. And yet how few writers 
 are there, who have succeeded in the execution so well, 
 as to deserve and leave to posterity an established 
 character? Their ill success could not proceed 
 from any ignorance of an art, which, in its nature, is so 
 very plain and simple, but from their want of that prin- 
 ciple, which alone can secure success ; I mean a want 
 of taste. This, when we have it, is an inborn principle; 
 which cannot be acquired, though it may be improved. 
 But the present accents, being founded upon a wrong 
 taste, cannot give or improve a true one ; but directly 
 tend to spoil our taste, if we have any. For true taste 
 
 * I give tlie sense of this passage other makelh still greater alterations 
 
 as I think it ought to be read. The in the text. But if, instead of t?? 
 
 original is certainly corrupted. OuxoZv <!rapaXXa,yn<; ptrpw, we read I* -n?? ita- 
 
 Titrtrtteii aZrai ^si'n; a-vXXa@>i<; ha.- paXXayns /xBrpovvrat, the emendation 
 
 <bopal, rhv avaXoyov 'iyous-ai affl-Sw iv, t>k will be easy and natural, and the sense 
 
 7rapa.XXa.yng ftirpov. Victorias (Var. agreeable with the context. For then 
 
 Lect. 1. xiii. c. 6.) instead of avaXoyov /^.e-T^ovvrai will be the verb, to which 
 
 read aXoyov. But the difficulty doth not ha$opa.L and txova-ai refer, and the sense 
 
 consist in this word. Whether we read of the passage will be what Dionysius 
 
 avaXoyov or aXoyov still the grammatical certainly meant. For the additions 
 
 construction is imperfect, there being no that are made to the first syllable, be- 
 
 rerb to answer to the nominative cases. ing the causes of the differences in the 
 
 Dr. Hudson saw this; and therefore quantity of it, those additions must he 
 
 he read rhv avaXoyov 'i-xov<Tiv oi'irStxrjv the rule, by which these differences 
 
 srpsc tov t«j Tta^aXXayng /uirpov. Mr. are to be measured, and made sensible 
 
 Upton hath gone farther; and offered in the pronunciation. For these rea- 
 
 two emendations, one of which seem- sons therefore I have translated tlie 
 
 eth obscure and confused, and the passage according to this reading.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 309 
 
 is ever founded in nature. And so is quantity : but not 
 so the modern doctrine of accents. 
 
 There is a prosaical rhythm, which is very simple : 
 there is an oratorical rhythm, which is more numerous ; 
 and there is a poetical rhythm, which is the per- 
 fection of all human compositions. All these 
 rhythms arise from a due proportion in quantity; or, in 
 other words, from a due assemblage of long and short 
 syllables, in a certain ratio. Now as a pronunciation 
 by accent must produce a rhythm, and this is different 
 from that which ariseth from the length and shortness 
 of syllables, it is as evident, that one cannot read or 
 repeat by accent and quantity at the same time, as it is 
 evident that two distinct rhythms cannot be produced by 
 the same movements, or that the samo rhythm cannot be 
 produced by different movements. The rhythm of music 
 is capable of being varied in many more ways than the 
 combination of the different feet, which are used in 
 verse, can possibly reach. And therefore music 
 may be so adapted to poetry, that this may be sung, 
 and both produce one rhythm. But the rhythm which 
 ariseth from a bare elevation and depression of the 
 voice, fixed in every word to certain places by certain 
 rules, is of too narrow a compass to take in the various 
 combinations of syllables and feet that may be used in 
 verse. And, therefore, though the Greek poetry was 
 sung according to musical notes, yet could it never have 
 been read or repeated according to the modern accents : 
 nor could orations, or common prose for the same rea- 
 son, in proportion to the lower degree of rhythm, which 
 is proper to them. For it is to be observed, as a thing 
 which is essential in the present case, that the rhythm of 
 prose is of the same nature with the rhythm of poetry. 
 The difference doth not consist in the quality, but 
 only in the quantity. MovaiKr) yap tiq i)v koi ?? twv 
 iroAiTiKwv \6ywv Ittkjt^jxx], ti^ ttogm oiaWaTTOVcra tjjc iv 
 tybcug kcu opyavoic, oi)\i tu> iroiw. Kai yap Iv ravry kcu 
 (jUaoq Z\ov(tiv ai \ r c£,£L£, K(i\ pvS/wv, Kai /xeTaj'inXtjv, kcu Trpt- 
 ttqv. Ottc kcu E7TI Taurrjc i} dKOrj TipTTirat jxlv rolg uCkzmv,
 
 310 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 aytrai 81 rote pvSpoTg, acriraZtTai 8e jit£raj3oXac, iroSu o iirl 
 iravTwv to oIksIov. Dionys. Halicarn. ELept SuvStV. 'Ovo- 
 jucir. §. 11. 
 
 Metre differeth from rhythm as the species doth from 
 the genus. For which reason the * scholiast upon Ari- 
 stophanes calleth rhythm the father of metre, Traxrjp p&pov 
 pvSfiog. Metre ariseth necessarily from syllables; but 
 rhythm may arise from mere sounds. Metre therefore 
 must produce one rhythm; and accents, if they differ from 
 quantity, must produce another. What rhythm is, and 
 how it differeth from metre, is well explained by Lon- 
 ginus in those -f scholia upon Hephaestion, which are as- 
 cribed to him. Aiacpepn fiirpov pvOpov. uXrj plv yap rolg 
 pirpocg r\ <7uXXa/3?), koL X wo ^ avWafirtg ovk ay yivoiroptrpov. 
 6 Se pvSpbg yivtrai plv kol Iv <™XXaj3y. ytvtrat St koi X W P*C 
 <ruXXaj3f/c. Kat yap iv Kjoor^, orav ^aXmag VSwuev rag atyvpag 
 KaratptpovTcig, apa riva pvSpbv aicovoptv' Kail iinriov iropua pv$- 
 ftbg ivopitj^ri, koX Kivricrig SchctwXwv, koi /utXwv ar^iipara, koX 
 Xpp^iov Kivi'ipara, no! bpviQwv TTTtpiopaTa. pirpov ot ovk av 
 yivoiro x w P'€ Xtscwc; rcoiag koi Troar\g. Syllables, saith Lon- 
 ginus, are the subject matter of metre. And indeed it is 
 upon this very account that they have been called feet ; 
 because when they are so employed they bear some ana- 
 logy to the movements of the feet in dancing. So 
 ^Philoponus. Qtinpurai 6 pvSpbg koi eVi rwv kootouv- 
 to)v Talg \^po\ kcli rolg ttoo'lv. orav yap i? ra\ua koX ppaoua 
 twv 7To3wv apmg icat Sioig \6yov £X wm ^pbg aXXrjXag, pv%- 
 pbg yivsrai. kol ivrtv^ev enro ptratyopag tovtwv 17 TOiact rwv 
 <rvXXaj3wv (Tu/x7rXoicrj, rjv 7raoaXajuj3avoutv 7Tpbg rrjv tww 
 perpuiv yivemv, irodtg ekXj%W7W- Take now the first ex- 
 ample which Longinus mentioneth, that of smiths strik- 
 ing their hammers upon their anvils (from whence music 
 is said to have taken its rise), and suppose two sets of 
 them (consisting either of different numbers, or of the 
 same number, but provided with hammers of different 
 natures) to be striking upon their anvils at the same 
 
 * Nub. v. 638. t ln lllj - »'• Aristot. de Anima, 
 
 t Edit. Paris. 1553. p. 76. L. I. riii. a.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 3L1 
 
 time, and you will clearly see, that, though each set will 
 produce a rhythm, yet both sets striking at the same 
 time must produce discords. 
 
 Are accents then of no use 1 I answer, 
 
 1. Accents may be useful to distinguish the different 
 senses of words, which do not differ in form or sound. 
 As dfxi sum and tlfii vado ; Iotov IgtL estis, and iarov «tk 
 estote; oh non and ov ibi. In which last words a distinc- 
 tion may be useful, though not that which is here made. 
 The circumflex is unnecessary to this purpose ; as well 
 because both these monosyllables must, and cannot but 
 be pronounced with a circumflex, whether it be marked 
 or not, as because the different senses are distinguished 
 by the different breathings ; which some grammarians 
 reckoned also among the irooa^iaL. But such distinc- 
 tions ought to cause no difference in the pronunci- 
 ation, because there is no difference in the quantity. 
 And a careful reader will distinguish them by the con- 
 text, without the help of accents, as readily, and by 
 the same means, that he will distinguish the different 
 senses of any word, which, with the same accent, car- 
 rieth different senses. 
 
 TO'KOS with one and the same accent on the penul- 
 timate, signifieth the time of bringing forth, the act of 
 bringing forth, and the thing brought forth. In this case 
 the accent, being the same, is of no help to the reader. 
 But the context telleth him in which of these three 
 senses the word tokoq is to be taken in the place that 
 lieth before him. And therefore it must follow from 
 hence, that the same difference, as to sense, might 
 as well be observed without an accent. 
 
 "^HN, with one and the same accent, carriethfive differ- 
 ent senses. It is the first and third person singular, and 
 third person plural of the imperfect of d/ii ; and then it 
 signifieth erani, erat, erant. It is the first person sin- 
 gular of the 2d aor. of nj/it ; and then it signifieth ivi. 
 And it is also the first person of the imperfect of <pnfu ; 
 and then it signifieth dixi. In all which cases the reader 
 can have no help from the accent, but only from the
 
 812 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 context, to find out the sense of r\v in each particular 
 place. And this he will readily do, if he duly attendeth. 
 And as such another instance cannot perhaps be pro- 
 duced, I mean of one word which carrieth live different 
 
 senses under one and the same accent, and yet. 
 
 these different senses are discovered without diffi- 
 culty, there cannot be a more evident proof that accents 
 cannot be of great use, though they should be allowed 
 to be of some. For a reader may, and will, in all cases, 
 discover the particular sense, which a word of different 
 senses bears in any particular place, by the same means 
 by which he may and will discover the different senses 
 of r>. 
 
 The prepositions avd and $ia have an acute upon the 
 last syllable, to distinguish them from 3 ava rex and tov 
 Am Jovem. But a reader must be very stupid, if he can- 
 not distinguish a preposition from a noun without the 
 assistance of an accent. 
 
 2. Accents may be useful to distinguish the quantity 
 fia of syllables. But then to do this they ought always 
 
 to be placed according to quantity ; which, in the 
 modern use of them, they are not. And therefore, as 
 accents may sometimes lead us to the knowledge of 
 quantity, so is it certain that they may sometimes mis- 
 lead us. The accent of TrtpiKaWta, being upon the pe- 
 nultimate, may induce an unknowing reader, who judg- 
 eth of quantity by accent, to think that a final there is 
 long. And the rather so, because he may, perhaps, 
 have observed, that the penultimate of ftaaiXia hath such 
 an accent, and that the a final here is long. Whereas 
 a final in (iaaiXia is long, because it is long in all the 
 Attic accusative cases of this form ; which, in this re- 
 spect, follow the analogy of the Attic and Ionic genitives 
 
 in wc. But a final in -n-epiKaXXki is short; and the 
 
 accent is upon the penultimate only because it was 
 upon that syllable in the nominative case -rrepiKaXX^g. 
 And so, for much the same reason, in 'nrrroTa, and words 
 of the same sort, i. e. whose ending in rig hath been 
 changed by the Macedonians into o, though the o final
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 313 
 
 is short, yet still, notwithstanding this alteration, the 
 accent is kept upon the penultimate. 
 
 " Apices, (saith * Scaurus,) ibi poni debent, ubi iisdem 
 Uteris alia atque alia res designatur, ut venit et venit, 
 aret et aret, legit et legit, caeteraque his similia. Super 
 I tamen literam apex non ponitur. Caeterae vocales, 
 quia, eodem ordine positae, diversa significant, apice 
 distinguuntur, ne legens dubitatione impediatur." This 
 relateth to both uses of accents, when the sense 
 varieth, and the quantity is different. But this will 
 not, by any means, support the modern doctrine of ac- 
 cents in the Greek language, because it taketh in only 
 those words that are ambiguous in their sense and quan- 
 tity ; which are but few. 
 
 Though the apices, which were used by the Latins, 
 were distinct from accents, yet still these, when sense 
 and quantity are connected with them, come within the 
 same reason, and so ought to be subject to the same 
 rule, i. e. that they ought to be used but in doubtful 
 cases. This is the only circumstance that can make 
 the use of them proper and necessary, f " Longis syl- 
 labis omnibus apponere apicem ineptissimum est, quia 
 plurimae, natura ipsa verbi quod scribitur, patent. 
 Sed interim necessariura, cum eadem litem alium 
 atque alium iutellectum, prout correpta, vel producta 
 est, facit ; ut malus, utrum arborem significet, an homi- 
 nem non bonum, apice distinguitur. PaTlis aliud priore 
 syllaba longa, aliud sequenti significat ; et, cum eadem 
 litera nominativo casu brevis, ablativo longa est, utrum 
 sequamur, plerumque hac nota monendi sumus." 
 
 If the placing of different accents upon the same 
 parts, or of the same accent upon different parts of the 
 same words, when they carry different senses, should be 
 allowed to be ever so proper and useful to distinguish 
 these different senses, yet no argument can be drawn 
 from hence for the use of accents in words, which 
 do not carry such different senses; much less for the 
 
 * Do OrlfatognpliM. t Quinctil. lib. i. c. 7.
 
 014 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 forming of a system of accents to run through the whole 
 body of a language. For the words which carry such 
 different senses, are very few in comparison with the 
 whole vocabulary of the Greek language, which is a very 
 copious one. But accents are placed upon all words — ■ 
 they are placed where they are not wanted ; — where they 
 can be of no manner of use ; — and where, if they are 
 observed in pronouncing, they destroy all that harmony 
 which ariseth from a just quantity, and upon which the 
 beauty and power of oratory and poetry do, in a great 
 measure, depend. 
 
 Upon the whole — on the one hand the advantages of 
 accents are but small ; but, on the other, they are 
 attended with many and great disadvantages. 
 
 1. They introduce unnecessary difficulties into a lan- 
 guage, which hath sufficient ones of itself. 
 
 2. They are placed by rules, which are often arbi- 
 trary, and contrary one to another. 
 
 3. They destroy all that harmony for which the Greek 
 language is so justly esteemed. 
 
 4. They encourage laziness. It is an easy matter to 
 see an accent marked over a syllable, and to place the 
 stress of the voice there : but it is not so easy a matter 
 to know the quantity of syllables, and give to every part 
 of a word its clue proportion of time. We are hereby 
 led and accustomed to trust to our eyes, and not to our 
 ears. 
 
 Prosody originally was tovoq <£wvf?c irpbg ov qSo/juv. 
 But now it is a quite different thing. From the an- 
 cient musical use of accents therefore no argument can 
 be drawn to support the modern practice and use of ac- 
 cents. For though we know but little of the musical or 
 tonical pronunciation of the ancients, yet thus much we 
 know, that it was perfectly agreeable to the nature and 
 quantity of syllables. But the modern use of accents is 
 not agreeable to the nature and quantity of syllables. 
 Neither hath it any music in it : unless irregular sounds 
 can be so called. It must therefore be, as it is in truth, 
 a third thing, distinct from the use of accents among
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 315 
 
 the ancient Greeks, and from the nature and quantity of 
 syllables; and consequently cannot be supported by 
 either. 
 
 This conclusion seemeth necessary ; and unless 
 we make such a distinction, we must run into in- 
 explicable difficulties. * " Qui porro usus accentuum 
 fuerit in vocali pronuntiatione, et qua, ratione syllaba- 
 rum quantitatem, et accentuum inflexionem veteres con- 
 ciliaverint, nondum ita perspicue explanatum est." This 
 indeed is a thing, which can never be explained, so long 
 as we confound the modern use of accents with that 
 which was made of them by the ancient Greeks. 
 
 Accents are of less use in the Greek language to lead 
 us to the knowledge of quantity than in any other lan- 
 guage; because it affords more helps or criteria to this 
 purpose, which are distinct from accents, and arise 
 from the very constitution of that language. For ' 
 besides the different characters, which the Greek lan- 
 guage hath for e long and e short, and for o long and o 
 short, it hath twelve diphthongs ; which are all long. 
 By which means an infinite number of syllables are 
 known to be long by the writing and natural sound of 
 them, previously to any use that may be made of ac- 
 cents. 
 
 Tones, or accents, are, and cannot but be used in all 
 languages, t " Ut nulla vox sine vocali, ita sine accentu 
 nulla est." Where a language is not founded in a na- 
 tural quantity of syllables, the placing of accents may 
 be allowed to be arbitrary. But not so where the very 
 nature of a language establisheth a difference be- 
 tween syllables, and m?keth some long and others 
 short. In this case the use of accents cannot be arbi- 
 trary, but must correspond with the natural length or 
 shortness of the syllables, which compose the words 
 of that language. Otherwise a perpetual discord will 
 arise. 
 
 t MoDtfauc. Palaeogr. Grace, p. 236. t Diomedes, lib. ii.
 
 316 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 This maketh a great difference between the ancient 
 Greek and the modern languages. In these the pro- 
 nunciation doth not depend upon a natural quantity, 
 and therefore a greater liberty may be allowed in the 
 placing of accents. But in the Greek language the 
 pronunciation essentially depends upon a natural quan- 
 tity, and therefore all use of accents that is contrary to 
 quantity must be injurious to pronunciation. 
 
 Men are led to accent their words, partly by the 
 constitution of their language, and partly by their 
 own natural temper. One of a volatile temper will 
 love short syllables, and will not like to be stopped 
 either by quantity or accent; so that in pronouncing a 
 word of three syllables he will run on, and place the 
 accent upon the last syllable, because he can run no 
 farther. On the contrary, one of a phlegmatic temper 
 will love long syllables, and will be pleased with the 
 majesty of quantity and accent: so that in pronouncing 
 a word of three syllables, he will naturally lay some 
 stress as soon as he can, and fix upon the first for his 
 accent. 
 
 We see something of this even in the ancient, though 
 not the most ancient Greek language, the dialects of 
 which consisted not only in the permutation, addi- 
 tion, and subtraction of letters, but also in the placing 
 of accents. 
 
 The # Dorians put a circumflex upon the last syllable 
 of all their first futures ; whereas the common language 
 put it only upon those that end in Xw, juw, vw, pw. 
 
 The -j-yEolians are said to have been jdapwTiKoi, i. e. 
 they placed their accents as soon as they could. So 
 TroTafxoQ and KaXog had an acute upon the first sylla- 
 ble, which necessarily brought a grave upon the last; 
 whereas the common dialect put an acute upon the 
 last ; as Trora/xoc, Ka\6g. So in auaiv % they put the ac- 
 cent upon the first; whereas a circumflex was commonly 
 
 * Mag, Etymol. in Voce Kvfut. * Mag. Etymol. in Voce asie-iv. 
 
 t Mag. Etymol. ibid.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 317 
 
 put upon the penultimate dumv. And so in * upaio 
 for 6pto the future of opw : where a a is inserted 
 that it might not have the form of the futures of those 
 conjugations, which have the penultimate short, and a 
 circumflex upon the last. And in this, as in many other 
 particulars, the Latins followed the ^Eolians ; and, in- 
 deed, it is very evident that the Latin tongue was formed 
 upon the ^Eolic dialect of the Greek language. 
 
 But this seemeth to relate only to what was practised 
 by the common people, and in common conversation ; 
 for those that wrote in any one dialect, never departed 
 from quantity, any more than those that wrote in any 
 other dialect. 
 
 The modern Greeks have carried the barbarity of 
 accents much farther. They sometimes place the 
 accent, and even a circumflex, upon the fourth 
 from the last : whereas the ancient Greeks never placed 
 it higher than the third from the last, nor the circumflex 
 beyond the penultimate, f " Loci accentuum sunt qua- 
 tuor, ultima, penultima, antepenultima, et prseantepc- 
 nultima. Praeantepenultima acutum agnoscit et cir- 
 cumflexum. Acutum quidem in iis, quorum penultima 
 est in la, ut avajKaXXiaaig exultatio, ivvKTiaaev IIOX facta 
 est ; quasi ia unicam efficiat syllabam, et in Trprmapot,v- 
 rovoic, quibus additur particula ve, ut kojuete Kafiinve fa- 
 citis : circumflexum autem in iis, quorum penultima cir- 
 cumflectitur, et iis additur articulus cum particula vt, ut 
 tlSarove vidi illud." 
 
 As some parts of Greece were under the domi- , 
 nion of the Venetians, it is probable that the mo- 
 dern Greeks learned this method of accentuation from 
 the Italians, who sometimes place the accent upon the 
 fourth from the last ; as seguitano, visitano, desiderano, 
 considerano. J " Ante tertiam quidem, nulla, quod sci- 
 am, Lingua praeter Etruscam, Tonum collocat. In his 
 enim verbis, seguitano, visitano, seminano, desiderano, 
 
 * Mag. Etjmol. in Voce esis-iv. Vulg. c. 2. 
 
 t Sim. Portii Grain. Ling. Gncc. $ Cania. Hellenism. Ed. 4to. p. 98.
 
 318 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 considerano, in quarta a fine est acutus. In compositis 
 etiam in quinta et sexta, portandosenela, desideranovici, 
 seminanovici. Quidam vir doctissimus in octava quo- 
 que id observavit, seminanovicisene, edificanovicisene." 
 We have some instances of this in our own language ; 
 as dormitory, repository, preparatory, authoritatively, 
 demonstratively. But this hurts the ear ; for, in 
 judging of accents, the ear cannot go farther back 
 than the third syllable. And when the accent is placed 
 higher, we find, in fact, that all the subsequent syllables 
 are pronounced as rapidly as if they were but two. 
 
 Analogy, and the reason of things, require that all 
 words of the same form, at least where there cannot be any 
 difference in the sense, should be accented in the same 
 manner. But this is not observed in the modern doc- 
 trine of Greek accents ; and the most probable reason 
 that can be given for this variation, seemeth to be the 
 different manner of accenting the same words, i. e. 
 words of the same form, or of the same number of syl- 
 lables, by different people, who spoke different mo- 
 ther- tongues. And when a foreign manner of ac- 
 centing was once introduced into the Greek language, 
 the maimer of one people prevailed in some words, and 
 the manner of another people prevailed in other words, 
 though both were of the same form, and capable of be- 
 ing accented in the same manner. 
 
 In all cases, when the nature of a language admitteth 
 of quantity, this must be the natural and best rule for 
 the pronouncing of it; and all use of accents that in- 
 terfereth with quantity, must, in proportion, interfere 
 with pronunciation. And this is the case of the Greek 
 language, but not so of the modern ones ; especially of 
 those which sprang from the Teutonic and Esclavonian. 
 For these, consisting of a greater proportion of 
 consonants, must of necessity have a greater num- 
 ber of long syllables. And the great disproportion be- 
 tween long and short syllables made it impossible to 
 think of establishing quantity for a foundation of har- 
 mony in pronunciation. Hence it became necessary to
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 319 
 
 lay aside the consideration of quantity, and to have re- 
 course to accents to form some harmony, such as it is : 
 so that I am apt to think that the present use of accents 
 was introduced into the Greek language, when conquest 
 and commerce, and other methods of intercourse, brought 
 foreigners into Greece ; for then each was naturally led 
 to pronounce Greek according to the accents which pre- 
 vailed in his mother-tongue. For instance : he whose 
 mother- tongue abounded in anapaests (as the French, 
 which hath no trisyllable that maketh a dactyl) 
 would naturally have placed the accent upon the 
 last syllable, and made rcnrtivog an oxytone, though the 
 penultimate is long by nature. And he whose mother- 
 tongue abounded in dactyls (as the English, which hath 
 no trisyllable that maketh an anapaest), would naturally 
 have placed the accent upon the antepenultimate, and 
 pronounced rvipaaSai with the accent upon the first, 
 though the last is long by nature, and the penultimate 
 by position. And if you were to give to a Frenchman 
 and to an Englishman, who knew nothing of the Greek 
 accents, two Greek words to pronounce, one consisting 
 of three long syllables, and the other of three short ones, 
 in both cases the Frenchman would certainly place the 
 accent upon the last, and make both words ana- 
 paests ; and the Englishman would certainly place 
 the accent upon the first, and make both words dactyls. 
 The reason why some words are accented differently, 
 when there is no difference in the sense, could not be 
 because the laws of accents originally allowed such 
 words to have different accents ; for accents were not 
 originally placed according to the laws of prosody, but 
 the laws of prosody were formed according to an use and 
 custom, which was already established. In the same 
 manner that languages in general were not originally 
 formed according to grammar ; but grammar was formed 
 according to the use and custom which prevailed in lan- 
 guages, and had already fixed the general nature of them. 
 But the true reason of this variation must be, that 
 the Greeks, by conversing with foreigners, who
 
 320 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 spoke different languages, and differed one from another, 
 in placing their accents, learned of them their respective- 
 ways of accenting; and some Greeks placed their ac- 
 cent one way, and other Greeks placed it in the same 
 word another way. This maketh it highly probable, that 
 the present doctrine of Greek accents is owing to the 
 different ways of accenting, which were practised in 
 other languages. 
 
 This account of the modern, arbitrary, and irrational 
 placing of Greek accents seemeth agreeable to fact. 
 The original use of accents among the ancient Greeks 
 was entirely musical. The grammarians of the school 
 of Alexandria were the first who applied them to an- 
 other use, which was to distinguish quantity ; and 
 as long as accents were applied to this purpose, 
 no alteration could be thereby caused in the pronuncia- 
 tion of the Greek language. On the contrary, such an 
 use of accents was intended to be, and really was in it- 
 self, a good security for the preservation of its genu- 
 ine pronunciation. But in process of time, and when 
 foreigners intermixed with the Grecians, their way of 
 accenting crept into the Greek language, and so the pre- 
 sent manner of placing accents was introduced. It will 
 be proper to consider this more particularly. 
 
 The present system of accents was not formed at 
 once. As there was a progress in the corrupt pronun- 
 ciation of the Greek language, so was there a progress 
 in the doctrine of accents. 
 
 The accents that were first used were agreeable 
 to quantity. This is evident from Dionysius Hali- 
 carnasseus. *'H fxlv yapTrtZ,!] \l%ig ovdevbg ovts bvofiarog 
 ovn prifiaTog /3<a£fTcu rovg ^povovg, ovoe fitTarw^aiv' aAA 
 olag TrapdXritye ri] (pvau rag avWafiag, rag re fxanpag tcai rag 
 fipaxdag, roiavrag ffuXarvsi. In another place the same 
 judicious writer observeth, that all the parts of speech 
 do not affect the ear in the same manner. And the great 
 and good reasons which he assigneth for the causes of 
 
 »' 
 
 * ITEff 2VV0E3-. 'OVOfACtT. §. 11.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 321 
 
 this, are, the nature of letters which compose words, 
 and have many and different powers, and the union of 
 syllables, which is formed in various manners. * Ovx 
 airavra irityvKt ra pipn tjjq Xtt,£cog bpoiiog SictTiSivcu ri)v 
 ukoijv' lomrtp ouoe ti)v bpariKriv cucrS'rjayv ra bpciTa ttuvtci, 
 ovoe rfjv yevGTiicriv ra yexxTTa, ovSt ragaXXag altrSiitTHQ 
 to, Kivovvra E/caarTjv" aXXci kcu yXvKaivovcri rivtg avn)v 
 7]\ot, (cat iriicpaivovGi, kcu Tpa\vvovcn, kcu Xtaivoven, kcu ttoXXci 
 clXXa 7ra3"jj Tcoiovai "Kept avrijv' Airia §e ?jr£ tCjv ypapparcov 
 cpvcrig, e£ wv i) tpiovi) ctuveotjjke, TroXXag kcu Siacj>6povg tyovaa 
 cvvapug, kcu tj tiov avXXafiiov ttXoki) 7ravroc)aTTcog ayjqpaTi- 
 Z>opivr). By which we see that accents, in the sense in 
 which they are now understood, had no part in this af- 
 fair, and that they could not possibly be considered any 
 farther than they were agreeable to the nature of letters 
 and syllables, i. e. to quantity. 
 
 This truth may also be made evident from fact. The 
 remains of antiquity, which we have upon this subject, 
 are indeed very scanty ; but yet, such as they are, they 
 evidently prove this to have been the case. All poly- 
 syllables ending in oiog were originally accented 
 with a circumflex upon the penultimate ; but the 
 modern Athenians accented them with an acute upon 
 the antepenultimate. This we learn from the f great 
 etymologist, who blameth the alteration at the same time 
 that he acquainteth us with it: tci §ia tov oiog bvopara 
 vwtp cvo crvXXafiag, utravTa irpoTrtpicnraTcii. otov, iravrdiog, 
 aXXoiog, tTtpoiog' oi c5e ptTciytviaTtpoi rcov ^Attimov to ye- 
 Xolog kcu bpolog Trpoirapo^vvovcriv' ovk ev. The word rpo- 
 Traiov, and all words of the same form, were originally ac- 
 cented with a circumflex upon the penultimate ; but by a 
 later rule they are to be accented with an acute upon the 
 antepenultimate. J Wxtv KTTjrtKOV ovc^irepov, ciirb ^jjAukou -yE- 
 yovbg, rpiTrtv curb riXovg t^ei rrjv b^tlav' olov, KecpaXi'i, ke- 
 cfraXaiov' yvvi'i, yvvcuov' bOtv kcu Tpo7n'j, rpoiraiov' oi Se 
 iraXcuoV AttikoI Trpompicnrcocnv. Suidas saith the same thing, 
 and so doth the scholiast upon Aristophanes, who farther 
 
 * Sect. 12, 13. i Mag. Etjniol. in voce Tp^Vaiov. 
 
 t In voce yikfioq.
 
 322 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 addeth, that the ancient manner of placing the accent is 
 preferable to the modern, as being more agreeable to 
 analogy. * Ktu olpat kclt avaXoyiav tovto fiaWov napa 
 <T(pi<nv, rj tovto 7rpo^>£0Ecr3 , eu, wg airb tov rpirrj to rprrcuov, kcX 
 curb tov ovpa to ovpcuov. 
 
 When the ancient pronunciation of the Greek lan- 
 guage began to be corrupted, the grammarians found it 
 necessary to introduce the use of accents, to pre- 
 serve, as much as possible, that ancient pronunciation. 
 If therefore we can discover how those first gram- 
 - - . marians placed accents, and if it should appear that 
 they placed them according to quantity, this will be 
 a farther proof of what I have here advanced. As 
 f Homer was the first Greek book that was read in the 
 schools of the ancients, it is reasonable to think that 
 this was the first that was accented ; and it appears from 
 several instances, that those accents were placed ac- 
 cording to quantity. 'Eprj/xoc is accented by the moderns 
 with an acute upon the antepenultimate ; but it was ac- 
 cented in Homer with a circumflex upon the penulti- 
 mate : % wapa Totg 'AttikoTc TrpoTrapo%vvzraC irapa Si t<£ 
 iroiryrij 7rpo7rep«77rara{. II. K. V. 520. 
 
 'Q,g i'Se xwpov eprifiov, o0' taracrav wneeg "nnroi. 
 
 This is confirmed by Eustathius, who saith ex- 
 pressly, that 'Eprj/xoc was accented after this manner, 
 not only in this, but in all other places in Homer: §7rpo- 
 7T£pi(T7rarai Si icai IvTavSa to lpr\fxog, Ka3"a koi aXXa^ov, koS" 
 ojuoiorrjra tov IroTfiog. And so the word is accented in 
 Bishop More's manuscript. 'O/xoiog is accented by the 
 moderns with an acute upon the antepenultimate. But 
 it was accented in Homer with a circumflex upon the 
 
 * In Plut. v. 453. Edit. Tib. Hem- L. I. c. 17. For which reason Palladas 
 
 sterhusii. calleth the Iliad agp T^afxixanwi;. 
 
 t Plin. Epp. L. II. Ep. 14. Optime Antholog. L. I. c. 17. 
 
 institutum est ut ab Homero atque Vir- % M. Etymol. in voce "Ejn^uof. 
 
 gilio lectio inciperet. Quinctil. Instit. § Edit. Rom. fol. 822. 1. v.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 323 
 
 penultimate. So * Porphyry : ru cm tov olog inravra 7roo~ 
 Trepicnriofiev. hepolog' yzXotog' aXXoXog' Bia tovto tcai Ofu)pog 
 rij avaXoyia ^p^aafievog "f" tog alei Sebg, <pr)<n, tov bfioiov ayu 
 rrpbg tov bfioiov. ol Si 'Attjkoi bfioiog Xiyovai. CorintllUS 
 saith much the same thing; and Herodian and -„ 
 Eustathius assure us that bfiolog was always ac- 
 cented by the ancients, and in Homer, with a circumflex 
 upon the penultimate, as well as IpTifibg and kolfiog' % to 
 ce lpr\fia TrpoTrtpicnrCjaiv ol TraXaioi. wcnrsp yap iTolfiov Xiyu 
 Ofiripog TrpoTrtpiavtofiivtvg Kara apyaictfibv, ovtu) kcu lpv\fiov 
 to irap -q/xiv ipr)fiov. To fiivroi bfiolog, avrb fiev oi)K e)(ei 
 rrapaoot,iav riva' avaXoyov yap Ion Tolg Sta tov oiog TrpoTTt- 
 picnrtofiivotg' Sokouv TrpoTTtpHnraaSrivai kcu Ik tov bfiotiog' 
 fiaXXov St to ofioiog iyti tl Kawbv Kara avvifiuav wg tf>acnv 
 arriKijv. Alb Ylpwciavog tyr}(nv oti to Trap* 'Ofifipto Iprifiov (cat 
 trolfiov, ol vtwrepoi arriKol avaXoytvg tpamv tprifiov koi %toi- 
 fxov. Herodian and Eustathius agreed as to the accentu- 
 ation of these words in Homer : but Eustathius differed 
 from Herodian as to the analogy of the ancient and 
 modern accentuation of them. To Se bfioiov oti ava- 
 Xoytvg 7rpo7repi(T7raTai, ical ov Trapa tvttov Kara to ttoq- 
 Trapo^vTOvovpeimv bfioiov 7roXXa^ow SrjXoirrat. wrnrcp teal to 
 bfiolog tv tb aXXoig icai iv 'OoWa-ffa. 6 TravTiog avaXoywTtpov 
 tov bfiotog. fol. 569. 1. xvii. r O St bfiolog, avaXoywg Trpo- 
 TrtpicnraTai Ik tov bfiog. Kara to, TravTog iravTolog. uXXog oX- 
 AoTo£. KaX Ta bfioia. to uevtoi ofioiog vtrrepov ol clttlkoX irapu)- 
 £wav. fol. 1817. 1. xv. I shall only observe farther, that 
 Porphyry, in the abovementioned place, addeth, that 
 Tpo7ratov was marked with a circumflex upon the penulti- 
 mate in the copies of Thucydides : ttoXiv vfizlg fiev dvaXo- 
 ywg Tpoiraiov Xtyofitv. tog <T7n)Xaiov, avXaiov. 6 St QovKvdiSr^g 
 Tpoirdiov 'ATTiKwg. The meaning of whicn is, that the 
 moderns put an accent upon the antepenultimate of too- 
 iraiov to bring it to the analogy of other words 
 of the same form, which were so accented (though 
 that analogy might, with more reason, have been re- 
 
 * Titfi Trpcs-ooSirtf MS. Bibliotli. Re- t Odyss. P. v. 218. 
 
 g' s A "S- % Eustath. fol. 531. 1. xy.xii. &c. 
 
 Y2
 
 324 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 versed), but that in Thucydides a circumflex was put 
 upon the penultimate, according to the manner of the 
 ancient Athenians, which is also agreeable to what Eu- 
 stathius saith on this subject. 
 
 From hence, therefore, and from other instances which 
 might be produced, it appeareth, that the ancient manner 
 of placing accents was agreeable to quantity. But it is 
 not an easy matter to point out the exact time, when a 
 different manner of accenting began. 
 
 The patrons of the present system of accents endea- 
 vour to prove the antiquity of them from two incidents 
 in which Demosthenes was concerned. One of them is 
 - in his Orations 7repi arrfavov ; and the other is related 
 by Plutarch, in his Lives of the ten orators : but 
 neither of these places hath, in my opinion, been rightly 
 understood ; and they will appear, in their true sense, to 
 be very far from proving the point for which they are 
 produced. 
 
 In the oration wepl arttyavov, the point which Demos- 
 thenes had in view, was to persuade the people that 
 iEschines was the mercenary, hktZwtoq, and not the guest 
 or friend, £,(vog, of Philip and Alexander. Now, in 
 order to effect this, Demosthenes had a mind to bring his 
 audience to an open declaration of it. And the way 
 which he took to bring this about, was, * it is said, by 
 appealing to his hearers, and asking them if iEschines 
 was not a phtSgjtoq ; artfully putting the accent in the 
 wrong place, because he knew the people would 
 immediately correct his pronunciation; and then he 
 would take their correction of his pronunciation as a 
 declaration of their judgment that iEschines was a pia- 
 3-wroc ; and in this he met with all the success he de- 
 sired. This hath the appearance of an argument, and 
 yet there is nothing in Demosthenes to support it. His 
 words are : 'AXXci fiiaSiorbv lyu) <rl $jXfrnrov Trporepov, 
 Kai vvv ' AXe^avdpov koXu), koi ovtoi Travreg. il o aTTiGTUQ, 
 lpu)Tr)<jov avTOvq. juaXXov o lyio TOV& VTTtp GOV TTOl1](Ta>' 7TO- 
 
 * Guild. Bail, tie Accentilnis Grxcornui.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 325 
 
 rspov vfuv, to "AvSpeg 'Afyvmoi, n'lcrZioTog At^xtvijc, V &vog 
 tivai AXe^avSpov So/at ; — cticoveig a Xiyovm, i. e. I say 
 that you were the fxiaSuTog of Philip, and that you are 
 now the higQutoq of Alexander. All that are present 
 will say the same thing. If you disbelieve me, ask 
 them ; yea, rather, I will ask them for you. Do 121 
 you believe, O Athenians ! that ^Eschines is the ju(<j6wtoq 
 or livog of Alexander ? You hear what they say.— It 
 is evident that Demosthenes, after he had put the ques- 
 tion, made a pause, and that his hearers answered fxia- 
 OojTog ; upon which Demosthenes concluded with these 
 words; aicovug a Xiyovm. But it doth not appear that 
 Demosthenes made use of any artifice to bring his hear- 
 ers to make such an answer : and much less doth it 
 appear that the artifice which he put in practice, was by 
 placing a wrong accent upon the word fxtcr^rog. This 
 is taken from his commentator Ulpian, who lived five 
 hundred years after him, and who delivers this only as 
 the opinion or saying of some. Tipkg ehnKaaiv on <W h 
 
 tu> kpwT§v 6 p{]TU)fj ifiapfiapiiTEv e'&wirricac, utadu-ov Xeyu>y 00 
 Eim £7T£\a/3£ro rig avrov, ihg ciopSovfitvog, kcu ejjoi] vera) itia " 
 
 rova uiaQwrog' elra n)v Cwpdwaiv arzoKpiaiv real fitfiuiuaiv £ipT}K£V. 
 
 But such an artifice was too low and mean for Demos- 
 thenes to have recourse to. And, besides, as the suc- 
 cess of it was very uncertain, one cannot think he would 
 in prudence have trusted to it. If any artifice was 
 practised, it is more natural to conclude, that Demos- 
 thenes had previously secured some persons to make 
 the answer which he expected. And this agreeth with 
 the solution which Ulpian giveth to this affair, who far- 
 ther telleth us, that, according to the opinion of others, it 
 was his friend Menander that answered ni<r$<or6g. 01 c£ 
 
 (jjatTLV wg Mevavtipog 6 Kivuitcbg <pi\og wv avrov, kul wv ev rolg ciicaa- 
 ralg, tnreicpii/aro -^api^oueyog' koi roti kvbg rrjv <j)0)V))v wg rwy Trdvrwy 
 tSe'faro . 
 
 From Plutarch's Lives of the ten orators, the ,^ 
 patrons of the present system of accents assert, 
 that the Athenians found great fault with Demosthenes 
 for placing an acute upon the antepenultimate of the
 
 320 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 word 'Ao-KXj)7Ttoc- To judge fairly of this assertion we 
 must consider the passage itself. Plutarch telleth us, 
 that Demosthenes, not having succeeded in his public 
 performances, retired, and was greatly cast down ; but 
 that he was comforted and encouraged by Eunomus the 
 Thriasian, and more by Andronicus the actor, who told 
 him, that his orations were good, but that he was defi- 
 cient as to his action. And then * Plutarch addeth, 
 
 TTpoeXdiov £e -iraXiv elg rag eKK\t)(rlag, vEw-EpacSjg riva Xiywv, cievv- 
 pero' uiQ K(x)/x(^Sr]diivai avrov vtto 'AvrKpavovg, ical TtuoicAeoue, fia 
 101 yijV} [ta Kpr)vag t p.a TTorafiOvQ, /xa vaj.ia.ra. bfiotjag tie tovtov 
 
 TOV TpOTTOV kv T(p £»'///£>, dopvfioV EKlVtjffEV. "ilflVVE £e (Cat TOV 
 
 , \(7K\r\Tnov i Trpoirapotyvwv'A.oKXiiiriov, /ecu -rrapE^EiicvvEv avrov 6p§wg 
 Xeyovra' elvat ydp rbv Qeov ?j7riov. kcu ett\ rovry voXXaKLg edopvpi'idi]- 
 
 i. e. Demosthenes appearing again in the public assem- 
 blies, and having said some things that were new and 
 unusual, was found fault with, insomuch that he was ri- 
 diculed by Antiphanes and Timocles in their comedies 
 by these expressions : — I call the earth to witness, I call 
 the springs to witness, I call the rivers to witness, I call 
 the waters to witness. He was also wont to call iEs- 
 culapius to witness, laying an extraordinary stress upon 
 the antepenultimate of 'AaicXiririoQ, and he insisted that 
 he spoke truly, for that iEsculapius was rjTriog, a mild, 
 benign, and beneficent God. And upon this ac- 
 count he was often disturbed. But this doth not 
 come up to what is pretended ; nor can it be made to 
 come up to it, but by overstraining and perverting the 
 text. 
 
 And the patrons of the present system of accents are 
 so sensible of this, that Baillius, in quoting the passage, 
 hath put an acute upon the penultimate of ' AaKXriiriov 
 (contrary to the common way of accenting this word, 
 which putteth an acute upon the last), wfxwe St nal tov 
 \A(7ieX»}7rtov ; and, in his translation of it, hath, in order to 
 make out his own sense, inserted words, to which there 
 is nothing at all in the original that answereth : " Nee 
 
 * Ed. Par. 1624. t.ii. p. 845.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 327 
 
 'Ao-K-XijTrtov acuta penultima more Attico, sed acuta an- 
 tepenultima ' A<tkX{]ttiov (more, ut sibi videbatur, consen- 
 taneo) pronuntiavit." But this is very unfair, and 19 
 forcing too strict a sense upon the word TrpoirapoZv- 
 vwv. The plain meaning of Plutarch seems to be no 
 more than this : that Demosthenes was thought to make 
 too frequent appeals ; that he used to appeal to iEscu- 
 lapius; and that when he did this he laid an uncommon 
 stress upon the antepenultimate of 'Ao-KXr]7noe ; but that 
 the accent was not to be placed there Plutarch doth not 
 say. In his Lives of the ten orators, and in his * Pa- 
 rallels, he mentions the particular defects and faults of 
 Demosthenes : — as, that his speech was thick ; that he 
 could not pronounce distinctly the letter p ; that he had 
 an awkward, unbecoming motion of his shoulders ; that 
 his voice was low ; and that his breath was so short, that, 
 in speaking long periods, he was forced to make in- 
 cisions, which suspended and hurt the sense ; that 
 his compositions were too much laboured; that there 
 was a confusion in his periods ; and that he abounded 
 too much in figures. But Plutarch doth not say that 
 Demosthenes accented his words in wrong places. And 
 yet, if he had, this was a fault which would and must 
 have been taken notice of in the first place. Indeed, it 
 cannot be imagined that Demosthenes, who had been 
 born and bred up in Athens, could possibly be faulty in 
 this respect. 
 
 Suidas seemeth to say that the ancient manner of 
 placing accents prevailed under Eupolis, Cratinus, Aris- 
 tophanes, and Thucydides, and the new manner under 
 Menander, &c. f Tpoiraiov ol iraXaiol 'Arrt/coi TrpoTrtpia- 
 Triomv. ol Se vtwTtpoi Trpo~TapoZ,vvovcn. r) $e iraXaia 'Ar&'e - OQ 
 lariVy r\Q r\px iv EWoAiCj KpciTivoQ, 'ApiGTotyavriQ, Qov- 
 KvdlSt}Q. i} Se via 'Ar^tc Icrnv, r)Q Ioti MevavSpog, kol aWoi. 
 If Suidas meant this of a common practice in the man- 
 ner of accenting, he certainly was mistaken. The scho- 
 liast upon Aristophanes, from whom he seemeth to have 
 
 * T. i. p. 818. t In voce TgoVaiov.
 
 328 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 made his extract, saith nothing of this ; besides, Suidas 
 quotethno authority. In truth, he seemeth either to have 
 mistaken the abovementioned passage of Ulpian, or to 
 have injudiciously confounded two things which are of 
 a very different nature. However, it is no improbable 
 conjecture to suppose, that a corrupt manner of pro- 
 nouncing some words in the Greek language was occa- 
 sioned by Alexander's expedition into Asia. His army 
 might have learned to accent some words according to 
 ., *■■ the manner of the Asiatics : and as it is reason- 
 able to think that many Asiatics went with them, 
 when they returned into Greece, these, we may be sure, 
 were very faulty in this respect. Upon the death of 
 Alexander, two great empires were formed out of his 
 conquests : one in Egypt under Ptolemy, and another 
 in Asia under Seleucus. In both these kingdoms the 
 pronunciation of the Greek language must have been 
 greatly corrupted ; and this corruption must have infected 
 Greece itself, considering the intercourse and corres- 
 pondence which was carried on between Greece and the 
 two new kingdoms. Alexander died in the first year of 
 the 114th Olymp. ; upon which Ptolemy immediately 
 began his reign, as Seleucus did his twelve years after- 
 wards. In the first year of the 1 5-5d Olymp. i. e. 156 
 years after the death of Alexander, Paulus iEmi- 
 lius conquered Greece, and made it a Roman pro- 
 vince, by which the genuine pronunciation and accentu- 
 ation of the Greek language must have been farther cor- 
 rupted. The Greek language received an additional 
 wound by the irruption of * the Goths into Greece in 
 the third century : indeed, the Goths had, before this, 
 made several emigrations into Greece. From Scandi- 
 navia they moved southward; first to the islands in the 
 Baltic, then settled upon the continent about the Vis- 
 tula; and afterwards, by the force of their arms, they 
 possessed themselves of Dacia, i. e. of that large 
 country, which was bounded on the east by the Euxine 
 
 * Eutropii Rravifcr. L. \\. c. 8. sub Galiicuo.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 329 
 
 Sea, on the west by the river Tibiscus, and on the 
 south by the Danube. They maintained this ac- 
 quisition 700 years, i. e. from before Alexander's 
 time to the time of Valentinian and Valens. *"Ter- 
 tiae Gothorum Sedes in Dacia, quam hodie Transylva- 
 niam Hungariae ac Valachiam nominant. Quas paulo 
 ante Alexandri Magni aetatem occupasse invenio : reli- 
 quisse vero sub Valentiniano et Valente, circa Annum 
 Salutis reparatas 376, Chronologiae nos ratio docet." 
 This situation afforded the Goths many favourable 
 opportunities of going into Greece : and they were so 
 fond of this country, that many of them settled in it ; 
 and in such numbers, as to make the want of them felt 
 in their native country : which obliged the Westrogoths 
 (in order to put a stop to this evil) to make a 
 law to exclude those Goths who settled in Greece 
 from inheriting in their native country, f " Nullius 
 (in Gothia) hereditatis capax esto, qui in Graecia do- 
 micilium fixit." De Hereditat. cap. 12. lib. ii. The 
 J last wound which the Greek language received, was 
 when the Saracens, in the reign of Heraclius, i. e. at 
 the beginning of the seventh century, over-ran Greece. 
 By this the pronunciation of the Greek language was 
 corrupted to such a degree, that it was now found as 
 necessary to write accents in books for common use, 
 as it had been before to write them only in the 
 books of learners. 
 
 This account of the progress in the corruption of 
 the Greek language agreeth with the time when ac- 
 cents are said to have been invented ; and also with 
 the time, when we find, in fact, by the manuscripts 
 which are now extant, that accents began to be in com- 
 
 * Wolfang. Lazias De Gent. Migra- as is necessary to fix, with some degree 
 
 tionibus. p. 554, 555. of probability, the common use of ac- 
 
 t Vid. Sliernhielmium in Anli-Clu- cents. It suffered greater corruptions 
 
 verio, Dissert. I. et Ingewaldi Hist. afterwards ; of which the reader may 
 
 Grsec. Ling. p. 283. see an account in Du Fresue's Preface 
 
 t The corruption of the Greek Ian- to his Glossary Media: et InftmiE Graci- 
 
 guage is considered here only so far tatis.
 
 330 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 mon use ; though even then, and for many ages after, se- 
 veral writers, who were studious of antiquity, did not 
 use them : as is evident from those manuscripts without 
 accents, which yet were written in the same age with 
 others that have them. 
 
 Aristophanes of Byzantium, according to* Suidas, 
 flourished at Alexandria in the 145th Olympiad : he is 
 said to have been the inventor of accents, i. e. at least as 
 1 qj to the use which he made of them ; for before him 
 the use of accents was entirely musical. But he 
 thought that accents might be usefully applied to pre- 
 serve the metrical pronunciation of the Greek language, 
 and for this reason he employed them to facilitate the 
 knowledge of that language to those foreigners who 
 were desirous of learning it. +" Aristophanes Byzan- 
 tius 7Tpoo-fj)8iav sive accentus excogitavit. Non quod ad 
 illam usque aetatem Graeca lingua accentibus et spiriti- 
 bus caruerit : nulla enim potest lingua sine accentu et 
 spiritu pronuntiari ; sed quod ille ea, quae usus magis- 
 ter invexerat, ad certas normas et regulas deduxerit, 
 signa et formas invenerit, quo loco essent constituendi 
 accentus et spiritus docuerit." The grammarians, who 
 -j „~ succeeded Aristophanes, in the school of Alexan- 
 dria, followed his example. But, if his method was 
 to make accents always agree with quantity, there is 
 reason to doubt whether his successors, in process of 
 time, kept strictly to his rules. % Isaac Vossius thought 
 that the agreement of accents with quantity was kept up 
 till the time of Antoninus and Commodus, and even 
 down to the seventh century. " Usque ad tempora An- 
 tonini et Commodi Impp. perstitit nihilominus antiqua 
 et fere integra loquendi ratio, ut opus non fuerit totidem 
 apicibus scripturas onerare, ac posterioribus factum sit 
 seculis, cessante nempe et penitus collapsa vetere pro- 
 nuntiandi ratione. Quam recens sit usus apponendi 
 istiusmodi accentus quibuslibet scripturis, hoc satis de- 
 
 * In voce 'Apie-Tofavti?. X De Poemal. Cautu. p. 18, 19. 
 
 + Monlfaue. Pal.xogi . Gncc. p. 33.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS 831 
 
 elarat, quod in nullis marmoribus, nullis numis- ^™ 
 matis, nullis denique codicibus, qui quidem mille, 
 aut nongentis annis antiquiores sunt, virgulse aut apices 
 ulli compareant. Unde satis ev id enter patet, totointer- 
 medio tempore, quod ab Aristophane grammatico ef- 
 fluxit, usque ad id tempus, quo accentus adscribi cae- 
 perunt, per spatium nempe octo vel novem seculorum, 
 haud aliis usibus adhibitas fuisse a grammaticis accen- 
 tuum notas, quam ad erudiendam in artemetrica Juven- 
 tutem. Nee tamen existimandum similem, ac nunc pas- 
 sim recepta est, olim quoque fuisse accentuum ratio- 
 nem. Qui enim cantus aut lectio subsistere possit, si 
 quis Homericos versus, ita ac vulgo fit, pronuntiet ? 
 
 * 'HlXtoc o dvopovae Xnriov irepiKaWia \i[xvt}v 137 
 
 Ovpavbv ec ttoXv^oXkov, 1v dOavaroKn (pauvrj 
 Kai BvT)Totm |3(>otoiit(v hr\ %u§wpov apovpav' 
 
 " Longe aliter veteres ; sic nempe illi accentus digere- 
 bant. 
 
 'HiXtoc S' dvopovae \nrwv TTtptKaXXtd \ifivr\v 
 "Ovpavov ig ttoXv^uXkov, iv dOavarotai (paclmj 
 Kai 6vt]rol(TL fiporoiGiv £7rt Zticwpov apovpav' 
 
 " Vera esse quae affirmo libenter agnoscet is, qui vete- 
 rum grammaticorum, Dionysii Thracis, Apollonii Alex- 
 andrini, iElii Dionysii Halicarnassensis, Aristarchi ju- 
 nioris, et aliorum, quas supersunt, scripta et fragmenta 
 evolvat." But this lieth open to great uncertainties. 
 There is nothing extant of Aristophanes of Byzantium : 
 he is quoted but once by Apollonius, and that not to any 
 purpose that cometh up to the present point. Apollo- 
 nius doth not, in his Syntax, say any thing either 1 ™ 
 from himself or from the elder Aristarchus, whom 
 he often quoteth, that proveth what Vossius hath ad- 
 vanced. There is reason to doubt whether the Tt'xvrj 
 
 * Odvss. r. v. i,&c.
 
 332 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 ypafifiaTucrj, which is ascribed to Dionysius Thrax, and 
 is still extant, be really the work of that Dionysius, who 
 was the scholar of Aristarchus, or of some other Diony- 
 sius. The only printed copy that we have of this Tixyn 
 jpanfiaTiKri was published by # Fabricius, from a manu- 
 script in the Holstein library ; and this contains nothing 
 upon the present subject. There is nothing of Aristar- 
 chus junior published, that I know of; nor of iElius 
 Dionysius Halicarnassensis, excepting a tract, n^pl <zk- 
 \itiov pnnartDv, in Aldus's Thesaurus. What we have 
 upon the subject of Greek accents, according to the pre- 
 yig sent system, is conveyed to us by the Greek scho- 
 liasts and grammarians, who, though we call them 
 ancient, in respect of us, are yet modern in respect of 
 the truly ancient Greeks. They copy one another; and 
 all seem plainly to derive their doctrine from the gram- 
 marians of the school of Alexandria, many of whom 
 lived before the times of Antoninus and Commodus ; 
 so that, though it should be allowed that Aristophanes, 
 and some of his immediate successors, placed accents 
 agreeably to cpiantity, yet is it by no means an improba- 
 ble conjecture, that in process of time the grammarians 
 of that school departed from the system of Aristo- 
 phanes, and did not pay a due regard to quantity. And 
 when this essential rule was neglected, and accents 
 were placed according to a corrupt pronunciation which 
 140 P reva ^ e ^> then, of course, the rules for placing ac- 
 cents must have been multiplied in proportion as 
 the corrupt pronunciation increased : but as it doth not 
 appear when the alteration began, this matter must still 
 remain undetermined. 
 
 It is not to be thought that the grammarians formed at 
 once a perfect system of accents which was universally 
 agreed to and received : their first business was to 
 bring into some consistency, and reduce under some 
 rules, a pronunciation which had been corrupted at dif- 
 ferent times, and in different ways ; which could not be 
 
 * Bib.Grajc.lib. v. c. 7,§ IS.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 333 
 
 done but by many rules, and more exceptions ; and then 
 they endeavoured, upon their own authority, to form or 
 fix a distinctive pronunciation of some words in which 
 yet they greatly differed one from another. 
 
 One case, in which the grammarians accented j^-. 
 differently the same word, was to distinguish its ac- 
 tive from its passive sense : as yeXoiog,* the etymo- 
 logist telleth us, with an acute upon the antepenul- 
 timate, signifieth one who is a subject of ridicule; 
 but with a circumflex upon the penultimate, signifieth 
 a joker, ytXoiog XiysTcti, b yiXwTog a^iog' ytXolog oe 6 
 yeXojTOTToiog. Ammonius saith the same thing : and 
 so doth f Eustathius : tov Se TpiavXXufiov (scil. ytXoiog) 
 Ttvlg bt,vvovai ti)v irpwTriv ovXXafiijv, log <j>ii<ri Aiovvaiog 
 A\Xiog. ol oe ttXugtoi, ytXotov fi.lv TrpoTrspicnriOfiiviog, tov yt- 
 XwTowoibv Xiyovai. olov tov fxifiov. yiXoiov Se, tov Karayi- 
 XaoTOv. cOKEi oe <\>r\m tuiv iraXaLiov ^Attikwv elvat, irpoTrt- 
 pKTTrav to. toiclvtcl. bpolov. etoTjuov. ytXolov. But Suidas, T. 
 Magister, and Phavorinus, say quite the contrary: ^ ,~ 
 ytXotog 6 KaTayiXavTog. yiXoiog Se 6 ytXfOTOiroivg. 
 | Philoponus hath observed, that there was a third man- 
 ner of accenting this word, by putting an acute upon the 
 last, E^Et oe TTupaurifitiuxTeig TOiavTag kol b (f>tX67rovog. ev ate 
 kol oti yeXolog filv b KaTayiXaaTog Trpoirepi(nr(i)fjiiv(og, yeXoibg 
 Se b^vTovwg b ytXuToiroiog. And a § manuscript lexicon in 
 the Coislian library exhibiteth the same : ytXolog p:lv 6 
 KarayiXaaTog Trpo-irtpKJiriofiivwg' yeXoibg oe, b^vTovwg, b ye- 
 XioTOTroiog : which is manifestly copied from Eustathius. 
 
 Another case, in which the grammarians accented dif- 
 ferently the same word, was to distinguish its proper from 
 its figurative sense ; as aypoiKog, Ij Ammonius telleth us, 
 with a circumflex upon the penultimate, signifieth one , .« 
 who dwelleth in the country ; but with an acute upon 
 the antepenultimate, signifieth an ill-bred man. WypoiKog 
 kol" Ay potKog Sia(j)ipu. TrpoTTtpicnrojfxivhjg filv, b Iv aypM Ka- 
 
 * In voce yi\otoq. § Montfauc. Cat. Bib. Coisl. p. 470. 
 
 t II. B. fol. 205. 1. 44. || In voce ' hygnx.v;. 
 
 t Eustath. II. M. fol. 906. 1. 50.
 
 334 A DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 toikwv. trpoTrapo^vTovwg St, 6 analog tovq rpoTrovg. And 
 yet Ptolemaeus Asealonita, whom Ammonius had pe- 
 rused, for he quoteth him under the word rpareg, saith 
 quite the contrary :* ''AypoiKog fiapvrovov, 6 Iv aypotg dia- 
 Tpif5d)v' aypolicog & 7rpoTr£pi<nrii)p.tvov, b fir) ifaepog. But 
 there is no reasonable foundation for such a difference 
 in the accentuation of this word ; all the compounds of 
 otKng are proparoxytonous; and, therefore, if analogy is 
 allowed to be a rule for accenting words of the same 
 144. f° rm > there cannot be any good reason to make an 
 exception for this single word.f " Discrimen est inter 
 grammaticos circa hoc discrimen ; et profecto haud 
 scio an ita stricte et superstitiose observetur haec differ- 
 entia apud auctores. Quamobrem dispungerem penitus 
 hanc notam StatcpiTiKrjv inter aypoltcog et aypoticog, turn 
 quia de ea non convenit inter grammaticos ; turn quia 
 non memini earn ab auctoribus ubique observatam ; turn 
 quia tarn cognatae et finitimae sunt hae significationes, ut 
 non opus sit eas accentu distingui ; turn denique quia ca> 
 tera omnia composita in oinog suntproparoxytona. fxirot- 
 KOg, airoiKOQ, (toXoikoq TrapoLKog,<$>tpioiK.og," &C. I would not, 
 however, have it concluded from hence, that I approve 
 Ijr of the placing an acute upon the antepenultimate 
 of these words. I rather think, and am persuaded, 
 that aypoiKog, and ayopaiog, concerning the accentuation 
 of which there is much the same variation among the 
 grammarians, and all words of the same form, had ori- 
 ginally, as they ought to have, a circumflex upon the 
 penultimate, and that it was the moderns, the p.eTayevia- 
 repoi 'Arrticoi, who accented the antepenultimate with an 
 acute. 
 
 It is evident, therefore, that the present system of ac- 
 cents is not founded on the genuine pronunciation of the 
 Greek language, which was agreeable to quantity, but 
 on a corrupt pronunciation, which began and increased 
 in latter ages. Those grammarians, from whom we 
 
 •Fabricii Bibl.Grsec. lib. iv. e.33. t Jac. Duport. Prelect, in Theo- 
 
 §• 5. phrast. Char. iv. p. 273.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 335 
 
 have received this system, were really modern in ^ ... 
 respect of the pure and genuine pronunciation of 
 the Greek language. The rules which they formed had 
 but little regard to quantity ; and were, in many cases, 
 contrary one to another. And, therefore, it is no wonder 
 that this system is not, even now, uniform and consist- 
 ent, and that there are many variations in the placing 
 of accents, both in accented manuscripts and printed 
 books ; which would not have been the case, if gram- 
 marians had placed accents as they were placed when 
 the Greek language was in its purity. 
 
 There are undoubtedly some difficulties to be met 
 with on the subject of accents, both in the Greek and 
 Latin languages. But these may, perhaps, be removed 
 by considering that in all languages, the pronuncia- 
 tion of some words is founded only upon custom, 
 which is above all the laws of grammar. * " Quod 
 Graeci, quod Barbari hodie in sua quisque lingua ; cur 
 non Romani habuerint, et quaedam pronunciarint ad 
 Morem potius, quam ad Normam? Ad suavitatem, 
 quam ad quantitatem ? Ego censeam : etsi adfirmare 
 aut illustrare id mihi fas paucis argumentis vel exem- 
 plis. Quomodo enim penetrem aut oculos adjiciam in 
 tenebras illius M\'\ ? Omnia silentio et oblivione obru- 
 ta : et scimus in ea parte hactenus, quatenus scire nos 
 grammatici voluerunt. Quibus tamen ipsis expressa 
 quaedam contra suam legem, prassertim earn, quas te- 
 nores ligat ad modulum syllabas et mensuram." 
 There are several instances of this in Quinctilian, 
 Priscian, Festus, Gellius, and Charisius. And we have 
 the same reason to say of the pronunciation of the an- 
 cient Greek language, that + Sanctius had to say of that 
 of the Latin — that there were some things in the use of 
 accents among the ancient Romans, qui nostras aures 
 omnino fugiunt. In living languages there is a necessity 
 of complying with custom : but in dead languages this 
 reason seemeth to cease. If, therefore, the patrons of the 
 
 * Lipsias de reel. Pronuut. L. L. c. 21. t Minerva, I. iv. o. 14. art. 5.
 
 336 A DISSERTATION, &C. 
 
 modern doctrine of accents, in pronouncing the ancient 
 Greek language, think they can reconcile their doctrine 
 with a due observation of quantity, they are free to re- 
 tain it : but I must sincerely confess, that I do not see 
 , 4f v how they can. On the contrary, we plainly see, that, 
 in fact, they do not; and that in verse they do not 
 so much as pretend to it : so that, in this respect, they 
 necessarily run into the great absurdity of making- two 
 languages out of one. And, therefore, if we would ob- 
 serve uniformity, and keep to what we can safely rely 
 on, we must not admit of any use of accents in the pro- 
 nunciation of the ancient Greek language, but what is 
 consistent with quantity ; and if we have lost the nicer 
 part of the ancient pronunciation, we have the more 
 reason to adhere to that essential part which still sub- 
 sisted.
 
 A 
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION 
 
 AGAINST PRONOUNCING THE 
 
 GREEK LANGUAGE 
 
 ACCORDING TO 
 
 ACCENTS. 
 
 IN ANSWER TO 
 
 MR. FOSTER'S ESSAY 
 
 ON THE DIFFERENT NATURE OF ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 
 
 Accentaura Graecorum omnis hodie ratio prapostera est atque perver$a. 
 
 Ric. Bentleii Ep. ad Millium, p. 82.
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 I have, in the following Dissertation, endeavoured 
 to keep to one point, which, indeed, is the main 
 foundation of the present controversy : and have passed 
 over some things upon which Mr. Foster has enlarged, 
 because I am but little, or not at all, concerned in them. 
 As to the assistance which may be borrowed from 
 music to explain the doctrine of accents, I have de- 
 clared my sentiments in the body of the Dissertation. 
 And as to those Greeks who, upon the downfall of . 
 
 IV 
 
 the Grecian empire, fled into the west, and there 
 taught their language, I am under no obligation to say 
 any thing about their characters, because I have never 
 impeached them. But the censure which Mr. Foster has 
 been pleased to pass upon the University of Oxford, for 
 allowing some Greek books to be printed without ac- 
 cents at their press, requires to have some notice taken 
 of it, because it is equally groundless and unprece- 
 dented. 
 
 The Hebrew Bible was, but few years ago, printed at 
 Oxford without vowels, and without causing any out- 
 cry ; and yet there was more room for censure in this 
 case, because it is well known that many look upon the 
 Hebrew vowels to be as sacred a part as any other 
 of the Hebrew text. Politian,* many years ago, 
 printed some Sibylline verses, and an elegy of Callima- 
 chus, without accents, because he found them so in his 
 
 * Miscellan. p. 58. 80. 
 
 z2
 
 340 PREFACE. 
 
 manuscripts ; and the* Greek New Testament was 
 printed at London, in the year 1729, without accents ; 
 and all this was done without any censure. Mr. Foster 
 therefore must entertain an uncommon fondness for his 
 own opinions, otherwise one cannot conceive that 
 he would have broke out with So much asperity 
 against the University of Oxford on this occasion. The 
 University, in allowing some Greek books to be printed 
 at their press without accents, have done no more than 
 what had been done before by others without censure ; 
 and in this they really did less than they had done in al- 
 lowing the Hebrew Bible to be printed at their press 
 without vowels. The truth is, that the printing of books 
 with or without accents is no determination of the con- 
 troversy about accents on either side, much less is the 
 imprimatur of the vice-chancellor to Greek books, with 
 or without accents, a declaration of the University for or 
 against accents. 
 
 Mr. Foster has carried his anger against the Uni- 
 vii 
 
 versity of Oxford still farther, by invidiously re- 
 minding them of a certain f decree of convocation, which 
 was passed in a time when party principles had unhap- 
 pily got the better of cool judgment, and which the pre- 
 sent members of that University do, it is to be presumed, 
 wish had never been made. Nor has Mr. Foster at all 
 mitigated his resentment by his telling the University, 
 with an appearance of deference, though only ironical, 
 that % they may if they please annul half the letters in 
 every alphabet, and he shall not be the person to call 
 in question their authority ; when, in the very same 
 ... breath, he loudly calls upon the editors of two or 
 
 three Greek books without accents, under the vice- 
 
 * Dr. Twells published three se- this circumstance. In this he shewed 
 
 veral pieces against this edition of the his judgment and temper, and gave an 
 
 New Testament, in which he set forth example worthy of being taken notice 
 
 all the faults he found in it; but he of and followed by those who are fond 
 
 was so far from blaming the editor for of making mountains of mole-hills, 
 
 publishing the Greek text without ac- t Essay, p. 204. 
 
 cents, that he never once mentioned* £ Ibid.
 
 PREFACE. 341 
 
 chancellor's imprimatur, to step forth from behind their 
 shield qfacademice auctoritas, and fight with him in this 
 cause. Alas ! what modest author or editor will ven- 
 ture to offer any thing to the public, if, for so harmless a 
 thing as the printing of a Greek book without accents, 
 he must be charged with unfaithfulness, and with giving 
 up, and, by a kind of breach of trust, destroying what he 
 should look on as a sacred deposit in his hands? 
 
 By these expressions, which are not intended by any 
 means to be understood hyperbolically, it appears that 
 Mr. Foster considers the printing of Greek books with- 
 out accents as a crime not at all inferior to sacri- . 
 lege. But, in the name of plain common sense, 
 where is the unfaithfulness ? where is the breach of 
 trust? where is the destroying a sacred deposit by such 
 a practice ? If any unfaithfulness, any breach of trust, 
 any destroying a sacred deposit does, in respect to ac- 
 cents, attend the printing of Greek books, there is much 
 more reason to lay these crimes in charge to those that 
 print them with accents. The oldest and best Greek ma- 
 nuscripts that we have are without accents ; and if the edi- 
 tors of Greek books from such manuscripts had printed 
 them as they found them, they would have printed them 
 without accents. If they had done this, they could 
 not possibly be charged with unfaithfulness, breach 
 of trust, and destroying a sacred deposit. The plain 
 query then here is — whether they have not justly in- 
 curred these charges by putting into their editions, from 
 manuscripts that are more recent, and not so good, ac- 
 cents which are not in the oldest and best manuscripts ? 
 Did not Dr. Grabe print at Oxford, under the vice-chan- 
 cellor's imprimatur, the Septuagint translation of the 
 Old Testament with accents, though the Alexandrian 
 manuscript, from which he printed it, and which his edi- 
 tion was intended to represent, has them not ? Mr. Fos- 
 ter might, and with more justice too, have in this case 
 laid a charge of unfaithfulness, breach of trust, and 
 destroying a sacred deposit; but then he would have
 
 342 PREFACE. 
 
 made two charges which would have contradicted and 
 destroyed each other. 
 
 If the arguments which Mr. Foster has offered are so 
 strong, so cogent, and so unanswerable, as he takes them 
 to be, he had reason to expect they would operate by 
 their own force. This was the only proper conduct for 
 him to observe on this occasion : for an adversary is 
 always brought over more effectually and more easily 
 by conviction, than by being loaded with opprobrious 
 language. 
 
 An author of great judgment and temper, whose sen- 
 timents on the subject of accents partly agree with 
 • • those of Mr. Foster, was so sensible of the many 
 difficulties and objections to which this proposed 
 method of pronunciation was liable, that he almost 
 placed it amongst the aSvvara, and has ingenuously al- 
 lowed those that differ from him, either to print Greek 
 books without accents, or to print them with accents, 
 but to pay no regard to them. * '* Ut libere dicam quod 
 sentio, vel tonos prorsus sublatos esse velim tantisper 
 dum depravata ilia pronuntiatio tonorum pro temporibus 
 emendetur (quum praesertim veteres constet istos apices 
 in scribendo non usurpasse) vel null am eorum rationem 
 
 ... haberi." Here then is another man whom, if he 
 xiii 
 
 were alive, Mr. Foster might also have called upon 
 
 to slep forth and light with him for having unluckily, 
 though very honestly, said a thing which Mr. Foster dis- 
 approves of. 
 
 As I have not the honour of being a member of the 
 University of Oxford, and have not published any Greek 
 author without accents, I may, upon these accounts, be 
 thought more impartial ; and for this reason I have al- 
 lowed myself the liberty of saying something in vindica- 
 tion of that learned body, that the world may not be im- 
 posed upon by such an outcry, and think that the Univer- 
 sity of Oxford has licensed the printing of some very 
 
 * Sylloge Scriptor. Havercauip. P. that T. Beza was the author of this 
 I. p. 179. It appears by a note, p. 352, piece.
 
 PREFACE. 343 
 
 wicked books. But I desire the reader will judge _^_ 
 by the reasons which I have set forth. 
 
 The University of Oxford, and the editors under their 
 licence, undoubtedly had good reasons for what they 
 have done ; and they are free, if they please, though I 
 do not apprehend they will think themselves obliged, to 
 account for their conduct in this respect. Mr. Foster 
 also was free to offer his reasons to the public : but it 
 would have been more to his credit if he had kept within 
 the bounds of decency. No reader will think that he 
 has shewn any Attic urbanity in concluding his book 
 with so much acrimony; nor will he be induced to en- 
 tertain a favourable opinion of the Greek language, by 
 having before him an unlucky proof, that a know- 
 ledge of that and good manners do not always go 
 together. 
 
 There is another thing which it concerns the reader to 
 be informed of, but which I have not mentioned in the 
 Dissertation, that I might keep as strictly as possible to 
 the point I had in view. The thing is this : Mr. Foster 
 has all along produced Professor Cheke, and made him 
 appear as an advocate on his side. And yet I do not 
 find that that learned professor ever intended to intro- 
 duce such a method of pronunciation as Mr. Foster 
 suggests. He has not said so ; neither can such an in- 
 ference be justly made from any thing which he has said 
 on this subject. Indeed the dispute between Bishop 
 Gardiner and Professor Cheke, was of a quite differ- 
 ent nature : it had for its object the pronunciation XV1 
 of the Greek vowels, diphthongs, and consonants only. 
 The edict of the bishop, as chancellor, mentions only 
 vowels, diphthongs, and consonants ; but saith not one 
 word of accents. The pronunciation which Professor 
 Cheke practised and taught, is set forth by him in his 
 first letter to the bishop ; in which he mentions only 
 vowels, diphthongs, and consonants : and this exposi- 
 tion he there * saith is forma totius ret. This pronun- 
 
 * Syll. Script, de L. Gr. P. ii. p. 284.
 
 344 PREFACE. 
 
 ciation he had learned from his predecessor, Professor 
 Smith, who wrote three books in vindication of it, which 
 .. were addressed by him to Bishop Gardiner. And 
 in the second book he sets forth the several parti- 
 culars, in which their pronunciation consisted : and yet 
 in none of these is there any mention of the nature and 
 power of accents. Nay, what is more, * Mr. Foster 
 himself acknowledges, that accents had no share in this 
 dispute : so that I cannot see upon what good founda- 
 tion Mr. Foster could possibly produce Professor Cheke 
 for an advocate in his cause. Professor Cheke speaks 
 of his pronunciation of Greek accents in a transient, 
 general manner ; and without any explanation. And 
 as, in this case, both sides appeal to antiquity, those 
 ... that make all acuted syllables long, as well as those 
 that do not, it is impossible to form an argument 
 in favour of either side, from such general assertions 
 and appeals, unless particulars are set forth ; which 
 Professor Cheke has not, either professedly or occa- 
 sionally, done. But Mr. Foster thought that the name 
 and authority of Professor Cheke would give him credit. 
 Wishing, therefore, to have him appear an advocate on 
 his side, he has, by a too hasty inference, made him so ; 
 and, with a good degree of assurance, given this to his 
 readers for a f certain fact. But how precarious the draw- 
 ing of inferences in such a manner is, will plainly appear 
 by another case. Velastus J asserts, that the accen- 
 tual pronunciation of the Greek language, now used 
 in the offices of the Greek church, is the same that has 
 been used from all antiquity. Now, if Velastus had 
 gone no farther, Mr. Foster might, with equal justice, 
 have produced him for an advocate on his side : but he 
 would have been greatly mistaken. For Velastus ex- 
 plains himself, and saith, that they entirely neglected 
 quantity, pronounced all acuted syllables long, and made 
 short syllables that are naturally long. 
 
 * Introduction to Essay. t De Lilt. Greecar. Pronunt. Rom. 
 
 t Essay, p. 199. 1731.
 
 SECOND DISSERTATION 
 
 AGAINST PRONOUNCING THE 
 
 GREEK LANGUAGE 
 
 ACCORDING TO 
 
 ACCENTS. 
 
 Some years ago I published a Dissertation against 
 pronouncing the Greek Language according to Accents. 
 In the preface to which I declared, that by the Greek 
 language the reader was to understand the aucient Greek 
 language, and by accents, those which are commonly 
 used in writing and pronouncing that language. And - 
 at the * beginning of the Dissertation itself, I also 
 declared, that my design was not to write against all 
 use of accents (for some accents are, and must be, used 
 in all languages), but to shew, or endeavour to shew, 
 that the modern way of placing accents in the ancient 
 Greek language is wrong; because it is, — 1. Arbitrary 
 and uncertain. — 2. Contrary to analogy, reason, and 
 quantity. — And, 3. Contradictory to itself. 
 
 This has excited Mr. Foster to compose, and lately 
 to publish, an Essay on the different Nature of Accent 
 and Quantity. And I cannot but be glad that so inge- 
 
 * Page 281.
 
 346 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 nious a writer has taken this subject into his considera- 
 tion. For the end which we both have in view is, I 
 
 suppose, the same, viz. To discover and establish 
 the genuine pronunciation of a most excellent lan- 
 guage. But as there is great reason to apprehend that 
 so much success is not to be hoped for, yet still the re- 
 moving of a vicious pronunciation would be a good step 
 towards it. And this was the immediate design of my 
 Dissertation. 
 
 This disquisition, the reader will observe, consists of 
 two parts. The first relates to the place of accents; and 
 the second to the power of them. Mr. Foster has be- 
 stowed but few strictures on the many particulars which 
 
 1 had mentioned under the first part, and has insisted 
 chiefly upon the nature and power of accents, or rather 
 of the acute accent. And this indeed is the main point 
 
 4 to be considered in the present disquisition. For if 
 the nature and power of the acute accent be once 
 
 settled, there will be less reason to dispute concerning 
 the place of accents. 
 
 I shall therefore confine myself to this point. As to 
 the other part of this disquisition, I shall only beg leave 
 to lay before the reader a passage from Scaliger, which 
 will not only enable him to form a judgment upon the 
 subject in general, but by which he will also see that the 
 opinion concerning the impropriety of the Greek accents 
 is not an opinion, that was, among other whimsical ones, 
 started, as Mr. Foster * asserts, about ninety years ago, 
 by the younger Vossius. And I shall do this with no 
 
 5 small satisfaction to myself, as I find that some of 
 my thoughts on this subject fall in with those of 
 
 that great man, whose very excellent book, Be Camis 
 Ling. Latina, I had not read, when I published my first 
 Dissertation. The passage has some length; but the 
 goodness of it will make ample amends to the reader 
 for his trouble. 
 
 f " Quum Greeci tarn in ultima syllaba singularum se- 
 
 * Introduction. | De Causis L. L. c. 58.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 347 
 
 paratarumque vocum, quam in altera, ac tertia a fine 
 sede acutum imponere consuevissent; in consequentia, 
 sive contextu orationis, quos accentus in fine ponebant, 
 acutos omisere: proque eis graves substituere: idque 
 eo egere consilio, propterea quod acutus accentus vide- 
 tur tollere syllabam ita, ut sequens syllaba prematur : 
 in quatanquam fini suo quiescat vox. Quum igitur 
 nihil haberent, quod sequeretur, nihil quoque me- 
 tuere : at cum esset vox, quae subiret, cavere ne tan- 
 quam una fieret cum praecedente. Id quod etiam in 
 encliticis evenire videretur. Igitur acuunt roue, et wept, 
 et tov ; quas, cum contexuere, gravibus insigniunt, tovq 
 rrtpi tov aSeov. Nos vero hanc eandem animadvertentes 
 rationem, qua acutus accentus tollit vocem in syllabam, 
 quam acuit ita, ut sequens prematur, in fine vocis non 
 ponimus, ne expectemus aliam syllabam subeuntem, in 
 qua vox conquiescat : id quod Latini suis libris omnes 
 testati sunt, nullam apud nos supremam syllabam acui. 
 Acutus enim positus, aut exigit alias consequentes syl- 
 labas, aut non. Si exigit, igitur, non est ponendus 
 in fine vocum separatarum : si non exigit, ergo in 
 consequentia quoque poni potuit. Sed falsi Graeci sunt, 
 cum putarent gravem accentum nihil ad vocem perti- 
 nere, sed ad syllabas tantum, unde etiam syllabicum 
 vocavere. Iccirco adducti sunt ut crederent, turpe esse 
 edere dictionem, quae nullo accentu insigniretur : quasi 
 quum jura quoque absurdum consent hominem intesta- 
 tum mori. Id autem eveniebat, nisi acutum in fine sal- 
 tern reposuissent, cum dictio in syllabis praecedentibus 
 neque ilium haberet, neque circumflexum. Sed ea ratio, 
 aut perspicienda fuit etiam in consequentia, ubi gravem 
 collocassent; aut ne in primis quidem vocibus admit- 
 tenda. Apud nos igitur aut in penultima, aut in tertia a 
 fine sedem ei statuere. Occupare autem alias, initio 
 propiores, Graeci sibi licere noluerunt: quos etiam 
 prisci Latini secuti easdem posteris, imitatione potius, 
 quam consilio ducti, leges prasscripsere. Nam quamo- 
 brera non liceat mihi vocem tollere in quarta a fine, 
 nulla ratio musica potuit persuadere: possunt enhu
 
 348 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 eodem tenorc tam in voce, quam in tibia, aut fidibus de- 
 duci multae vel breves, vel longae. Quod si iccirco 
 noluere, quia duabus syllabis sequentibus imminere 
 acuta syllaba videatur, in quibus tractus vocis non ira- 
 moretur : quod tieret si essent plures ; videamus quam 
 non recte servarint haec. Est eadem ratio tam apud 
 Graecos, quam nobis, sed diversus modus. Nam utrique 
 negant ante tria finalia tempora singula, id est, ante 
 tres breves syllabas, acui posse syllabam. Quare 
 si duae postrema3 sint longae, quoniam solvi possunt in 
 quatuor breves, non potuit in prascedenti ulla syllaba 
 acutus collocari. Ratio haec una communis. At mo- 
 dus diversus sic. Graeci, si ultima longa sit, et penul- 
 tima brevis, ultimae longitudinem, ex qua fieri duae 
 breves possent, observarunt : at si penultima longa sit, 
 et ultima brevis, miserae hujus penultimae, tanquam ibi 
 nulla esset, nullam rationem habuere. Latini contra 
 ultimae longitudinem noncurarunt: penultimae jus suum 
 attributum retinuere. Ergo jam deprehendimus accen- 
 tuum horum cantillationem ridiculam, non natura, sed 
 usu quodam gesticulatorio constare. Videamus vero, 
 quod et supra tetigimus, quam ipsa sibi suis non 
 constet legibus. Principio Graeci diphthongos ali- 
 quot, quas producebant in pronunciando, quod attinebat 
 ad accentuum sedes, pro brevibus habuere, ut Tirvrrrai. 
 Praeterea Latini eadem ratione ultimas omnesneglexerc. 
 Postremo antepenultimas omnes Graeci longas, nullo 
 detracto tempore, acuto accentui postposuere. Quare 
 si una ex his vel in line, vel in proxima fini sede, solva- 
 tur in duo tempora, sane in quarto a fine tempore acu- 
 tus ille graeculus, quern ab ea sede exulare jubent, in- 
 venietur. Quare sapienter a posteris factum est, qui 
 praeterquam in quibusdam partibus orationis, ut in ex- 
 clamationibus, indignationibus, interrogationibus, nul- 
 lum hujus putidi servitii jugum ferre voluerint. Nam 
 si ante acutum in eadem voce plurimae syllabi 
 gravi pronunciantur, KaKo^ap/iaKtvTpig, quare post 
 ilium totidcm non possint ? Quod si respoudeanl, in- 
 clinari nequire tanlum numcrum : quare, ubi nulla est
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 349 
 
 quae inclinetur, hunc eundem ipsum statuere I ut in prae- 
 senti exemplo, nulla syllaba secuta." — Indeed both the 
 Greek and Latin grammarians have said many things on 
 the subject of accents that have no solidity : and it is 
 with good reason that Scaliger has passed a severe 
 though just judgment upon their doctrine in this parti- 
 cular : " Omnino haec omnia ad ostentationem literato- 
 riam sunt invecta." c. 04. 
 
 I shall now proceed to the point I proposed. And 
 the first thing I shall do will be to consider some pas- 
 sages out of Dionysius Halicarnassensis, which Mr. 
 Foster thinks I have greatly mistaken or misre- _ 
 presented. 
 
 I. The passage which ought to be considered in the 
 first place, is indeed of great weight in the present dis- 
 quisition. And * Mr. Foster seems very angry against 
 it, not only upon account of its appearing in the body 
 of my Dissertation, but also for its assurance in looking 
 him in the face even from the title-page. I shall set 
 the passage down, and then make some observations 
 upon it. 
 
 •f C H juh' yap Tre^i) Xi^tr ovSzvbg ovre vvofiarog ovre pv,}xa- 
 rog fiia&Tcu rovg xpovovr, ovct fxerariurtcnv' aXX o'lag irapu- 
 Arj^e nj tyixrei rag tn)W.apag, rag te fiaicpug not rag [3pa)^dag, 
 roiavrag <pv\arr£i. 
 
 1. Mr. Foster's first charge against me is, that I 
 have urged this passage as affording an invincible 
 and conclusive argument against the use of accents in 
 general among the old Greeks, p. 82. and as if Dionysius 
 objected against the use of accents in general pronuncia- 
 tion, p. 85. and did in this passage declare against all 
 accents, p. 86. But my short answer is, that this passage 
 was not produced by me for any such purposes, but as 
 an argument against such an use of accents as alters 
 and spoils the quantity. I have all along allowed the use 
 of accents. And in the very paragraph in which I have 
 produced this and another passage from Dionysius, I 
 
 * Essay, p. 8.>. t Dion. Hal. it. 2m/&. s. 11.
 
 050 'SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 *declared that I produced them to prove, that the accents 
 that were first used were agreeable to quantity, and 
 that they could not be considered but as they were 
 agreeable to quantity. 
 
 This declaration is very plain : and, so far as it goes, 
 is, I think, agreeable even to Mr. Foster's general sen- 
 timents. And I cannot but observe here, that Mr. 
 Foster, having in his thoughts what had been asserted 
 by some other authors, against whom he was writing at 
 the same time, has, not only in this place, but through- 
 out his Essay, ascribed to me consequences, which fol- 
 low, or seem to him to follow, from their assertions, but 
 which I am not at all concerned to vindicate. And as 
 to the present charge, I ought to make this farther obser- 
 vation — that it does not and cannot follow from any 
 thing that has been said by me or others upon this 
 subject. For we all allow the use of accents as 
 necessary : but what accents, and where they are to be 
 placed, are other points. 
 
 2. Mr. Foster's next charge against me concerning 
 this passage is, that I have mistaken the sense of it, by 
 not attending to the context. 
 
 Let us see whether this be really so. 
 The position with which Dionysius sets out is, that 
 musicians made words submit to their musical measures, 
 and not their musical measures to words. r H Se dpyaviKi) 
 re Kai toSiicrj fiovaa rag \££,ug rolg /xiXemv vttotcittuv a^iol, 
 kol ov ra jUt'Xrj raig \££,t<nv. To make good this position, 
 Dionysius produces part of a chorus in the Orestes of 
 Euripides. The composers who had set this chorus 
 to music, made, as he tells us, the two syllables of 
 mya and of Xcvkov, and the two last of apfivXrjg, sound 
 with the same tone or accent, and so spoiled the quan- 
 tity. Now it is not pretended that the quantity was 
 spoiled by making ai, \tv, and. Xrjc short. It must there- 
 fore have been done by making 7a, kov, and ftv long. 
 But this was the effect of the tone, which the musicians 
 
 * Dissert, p. 321.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 351 
 
 put upon these three syllables. For no other reason is 
 assigned for their making ya, kov, and |3u equal in time 
 to ai, \ev, and \ng, i. e. long, but the tone or accent which 
 was put upon them. At the same time that Diouysius 
 blames the Melici, he blames also the Rhythmici for their 
 doing the same thing. Then follows the above passage. 
 And the whole concludes with a repetition of the 
 doctrine contained in the position with which he 
 had set out ; but is expressed more fully and plainly, 
 in respect to both of them, and to the thing itself. f H St 
 pv9fi.iKrj Kai fiovaiKTJ fi£Ta(5o\Xoucnv avrag (scil. eniXXapag) 
 fxeiovcrai Kai av^ovaai, wars TroXXaKig t\g ravavria fizrayw- 
 quv. ov yap ralg avWafialg inrtvOvvovai roiig yjaovovg, aWa 
 roig xpovoig rag avWafidg. So that the general senti- 
 ment of Dionysius was, that the time or quantity was 
 not to be altered upon any account. 
 
 We do not know enough of the music of the ancients, 
 and of that particular composition which Dionysius 
 censures, to judge of the justness of his criticisms. 
 But yet this we must suppose, that the instance which 
 he produces, was understood by him to come up to his 
 point ; which was, that the Melici and Rhythmici did, 
 by their tones, alter the nature, the quantity, the 
 Xpovoi of syllables, and made some short syllables long, 
 and some long syllables short, contrary to what was con- 
 stantly done in the 7^77 Xi^tg, and 7roAm/coi Xoyot. I am 
 therefore led by this, by the position with which Diony- 
 sius sets out, and by the conclusion, to think that I have 
 given the true sense of the above passage. And I am 
 farther confirmed in this, because the passage under 
 consideration, taken in this sense, is entirely agreeable 
 to the general doctrine that runs through this treatise of 
 Dionysius. And that I am not singular in this will ap- 
 pear from Mr. Upton's note upon the passage itself : 
 " Insigne testimonium. Nihil sane apertius dici 
 potest contra receptam apud nos accentuum ratio- 
 nem, eorumque Usum. Est autem suus ex his etiam 
 (seu iis potius, quos Veteres adhibuerunt) accentibus 
 Sermoni Cantus, sed paucis opinor notus." This, in-
 
 352 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 deed, as I apprehend, is the sense in which this passage 
 has hitherto been always understood. And I do not see 
 what reason Mr. Foster could have for being so angry 
 at my taking this passage of Dionysius in this sense, as 
 it is produced for an argument only against that use of 
 the acute accent, which puts such a stress upon short 
 syllables as makes them sound long. The argument is 
 certainly good in this case, if Dionysius understood him- 
 self, when he was blaming the Melici and Rhythmici. 
 
 II. Another passage of Dionysius, with the mis- 
 taking or misrepresenting the sense of which I am 
 charged by * Mr. Foster, is in the same section, and as 
 follows : 
 
 Kcu ovk aWoTplcf K€"^pr]jiai rov TrpaypaTog ukovi. povffiici) yap 
 Tig i]v (cat j] twv ttoXitikiov Xoywv eTricm'ifii], ru 110— Hi Eia.XXa.TTOv- 
 aa rfjg kv uCalg Kal opydvoig, ovyl rw IlOIfh. Kcu yap kv ravrrj 
 Kal fieXog eypvaiv ai Xe'fcig, Kal pvSpvv, Kal p.ETafioXi)v, Kai irpeirov. 
 &(tte Kal €irl TavTijg i) (iKOi) repTnrai pev ro'ig /xeXecriv, ayerai Be rdlg 
 pv$f.io~ig, cMnruferai Be rag fierafooXag, iro^ei B' kirl ■ku.vtmv to or 
 keIov. y Be BiaXXayi) Kara to paXXov Kal ijttov. 
 
 Upon a review of what I had said, and a perusal of 
 what Mr. Foster has advanced on the contrary, I find 
 no reason to think I had mistaken the true sense of 
 Dionysius. 
 The points which Dionysius treats in this, and the 
 following sections, are those particulars, which make 
 compositions riSuai and icaXai. Now that, by these com- 
 positions, he means all compositions in verse as well as 
 prose, is evident ; for after he had mentioned the four 
 chief things, which, in his opinion, made compositions 
 ri^uai and KaXat, viz. fxiXog, pvO/iog, jueraj3oA?/, and to ttoL- 
 7rov, he says, wv fxiv ovv oroY/i^ovTai iravreg ol (nrovdy ypa- 
 (povrsg fiiTpov, r) fxiXog, rj rijv AeyojUtvrjv ir^i)v Xi^iv, ravr 
 Ecm. And then Dionysius sheweth.that we judge of the 
 exactness and perfection of these in the same manner 
 that we judge of every thing that is harmonious, i. e. by 
 a sense which nature has implanted in us. This he 
 illustrates by instancing in the performances of the 
 
 * Essay, p. "2, note.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 353 
 
 Melici and RhytJwici, of the wfiiXtia and zvpvd/iia of 
 which we judge, not by our own abilities in performing, 
 but by a natural sentiment: roi/ro /xtv £7rtor>/^>jc e<tt\v, rjg oh 
 
 rrdvTEg fXETeCki'ityantv' eke~lvo £e ttcLSovq, o ivugiv cnretiwKev ?/ ipvaig. 
 
 This illustration, the reader will observe, goes no farther 
 than the piXog and pvdpog. But afterwards Dionysius 
 takes in the p£Ta(3oX})v and the to irpiirov. And then his il- 
 lustration is carried on to dancing as well as music : 
 
 TEKpaipopai ce, on xal rijg opyariKfjg povoyg ical ri/e tv ucaig yorj- 
 niag, ko.1 rfjg iv 6p)(rj(T£i ^dpirog iv airaai ^lEvcrToi^ovtrtjg, pETtifioXag 
 £e pij 7roiT](7ajMeyi]g Evxaipovg, y rov Trpeirovrog anoTrXaprjS'Eiarjc, 
 ftapvg pev 6 Kopog, drjctg c)e to pi) rolg viroKEipivoig appoTTOv ecjxxvrj. 
 
 All this Dionysius applieth to the particular posi- 
 tion which he had in view, viz. that we judge of the 
 excellence of the ttoXltikoI X6yoi by the same principle 
 that we judge of the excellence of the other things he 
 had mentioned ; for the ttoXitikoI X6yoi differ from them 
 nOSill, in degree, but not IIOIQI, in quality. They 
 must have the same four qualities to make them excel- 
 lent, that are required to make music, and poetry set to 
 music, excel, though not in so high, or so perfect a de- 
 gree. And so it immediately follows : Kai yap e.v ruvrp 
 
 Kal piXog e-^ovaiv aiXefyig, icat fj^pbv, ko.1 pETa[3oXi)i>, kui irptTrov. 
 Sore kui etti ravTrjg ?/ ciKor/ f£pve?at pev rolg peXEcrir, ayerat t$e rolg 
 pvSpolg, daTrd^ETCLi ce rdg pErajwXdg, ttoSeT. 3' etti TrdvTOiv to oikeI- 
 ov. »/ Ce liaXXayrj /card to paXXov cat i\ttov. So that in the 
 
 passage now under consideration, by IlOSfll and 
 flOIQI, Dionysius must have meant the same thing, 
 that he expresses by paXXov and farm at the conclusion 
 of the paragraph. And indeed these expressions are so 
 much the same in sen^e, that some have thought that the 
 latter might, for this reason, be left out of the text. 
 
 All this receives a full confirmation from section 25, 
 in which Dionysius sheweth how prose compositions 
 may be made to resemble poetry, viz. by having poetical 
 ornaments, but yet not so many as poetry ; and even by 
 industriously concealing them : so that, without appear- 
 ing too much, they may yet be perceived and felt. 
 
 Dionysius hath, in other places, used the word I10212I 
 
 2a
 
 354 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 in the same sense in which I understand it here. So 
 9 sect. 17. ovk fyovreg ^ ibrtiv II02QI, but not being 
 able to say how much. And sect. 18. a\X opwg 
 aH,i6v iaTiv loeiv 1102121 dievijvo^v b Troirirfjg tov <ro(j>icrTov, 
 how much, or by how many degrees, the poet has ex- 
 celled the sophist. 
 
 What hath been here said will, I trust, not only justify 
 me from the charge of having mistaken the sense of this 
 passage of Dionysius, but also enable the reader to 
 judge of the sense that Mr. Foster has put upon it. He 
 understands Dionysius to mean, that * oratorical or 
 common discourse differs from music, not in the quality, 
 but number only of sounds ; i. e. that the former takes in 
 the compass only of four or five notes, but that music 
 takes in the compass of twelve, fourteen, or more. But 
 if Dionysius had meant this, after he had said r<J 
 IIOS12I ciaXXaTTOvcra tt\q Iv looatg kcu opyavoig, ou)(i 
 rcoIIOIGI, he would certainly have subjoined: for though 
 musicians make use of a greater number of notes, or 
 sounds, than are made use of in the ttoXitikoi \6yoi, yet 
 the four or five notes or sounds, which are made use of 
 in these, are of the same nature and quality with the like 
 number of notes or sounds used in music. Whereas Dio- 
 nysius forcibly leads us to a quite different sense, even 
 to that which is above set forth, by subjoining this ex- 
 planation, Kcu yap Iv ravrtj koi piXog i^ovaiv al \tE,ug, koi 
 pvOfibv, kcu jU£raj3oX?jr, teal TrptVov : which is as much as 
 if he had expressly said, the difference, I mean, consist- 
 eth in the IIOSQI of these things. I leave the reader 
 to judge of this, and shall only say, that to me the 
 sense which Mr. Foster has put upon this passage, 
 appears forced and unnatural. But far be it from 
 me to say, as Mr. Foster doth of some others in a like 
 instance, that f he has ignorantly misunderstood it, or 
 basely misrepresented it ; and much less that he has wil- 
 fully misconstructed it. 
 
 III. There is another passage of Dionysius, which I 
 
 * Essay, p. 2, note. t Introduction. Essay, p. 85.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 355 
 
 shall consider. Not that I have made any use of it, but 
 because * Mr. Foster lays great stress upon it ; and yet, 
 I apprehend, he has mistaken the sense of it. 
 
 "f'PvOpol te aWoTE aXXoi, kol ayj)para iravToia, /cat racnig 
 <ptovr\g at KaXovpEvai TrpocrcoSiai <$ia(popoi, KAEI1TOY- ^^ 
 SAI ry TroiKiXia tov Kopov. 
 
 I apprehend Mr. Foster has carried the meaning of 
 this passage much farther than Dionysius intended. 
 The true sense of it seems very obvious : Dionysius in 
 this section, sheweth how a composition is made beauti- 
 ful, harmonious, and excellent by the «£Ta/3oA?'j. Kai tern 
 Afstf Kpariarr] wa<riov,iiTtg civ £X ot ^Xticrrag avairavXaQ Kai «£- 
 ra/3oXac appoviag. Sameness, saith he, of the best things 
 always createth satiety; but when they are varied, they 
 by this variation appear new. Kopov yap e\u kcu to. koXci 
 TTavra, ItMJTrep kcu tcj ijota, ptvovra Iv rtj ravTor^TC TroticiXXopeva 
 
 <T Iv Tcitg ptTafioXcug cog citl kciivci pivu. Now besides several 
 other variations that ought to be made to prevent satiety, 
 Dionysius saith that various figures are to be used; 
 and that the pvOpot and TrpocrcoS'iai are to be varied, 
 i. e. that the same pvdpoi, or feet, and the same irpocn^iai, 
 or words having the same Trpoa^cia, must not be con- 
 stantly, or too frequently used ; but that different feet, 
 and words having different irpocri^dlai, must be intro- 
 duced, that satiety may be prevented by such a TrouciXla. 
 This is all that Dionysius saith, and it is very evident 
 that it cannot support that arbitrary, and preposterous 
 placing, and changing the places of accents, which the 
 present system prescribes. The iroiKiXut, which Diony- 
 sius meant, will produce beauty, harmony, and excel- 
 lence ; but the TroiKiXia of the present system of accents 
 cannot but produce a disagreeable satiety in another 
 way. 
 
 When Dionysius, sect. 25, saith, that a discourse ^ 
 is tupu^ocjwhich SiarrtTroiiciXTai ticti pv%p6iQ,he means 
 a discourse, in which words are used that have different 
 feet. And so, if he had been speaking there of the 
 
 Essay, p. 86. 171. t Dion. sact. 19. 
 
 2a2
 
 356 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 Trpoatocicu, and had said, that a discourse diaTtnroiKiXrai 
 Trpoaofi'iaig, he would have meant a discourse, in which 
 words are used that have different accents; and no 
 more. 
 
 This agreeth with what Dionysius prescribes, sect. 12. 
 that we must not put !£ijc, close together, 7roXX' b\tyoav\- 
 Aapa, jur'jre TroXvavWafia, /tirjS' bpoioTova, jurjS' bpoio\pova '. 
 and universally, that we must ti)v bpoioTtiTa SiaXvtiv; 
 and tov Kopov (f>v\aTT£<r%ai, by avoiding a sudden, or 
 „.. close repetition of the same words, parts of speech, 
 figures, &c. : the doing of which Dionysius there 
 calls wouciWeiv. 
 
 It appears very evident to me, that Dionysius under- 
 stood TroiKiXia and Kopog in this comprehensive sense. 
 The irouciXia in sect. 12. is said to arise from the ypapp.aTiov 
 fyvtrig, and the <ruXXaj3wv 77X0107 TravTodaTriog a\nt]paTiZ,opivy], 
 without any mention of the Trpoaw&iai. In sect. 13., after 
 Dionysius had mentioned the pi\og, pvSpog, jU£raj3oX/;, 
 and to irplirov, he adds : 'E£ airavriov cYj 0»jut tovtiov liriTri- 
 StveaSai Sav to koXov tv ttppoviq \££,£iog, 1%, tovirep koX to 
 7)Sv. Atria §e KavTavSa, 7] te tCov ypappanov tyvcrig, kol r\ 
 tCov avXXafi&v SvVapig, 1%, wv irXiicETai to. bvopara. Again 
 without any mention of the irpoacodiai. And in sect. 15. 
 qo Dionysius, after he had said that there was a great 
 difference between letters, both as to their power 
 and sound, adds, that the best writers always endeavour 
 to form a ttouoX'ui by a proper disposition of letters and 
 syllables, according to their powers and sounds. TavTa 
 crj icaTapaSovTtg ol \apuaTaToi 7rotr}rit>v te /cat trvyypatyiiov, to. 
 ply avTot te KaTaaKiva^ovaiv ovo/xara, avpirXiKOVTtg JVitt)- 
 <$tuog aXXi)Xoig to. ypdfj.pa.Ta' kcu Tag <ri»XXaj3ae Se oiKUiog, 
 o r tg civ j3ouXwvrat TrapaaTr\aai -rrdStai, iroiKiXtog cj>iXoTe A yov- 
 mv. Still without any mention of the TrpoaioSiai. And 
 the Kopog in sect. 11. is said to arise from the not adapt- 
 ing every thing in general to the subject. Bapvg ucv 6 
 xopog, arjdlg §£ to ptj vtroKtipivoig appoTTOv. 
 
 In the many passages which Dionysius produceth 
 
 ^ out of ancient authors, and which he blameth for 
 
 their stiffness, asperity, and want of harmony, he
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 357 
 
 never mentions this iroiKiXia irpom^iwv. And yet, if 
 by TTOLKikia irpotjtySiwv, he meant the system of accents 
 which we now have ; and if these take off, or lessen 
 that stiffness, asperity, and want of harmony, which 
 he censures, he would certainly, one would think, have 
 taken notice of them in these instances : and indeed he 
 ought, injustice to those authors, to have done it. For 
 we find the same TroiiaXia TrpoaySiojv, according to the 
 present system, in Hegesias that we do in Demosthenes ; 
 and the same in * Pindar's dithyrambic, that we do in 
 Homer. 
 
 Besides all this, there is, I apprehend, a fault in the 
 common reading of this passage. Instead of KAEII- « 4 
 .TOYSAI, I think we should read KAEITTOYSI, and 
 refer it to pvSpioi, axV ara an( * ™guq' for otherwise 
 there is no verb to answer to these three nominative 
 cases. With this reading, iroiKiXia will not be restrained 
 to raring, but will take in pvSpiol, axn^ctra, and rdaug. 
 And what seemeth to confirm this reading is, that, in a 
 few lines after, the word TroiKikia is twice used in this 
 comprehensive sense. Whereas, if Dionysius had in 
 the above passage referred iroiKiXia to rdaug only, one 
 would of course expect that in these two places he would 
 have said voiKiXia rdaewv. But, instead of this, he makes 
 the want of iroaaXla, for which he censureth the followers 
 of Isocrates, to consist in quite different things : irepl rag 
 p.zrapoXag, kcu rrjv TroiKiXiav, ov irdvv tvrvyjvuaiv' aXX' qr 
 tan Trap avrolg ug TrtpioSov icvuXog, 6p.oudi)g aytifxartov 
 rd^ig, o"i»jU7rXoK}j ^wi'ijtvrwv 17 avrr). And when he saith, 
 that no writers ever made use of irom\taig tvpowrlpatg, than. 
 Herodotus, Plato, and Demosthenes, the word evpowri- 
 paig cannot but. be thought a very improper epithet to 
 TToiKiXlaig rdatiov. 
 
 Though this passage, when duly considered, falls 
 greatly short of what Mr. Foster would have it say, yet 
 is it produced by him as parallel to a passage in Quinc- 
 tilian, which he f enlarges upon, with a design of making 
 
 *" Dion. sect. 22. t Eb*ay, p. 151, 5cc
 
 358 SECOND DISSSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 these two passages communicate light to each other. 
 But the passage in Quinctilian, when rightly considered, 
 o/» will be found to answer his purpose as little as that 
 of Dionysius. 
 
 " * Accentus quoque cum rigore quodam, turn simili- 
 tudine ipsa minus suaves habemus ; quia ultima syllaba 
 nee acuta unquam excitatur, nee flexa circumducitur, 
 sed in gravem, vel duas graves cadit semper. Itaque 
 tanto est seririo Graecus Latino jucundior, ut nostri 
 Poetae, quoties dulce carmen esse voluerunt, illorum id 
 nominibus exornent." 
 
 This passage hath considerable difficulties. It would 
 not be an easy matter to say what Quinctilian meant by 
 a similitudo of accents, if he had proceeded no farther. 
 But he hath explained himself by saying, that the Greeks 
 placed the acute and circumflex upon the last syllable, 
 ow which the Latins never did, and that upon this ac- 
 count the Latin accents were not so sweet as the 
 Greek. One cannot indeed refuse to Quinctilian the 
 privilege of being his own interpreter. But then, as the 
 Latins had the same number of accents with the Greeks, 
 it cannot easily be conceived how a difference, arising 
 from the mere placing of accents as to one syllable only, 
 could cause a difference in the sweetness of them ; and 
 such a difference too as would, in this respect, give a 
 considerable advantage and superiority to the Greek 
 language : unless it can be proved that the placing of 
 accents on final syllables is more harmonious than the 
 placing them on penultimates and antepenultimates. 
 oo But what is more material, — if this point be 
 accurately considered, no such difference between 
 the Latin and Greek accents will be found as Quincti- 
 lian suggests. For the circumflex containeth an acute 
 and a grave : therefore, when it is placed upon the last 
 syllable of a Greek word, and resolved into its constitu- 
 ent parts, the pronunciation of this word will end in a 
 grave. And though an accent be placed upon the last 
 
 * Instil. !. xii. c. 10.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 359 
 
 syllable of a Greek word, yet this is to take place only 
 when the word is pronounced separately. For in discourse 
 the final acute is always turned into, and pronounced as, 
 a grave. Where then is the real difference, in this re- 
 spect, between the Latin and Greek accentuation ? What 
 foundation does this afford to blame the Latin man- ^q 
 ner, as less harmonious and diversified than the 
 Greek ? 
 
 Quinctilian appears still more prejudiced in favour of 
 the Greeks, by what he says at the close of this pas- 
 sage. For what Latin poets have, in order to make their 
 compositions more harmonious, made use of Greek 
 words, merely because they were accented upon the last 
 syllable ? 
 
 This prejudice was not peculiar to Quinctilian : — the 
 Romans in general were fond of every thing that was 
 Grecian. And in this they were not always led by 
 reason, but were sometimes misled by admiration : as 
 Quinctilian himself acknowledged!. " Sed res tota magis 
 Graecos decet, nobis minus succedit; nee id fieri natura 
 puto, sed alienis favemus ; ideoque, cum Kvpravx^va .^ 
 mirati sumus, incurvicervicum vix a risu defendi- 
 mus." Lib. i. c. 5. May not therefore what Quinctilian 
 hath said, in commendation of the Greek final accent, 
 with justice be considered as an instance of that general 
 prepossession which the Romans entertained for the 
 Greek language, and which, he acknowledgeth, was not 
 always founded in nature and reason? 
 
 Quinctilian certainly was a man of great judgment ; 
 but yet he was not infallible. He hath mistaken the 
 sense of some authors whom he hath cpaoted : he hath 
 committed some errors in points of grammar ; and even 
 in his endeavours to make out, in other respects, the 
 superior sweetness of the Greek language above the 
 Latin ; as may be seen in our learned Gataker's 41 
 Diatrib. de N. Instrument! Stylo, c. 2. 
 
 In reality, therefore, there is nothing in this passage of 
 Quinctilian, or in that of Dionysius, that can make out
 
 360 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 the iroiKiXia, which Mr. Foster intended, or * supply him 
 with a full and satisfactory answer to some objections 
 brought against the modern accentual marks: for, notwith- 
 standing this pretended disparity, and consequent sweet- 
 ness, the pronunciation of all words in awtTrdq, or con- 
 struction, in the Greek language, whose last syllable is 
 marked with a circumflex, or an acute (when separate) 
 doth in reality end in a grave. And so the harmony is, 
 in both cases, the same. 
 
 - ' Having considered the above passages of Diony- 
 sius as far as seemed necessary, I shall now pro- 
 ceed to the main point, viz. the consideration of the 
 nature, power, and force of the acute accent. 
 
 That the elevation and depression of sounds are dis- 
 tinct from the continuance of them, is a point which 
 nobody will deny; but yet what may be expressed by 
 mere sounds, cannot equally be expressed in the pro- 
 nunciation of words and syllables. On this is founded 
 the difference between vocal utterance and singing. 
 When words are set to music, then they are sung, and 
 the modulation is strictly speaking, fxovmicn. But when 
 words are only uttered, then the modulation is only said 
 to be musical ; a modulation which bears some rela- 
 tion and resemblance to music, as all sounds do. 
 For this reason, speaking is called p.ovaiKr\ rig iTn<rri]fxi\, 
 Dionys. XoywEig tl fieXog, Aristoxen. quidam Cantus ob- 
 scurior, Cic. quasi quidam Cantus, Diomed. 1. ii. de Ac- 
 cent. There is as much difference between musical and 
 music, as there is between poetical and poetry. So that 
 when any term which is proper to music, is applied to 
 accentual pronunciation, it ought to be understood in a 
 qualified sense, i. e. with such allowances as the differ- 
 ence or 7ro(7or?]c between them requires. Otherwise there 
 will be no difference between speaking or pronouncing 
 and singing ; which is the very thing to be avoided. " Sit 
 auteminprimis lectio virilis non tanien in Canticuin 
 
 * Essay, p. 168.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 361 
 
 dissoluta, nee plasmate (ut nunc a plerisque fit) 
 effeminata. De quo genere optime C. Caesarem 
 praetextatuni adhuc accepinius dixisse : Si cemtas, male 
 cantos: Si legis, cantas." Quinct. Inst. lib. i. c. 8. 
 
 Those that have endeavoured to give an idea of the 
 Greek accents, by comparing them with the notes that 
 are used in music, have, so far as illustration goes, 
 done very well ; but if we carry this farther, and to a 
 degree of strictness, we shall do very ill : because 
 this will confound vocal utterance with singing. And 
 this affords another reason why, in the second passage 
 of Dionysius which has been considered, FIOSQI can- 
 not be taken in the sense in which Mr. Foster would 
 have it understood. For if nOSQI means, according 
 to * Mr. Foster, that oratorical or common discourse 
 differs from music only in the number of sounds, i. e. 
 that the former has only four or five notes, but that the 
 latter has many more, then the accentual pronunciation 
 of a Greek sentence will not differ from the singing of 
 the same sentence, when set to four or five correspond- 
 ing notes in music, i. e. it will, in both cases, be a song. 
 Whereas, on the contrary, so long as vocal utterance and 
 singing shall subsist, there will ever be an essential dif- 
 ference, a difference T£2I I10212I between them, though 
 the number of notes used in both cases be the same, 
 and within the same compass. And the same IIOSO- 
 THS would still subsist, whether the number of notes 
 used in singing were reduced to four or five, or the 
 number of sounds in vocal utterance were increased 
 to ten, twelve, or more ; because that, in all these 
 cases, the one would be singing, and the other vocal ut- 
 terance. This is penormed by the application of the 
 organs of speech according to the proper offices which 
 nature has assigned them ; but that is performed by the 
 modulation of sound according to the strict rules of 
 music, and without any articulation. 
 
 * Essay, p. l 2, note.
 
 362 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 The ear is the proper judge of quantity, and of the 
 power and force of accents. And according to Cicero 
 and Quinctilian, it is the best judge. " Aurium est admi- 
 rabile quoddam, artificiosumque Judicium, quo judica- 
 tur." Cic. de Nat. D. 1. ii. 58. " Quarum est Judicium 
 superbissimuin." Orat. S. 44. Quinctilian speaks of 
 
 the Aurium Mensura as the rule, by which verses 
 
 were made before the invention of feet. * " Poema 
 nemo dubitaverit imperito quodam initio fusum, et Au- 
 rium Mensura, et similiter decurrentium Spatiorum ob- 
 servatione esse generatum ; mox in eo repertos pedes." 
 And he allows the same judgment of the ear as to com- 
 positions in prose. " Quem in poemate locum habet 
 versificatio, eum in oratione compositio. Optime au- 
 tem de ilia judicant Aures, quae et plena sentiunt,et pa- 
 rum expleta desiderant." Tetcpi'ipiov /xerpov axon. el 
 
 Se to Kplvov IgtXv ctKorj, to Koapovv 1(tti <f>h)v{y wg jap TOV 
 VX ov r ^£ ivpvBfiiaq Iktuvovgci te kcu (rvariXXovaa <pwvi) a\i]- 
 fia.TiZ,u Tag avWafidg, ovrug tio-Se^a/xtvrj npivu i) aKOi). 
 Longinus. edit. Hudson. Praef. 
 
 Grammarians divide quantity into short and long; 
 
 but philosophers consider syllables more accurately, 
 and observe many degrees in each of the orders of short 
 and long syllables. To explain this, I must go back 
 to the very elements of quantity : and in doing this, I 
 shall follow, and enlarge upon the principles of Diony- 
 sius. This method will bring the present disquisition 
 into a narrower compass, give a clearer view of the 
 subject matter of it, and enable the reader to judge of 
 himself of several things, which Mr. Foster has ad- 
 vanced in different parts of his Essay, without my re- 
 ferring to them particularly; which would be tedious 
 and unpleasant both to the reader and myself. 
 
 The following paradigm exhibits to the eye a 
 
 progression of quantity, from the shortest to the 
 longest syllable : — 
 
 * Iustit. 1. ix. c. 4.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 363 
 
 
 i]/it<pu)va. 
 
 
 
 
 a^uvoi' xal ijjjLitywvov 
 
 V 
 
 o|£o£ 
 
 
 1]\\<XT0 
 
 po|()0£ 
 
 
 \r)\yu) 
 
 Tpo\Troc; 
 
 
 ir\r)\yr] 
 
 <TTpo\(f)0(; 
 
 
 ^7rX>/| vine 
 
 or'| 
 
 
 ^7rX?7»'| 
 
 Let us now make some observations. 
 
 I. The several consonants that are joined in the same 
 syllable with the vowels o and rj, are so many additions 
 that make themselves sensible to the ear. They are 
 called * Trp6aQx]Kai aKovoral, and aiaS'rjrcu'. And so 
 
 po is longer than o, rpo longer than po, orpo longer 
 than rpo, Xrj longer than ??,7rXri longer than Xj], S7rXrj longer 
 than 7rX?) ; and or is longer than arpo, 27rXrjv longer than 
 27rXr?, and 2<£r)£ longer than 27rX>jy. 
 
 II. A consonant joined with a vowel, but following it 
 in the same syllable, makes that vowel longer than any 
 number of consonants do that are placed before it. 
 The reason of this is, that the vowel being the most es- 
 sential part of the syllable, the voice always hastens to 
 seize it; and in order to do this, it slurs over all the conso- 
 nants that are placed before it ; so that the voice suffers 
 little or no delay. But the case of the consonant that 
 follows is not the same ; it cannot be slurred over, but 
 must be pronounced full and distinct : otherwise it 
 would run into, and be confounded with, the fol- 
 lowing syllable. By this mean the voice is delayed 
 more in the latter, than in the former part of the sylla- 
 ble ; and or is longc than arpo, and rjv longer than SttXtj. 
 For this reason, a short vowel can be followed but by 
 one consonant in the same syllable, though it may be 
 preceded by more. The Rhythmki allowed half a time 
 to a consonant, when it followed a vowel; olov r^v we, 
 01 ypapp.a.TiKoi \iyov<nv dvat <$vo \pov(t)v' ol it pvZpinol Svo, 
 
 * Dionys. sect. 15.
 
 304 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 i)fxt(re(i)g' Si'o fxiv tov w panpov, rifiiaewg Se ^oovov tov g. irav 
 yap (Ti)fji(t)(x)vov Xtytrai i\eiv i]juiavv \povov. Scliol. in He- 
 phcBst. p. 78. ed. 1553. 
 
 On this is founded an ingenious observation of Mr. 
 Dawes, concerning the /Eolic digamma, which, in its 
 power, answers to our W. " Haec utique inter 
 duas vocales intercedens in diversis pro arbitrio sylla- 
 bis enunciari poterit. Verbi utique Xuww priorem pro 
 lubitu constituere licebit vel \v vei Xuw: si a vocali 
 claudatur Xv-wa>, non poterit non corripi : sin a conso- 
 nante \vw-u>, earn simul ac pronunciaris, ea erit oris fi- 
 guratio, ut ante sequentem vocalem altera w (Xuw) ne- 
 cessario sit efferenda. Similis est ratio prosoediaca 
 verborum awop, Sawt^w, Stwa, oXoWoe, aliorumque haud 
 paucorum." Miscel. p. 165, 6. 
 
 III. Though these several differences are sensible to 
 an attentive ear, yet, as they are too nice for common 
 use, grammarians have made but one general division of 
 syllables into short and long. And when they say, 
 that a long syllable has twice the time of a short 
 syllable, this must be understood in a general sense, and 
 in relation principally to the vowels that are in them; 
 as they are long or short, either by nature or position. 
 As (o has twice the time of o, and rj twice the time of e; 
 and o and e, when they are followed by two mutes, are 
 reckoned equal to w and rj. But, in a strict sense, there 
 are several degrees of length in each of the orders of 
 short and long syllables, according to the several sensi- 
 ble additions that are made to vowels. This is evi- 
 dent from the above paradigm, and the first observation. 
 And hence it follows, that though w has twice the time of 
 o, yet it has not twice the time of arpo, because this has 
 the sensible additions of three consonants : nor has 
 utph) twice the time of arpo, because though w has 
 twice the time of o, yet arpw has not twice as many, but 
 only the same sensible additions that arpo has. 
 
 Upon these principles it was that the Rhythmici said that 
 the first syllable of a dactyl, though long, was shorter 
 than a perfect syllable ; but as they were not able to
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 3G5 
 
 say how much, they called it "AX070V. * 01 jxivroi pvO- 
 fiiKol tovtov tov Trodbg t»jv juatcpeiv (ipaj^ynpav dvai (j>ctGi rr)g 
 reXdag' ovk t^ovTt g §e tt7rav ttogm, koXovgiv avrr\v "AXoyov. 
 By a perfect syllable, I suppose, was meant a long syl- 
 lable, that had all the sensible additions which a long- 
 syllable could have. 
 
 IV. In general, every sensible addition that is made r ^ 
 to the latter part of a syllable must cause a more sen- 
 sible delay in the pronunciation of it, and make it propor- 
 tionably longer than any addition that is made in the 
 former part of it. And this seems to me to be the case 
 of the acute accent, for the pronunciation of a syllable 
 depends upon the body of the syllable sounded ; now 
 this body is made up, not only by the letters in the syl- 
 lable, but also by the stress that is added to it, or by the 
 delay that is caused by the acute accent: and every 
 such delay is a fipaSvrrig tiqtov xpovov. 
 
 The ancient Greek grammarians did not think that the 
 acute accent was a mere elevation of the voice : they -^ 
 ascribed to it a power of lengthening syllables, 
 and making short syllables long ; they did not say that 
 this accent was pronounced long or short, according to 
 the length or shortness of the syllables with which it 
 was joined, for then the accent would have been said to 
 be pronounced long, because the syllable with which it 
 was joined was long ; but, on the contrary, they said that 
 a short syllable became long because it was joined with 
 an acute accent; they must, therefore, have ascribed to 
 this accent a power of making short syllables long. 
 
 And it is observable that they never ascribed to the 
 grave accent any power as to quantity: and yet, if this 
 accent be the reverse of the acute (as grammarians re- 
 present it), it would, one would think, follow, that r ~ 
 a grave would have been presumed to have a power 
 of making a long syllable short, as the acute was thought 
 to have of making a short syllable long. But this has 
 never been suggested ; and I cannot assign any reason 
 
 * Dion. sect. 17.
 
 366 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 for this, but that it was thought there was a peculiar 
 power in the acute accent, which, by the stress it laid 
 upon a short syllable, did in all cases make it longer, 
 and in some cases long; for in all the ways of making a 
 long syllable short which grammarians mention, they 
 never say that this was done by virtue of the grave ac- 
 cent. 
 
 The Metrici did not allow themselves so great a lati- 
 tude in the time of syllables as the Rhythmici, and yet 
 ^g they gave a greater length to a short syllable, when 
 it had an acute, than it did to the same syllable 
 when it had not that accent. So the scholiast upon 
 xlephasstion. *'Joteov oti wapa. toIq fitrgiKOiq 17 o£urovou- 
 Htvit) (TvXXafii) jue'iZwv tern Trig fiapvvopivriQ, olov 1) \og <ruX- 
 \afirj, 77 iv tm ica\6g, fxiVL,iov iari Ttjg iv rw <j>i\og. jiveTai 
 yap fipaSvrriQ Tig tov yjpovov Sia Trig otieiag. 
 
 The same scholiast says there are several ways by 
 which a short syllable may be made long; and the se- 
 cond way which he mentions is by the acute, t Acute- 
 pog ot rpoirog tojv ti)v j3pa\iuav ug fiaicpav avafepovTiov, 6 
 $ia rTjg ot,uag. avTn ovv ■>) o^ela Ittiku/luvy) tiv\ tCov (5pa)(i(vv 
 i) fipayyvofilvuv ^>i\p6vwv, jujjkwh' wg Itti tov, 
 
 59 
 
 i TfZi; $' Vp'fynrav Wii iSovaioXov o<f>iv. 
 
 toot) 6 TeXevralog irovg Trvppiyioq fxlv virapyti' eireiSi) Si rrjv 
 6t,dav £%ei liTLKUfxivriv £7rt to o, avTi TpoTTi]g TrapuXriitTai, Trig 
 o^tiag prjicvvova^g to o, koi ovk aicaipiog' Soku yap 17 6%,ua 
 avaTHvoplvy Trj ts (jxovrj, nal avry rr} %£cru koI SiaTVTrwaei tov 
 "^apanrripog &WTr)g Tr)v fipayuav avaKaXuaBai tig iTtpavTa&v. 
 7) ovv ol^ua Toiavrriv i\u (pvmv ical Svvapiv, tog «?) povov lin- 
 KUfiivri liravk) jipa^dag, pn.Kvveiv avrfjv, dXXa icai 7rpoK£ifiivt], 
 koI ptTaicHpivr}, SvvacrSai tjj fipa^da -\povov yapiuaOai. 
 
 The reader will be pleased to observe here, that what 
 I call the stress of the acute, the scholiast calls Simg kcu 
 SiaTvirwaig tov ^apaKrrjpoc kavTijg. Now the Sicrug were 
 
 P. 78. f P. 77. t n./*', ver. 208.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. SG7 
 
 pauses, or stops, that caused a delay in pronouncing. 
 * " Lectioni posituras accedere, vel distinctiones ^q 
 oportet, quas Grasci Seaug vocant, quae inter legen- 
 dum dant copiam spiritual reficiendi, ne continuatione 
 deficiat." So that, according to this scholiast, the 
 acute caused a delay in pronouncing as well as the 
 stops. These posit urce are also called Oiaeig by fDo- 
 natus. 
 
 Eustathius delivers the same doctrine in his comment 
 upon the following^ verse of Homer : 
 
 XayaporriQ eotiv, wg tov AioXou avri paicpag lyovTog Tr\v 
 T7apa\{)yov<Tav. — ^epairda §e tov toiovtov peTpiKOV iraSovg 
 jxaXioTa fi o^eta, Svvaplvr) Iktuvuv, wg (i\\a\ov lppLvr\, ^t 
 ov povov (5pa^y (frwvutv to liriKtiTai, wg Iv tw aloXov 
 6(j>tv, aXXa icat to npb avrrjg, Kai to ptT avTr)v. — The place, 
 to which Eustathius refers, is, I suppose, Odyss. r. ver. 
 230. v. iii. fol. 1464, 5. And it ought to be observed, 
 that what Eustathius and the scholiast say concerning 
 the power of the acute may, for aught that appears to 
 the contrary, extend to remote antiquity : for they do 
 not mention this as a Lbing that was advanced only by 
 some, and denied by others, but as a general, received 
 principle ; and Eustathius's words, in the place last re- 
 fered to, are, ol tovoi, povaxTig ovreg airr] \rj pciTa, wg (j>a<riv 
 ol iraXaiol, t^ovcri touwttiv cvvapiv. 
 
 All that I produce these authorities for, is to shew the 
 sentiments of the ancient grammarians on this subject : 
 and if we admit the system of accents which we have p« 
 received from them, there seems to be the same rea- 
 son to admit what they teach concerning the power of the 
 acute accent. Whether other and better solutions can 
 be given of the cases which they mention, is a point 
 which I have at present nothing to do with. 
 
 * Diomed. l.ii. col. 432. t Odyss. K. ver. 60. edit. Rom. v 
 
 t Col. 1742. iii. fol. 1647.
 
 308 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 To prove that the ancient grammarians thought that 
 the acute accent gave a greater extent or quantity to syl- 
 lables, I had produced the following passage from Dio- 
 nysius Thrax.* Tovog Trpbg ov acofxev kcu tjjv ^xovrjv i.vpv- 
 TEpav Troiov/jiev. This hath been objected to by f Mr. Foster, 
 £o though he owns at the same time, that if Dionysius 
 
 had here said (jxoviiv /natcpoTtpav instead of tvpyrt- 
 pav, it might have been some confirmation of my assertion. 
 If so I am content to leave it to the reader (after he has 
 perused the above citations, and what I shall add here) 
 to judge whether Dionysius by evpvrepav did not mean the 
 same thing as if he had said juaicpoTtpav. I apprehend 
 that <j>wvi) here is the same as (pwvii eyjpapp.arog, Gaza, 
 Lascaris, Qwrj IvapQpog, JDionys. Halicar., tySoyyog 
 tvapBpog, lyy pafifxaTOQ, §Pollux ; and that it signifieth 
 not a mere sound, but the enunciation, or vocal utter- 
 ... ance, of a word or syllable ; when, therefore, it is 
 
 said that a tone or acute accent makes the enun- 
 ciation, or vocal utterance, of a word or syllable, zvpvTt- 
 pav, this cannot signify b^vrcpav, less fiapvrtpav, and 
 much less fipaxvrspav. What then can it signify but 
 fiaKpoTtpav ? — zvpvg in general signifieth extension every 
 way. But sometimes it signifieth extension only in 
 breadth, in contradistinction to height: 
 
 || Ti[A.@ov X' oh [j.d'ka. woXXov iyai wovlWflai avmya, 
 
 'AXX' I'STlEiXEtt T010V" EWElTct 5e JMtl TOV AyOLloi 
 
 EvfvV 6' l-^nXov t£ TiSw^EVai. 
 
 If I have committed any fault here, it must be in my un- 
 derstanding Dionysius Thrax in the same sense in which 
 the scholiast upon Hephaestion, and Eustathius would 
 
 * Dissert, p. 304. rnv yivio-iv In tovtuv 'Ka.jj.Bdm t&gciTov, 
 
 t Essay, p. 142, 143. xai tw haXua-tv eij -raura wojsirai tsXju- 
 
 £ 'Ap^ai //.h ovv £is-i ri?f av&paJTr/vtic -rai'av. it. 2vv9. sect. 14. and so Vox in 
 
 xal Eva'jflpou <pa>v>j?, al ^ojxeti ^e^ofxivat Quinctilian, Instit. 1. l. c. 5. and D»o- 
 
 Jiai'fEtnv, o; KaXoE^EV a-ra^iia. M.a.1 y^d/j,- med. 1. ii. col. 425. 
 
 /auto.' yga./j,/j,a.Ta (a.iv, o'ti yfa/j.f/.dti; ticj § Lib. ii. c. iv. s. 114. 
 
 trrifxalvfrat' erroi^iTa ii, on <araaa <f>fciv>t || II. V. ver. 245, &c.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 369 
 
 have understood him. Dionysius was giving a gram- 
 matical definition ; and, accordingly, I understood ^ 
 zvpvTtpav to mean the same thing here as paKporepav ; 
 and for the same reasons, and upon the same authori- 
 ties, I still understand it in the same sense, and think it 
 very expressive of the idea intended to be conveyed. 
 
 As to * Mr. Foster's saying, that eupurrje relates to a 
 measure of the voice, totally distinct from the height 
 and length of it, though joined with them both, and re- 
 ferring to his first chapter, and to Scaliger, for a full ex- 
 planation of this, I do not apprehend, that what is there 
 said by Mr. Foster can be applied to the present case. 
 For what Mr. Foster there advances, and would support 
 by the authority of Scaliger, is the emphasis : whereas, 
 by the afflatio vocis in latitudine, Scaliger means 
 the breathings in general, and not what is peculiarly 
 called the emphasis. For this regards but one particu- 
 lar syllable, or word, or part of a sentence, whereas the 
 afflatio vocis in latitudine of Scaliger regards every 
 syllable, and makes part of their body : and it is the 
 vocal utterance of this body which he f calls quantity. 
 Besides, the emphasis is not ranked by the grammarians 
 among the irpoa^iai, but by the rhetoricians among the 
 figures of speech. 
 
 To give a farther support to this tvpvrrig or emphasis, 
 Mr. Foster produces a passage from the 20th chapter of 
 Aristotle's Poetics ; where he is treating of the powers 
 and letters of speech ; and says, ravra St dia^ipet G^paoi 
 
 Ti. TOV OTO/JLaTOQ, KOI TOTTOIQ, KOLl Sa<TVTl)Tl, KOL XplAOT^Tl, 
 KClt p{]K£l, KCU fipClXVTYITl, £Tt <)£ KOI 6^,VTt)Tl, KOL /3apUTTJTt, 
 
 Kal rq fitaq. Aristotle mentioneth here several distinct 
 things, which together make up the body or quantity of 
 every syllable : but from none of these can the emphasis 
 possibly be made out. I suppose, Mr. Foster would 
 ground it upon the tWurrje and i//t\orrjc ; but, I am per- 
 suaded, every unprejudiced reader will understand these 
 to mean only the breathings, or aspirations. 
 
 * Essay, p. 143. t De Causis Ling. Lat. lib. ii. c. 52. 
 
 2b
 
 370 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 It will not be improper to consider and produce here 
 what the same scholiast upon Hephasstion saith con- 
 cerning the rough breathing; which, with him, is the 
 fourth way, by which a short syllable may be made 
 long. For in this, as well as in the case of the 
 acute, a like effect proceeded from a like cause, viz. 
 a sensible addition of time. 
 
 * Avrr} toLvvv h Eacrela, eiriKEifxevt), kal fitraKEi ixhr\, KttJ 7rpom- 
 /U£j/>/> ttjv (ipa^tiav elg fxaKpdp avayW €TnKtifiivr\ fikp, wg kirl tov, 
 
 + "Ewe o ravff wpfxaive Kara, (ppeva, icat Kara %fiuy, 
 
 ■7rpoK£(j>akov ydp ovrog tov arlypv, to fiev e h apyrj ov [XETpeirai' to 
 Se wg 6 avTt crTrovhlov irapaXafifidvETai, Tijg hvrepag crvWafiTjg to o 
 fiovov e\ov(rr]g, ko.1 /jli) E7ri(j)EpofiEV(i}v £vo ffv(J.(j><jJva)V a'W % (JaffEia 
 iiriKUfxivn e[xnKvv£v avTr/v r« irvEvf-iaTi, teal rrj dtaffTaasi twv (jhovtj- 
 tikuv opydixov, tCjv fiakXov <5ia.T£ivofj.EVh)v kv rjf trpo^op^. tov 
 TrXeiovog TrvEv/xaTog, 
 
 The scholia upon Hephaestion are ascribed by some 
 to Longinus. But they seem rather to be a collec- 
 tion from several authors. And from what is said 
 p. 93. 1. 8. concerning the daaua, it appears that the last 
 cited passage was taken from Heliodoras, who was 
 prior to Hephaestion. For Hephaestion mentions him 
 more than once. He is also said to have written a 
 learned treatise on the subject of metre before Hephaes- 
 tion by Longinus, in a fragment of his, that was pub- 
 lished from a MS. in the Vatican by Dr. Hudson in the 
 preface to his edition of Longinus. Whence it appears 
 that Heliodorus was a writer of weight and esteem. 
 
 It was therefore upon the general principle, that every 
 sensible addition gave some time and length to sylla- 
 - bles, that the acute accent was allowed to have this 
 peculiar power, by reason of the ^liaig tcai diarvTrw- 
 aig tov xapaKTijpoe laimjc, of the stress which it laid, and 
 of the consequent delay which it caused, in pronun- 
 ciation. In the times of the ot iraXaiol, of Heliodorus, 
 
 * P. 78. t II. A. ver. 193.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 371 
 
 of the scholiast upon Hephaestion, of Eustathius, &c. 
 we see that the acute accent was considered as having 
 the power, both of making short syllables long, and of 
 shortening the adjoining syllables. And it must have 
 been in pursuance of this doctrine, that some Latin 
 poets, from Plautus down to the ecclesiastical poets, 
 when they made use of Greek words, followed a quan- 
 tity, which was directed by the Greek accents, and not 
 by the nature of the syllables either in the Greek or 
 Latin. Joseph Scaliger in his Ausonianae * Lecti- 
 ones has collected a good number of these. I shall / 
 therefore produce him here in proof of the present ob- 
 servation. " In iisdem Graecis nominibus non quanti- 
 tatem, sed accentum spectabant. Quia, ut etiam notat 
 Servius in libello de accentibus, Latini eundem accen- 
 tum, quern Graeci habent, efferunt in Graecis nominibus. 
 Verbi gratia, quia Graecis vox haec a'SwXa habet accen- 
 tum in prima, Latini quoque eodem accentu extulere, 
 idola. Quae quidem vox semper est dactylus apud 
 Prudentium. Graecis dicitur Evpnri$t]g : eodem accentu 
 Latini semper extulerunt. Propterea penultimam pro- 
 ducit Sidonius, non quantitatem, sed accentum Latinum 
 (Graecum) secutus. Item Graeci pronuntiant "AparoQ, 
 nonien ejus, qui scripsit (paivofitva. Sidonius contra 
 veterum Latinorum morem, qui mediam semper pro- 
 duxerunt, corripit. Denique inspice totum Sidonium, 
 totum Prudentium, et alios : invenies semper eos non 
 syllabas Graecas, sed accentum Graecorum esse secutos. 
 Sic Ausonius in voce rpijiovog facit ; quia accentus non 
 est in media, quae longa est, propterea earn corripit. 
 Quis audebit dicere Ausonium ignoratione literarum 
 Graecarum hoc commisisse? Nemo sanus quidem, ut 
 puto. Sed iis temporibus stulte videbatur non ibi pro- 
 ducere syllabam, ubi accentus esset, quia is est mos 
 linguae Latinas. Adeo ut Plautus in hoc secutus sit ju- 
 dicium vulgi : quia non cum doctis, sed cum plebe sibi 
 
 * Lib. ii. c. 2t. 
 
 2 b 2
 
 372 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 rem esse videret. Nam semper apud ilium Pheedro- 
 mus est dactylus, quia Graece 3>aiSpa>/xoc. Item 
 quia QlXnnrog dicitur accentu in prima, eodem modo 
 mediam corripit. Et nunquam aliter invenies apud 
 Plautum, quia mediam in nomine Philippus corripuerit. 
 Quod mirum est in positione. Sed quaerenti causam 
 accentum semper praetexet." The reader will do me the 
 justice to observe, that I do not produce this to justify 
 such a practice, but to shew that the ancients did not 
 think that the acute Greek accent was a mere elevation 
 of the voice. Though I think it proves a great deal 
 more. For how can it be conceived that Latin writers 
 could lay such a stress upon acuted Greek syllables, as 
 made the short syllable, with which it was joined, long, 
 and the following long syllable short, unless the 
 Greeks of their times did so? But whether these 
 were faults in a language, that could support itself upon 
 its own natural quantity, is another thing. However, it 
 is not improbable that our strong acute accent took its 
 rise from that practice. And the use of it, with such a 
 power, was confirmed from the consideration of the 
 nature of modern languages, which, without such an 
 accent, are not capable of affording any tolerable har- 
 mony. 
 
 I take this to be generally true as to most, if not all, 
 modern languages. For when this acute accent is placed 
 indifferently on all syllables, whether they be naturally 
 short or long, and the short syllables are then pronounced 
 long, this can proceed from nothing, but the power 
 and force of the acute accent. But, without launch- 
 ing out into unnecessary discussions, I keep, in the 
 present argument, to the single point of our own acute 
 accent ; which is the accent we use in pronouncing the 
 Greek language. Though I cannot but observe here, 
 that Mr. Foster is mistaken when he says, that this prac- 
 tice is entirely our own, owing to the nature of our Eng- 
 lish pronunciation, p. 139. for foreigners do the same. 
 Voss. de Art. Gram. lib. ii. c. 10.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 373 
 
 This Mr. Foster calls an abuse. But when one speaks 
 of an abuse, this must refer to a standard, which is fixed 
 and allowed. For nothing can be reckoned wrong, but 
 what departs from what is allowed to be right. But 
 where is this standard ? has it ever been fixed ? 
 has Mr. Foster discovered it? One ought to think 
 he has. For he, all along, speaks upon a supposition, 
 that an acute accent may be sounded in such a manner, 
 as will not make the short syllable, upon which it is 
 laid, appear long to the ear. This then must be deemed 
 the standard accent : and in reference to this it is that 
 our accent, upon account of its carrying a greater stress, 
 is an abuse. I will not carry this so far as to say, that 
 Mr. Foster would have us alter our accent in the pro- 
 nunciation of our own language. But then I must say, 
 that he would have us pronounce our own language by 
 one accent, and the Greek language by another. If he 
 does not mean this he means nothing. And if he means 
 this he saith nothing against those, who are not for 
 pronouncing the Greek language according to ac- 
 cent. For all of them by this mean the present modern 
 acute accent, which carrieth such a stress, as makes the 
 syllable, upon which it is laid, sound long to the ear : 
 and it is by this sound that the ear judges of quantity. 
 
 To form a just notion of the true state of the debate 
 between us, who are against pronouncing the Greek 
 language according to accents, and those who are for it, 
 it will be necessary to consider in what we agree, and in 
 what we disagree : — Both sides allow the use of accents 
 in the pronunciation of the Greek language : both sides 
 allow that the elevation and depression of the voice are, 
 in their nature, distinct from the continuance of such »« 
 elevation and depression, i. e. from quantity : both 
 sides allow that each accent, considered of itself, is ca- 
 pable of two modifications in point of time, and may be 
 varied to the compass of four or five notes : and both sides 
 allow, that, in pronouncing the Greek language, accents 
 are not to interfere with and spoil quantity. But we differ 
 in this : that ivc assert, that so far as the argument from
 
 374 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 accent goes, our acute accent carrieth such a stress 
 with it, as makes every syllable over which it is placed 
 sound long to the ear, and so spoils the quantity. And 
 Mr. Foster asserts that the acute accent ought, when it 
 is placed over a short syllable, to carry with it but half 
 of the stress or time which it carries with it when it is 
 *.g placed over a long one, and that by this the quan- 
 tity would be preserved. Now upon this state of 
 the debate, which is the only true one, it is very obvious 
 to observe, that by the acute accent we mean that ac- 
 cent which we moderns use in pronouncing our own lan- 
 guage, and which doth in all cases sound the syllable 
 over which it is placed long, and that Mr. Foster means 
 an accent which is not in use with us. In relation, 
 therefore, to the accent which we mean, and which we 
 all use, I really cannot see that there is any difference 
 between us and Mr. Foster, if he abides by the princi- 
 ples which he hath laid down, and the concessions 
 q« which he hath made. For he # alloweth that the ac- 
 cent which we use does make all syllables sound 
 long to the ear, and f that if the voice is retarded in 
 some syllables, by what cause soever that delay be occa- 
 sioned, there is truly and formally long quantity. But 
 this is the very thing we contend for ; and from which we 
 strongly conclude, that therefore the Greek language 
 ought not to be pronounced according to accents, mean- 
 ing our acute accent. As for those accents which Mr. 
 Foster mentions, and which are to be lengthened or 
 shortened, we have nothing to do with them in the pre- 
 sent debate ; they are quite another thing ; whatever 
 gj becomes of them, our position is proved upon this 
 principle, which we both admit, viz. that our acute 
 accent maketh all syllables long, and that this spoils the 
 Greek quantity. 
 
 * I allow the fact, Essay, p. 139. — quantity in English versification as the 
 
 and p. 25. he confirmeth this by aquo- same. To which maybe added Dr. 
 
 tation from Mr. Johnson, who, in his Ward's First Essay upon the English 
 
 prosody, prefixed to his dictionary, Language, p. 30. 
 considers the acute tone and long t Essay, p. 16.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 375 
 
 Mr. Foster, in his Introduction, sets out with an ap- 
 pearance of accuracy in giving four or five senses in which 
 the word accent is sometimes used, and this he doth with 
 a very good design, viz. to guard against ambiguity: but 
 the reader, I believe, will not think that in the body of 
 his book he has so carefully guarded against ambiguity 
 as he had professed to do ; for ambiguity and confusion 
 do not arise from hence, that a word bears different 
 senses, but from urging against one sense of a word ar- 
 guments drawn from another sense of it: let the g^ 
 reader therefore judge whether Mr. Foster hath not 
 done this. Our arguments are drawn from the nature, 
 power, and effect of accents, taken in one sense ; and 
 against this Mr. Foster produceth arguments drawn from 
 the nature, power, and effect of accents taken in another 
 sense. 
 
 To give the reader a thorough insight into this affair, 
 it will be proper to consider the accent whjch Mr. Foster 
 recommendeth, and would substitute in the place of 
 ours. 
 
 The accent of Mr. Foster is to be high, quick to the 
 sense, sharp, instantaneous, and* even when it is joined 
 with a long syllable, though the duration of the sound be 
 long, the power and effect of the acute is short and q« 
 quick to the sense, occasioned by a high note succeed- 
 ing a low one, or rising above the grave tone of voice ; 
 the perception ofivhich transition is sudden and instan- 
 taneous, before the continuance of the note is determined 
 one way or the other for long or short ; and this Mr. 
 Foster saith he clearly perceives, and more clearly than 
 he can perhaps express ; but men of common under- 
 standings will not, 1 am apt to think, clearly perceive 
 what an accent this is, and much less will they be able 
 to make any use of it in speaking. 
 
 To make out the former part of his description of the 
 acute accent, Mr. Foster hath subjoined a long note to 
 
 * Essay, p. 144, a, 6.
 
 376 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 q. shew that b%vq, in its consequential, figurative sense, 
 signifieth sometimes quick and hasty: but he might 
 have spared himself the trouble of proving what nobody 
 doth or will deny. It will also be readily allowed, that 
 bl,vg, in its peculiar, musical sense, is used for a high tone 
 without any consideration of length, but then we must 
 remember, what I mentioned before, that vocal ut- 
 terance is not singing ; and because words, borrowed 
 from music, are used to express the tones of the voice 
 in speaking, we are not therefore to conclude that they 
 are to be taken in their original strict sense when 
 they are used in this way; for every thing that is musical 
 is not music, as every thing that is poetical is not 
 poetry. 
 
 When Mr. Foster saith, that thougk the duration of the 
 sound of the accent, when joined with a long syllable, be 
 q~ long, the power and effect of it is short, to me, and I 
 am apt to think, to every reader, this is the same as 
 if he had said, that though the sound of it be long, yet the 
 sound of it is short : for I take it that the sound of the 
 accent is the same with the power and effect of it ; or, 
 however, that they are inseparable. A vowel that is 
 followed by two half vowels, as in contemnit, the in- 
 stance produced by Mr. Foster, is not, indeed, in strict- 
 ness, so long as if it were followed by two mute conso- 
 nants ; but still, if it be in the order of long syllables, the 
 acute accent that is over it, or joined with it, cannot 
 have both a long and a short sound, but must necessa- 
 rily be sounded long throughout the whole body of the 
 syllable. 
 
 op What makes Mr. Foster's description of his ac- 
 cent the less intelligible is, that he * alloweth it to 
 have one measure of time ; for upon this one cannot 
 avoid asking, how an accent, that hath one measure of 
 time, can, on the one hand, be quick, short, and instanta- 
 neous 1 and, on the other hand, how the duration of the 
 
 * Essaj, p. 174.
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 377 
 
 sound of it can be long ? For it should seem that, in 
 the former case, it would not have one time ; and, in 
 the latter, that it would have two times. And besides all 
 this — if this acute, of one measure of time, be placed 
 over a long syllable, as it will then reach and operate 
 over but one half, and the first half of it, what is to be- 
 come of the remaining half? Is it to have no accent? g~ 
 Yes, it must certainly have some accent, but this 
 cannot be another acute ; it must then be a grave, but 
 an acute and grave on along syllable are a circumflex. 
 
 If in any other instance 1 have mistaken the meaning 
 of Mr. Foster, I ought to produce some excuse of my 
 own. But in the present case I do not apprehend there 
 is any need of my doing this ; for I cannot but think 
 that my inability to comprehend his meaning, if I do not 
 comprehend it, is sufficiently excused by his confession 
 of his inability to express it. 
 
 I have confessed, and do again confess, that there are 
 many difficulties on both sides of this subject, more o fi 
 than I am able to remove, even to my own satisfac- 
 tion : but I think it much better ingenuously to acknow- 
 ledge this, than, with a profession of removing difficulties, 
 to suggestwhat I cannot clearly express. I restrain myself 
 therefore to the main points which I have all along had 
 in view, viz. that the ear is the proper judge of sounds ; 
 that the acute accent, which we use, makes all sylla- 
 bles with which it is joined sound long to the ear; and, 
 therefore, that the Greek language ought not to be pro- 
 nounced according to it; because by this every short 
 syllable that has an acute accent will sound long. 
 
 Those that have read Mr. Foster's Essay must, with- 
 out my pointing to particular places, have ob- o q 
 served that he has dropped several unhandsome ex- 
 pressions, and entertaineth a contemptuous opinion of 
 the understandings and hearts of those from whom he 
 differs on this subject. Such practices are indeed very 
 common in the world, even among those who really are 
 scholars : Mr. Cheke, whose learning Mr. Foster justly 
 commends, was guilty of this, and Bishop Gardiner
 
 378 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST 
 
 smartly reproached him for his having applied the in- 
 decent word debacchari to him ; notwithstanding he de- 
 clared, in almost the same breath, that in all his expres- 
 sions towards the bishop he would keep within the 
 bounds of the strictest modesty, and avoid every thing 
 
 90 that might give offence. * "Tuorum verborum obli- 
 tus, interim debacchari, verbum parum honoriflcum, 
 
 mihi adscribis : interim, sed paulo post, ita ais : Ego 
 vero me intra modesties, fines continebo, neque unquam ita 
 loquar ut dominationi turn verbo displicuisse videar. Non 
 satis Graece hoc : cavisset enim Grascus suum menda- 
 cium oblivione prodere, ne tanquam sorex suo indicio 
 periret." But because such practices are common, they 
 are not therefore less blameable : the gentleman ought 
 always to get the better of the mere scholar; if he does 
 not, he hurts himself more than his adversaries : and in 
 the present case, the reader will not fail to pass this 
 
 91 just judgment upon Mr. Foster— that of all men 
 he had most reason to avoid such a conduct, as f 
 
 he hath professed, that, till lately, he was himself in the 
 same way of thinking with those from whom he now 
 differs, and then, no doubt, he entertained as good an 
 opinion of his own understanding and heart as it is to 
 be supposed he now doth. 
 
 Mr. Foster^ maketh excuses for his having concerned 
 himself in this subject, but he needed not to have done 
 this, as his inclination leads him to, and his profession 
 engages him in, the study of the learned languages, in 
 which every degree of accuracy deserveth commendation. 
 For my part, instead of making excuses for writing on a 
 subject of this nature, I might, with a good grace 
 now, and with a much better hereafter, make excuses 
 for my want of leisure. The subject is not trivial or trifling. 
 § Men of learning and judgment know how to set a pro- 
 
 * 
 
 Syll. Script, de L. G. P. vol. ii. myself let the reader peruse the f6llow- 
 
 P- 448. ing passage of QuiDctilian : " Quo mi- 
 
 t Introduction. nus suntferendi, qui hauc artem, ut te- 
 
 + Ihid. nuem acjejunam, cavillantur, quae nisi 
 
 $ In justification of Mr. Foster and oratori futuro fundamenta fideliter je-
 
 GREEK ACCENTS. 379 
 
 per value upon grammatical disquisitions, because they 
 know the important effects of them ; they are the found- 
 ation of all good compositions. The author of Hermes 
 has acquired great reputation by that performance ; qn 
 nor will I (though I should, upon a due considera- 
 tion of the main point in debate, be still thought really 
 to differ from Mr. Foster) refuse to give him his due 
 praise. By his performance on the present subject he 
 has shewn himself to be a man of genius and learning ; 
 and if he has written with the same disposition that I 
 write, there is, at least there ought to be, no difference 
 between us but what appears upon paper. 
 
 The main point which I had in view, was to shew Q A 
 that the ancient Greek language cannot be pro- 
 nounced according to accents, i. e. according to that 
 acute accent which we use, without spoiling the quan- 
 tity ; and I have pursued it in such a manner, as, I trust, 
 will enable the reader to judge for himself of what hath 
 been, or may be, said on this subject. 
 
 To pursue it any farther would be to descend to mere 
 altercation, a method by no means conducive to the dis- 
 covery of truth, or to the information of the reader. 
 
 I have before me this judicious observation of Quinc- 
 tilian :* " Non obstant has discipline per illas eun- q * 
 tibus, sed circa illas hasrentibus." Of which I shall 
 now make a prudent use by putting an end to this Disser- 
 tation, and taking my leave of the subject. 
 
 cent, quidquidsuperslruxeris corruet ; tibus apparebit multa rerum subtilitas, 
 
 necessaria pueris, jncunda senibus, quae non modo acuere ingenia puerilia, 
 
 dulcis secretorum comes, et quae vel sed exercere altissimam quoque erudi- 
 
 solaomni studiorum genere plis habet tionemac scientiampossit." lib. i.e. 4. 
 
 operis quani ostentationis. Ne quis And we learn from Macrobius, that Ct- 
 
 jgitur tamquam parva fastidiat gram- cero himself, after he had pleaded in 
 
 matices elementa ; non quia magna? sit the forum, frequeutly went to the 
 
 operae consonantes a vocalibus discer- school of Antonius Gnipho. Saturn. 1. 
 
 nere, ipsasque eas in semivocalium iii. c. 12. 
 munerum, mutarumque partiri ; sed * Instit. 1. i. c. 7. 
 
 quia interiora velut sacri hujus adeun-
 
 INDEX 
 
 TO THE 
 
 ESSAY, &c. 
 
 A. 
 
 Accent, on what founded, p. 3. ety- 
 mology of the word how misapplied, 
 ib. accent how closely connected with 
 quantity, 5. 7. how necessary, 6. af- 
 fects the harmony of verse, ST. 151. 
 159. seq. accent of the Romans, 41, 
 42. seq. the rules of it, 43. marks of 
 Roman accent misapplied in inscrip- 
 tions, 60, seq. 211, 212. accent of the 
 Greeks, 79, seq. its use and importance, 
 86 — 88. Greek accent added a grace to 
 the Roman verse, 151. Greek accent 
 different from the Roman, 152, seq. 
 
 170. irregularity of the Greek accent, 
 
 171, seq. variation of it at different 
 times, 176, seq. and of the Roman, 177. 
 its reference in Greek and Latin to the 
 quantity of following syllables, 179. 
 
 Acute, how it affects the sense, 9. 
 coincidence of it with the long quanti- 
 ty in English, 25. it does not lengthen, 
 as well as elevate, 140, seq. the nature 
 of it, 144, seq. proved to be consistent 
 with a short time, 181. the final Greek 
 acute defended, 186. 
 
 JEoVic dialect, peculiarity of its 
 tones, 44, seq. like the Doric, 49. infu- 
 sion of it in the Roman language, 50, 
 seq. its softness and want of aspiration, 
 51, 52. 
 
 Alphabets, ancient as well as modern, 
 defective and redundant, 22. 
 
 Alexander Aphrodisiensis, his defi- 
 nition of npar»Ji'*, 3. 98. 
 
 Analogy not always to be expected 
 in a language, 168, seq. 
 
 Ammonius, on xd-rayixa., 17. on the 
 accent of several words, 109. 
 
 'Anifxi aYiTi;, when applied to the 
 voice, their sense, 5. 
 
 Aristoxenus, his remark on accent, 
 5,7. 
 
 Aristophanes of Byzantium, intro- 
 ducer of accentual marks, 101. vindi- 
 cation of his character, 103, seq. au- 
 thor of the marks of punctuation, 
 104. 
 
 Apollonius Alex. Dyscolus, followed 
 byPriscianand Lascaris, 4. his remark 
 on the jEolic tones, 46. on the want of 
 aspiration among the iEolians, 51. on 
 the MoVic digamma, used by Alcaeus, 
 Sappho, Alcman, 64. how he denomi- 
 nates the acute tone, 82. on the accent 
 of compound adjectives, 86. on the ac- 
 cent of prououus, 186. 188. 
 
 Aristotle, his distinction of accent, 
 quantity, and spirit, 11. on the neces- 
 sity of regarding accent, where metre 
 is concerned, 38. on o£u and B*£v, 81. 
 on the rhythm of prose, 87. some pas- 
 sages of his relating to accent, 97 — 99. 
 his account of the acute, 147. 
 
 Aldus, his observation on the differ- 
 ent dialects of the Italian language, 
 40.
 
 382 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Ancients, the nicety of their ear, 88. 
 
 Anapaestic measure, peculiarity of 
 it, 167. 
 
 Apex, the Roman mark of quantity ; 
 difference between that and accentual 
 marks, 60. seq. 
 
 "Aja-t? and ©E«-if, 81. accentual and 
 metrical, different, ibid. 82. 162. seq. 
 
 Aspiration, what it is, 10. in many 
 Greek syllables formerly, where it now 
 has no mark, 39. final, in the Roman, 
 Syrian, and Egyptian languages, ibid, 
 why in some Roman words of Greek 
 derivation, and not in others, 52. seq. 
 
 Attics, who are the old, and later, 
 
 178. 
 
 Augment, in verbs, the rejection of 
 it iEolic as well as Ionic, and from 
 thence Roman, 56, 57. 
 
 Atonies, the doctrine of them vindi- 
 cated, 173, seq. 
 
 Athenasus, his remark on the Mo- 
 lism of the Roman tones, 58. on the 
 eccent of certain words, 109. 186, 
 187. 
 
 B. 
 
 B, Roman and Greek letter, its affi- 
 nity with V, 70, 71. 
 
 Bentley (Dr.) his remark on the 
 minor Ionic measure, 32. his applica- 
 tion of the digamma, 72, 73. his ex- 
 planation of a passage in Horace con- 
 firmed by a Greek epigram found since 
 his time, 73. his remarks on the Latin 
 accent, 155, seq. whether his account of 
 the metrical arsis in Roman poets is 
 right, 164, seq. 
 
 BXo^, expressive of the dropping of 
 water, 19. 
 
 Bowyer (Mr.) his opinion of r be- 
 ing applied for the digamma, 75. 
 
 C. 
 
 Callistratus, after Simonides settled 
 the present Greek alphabet, 21. 
 
 Callimachus, bis scholiast, on two 
 initial consonants, 23. 
 
 Csesura, of the Greeks and Romans, 
 36, seq. The same not required in 
 English verse, 37. 
 
 Caninius, his remarks conformable 
 to those of antiquity, 47. 
 
 Capella, (Martianus) his names of 
 accents, 81. on the gravity and acute- 
 ness of sound, 84, 183. 
 
 Charisius, on the quantity of us Jjssi's, 
 19. 
 
 Castorion Solensis, particular mea- 
 sure of his poem, 37. 
 
 Cassiodorus, on the JEo\. digamma 
 in Latin, 65, 
 
 Calabria, remains of the Greek lan- 
 guage there in the time of Petrarch, 
 120. 
 
 Charax, his remark on the accent of 
 some words, 110. 
 
 Cheke, (Sir John) on ascertaining 
 the pronunciation of letters from the 
 sonnds of beasts, 19. on the method of 
 considering ancient pronunciation in 
 general, 40. says, that accent and quan- 
 tity were both observed by his friends 
 in pronouncing Greek, 199, 200. holds 
 the Greek accents inviolate, 203. 
 
 Charlemagne, answered Greek am- 
 bassadors in their own language, 
 137. 
 
 Chrysoloras, (Emanuel) at London 
 on an embassy in the reign of Richard 
 the Second, 122. 
 
 Choriambic foot, in English metre, 
 el. 
 
 Ceporinus, (Jacob) on the metrical 
 power of initial Latin and Greek con- 
 sonants, 24. 
 
 Cicero, his remark on accent, 6, 7. 
 his division of sounds, 7. on the quan- 
 tity of inclytus, 18. the want of aspi- 
 ration among the old Latins, 53. his 
 writings depreciated by some of the 
 Greeks, and why, 123, seq. his charac- 
 ter ill-treated at first by the Romans, 
 124. his remarks on the Greek nation, 
 124, 125. his description of the acute 
 sound, 148. 
 
 Comnena (Anna, the Byzantine 
 princess), style of her history, 133. 
 
 Consonants, the power of two initial 
 ones among the Greeks and Romans, 
 23, seq. vowels short before two or 
 three in Greek, 24, 25. They do not 
 necessarily retard the voice, 25. 
 Corinthas,on vowels long by nature.
 
 INDEX. 
 
 383 
 
 and position, 1 9. on the jEolians having 
 no dual number, 45. 
 
 Cratinus, his account of the power 
 of the long E, 19. 
 
 Cretic measure in our language, 35. 
 
 D. 
 
 Draco, Stratoniceus, on dissyllable 
 barytone verbs, 17. 
 
 Dual number, none in the iEolic or 
 Roman language, 45. 
 
 Dactyl foot, the use of it in English 
 metre, 29. Dactylic measure excluded 
 from our language, 34. 
 
 Dawes (Mr.) on two initial conso- 
 nants, and initial ? , 23. his application 
 of the digamma to Homer's metre, 54. 
 his mistake concerning the arsis, 166. 
 Despauterius, on confounding ac- 
 cent with quantity, 62. 
 
 &iaa-rr)[jt.st defined, from the musical 
 writers, 182, 183, seq. 
 
 Digamma (.<Eolic) the power and ap- 
 plication of it, 50, seq. in Homer's me- 
 tre, 54, 55. an account of it in the old 
 Greek and Roman languages, 64, seq. 
 the sure application of it, 74. Mis- 
 takes about it in Hesychius, ibid. 
 
 Dionysius Thrax, a sentence of his 
 on accent misapplied by Dr. G. 142. 
 
 Dionysius jEIius, on the Greeks re- 
 gulating their accent by the ultimate, 
 
 179. 
 
 Dio Cassius, his spleen against Ci- 
 cero, 123. 
 
 Diomedes, his remark on accent, 
 6. 119. a passage in his works cor- 
 rected, 143. 
 
 Dionysius (Halicarn.) on the Greek 
 origin of the Romans, 49. on the iEolism 
 of their language, 51. expresses theiEo- 
 lic digamma by the Attic ou, 68. on the 
 accent of the old Greeks, 80. a passage 
 of his concerning the contrariety of ac- 
 cents to quantity, stated and explained, 
 81 — 87. on the noMKia of t'ne Greek 
 accents, 171. how music differs from 
 common discourse, 182, seq. observed 
 the accent of the Romans, 173. 
 
 Donatus, on the quantity of esset, 
 essemus, 18. 
 
 D'orville (Mr.) on the short iEolic 
 or Boeotic eu, 50. on the marks of 
 Greek and Latin accentuation, 60. on 
 the accent of the old Greeks, 79. on 
 the present accentual marks, 205. 
 
 Enclitic, the Roman, p. 155. vindi- 
 cation of the Greek, 174, seq. our Eng- 
 lish enclitic shewn, 175. 
 
 English language, the quantity of 
 it, 15, seq. acute accent and long 
 quantity of it generally coincident, 25. 
 yet both of them distinct and discerni- 
 ble, 25. the kinds of metre in it, 29. 
 seq. the iambic hath a variety superior 
 to that in ancient verse, 20. why no 
 hexameters in English : the iambic 
 and trochaic tendency of it, 33, 34. 
 different dialects of it, 39. the tones 
 of it more varied than the Roman, 
 154. the want of varied inflections 
 in it, ibid. 
 
 'Ei&irziw, and Itsriraa-iq, when ap- 
 plied to the voice, their sense, 5. 
 
 Euripides, the accenting of a pas- 
 sage in his Electra from Dionysius ex- 
 plained, 83, seq. 
 
 Eustathius, his remark on particular 
 words expressive of certain sounds, 
 19. on the iEolic accent, 46. his ac- 
 count of the first Greek settlements in 
 Italy, 48. 
 
 F, the Roman letter, not corres- 
 ponding with the Greek <[>, 66. account 
 of it by Terentianus Maurus, Mart. 
 Capella, Quinctilian, 67. 
 
 Feet, metrical, in our common dis- 
 course and prose compositions, 6. 
 
 Fuimus, the first syllable of it long 
 in Ennius, 54. 
 
 Fundanius, the pronunciation of that 
 word by a Greek laughed at by Cice- 
 ro, 51. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gaudentius, his clear account of ac- 
 cent and quantity, 14. 
 
 Garcillasso, de la Vega, on the Peru- 
 vian accent, 159.
 
 384 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 r, the mistaken application of it in- 
 stead of digamma, 74, 75. in Homer's 
 rivro Fevto, &c. 
 
 Gellius, (Aulus) his remarks on the 
 quantity of particular long syllables, 
 18. on the summits tonus of Nigi- 
 dius, 81. 
 
 Grammarians, Latin ones after Quinc- 
 tilian, on the subject of accent, 58. 
 
 Grammarians, Greek, who wrote on 
 accent, a list of them, 93. 96. 
 
 Greeks, modern grammarians, their 
 observations agreeable to those of an- 
 tiquity, 4. a short vindication of the 
 learned Greek exiles, 120, seq. they 
 duly distinguish between accent and 
 quantity, 121. 
 
 Greek (ancient language) introduc- 
 tion of it into Italy, 48, seq. The ex- 
 tent of it, 126, seq. its ascendancy over 
 the Roman, 127, seq. though publicly 
 discouraged, 128. appearance of it in 
 the British language, 129. why used 
 by the first publishers of the gospel, 
 130. duration of it shewn, ibid. seq. 
 alterations in it, 131. it borrowed seve- 
 ral words from the Latin, 132. tolera- 
 ble purity of it in verv late writers, 
 ibid, why it subsisted long after the 
 Roman, 133. whether Alexander's 
 Asiatic expedition could affect it, 
 135. seq. 
 
 Greeks, accurate iu the use of their 
 pronouns, 175. 
 
 Greece (modern) the liturgies of 
 St. Basil and Chrysostom used in the 
 churches there, 120. 
 
 Graevius (Job. Georg.) copies of 
 the errors of Is. Vossius, 161. 
 
 G. (Dr.) mistakes a passage in 
 Dionys. Halic. 2. his error concern- 
 ing the inconsistency of accent and 
 quantity, 7. concerning the quantity of 
 the northern languages, 15. his strange 
 supposition concerning the jEolic ac- 
 cent, 47. his mistaken notion concern- 
 ing the nature of the acute, 139, seq. 
 concerning the accents of words end- 
 ing oiKoj, 160. his arguments drawn 
 from the irregularity of Greek accents 
 answered, 168, seq. his mistake about 
 atonies and enclitics, 173, seq. about 
 the later Attics, 178. about the falling 
 
 times in the accentual thesis of Gr 
 and Lat. 187. 190. 
 
 Grave sound, how it affects the 
 sense, 9. 
 
 H. 
 
 Hannibal wrote in Greek, 126. 
 
 Herodian, son of Apollonius, his 
 iTfoo-aSia, 4. on the want of aspiration 
 among the jEolians, 51. his account of 
 Homer's rivro, 75. how he denomi- 
 nates the acute tone, 81. on the accent 
 of participles of praeterit pass. 171. on 
 the accent of qatrl, 186. 
 
 Hare (Bp.) on the nature of the 
 acute, 148. 
 
 Hermogenes, on the accent of 8»/txo- 
 aia. determining the sense of it, 98. 
 
 Herodius, his distich on petty gram- 
 marians, 46. 
 
 Henninius, his error concerning the 
 quantity of modem languages, 28. 
 concerning the Greek accent, 159, seq. 
 
 Hemsterhuis, the propriety of his 
 censure on Lucian concerning Hanni- 
 bal's ignorance of Greek, 126. 
 
 Homer's language ^Eolic in many 
 respects, 55, seq. objections to par- 
 ticular passages of his answered by 
 the help of accent, 99. seq. his miurus 
 verse, 141. 
 
 Ho-op, the Greek call on shipboard, 
 19. 
 
 Huetius, on the old marks of punc- 
 tuation, 104. 
 
 Iambic feet, common in discourse, 
 34. 
 
 "iSov the second aorist, for eFj&ov, 75. 
 
 Juba, a Greek writer, 127. 
 
 Johuson (Mr. Samuel) his remark 
 on the English acute, 25. 
 
 Ionic (minor) foot, in English me- 
 tre, 31. among the Greeks and Ro- 
 mans, 32. 
 
 Irish, an account of their pronun- 
 ciation, 39. 
 
 Irregularity of language in general 
 considered, 168, seq. 
 
 Italian language, the accent of it, 
 15.5.
 
 INDEX. 
 
 -385 
 
 Lasearis, his definition of ITgoa-wSia, 
 3. his remarks agreeable to the rules 
 of antiquity, 4. 
 
 Lasearis (John, or Jauus), his epi- 
 taph on himself, 117. 
 
 Languages, the northern ones have 
 quantity as well as the Greek and Ro- 
 man, 14, seq. we must not in all cases 
 argue from one to another, 189. 
 
 Latins (ancient) want of aspiration 
 in their language, and why, 52, seq. 
 abbreviations among them, as among 
 the old Greeks, 56. 
 
 Lipsius, recommends the use of the 
 Roman apex, 44. on the want of aspi- 
 ration among the old Latins, 52. on the 
 abbreviations among the old Latins and 
 Greeks, 56. on the accentual marks mis- 
 applied in some Latin inscriptions, 61. 
 his emendation of a line of Afsanius and 
 Pacuvius, 71. on the nature o£ the 
 acute, 147. 
 
 Leo X. his regard for literature, 
 118. his Greek academy, ibid. 
 AoyasiSJjf poetry, what it was, 112. 
 Longinus, on long and short times, 
 23. 
 
 Lucillius, on the long and short Ro- 
 man I. 20. 
 
 Lyric Greek poems, many destroyed 
 in the later ages, on account of their 
 impurity, 138. 
 
 M. 
 
 Marks, of accent and quantity, an- 
 cient like the modern, 3, 4. the mis- 
 application of them in modern edi- 
 tions of Latin authors, 44. 
 
 Marks of accent not nsed nor want- 
 ed by the ancient Greeks, 99, seq. 
 why more wanted, when u^ed, than 
 marks of quantity, 101, seq. when, 
 and by whom introduced, 102, seq. 
 proof of their appearance in very old 
 copies, before Christ, 108, seq. their 
 misapplication, 113. their present po- 
 sition conformable to the accounts of 
 the old tones, 176, seq. their use in 
 the case of homonymous words consi- 
 dered, 180, seq. their three places in 
 Greek, different from the Latin, de- 
 
 fended, 185. 190. The present marks 
 not to be suppressed, 198, seq. may be 
 properly applied by an English voice, 
 199. 
 
 Macrobius, on the different accent 
 of the Greek infinitives, 59. on acute 
 sounds, 148. 
 
 Metre, founded in quantity alone, 
 36. Roman and Greek metre alike, 
 but modulation difl'erent, 158. 
 
 Michaelis, his remark on expressing 
 the Greek accent distinct from quan- 
 tity, 200. 
 
 Melancthon,his remark on the Greek 
 and Latin marks of accent, 60. on 
 confounding accent with quantity, 62. 
 Mceris Atticista, on the second a 
 of ayogi^a, 17. on the accent of cer- 
 tain words, 109. 
 
 Markland (Mr.) his opinion of the 
 Greek accents, 206. 
 
 Monlfaucon, on the time when ac- 
 centual marks were most used, 111. 
 
 Monks, of the dark ages, their lite- 
 rary merit, 136, seq. 
 
 Morhoff, his brief account of the 
 learned Greek exiles, 121. 
 
 Muretus, a piece of criticism of his 
 considered, 192. 
 
 Music, how it differs from discourse, 
 2. 182. 
 
 Musical composers, how they per- 
 verted right accent and quantity in set- 
 ting words to music, according to Dio- 
 nysius, 82, seq. 
 
 Musurus (Marcus of Crete), his fa- 
 mous elegy, 118. his care of several 
 Greek editions, 116. Dedication of 
 Aldus to him, ibid. 
 
 N. 
 
 Natural, what properly called so in 
 speech, 28. 
 
 Nigidius, on the accent of Valeri, 
 81. 
 
 Norris (Cardinal) confounds the Ro- 
 man apex with the accentual mark, 61. 
 
 C. 
 
 '0%vTn;, account of it from Aristoxe- 
 nus, 5. .the senses of o£v(, 144, seq.
 
 386 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Olympiodorus, Lis remark on the 
 solemnity of the Roman tones, 153. 
 
 Oratorical accent different from sylla- 
 bic, 12, 13. 
 
 Orthography, old Roman, of vow- 
 els, 20. 
 
 Otho II. Emperor, owed his escape 
 from the enemy to his knowledge of 
 Greek, 137. 
 
 Ov diphthong short among the .iEo- 
 lians, 50. in Homer, ibid. 
 
 Xlfoa-te&la, its old Greek definition 
 given imperfectly, 3. 
 
 Palatium derived, according to Eus- 
 tathius and Dionys. Hal. from Ua.XKa.M- 
 tiov, named after Pallas the son of 
 Evander, 48, 49. 
 
 Perizonius, on the accent of the an- 
 cients, 41. 
 
 Petrarch learnt Greek from a Cala- 
 briau monk, 120. 
 
 Philelphus, his remark on the jEo- 
 lism of Homer, 56. on the state of the 
 Greek language before the taking of 
 Constantinople, 116. 
 
 Philodemus, his epigram to which 
 Horace alludes, 73. 
 
 Pierson (John), his remark on the 
 variation of accent and spirit in the 
 old Greek, and in his own language, 40. 
 
 Pilatus (Leontius), Gr. master of 
 Boccace, 120. 
 
 Plato, on the accent of certain words, 
 80. his remarks on the nice attention of 
 the Greeks to their language, 89. 
 
 Pliny, on the introduction of the 
 Greek language into Italy, 49. 
 
 Plutarch, his distinction between ac- 
 cent and quantity, 8. A passage of 
 his concerning the accent of ' ' Ao-xX-nia- 
 og, 90, seq. of 'Eefxov, 92. on the nature 
 of acute sounds, 147. 
 
 Perrault injudiciously ridicules a pas- 
 sage in Homer, 155. 
 
 Oocvij iiaa-rrj/xartKn, and irun^fi;, their 
 difference, 184, seq. 
 
 Pope (Mr.) his mistake, in ridiculing 
 Dr. Bentley, 72. 
 
 Porphyry, a MS. sentence of his on 
 accent misapplied by Dr. G., 1 12. 
 
 Priscian, his account of accent, quan- 
 tity, and spirit, 10. His remark on the 
 final aspiration of the Syrian and Egyp- 
 tian languages, 39. on the iEolism of 
 the Roman language, 50, seq. on the 
 digamma in the perfect tenses, 54. on 
 arsis and thesis, 82. on the Roman and 
 Greek pronouns, 175. 
 
 Pronunciation, of all languages, how 
 established, 26, seq. 
 
 Prose, the rhythm of it, 86—88. 
 
 Psellus (Michael), his versus jwli- 
 tici, 113. 
 
 Qdoyyot;, the meaning of it, 9. 
 
 Quantity, on what founded, 4. how 
 necessary, 6. the different degrees of 
 long and longer, short and shorter 
 times, 17, seq. the authority of quan- 
 tity, on what founded, 26, seq. alone, 
 not a sufficient foundation of much har- 
 mony, 28. ancient quantity not ob- 
 served by the enemies of accents, 191, 
 $eq. 
 
 Quinctilian, on the want of aspira- 
 tion among the old Latins, 52. ou the 
 tone-pipe of Gracchus, 182. on the 
 Roman and Greek accent, 151. 
 
 R. 
 
 Rhodiginus, Ca;l. his account of the 
 formation and duration of sounds, 9. 
 
 Rhythm more complex, than metre, 
 36. may be bad, where metre is good, 
 ibid, but not in English, 37. the reason 
 of this, 38. 
 
 'Pv9fA.6s, poetical, Scaliger's account 
 of it, ibid, its enlarged sense, 205. 
 
 Roman language, derived from the 
 iEolic, 44, seq. whether it has a dual 
 number, 45. Romans unwilling to ac- 
 knowledge the Greek origin of their 
 language, 57. did not use accentual 
 marks, 59. the sameness and uniformity 
 of the Roman accent, 151. its difference 
 from the Greek, 152, seq. the supposed 
 majesty of it, 153. 
 
 Rules, relating to language, follow- 
 ing it, not directing it, 26. 
 
 Rutgersius gives a ridiculous de- 
 scription of some strolling Greeks, 120.
 
 INDEX. 
 
 387 
 
 s. • 
 
 S, Roman consonant, sometimes sub- 
 stituted for the Greek aspirate, 54. 
 
 Scaliger (Jul.) his division of the 
 modes of sound, 10. on the long penul- 
 timates of genitives of pronouns, 21. 
 on the name of grave and acute, 41. on 
 the sound of the digamma, 69. on the 
 arsis and thesis, 81. on the Roman ac- 
 cent, 156. on the arbitrary form of lan- 
 guage, 169. remarks on his manner of 
 considering the old tones, 189. 
 
 Salmasius, his remark on monosylla- 
 bles, 56. on the affinity between the 
 Roman B and consonant V, 71. his ac- 
 count of the acute tone, 148. 
 
 Sarpedonius follows the errors of 
 Is. Vossius, 160. 
 
 Sense, of hearing as well as seeing, 
 corrected by judgment, 194. 
 
 Scioppius Gasp, his remark on mo- 
 dern pronunciation, 195. 
 
 Scots, in their pronunciation sepa- 
 rate the acute tone from the long time, 
 25. an account of their pronunciation, 
 38. 
 
 Scholiast, on Hephsestion, his re- 
 mark on the different degrees of long 
 quantity, 17. his mistake concerning 
 the power of the acute, 141. 
 
 Schol. on Euripides, concerning the 
 old Greek orthography, 21. 
 
 Schol. on Theocrit. concerning the 
 iEolic accent, 46. 
 
 Schol. on Homer, concerning the 
 accent of ay-a^ry, 109. 
 
 Sextus Empiricus, on the number of 
 Greek voweis, 21. 
 
 Seneca, the difference of the Greek 
 and Roman language characterized by 
 him, 153. 
 
 Sergius, his description of the di- 
 gamma, 38. 
 
 Servius, on the Greek settlements in 
 Italy, 49. on the digamma in the per- 
 fect tenses, 54. on words with the Greek 
 accent in Latin verse, 151. on the ac- 
 cent of some penultimates in Latin, 
 187. 
 
 IiyaXoei; in Homer well explained 
 by Dr. Taylor, 71. 
 
 Sounds, on the division of them into 
 high and low, accent is founded, 3. on 
 their different length, quantity, 4. 
 
 Sophocles, two passages in his QZdip. 
 Col. corrected, 77. 
 
 Smith (Mr. Thomas), on the restora- 
 tion of anoient pronunciation, 196. 
 
 Spirit, aspiration, and emphasis, dis- 
 tinguished from accent and quantity, 9. 
 seq. 
 
 Stephens (Hen.) his account of gra- 
 vity and acuteness of sound, 5. on the 
 Greek marks of accent, 180. 
 
 Stephanus (de Urbibus) on the Mo- 
 lic accent, 46. 
 
 Taylor (Dr.) on the different pow- 
 ers of vowels, 20. on the (ntyy.a.X of 
 Herodian's Catholic prosody, from the 
 Anthologia, 95. on the accentuated 
 Herculaneum inscription, 210, seq. 
 
 Terentianus (Maurus) on an initial 
 S joined with another consonant, 23. 
 on the minor Ionic measure in Horace, 
 32. on the digamma, 51. 68. on the 
 miurus verse in Gr. and Lat. 141. on 
 the accent of ZuKgarw, 144. on the 
 metrical arsis and thesis, 163. 
 
 TeiW, the prosodical sense of it and 
 its derivatives, 80, 81. 
 
 To'ttoj, the meaning of the word when 
 applied to the voice, 14. 
 
 Triclinius (Demetrius) his observa- 
 tion on the marks of accent, 110. 
 
 Trochee foot, the use and force of 
 it in English verse, 30. 
 
 Trypho, on the accent of certain 
 words, 108. 
 
 Tzetzes, his remark on the aspira- 
 tion of the Attics, 39. 
 
 Tzetzes (John), his versus Politici 
 and their metre, 112, seq. his know- 
 ledge of true quantity, 114. 
 
 Tyrannio, his treatise on the Roman 
 language, with what view written, 58. 
 
 U. 
 
 V, the Roman letter, the use and 
 power of it, 65, acq, like the Greek ov, 
 
 Ivn^lisli 00 and w, French mi, li'*.
 
 388 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Ulpian, his remark on the artful 
 mistake of Demos, in pronouncing the 
 word /jug-duTo;, 91. 
 
 Vanderhardt (Herman), his treatise, 
 and opinion concerning the Greek ac- 
 centual marks, 13. 
 
 Varro, on the quantity of the first 
 syllable in pluit, luit, 54. unwilling to 
 accept a Greek etymology, 57. on the 
 want of analogy in language, 170. 
 Verses found often in prose, 86. 
 Verwey adopts the errors of Is. 
 Vossius, 161. 
 
 Victorinus, on the quantity of in 
 compounded, 18. 
 
 Victorinus (Marius) on the subdi- 
 vision of times, 22. on the metrical 
 arsis and thesis, 163. 
 
 Victorius (Peter) on the traces of 
 Greek in the Tuscan language, 48. on 
 the particular sense of 8oo< in Homer 
 146. 
 
 Virgil, his propriety in translating 
 Homer's Sa S ua-reya.^v, 5. his prejudice 
 in favour of the Latin origination of 
 bis own language, 57. a conjectural 
 
 emendation of a passage in Mn. v. 76. 
 his sense of uda vox, 185. 
 
 Vossius (Isaac) what ages of Gre- 
 cism he allows to be pure, 46. his hy- 
 pothesis concerning the Greek accents 
 erroneous, 149, seq. 
 
 Vossius (Gerard) on the misapplica- 
 tion of accentual marks in some Latin 
 inscriptions, 61. 
 
 Vowels, doubtful ones, their nature 
 and different powers, 20, seq. Roman 
 long ones formerly expressed by two 
 characters, ibid, long, though coming 
 immediately before other vowels, 24. 
 short before more than one or two con- 
 sonants, ibid. 28. a greater number 
 of them make a language more harmo- 
 nious, 28. 
 
 Vulgar pronunciation, in what the 
 corruption of it chiefly consists, 47. 
 
 W. 
 
 Welch, an account of their pronun- 
 ciation, 39. 
 
 Women, Greek and Roman, retain 
 best the purity of their language, 116. 
 
 fir 3- 
 
 Printed by J. F. DOVE, St. John's Square.
 
 ^udnvso^ ^aim&v r ^Aavaan-# ^Aavaan-# 
 
 ^t-UBRARYQc 
 
 ^UIBRAHYfl/v 
 3 
 
 ^tONIVtKi/A 
 
 ^lOSANGElfj^ 
 
 C5 ^"N— k r 
 
 ^AINflJV^ 
 
 %ojnvjjo^ wtiommti^ ^mwww 
 
 ^.OFCAUFO^ ^OFCAUFOfyv ^WEUNIVERS/^. ^lOSANCflfj^ 
 
 3 Uj 
 
 
 ^Jiwsm^ ^/maim^ 
 
 .^ 
 
 AMMNIVER% 
 
 <TOHVSQV^ 
 .^MEONIVERS/A 
 
 ^clOSANCElfj^ 
 %HAINA-Jtf£* 
 
 ^lOSANGflfr^, 
 
 
 -^•LIBRARY*?/; 
 
 3 
 
 <$UIBRARY<V 
 
 ^.OFCALIFOfy* 
 
 
 ^OFCAltFOfyv 
 
 ^t-UBRARYQc 
 
 
 ^OKAUFOfcfe 
 
 % 
 
 
 ^lUBRARYj!?/, 
 5 
 
 ^OKAllFOfy^ 
 
 ^\WNJNIVER% 
 
 <rjl»S0V^ 
 
 *\tf-UNIVER% 
 
 
 ^lOSMElfjv 
 
 
 ^lOSAHGElfj^ 
 
 o ^ ^^ 
 
 53 
 
 ^/SHAINfUV^ 
 
 $ 
 
 no 
 
 9 
 
 *V\BN!VER% AfclOSANGEl&> «$UIBRARY#. ^lUBRARYtf/ 
 
 fve^t &/~>r->t iiif^ Siir'-
 
 
 { 
 
 3 
 
 ff 
 
 r# %toam$ 
 
 
 1 c £ 
 ( 1 ? 
 
 is i 
 
 
 
 iH| r H V MMfny„?.'.,?,^' ,orn ' a ' L °s Angeles 
 
 ^AHYHaiHfc'l 
 
 i in em itl 
 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 A A 000154 228 
 
 W ^QmWiW '%®m*S& %HAIM3\^ 
 
 8 
 
 IFOff^ 
 
 ^Aavaan-^ 
 
 S. Q — f ft w 
 
 % ^10*ANCEI% 
 
 n^ *QmM$& 
 
 ^E-UBRARY^ 
 
 
 S3 
 
 ^OF-CALIFOfy* 
 
 2: 
 
 ^Aavaani^ 
 
 ^HIBRAIMK 
 
 y ^A«vaan# 
 
 S «NIVER% 
 
 ^ONAUFO^ s 5JrtEUNIVER5/4 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ ^FCAIIFOR^ 
 
 f 
 
 # ^Aavnan-.# 
 
 v \WEUNlVER% 
 
 . MAI UNIVERS/A 
 
 ^mmm^ 
 
 i 
 
 ^clOSANCnfJ^ 
 
 CO, 
 
 ^bainm^ 
 
 %a3AIN(l-3^ 
 
 ^■UBRARYOf. 
 
 s 
 
 ^OJITVDJO^ 
 
 ^. ^10SANCEI% ^0FCAUF(% 
 
 #AHyaan-# 
 
 
 ^EUBRARYQc. <$UIBRARY0/. 
 
 'AS *& 
 
 ^VVEUNIVER^ 
 
 
 J